[opensuse-translation-commit] r94239 - branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po

Author: keichwa Date: 2015-11-03 13:56:58 +0100 (Tue, 03 Nov 2015) New Revision: 94239 Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/add-on-creator.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/audit-laf.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/auth-client.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/autoinst.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/base.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/bootloader.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/ca-management.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/cio.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/country.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/crowbar.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/docker.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/drbd.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/fonts.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/gtk.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/installation.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/journal.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/kdump.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/ldap-client.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/mail.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/ncurses-pkg.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/network.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/online-update-configuration.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/online-update.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/opensuse_mirror.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/packager.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/printer.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/product-creator.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/proxy.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/qt-pkg.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/qt.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/rdp.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/rear.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/registration.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/rpm-groups.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/samba-client.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/samba-server.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/security.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/services-manager.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/snapper.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/sshd.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/storage.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/support.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/sysconfig.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/tftp-server.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/timezone_db.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/tune.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/update.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/users.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/vm.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/vpn.lt.po branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/yast2-apparmor.lt.po Log: from SLE-SP1 plus Factory Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/add-on-creator.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/add-on-creator.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/add-on-creator.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -17,7 +17,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Command line help text for the add-on-creator module @@ -173,7 +174,9 @@ #. help text for 'number' option; do not translate 'list' #: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:281 msgid "Number of the selected add-on (see 'list' command for product numbers)." -msgstr "Pasirinkto papildomų produktų numeris (komanda „list“ pateikia produktų numerius)." +msgstr "" +"Pasirinkto papildomų produktų numeris (komanda „list“ pateikia produktų " +"numerius)." #. command line help text for 'changelog' option #: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:288 @@ -261,8 +264,12 @@ #. command line message, do not translate 'create', 'clone' #: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:864 -msgid "There is no add-on product configuration present. Create a new one using the 'create' or 'clone' commands." -msgstr "Šiuo metu nėra jokios papildomų produktų konfigūracijos. Sukurkite naują, rinkdamiesi komandomis „create“ arba „clone“." +msgid "" +"There is no add-on product configuration present. Create a new one using the " +"'create' or 'clone' commands." +msgstr "" +"Šiuo metu nėra jokios papildomų produktų konfigūracijos. Sukurkite naują, " +"rinkdamiesi komandomis „create“ arba „clone“." #. error message #: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:876 @@ -301,13 +308,19 @@ #. help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:156 -msgid "<p>Start creating a new add-on product configuration with <b>Add</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Naują papildomo produkto konfigūraciją pradėsite nuspaudę <b>Pridėti</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Start creating a new add-on product configuration with <b>Add</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Naują papildomo produkto konfigūraciją pradėsite nuspaudę <b>Pridėti</b>.<" +"/p>" #. help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:160 -msgid "<p>Use <b>Edit</b> to modify the selected add-on product configuration.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Spauskite <b>Keisti</b> ir derinkite pasirinktą papildomo produkto konfigūraciją.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Edit</b> to modify the selected add-on product configuration.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Spauskite <b>Keisti</b> ir derinkite pasirinktą papildomo produkto " +"konfigūraciją.</p>" #. help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:164 @@ -316,8 +329,12 @@ #. help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:166 -msgid "<p>Build the new add-on product based on the selected configuration with <b>Build</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pagal pasirinktą konfigūraciją naujai sukurti papildomą produktą galima nuspaudus <b>Kurti</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Build the new add-on product based on the selected configuration with <b>" +"Build</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pagal pasirinktą konfigūraciją naujai sukurti papildomą produktą galima " +"nuspaudus <b>Kurti</b>.</p>" #. table header item #. summary header @@ -404,16 +421,19 @@ #. radio button label #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:510 +#| msgid "SUSE Linux Enterprise 11 SP1" msgid "SUSE Linux Enterprise 11 SP3" msgstr "SUSE Linux Enterprise 11 SP3" #. radio button label #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:519 +#| msgid "openSUSE 12.1" msgid "openSUSE 12.&3" msgstr "openSUSE 12.&3" #. radio button label #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:528 +#| msgid "openSUSE 12.1" msgid "openSUSE 13.1" msgstr "openSUSE 13.1" @@ -770,7 +790,8 @@ "You must enter at least one of them to provide user identification.\n" msgstr "" "Vardas, komentaras ir el.pašto adresas yra tušti.\n" -"Privalote įvesti bent vieną iš jų tam, kad būtų pateikta naudotojo tapatumas.\n" +"Privalote įvesti bent vieną iš jų tam, kad būtų pateikta naudotojo " +"tapatumas.\n" #. feedback popup headline #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2197 @@ -1056,18 +1077,30 @@ #. help text for start menu #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:44 -msgid "<p>This module offers guidance for the creation of an add-on product.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Šis modulis pateikia vediklį, padedantį kurti papildomus produktus.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This module offers guidance for the creation of an add-on product.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Šis modulis pateikia vediklį, padedantį kurti papildomus produktus.</p>" #. help text for start menu, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:48 -msgid "<p>Select how to create the new add-on product. You can create it from the beginning or base it on an existing product.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pasirinkite būdą, kuriuo kursite naują produktą. Galite jį kurti nuo pradžių arba jau esamo produkto pagrindu.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Select how to create the new add-on product. You can create it from the " +"beginning or base it on an existing product.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pasirinkite būdą, kuriuo kursite naują produktą. Galite jį kurti nuo " +"pradžių arba jau esamo produkto pagrindu.</p>" #. help text for start menu, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:52 -msgid "<p>When basing the new product on an existing product, check <b>Generate Package Descriptions</b> to generate new descriptions of packages in the existing product.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Jei naują produktą kuriate jau esamo produkto pagrindu, pažymėkite <b>Kurti paketų aprašus</b> – bus esamo produkto paketams bus sugeneruoti nauji aprašai.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>When basing the new product on an existing product, check <b>Generate " +"Package Descriptions</b> to generate new descriptions of packages in the " +"existing product.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Jei naują produktą kuriate jau esamo produkto pagrindu, pažymėkite <b>" +"Kurti paketų aprašus</b> – bus esamo produkto paketams bus sugeneruoti nauji " +"aprašai.</p>" #. help text for initial data (paragraph title) #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:56 @@ -1086,8 +1119,13 @@ #. help text for initial data, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:64 -msgid "<p>Select the product to which the new add-on product can be applied. This selection forms the <b>REQUIRES</b> value of the <tt>content</tt> file.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pasirinkite produktą, kuriam gali būti pritaikytas naujasis papildomas produktas. Šis pasirinkimas sukuria <tt>content</tt> (turinio) rinkmenos <b>REQUIRES</b> (reikalavimo) reikšmę.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Select the product to which the new add-on product can be applied. This " +"selection forms the <b>REQUIRES</b> value of the <tt>content</tt> file.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pasirinkite produktą, kuriam gali būti pritaikytas naujasis papildomas " +"produktas. Šis pasirinkimas sukuria <tt>content</tt> (turinio) rinkmenos <b>" +"REQUIRES</b> (reikalavimo) reikšmę.</p>" #. help text for initial data (paragraph title), cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:68 @@ -1096,8 +1134,12 @@ #. help text for initial data, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:70 -msgid "<p>Choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages that should form your add-on product.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pasirinkite kelią iki katalogo, turinčio RPM paketus, iš kurių norėtumėte sudaryti savo papildomą produktą.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages that should " +"form your add-on product.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pasirinkite kelią iki katalogo, turinčio RPM paketus, iš kurių norėtumėte " +"sudaryti savo papildomą produktą.</p>" #. help text for initial data (paragraph title), cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:74 @@ -1106,8 +1148,16 @@ #. help text for initial data, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:76 -msgid "<p>Optionally, choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages from the product the add-on product should be based on. These packages will not be contained in the add-on product, but could be used for creating the patterns later in the workflow.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Galima, bet nebūtina, pasirinkti kelią iki katalogo, turinčio RPM paketus, iš produkto, kurio pagrindu turėtų būti kuriamas papildomas produktas. Šie paketai nebus patalpinti papildomame produkte, tačiau vėlesniame žingsnyje galės būti naudojami kuriant šablonus.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Optionally, choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages " +"from the product the add-on product should be based on. These packages will " +"not be contained in the add-on product, but could be used for creating the " +"patterns later in the workflow.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Galima, bet nebūtina, pasirinkti kelią iki katalogo, turinčio RPM paketus, " +"iš produkto, kurio pagrindu turėtų būti kuriamas papildomas produktas. Šie " +"paketai nebus patalpinti papildomame produkte, tačiau vėlesniame žingsnyje " +"galės būti naudojami kuriant šablonus.</p>" #. help text for content file editor (<tt>content</tt> is a name of file) #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:80 @@ -1116,33 +1166,61 @@ #. help text for content file editor, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:84 -msgid "<p>Enter the information required to identify the add-on product. Deselect <b>Show Only Required Keywords</b> to see all attributes of the <tt>content</tt> file.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Įveskite informaciją, reikalingą papildomo produkto identifikavimui. Norėdami matyti visus <tt>content</tt> (turinio) rinkmenos atributus, nuimkite varnelę nuo <b>Rodyti tik reikalingus raktažodžius</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Enter the information required to identify the add-on product. Deselect <b>" +"Show Only Required Keywords</b> to see all attributes of the <tt>content</tt> " +"file.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Įveskite informaciją, reikalingą papildomo produkto identifikavimui. " +"Norėdami matyti visus <tt>content</tt> (turinio) rinkmenos atributus, " +"nuimkite varnelę nuo <b>Rodyti tik reikalingus raktažodžius</b>.</p>" #. help text for content file editor, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:88 msgid "<p>Use <b>Import</b> to import an existing <tt>content</tt> file.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Spauskite <b>Importuoti</b>, jei norite įkelti esamą <tt>content</tt> (turinio) rinkmeną.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Spauskite <b>Importuoti</b>, jei norite įkelti esamą <tt>content</tt> " +"(turinio) rinkmeną.</p>" #. help text for package description files #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:92 -msgid "<p>Edit the language-specific descriptions of packages (<tt>packages.lang</tt> files) here.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Čia keiskite paketų aprašus savita kalba (<tt>packages.lang</tt> rinkmenos).</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Edit the language-specific descriptions of packages (<tt>packages.lang</tt>" +" files) here.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Čia keiskite paketų aprašus savita kalba (<tt>packages.lang</tt> " +"rinkmenos).</p>" #. help text for package description files, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:96 -msgid "<p>Use <b>Add Language</b> to add a description file for a new language. The list of available languages is read from the <b>LINGUAS</b> value of the <tt>content</tt> file. Import an existing file with package descriptions with <b>Import</b>. Delete the description file with <b>Delete</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norėdami pridėti aprašo rinkmeną nauja kalba, rinkitės <b>Pridėti kalbą</b>. Galimų kalbų sąrašas nuskaitomas iš <b>LINGUAS</b> reikšmės rinkmenoje <tt>content</tt>. Esamą rinkmeną su paketų aprašais įkelsite nuspaudę <b>Importuoti</b>. Aprašų rinkmenos šalinamos su <b>Šalinti</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Add Language</b> to add a description file for a new language. The " +"list of available languages is read from the <b>LINGUAS</b> value of the <tt>" +"content</tt> file. Import an existing file with package descriptions with <b>" +"Import</b>. Delete the description file with <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norėdami pridėti aprašo rinkmeną nauja kalba, rinkitės <b>Pridėti kalbą</b>" +". Galimų kalbų sąrašas nuskaitomas iš <b>LINGUAS</b> reikšmės rinkmenoje <tt>" +"content</tt>. Esamą rinkmeną su paketų aprašais įkelsite nuspaudę <b>" +"Importuoti</b>. Aprašų rinkmenos šalinamos su <b>Šalinti</b>.</p>" #. help text for package description files, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:100 -msgid "<p>Use <b>Add</b> and <b>Edit</b> in the second table to modify description entries for the selected package.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norėdami keisti pasirinkto paketo aprašo įrašus, antroje lentelėje spauskite <b>Pridėti</b> ir <b>Keisti</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Add</b> and <b>Edit</b> in the second table to modify description " +"entries for the selected package.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norėdami keisti pasirinkto paketo aprašo įrašus, antroje lentelėje " +"spauskite <b>Pridėti</b> ir <b>Keisti</b>.</p>" #. help text for package description files, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:104 -msgid "<p>Optionally, choose the path for the file providing <b>Additional Package Dependencies</b> (EXTRA_PROV).</p>" -msgstr "<p>Galima, bet nebūtina, pasirinkti kelią iki rinkmenos, pateikiančios <b>Papildomas paketų priklausomybes</b> (EXTRA_PROV).</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Optionally, choose the path for the file providing <b>Additional Package " +"Dependencies</b> (EXTRA_PROV).</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Galima, bet nebūtina, pasirinkti kelią iki rinkmenos, pateikiančios <b>" +"Papildomas paketų priklausomybes</b> (EXTRA_PROV).</p>" #. help text for patterns #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:108 @@ -1151,72 +1229,142 @@ #. help text for patterns, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:112 -msgid "<p>Use <b>New</b> to create a new pattern or <b>Import</b> to import an existing one.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Rinkitės <b>Naujas</b>, jei norite sukurti naują šabloną, arba <b>Importuoti</b>, jei norite įkelti esamą.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>New</b> to create a new pattern or <b>Import</b> to import an " +"existing one.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Rinkitės <b>Naujas</b>, jei norite sukurti naują šabloną, arba <b>" +"Importuoti</b>, jei norite įkelti esamą.</p>" #. help text for patterns, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:116 -msgid "<p>Use <b>Add</b> and <b>Edit</b> in the second table to modify pattern attributes.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norėdami keisti šablono atributus, antroje lentelėje spauskite <b>Pridėti</b> ir <b>Keisti</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Add</b> and <b>Edit</b> in the second table to modify pattern " +"attributes.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norėdami keisti šablono atributus, antroje lentelėje spauskite <b>Pridėti<" +"/b> ir <b>Keisti</b>.</p>" #. help text for patterns, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:120 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Required pattern</b> to mark the selected pattern as required for\n" -"the add-on product. Such a pattern will be automatically preselected when the installation of the add-on product is started.</p>" +"<p>Check <b>Required pattern</b> to mark the selected pattern as required " +"for\n" +"the add-on product. Such a pattern will be automatically preselected when the " +"installation of the add-on product is started.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Pažymėkite ties <b>Reikalingas šablonas</b>, jei norite, kad pasirinktas šablonas būtų laikomas reikalingu\n" -" papildomam produktui. Toks šablonas bus automatiškai pažymimas pradedant papildomo produkto diegimą.</p>" +"<p>Pažymėkite ties <b>Reikalingas šablonas</b>, jei norite, kad pasirinktas " +"šablonas būtų laikomas reikalingu\n" +" papildomam produktui. Toks šablonas bus automatiškai pažymimas pradedant " +"papildomo produkto diegimą.</p>" #. help text for the 'various settings' dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:124 -msgid "<p>Specify the path to the directory in which the add-on product should be created. Select <b>Create ISO Image</b> to create the ISO image of the product in the output directory.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Nurodykite kelią iki katalogo, kuriame turėtų būti sukurtas papildomas produktas. Norėdami išvesties kataloge sukurti produkto ISO atvaizdį, spauskite <b>Sukurti ISO atvaizdį</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Specify the path to the directory in which the add-on product should be " +"created. Select <b>Create ISO Image</b> to create the ISO image of the " +"product in the output directory.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Nurodykite kelią iki katalogo, kuriame turėtų būti sukurtas papildomas " +"produktas. Norėdami išvesties kataloge sukurti produkto ISO atvaizdį, " +"spauskite <b>Sukurti ISO atvaizdį</b>.</p>" #. help text for the 'various settings' dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:128 -msgid "<p>Use <b>Generate Changelog</b> to generate a changelog file containing all changes of packages on the add-on product made in the last two years.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norėdami sukurti pakeitimų žurnalo rinkmeną su visais paketų pakeitimų, atliktų per pastaruosius 2 metus papildomame produkte, aprašais, spauskite <b>Sukurti pakeitimų žurnalą</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Generate Changelog</b> to generate a changelog file containing all " +"changes of packages on the add-on product made in the last two years.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norėdami sukurti pakeitimų žurnalo rinkmeną su visais paketų pakeitimų, " +"atliktų per pastaruosius 2 metus papildomame produkte, aprašais, spauskite <b>" +"Sukurti pakeitimų žurnalą</b>.</p>" #. help text for the 'various settings' dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:132 -msgid "<p>Adapt the workflow of the add-on product with <b>Configure Workflow</b>. Use <b>Optional Files</b> to configure texts of <tt>README</tt> files, licenses, and other optional values.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Papildomo produkto eigą derinkite su <b>Konfigūruoti eigą</b>. Norėdami konfigūruoti <tt>README</tt> rinkmenas, licencijas ir kitas nebūtinas reikšmes, spauskite <b>Pasirinktinos rinkmenos</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Adapt the workflow of the add-on product with <b>Configure Workflow</b>. " +"Use <b>Optional Files</b> to configure texts of <tt>README</tt> files, " +"licenses, and other optional values.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Papildomo produkto eigą derinkite su <b>Konfigūruoti eigą</b>. Norėdami " +"konfigūruoti <tt>README</tt> rinkmenas, licencijas ir kitas nebūtinas " +"reikšmes, spauskite <b>Pasirinktinos rinkmenos</b>.</p>" #. workflow help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:136 -msgid "<p>Here, you can enter the files necessary for customizing your add-on product workflow.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Čia galite nurodyti rinkmenas, reikalingas jūsų papildomo produkto eigos derinimui.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Here, you can enter the files necessary for customizing your add-on " +"product workflow.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Čia galite nurodyti rinkmenas, reikalingas jūsų papildomo produkto eigos " +"derinimui.</p>" #. workflow help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:140 -msgid "<p>Enter the location of the file with the workflow description. This file is an alternative to <tt>control.xml</tt> and is saved as <tt>installation.xml</tt> in the add-on product's base directory.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Nurodykite eigos aprašą turinčios rinkmenos vietą. Ši rinkmena yra alternatyva <tt>control.xml</tt> ir įrašoma kaip <tt>installation.xml</tt> papildomo produkto pagrindiniame kataloge.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Enter the location of the file with the workflow description. This file is " +"an alternative to <tt>control.xml</tt> and is saved as <tt>installation.xml<" +"/tt> in the add-on product's base directory.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Nurodykite eigos aprašą turinčios rinkmenos vietą. Ši rinkmena yra " +"alternatyva <tt>control.xml</tt> ir įrašoma kaip <tt>installation.xml</tt> " +"papildomo produkto pagrindiniame kataloge.</p>" #. workflow help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:144 -msgid "<p>To use custom YaST modules during the installation of the add-on product, enter the path to the <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> archive where these modules are stored or configure the contents of <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> by specifying the YaST RPM packages in <b>Import the Packages</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norėdami papildomo produkto diegimo metu naudoti pasirinktinus YaST modulius, nurodykite kelią iki <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> archyvo, kuriame laikomi šie moduliai, arba konfigūruokite <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> turinį, nurodydami YaST RPM paketus ties <b>Importuoti paketus</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>To use custom YaST modules during the installation of the add-on product, " +"enter the path to the <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> archive where these modules are " +"stored or configure the contents of <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> by specifying the " +"YaST RPM packages in <b>Import the Packages</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norėdami papildomo produkto diegimo metu naudoti pasirinktinus YaST " +"modulius, nurodykite kelią iki <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> archyvo, kuriame laikomi " +"šie moduliai, arba konfigūruokite <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> turinį, nurodydami " +"YaST RPM paketus ties <b>Importuoti paketus</b>.</p>" #. help text for expert dialog 1 #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:148 -msgid "<p>The optional <tt>info.txt</tt> file gives information about the add-on that should be displayed as a pop-up window with an <b>OK</b> button.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pasirinktina rinkmena <tt>info.txt</tt> pateikia informaciją apie papildomą produktą. Informacija turėtų būti rodoma iškylančiame lange su mygtuku <b>Gerai</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The optional <tt>info.txt</tt> file gives information about the add-on " +"that should be displayed as a pop-up window with an <b>OK</b> button.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pasirinktina rinkmena <tt>info.txt</tt> pateikia informaciją apie " +"papildomą produktą. Informacija turėtų būti rodoma iškylančiame lange su " +"mygtuku <b>Gerai</b>.</p>" #. help text for expert dialog 1, cont #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:152 -msgid "<p>The text of the license is displayed in a window with <b>Agree</b> and <b>Disagree</b> buttons before the installation starts. The files with the license texts in different languages are compressed to the <tt>license.zip</tt> archive and stored in the <tt>media.1</tt> directory.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Licencijos tekstas rodomas prieš diegiant lange su mygtukais <b>Sutinku</b> ir <b>Nesutinku</b>. Rinkmenos su licencijos tekstais skirtingomis kalbomis suglaudinamos <tt>license.zip</tt> archyve ir laikomos <tt>media.1</tt> kataloge.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The text of the license is displayed in a window with <b>Agree</b> and <b>" +"Disagree</b> buttons before the installation starts. The files with the " +"license texts in different languages are compressed to the <tt>license.zip<" +"/tt> archive and stored in the <tt>media.1</tt> directory.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Licencijos tekstas rodomas prieš diegiant lange su mygtukais <b>Sutinku</b>" +" ir <b>Nesutinku</b>. Rinkmenos su licencijos tekstais skirtingomis kalbomis " +"suglaudinamos <tt>license.zip</tt> archyve ir laikomos <tt>media.1</tt> " +"kataloge.</p>" #. help text for expert dialog 2 #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:156 -msgid "<p>The <tt>COPYRIGHT</tt> and <tt>COPYING</tt> files can have various language modifications and are stored in the root directory of the add-on product.</p>" -msgstr "<p><tt>COPYRIGHT</tt> (autorinių teisių) ir <tt>COPYING</tt> (kopijavimo teisių) rinkmenos gali turėti tekstus įvairiomis kalbomis; rinkmenos talpinamos šakniniame papildomo produkto kataloge.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The <tt>COPYRIGHT</tt> and <tt>COPYING</tt> files can have various " +"language modifications and are stored in the root directory of the add-on " +"product.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><tt>COPYRIGHT</tt> (autorinių teisių) ir <tt>COPYING</tt> (kopijavimo " +"teisių) rinkmenos gali turėti tekstus įvairiomis kalbomis; rinkmenos " +"talpinamos šakniniame papildomo produkto kataloge.</p>" #. help text for signing dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:160 -msgid "<p>Here, configure the signing of the add-on product. Choose a secret key from the list of keys available or create a new one with <b>Create</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Čia konfigūruokite papildomo produkto pasirašymą. Iš sąrašo pasirinkite slaptąjį raktą arba sukurkite naują spausdami <b>Sukurti</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Here, configure the signing of the add-on product. Choose a secret key " +"from the list of keys available or create a new one with <b>Create</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Čia konfigūruokite papildomo produkto pasirašymą. Iš sąrašo pasirinkite " +"slaptąjį raktą arba sukurkite naują spausdami <b>Sukurti</b>.</p>" #. help text for signing dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:164 @@ -1225,38 +1373,66 @@ #. help text for signing dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:166 -msgid "<p>Decide if you want to <b>Sign All Packages</b> of the add-on product with the selected key. All previous package signatures will be removed.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Apsispręskite, ar norite papildomo produkto <b>visus paketus pasirašyti</b> pasirinktuoju raktu. Visi ankstesni paketų parašai bus pašalinti.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Decide if you want to <b>Sign All Packages</b> of the add-on product with " +"the selected key. All previous package signatures will be removed.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Apsispręskite, ar norite papildomo produkto <b>visus paketus pasirašyti</b>" +" pasirinktuoju raktu. Visi ankstesni paketų parašai bus pašalinti.</p>" #. help text for generating new key dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:170 -msgid "<p>Enter the values necessary for generating the new primary key pair.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Įveskite reikiamą reikšmę tam, kad būrų sukurta nauja pirminė raktų pora.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Enter the values necessary for generating the new primary key pair.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Įveskite reikiamą reikšmę tam, kad būrų sukurta nauja pirminė raktų pora.<" +"/p>" #. help text for generating new key dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:174 -msgid "<p>The default size of a DSA key is 1024 bits. RSA keys may be between 1024 and 4096 bits long.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Numatytasis DSA rakto dydis yra 1024 bitai. RSA raktas gali būti nuo 1024 iki 4096 bitų ilgio.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The default size of a DSA key is 1024 bits. RSA keys may be between 1024 " +"and 4096 bits long.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Numatytasis DSA rakto dydis yra 1024 bitai. RSA raktas gali būti nuo 1024 " +"iki 4096 bitų ilgio.</p>" #. help text for generating new key dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:178 -msgid "<p>As <b>Expiration Date</b>, enter the number of days after which the key expires. If the number is followed by <tt>w</tt>,<tt>m</tt>, or <tt>y</tt>, it indicates the number of weeks, months, or years. Leave the entry empty for a key that never expires.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Kaip <b>Galiojimo pabaigos datą</b> įveskite dienų skaičių, po kurių rakto galiojimas baigsis. Jei po skaičiaus seka <tt>w</tt>,<tt>m</tt> ar <tt>y</tt>, tai atitinkamai nurodomas savaičių, mėnesių ar metų skaičius. Jei rakto galiojimas nesibaigia, palikite tuščią langelį.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>As <b>Expiration Date</b>, enter the number of days after which the key " +"expires. If the number is followed by <tt>w</tt>,<tt>m</tt>, or <tt>y</tt>, " +"it indicates the number of weeks, months, or years. Leave the entry empty for " +"a key that never expires.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Kaip <b>Galiojimo pabaigos datą</b> įveskite dienų skaičių, po kurių rakto " +"galiojimas baigsis. Jei po skaičiaus seka <tt>w</tt>,<tt>m</tt> ar <tt>y</tt>" +", tai atitinkamai nurodomas savaičių, mėnesių ar metų skaičius. Jei rakto " +"galiojimas nesibaigia, palikite tuščią langelį.</p>" #. help text for generating new key dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:182 -msgid "<p>Use <b>Name</b>, <b>Comment</b>, and <b>E-Mail Address</b> to provide the user identification with which the new key should be associated.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Naudotojo tapatumas, su kuria siejamas naujas raktas, pateikiama naudojant <b>Vardas</b>, <b>Komentaras</b> ir <b>El. pašto adresas</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Name</b>, <b>Comment</b>, and <b>E-Mail Address</b> to provide the " +"user identification with which the new key should be associated.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Naudotojo tapatumas, su kuria siejamas naujas raktas, pateikiama naudojant " +"<b>Vardas</b>, <b>Komentaras</b> ir <b>El. pašto adresas</b>.</p>" #. help text for overview dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:186 -msgid "<p>Here, see the overview of data for generating the add-on product.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Here, see the overview of data for generating the add-on product.</p>" msgstr "<p>Čia matote kuriamo papildomo produkto duomenų apžvalgą.</p>" #. help text for overview dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:190 -msgid "<p>Press <b>Finish</b> to create the add-on product in the output directory.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norėdami išvesties kataloge sukurti papildomą produktą, spauskite <b>Baigti</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Press <b>Finish</b> to create the add-on product in the output directory.<" +"/p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norėdami išvesties kataloge sukurti papildomą produktą, spauskite <b>" +"Baigti</b>.</p>" #. text entry label #: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:113 @@ -1365,7 +1541,9 @@ #. help text for content file 'NAME' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:152 msgid "For internal usage. Same restrictions as for package names apply." -msgstr "Vidiniam naudojimui. Taikomi tie patys apribojimai kaip ir paketo pavadinimams." +msgstr "" +"Vidiniam naudojimui. Taikomi tie patys apribojimai kaip ir paketo " +"pavadinimams." #. label of content file BASEARCHS key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:160 @@ -1374,8 +1552,12 @@ #. help text for content file 'BASEARCHS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:164 -msgid "Space-separated list of product architectures. Matches the available product-release packages architectures. " -msgstr "Tarpais atskirtų architektūrų sąrašas. Tinka prieinamos išleisto produkto paketų architektūros." +msgid "" +"Space-separated list of product architectures. Matches the available " +"product-release packages architectures. " +msgstr "" +"Tarpais atskirtų architektūrų sąrašas. Tinka prieinamos išleisto produkto " +"paketų architektūros." #. label of content file 'VERSION' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:172 @@ -1385,7 +1567,8 @@ #. help text for content file 'VERSION' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:176 msgid "Product version and release as in RPM <tt>major.minor-release</tt>." -msgstr "Produkto versija ir leidimas kaip ir RPM <tt>didžioji.mažoji-laida</tt>." +msgstr "" +"Produkto versija ir leidimas kaip ir RPM <tt>didžioji.mažoji-laida</tt>." #. table item label #. table item label @@ -1400,8 +1583,14 @@ #. help text for content file 'DISTRIBUTION' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:194 -msgid "Some string denoting the distribution. The same string is most probably used in the .rpms to denote the distribution. Usually a composition of the name, version and architecture." -msgstr "Kai kurios eilutės nurodo platinamąjį paketą. Ta pati eilutė dažniausiai naudojama .rpms nurodant platinamąjį paketą. Paprastai sudaro pavadinimas, versija ir architektūra." +msgid "" +"Some string denoting the distribution. The same string is most probably used " +"in the .rpms to denote the distribution. Usually a composition of the name, " +"version and architecture." +msgstr "" +"Kai kurios eilutės nurodo platinamąjį paketą. Ta pati eilutė dažniausiai " +"naudojama .rpms nurodant platinamąjį paketą. Paprastai sudaro pavadinimas, " +"versija ir architektūra." #. label of content file key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:201 @@ -1430,8 +1619,12 @@ #. help text for content file '' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:227 -msgid "UTF-8 encoded label. Default label if <b>LINGUAS</b> is omitted or no default language can be determined." -msgstr "Žymė rašoma UTF-8 koduote. Numatytoji žymė tam atvejui, jei <b>LINGUAS</b> praleista arba negali būti apibrėžta pagrindinė kalba." +msgid "" +"UTF-8 encoded label. Default label if <b>LINGUAS</b> is omitted or no default " +"language can be determined." +msgstr "" +"Žymė rašoma UTF-8 koduote. Numatytoji žymė tam atvejui, jei <b>LINGUAS</b> " +"praleista arba negali būti apibrėžta pagrindinė kalba." #. label of content file 'LINGUAS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:234 @@ -1500,8 +1693,14 @@ #. help text for content file 'LABEL.lang' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:304 -msgid "UTF-8-encoded <b>LABEL</b>. <tt>lang</tt> has the same syntax as the <b>LINGUAS</b> values. For each language in <b>LINGUAS</b>, a matching <b>LABEL.lang</b> is expected." -msgstr "<b>LABEL</b> rašomas UTF-8 koduote. <tt>lang</tt> rašoma tokia pačia sintakse kaip ir <b>LINGUAS</b> reikšmė. Kiekvienai kalbai kintamajame <b>LINGUAS</b>, turėtų būti atitinkama <b>LABEL.lang</b>." +msgid "" +"UTF-8-encoded <b>LABEL</b>. <tt>lang</tt> has the same syntax as the <b>" +"LINGUAS</b> values. For each language in <b>LINGUAS</b>, a matching <b>" +"LABEL.lang</b> is expected." +msgstr "" +"<b>LABEL</b> rašomas UTF-8 koduote. <tt>lang</tt> rašoma tokia pačia sintakse " +"kaip ir <b>LINGUAS</b> reikšmė. Kiekvienai kalbai kintamajame <b>LINGUAS</b>, " +"turėtų būti atitinkama <b>LABEL.lang</b>." #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:328 msgid "Architecture" @@ -1539,8 +1738,12 @@ #. help text for 'Cat' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:366 -msgid "One line category in the default language used to group patterns. Categories are intended for the user and can be specified freely." -msgstr "Kategorija, parašyta vienoje eilutėje pagrindine kalba, naudojama šablonų grupavimui. Kategorijos skirtos naudotojui ir gali būti laisvai parenkamos." +msgid "" +"One line category in the default language used to group patterns. Categories " +"are intended for the user and can be specified freely." +msgstr "" +"Kategorija, parašyta vienoje eilutėje pagrindine kalba, naudojama šablonų " +"grupavimui. Kategorijos skirtos naudotojui ir gali būti laisvai parenkamos." #. help text for 'Cat.lang' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:370 @@ -1574,8 +1777,11 @@ #. help text for 'Prc' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:400 -msgid "These packages are installed by default but can be removed without complaint." -msgstr "Numatytuoju atveju šie paketai įdiegti, bet gali būti pašalinti be jokių trikdžių." +msgid "" +"These packages are installed by default but can be removed without complaint." +msgstr "" +"Numatytuoju atveju šie paketai įdiegti, bet gali būti pašalinti be jokių " +"trikdžių." #. label for 'Prs' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:408 @@ -1587,8 +1793,12 @@ #. help text for 'SUGGESTS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:410 src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:503 #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:712 -msgid "These are just hints for an application and not handled during dependency resolution." -msgstr "Tai tėra užuominos, skirtos programoms, ir tikrinant paketų priklausomybes nedalyvauja." +msgid "" +"These are just hints for an application and not handled during dependency " +"resolution." +msgstr "" +"Tai tėra užuominos, skirtos programoms, ir tikrinant paketų priklausomybes " +"nedalyvauja." #. label for 'Ico' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:418 @@ -1599,10 +1809,20 @@ #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:420 msgid "" "If unspecified, the pattern name is used \n" -" instead (with blanks in the name replaced by underscores). If the filename does not include a .png or .jpg extension, .png is appended. If no path is specified, icons are searched for in the theme icon path (first /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/32x32/apps/ then /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/48x48/apps/). Absolute and relative paths (to the theme path /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/) are allowed." +" instead (with blanks in the name replaced by underscores). If the filename " +"does not include a .png or .jpg extension, .png is appended. If no path is " +"specified, icons are searched for in the theme icon path (first " +"/usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/32x32/apps/ then " +"/usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/48x48/apps/). Absolute and relative " +"paths (to the theme path /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/) are allowed." msgstr "" "Jei nenurodyta, naudojamas šablono pavadinimas \n" -" (pavadinimuose esančius tarpus pakeičiant pabraukimo brūkšniais). Jei rinkmenos pavadinimas neturi prievardžio .png ar .jpg, pridedamas .png. Jei nenurodomas kelias, ženkliukų ieškoma ženkliukų temos kelyje (pirmiausia /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/32x32/apps/ po to /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/48x48/apps/). Galimi tiek absoliutūs, tiek santykiniai keliai (temos keliui /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/)." +" (pavadinimuose esančius tarpus pakeičiant pabraukimo brūkšniais). Jei " +"rinkmenos pavadinimas neturi prievardžio .png ar .jpg, pridedamas .png. Jei " +"nenurodomas kelias, ženkliukų ieškoma ženkliukų temos kelyje (pirmiausia " +"/usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/32x32/apps/ po to " +"/usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/48x48/apps/). Galimi tiek absoliutūs, " +"tiek santykiniai keliai (temos keliui /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/)." #. label for 'Ord' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:429 @@ -1611,8 +1831,12 @@ #. help text for 'Ord' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:431 -msgid "This three-digit integer value defines the order of the pattern when listing multiple patterns in the user interface." -msgstr "Tai trijų skaitmenų sveikasis skaičius, nurodantis šablonų tvarką juos rikiuojant naudotojo sąsajoje." +msgid "" +"This three-digit integer value defines the order of the pattern when listing " +"multiple patterns in the user interface." +msgstr "" +"Tai trijų skaitmenų sveikasis skaičius, nurodantis šablonų tvarką juos " +"rikiuojant naudotojo sąsajoje." #. label for 'Req' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:441 @@ -1631,8 +1855,16 @@ #. help text for 'Prv' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:453 -msgid "Capabilities this pattern provides. They can be used to match <b>REQUIRES</b> from others. Every resolvable has a provide by default--its own name and edition. For example, package <i>bar-1.42-1</i> provides the capability <tt>bar = 1.42-1</tt>." -msgstr "Šio šablono suteikiamos charakteristikos. Gali būti naudojama, kaip atitinkantis kitų <b>REQUIRES</b> (reikalavimus). Kiekvienas sprendinys paprastai turi pasiūlymą – savo pavadinimą ir laidą. Pavyzdžiui, paketas <i>bar-1.42-1</i> pateikia charakteristiką <tt>bar = 1.42-1</tt>." +msgid "" +"Capabilities this pattern provides. They can be used to match <b>REQUIRES</b> " +"from others. Every resolvable has a provide by default--its own name and " +"edition. For example, package <i>bar-1.42-1</i> provides the capability <tt>" +"bar = 1.42-1</tt>." +msgstr "" +"Šio šablono suteikiamos charakteristikos. Gali būti naudojama, kaip " +"atitinkantis kitų <b>REQUIRES</b> (reikalavimus). Kiekvienas sprendinys " +"paprastai turi pasiūlymą – savo pavadinimą ir laidą. Pavyzdžiui, paketas <i>" +"bar-1.42-1</i> pateikia charakteristiką <tt>bar = 1.42-1</tt>." #. label for 'Con' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:461 @@ -1641,8 +1873,12 @@ #. help text for 'Con' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:463 -msgid "This pattern cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that provides the capability is installed." -msgstr "Šis šablonas negali būti įdiegtas, jei nurodyta priklausomybė ar tas, kuris pateikia galimybes jau įdiegtas." +msgid "" +"This pattern cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that " +"provides the capability is installed." +msgstr "" +"Šis šablonas negali būti įdiegtas, jei nurodyta priklausomybė ar tas, kuris " +"pateikia galimybes jau įdiegtas." #. label for 'Obs' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:471 @@ -1665,8 +1901,12 @@ #. help text for 'Rec' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:483 -msgid "A weak version of REQUIRES. If recommended patterns cannot be installed, no error is shown." -msgstr "Silpnas REIKALAUJA sinonimas. Jei patartinas šablonas negali būti įdiegtas, klaidų nebus rodoma." +msgid "" +"A weak version of REQUIRES. If recommended patterns cannot be installed, no " +"error is shown." +msgstr "" +"Silpnas REIKALAUJA sinonimas. Jei patartinas šablonas negali būti įdiegtas, " +"klaidų nebus rodoma." #. label for 'Sup' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:491 @@ -1675,8 +1915,14 @@ #. help text for 'Sup' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:493 -msgid "A reverse <b>Rec</b>. This pattern is installed if the specified capability is provided by an installed resolvable. The dependency resolver installs it. Uninstalling it is silently accepted." -msgstr "<b>Patartina</b> priešingybė. Šis šablonas įdiegiamas, jei nurodytas galimybes suteikia įdiegtas sprendimas. Priklausomybių sprendimas jį įdiegia. Jo pašalinimas priimamas tyliai." +msgid "" +"A reverse <b>Rec</b>. This pattern is installed if the specified capability " +"is provided by an installed resolvable. The dependency resolver installs it. " +"Uninstalling it is silently accepted." +msgstr "" +"<b>Patartina</b> priešingybė. Šis šablonas įdiegiamas, jei nurodytas " +"galimybes suteikia įdiegtas sprendimas. Priklausomybių sprendimas jį įdiegia. " +"Jo pašalinimas priimamas tyliai." #. label for 'Sug' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:501 @@ -1690,8 +1936,12 @@ #. help text for 'Fre' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:513 -msgid "The current pattern is only considered for installation if the pattern specified here is installed." -msgstr "Šis šablonas gali būti įdiegtas tik tada, jei jau įdiegtas čia nurodytas šablonas." +msgid "" +"The current pattern is only considered for installation if the pattern " +"specified here is installed." +msgstr "" +"Šis šablonas gali būti įdiegtas tik tada, jei jau įdiegtas čia nurodytas " +"šablonas." #. label for 'Ext' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:523 @@ -1750,8 +2000,12 @@ #. help text for 'Ins' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:601 -msgid "An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected, such as a test version warning or a commercial license." -msgstr "Informacinis pranešimas, naudotojui rodomas, kai pasirenkamas paketas. Gali būti įspėjimas apie bandomąją versiją ar licencijos tekstas." +msgid "" +"An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected, such as a " +"test version warning or a commercial license." +msgstr "" +"Informacinis pranešimas, naudotojui rodomas, kai pasirenkamas paketas. Gali " +"būti įspėjimas apie bandomąją versiją ar licencijos tekstas." #. label for 'Del' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:608 @@ -1760,8 +2014,12 @@ #. help text for 'Del' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:610 -msgid "An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected for deletion, such as a warning that the system is unusable without the package." -msgstr "Informacinis pranešimas, naudotojui rodomas, kai paketas pažymimas pašalinimui. Gali būti įspėjimas, kad sistema be šio paketo taptų neveiksni." +msgid "" +"An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected for " +"deletion, such as a warning that the system is unusable without the package." +msgstr "" +"Informacinis pranešimas, naudotojui rodomas, kai paketas pažymimas " +"pašalinimui. Gali būti įspėjimas, kad sistema be šio paketo taptų neveiksni." #. label for 'Eul' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:617 @@ -1770,8 +2028,12 @@ #. help text for 'Eul' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:619 -msgid "Text of the EULA. This text is displayed before the package installation. If the user does not accept the EULA, the package is not installed." -msgstr "Galutinio naudotojo licencijos sutarties tekstas. Šis tekstas rodomas prieš paketo diegimą. Jei naudotojas nesutinka su licencija, paketas nediegiamas." +msgid "" +"Text of the EULA. This text is displayed before the package installation. If " +"the user does not accept the EULA, the package is not installed." +msgstr "" +"Galutinio naudotojo licencijos sutarties tekstas. Šis tekstas rodomas prieš " +"paketo diegimą. Jei naudotojas nesutinka su licencija, paketas nediegiamas." #. label of key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:660 @@ -1780,8 +2042,12 @@ #. help text for 'REQUIRES' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:662 -msgid "<p>Resolvables that must be installed on the system to meet product requirements.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Priklausomybės, kurios turi būti įdiegtos į sistemą pagal šio produkto reikalavimus.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Resolvables that must be installed on the system to meet product " +"requirements.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Priklausomybės, kurios turi būti įdiegtos į sistemą pagal šio produkto " +"reikalavimus.</p>" #. label of PROVIDES key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:670 @@ -1790,8 +2056,12 @@ #. help text for 'PROVIDES' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:672 -msgid "Capabilities this product provides. They can be used to match <b>requires</b> from others." -msgstr "Šio produkto pateikiamas galimybės. Jos gali būti naudojamos kaip kitų <b>reikalavimų</b> atitikmenys." +msgid "" +"Capabilities this product provides. They can be used to match <b>requires</b> " +"from others." +msgstr "" +"Šio produkto pateikiamas galimybės. Jos gali būti naudojamos kaip kitų <b>" +"reikalavimų</b> atitikmenys." #. label of 'CONFLICTS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:680 @@ -1800,8 +2070,12 @@ #. help text for 'CONFLICTS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:682 -msgid "This resolvable cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that provides the capability is installed." -msgstr "Ši priklausomybė negali būti įdiegta, jei nurodyta priklausomybė ar tas, kuris pateikia galimybes jau įdiegtas." +msgid "" +"This resolvable cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that " +"provides the capability is installed." +msgstr "" +"Ši priklausomybė negali būti įdiegta, jei nurodyta priklausomybė ar tas, " +"kuris pateikia galimybes jau įdiegtas." #. label of 'OBSOLETES' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:690 @@ -1810,8 +2084,12 @@ #. help text for 'OBSOLETES' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:692 -msgid "When this resolvable is installed, it uninstalls any other resolvable with a name matching this keyword." -msgstr "Kai įdiegta ši priklausomybė, ji pašalina bet kurią kitą priklausomybę, atitinkančią šį raktažodį." +msgid "" +"When this resolvable is installed, it uninstalls any other resolvable with a " +"name matching this keyword." +msgstr "" +"Kai įdiegta ši priklausomybė, ji pašalina bet kurią kitą priklausomybę, " +"atitinkančią šį raktažodį." #. label of 'RECOMMENDS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:700 @@ -1820,8 +2098,12 @@ #. help text for 'RECOMMENDS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:702 -msgid "A weak version of <b>requires</b>. An attempt is made to fulfill <b>RECOMMENDS</b>, but they are silently ignored if no match is possible." -msgstr "Lengvesnis variantas nei <b>reikalauja</b>. Siekiama išpildyti tai, kas <b>PATARTINA</b>, tačiau jei nėra atitikmenų – to tyliai nepaisoma." +msgid "" +"A weak version of <b>requires</b>. An attempt is made to fulfill <b>" +"RECOMMENDS</b>, but they are silently ignored if no match is possible." +msgstr "" +"Lengvesnis variantas nei <b>reikalauja</b>. Siekiama išpildyti tai, kas <b>" +"PATARTINA</b>, tačiau jei nėra atitikmenų – to tyliai nepaisoma." #. label of 'SUGGESTS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:710 @@ -1850,8 +2132,12 @@ #. help text for 'productline' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:747 -msgid "A short name for the product, which does not change between service packs and versions." -msgstr "Trumpas produkto pavadinimas, kuris išlieka toks pat tarp pataisos paketų ir versijų." +msgid "" +"A short name for the product, which does not change between service packs and " +"versions." +msgstr "" +"Trumpas produkto pavadinimas, kuris išlieka toks pat tarp pataisos paketų ir " +"versijų." #. table item label #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:754 @@ -1865,8 +2151,12 @@ #. help text for media type #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:761 -msgid "Type of media that will be used for target product. Possible values are: cd, ftp, dvd5, dvd9." -msgstr "Laikmenos tipas, kuris naudojamas paskirtam produktui. Galimos reikšmės: cd, ftp, dvd5, dvd9." +msgid "" +"Type of media that will be used for target product. Possible values are: cd, " +"ftp, dvd5, dvd9." +msgstr "" +"Laikmenos tipas, kuris naudojamas paskirtam produktui. Galimos reikšmės: cd, " +"ftp, dvd5, dvd9." #. table item label #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:768 @@ -1922,7 +2212,8 @@ #. help text #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:1746 msgid "<b>Wait while generating data for add-on...</b><br/>\n" -msgstr "<b>Palaukite, kol bus sukurti papildomo produkto duomenys...</b><br/>\n" +msgstr "" +"<b>Palaukite, kol bus sukurti papildomo produkto duomenys...</b><br/>\n" #. error report #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:2730 Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/audit-laf.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/audit-laf.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/audit-laf.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -20,7 +20,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Command line help text for the audit-laf module @@ -104,7 +105,9 @@ #. translators: command line help text for space_left option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:174 msgid "Space left on log partition (in MByte) when system starts to run low" -msgstr "Paliekama laisva vietos žurnalo skaidinyje (megabaitais), kuomet sistemai pradeda jos trūkti" +msgstr "" +"Paliekama laisva vietos žurnalo skaidinyje (megabaitais), kuomet sistemai " +"pradeda jos trūkti" #. translators: command line help text for space_left_action option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:181 @@ -114,12 +117,15 @@ #. translators: command line help text for space_left_script option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:196 msgid "Script to execute (full path name) if space_left is reached" -msgstr "Įvykdomas scenarijus (pilnas kelias), kai pasiekiama space_left reikšmė" +msgstr "" +"Įvykdomas scenarijus (pilnas kelias), kai pasiekiama space_left reikšmė" #. translators: command line help text for admin_space_left #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:203 msgid "Space left on log partition (in MByte) when system is running low" -msgstr "Paliekama laisva vietos žurnalo skaidinyje (megabaitais), kuomet sistemai jos jau trūksta" +msgstr "" +"Paliekama laisva vietos žurnalo skaidinyje (megabaitais), kuomet sistemai jos " +"jau trūksta" #. command line help text for admin_space_left_action option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:210 @@ -129,7 +135,8 @@ #. translators: command line help text for admin_space_left_script option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:225 msgid "Script to execute (full path name) if admin_space_left is reached" -msgstr "Įvykdomas scenarijus (pilnas kelias), kai pasiekiama admin_space_left reikšmė" +msgstr "" +"Įvykdomas scenarijus (pilnas kelias), kai pasiekiama admin_space_left reikšmė" #. command line help text for action_mail_acct option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:232 @@ -154,7 +161,8 @@ #. translators: command line help text for script on disk error option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:262 msgid "Script to execute (full path name) on disk error" -msgstr "Įvykdomas scenarijus (pilnas kelias), kai įvyksta rašymo į diską klaida" +msgstr "" +"Įvykdomas scenarijus (pilnas kelias), kai įvyksta rašymo į diską klaida" #. command line help text for communication control option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:269 @@ -294,7 +302,8 @@ "To check or change the rules, go back to the rules editor.\n" msgstr "" "Audito konfigūracija yra užrakinta (parinktis -e 2).\n" -"Tai reiškia, kad taisyklės yra užrakintos iki kito operacinės sistemos paleidimo!\n" +"Tai reiškia, kad taisyklės yra užrakintos iki kito operacinės sistemos " +"paleidimo!\n" "Jei tikrai to norite, įsitikinkite ar „-e 2“ yra paskutinis įrašas\n" "taisyklių rinkmenoje. Jei ne, įgalinkite arba uždrauskite patikrinimą.\n" "Norėdami peržiūrėti ar pakeisti taisykles, grįžkite į taisyklių redaktorių.\n" @@ -528,21 +537,33 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:54 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Auditd Log File Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file <i>/var/log/audit/audit.log</i> (default).\n" -"Events may come from the <i>apparmor</i> kernel module, from applications which use <i>libaudit</i> (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file watches).</p>" +"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is " +"responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file <i>" +"/var/log/audit/audit.log</i> (default).\n" +"Events may come from the <i>apparmor</i> kernel module, from applications " +"which use <i>libaudit</i> (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file " +"watches).</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Auditd žurnalo rinkmenos konfigūracija</big></b><br>\n" -"Audito tarnyba yra Linux audito sistemos sudėtinė dalis, kuri atsakinga už visų svarbių audito įvykių įrašymą žurnalo rinkmenoje <i>/var/log/audit/audit.log</i> (numatytuoju atveju).\n" -"Įvykiai gali būti iš <i>apparmor</i> branduolio modulio, iš taikomųjų programų, kurios naudoja <i>libaudit</i> (pvz., PAM), arba incidentai, kurie susiję su taisyklėmis (pvz., rinkmenų stebėtojai).</p>" +"Audito tarnyba yra Linux audito sistemos sudėtinė dalis, kuri atsakinga už " +"visų svarbių audito įvykių įrašymą žurnalo rinkmenoje <i>" +"/var/log/audit/audit.log</i> (numatytuoju atveju).\n" +"Įvykiai gali būti iš <i>apparmor</i> branduolio modulio, iš taikomųjų " +"programų, kurios naudoja <i>libaudit</i> (pvz., PAM), arba incidentai, kurie " +"susiję su taisyklėmis (pvz., rinkmenų stebėtojai).</p>" #. logfile_settings dialog help 2/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:60 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Rules for auditctl</b> dialog offers more information about rules and the possibility to add rules.\n" -"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the manual page ('man auditd.conf').</p>" +"<p>The <b>Rules for auditctl</b> dialog offers more information about rules " +"and the possibility to add rules.\n" +"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the " +"manual page ('man auditd.conf').</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Auditctl taisyklių</b> dialogo lange rodoma daugiau informacijos apie taisykles, suteikiama galimybė nustatyti papildomas taisykles.\n" -"Išsamesnę informaciją apie žurnalo rinkmenų nuostatas rasite vadovo puslapyje („man auditd.conf“).</p>" +"<p><b>Auditctl taisyklių</b> dialogo lange rodoma daugiau informacijos apie " +"taisykles, suteikiama galimybė nustatyti papildomas taisykles.\n" +"Išsamesnę informaciją apie žurnalo rinkmenų nuostatas rasite vadovo puslapyje " +"(„man auditd.conf“).</p>" #. logfile_settings dialog help 3/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:64 @@ -556,61 +577,84 @@ #. logfile_settings dialog help 4/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:68 msgid "" -"<p><b>Format</b>: set <i>RAW</i> to log all data (store in a format exactly as the kernel\n" -"sends it) or <i>NOLOG</i> to discard all audit information instead of writing it on disk (does not affect\n" +"<p><b>Format</b>: set <i>RAW</i> to log all data (store in a format exactly " +"as the kernel\n" +"sends it) or <i>NOLOG</i> to discard all audit information instead of writing " +"it on disk (does not affect\n" "data sent to the dispatcher).</p> " msgstr "" -"<p><b>Formatas</b>: pasirinkus <i>RAW</i>, visi duomenys rašomi į žurnalą (kaupiami būtent tokiu formatu, kokiu branduolys\n" -"juos siunčia); <i>NOLOG</i> – atmetama visa audito informacija, užuot rašius ją į diską (neturi įtakos\n" +"<p><b>Formatas</b>: pasirinkus <i>RAW</i>, visi duomenys rašomi į žurnalą " +"(kaupiami būtent tokiu formatu, kokiu branduolys\n" +"juos siunčia); <i>NOLOG</i> – atmetama visa audito informacija, užuot rašius " +"ją į diską (neturi įtakos\n" "skirstyklei siunčiamiems duomenims).</p> " #. logfile_settings dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:74 msgid "" -"<p><b>Flush</b>: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to <i>INCREMENTAL</i> the\n" -"<b>Frequency</b> parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an explicit flush to disk.\n" -"<i>NONE</i> means: no special effort is made to flush data, <i>DATA</i>: keep data portion synced,\n" +"<p><b>Flush</b>: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to <i>" +"INCREMENTAL</i> the\n" +"<b>Frequency</b> parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an " +"explicit flush to disk.\n" +"<i>NONE</i> means: no special effort is made to flush data, <i>DATA</i>: keep " +"data portion synced,\n" "<i>SYNC</i>: keep data and meta-data fully synced.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Srauto įrašymas</b>: aprašoma, kaip reikia rašyti duomenis į diską. Jei nustatyta <i>INCREMENTAL</i>, \n" -"<b>Dažnumo</b> parametras nurodo, kiek įrašų sukaupti podėlyje prieš juos įrašant į diską.\n" -"<i>NONE</i> reiškia, jog nėra specialių nurodymų rašymui į diską, <i>DATA</i>: sinchronizuoti duomenų porcijas,\n" +"<p><b>Srauto įrašymas</b>: aprašoma, kaip reikia rašyti duomenis į diską. Jei " +"nustatyta <i>INCREMENTAL</i>, \n" +"<b>Dažnumo</b> parametras nurodo, kiek įrašų sukaupti podėlyje prieš juos " +"įrašant į diską.\n" +"<i>NONE</i> reiškia, jog nėra specialių nurodymų rašymui į diską, <i>DATA</i>" +": sinchronizuoti duomenų porcijas,\n" "<i>SYNC</i>: visapusiškai sinchronizuoti duomenis ir metaduomenis.</p>" #. logfile_settings dialog help 6/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:81 msgid "" -"<p>Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take when this\n" +"<p>Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take " +"when this\n" "value is reached via <b>Size and Action</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Nurodomas didžiausias žurnalo rinkmenos dydį (megabaitais) ir veiksmas, kuris atliekamas,\n" +"<p>Nurodomas didžiausias žurnalo rinkmenos dydį (megabaitais) ir veiksmas, " +"kuris atliekamas,\n" "kuomet pasiekiama reikšmė, nurodyta ties <b>Dydis ir veiksmas</b>.</p>\n" #. logfile_settings dialog help 7/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:85 msgid "" -"<p>If the action is set to <i>ROTATE</i> the <b>Number of Log Files</b> specifies the number\n" -"of files to keep. Set to <i>SYSLOG</i>, the audit daemon will write a warning\n" -"to /var/log/messages. With <i>SUSPEND</i> the daemon stops writing records to\n" +"<p>If the action is set to <i>ROTATE</i> the <b>Number of Log Files</b> " +"specifies the number\n" +"of files to keep. Set to <i>SYSLOG</i>, the audit daemon will write a " +"warning\n" +"to /var/log/messages. With <i>SUSPEND</i> the daemon stops writing records " +"to\n" "disk. <i>IGNORE</i> means do nothing, <i>KEEP_LOGS</i> is similar\n" "to ROTATE, but log files are not overwritten.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Jei veiksmas nustatytas <i>ROTATE</i>, <b>Žurnalo rinkmenų skaičius</b> nurodo laikytinų\n" -"rinkmenų skaičių. <i>SYSLOG</i> reiškia: audito tarnyba parašo įspėjimą į /var/log/messages,\n" -"<i>SUSPEND</i>: nustojama rašyti į diską, <i>IGNORE</i>: nieko nedaroma, <i>KEEP_LOGS</i>: panašiai,\n" +"<p>Jei veiksmas nustatytas <i>ROTATE</i>, <b>Žurnalo rinkmenų skaičius</b> " +"nurodo laikytinų\n" +"rinkmenų skaičių. <i>SYSLOG</i> reiškia: audito tarnyba parašo įspėjimą į " +"/var/log/messages,\n" +"<i>SUSPEND</i>: nustojama rašyti į diską, <i>IGNORE</i>: nieko nedaroma, <i>" +"KEEP_LOGS</i>: panašiai,\n" "kaip ROTATE, tačiau žurnalo rinkmenos nėra perrašomos.</p>\n" #. logfile_settings dialog help 8/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:93 msgid "" -"<p><b>Computer Name Format</b> describes how to write the computer name to the\n" +"<p><b>Computer Name Format</b> describes how to write the computer name to " +"the\n" "log file. If <i>USER</i> is set, the <b>User Defined Name</b> is\n" -"used. <i>NONE</i> means no computer name is inserted. <i>HOSTNAME</i> uses the\n" -"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. <i>FQD</i> uses the fully qualified\n" +"used. <i>NONE</i> means no computer name is inserted. <i>HOSTNAME</i> uses " +"the\n" +"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. <i>FQD</i> uses the fully " +"qualified\n" "domain name.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Kompiuterio vardo formatas</b> nurodo, kaip rašyti kompiuterio vardą į žurnalo rinkmeną.\n" -"Jei yra nustatytas <i>USER</i>, naudojamas <b>naudotojo apibrėžtas vardas</b>. \n" +"<p><b>Kompiuterio vardo formatas</b> nurodo, kaip rašyti kompiuterio vardą į " +"žurnalo rinkmeną.\n" +"Jei yra nustatytas <i>USER</i>, naudojamas <b>naudotojo apibrėžtas vardas</b>" +". \n" "<i>NONE</i> reiškia, kad kompiuterio vardas nėra įterpiamas; \n" "<i>HOSTNAME</i> nurodo pavadinimą, kurį grąžina „gethostname“;\n" "<i>FQD</i> – pilnas srities vardas</p>\n" @@ -619,7 +663,8 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:101 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Auditd Dispatcher Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the manual page\n" +"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the " +"manual page\n" "('man auditd.conf').</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Audito skirstyklės konfigūravimas</big></b><br>\n" @@ -629,7 +674,8 @@ #. dispatcher dialog help 2/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:107 msgid "" -"<p><b>Dispatcher</b>: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon and\n" +"<p><b>Dispatcher</b>: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon " +"and\n" "gets all audit events on stdin.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Skirstyklė</b>: Skirstyklės programą paleidžia audito tarnyba ir\n" @@ -638,24 +684,31 @@ #. dispatcher dialog help 3/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:111 msgid "" -"<p><b>Communication</b>: Controls the communication between the daemon and the dispatcher\n" -"program. A <i>lossy</i> communication means that events going to the dispatcher are discarded\n" -"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose <i>lossless</i> if you want a blocking/lossless\n" +"<p><b>Communication</b>: Controls the communication between the daemon and " +"the dispatcher\n" +"program. A <i>lossy</i> communication means that events going to the " +"dispatcher are discarded\n" +"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose <i>lossless</i> if you want a " +"blocking/lossless\n" "communication.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Ryšys</b>: Valdo ryšį tarp tarnybos ir skirstyklės programos.\n" -"<i>Lossy</i> bendravimas reiškia, kad įrašai, ateinantys iki skirtyklės, būna atmetami,\n" -"kuomet eilė (128kB buferio) yra pilna. Pasirinkite <i>lossless</i> jei norite duomenų neatmetančio\n" +"<i>Lossy</i> bendravimas reiškia, kad įrašai, ateinantys iki skirtyklės, būna " +"atmetami,\n" +"kuomet eilė (128kB buferio) yra pilna. Pasirinkite <i>lossless</i> jei norite " +"duomenų neatmetančio\n" "ryšio.</p>" #. dispatcher dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "<p>The dispatcher 'audispd' is an audit event multiplexor.\n" -"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man audispd.conf').</p>" +"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man " +"audispd.conf').</p>" msgstr "" "<p>Skirstyklė „audispd“ yra audito įvykių tankintuvas.\n" -"Daugiau informacijos ieškokite vadovo puslapiuose („man audispd“ ir „man audispd.conf“).</p>" +"Daugiau informacijos ieškokite vadovo puslapiuose („man audispd“ ir „man " +"audispd.conf“).</p>" #. dispatcher dialog help 5/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:122 @@ -663,7 +716,8 @@ "<p><b>Note:</b> The dispatcher program must be owned by 'root', have '0750'\n" " file permissions, and the full path name has to be entered.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Atkreipkite dėmesį:</b> Skirstyklė turi priklausyti naudotojui „root“, turėti „0750“\n" +"<p><b>Atkreipkite dėmesį:</b> Skirstyklė turi priklausyti naudotojui „root“, " +"turėti „0750“\n" " rinkmenos teises, o kelias iki jos turi būti pilnas.</p>\n" #. disk space dialog help 1/6 @@ -674,26 +728,33 @@ "For detailed information, refer to the manual page ('man auditd.conf').</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Auditd disko vietos konfigūravimas</big></b><br>\n" -"Šios nuostatos susijusios su skaidinio, kuriam vedamas žurnalas, disko vieta.\n" +"Šios nuostatos susijusios su skaidinio, kuriam vedamas žurnalas, disko " +"vieta.\n" "Išsamesnę informaciją rasite vadovo puslapyje („man auditd.conf“).</p>\n" #. disk space dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:132 msgid "" -"<p><b>Space Left</b> (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform an <b>Action</b> because\n" +"<p><b>Space Left</b> (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform an " +"<b>Action</b> because\n" "the system is starting to run low on space.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Laisva vieta</b> (megabaitais) pasako audito tarnybai, kada atlikti <b>Veiksmą</b>, nes\n" +"<p><b>Laisva vieta</b> (megabaitais) pasako audito tarnybai, kada atlikti <b>" +"Veiksmą</b>, nes\n" "sistemai pradeda trūkti vietos.</p>" #. disk space dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:136 msgid "" -"<p>The value for <b>Admin Space Left</b> should be lower than above. The system <b>is running\n" -"low</b> on disk space if the value is reached and the specified <b>Action</b> will be performed.</p>" +"<p>The value for <b>Admin Space Left</b> should be lower than above. The " +"system <b>is running\n" +"low</b> on disk space if the value is reached and the specified <b>Action</b> " +"will be performed.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Reikšmė <b>Administratoriaus laisva vieta</b> turi būti mažesnė nei aukščiau nurodyta. Sistemai <b>\n" -"trūks</b> vietos, kai bus pasiekta nurodyta disko vieta; tuomet bus atliktas pasirinktas <b>veiksmas</b>.</p>" +"<p>Reikšmė <b>Administratoriaus laisva vieta</b> turi būti mažesnė nei " +"aukščiau nurodyta. Sistemai <b>\n" +"trūks</b> vietos, kai bus pasiekta nurodyta disko vieta; tuomet bus atliktas " +"pasirinktas <b>veiksmas</b>.</p>" #. disk space dialog hep 4/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:140 @@ -706,10 +767,13 @@ "switches the system to single user mode. <i>HALT</i> shuts down the\n" "system.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Jei veiksmas nustatytas į <i>EMAIL</i> bus siunčiami perspėjimo laiškai į nurodytą paskyrą\n" -"<b>Veiksmo pašto paskyra</b>.<br> <i>SYSLOG</i> reiškia, kad įspėjimai apie disko vietą \n" +"<p>Jei veiksmas nustatytas į <i>EMAIL</i> bus siunčiami perspėjimo laiškai į " +"nurodytą paskyrą\n" +"<b>Veiksmo pašto paskyra</b>.<br> <i>SYSLOG</i> reiškia, kad įspėjimai apie " +"disko vietą \n" "bus rašomi į /var/log/messages; <i>IGNORE</i> – nieko nedaroma; \n" -"<i>EXEC</i> – vykdomas scenarijus, kuris nurodytas ties <b>kelias į scenarijų</b>; \n" +"<i>EXEC</i> – vykdomas scenarijus, kuris nurodytas ties <b>kelias į " +"scenarijų</b>; \n" "<i>SUSPEND</i> – nustojama rašyti į diską; \n" "<i>SINGLE</i> – kompiuterio sistemą perjungia į vieno naudotojo veikseną; \n" "<i>HALT</i> – išjungti sistemą.</p>\n" @@ -717,22 +781,30 @@ #. disk space dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:150 msgid "" -"<p>You can also specify a <b>Disk Full Action</b> (disk has become full already) and\n" -"a <b>Disk Error Action</b> (performed whenever an error is detected while writing to disk).\n" +"<p>You can also specify a <b>Disk Full Action</b> (disk has become full " +"already) and\n" +"a <b>Disk Error Action</b> (performed whenever an error is detected while " +"writing to disk).\n" "Available actions are the same as above (except for <i>EMAIL</i>).</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Jūs taip pat galite apibrėžti <b>Veiksmą, kai diskas pilnas</b> (diskas jau visiškai užpildytas) ir\n" -" <b>Veiksmas, disko klaidos atveju</b> (atliekamas atliekamas, kuomet rašant į diską kyla klaida).\n" -"Galimi tie patys veiksmai kaip ir išvardyti aukščiau (išskyrus <i>EMAIL</i>).</p>" +"<p>Jūs taip pat galite apibrėžti <b>Veiksmą, kai diskas pilnas</b> (diskas " +"jau visiškai užpildytas) ir\n" +" <b>Veiksmas, disko klaidos atveju</b> (atliekamas atliekamas, kuomet rašant " +"į diską kyla klaida).\n" +"Galimi tie patys veiksmai kaip ir išvardyti aukščiau (išskyrus <i>EMAIL</i>" +").</p>" #. disk space dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:156 msgid "" "<p><b>Note:</b> All scripts specified for <i>EXEC</i> must be owned\n" -"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be entered.</p>\n" +"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be " +"entered.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Atkreipkite dėmesį:</b> Visi nurodyti scenarijai iš <i>EXEC</i> privalo priklausyti\n" -"naudotojui „root“, turėti „0750“ rinkmenos leidimus ir turi būti įvestas pilnas kelias.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Atkreipkite dėmesį:</b> Visi nurodyti scenarijai iš <i>EXEC</i> privalo " +"priklausyti\n" +"naudotojui „root“, turėti „0750“ rinkmenos leidimus ir turi būti įvestas " +"pilnas kelias.</p>\n" #. rules dialog help 1/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:160 @@ -745,37 +817,51 @@ "<p><b><big>Auditctl taisyklės</big></b><br>\n" "Šiame dialogo lange galima įjungti arba išjungti syscall\n" "tikrinimą, o taip pat užrakinti audito konfigūravimą.\n" -"Prie taisyklių bus pridėti pasirinkimai, pažymėti ties <b>Pažymėti įgalintinu</b>.</p>" +"Prie taisyklių bus pridėti pasirinkimai, pažymėti ties <b>Pažymėti " +"įgalintinu</b>.</p>" #. rules dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:167 -msgid "<p><b>Note:</b><br>Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next reboot.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Atkreipkite dėmesį:</b><br>Užrakinimo taisyklės reiškia, kad jų negalima pakeisti iki kito operacinės sistemos paleidimo. </p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Note:</b><br>Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next " +"reboot.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Atkreipkite dėmesį:</b><br>Užrakinimo taisyklės reiškia, kad jų " +"negalima pakeisti iki kito operacinės sistemos paleidimo. </p>" #. rules dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:171 msgid "" "<p>Enabling auditing without additional rules will cause the\n" -" applications which use <i>libaudit</i>, e.g. PAM to log to /var/log/audit/audit.log (default).</p> " +" applications which use <i>libaudit</i>, e.g. PAM to log to " +"/var/log/audit/audit.log (default).</p> " msgstr "" -"<p>Įgalinant auditą be papildomų taisyklių, programos, kurios naudoja <i>libaudit</i>,\n" +"<p>Įgalinant auditą be papildomų taisyklių, programos, kurios naudoja <i>" +"libaudit</i>,\n" "pvz., PAM, rašo į /var/log/audit/audit.log žurnalą (numatytuoju atveju).</p> " #. rules dialog help 4/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:175 msgid "" -"<p>You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for advanced users.<br>\n" +"<p>You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for " +"advanced users.<br>\n" "For more information about all options, see 'man auditctl'.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Dialogo lange galite redaguoti taisykles rankiniu būdu, bet tai rekomenduojama tik patyrusiems naudotojams.<br>\n" +"<p>Dialogo lange galite redaguoti taisykles rankiniu būdu, bet tai " +"rekomenduojama tik patyrusiems naudotojams.<br>\n" "Daugiau informacijos apie visas parinktis rasite „man auditctl“.</p>\n" #. rules dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:179 -msgid "<p><b>Check Syntax</b> sends the rules via <i>auditctl</i> to the audit subsystem and checks the syntax.<br><b>Restore</b> restores the settings from /etc/audit/audit.rules.</p>\n" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Check Syntax</b> sends the rules via <i>auditctl</i> to the audit " +"subsystem and checks the syntax.<br><b>Restore</b> restores the settings from " +"/etc/audit/audit.rules.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Nuspaudus <b>Tikrinti sintaksę</b>, siunčiamos taisyklės per <i>auditctl</i> į audito posistemę ir tikrina\n" -" sintaksę.<br>Mygtuku <b>Atstatyti</b> atstatomos nuostatos iš /etc/audit/audit.rules.</p>\n" +"<p>Nuspaudus <b>Tikrinti sintaksę</b>, siunčiamos taisyklės per <i>auditctl<" +"/i> į audito posistemę ir tikrina\n" +" sintaksę.<br>Mygtuku <b>Atstatyti</b> atstatomos nuostatos iš " +"/etc/audit/audit.rules.</p>\n" #. rules dialog help 6/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:183 @@ -786,8 +872,10 @@ "an example rules file.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Mygtukas <b>Atmesti ir atstatyti</b> naudojamas pakeitimų atmetimui ir\n" -"taisyklių atstatymui (iš ankstesnių sintaksės patvirtinimų), kartu iššaukiant <i>auditctl</i>.<br>\n" -"Mygtukas <b>Įkelti</b> atveria pasirinktos rinkmenos dialogo langą, kad galėtumėte įkelti\n" +"taisyklių atstatymui (iš ankstesnių sintaksės patvirtinimų), kartu iššaukiant " +"<i>auditctl</i>.<br>\n" +"Mygtukas <b>Įkelti</b> atveria pasirinktos rinkmenos dialogo langą, kad " +"galėtumėte įkelti\n" "pavyzdinę taisyklių rinkmeną.</p>\n" #. Header of tab in tab widget @@ -818,8 +906,12 @@ #. skip it during initial and second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:318 -msgid "<p>To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package <b>%1</b> must be installed.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norint tęsti Linux audito konfigūravimą, reikia įdiegti <b>%1</b> paketą.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package <b>%1</b> " +"must be installed.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norint tęsti Linux audito konfigūravimą, reikia įdiegti <b>%1</b> paketą.<" +"/p>" #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:321 msgid "<p>Install it now?</p>" @@ -895,6 +987,7 @@ #. question shown in a popup about start of audit daemon #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:463 +#| msgid "Do you want to skip Registration?" msgid "" "Do you want to start it and enable start at boot\n" "or only start the daemon for now?" @@ -908,6 +1001,11 @@ #. message about loaded kernel module #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:470 +#| msgid "" +#| " The 'apparmor' kernel module is loaded.\n" +#| "The kernel uses a running audit daemon to log audit\n" +#| "events to /var/log/audit/audit.log (default). \n" +#| "Do you want to start the daemon now?" msgid "" "The 'apparmor' kernel module is loaded.\n" "The kernel uses a running audit daemon to log audit\n" @@ -919,6 +1017,7 @@ #. Headline of a popup #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:477 +#| msgid "Start daemon." msgid "Start of Audit Daemon" msgstr "Audito tarnybos paleidimas." @@ -932,6 +1031,7 @@ msgstr "Palei&sti" #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:479 +#| msgid "Do not install" msgid "&Do not start" msgstr "&Nepaleisti" Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/auth-client.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/auth-client.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/auth-client.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -16,7 +16,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && (n%" +"100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. translators: command line help text for authentication client module @@ -36,25 +37,30 @@ #. Create parameter editor controls (label, input, help text) and return them. #: src/lib/yauthclient/initial_customisation_dialog.rb:70 +#| msgid "None" msgid "None." msgstr "Nieko." #. Render controls for editing parameter values, according to parameter data type. #: src/lib/yauthclient/initial_customisation_dialog.rb:105 +#| msgid "Modem Parameters" msgid "Mandatory Parameters" msgstr "Privalomi parametrai" #: src/lib/yauthclient/initial_customisation_dialog.rb:112 +#| msgid "Op&tional Parameter File" msgid "Optional Parameters" msgstr "Nebūtini parametras" #. Check that all mandatory parameters are set #: src/lib/yauthclient/initial_customisation_dialog.rb:138 +#| msgid "Create the following databases:" msgid "Please complete all of the following mandatory parameters:\n" msgstr "Užpildykite visus privalomus parametrus:\n" #. Render overview and edit buttons on left side, config editor on right side. #: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:55 +#| msgid "Authenticated Clients" msgid "Authentication Client Config" msgstr "Tapatybės nustatymo konfigūracija klientui" @@ -68,23 +74,28 @@ msgstr "Sukurti namų katalogą prisijungimo metu" #: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:68 +#| msgid "Enable the NTP daemon" msgid "Enable SSSD daemon" msgstr "Įgalinti SSSD tarnybą" #: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:73 +#| msgid "Xen Section" msgid "Sections" msgstr "Skyriai" #: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:76 +#| msgid "Network Services" msgid "New Service/Domain" msgstr "Nauja paslauga/sritis" #: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:77 +#| msgid "Selected Service" msgid "Delete Service/Domain" msgstr "Šalinti paslaugą/sritį" #. For the currently selection config section, render customised parameters and values in a table. #: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:112 +#| msgid "Custom Registration Server" msgid "Customisation - %s" msgstr "Derinimas - %s" @@ -104,10 +115,12 @@ #. For the currently selected config section, render list of additional parameters for customisation. #: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:135 +#| msgid "Modem Parameters" msgid "More Parameters" msgstr "Kiti parametrai" #: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:138 +#| msgid "Filter:" msgid "Name filter:" msgstr "Kintamųjų vardų filtras:" @@ -130,10 +143,12 @@ #. Delete the chosen section (domain or service) #: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:221 +#| msgid "Really delete section %1?" msgid "You may not delete section SSSD." msgstr "Negalite pašalinti SSSD skyriaus" #: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:223 +#| msgid "Do you really want to delete this entry?" msgid "Do you really wish to delete section %s?" msgstr "Tikrai norite pašalinti %s skyrių?" @@ -144,18 +159,21 @@ #. Warn against removal of important parameters #: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:272 +#| msgid "Modem Parameter Details" msgid "Confirm parameter removal: " msgstr "Patvirtinti parametro šalinimą: " #: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:273 msgid "" -"The parameter is important. Removal of the parameter may cause SSSD startup failure.\n" +"The parameter is important. Removal of the parameter may cause SSSD startup " +"failure.\n" "Please consult SSSD manual page before moving on.\n" "Do you still wish to continue?" msgstr "" #. Save settings - validate #: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:303 +#| msgid "N&IS domain name:" msgid "No domain enabled" msgstr "Neįgalinta nė viena sritis" @@ -173,6 +191,7 @@ #. Render input box and dropdowns for service/domain creation #: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:49 +#| msgid "Would you like to abort or try again?\n" msgid "Would you like to enable another service or join a domain?" msgstr "Ar norėtumėte įgalinti kitą paslaugą arba pridėti sritį?" @@ -191,10 +210,12 @@ msgstr "Srities vardas (pavyzdys.lt):" #: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:64 +#| msgid "Identification" msgid "Identification provider:" msgstr "Kas suteikia tapatybę:" #: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:69 +#| msgid "&Authentication Mode" msgid "Authentication provider:" msgstr "Kas nustato tapatybę:" @@ -204,15 +225,18 @@ #. Create new service #: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:105 +#| msgid "These services will be enabled" msgid "There are no more services to be enabled." msgstr "Įgalintinų paslaugų nebėra." #. Create new domain #: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:123 +#| msgid "Enter a name for the new profile." msgid "Please enter a name for the new domain." msgstr "Įveskite naujos srities vardą." #: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:126 +#| msgid "This domain is already defined." msgid "The domain name is already in-use." msgstr "Ši sritis jau naudojama." @@ -222,7 +246,8 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:114 -msgid "Comma separated list of services that are started when sssd itself starts." +msgid "" +"Comma separated list of services that are started when sssd itself starts." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:115 @@ -234,44 +259,65 @@ "Palaikomos paslaugos: nss, pam, sudo, autofs, ssh" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:120 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:174 -msgid "Number of times services should attempt to reconnect in the event of a Data Provider crash or restart before they give up" +msgid "" +"Number of times services should attempt to reconnect in the event of a Data " +"Provider crash or restart before they give up" msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:125 -msgid "SSSD can use more domains at the same time, but at least one must be configured or SSSD won't start." +msgid "" +"SSSD can use more domains at the same time, but at least one must be " +"configured or SSSD won't start." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:126 -msgid "This parameter contains the list of domains in the order these will be queried." +msgid "" +"This parameter contains the list of domains in the order these will be " +"queried." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:130 -msgid "Default regular expression that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components" +msgid "" +"Default regular expression that describes how to parse the string containing " +"user name and domain into these components" msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:134 -msgid "The default printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple into a fully qualified name." +msgid "" +"The default printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a " +"(name, domain) tuple into a fully qualified name." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:138 -msgid "SSSD monitors the state of resolv.conf to identify when it needs to update its internal DNS resolver." +msgid "" +"SSSD monitors the state of resolv.conf to identify when it needs to update " +"its internal DNS resolver." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:139 -msgid "By default, we will attempt to use inotify for this, and will fall back to polling resolv.conf every five seconds if inotify cannot be used." +msgid "" +"By default, we will attempt to use inotify for this, and will fall back to " +"polling resolv.conf every five seconds if inotify cannot be used." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:143 -msgid "Directory on the filesystem where SSSD should store Kerberos replay cache files." +msgid "" +"Directory on the filesystem where SSSD should store Kerberos replay cache " +"files." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:147 -msgid "This string will be used as a default domain name for all names without a domain name component." +msgid "" +"This string will be used as a default domain name for all names without a " +"domain name component." msgstr "" #. Define Global Services Parameters #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:154 -msgid "Bit mask that indicates which debug levels will be visible. 0x0010 is the default value as well as the lowest allowed value, 0xFFF0 is the most verbose mode." +msgid "" +"Bit mask that indicates which debug levels will be visible. 0x0010 is the " +"default value as well as the lowest allowed value, 0xFFF0 is the most verbose " +"mode." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:159 @@ -287,28 +333,42 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:179 -msgid "This option specifies the maximum number of file descriptors that may be opened at one time by this SSSD process." +msgid "" +"This option specifies the maximum number of file descriptors that may be " +"opened at one time by this SSSD process." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:184 -msgid "This option specifies the number of seconds that a client of an SSSD process can hold onto a file descriptor without communicating on it." +msgid "" +"This option specifies the number of seconds that a client of an SSSD process " +"can hold onto a file descriptor without communicating on it." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:189 -msgid "If a service is not responding to ping checks (see the “timeout” option), it is first sent the SIGTERM signal that instructs it to quit gracefully." +msgid "" +"If a service is not responding to ping checks (see the “timeout” option), it " +"is first sent the SIGTERM signal that instructs it to quit gracefully." msgstr "" #. NSS configuration options #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:197 -msgid "How many seconds should cache nss_sss enumerations (requests for info about all users)?" +msgid "" +"How many seconds should cache nss_sss enumerations (requests for info about " +"all users)?" msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:202 -msgid "The entry cache can be set to automatically update entries in the background if they are requested beyond a percentage of the entry_cache_timeout value for the domain." +msgid "" +"The entry cache can be set to automatically update entries in the background " +"if they are requested beyond a percentage of the entry_cache_timeout value " +"for the domain." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:207 -msgid "Specifies for how many seconds nss_sss should cache negative cache hits (that is, queries for invalid database entries, like nonexistent ones) before asking the back end again." +msgid "" +"Specifies for how many seconds nss_sss should cache negative cache hits (that " +"is, queries for invalid database entries, like nonexistent ones) before " +"asking the back end again." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:213 @@ -320,15 +380,20 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:224 -msgid "If you want filtered user to still be group members set this option to false." +msgid "" +"If you want filtered user to still be group members set this option to false." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:228 -msgid "Override the user's home directory. You can either provide an absolute value or a template." +msgid "" +"Override the user's home directory. You can either provide an absolute value " +"or a template." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:232 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1185 -msgid "Set a default template for a user's home directory if one is not specified explicitly by the domain's data provider." +msgid "" +"Set a default template for a user's home directory if one is not specified " +"explicitly by the domain's data provider." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:236 @@ -344,36 +409,50 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:249 -msgid "The default shell to use if an allowed shell is not installed on the machine." +msgid "" +"The default shell to use if an allowed shell is not installed on the machine." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:253 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1189 -msgid "The default shell to use if the provider does not return one during lookup." +msgid "" +"The default shell to use if the provider does not return one during lookup." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:258 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:301 -msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which the list of subdomains will be considered valid." +msgid "" +"Specifies time in seconds for which the list of subdomains will be considered " +"valid." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:263 -msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which records in the in-memory cache will be valid." +msgid "" +"Specifies time in seconds for which records in the in-memory cache will be " +"valid." msgstr "" #. PAM configuration options #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:271 -msgid "If the authentication provider is offline, how long we should allow cached logins (in days since the last successful online login)." +msgid "" +"If the authentication provider is offline, how long we should allow cached " +"logins (in days since the last successful online login)." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:276 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:281 -msgid "The time in minutes which has to pass after offline_failed_login_attempts has been reached before a new login attempt is possible." +msgid "" +"The time in minutes which has to pass after offline_failed_login_attempts has " +"been reached before a new login attempt is possible." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:286 -msgid "Controls what kind of messages are shown to the user during authentication." +msgid "" +"Controls what kind of messages are shown to the user during authentication." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:291 -msgid "For any PAM request while SSSD is online, the SSSD will attempt to immediately update the cached identity information for the user in order to ensure that authentication takes place with the latest information." +msgid "" +"For any PAM request while SSSD is online, the SSSD will attempt to " +"immediately update the cached identity information for the user in order to " +"ensure that authentication takes place with the latest information." msgstr "" #. The kerberos domain section @@ -384,27 +463,37 @@ #. SUDO configuration options #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:309 -msgid "Whether or not to evaluate the sudoNotBefore and sudoNotAfter attributes that implement time-dependent sudoers entries." +msgid "" +"Whether or not to evaluate the sudoNotBefore and sudoNotAfter attributes that " +"implement time-dependent sudoers entries." msgstr "" #. AUTOFS configuration options #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:317 -msgid "Specifies for how many seconds the autofs responder should cache negative hits before asking the back end again." +msgid "" +"Specifies for how many seconds the autofs responder should cache negative " +"hits before asking the back end again." msgstr "" #. SSH configuration options #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:325 -msgid "Whether or not to hash host names and addresses in the managed known_hosts file." +msgid "" +"Whether or not to hash host names and addresses in the managed known_hosts " +"file." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:330 -msgid "How many seconds to keep a host in the managed known_hosts file after its host keys were requested." +msgid "" +"How many seconds to keep a host in the managed known_hosts file after its " +"host keys were requested." msgstr "" #. DOMAIN SECTIONS #. These configuration options can be present in a domain configuration section, that is, in a section called “[domain/NAME]” #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:339 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:344 -msgid "UID and GID limits for the domain. If a domain contains an entry that is outside these limits, it is ignored." +msgid "" +"UID and GID limits for the domain. If a domain contains an entry that is " +"outside these limits, it is ignored." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:350 @@ -412,35 +501,51 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:355 -msgid "If the service does not terminate after “force_timeout” seconds, the monitor will forcibly shut it down by sending a SIGKILL signal." +msgid "" +"If the service does not terminate after “force_timeout” seconds, the monitor " +"will forcibly shut it down by sending a SIGKILL signal." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:360 -msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgid "" +"How many seconds nss_sss should consider entries valid before asking the " +"backend again." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:365 -msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider user entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgid "" +"How many seconds nss_sss should consider user entries valid before asking the " +"backend again." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:370 -msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider group entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgid "" +"How many seconds nss_sss should consider group entries valid before asking " +"the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:375 -msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider netgroup entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgid "" +"How many seconds nss_sss should consider netgroup entries valid before asking " +"the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:380 -msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider service entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgid "" +"How many seconds nss_sss should consider service entries valid before asking " +"the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:385 -msgid "How many seconds sudo should consider rules valid before asking the backend again." +msgid "" +"How many seconds sudo should consider rules valid before asking the backend " +"again." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:390 -msgid "How many seconds the autofs service should consider automounter maps valid before asking the backend again." +msgid "" +"How many seconds the autofs service should consider automounter maps valid " +"before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:396 @@ -448,7 +553,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:401 -msgid "Number of days entries are left in cache after last successful login before being removed during a cleanup of the cache." +msgid "" +"Number of days entries are left in cache after last successful login before " +"being removed during a cleanup of the cache." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:408 @@ -456,7 +563,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:413 -msgid "Use the full name and domain (as formatted by the domain's full_name_format) as the user's login name reported to NSS." +msgid "" +"Use the full name and domain (as formatted by the domain's full_name_format) " +"as the user's login name reported to NSS." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:420 @@ -468,7 +577,8 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:431 -msgid "The provider which should handle change password operations for the domain." +msgid "" +"The provider which should handle change password operations for the domain." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:437 @@ -492,23 +602,33 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:466 -msgid "Regular expression for this domain that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components." +msgid "" +"Regular expression for this domain that describes how to parse the string " +"containing user name and domain into these components." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:471 -msgid "A printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple for this domain into a fully qualified name." +msgid "" +"A printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, " +"domain) tuple for this domain into a fully qualified name." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:477 -msgid "Provides the ability to select preferred address family to use when performing DNS lookups." +msgid "" +"Provides the ability to select preferred address family to use when " +"performing DNS lookups." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:482 -msgid "Defines the amount of time (in seconds) to wait for a reply from the DNS resolver before assuming that it is unreachable." +msgid "" +"Defines the amount of time (in seconds) to wait for a reply from the DNS " +"resolver before assuming that it is unreachable." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:486 -msgid "If service discovery is used in the back end, specifies the domain part of the service discovery DNS query." +msgid "" +"If service discovery is used in the back end, specifies the domain part of " +"the service discovery DNS query." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:490 @@ -520,11 +640,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:500 -msgid "When a user or group is looked up by name in the proxy provider, a second lookup by ID is performed to 'canonicalize' the name in case the requested name was an alias." +msgid "" +"When a user or group is looked up by name in the proxy provider, a second " +"lookup by ID is performed to 'canonicalize' the name in case the requested " +"name was an alias." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:505 -msgid "Use this homedir as default value for all subdomains within this domain." +msgid "" +"Use this homedir as default value for all subdomains within this domain." msgstr "" #. Following options will be provided by SSSD's 'simple' access-control provider @@ -533,33 +657,46 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:516 -msgid "Comma separated list of groups who are allowed to log in. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgid "" +"Comma separated list of groups who are allowed to log in. This applies only " +"to groups within this SSSD domain." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:521 -msgid "Comma separated list of groups that are explicitly denied access. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgid "" +"Comma separated list of groups that are explicitly denied access. This " +"applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." msgstr "" #. The local domain section #. This section contains settings for domain that stores users and groups in SSSD native database, that is, a domain that uses id_provider=local. #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:530 -msgid "The tools append the login name to base_directory and use that as the home directory." +msgid "" +"The tools append the login name to base_directory and use that as the home " +"directory." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:535 -msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be created by default for new users." +msgid "" +"Indicate if a home directory should be created by default for new users." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:540 -msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be removed by default for deleted users." +msgid "" +"Indicate if a home directory should be removed by default for deleted users." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:545 -msgid "Used by sss_useradd(8) to specify the default permissions on a newly created home directory." +msgid "" +"Used by sss_useradd(8) to specify the default permissions on a newly created " +"home directory." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:550 -msgid "The skeleton directory, which contains files and directories to be copied in the user's home directory, when the home directory is created by sss_useradd(8)" +msgid "" +"The skeleton directory, which contains files and directories to be copied in " +"the user's home directory, when the home directory is created by " +"sss_useradd(8)" msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:555 @@ -580,18 +717,24 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:579 -msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." +msgid "" +"Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD " +"should connect in the order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:585 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:591 -msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference to change the password of a user." +msgid "" +"Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD " +"should connect in the order of preference to change the password of a user." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:597 +#| msgid "Base DN for the database" msgid "Base DN for LDAP search" msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:604 +#| msgid "LDAP secure port" msgid "LDAP schema type" msgstr "LDAP schemos tipas" @@ -628,7 +771,8 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:648 -msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains the name of the user's home directory." +msgid "" +" The LDAP attribute that contains the name of the user's home directory." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:653 @@ -644,67 +788,106 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:668 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:873 -msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." +msgid "" +"The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the " +"parent object." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:673 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (date of the last password change)." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " +"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (date of the last " +"password change)." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:678 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (minimum password age)." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " +"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (minimum password " +"age)." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:683 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (maximum password age)." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " +"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (maximum password " +"age)." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:688 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password warning period)." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " +"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password warning " +"period)." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:693 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password inactivity period)." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " +"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password " +"inactivity period)." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:698 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow or ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (account expiration date)." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow or ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, this " +"parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its " +"shadow(5) counterpart (account expiration date)." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:703 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time of last password change in kerberos." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of " +"an LDAP attribute storing the date and time of last password change in " +"kerberos." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:708 -msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time when current password expires." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of " +"an LDAP attribute storing the date and time when current password expires." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:713 -msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the expiration time of the account." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of " +"an LDAP attribute storing the expiration time of the account." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:718 -msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the user account control bit field." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of " +"an LDAP attribute storing the user account control bit field." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:723 -msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds or equivalent, this parameter determines if access is allowed or not." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds or equivalent, this parameter " +"determines if access is allowed or not." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:728 -msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines if access is allowed or not." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines if " +"access is allowed or not." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:733 -msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines until which date access is granted." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines until " +"which date access is granted." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:738 -msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines the hours of a day in a week when access is granted." +msgid "" +"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines the " +"hours of a day in a week when access is granted." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:743 -msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the user's Kerberos User Principal Name (UPN)." +msgid "" +"The LDAP attribute that contains the user's Kerberos User Principal Name " +"(UPN)." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:747 @@ -712,7 +895,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:752 -msgid "Some directory servers, for example Active Directory, might deliver the realm part of the UPN in lower case, which might cause the authentication to fail." +msgid "" +"Some directory servers, for example Active Directory, might deliver the realm " +"part of the UPN in lower case, which might cause the authentication to fail." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:753 @@ -720,11 +905,16 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:758 -msgid "Specifies how many seconds SSSD has to wait before refreshing its cache of enumerated records." +msgid "" +"Specifies how many seconds SSSD has to wait before refreshing its cache of " +"enumerated records." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:763 -msgid "Determine how often to check the cache for inactive entries (such as groups with no members and users who have never logged in) and remove them to save space." +msgid "" +"Determine how often to check the cache for inactive entries (such as groups " +"with no members and users who have never logged in) and remove them to save " +"space." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:768 @@ -736,11 +926,17 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:778 -msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSD will use the presence of the authorizedService attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." +msgid "" +"If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSD will " +"use the presence of the authorizedService attribute in the user's LDAP entry " +"to determine access privilege." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:783 -msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=host, SSSD will use the presence of the host attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." +msgid "" +"If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=host, SSSD will use the " +"presence of the host attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access " +"privilege." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:793 @@ -768,19 +964,30 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:823 -msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." +msgid "" +" The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the " +"parent object." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:829 -msgid "If ldap_schema is set to a schema format that supports nested groups (e.g. RFC2307bis), then this option controls how many levels of nesting SSSD will follow." +msgid "" +"If ldap_schema is set to a schema format that supports nested groups (e.g. " +"RFC2307bis), then this option controls how many levels of nesting SSSD will " +"follow." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:835 -msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which may speed up group lookup operations on deployments with complex or deep nested groups." +msgid "" +"This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific " +"feature which may speed up group lookup operations on deployments with " +"complex or deep nested groups." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:841 -msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which might speed up initgroups operations (most notably when dealing with complex or deep nested groups)." +msgid "" +"This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific " +"feature which might speed up initgroups operations (most notably when dealing " +"with complex or deep nested groups)." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:847 @@ -796,11 +1003,13 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:863 -msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the (host, user, domain) netgroup triples." +msgid "" +"The LDAP attribute that contains the (host, user, domain) netgroup triples." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:868 -msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP netgroup object." +msgid "" +"The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP netgroup object." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:878 @@ -808,7 +1017,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:883 -msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the name of service attributes and their aliases." +msgid "" +"The LDAP attribute that contains the name of service attributes and their " +"aliases." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:888 @@ -816,35 +1027,52 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:893 -msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the protocols understood by this service." +msgid "" +"The LDAP attribute that contains the protocols understood by this service." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:899 -msgid "An optional base DN, search scope and LDAP filter to restrict LDAP searches for this attribute type." +msgid "" +"An optional base DN, search scope and LDAP filter to restrict LDAP searches " +"for this attribute type." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:904 -msgid " Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." +msgid "" +" Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches are allowed to run " +"before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode " +"is entered)." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:909 -msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches for user and group enumerations are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." +msgid "" +"Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches for user and group " +"enumerations are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results " +"are returned (and offline mode is entered)." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:914 -msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) after which the poll(2)/select(2) following a connect(2) returns in case of no activity." +msgid "" +"Specifies the timeout (in seconds) after which the poll(2)/select(2) " +"following a connect(2) returns in case of no activity." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:919 -msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after which calls to synchronous LDAP APIs will abort if no response is received." +msgid "" +"Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after which calls to synchronous LDAP APIs " +"will abort if no response is received." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:924 -msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) that a connection to an LDAP server will be maintained." +msgid "" +"Specifies a timeout (in seconds) that a connection to an LDAP server will be " +"maintained." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:929 -msgid "Specify the number of records to retrieve from LDAP in a single request. Some LDAP servers enforce a maximum limit per-request." +msgid "" +"Specify the number of records to retrieve from LDAP in a single request. Some " +"LDAP servers enforce a maximum limit per-request." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:934 @@ -852,11 +1080,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:938 -msgid "When communicating with an LDAP server using SASL, specify the minimum security level necessary to establish the connection." +msgid "" +"When communicating with an LDAP server using SASL, specify the minimum " +"security level necessary to establish the connection." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:943 -msgid "Specify the number of group members that must be missing from the internal cache in order to trigger a dereference lookup." +msgid "" +"Specify the number of group members that must be missing from the internal " +"cache in order to trigger a dereference lookup." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:950 @@ -864,11 +1096,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:954 -msgid "Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate Authorities that sssd will recognize." +msgid "" +"Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate " +"Authorities that sssd will recognize." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:958 -msgid "Specifies the path of a directory that contains Certificate Authority certificates in separate individual files." +msgid "" +"Specifies the path of a directory that contains Certificate Authority " +"certificates in separate individual files." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:962 @@ -884,11 +1120,16 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:976 -msgid "Specifies that the id_provider connection must also use tls to protect the channel." +msgid "" +"Specifies that the id_provider connection must also use tls to protect the " +"channel." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:981 -msgid "Specifies that SSSD should attempt to map user and group IDs from the ldap_user_objectsid and ldap_group_objectsid attributes instead of relying on ldap_user_uid_number and ldap_group_gid_number." +msgid "" +"Specifies that SSSD should attempt to map user and group IDs from the " +"ldap_user_objectsid and ldap_group_objectsid attributes instead of relying on " +"ldap_user_uid_number and ldap_group_gid_number." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:985 @@ -904,7 +1145,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1000 -msgid "If set to true, the LDAP library would perform a reverse lookup to canonicalize the host name during a SASL bind." +msgid "" +"If set to true, the LDAP library would perform a reverse lookup to " +"canonicalize the host name during a SASL bind." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1005 @@ -920,7 +1163,8 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1020 -msgid "Select the policy to evaluate the password expiration on the client side." +msgid "" +"Select the policy to evaluate the password expiration on the client side." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1025 @@ -932,19 +1176,28 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1034 -msgid "Specifies the service name to use to find an LDAP server which allows password changes when service discovery is enabled." +msgid "" +"Specifies the service name to use to find an LDAP server which allows " +"password changes when service discovery is enabled." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1039 -msgid "Specifies whether to update the ldap_user_shadow_last_change attribute with days since the Epoch after a password change operation." +msgid "" +"Specifies whether to update the ldap_user_shadow_last_change attribute with " +"days since the Epoch after a password change operation." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1044 -msgid "If using access_provider = ldap and ldap_access_order = filter (default), this option is mandatory. It specifies an LDAP search filter criterion that must be met for the user to be granted access on this host." +msgid "" +"If using access_provider = ldap and ldap_access_order = filter (default), " +"this option is mandatory. It specifies an LDAP search filter criterion that " +"must be met for the user to be granted access on this host." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1049 -msgid " With this option a client side evaluation of access control attributes can be enabled." +msgid "" +" With this option a client side evaluation of access control attributes can " +"be enabled." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1055 @@ -956,7 +1209,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1065 -msgid "Allows to retain local users as members of an LDAP group for servers that use the RFC2307 schema." +msgid "" +"Allows to retain local users as members of an LDAP group for servers that use " +"the RFC2307 schema." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1078 @@ -964,7 +1219,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1082 -msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the Kerberos servers to which SSSD should connect, in the order of preference." +msgid "" +"Specifies the comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the " +"Kerberos servers to which SSSD should connect, in the order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1087 @@ -972,7 +1229,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1091 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1096 -msgid "If the change password service is not running on the KDC, alternative servers can be defined here." +msgid "" +"If the change password service is not running on the KDC, alternative servers " +"can be defined here." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1101 @@ -984,27 +1243,39 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1111 -msgid " Timeout in seconds after an online authentication request or change password request is aborted." +msgid "" +" Timeout in seconds after an online authentication request or change password " +"request is aborted." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1116 -msgid "Verify with the help of krb5_keytab that the TGT obtained has not been spoofed." +msgid "" +"Verify with the help of krb5_keytab that the TGT obtained has not been " +"spoofed." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1121 -msgid "The location of the keytab to use when validating credentials obtained from KDCs." +msgid "" +"The location of the keytab to use when validating credentials obtained from " +"KDCs." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1126 -msgid "Store the password of the user if the provider is offline and use it to request a TGT when the provider comes online again." +msgid "" +"Store the password of the user if the provider is offline and use it to " +"request a TGT when the provider comes online again." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1130 -msgid "Request a renewable ticket with a total lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." +msgid "" +"Request a renewable ticket with a total lifetime, given as an integer " +"immediately followed by a time unit." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1134 -msgid "Request ticket with a with a lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." +msgid "" +"Request ticket with a with a lifetime, given as an integer immediately " +"followed by a time unit." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1138 @@ -1012,7 +1283,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1143 -msgid "Enables flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) for Kerberos pre-authentication." +msgid "" +"Enables flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) for Kerberos " +"pre-authentication." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1147 @@ -1033,11 +1306,16 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1173 -msgid "The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the AD servers to which SSSD should connect in order of preference." +msgid "" +"The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the AD servers to " +"which SSSD should connect in order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1177 -msgid "Optional. May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name used in the Active Directory domain to identify this host." +msgid "" +"Optional. May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the " +"fully qualified name used in the Active Directory domain to identify this " +"host." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1181 @@ -1045,11 +1323,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1194 -msgid " Specifies the lower bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgid "" +" Specifies the lower bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping " +"Active Directory user and group SIDs." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1199 -msgid "Specifies the upper bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgid "" +"Specifies the upper bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active " +"Directory user and group SIDs." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1204 @@ -1065,7 +1347,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1217 -msgid "Changes the behavior of the ID-mapping algorithm to behave more similarly to winbind's “idmap_autorid” algorithm." +msgid "" +"Changes the behavior of the ID-mapping algorithm to behave more similarly to " +"winbind's “idmap_autorid” algorithm." msgstr "" #. The Active Directory domain section @@ -1078,15 +1362,20 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1238 -msgid "May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name." +msgid "" +"May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully " +"qualified name." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1243 +#| msgid "The automounter package will be installed.\n" msgid "The automounter location this IPA client will be using." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1248 -msgid "This option tells SSSD to automatically update the DNS server built into FreeIPA v2 with the IP address of this client." +msgid "" +"This option tells SSSD to automatically update the DNS server built into " +"FreeIPA v2 with the IP address of this client." msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1253 @@ -1094,7 +1383,8 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1257 -msgid "Choose the interface whose IP address should be used for dynamic DNS updates." +msgid "" +"Choose the interface whose IP address should be used for dynamic DNS updates." msgstr "" #. autofs may only start after sssd is started @@ -1103,7 +1393,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthClient.rb:232 -msgid "Failed to start %s service. Please use system journal (journalctl -n -u %s) to diagnose." +msgid "" +"Failed to start %s service. Please use system journal (journalctl -n -u %s) " +"to diagnose." msgstr "" #. end Export Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/autoinst.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/autoinst.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/autoinst.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -17,7 +17,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. progress step title @@ -125,8 +126,10 @@ #. if we get no argument or map of options we are not in command line #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:66 -msgid "Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" -msgstr "Priemonė sukurti AutoYaST profilį, remiantis dabartinės sistemos konfigūracija" +msgid "" +"Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" +msgstr "" +"Priemonė sukurti AutoYaST profilį, remiantis dabartinės sistemos konfigūracija" #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:76 msgid "known modules: %1" @@ -138,6 +141,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Warning that an already existing autoyast configuration file will be overwritten. #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:114 +#| msgid "%1 exists! Really overwrite?" msgid "File %s exists! Really overwrite?" msgstr "Rinkmena %1 jau yra! Tikrai perrašyti?" @@ -147,6 +151,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: %s is path where profile can be found #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:120 +#| msgid "The resulting autoyast profile can be found in /root/autoinst.xml." msgid "The resulting autoyast profile can be found in %s." msgstr "Sukuriamą autoyast profilį rasite %s." @@ -154,22 +159,29 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:170 msgid "" "<p>Using this dialog, copy the contents of the file and specify the final\n" -"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified location.</p>" +"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified " +"location.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Naudodami šį skydelį, nukopijuokite rinkmenos turinį ir nurodykite galutinį\n" +"<p>Naudodami šį skydelį, nukopijuokite rinkmenos turinį ir nurodykite " +"galutinį\n" "kelią įdiegtoje sistemoje. YaST nukopijuos šią rinkmeną į nurodytą vietą.</p>" #. help 2/2 #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:177 msgid "" "<p>To protect copied files, set the owner and the permissions of the files.\n" -"Set the owner using the syntax <i>userid:groupid</i>. Permissions can be a symbolic\n" -"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit pattern for the\n" +"Set the owner using the syntax <i>userid:groupid</i>. Permissions can be a " +"symbolic\n" +"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit " +"pattern for the\n" "new permissions.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Norėdami apsaugoti nukopijuotas rinkmenas, nustatykite rinkmenų savininką ir teises.\n" -"Nustatykite savininką naudodami sintaksę <i>NaudotojoID:GrupėsID</i>. Teisės gali būti\n" -"išreikštos simboline atliekamų pakeitimų atitiktimi, arba aštuntainiu skaičiumi, atitinkančiu naujų\n" +"<p>Norėdami apsaugoti nukopijuotas rinkmenas, nustatykite rinkmenų savininką " +"ir teises.\n" +"Nustatykite savininką naudodami sintaksę <i>NaudotojoID:GrupėsID</i>. Teisės " +"gali būti\n" +"išreikštos simboline atliekamų pakeitimų atitiktimi, arba aštuntainiu " +"skaičiumi, atitinkančiu naujų\n" "teisių šabloną.</p>" #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:185 @@ -243,12 +255,16 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:321 msgid "" "<p>For many applications and services, you might have prepared\n" -"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location in the\n" -"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web server\n" +"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location " +"in the\n" +"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web " +"server\n" "and have an httpd.conf configuration file prepared.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Daugeliui programų ir paslaugų, gali prireikti paruošti konfigūracinę rinkmeną,\n" -"kuri turėtų būti nukopijuota į tam tikrą įdiegtos sistemos vietą. Pavyzdžiui, taip\n" +"<p>Daugeliui programų ir paslaugų, gali prireikti paruošti konfigūracinę " +"rinkmeną,\n" +"kuri turėtų būti nukopijuota į tam tikrą įdiegtos sistemos vietą. Pavyzdžiui, " +"taip\n" "bus tuo atveju, jei diegiate web serverį ir turite paruoštą httpd.conf\n" "konfigūracinę rinkmeną.</p>" @@ -303,13 +319,17 @@ "\n" "%s\n" "\n" -"Maybe they were misspelled or your profile does not contain all the needed YaST packages in <software/> section." +"Maybe they were misspelled or your profile does not contain all the needed " +"YaST packages in <software/> section." msgstr "" -"Žemiau išvardintos AutoYaST profilio sekcijos negali taikomos šioje sistemoje:\n" +"Žemiau išvardintos AutoYaST profilio sekcijos negali taikomos šioje " +"sistemoje:\n" "\n" "%s\n" "\n" -"Galbūt jų rašyboje įsivėlė klaidų, o galbūt jūsų profilio <software/> sekcijoje nėra visų reikalingų YaST paketų." +"Galbūt jų rašyboje įsivėlė klaidų, o galbūt jūsų profilio <software/> " +"sekcijoje " +" nėra visų reikalingų YaST paketų." #. determine name of client, if not use default name #. Call::Function(module_auto, ["Import", eval(Profile::current[resource]:$[]) ]); @@ -331,6 +351,7 @@ #. Do not restart dbus. Otherwise some services will hang. #. bnc#937900 #: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:304 +#| msgid "Determine running services" msgid "Restarting all running services" msgstr "Iš naujo paleidžiamos visos paleistos paslaugos" @@ -554,6 +575,7 @@ msgstr "Konfigūruoti Systemd numatytąsias paskirtis" #: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:65 +#| msgid "Configure Volume Groups" msgid "Configure users and groups" msgstr "Konfigūruoti naudotojus ir grupes" @@ -566,6 +588,7 @@ msgstr "Konfigūruojamos pagrindinės nuostatos..." #: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:71 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:62 +#| msgid "Set up language" msgid "Setting up language..." msgstr "Nustatoma kalba..." @@ -578,6 +601,7 @@ msgstr "Konfigūruojama paleidyklė..." #: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:74 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:63 +#| msgid "Repairing file system..." msgid "Registering the system..." msgstr "Sistemos registravimas..." @@ -586,6 +610,7 @@ msgstr "Konfigūruojamas programų parinkimas..." #: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:76 +#| msgid "Configuring language..." msgid "Configuring Systemd Default Target..." msgstr "Konfigūruojamos Systemd numatytosios paskirtys..." @@ -603,6 +628,7 @@ #. first stage. But for the installation workflow the linuxrc #. network settings will be taken. (bnc#944942) #: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:183 +#| msgid "Signing the Add-On Product" msgid "Handling Add-On Products..." msgstr "Apdorojami papildomi produktai..." @@ -686,7 +712,8 @@ "<p>Depending on your experience, you can skip, log, and show (with time-out)\n" "installation messages.</p> \n" msgstr "" -"<p>Priklausomai nuo jūsų patirties, jūs galite praleisti, registruoti ir rodyti\n" +"<p>Priklausomai nuo jūsų patirties, jūs galite praleisti, registruoti ir " +"rodyti\n" "(su tam tikru uždelsimu) diegimo pranešimus.</p> \n" #: src/clients/report_auto.rb:223 @@ -695,7 +722,8 @@ "Warnings can be skipped in some places, but should not be ignored.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Rekomenduojama rodyti visus <b>pranešimus</b> su tam tikru uždelsimu.\n" -"Įspėjimai tam tikrose vietose gali būti praleisti, tačiau neturėtų būti ignoruojami.</p>\n" +"Įspėjimai tam tikrose vietose gali būti praleisti, tačiau neturėtų būti " +"ignoruojami.</p>\n" #: src/clients/report_auto.rb:230 msgid "Messages and Logging" @@ -710,12 +738,14 @@ #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:88 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> to add\n" +"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> " +"to add\n" "more <b>add-on</b> selections and packages.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Pasirinkite vieną iš sekančių <b>pagrindinių</b> parinkčių ir spauskite <i>Detaliai<i>, kad\n" +"Pasirinkite vieną iš sekančių <b>pagrindinių</b> parinkčių ir spauskite <i>" +"Detaliai<i>, kad\n" "pridėtumėte daugiau <b>papildomų</b> parinkčių ir paketų.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -727,7 +757,8 @@ msgstr "Diegimo šaltinio vieta (pvz., http://serveris/11.3/DVD1/)" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:128 -msgid "The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" +msgid "" +"The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" msgstr "Šios sistemos diegimo šaltinis (šiuo atveju negalite kurti atvaizdžio)" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:164 @@ -743,29 +774,36 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Mount in /etc/fstab By:</b>\n" "\tNormally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" -"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system to mount\n" -"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems can be\n" -"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not possible.\n" +"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system " +"to mount\n" +"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems " +"can be\n" +"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not " +"possible.\n" "\t" msgstr "" "<p><b>Prijungti /etc/fstab rinkmenoje pagal:</b>\n" "\t Paprastai rinkmenų sistema, kurią prijungiame, identifikuojama /etc/fstab\n" -"\t rinkmenoje pagal įrenginio pavadinimą. Jis gali būti pakeistas, todėl prijungiama sistema ieškoma\n" +"\t rinkmenoje pagal įrenginio pavadinimą. Jis gali būti pakeistas, todėl " +"prijungiama sistema ieškoma\n" "\t pagal UUID arba tomo žymę. Ne visos rinkmenų sistemos gali būti \n" -"\t prijungtos pagal UUID arba tomo žymę. Jei parametras yra atjungtas, tai neįmanoma.\n" +"\t prijungtos pagal UUID arba tomo žymę. Jei parametras yra atjungtas, tai " +"neįmanoma.\n" "\t" #. help text, richtext format #: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:71 msgid "" "<p><b>Volume Label:</b>\n" -"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" +"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " +"makes sense only \n" "\t when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "\t A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" "\t " msgstr "" "<p><b>Tomo žymė:</b>\n" -"\t Pavadinimas, įvestas šiame laukelyje, naudojamas kaip tomo žymė. Tai turi prasmės\n" +"\t Pavadinimas, įvestas šiame laukelyje, naudojamas kaip tomo žymė. Tai turi " +"prasmės\n" "\t tik tuomet, kai aktyvuojate prijungimą pagal tomo žymę.\n" "\t Tomo žymė negali turėti / simbolio arba tarpų.\n" "\t " @@ -935,8 +973,11 @@ #. user selected this partition to be part of volgroup #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:592 -msgid "Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." -msgstr "Dydis „auto“ yra tinkamas, jei pasirinkta prijungimo vieta „/boot“ arba „swap“." +msgid "" +"Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." +msgstr "" +"Dydis „auto“ yra tinkamas, jei pasirinkta prijungimo vieta „/boot“ arba " +"„swap“." #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:600 msgid "Size \"auto\" is invalid for physical volumes." @@ -1004,7 +1045,8 @@ "Patikrinkite, ar įvedėte teisingą vietą komandinėje eilutėje\n" "ir bandykite dar. Dėl šios klaidos jūs galite įvesti URL\n" "tik į profilį, bet ne į katalogą. Jei naudojate taisykles, arba\n" -"valdymo rinkmenas, pagrįstas kompiuterio pavadinimu, jūs turite iš naujo pradėti\n" +"valdymo rinkmenas, pagrįstas kompiuterio pavadinimu, jūs turite iš naujo " +"pradėti\n" "diegimo procesą ir įsitikinti, kad valdymo rinkmenos yra pasiekiamos.</p>\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/autoinst_dialogs.rb:30 @@ -1199,7 +1241,8 @@ "creating the classes.</P>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Jei jūs apibrėžėte ir sukūrėte <b>\n" -"klases</b>, jūs galėsite jas apjungti naudodamiesi šia sąsaja, kad sukurtumėte\n" +"klases</b>, jūs galėsite jas apjungti naudodamiesi šia sąsaja, kad " +"sukurtumėte\n" "naują <i>profilį</i>, kuris turės informaciją apie visas klases,\n" "priklausomai nuo tvarkos, kurią pasirinkote\n" "kurdami klases</P>\n" @@ -1229,7 +1272,8 @@ "<p>Choose one or more of the listed classes to which the current control\n" "file should belong.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Pasirinkite vieną ar daugiau iš išvardintų klasių, kurioms turi priklausyti dabartinė\n" +"<p>Pasirinkite vieną ar daugiau iš išvardintų klasių, kurioms turi " +"priklausyti dabartinė\n" "valdymo rinkmena.</p>\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:614 @@ -1406,7 +1450,9 @@ #. Some configuration modules removes/exchange the menu bar. #. So we have to reset. (bnc#872711) #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:569 -msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current system?" +msgid "" +"Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current " +"system?" msgstr "Tikrai norite modulio „%1“ nuostatas dabartinei jūsų sistemai?" #. opening/parsing the xml file failed @@ -1421,7 +1467,9 @@ #. FIXME: sucks sucks sucks sucks sucks #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:749 -msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current system?" +msgid "" +"Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current " +"system?" msgstr "Tikrai norite pritaikyti profilio nuostatas dabartinei jūsų sistemai?" #. EXIT @@ -1561,11 +1609,13 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:348 msgid "" "Kickstart file was imported.\n" -"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and partitioning\n" +"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and " +"partitioning\n" "were imported correctly." msgstr "" "Importuota Kickstart rinkmena.\n" -"Patikrinkite importuotą sintaksę ir įsitikinkite, jog paketų pasirinkimas bei skaidymas\n" +"Patikrinkite importuotą sintaksę ir įsitikinkite, jog paketų pasirinkimas bei " +"skaidymas\n" "teisingai importuoti." #. Validate Dialog @@ -1695,20 +1745,23 @@ "The installation confirmation option is selected by default\n" "to avoid unwanted installation. It stops the system\n" "during installation and shows a summary of requested operations in the\n" -"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without interruption.\n" +"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without " +"interruption.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" "<P>\n" "Diegimo patvirtinimo parinktis parenkama savaime\n" "norint išvengti nepageidaujamo diegimo. Tai sustabdo sistemą\n" "diegimo metu ir parodo pageidaujamų veiksmų santrauką \n" -"naudingų pasiūlymų ekrane. Atžymėkite šią parinktį norėdami automatiškai diegti be pertrūkio.\n" +"naudingų pasiūlymų ekrane. Atžymėkite šią parinktį norėdami automatiškai " +"diegti be pertrūkio.\n" "</P>\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:155 msgid "" "<P>\n" -"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in manual mode\n" +"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in " +"manual mode\n" "after the first reboot (after package installation).\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1857,7 +1910,8 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:17 msgid "" -"<p>This tool uses <em>xmllint</em> to validate the profile against the DTD and\n" +"<p>This tool uses <em>xmllint</em> to validate the profile against the DTD " +"and\n" "it checks for missing data. Some missing data might be intentional and any\n" "reported errors can be ignored, for example, when creating classes.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1883,7 +1937,8 @@ "The imported data is loaded into the configuration management system \n" "to add more configuration options available with SUSE.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Norėdami importuoti Kickstart rinkmeną, jums reikia įvesti tik konfigūracijos rinkmenos kelią. \n" +"<p>Norėdami importuoti Kickstart rinkmeną, jums reikia įvesti tik " +"konfigūracijos rinkmenos kelią. \n" "Importuoti duomenys bus įkelti į konfigūracijos tvarkymo sistemą,\n" "ir pridės daugiau galimų parinkčių su SUSE.</p>\n" @@ -1891,10 +1946,12 @@ msgid "" "<p>This tool creates a reference profile by reading\n" "information from this system. Select the resources to read from this system\n" -"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package selections.</p>\n" +"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package " +"selections.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Šis įrankis sukuria pavyzdinį profilį, skaitydamas šios\n" -"sistemos informaciją. Papildomai pasirinkite sistemos išteklius, kurie bus perskaityti\n" +"sistemos informaciją. Papildomai pasirinkite sistemos išteklius, kurie bus " +"perskaityti\n" "kartu su įprastais, pvz., disko skaidymo ir paketų pasirinkimo.</p>\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:36 @@ -1903,7 +1960,8 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:37 msgid "" -"<p>The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target system.\n" +"<p>The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target " +"system.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Lentelė dešinėje rodomi sistemos skaidiniai, kurie bus sukurti.\n" @@ -1944,11 +2002,13 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:53 msgid "" "If no partitions are defined and the specified drive is also\n" -"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions are\n" +"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions " +"are\n" "created automatically:" msgstr "" "Jei nėra apibrėžtų skaidinių ir nurodytas kaupiklis yra tas,\n" -"kuriame turėtų būti sukurtas šakninis skaidinys, sekantys skaidiniai sukuriami\n" +"kuriame turėtų būti sukurtas šakninis skaidinys, sekantys skaidiniai " +"sukuriami\n" "automatiškai:" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:58 @@ -1964,28 +2024,42 @@ msgstr "<p><b>Sudėtingesnės parinktys</b></p>" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:62 -msgid "By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition using sectors rather than size in MBytes." -msgstr "Paprastai AutoYaST sukurtų išplėstinį skaidinį ir įterptų visus naujus skaidinius kaip loginius įrenginius. Tačiau yra įmanoma pavesti AutoYaST2 sukurti tam tikrą skaidinį kaip pirminį arba kaip išplėstinį. Papildomai galima nurodyti skaidinio dydį naudojant sektorius, o ne megabaitus." +msgid "" +"By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new " +"partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST " +"to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended " +"partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition " +"using sectors rather than size in MBytes." +msgstr "" +"Paprastai AutoYaST sukurtų išplėstinį skaidinį ir įterptų visus naujus " +"skaidinius kaip loginius įrenginius. Tačiau yra įmanoma pavesti AutoYaST2 " +"sukurti tam tikrą skaidinį kaip pirminį arba kaip išplėstinį. Papildomai " +"galima nurodyti skaidinio dydį naudojant sektorius, o ne megabaitus." #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:65 msgid "" "These options and other advanced options cannot be configured using this\n" "interface. Instead, add them manually to the control file.\n" msgstr "" -"Naudojant šią sąsają, šios parinktys, taip pat ir kitos, sudėtingesnės parinktys, negali\n" -"būti konfigūruojamos. Jas turėtumėte įterpti rankiniu būdu į valdančiąją rinkmeną.\n" +"Naudojant šią sąsają, šios parinktys, taip pat ir kitos, sudėtingesnės " +"parinktys, negali\n" +"būti konfigūruojamos. Jas turėtumėte įterpti rankiniu būdu į valdančiąją " +"rinkmeną.\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:68 msgid "" "<p>\n" "For LVM and RAID setup, consult the documentation and add the configuration\n" -"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID partitions as\n" +"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID " +"partitions as\n" "a preparation.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Konfigūruodami LVM ir RAID skaitykite dokumentaciją ir įtraukite konfigūraciją į\n" -"egzistuojančią valdymo rinkmeną. Paruošiamajame procese galite sukurti tik neformatuotus LVM ir RAID\n" +"Konfigūruodami LVM ir RAID skaitykite dokumentaciją ir įtraukite " +"konfigūraciją į\n" +"egzistuojančią valdymo rinkmeną. Paruošiamajame procese galite sukurti tik " +"neformatuotus LVM ir RAID\n" "skaidinius.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -2077,7 +2151,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "<h3>Scenarijai prieš diegiant</h3>\n" -"<P>Pridėkite komandas, kurios bus įvykdytos sistemoje prieš prasidedant diegimui. </P>\n" +"<P>Pridėkite komandas, kurios bus įvykdytos sistemoje prieš prasidedant " +"diegimui. </P>\n" #. help 2/6 #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:72 @@ -2090,7 +2165,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "<h3>Užbaigiantieji scenarijai</h3>\n" -"<P>Taip pat galite pridėti komandas, kurios bus paleidžiamos sistemoje pasibaigus diegimui.\n" +"<P>Taip pat galite pridėti komandas, kurios bus paleidžiamos sistemoje " +"pasibaigus diegimui.\n" "Šie skriptai paleidžiami chroot aplinkos išorėje.\n" "</P>" @@ -2102,7 +2178,8 @@ "<P>For your postinstallation script to run inside the chroot\n" "environment, choose the <i>chroot scripts</i> options. Those scripts are\n" "run before the system reboots for the first time. By default, the chroot \n" -"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the installed \n" +"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the installed " +"\n" "system, always use the mount point \"/mnt\" in your scripts.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2120,7 +2197,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>It is possible to run chroot scripts in a later stage after\n" -"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag \"chrooted\".\n" +"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag " +"\"chrooted\".\n" "This runs the scripts in the installed system. \n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2156,13 +2234,15 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Interpreter:</H3>\n" -"<P>Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use <i>Perl</i> or \n" +"<P>Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use <i>Perl</i> " +"or \n" "<i>Python</i> for preinstallation scripts.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<H3>Interpretatorius:</H3>\n" -"<P>Scenarijai, leidžiami iki diegimo, gali būti tik apvalkalo (shell) skriptai. \n" +"<P>Scenarijai, leidžiami iki diegimo, gali būti tik apvalkalo (shell) " +"skriptai. \n" "Nenaudokite <i>Perl</i> arba <i>Python</i>.\n" "</P>\n" @@ -2172,32 +2252,42 @@ "<H3>Network Access:</H3>\n" "<P>While executing postinstallation scripts, the network is disabled and\n" "requires initialization in the scripts to make the network accessible. An\n" -"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, which\n" -"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an installation\n" -"over a network, you can use the <b>Network</b> option for the postscript, too.\n" +"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, " +"which\n" +"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an " +"installation\n" +"over a network, you can use the <b>Network</b> option for the postscript, " +"too.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<H3>Tinklo prieiga:</H3>\n" "<P>Vykdant užbaigiamuosius scenarijus (po įdiegimo), tinklas yra išjungtas\n" "ir reikia paruošti scenarijus prisijungimui prie tinklo.\n" -"Kitas būdas vykdyti užbaigiamuosius scenarijus su tinklo ryšiu, yra init scenarijų naudojimas, \n" -"užtikrinantis visiškai sukonfigūruotą sistemą vykdant scenarijus. Jei diegimas vyko\n" -"per tinklą, užbaigiamiesiems scenarijams galite taip pat naudoti <b>Tinklo</b> parinktį.\n" +"Kitas būdas vykdyti užbaigiamuosius scenarijus su tinklo ryšiu, yra init " +"scenarijų naudojimas, \n" +"užtikrinantis visiškai sukonfigūruotą sistemą vykdant scenarijus. Jei " +"diegimas vyko\n" +"per tinklą, užbaigiamiesiems scenarijams galite taip pat naudoti <b>Tinklo</b>" +" parinktį.\n" "</P>\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:146 msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Feedback and Debug:</H3>\n" -"<P>All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up box as feedback.\n" -"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that might help\n" +"<P>All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up box " +"as feedback.\n" +"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that " +"might help\n" "you to debug your script.</P>\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<H3>Grįžtamasis ryšys ir derinimas:</H3>\n" -"<P>Visi scenarijai, išskyrus init scenarijus, gali parodyti iškylančiame lamge STDOUT+STDERR kaip grįžtamasis ryšys.\n" -"Jei įjungėte derinimą, grižtamojo ryšio išvestis bus detalesnė, tad galės padėti jums\n" +"<P>Visi scenarijai, išskyrus init scenarijus, gali parodyti iškylančiame " +"lamge STDOUT+STDERR kaip grįžtamasis ryšys.\n" +"Jei įjungėte derinimą, grižtamojo ryšio išvestis bus detalesnė, tad galės " +"padėti jums\n" "derinant savo scenarijų.</P>\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:155 @@ -2285,11 +2375,13 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:474 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the installation for\n" +"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the installation " +"for\n" "your needs and take control in different stages of the installation.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Valdykite įvairias diegimo būsenas ir priderinkite diegiamą sistemą savo poreikiams,\n" +"Valdykite įvairias diegimo būsenas ir priderinkite diegiamą sistemą savo " +"poreikiams,\n" "įtraukdami scenarijus į automatinio diegimo procesą.</p>\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:480 @@ -2310,15 +2402,20 @@ #. @return [void] #: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:448 msgid "Parsing the rules file failed. XML parser reports:\n" -msgstr "Nepavyko išanalizuoti taisyklių rinkmenos. XML analizatoriaus pranešimas:\n" +msgstr "" +"Nepavyko išanalizuoti taisyklių rinkmenos. XML analizatoriaus pranešimas:\n" #. Merge Rule results #. @param [String] result_profile the resulting control file path #. @return [Boolean] true on success #. autoyast has read the autoyast configuration file but something went wrong #: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:909 src/modules/Profile.rb:738 -msgid "The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The error message is:\n" -msgstr "XML analizatorius, tikrindamas autoyast profilį, pranešė apie klaidą. Klaidos pranešimas:\n" +msgid "" +"The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The " +"error message is:\n" +msgstr "" +"XML analizatorius, tikrindamas autoyast profilį, pranešė apie klaidą. Klaidos " +"pranešimas:\n" #. backdoor for merging problems. #: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:1054 @@ -2331,8 +2428,10 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Nepavyksta gauti naudotojo apibrėžtų klasių.\n" -"Įsitikinkite, jog visos klasės apibrėžtos tvarkingai ir prieinamos sistemai per\n" -"tinklą arba vietoje. Sistema bus įdiegta su originalia valdymo rinkmena nenaudojant\n" +"Įsitikinkite, jog visos klasės apibrėžtos tvarkingai ir prieinamos sistemai " +"per\n" +"tinklą arba vietoje. Sistema bus įdiegta su originalia valdymo rinkmena " +"nenaudojant\n" "klasių.\n" #. The line above needs to be fixed when we have more attributes @@ -2397,26 +2496,31 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:457 msgid "" -"<p>Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to those available\n" -"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the data\n" +"<p>Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to " +"those available\n" +"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the " +"data\n" "entered is collected and exported to the control file that can be used to\n" "install another system using AutoYaST.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Dauguma modulių, naudojamų konfigūracijos kūrimui, yra tokie patys, kaip\n" "prieinami YaST valdymo centre. Konfigūruojama ne dabartinė sistema: įvesti\n" -"duomenys surenkami ir įrašomi į valdymo rinkmeną, kuri, pasinaudojus AutoYaST,\n" +"duomenys surenkami ir įrašomi į valdymo rinkmeną, kuri, pasinaudojus " +"AutoYaST,\n" "gali būti naudojama kitos sistemos diegimui.\n" "</p>\n" #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:464 msgid "" "<p>In addition to the existing and familiar modules,\n" -"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, including\n" +"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, " +"including\n" "partitioning, general options, and software.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Be to, dabartiniai ir pažįstami moduliai,\n" -"naujos sąsajos sukuriami specialioms ir visa apimančioms konfigūracijoms, įskaitant\n" +"naujos sąsajos sukuriami specialioms ir visa apimančioms konfigūracijoms, " +"įskaitant\n" "diskų skaidymą, bendras parinktis ir programinę įrangą.</p>\n" #. Construct node name for display in tree. @@ -2516,6 +2620,7 @@ #. NTP syncing #: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:414 +#| msgid "Saving time zone..." msgid "Syncing time..." msgstr "Patikslinamas laikas..." @@ -2525,10 +2630,12 @@ msgstr "Laikas suderinamas su %s." #: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:420 +#| msgid "Parsing failed." msgid "Time syncing failed." msgstr "Nepavyko patikslinti laiko." #: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:424 +#| msgid "Cannot mount file system." msgid "Cannot update system time." msgstr "Nepavyksta patikslinti sistemos laiko." @@ -2541,7 +2648,8 @@ #. the next instructions taints result #: src/modules/AutoinstPartPlan.rb:282 msgid "Volume group '%1' must have at least one physical volume. Provide one." -msgstr "Tomų grupė „%1“ privalo turėti bent vieną fizinį tomą. Parinkite vieną." +msgstr "" +"Tomų grupė „%1“ privalo turėti bent vieną fizinį tomą. Parinkite vieną." #. PUBLIC INTERFACE #. INTER FACE TO CONF TREE @@ -2563,6 +2671,7 @@ msgstr[3] "Iš viso %s diskų" #: src/modules/AutoinstPartPlan.rb:707 +#| msgid "Not detected." msgid "Not yet cloned." msgstr "Dar neklonuota." @@ -2632,16 +2741,22 @@ #. Install #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:375 -msgid "Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" -msgstr "Atvaizdžio kūrimas nutrūko diegiant šablonus. Žiūrėkite /tmp/ay_image.log" +msgid "" +"Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check " +"/tmp/ay_image.log" +msgstr "" +"Atvaizdžio kūrimas nutrūko diegiant šablonus. Žiūrėkite /tmp/ay_image.log" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:383 msgid "Creating Image - installing packages" msgstr "Kuriamas atvaizdis – diegiami paketai" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:393 -msgid "Image creation failed while package installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" -msgstr "Atvaizdžio kūrimas nutrūko diegiant paketus. Žiūrėkite /tmp/ay_image.log" +msgid "" +"Image creation failed while package installation. Please check " +"/tmp/ay_image.log" +msgstr "" +"Atvaizdžio kūrimas nutrūko diegiant paketus. Žiūrėkite /tmp/ay_image.log" #. Popup::Message( _("in the next file dialog you have to choose the target directory to save the image") ); #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:404 @@ -2653,10 +2768,12 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:433 msgid "" "You can do changes to the image now in %1/\n" -"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be changed anymore." +"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be changed " +"anymore." msgstr "" "Dabar galite pakeisti atvaizdžio turinį, esantį %1/\n" -"Po to, kai nuspausite patvirtinimo mygtuką, atvaizdis bus suspaustas ir jo keisti nebegalėsite." +"Po to, kai nuspausite patvirtinimo mygtuką, atvaizdis bus suspaustas ir jo " +"keisti nebegalėsite." #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:447 msgid "Image compressing failed in '%1'. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" @@ -2701,10 +2818,12 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:628 msgid "" -"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different AutoYaST XML file.\n" +"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different " +"AutoYaST XML file.\n" "If you press the ok-button, the iso will be created." msgstr "" -"ISO pakeitimus galite atlikti %1, pavyzdžiui, pridėdami visiškai kitą AutoYaST XML rinkmeną.\n" +"ISO pakeitimus galite atlikti %1, pavyzdžiui, pridėdami visiškai kitą " +"AutoYaST XML rinkmeną.\n" "Po to, kai nuspausite patvirtinimo mygtuką, bus sukurtas ISO." #. create the actual ISO file @@ -2746,15 +2865,25 @@ #. Solve dependencies #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:919 -msgid "The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the autoyast profile." -msgstr "Tikrinant paketų ryšius, įvyko klaida. Patikrinkite savo programinės įrangos pasirinkimą autoyast profilyje." +msgid "" +"The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the " +"autoyast profile." +msgstr "" +"Tikrinant paketų ryšius, įvyko klaida. Patikrinkite savo programinės įrangos " +"pasirinkimą autoyast profilyje." #. 1 cyl buffer per partition #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:494 -msgid "The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard disk. %1MB missing" -msgstr "Skaidinių planas, nurodytas jūsų XML profilyje, neatitinka jūsų standžiojo disko. Trūksta %1MB" +msgid "" +"The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard " +"disk. %1MB missing" +msgstr "" +"Skaidinių planas, nurodytas jūsų XML profilyje, neatitinka jūsų standžiojo " +"disko. Trūksta %1MB" #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:917 +#| msgid "Total of %1 drive" +#| msgid_plural "Total of %1 drives" msgid "Total of %1 drive" msgstr "Iš viso diskų: %1" Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/base.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/base.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/base.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -20,7 +20,8 @@ "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. Translators: a warning message in a continue-cancel question #. Opscode Chef is a different way to configure the system. @@ -239,13 +240,21 @@ #. error message - command line option xmlfile is missing #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:938 -msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use xmlfile= command line option." -msgstr "Trūksta rinkmenos pavadinimo („xmlfile“ parinktis). Naudokite xmlfile= komandinės eilutės parinktį." +msgid "" +"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use xmlfile= " +"command line option." +msgstr "" +"Trūksta rinkmenos pavadinimo („xmlfile“ parinktis). Naudokite xmlfile=<" +"target_XML_file> komandinės eilutės parinktį." #. error message - command line option xmlfile is missing #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:950 -msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is empty. Use xmlfile= command line option." -msgstr "Paskirties rinkmenos pavadinimas („xmlfile“ parinktis) nenurodytas. Naudokite xmlfile= komandinės eilutės parinktį." +msgid "" +"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is empty. Use xmlfile= " +"command line option." +msgstr "" +"Paskirties rinkmenos pavadinimas („xmlfile“ parinktis) nenurodytas. Naudokite " +"xmlfile= komandinės eilutės parinktį." #. translators: fallback name for a module at command line #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1087 @@ -423,10 +432,12 @@ #. WFM.Execute(path(".local.bash"), "snapper magic") #. end #: library/control/src/modules/InstExtensionImage.rb:352 +#| msgid "Copying the packages..." msgid "Loading to memory package '%s'" msgstr "Paketas „%s“ įkeliamas į atmintį" #: library/control/src/modules/InstExtensionImage.rb:358 +#| msgid "Remove package %1?" msgid "Removing from memory package '%s'" msgstr "Pašalinti „%s“ paketą iš atminties?" @@ -657,7 +668,8 @@ "set <b>%1</b>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>LDAP palaikymas</big></b><br>\n" -"Norėdami išsaugoti nuostatas į LDAP, o ne vietinėse konfigūracijos rinkmenose,\n" +"Norėdami išsaugoti nuostatas į LDAP, o ne vietinėse konfigūracijos " +"rinkmenose,\n" "rinkitės <b>%1</b>.</p>" #. part of help text - check box label, NO SHORTCUT!!! @@ -798,7 +810,8 @@ "containing the key and click <b>Add</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>Egzistuojančio TSIG rakto pridėjimas</b></big><br>\n" -"Norėdami įtraukti jau sukurtą TSIG raktą, rinkitės rinkmenos, kurioje yra raktas,\n" +"Norėdami įtraukti jau sukurtą TSIG raktą, rinkitės rinkmenos, kurioje yra " +"raktas,\n" "<b>pavadinimą</b> ir spauskite <b>Pridėti</b>.</p>\n" #. tsig keys management dialog help 3/4 @@ -810,7 +823,8 @@ "<b>Generate</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>Naujo TSIG rakto kūrimas</b></big><br>\n" -"Norėdami sukurti naują TSIG raktą, nurodykite <b>rinkmenos</b>, kurioje bus sukurtas raktas,\n" +"Norėdami sukurti naują TSIG raktą, nurodykite <b>rinkmenos</b>, kurioje bus " +"sukurtas raktas,\n" "pavadinimą ir <b>Rakto ID</b> rakto identifikavimui, tada spauskite\n" "<b>Generuoti</b>.</p>\n" @@ -825,7 +839,8 @@ "in the configuration first.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>TSIG rakto šalinimas</b></big><br>\n" -"Norėdami pašalinti sukonfigūruotą TSIG raktą, pasirinkite jį ir spauskite <b>Šalinti</b>.\n" +"Norėdami pašalinti sukonfigūruotą TSIG raktą, pasirinkite jį ir spauskite <b>" +"Šalinti</b>.\n" "Ištrinami visi toje pačioje rinkmenoje esantys raktai.\n" "Jei TSIG raktas naudojamas serverio konfigūracijoje,\n" "jo ištrinti nebus negalima. Pirmiausia turite sustabdyti serverį\n" @@ -923,7 +938,8 @@ "<p>To add a new option, click <b>Add</b>. To remove\n" "an option, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Norėdami pridėti naują parametrą, spauskite <b>Pridėti</b>. Norėdami pašalinti\n" +"<p>Norėdami pridėti naują parametrą, spauskite <b>Pridėti</b>. Norėdami " +"pašalinti\n" "parametrą, pažymėkite jį ir spauskite <b>Pašalinti</b>.</p>" #. help 3/4, optional @@ -1001,14 +1017,23 @@ "Some elements use arrow keys (e.g., to scroll in lists).</p>" msgstr "" "<p>1) <b>Pagrindai</b><br>\n" -"Po dialogo elementus vaikščiokite su <TAB> ėjimui prie kito elemento ir [LYG2/SHIFT] (arba [ALT]) + [TAB] ėjimui atgal.\n" +"Po dialogo elementus vaikščiokite su <TAB> ėjimui prie kito elemento ir " +"[LYG2/SHIFT] (arba [ALT]) + [TAB] ėjimui atgal.\n" "Pasirinkite arba aktyvuokite elementus su [TARPU] arba [ĮVESTI/ENTER].\n" "Kai kurie elementai naudoja rodyklinius klavišus (pvz., slinkimui sąraše).</p>" #. NCurses Control Center help 2/10 #: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:331 -msgid "<p>Tree navigation is also done by arrow keys. To open or close a branch use [SPACE]. For modules showing a tree (might look like a list) of configuration items on the left side use [ENTER] to get corresponding dialog on the right.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Judėti galite ir klaviatūros krypčių klavišais. Norėdami atverti ar užverti šaką, spauskite [TARPĄ]. Kairėje esančius medį turinčius konfigūracijos modulius (gali atrodyti kaip sąrašas) išskleisite dešinėje pusėje nuspaudę [ĮVESTIES] klavišą.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Tree navigation is also done by arrow keys. To open or close a branch use " +"[SPACE]. For modules showing a tree (might look like a list) of configuration " +"items on the left side use [ENTER] to get corresponding dialog on the right.<" +"/p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Judėti galite ir klaviatūros krypčių klavišais. Norėdami atverti ar " +"užverti šaką, spauskite [TARPĄ]. Kairėje esančius medį turinčius " +"konfigūracijos modulius (gali atrodyti kaip sąrašas) išskleisite dešinėje " +"pusėje nuspaudę [ĮVESTIES] klavišą.</p>" #. NCurses Control Center help 3/10 #: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:338 @@ -1038,9 +1063,11 @@ "move focus forward with [CTRL] + [F] and backward with [CTRL] + [B].</p>" msgstr "" "<p>2) <i>Klavišų paspaudimų pakaitalai</i><br>\n" -"<p>Kadangi aplinka veikia klaviatūros naudojimą, yra daugiaunei vienas metodas vaikščioti po dialogus.\n" +"<p>Kadangi aplinka veikia klaviatūros naudojimą, yra daugiaunei vienas " +"metodas vaikščioti po dialogus.\n" "Jei [TAB] ir [LYG2/SHIFT] (arba [ALT] + [TAB] neveikia,\n" -"žymeklį į priekį stumkite su [VALD/CTRL] + [F] ir atgal su [VALD/CTRL] + [B].</p>" +"žymeklį į priekį stumkite su [VALD/CTRL] + [F] ir atgal su [VALD/CTRL] + " +"[B].</p>" #. NCurses Control Center help 6/10 #: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:354 @@ -1057,10 +1084,12 @@ #: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:360 msgid "" "<p>3) <i>Function Keys</i><br>\n" -"F keys provide a quick access to main functions. The function key bindings for the current dialog are shown in the bottom line.</p>" +"F keys provide a quick access to main functions. The function key bindings " +"for the current dialog are shown in the bottom line.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>3) <i>Funkciniai klavišai</i><br>\n" -"F klavišai leidžia greitai pasiekti pagrindines funkcijas. Šio dialogo funkciniai klavišai rodomi viršuje.</p>" +"F klavišai leidžia greitai pasiekti pagrindines funkcijas. Šio dialogo " +"funkciniai klavišai rodomi viršuje.</p>" #. NCurses Control Center help 8/10 #: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:367 @@ -1846,12 +1875,14 @@ #: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:285 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Create a new GPG key</b></big><br>\n" -"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> is started, see <tt>gpg</tt> manual pager for more information.\n" +"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> is started, see <tt>gpg</tt> manual pager for more " +"information.\n" "Press Ctrl+C to cancel.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>Naujo GPG rakto sukūrimas</b></big><br>\n" -"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> paleista, žiūrėkite <tt>gpg</tt> vadovo puslapius, kur rasite\n" +"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> paleista, žiūrėkite <tt>gpg</tt> vadovo puslapius, kur " +"rasite\n" "daugiau informacijos. Norėdami atšaukti, spauskite Vald(Ctrl)+C.\n" "</p>" @@ -1894,7 +1925,8 @@ "the field below.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Rodoma registracija</big></b><br>\n" -"Jei norite nukreipti registraciją į ekraną, rinkitės <b>Registraciją</b>. Ji bus\n" +"Jei norite nukreipti registraciją į ekraną, rinkitės <b>Registraciją</b>. Ji " +"bus\n" "rodoma žemiau esančiame laukelyje.</p>\n" #. help for the log widget, part 1, alt. 2 @@ -1914,7 +1946,8 @@ "and select the action to process.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Norėdami atlikti papildomus veiksmus arba išsaugoti registraciją rinkmenoje, spauskite<b>%1</b>\n" +"Norėdami atlikti papildomus veiksmus arba išsaugoti registraciją rinkmenoje, " +"spauskite<b>%1</b>\n" "ir rinkitės veiksmą.</p>" #. help for the log widget, part 2, alt. 2, %1 is a menu button label @@ -1936,7 +1969,8 @@ "to which to save the log.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Norėdami išsaugoti registraciją rinkmenoje, spauskite <b>Išsaugoti registraciją</b> ir\n" +"Norėdami išsaugoti registraciją rinkmenoje, spauskite <b>Išsaugoti " +"registraciją</b> ir\n" "pasirinkite tam tikslui rinkmeną.</p>\n" #. menu button @@ -2124,7 +2158,8 @@ "set <b>%1</b>.<br>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Užkardos nuostatos</big></b><br>\n" -"Norėdami atverti užkardą ir leisti nutolusiems kompiuteriams pasiekti paslaugą,\n" +"Norėdami atverti užkardą ir leisti nutolusiems kompiuteriams pasiekti " +"paslaugą,\n" "naudokite <b>%1</b>.<br>" #. help text for firewall port openning widget 2/3, optional @@ -2651,7 +2686,8 @@ "A port number may be a number from 0 to 65535.\n" "No spaces are allowed.\n" msgstr "" -"Prievado pavadinimas gali būti sudarytas iš simbolių „a-z“, „A-Z“, „0-9“, ir „*+._-“.\n" +"Prievado pavadinimas gali būti sudarytas iš simbolių „a-z“, „A-Z“, „0-9“, ir " +"„*+._-“.\n" "Prievado numeris gali būti tarp 0 ir 65535.\n" "Tarpai neleidžiami.\n" @@ -2794,12 +2830,14 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Warning in installation proposal, %1 is a device name (eth0, sl0, ...) #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:167 msgid "New network device '%1' found; added as an internal firewall interface" -msgstr "Rastas naujas tinklo įrenginys „%1“; įtrauktas kaip vidinė užkardos sąsaja" +msgstr "" +"Rastas naujas tinklo įrenginys „%1“; įtrauktas kaip vidinė užkardos sąsaja" #. TRANSLATORS: Warning in installation proposal, %1 is a device name (eth0, sl0, ...) #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:178 msgid "New network device '%1' found; added as an external firewall interface" -msgstr "Rastas naujas tinklo įrenginys „%1“; įtrauktas kaip išorinė užkardos sąsaja" +msgstr "" +"Rastas naujas tinklo įrenginys „%1“; įtrauktas kaip išorinė užkardos sąsaja" #. TRANSLATORS: Proposal informative text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:547 @@ -2809,58 +2847,88 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Proposal informative text "Firewall is enabled (disable)" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:565 -msgid "Firewall is enabled (disable</a>)" -msgstr "Užkarda įgalinta (uždrausti</a>)" +msgid "" +"Firewall is enabled (" +"disable</a>)" +msgstr "" +"Užkarda įgalinta (" +"uždrausti</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Proposal informative text "Firewall is disabled (enable)" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:571 -msgid "Firewall is disabled (enable</a>)" -msgstr "Užkarda uždrausta (įgalinti</a>)" +msgid "" +"Firewall is disabled (" +"enable</a>)" +msgstr "" +"Užkarda uždrausta (" +"įgalinti</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:606 -msgid "SSH port is open (close</a>)" -msgstr "SSH prievadas atvertas (užverti</a>)" +msgid "" +"SSH port is open (close</a>)" +msgstr "" +"SSH prievadas atvertas (" +"užverti</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:612 -msgid "SSH port is blocked (open</a>)" -msgstr "SSH prievadas užblokuotas (atverti</a>)" +msgid "" +"SSH port is blocked (open</a>)" +msgstr "" +"SSH prievadas užblokuotas (" +"atverti</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:633 msgid "" -"SSH port is open (close</a>), but\n" +"SSH port is open (close</a>), " +"but\n" "there are no network interfaces configured" msgstr "" -"SSH prievadas atvertas (užverti</a>), \n" +"SSH prievadas atvertas (" +"užverti</a>), \n" "bet nėra sukonfigūruotų tinklo sąsajų" #. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation over SSH without SSH allowed on firewall #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:648 -msgid "You are installing a system over SSH, but you have not opened the SSH port on the firewall." +msgid "" +"You are installing a system over SSH, but you have not opened the SSH port on " +"the firewall." msgstr "Jūs diegiate sistemą per SSH, bet užkardoje neatidarėte SSH prievado." #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text "Remote Administration (VNC) is enabled" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:690 -msgid "Remote Administration (VNC) ports are open (close</a>)" -msgstr "Nuotolinio administravimo (VNC) prievadai atverti (užverti</a>)" +msgid "" +"Remote Administration (VNC) ports are open (close</a>)" +msgstr "" +"Nuotolinio administravimo (VNC) prievadai atverti (užverti</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text "Remote Administration (VNC) is disabled" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:696 -msgid "Remote Administration (VNC) ports are blocked (open</a>)" -msgstr "Nuotolinio administravimo (VNC) prievadai užblokuoti (atverti</a>)" +msgid "" +"Remote Administration (VNC) ports are blocked (open</a>)" +msgstr "" +"Nuotolinio administravimo (VNC) prievadai užblokuoti (atverti</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation over VNC without VNC allowed on firewall #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:707 -msgid "You are installing a system using remote administration (VNC), but you have not opened the VNC ports on the firewall." -msgstr "Jūs diegiate sistemą naudodami nuotolinį valdymą (VNC), bet užkardoje neatidarėte VNC prievadų." +msgid "" +"You are installing a system using remote administration (VNC), but you have " +"not opened the VNC ports on the firewall." +msgstr "" +"Jūs diegiate sistemą naudodami nuotolinį valdymą (VNC), bet užkardoje " +"neatidarėte VNC prievadų." #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:725 @@ -2874,8 +2942,12 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation to iSCSI without iSCSI allowed on firewall #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:737 -msgid "You are installing a system using iSCSI Target, but you have not opened the needed ports on the firewall." -msgstr "Jūs diegiate sistemą per iSCSI paskirtį, bet užkardoje neatidarėte reikiamų prievadų." +msgid "" +"You are installing a system using iSCSI Target, but you have not opened the " +"needed ports on the firewall." +msgstr "" +"Jūs diegiate sistemą per iSCSI paskirtį, bet užkardoje neatidarėte reikiamų " +"prievadų." #. Returns service definition. #. See @services for the format. @@ -3033,13 +3105,15 @@ "The system should be later verified by running the Software Management module." msgstr "" "Paketo klaidų nepaisymas gali sugadinti sistemą.\n" -"Vėliau derėtų patikrinti sistemą paleidus „Programinės įrangos tvarkyklės“ modulį." +"Vėliau derėtų patikrinti sistemą paleidus „Programinės įrangos tvarkyklės“ " +"modulį." #. error report #: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:575 msgid "" "<p>The repository at the specified URL now provides a different media ID.\n" -"If the URL is correct, this indicates that the repository content has changed. To \n" +"If the URL is correct, this indicates that the repository content has " +"changed. To \n" "continue using this repository, start <b>Installation Repositories</b> from \n" "the YaST control center and refresh the repository.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3560,15 +3634,20 @@ #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:326 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"\t\t This dialog allows you to define this system's tasks and what software to install.\n" -"\t\t Available tasks and software for this system are shown by category in the left\n" +"\t\t This dialog allows you to define this system's tasks and what software " +"to install.\n" +"\t\t Available tasks and software for this system are shown by category in " +"the left\n" "\t\t column. To view a description for an item, select it in the list.\n" "\t\t </p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"\t\t Šiame lange galite aprašyti sistemos užduotis ir diegtiną programinę įrangą.\n" -"\t\t Galimos šios sistemos užduotys ir programinė įranga rodoma kairiajame stulpelyje\n" -"\t\t pagal kategorijas. Pasirinkite elementą iš sąrašo, norėdami matyti jo aprašą.\n" +"\t\t Šiame lange galite aprašyti sistemos užduotis ir diegtiną programinę " +"įrangą.\n" +"\t\t Galimos šios sistemos užduotys ir programinė įranga rodoma kairiajame " +"stulpelyje\n" +"\t\t pagal kategorijas. Pasirinkite elementą iš sąrašo, norėdami matyti jo " +"aprašą.\n" "\t\t </p>" #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:333 @@ -3593,14 +3672,16 @@ "\t\t </p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"\t\t Mygtukas <b>Išsamiau</b> atveria išsamų programinės įrangos pasirinkimą,\n" +"\t\t Mygtukas <b>Išsamiau</b> atveria išsamų programinės įrangos " +"pasirinkimą,\n" "\t\t kur galite peržiūrėti ir patys pasirinkti programinės įrangos paketus.\n" "\t\t </p>" #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:346 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"\t\t The disk usage display in the lower right corner shows the remaining disk space\n" +"\t\t The disk usage display in the lower right corner shows the remaining " +"disk space\n" "\t\t after all requested changes will have been performed.\n" "\t\t Hard disk partitions that are full or nearly full can degrade\n" "\t\t system performance and in some cases even cause serious problems.\n" @@ -3610,7 +3691,8 @@ "<p>\n" "\t\t Disko naudojimo ekrano apatiniame dešiniame kampe rodoma laisva vieta,\n" "\t\t liksianti atlikus visus nurodytus pakeitimus.\n" -"\t\t Pilni arba beveik pilni standžiojo disko skaidiniai gali žymiai sumažinti\n" +"\t\t Pilni arba beveik pilni standžiojo disko skaidiniai gali žymiai " +"sumažinti\n" "\t\t sistemos našumą, o kai kuriais atvejais netgi kelti rimtų problemų.\n" "\t\t Sklandžiam sistemos veikimui reikia šiek tiek laisvos vietos.\n" "\t\t </p>" @@ -3710,8 +3792,11 @@ msgstr "Grįžti į programinės įrangos tvarkytuvę" #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:666 -msgid "<P><BIG><B>Installation Report</B></BIG><BR>Here is a summary of installed or removed packages.</P>" -msgstr "<P><BIG><B>Diegimo ataskaita</B></BIG><BR>Rodoma įdiegtų paketų santrauka.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P><BIG><B>Installation Report</B></BIG><BR>Here is a summary of installed or " +"removed packages.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P><BIG><B>Diegimo ataskaita</B></BIG><BR>Rodoma įdiegtų paketų santrauka.</P>" #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:674 msgid "Installation Report" @@ -3821,7 +3906,8 @@ msgid "" "No checksum for file %1 was found in the repository.\n" "This means that the file is part of the signed repository,\n" -"but the list of checksums in this repository does not mention this file. Using the file\n" +"but the list of checksums in this repository does not mention this file. " +"Using the file\n" "may put the integrity of your system at risk.\n" "\n" "Use it anyway?" @@ -3903,7 +3989,8 @@ msgstr "" "Paketas „%1“ iš „%2“ saugyklos\n" "(%3)\n" -"yra pasirašytas nurodytu GnuPG raktu, bet tikrinant vientisumą įvyko klaida: %4\n" +"yra pasirašytas nurodytu GnuPG raktu, bet tikrinant vientisumą įvyko klaida: %" +"4\n" "\n" "Paketas atsitiktinai arba piktybiškai buvo pakeistas\n" "po to, kai saugyklos kūrėjas jį pasirašė. Jo įdiegimas – didžiulis pavojus\n" @@ -3926,7 +4013,8 @@ msgstr "" "Rinkmena „%1“ iš „%2“ saugyklos\n" "(%3)\n" -"yra pasirašyta nurodytu GnuPG raktu, bet tikrinant vientisumą įvyko klaida: %4\n" +"yra pasirašyta nurodytu GnuPG raktu, bet tikrinant vientisumą įvyko klaida: %" +"4\n" "\n" "Rinkmena atsitiktinai arba piktybiškai buvo pakeista\n" "po to, kai saugyklos kūrėjas ją pasirašė. Jos įdiegimas – didžiulis pavojus\n" @@ -4062,7 +4150,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>A warning dialog opens for every package that\n" "is not signed by a trusted (imported) key. If you do not trust the key,\n" -"the packages or repositories created by the owner of the key will not be used.</p>" +"the packages or repositories created by the owner of the key will not be " +"used.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>Įspėjantis pranešimas pasirodo kaskart, kai paketas nėra\n" "pasirašytas patikimu (importuotu) raktu. Jei nepasitikite raktu,\n" @@ -4144,7 +4233,8 @@ "but the expected checksum is not known.\n" "\n" "This means that the origin and integrity of the file\n" -"cannot be verified. Using the file puts the integrity of your system at risk.\n" +"cannot be verified. Using the file puts the integrity of your system at " +"risk.\n" "\n" "Use it anyway?\n" msgstr "" @@ -4202,8 +4292,15 @@ msgstr "<p>Diegiami paketai.</p>" #: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:634 -msgid "<P><B>Aborting Installation</B> Package installation can be aborted using the <B>Abort</B> button. However, the system then can be in an inconsistent or unusable state or it may not boot if the basic system component is not installed.</P>" -msgstr "<P><B>Diegimo nutraukimas</B> Paketų diegimas gali būti nutrauktas nuspaudus <B>Nutraukti</B>. Tačiau jei bus neįdiegti pagrindiniai sistemos komponentai, sistema gali būti nevientisa ar nestabili, arba gali nepasileisti.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P><B>Aborting Installation</B> Package installation can be aborted using the " +"<B>Abort</B> button. However, the system then can be in an inconsistent or " +"unusable state or it may not boot if the basic system component is not " +"installed.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P><B>Diegimo nutraukimas</B> Paketų diegimas gali būti nutrauktas nuspaudus " +"<B>Nutraukti</B>. Tačiau jei bus neįdiegti pagrindiniai sistemos komponentai, " +"sistema gali būti nevientisa ar nestabili, arba gali nepasileisti.</P>" #. Translators: Tab name, keep short, %s is product name, e.g. SLES #: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:652 @@ -4864,6 +4961,9 @@ #. Continue/Cancel question, %s is a file name #: library/system/src/modules/FileChanges.rb:236 +#| msgid "" +#| "File %1 has been changed manually.\n" +#| "YaST might lose some of the changes.\n" msgid "" "File %s has been created manually.\n" "YaST might lose this file." @@ -4873,6 +4973,9 @@ #. Continue/Cancel question, %s is a comma separated list of file names #: library/system/src/modules/FileChanges.rb:239 +#| msgid "" +#| "Files %1 have been changed manually.\n" +#| "YaST might lose some of the changes" msgid "" "Files %s have been created manually.\n" "YaST might lose these files." @@ -4938,7 +5041,8 @@ "A valid host name consists of letters, digits, and hyphens.\n" "A host name may not begin or end with a hyphen.\n" msgstr "" -"Tinkamas pagrindinio kompiuterio vardas sudarytas iš raidžių, skaičių ir brūkšnelių.\n" +"Tinkamas pagrindinio kompiuterio vardas sudarytas iš raidžių, skaičių ir " +"brūkšnelių.\n" "Pagrindinio kompiuterio vardas negali prasidėti ar baigtis brūkšniu.\n" #. Translators: dot: "." @@ -4978,7 +5082,8 @@ "Pavyzdžiai:\n" "IP: 192.168.0.1 arba 2001:db8:0::1\n" "IP/Tinklo kaukė: 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0 arba 2001:db8:0::1/56\n" -"IP/Tinklo kaukė_Bitai: 192.168.0.0/24 arba 192.168.0.1/32 arba 2001:db8:0::1/ffff::0\n" +"IP/Tinklo kaukė_Bitai: 192.168.0.0/24 arba 192.168.0.1/32 arba " +"2001:db8:0::1/ffff::0\n" #. Byte abbreviated #: library/types/src/modules/String.rb:127 @@ -5751,11 +5856,13 @@ "\n" "A valid reverse IPv4 consists of four integers in the range 0-255\n" "separated by a dot then followed by the string '.in-addr.arpa.'.\n" -"For example, '1.32.168.192.in-addr.arpa.' for the IPv4 address '192.168.32.1'.\n" +"For example, '1.32.168.192.in-addr.arpa.' for the IPv4 address " +"'192.168.32.1'.\n" msgstr "" "Atvirkštinis IPv4 adresas %1 yra netinkamas.\n" "\n" -"Tinkamas atvirkštinis IPv4 susideda iš 4 sveikųjų skaičių iš 0-255 intervalo,\n" +"Tinkamas atvirkštinis IPv4 susideda iš 4 sveikųjų skaičių iš 0-255 " +"intervalo,\n" "atskirtų taškais, ir pridedamo kodo „.in-addr.arpa.“.\n" "Pavyzdžiui, „1.32.168.192.in-addr.arpa.“ IPv4 „192.168.32.1“ adresui.\n" @@ -5884,6 +5991,7 @@ "Kompiuterio vardo %2 pridėti negalima." #: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:60 +#| msgid "Service Start" msgid "Service Status" msgstr "Paslaugos būsena" @@ -5891,18 +5999,29 @@ #: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:114 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Current status</big></b><br>\n" -"Displays the current status of the service. The status will remain the same after saving the settings, independently of the value of 'start service during boot'.</p>\n" +"Displays the current status of the service. The status will remain the same " +"after saving the settings, independently of the value of 'start service " +"during boot'.</p>\n" "<p><b><big>Reload After Saving Settings</big></b><br>\n" -"Only applicable if the service is currently running. Ensures the running service reloads the new configuration after saving it (via 'ok' or 'save' buttons).</p>\n" +"Only applicable if the service is currently running. Ensures the running " +"service reloads the new configuration after saving it (via 'ok' or 'save' " +"buttons).</p>\n" "<p><b><big>Start During System Boot</big></b><br>\n" -"Check this field to enable the service at system boot. Un-check it to disable the service. This does not affect the current status of the service in the already running system.</p>\n" +"Check this field to enable the service at system boot. Un-check it to disable " +"the service. This does not affect the current status of the service in the " +"already running system.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Dabartinė būsena</big></b><br>\n" -"Parodoma dabartinė paslaugos būsena. Būsena nepasikeis įrašius nuostatas, nepriklausys nuo reikšmės ties „Paleisti paleidžiant operacinę sistemą“.</p>\n" +"Parodoma dabartinė paslaugos būsena. Būsena nepasikeis įrašius nuostatas, " +"nepriklausys nuo reikšmės ties „Paleisti paleidžiant operacinę sistemą“.</p>\n" "<p><b><big>Įrašius nuostatas, paslaugą paleisti iš naujo</big></b><br>\n" -"Parinktis įmanoma tik šiuo metu veikiančioms paslaugoms. Tokiu būdu užtikrinsite, kad paleista paslauga naudos naujai įrašytą konfigūraciją (nuspaudus „Gerai“ arba „Įrašyti“).</p>\n" +"Parinktis įmanoma tik šiuo metu veikiančioms paslaugoms. Tokiu būdu " +"užtikrinsite, kad paleista paslauga naudos naujai įrašytą konfigūraciją " +"(nuspaudus „Gerai“ arba „Įrašyti“).</p>\n" "<p><b><big>Paleisti paleidžiant operacinę sistemą</big></b><br>\n" -"Pažymėjus parinktį, paslauga paleisima kartu su operacine sistema. Ši parinktis nepakeičia dabartinės paslaugos būsenos jau paleistoje sistemoje.</p>\n" +"Pažymėjus parinktį, paslauga paleisima kartu su operacine sistema. Ši " +"parinktis nepakeičia dabartinės paslaugos būsenos jau paleistoje sistemoje.<" +"/p>\n" #. Widget displaying the status and associated buttons #: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:181 @@ -5911,20 +6030,24 @@ #. Widget to configure the status on boot #: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:194 +#| msgid "Partition or System to Boot:" msgid "Start During System Boot" msgstr "Paleisti paleidžiant operacinę sistemą" #. Widget to configure reloading of the running service #: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:208 +#| msgid "Read Other Settings." msgid "Reload After Saving Settings" msgstr "Įrašius nuostatas, paslaugą įkelti iš naujo" #. TRANSLATORS: status of a service #: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:218 +#| msgid "Running" msgid "running" msgstr "paleista" #: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:220 +#| msgid "S&top now ..." msgid "Stop now" msgstr "Stabdyti dabar" @@ -5934,6 +6057,7 @@ msgstr "sustabdyta" #: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:227 +#| msgid "&Start now ..." msgid "Start now" msgstr "Paleisti dabar" Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/bootloader.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/bootloader.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/bootloader.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -18,7 +18,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. command line help text for Bootloader module @@ -33,11 +34,13 @@ #. command line help text for delete action #: src/clients/bootloader.rb:58 +#| msgid "&Detailed Global Options" msgid "Delete a global option" msgstr "Pašalinti visuotinę parinktį" #. command line help text for set action #: src/clients/bootloader.rb:65 +#| msgid "&Detailed Global Options" msgid "Set a global option" msgstr "Nurodyti visuotinę parinktį" @@ -68,6 +71,7 @@ #. command line, %1 is the value of bootloader option #: src/clients/bootloader.rb:180 +#| msgid "Value: %1" msgid "Value: %s" msgstr "Reikšmė: %s" @@ -97,14 +101,21 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:24 msgid "" "<p><b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition</b><br>\n" -"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR code will then\n" -"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active even\n" +"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR " +"code will then\n" +"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active " +"even\n" "if the boot loader is installed in the MBR.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Aktyvuoti paleidimo skaidinį skaidinių lentelėje</b><br>\n" -"Skirta skaidinio aktyvavimui, kuris turi paleidyklę. Norint visuomet paleisti iš aktyviojo skaidinio, \n" -"turi būti BENDRASIS pagrindinis paleidimo įrašas (generic MBR). Seni BIOS reikalauja, kad būtų aktyvus tik vienas skaidinys, o paleidyklė būtų įdiegta į paleidimo įrašą (MBR).\n" -"Paleidimo įrašas yra standžiojo disko pradžioje. Tuo tarpu paleidyklė gali būti įrašoma tiek į paleidimo įrašą (MBR), tiek į skaidinio paleidimo sektorių.</p>" +"Skirta skaidinio aktyvavimui, kuris turi paleidyklę. Norint visuomet paleisti " +"iš aktyviojo skaidinio, \n" +"turi būti BENDRASIS pagrindinis paleidimo įrašas (generic MBR). Seni BIOS " +"reikalauja, kad būtų aktyvus tik vienas skaidinys, o paleidyklė būtų įdiegta " +"į paleidimo įrašą (MBR).\n" +"Paleidimo įrašas yra standžiojo disko pradžioje. Tuo tarpu paleidyklė gali " +"būti įrašoma tiek į paleidimo įrašą (MBR), tiek į skaidinio paleidimo " +"sektorių.</p>" #. encoding: utf-8 #. File: @@ -124,10 +135,12 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_helps.rb:23 msgid "" "<p><b>Timeout in Seconds</b><br>\n" -"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is loaded.</p>\n" +"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is " +"loaded.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Delsa sekundėmis</b><br>\n" -"Nurodo laiką, kuris praeina iki numatytojo branduolio įkėlimo, jei neatliekate kitų veiksmų.</p>\n" +"Nurodo laiką, kuris praeina iki numatytojo branduolio įkėlimo, jei " +"neatliekate kitų veiksmų.</p>\n" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:33 msgid "" @@ -140,30 +153,40 @@ msgstr "" "<P>Spausdami <b>Padaryti numatytuoju</b>, pažymėtą skyrių \n" "padarote įprastu. Įjungus kompiuterį paleidyklė pateiks \n" -"paleidimo meniu ir lauks, kol naudotojas pasirinks paleistiną branduolį ar kitą \n" +"paleidimo meniu ir lauks, kol naudotojas pasirinks paleistiną branduolį ar " +"kitą \n" "operacinę sistemą. Jei nebus paspaustas joks klavišas, pasibaigus laikui\n" "bus paleistas numatytasis branduolys arba operacinė sistema. Paleidyklės\n" -"skyrių tvarka gali būti keičiama mygtukais <B>Aukštyn</B> ir <B>Žemyn</B></P>\n" +"skyrių tvarka gali būti keičiama mygtukais <B>Aukštyn</B> ir <B>Žemyn</B></P>" +"\n" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:41 msgid "" -"<p><b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b> replace the master boot record of your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" +"<p><b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b> replace the master boot record of " +"your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" "boots the active partition).</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Įrašyti bendrąjį paleidimo kodą į pagrindinį paleidimo įrašą (MBR)</b> – pakeičia standžiojo disko pradžioje esantį paleidimo įrašą bendruoju (standartiniu) kodu \n" -"(nuo operacinės sistemos nepriklausomas kodas, kuris paleidžia aktyvųjį skaidinį).</p>" +"<p><b>Įrašyti bendrąjį paleidimo kodą į pagrindinį paleidimo įrašą (MBR)</b> " +"– pakeičia standžiojo disko pradžioje esantį paleidimo įrašą bendruoju " +"(standartiniu) kodu \n" +"(nuo operacinės sistemos nepriklausomas kodas, kuris paleidžia aktyvųjį " +"skaidinį).</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:44 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Boot Partition</b> is one of the recommended options, the other is\n" +"<p><b>Boot from Boot Partition</b> is one of the recommended options, the " +"other is\n" "<b>Boot from Root Partition</b>.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Paleisti iš /boot skaidinio</b> yra patartina (t. y. skaidinio, prie sistemos šiuo metu prijungto kaip /boot, jei toks yra), \n" -"kita lygiai taip pat rekomenduojama parinktis yra <b>Paleisti iš šakninio skaidinio</b> (šiuo metu prijungto kaip /).</p>" +"<p><b>Paleisti iš /boot skaidinio</b> yra patartina (t. y. skaidinio, prie " +"sistemos šiuo metu prijungto kaip /boot, jei toks yra), \n" +"kita lygiai taip pat rekomenduojama parinktis yra <b>Paleisti iš šakninio " +"skaidinio</b> (šiuo metu prijungto kaip /).</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:47 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Master Boot Record</b> is not recommended if you have another operating system\n" +"<p><b>Boot from Master Boot Record</b> is not recommended if you have another " +"operating system\n" "installed on your computer</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Paleisti iš pagrindinio paleidimo įrašo (MBR)</b> nepatartina,\n" @@ -171,77 +194,126 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:50 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Root Partition</b> is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" -"partition. Either select <b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition</b> and <b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b>\n" -"in <b>Boot Loader Options</b> to update the master boot record if that is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" +"<p><b>Boot from Root Partition</b> is the recommended option whenever there " +"is a suitable\n" +"partition. Either select <b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot " +"Partition</b> and <b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b>\n" +"in <b>Boot Loader Options</b> to update the master boot record if that is " +"needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start this section.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Paleisti iš šakninio skaidinio</b> yra patartina, nesvarbu kur yra tinkamas\n" -"skaidinys. Bet kuriuo atveju pasirinkite <b>Paleidimo skaidinį skaidinių lentelėje pažymėti aktyviu</b> ir <b>Įrašyti bendrąjį paleidimo kodą į pagrindinį paleidimo įrašą (MBR)</b>\n" -"skydelyje <b>Paleidyklės parinktys</b> paleidimo įrašo atnaujinimui, jei to reikia, arba galite konfigūruoti kitą paleidyklę\n" +"<p><b>Paleisti iš šakninio skaidinio</b> yra patartina, nesvarbu kur yra " +"tinkamas\n" +"skaidinys. Bet kuriuo atveju pasirinkite <b>Paleidimo skaidinį skaidinių " +"lentelėje pažymėti aktyviu</b> ir <b>Įrašyti bendrąjį paleidimo kodą į " +"pagrindinį paleidimo įrašą (MBR)</b>\n" +"skydelyje <b>Paleidyklės parinktys</b> paleidimo įrašo atnaujinimui, jei to " +"reikia, arba galite konfigūruoti kitą paleidyklę\n" "šio skyriaus paleidimui.</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:56 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Extended Partition</b> should be selected if your root partition is on \n" +"<p><b>Boot from Extended Partition</b> should be selected if your root " +"partition is on \n" "logical partition and the /boot partition is missing</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Paleisti iš išplėstojo skaidinio</b> parinktis naudotina, jei \n" -"šakninis skaidinys yra loginiame skaidinyje ir visai nėra atskiro /boot skaidinio</p>" +"šakninis skaidinys yra loginiame skaidinyje ir visai nėra atskiro /boot " +"skaidinio</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:59 -msgid "<p><b>Custom Boot Partition</b> lets you choose a partition to boot from.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Pasirinktinas paleidimo skaidinys</b> leidžia jums pasirinkti konkretų skaidinį, iš kurio bus paleidžiamas kompiuteris.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Custom Boot Partition</b> lets you choose a partition to boot from.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Pasirinktinas paleidimo skaidinys</b> leidžia jums pasirinkti konkretų " +"skaidinį, iš kurio bus paleidžiamas kompiuteris.</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:62 msgid "" "<p>MD array is build from 2 disks. <b>Enable Redundancy for MD Array</b>\n" "enable to write GRUB to MBR of both disks.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>MD masyvas kuriamas iš dviejų diskų. <b>MD masyvams įgalinti perteklumą</b>\n" +"<p>MD masyvas kuriamas iš dviejų diskų. <b>MD masyvams įgalinti perteklumą</b>" +"\n" "leidžia GRUB įrašyti į abiejų diskų pagr. paleisties įrašą MBR.</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:65 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p><b>Use Serial Console</b> lets you define the parameters to use\n" +#| "for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub</code>) for details.</p>" msgid "" "<p><b>Use Serial Console</b> lets you define the parameters to use\n" -"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub2</code>) for details.</p>" +"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub2<" +"/code>) for details.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Parinktis <b>Naudoti nuoseklią konsolę</b> leidžia naudotinus parametrus nurodyti \n" -"naudojant nuoseklią konsolę. Daugiau sužinosite skaitydami GRUB dokumentaciją (<code>info grub2</code>).</p>" +"<p>Parinktis <b>Naudoti nuoseklią konsolę</b> leidžia naudotinus parametrus " +"nurodyti \n" +"naudojant nuoseklią konsolę. Daugiau sužinosite skaitydami GRUB dokumentaciją " +"(<code>info grub2</code>).</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:68 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p><b>Terminal Definition</b></p><br>\n" +#| "Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (eg. a serial console),\n" +#| "you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console</code> to the\n" +#| "command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which you\n" +#| "press any key will be selected as a GRUB terminal.</p>" msgid "" "<p><b>Terminal Definition</b></p><br>\n" -"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (e.g. a serial console),\n" -"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console</code> to the\n" -"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which you\n" +"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (e.g. a " +"serial console),\n" +"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console<" +"/code> to the\n" +"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which " +"you\n" "press any key will be selected as a GRUB terminal.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Terminalo apibrėžtis</b></p><br>\n" -"Nurodo naudotino terminalo tipą. Nuosekliam terminalui (pvz., nuosekliai konsolei),\n" -"turite nurodyti <code>serial</code>. Taip pat galite leisti <code>console</code> \n" -"komandą kaip <code>serial console</code>. Šiuo atveju terminalas, kuriame Jūs\n" +"Nurodo naudotino terminalo tipą. Nuosekliam terminalui (pvz., nuosekliai " +"konsolei),\n" +"turite nurodyti <code>serial</code>. Taip pat galite leisti <code>console<" +"/code> \n" +"komandą kaip <code>serial console</code>. Šiuo atveju terminalas, kuriame " +"Jūs\n" "bet ką nuspausite, bus pasirinktas kaip GRUB terminalas.</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:75 msgid "" -"<p><b>Fallback Sections if default Fails</b> contains a list of section numbers\n" +"<p><b>Fallback Sections if default Fails</b> contains a list of section " +"numbers\n" "that will be used for booting in case the default section is unbootable.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Atsarginiai skyriai, jei numatytasis sutrinka</b>, turi skyrių numerių sąrašą, \n" +"<p><b>Atsarginiai skyriai, jei numatytasis sutrinka</b>, turi skyrių numerių " +"sąrašą, \n" "kurie bus paleidžiami tuo atveju, jei nepavyksta paleisti numatytojo.</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:78 msgid "<p>Selecting <b>Hide Menu on Boot</b> will hide the boot menu.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pasirinkus <b>Slėpti slėpti meniu</b>, paleidimo meniu bus slepiamas.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pasirinkus <b>Slėpti slėpti meniu</b>, paleidimo meniu bus slepiamas.</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:81 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p><b>Protect Boot Loader with Password</b><br>\n" +#| "Define the password that will be required to access the boot menu. YaST will only accept the password if you repeat\n" +#| "it in <b>Retype Password</b>.</p>" msgid "" "<p><b>Protect Boot Loader with Password</b><br>\n" -"At boot time, modifying or even booting any entry will require the password. If <b>Protect Entry Modification Only</b> is checked then booting any entry is not restricted but modifying entries requires the password (which is the way GRUB 1 behaved).<br>YaST will only accept the password if you repeat it in <b>Retype Password</b>.</p>" +"At boot time, modifying or even booting any entry will require the password. " +"If <b>Protect Entry Modification Only</b> is checked then booting any entry " +"is not restricted but modifying entries requires the password (which is the " +"way GRUB 1 behaved).<br>YaST will only accept the password if you repeat it " +"in <b>Retype Password</b>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Paleidyklę apsaugoti slaptažodžiu</b><br>\n" -"Paleidžiant kompiuterį ar keičiant paleidyklės įrašus, reikės įvesti slaptažodį. Jei pažymėta parinktis <b>Apsaugoti tik nuo įrašų keitimo</b>, tuomet galėsite laisvai paleisti pasirinktą sistemą, tačiau įrašus keisti galėsite tik įvedę slaptažodį (taip kaip GRUB 1 paleidyklėje). <br> YaST slaptažodį priims tik tuomet, jei jis sutaps su\n" +"Paleidžiant kompiuterį ar keičiant paleidyklės įrašus, reikės įvesti " +"slaptažodį. " +"Jei pažymėta parinktis <b>Apsaugoti tik nuo įrašų keitimo</b>, tuomet " +"galėsite " +"laisvai paleisti pasirinktą sistemą, tačiau įrašus keisti galėsite tik įvedę " +"slaptažodį " +"(taip kaip GRUB 1 paleidyklėje). <br> YaST slaptažodį priims tik tuomet, jei " +"jis sutaps su\n" "tuo, kuris įvestas ties <b>Pakartokite slaptažodį</b>.</p>" #. help text 1/5 @@ -330,6 +402,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox entry #: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:79 +#| msgid "Security Event Notification" msgid "P&rotect Entry Modification Only" msgstr "&Apsaugoti tik nuo įrašų keitimo" @@ -431,20 +504,38 @@ #. #. $Id: helps.ycp 58279 2009-08-04 16:01:51Z juhliarik $ #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:23 -msgid "<p><b>Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define additional parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Pasirinktiniai branduolio komandinės eilutės parametrai</b> leidžia apibrėžti papildomus parametrus, kurie perduodami į branduolį.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define additional " +"parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Pasirinktiniai branduolio komandinės eilutės parametrai</b> leidžia " +"apibrėžti papildomus parametrus, kurie perduodami į branduolį.</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:26 -msgid "<p><b>Vga Mode</b> defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the <i>console</i> to when booting.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>VGA veiksena</b> apibrėžia, kad branduolys nurodytų <i>konsolei</i> VGA veikseną paleidimo metu.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Vga Mode</b> defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the <i>console<" +"/i> to when booting.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>VGA veiksena</b> apibrėžia, kad branduolys nurodytų <i>konsolei</i> VGA " +"veikseną paleidimo metu.</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:29 -msgid "<p><b>Probe Foreign OS</b> by means of os-prober for multiboot with other foreign distribution </p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Probe Foreign OS</b> by means of os-prober for multiboot with other " +"foreign distribution </p>" msgstr "<p><b>Tikrinti svetimą OS</b> - keleriopo paleidimo tikrinimas</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:32 -msgid "<p><b>Protective MBR flag</b> is expert only settings, that is needed only on exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not touch if you are not sure.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Apsaugotinas MBR</b>. Ši parinktis skirta patyrusiems naudotojams, dirbantiems su neįprasta aparatine įranga. Daugiau informacijos ieškokite GTP diskų MBR apsaugoje. Nekeiskite parinkčių, jei jų nesuprantate jų.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Protective MBR flag</b> is expert only settings, that is needed only on " +"exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not touch if " +"you are not sure.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Apsaugotinas MBR</b>. Ši parinktis skirta patyrusiems naudotojams, " +"dirbantiems " +"su neįprasta aparatine įranga. Daugiau informacijos ieškokite GTP diskų MBR " +"apsaugoje. " +"Nekeiskite parinkčių, jei jų nesuprantate jų.</p>" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:38 msgid "O&ptional Kernel Command Line Parameter" @@ -486,6 +577,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: set flag on disk #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:102 +#| msgid "[set]" msgid "set" msgstr "nustatyti" @@ -496,6 +588,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: do not change flag on disk #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:106 +#| msgid "Do not change name" msgid "do not change" msgstr "nekeisti" @@ -660,13 +753,16 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:52 msgid "" "<P>From <B>Other</B>,\n" -"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the current \n" +"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the current " +"\n" "configuration and propose a new configuration, start from scratch, or reread\n" "the configuration saved on your disk. %1</P>" msgstr "" "<P>Su <B>Kita</B>\n" -"galite rankiniu būdu keisti paleidyklės konfigūracijos rinkmenas, išvalyti dabartinę \n" -"konfigūraciją ir pasiūlyti naują, pradėti nuo pradžių, arba iš naujo perskaityti\n" +"galite rankiniu būdu keisti paleidyklės konfigūracijos rinkmenas, išvalyti " +"dabartinę \n" +"konfigūraciją ir pasiūlyti naują, pradėti nuo pradžių, arba iš naujo " +"perskaityti\n" "konfigūraciją, įrašytą diske. %1</P>" #. help text 1/1 @@ -708,8 +804,10 @@ msgstr "" "<P>Spausdami <b>Padaryti numatytuoju</b>, pažymėtą skyrių \n" "padarote įprastu. Įjungus kompiuterį, paleidyklė pateiks \n" -"paleidimo meniu ir lauks, kol naudotojas pasirinks paleistiną branduolį ar kitą \n" -"operacinę sistemą. Jei nebus paspaustas joks klavišas, pasibaigus tam tikram laikui\n" +"paleidimo meniu ir lauks, kol naudotojas pasirinks paleistiną branduolį ar " +"kitą \n" +"operacinę sistemą. Jei nebus paspaustas joks klavišas, pasibaigus tam tikram " +"laikui\n" "bus įkeltas numatytasis branduolys arba operacinė sistema. Paleidyklės\n" "skyrių tvarka gali būti keičiama mygtukais <B>Aukštyn</B> ir <B>Žemyn</B></P>" @@ -751,13 +849,15 @@ "- In the <b>Boot Sector</b> of the <tt>/boot</tt> or <tt>/</tt> (root) \n" "partition. This is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" "partition. Either set <b>Activate Boot Loader Partition</b> and\n" -"<b>Replace MBR with Generic Code</b> in <b>Boot Loader Installation Details</b>\n" +"<b>Replace MBR with Generic Code</b> in <b>Boot Loader Installation Details<" +"/b>\n" "to update the master boot record\n" "if it is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start &product;.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"- Į <tt>/boot</tt>arba <tt>/</tt> (šakninio) skaidinio <b>paleidimo sektorių</b>. Tai rekomenduojama parinktis, nesvarbu kur būtų paleidimo skaidinys.\n" +"- Į <tt>/boot</tt>arba <tt>/</tt> (šakninio) skaidinio <b>paleidimo sektorių<" +"/b>. Tai rekomenduojama parinktis, nesvarbu kur būtų paleidimo skaidinys.\n" "Bet kuriuo atveju pasirinkite <b>aktyvuoti paleidyklės skaidinį</b> ir\n" "<b>Paleidimo įrašą (MBR) pakeisti bendruoju kodu</b> skydelyje \n" "<b>Paleidyklės diegimo detalės</b> paleidimo įrašo atnaujinimui,\n" @@ -842,7 +942,8 @@ msgstr "" "<P><B>Eksperto rankinė konfigūracija</B><BR>\n" "Čia rankiniu būdu keiskite paleidyklės konfigūraciją.</P>\n" -"<P>Pastaba: galutinė konfigūracijos rinkmena gali turėti kitokias įtraukas.</P>" +"<P>Pastaba: galutinė konfigūracijos rinkmena gali turėti kitokias įtraukas.<" +"/P>" #. help text 1/1 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:220 @@ -852,7 +953,8 @@ "name must be unique.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Skyriaus pavadinimas</b><br>\n" -"Nurodykite <b>skyriaus pavadinimą</b>, naudojamą kaip paleidyklės meniu įrašo pavadinimą. \n" +"Nurodykite <b>skyriaus pavadinimą</b>, naudojamą kaip paleidyklės meniu įrašo " +"pavadinimą. \n" "Skyriaus pavadinimai turi nesikartoti.</p>" #. help text 1/5 @@ -871,8 +973,10 @@ "section. Then modify the options that should differ from the\n" "selected section.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Pasirinkite <b>Dauginti pasirinktą skyrių</b> norėdami padaryti dar vieną \n" -"pasirinkto skyriaus kopiją. Po to pakeiskite šio skyriaus parinktis, kad jos skirtųsi\n" +"<p>Pasirinkite <b>Dauginti pasirinktą skyrių</b> norėdami padaryti dar vieną " +"\n" +"pasirinkto skyriaus kopiją. Po to pakeiskite šio skyriaus parinktis, kad jos " +"skirtųsi\n" "nuo parinktojo skyriaus.</p>" #. help text 3/5 @@ -881,7 +985,8 @@ "<p>Select <b>Image Section</b> to add a new Linux kernel or other image\n" "to load and start.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Pasirinkite <b>Atvaizdžio skyrių</b> norėdami pridėti naują Linux branduolį arba kitą atvaizdį\n" +"<p>Pasirinkite <b>Atvaizdžio skyrių</b> norėdami pridėti naują Linux " +"branduolį arba kitą atvaizdį\n" "įkėlimui ir paleidimui.</p>" #. help text 4/5 @@ -890,7 +995,8 @@ "<p>Select <b>Xen Section</b> to add a new Linux kernel or other image,\n" "but to start it in a Xen environment.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Pasirinkite <b>XEN skyrių<b> norėdami pridėti naują Linux branduolį arba kitą atvaizdį,\n" +"<p>Pasirinkite <b>XEN skyrių<b> norėdami pridėti naują Linux branduolį arba " +"kitą atvaizdį,\n" "kurį norite paleisti XEN aplinkoje.</p>" #. help text 5/5 @@ -907,7 +1013,8 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:254 msgid "" "<p>Select <b>Menu Section</b> to add a section that \n" -"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the disk. This is used for\n" +"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the " +"disk. This is used for\n" "booting other operating systems.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>Pasirinkite <b>Meniu skyrių</b> norėdami pridėti skyrių, \n" @@ -1037,7 +1144,8 @@ #. error report #: src/include/bootloader/routines/wizards.rb:36 -msgid "Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." +msgid "" +"Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." msgstr "Dėl skaidinių ypatybių, paleidyklė negali būti tinkamai įdiegta." #. Represents dialog for modification of device map @@ -1068,7 +1176,8 @@ #. the %{device} is device where it should be, but isn't #: src/lib/bootloader/disk_change_detector.rb:61 msgid "Selected bootloader location %{path} is not on %{device} any more." -msgstr "Pasirinkta paleidyklės vieta %{path} nebeprieinama %{device} įrenginyje." +msgstr "" +"Pasirinkta paleidyklės vieta %{path} nebeprieinama %{device} įrenginyje." #. Finish client for bootloader configuration #: src/lib/bootloader/finish_client.rb:28 @@ -1109,45 +1218,74 @@ #. warning text in the summary richtext #: src/lib/bootloader/proposal_client.rb:174 -msgid "No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be bootable." +msgid "" +"No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be " +"bootable." msgstr "Įdiegimui nepasirinkta paleidyklė. Jūsų sistema gali nepasileisti." #. error in the proposal #: src/lib/bootloader/proposal_client.rb:183 -msgid "Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" +msgid "" +"Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" msgstr "Dėl skaidymo, paleidyklė negali būti tinkamai įdiegta" #. FATE#303643 Enable one-click changes in bootloader proposal #. #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:168 -msgid "Install bootcode into MBR (do not install</a>)" -msgstr "Rašyti paleidyklės kodą į pagrindinio paleidimo įrašą (MBR) (nediegti</a>" +msgid "" +"Install bootcode into MBR (do not install</a>)" +msgstr "" +"Rašyti paleidyklės kodą į pagrindinio paleidimo įrašą (MBR) (nediegti</a>" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:172 -msgid "Do not install bootcode into MBR (install</a>)" -msgstr "Nerašyti paleidyklės kodo į pagrindinį paleidimo įrašą (MBR) (diegti</a>" +msgid "" +"Do not install bootcode into MBR (install</a>)" +msgstr "" +"Nerašyti paleidyklės kodo į pagrindinį paleidimo įrašą (MBR) (diegti</a>" #. check for separated boot partition, use root otherwise #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:185 -msgid "Install bootcode into /boot partition (do not install</a>)" -msgstr "Diegti paleidyklės kodą į /boot skaidinį (nediegti</a>" +msgid "" +"Install bootcode into /boot partition (do not " +"install</a>)" +msgstr "" +"Diegti paleidyklės kodą į /boot skaidinį (" +"nediegti</a>" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:189 -msgid "Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (install</a>)" -msgstr "Nediegti paleidyklės kodo į /boot skaidinį (diegti</a>" +msgid "" +"Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (" +"install</a>)" +msgstr "" +"Nediegti paleidyklės kodo į /boot skaidinį (" +"diegti</a>" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:195 -msgid "Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (do not install</a>)" -msgstr "Diegti paleidyklės kodą į „/“ skaidinį (nediegti</a>" +msgid "" +"Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (do not " +"install</a>)" +msgstr "" +"Diegti paleidyklės kodą į „/“ skaidinį (" +"nediegti</a>" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:199 -msgid "Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (install</a>)" -msgstr "Nediegti paleidyklės kodo į „/“ skaidinį (diegti</a>)" +msgid "" +"Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (" +"install</a>)" +msgstr "" +"Nediegti paleidyklės kodo į „/“ skaidinį (" +"diegti</a>)" #. no location chosen, so warn user that it is problem unless he is sure #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:209 -msgid "Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected.Unless you know what you are doing please select above location." -msgstr "Įspėjimas: paleidyklės vieta pirmajam etapui nenurodyta. TIk jei tikrai žinote, ką darote, parinkite vietą." +msgid "" +"Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected.Unless you know what you " +"are doing please select above location." +msgstr "" +"Įspėjimas: paleidyklės vieta pirmajam etapui nenurodyta. TIk jei tikrai " +"žinote, ką darote, parinkite vietą." #. TRANSLATORS: title for list of location proposals #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:217 @@ -1189,12 +1327,20 @@ #. grub2 is sooo cool... #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:99 msgid "Unsupported combination of hardware platform %1 and bootloader %2" -msgstr "Aparatinės įrangos %1 platformos ir paleidyklės %2 derinys nepalaikomas" +msgstr "" +"Aparatinės įrangos %1 platformos ir paleidyklės %2 derinys nepalaikomas" #. TRANSLATORS: description of technical problem. Do not translate technical terms unless native language have well known translation. #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:139 -msgid "Boot from MBR does not work together with btrfs filesystem and GPT disk label without bios_grub partition.To fix this issue, create bios_grub partition or use any ext filesystem for boot partition or do not install stage 1 to MBR." -msgstr "Paleisti iš MBR nepavyks, jei naudojate btrfs rinkmenų sistemą su GPT disko žymėmis, nebent turite bios_grub skaidinį. Arba sukurkite bios_grub skaidinį, arba pasirinkite Ext rinkmenų sistemą, arba į MBR nediekite pirmo etapo (stage1)." +msgid "" +"Boot from MBR does not work together with btrfs filesystem and GPT disk label " +"without bios_grub partition.To fix this issue, create bios_grub partition or " +"use any ext filesystem for boot partition or do not install stage 1 to MBR." +msgstr "" +"Paleisti iš MBR nepavyks, jei naudojate btrfs rinkmenų sistemą su GPT disko " +"žymėmis, nebent turite bios_grub skaidinį. Arba sukurkite bios_grub skaidinį, " +"arba pasirinkite Ext rinkmenų sistemą, arba į MBR nediekite pirmo etapo " +"(stage1)." #. check if boot device is on raid0 #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:167 @@ -1203,8 +1349,12 @@ #. bnc#501043 added check for valid configuration #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:187 -msgid "The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. Master Boot Record" -msgstr "Paleidimo įrenginys naudoja RAID1 programinę įrangą. Pasirinkite kitą paleidyklės vietą, pvz. paleidimo įrašą (MBR)" +msgid "" +"The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. " +"Master Boot Record" +msgstr "" +"Paleidimo įrenginys naudoja RAID1 programinę įrangą. Pasirinkite kitą " +"paleidyklės vietą, pvz. paleidimo įrašą (MBR)" #. if partitioning worked before upgrade, it will keep working (bnc#886604) #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:239 @@ -1213,12 +1363,20 @@ #. activate set or there is already activate flag #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:248 -msgid "Activate flag is not set by installer. If it is not set at all, some BIOSes could refuse to boot." -msgstr "Diegimo programa nekeitė aktyvaus skaidinio. Jei jis nenurodytas, kai kurios BIOS sistemos gali nepaleisti operacinių sistemų." +msgid "" +"Activate flag is not set by installer. If it is not set at all, some BIOSes " +"could refuse to boot." +msgstr "" +"Diegimo programa nekeitė aktyvaus skaidinio. Jei jis nenurodytas, kai kurios " +"BIOS sistemos gali nepaleisti operacinių sistemų." #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:255 -msgid "The installer will not modify the MBR of the disk. Unless it already contains boot code, the BIOS won't be able to boot disk." -msgstr "Diegimo programa nepakeis diske esančio MBR įrašo. Jei diske nebus jokio MBR įrašo, iš to disko BIOS negalės įkelti operacinių sistemų." +msgid "" +"The installer will not modify the MBR of the disk. Unless it already contains " +"boot code, the BIOS won't be able to boot disk." +msgstr "" +"Diegimo programa nepakeis diske esančio MBR įrašo. Jei diske nebus jokio MBR " +"įrašo, iš to disko BIOS negalės įkelti operacinių sistemų." #. progress stage, text in dialog (short, infinitiv) #: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:146 Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/ca-management.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/ca-management.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/ca-management.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -20,7 +20,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Command line definition @@ -98,15 +99,20 @@ #: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:93 msgid "CA password (Security: This should be given by an environment variable)" -msgstr "Liudijimų įstaigos slaptažodis (Saugumas: jį turėtų nurodyti aplinkos kintamasis)" +msgstr "" +"Liudijimų įstaigos slaptažodis (Saugumas: jį turėtų nurodyti aplinkos " +"kintamasis)" #: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:100 -msgid "P12 password (Security: This should be given by an environment variable)" +msgid "" +"P12 password (Security: This should be given by an environment variable)" msgstr "P12 slaptažodis (Saugumas: jį turėtų nurodyti aplinkos kintamasis)" #: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:112 msgid "Path of the exported CA, certificate, or CRL" -msgstr "Eksportuojamos liudijimų įstaigos, liudijimo arba atšauktų liudijimų sąrašo kelias" +msgstr "" +"Eksportuojamos liudijimų įstaigos, liudijimo arba atšauktų liudijimų sąrašo " +"kelias" #. Autoyast configuration of ca-management #. For use with autoinstallation. @@ -118,9 +124,11 @@ #: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:172 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"YaST generates a default CA and certificate automatically. This CA and certificate\n" +"YaST generates a default CA and certificate automatically. This CA and " +"certificate\n" "is used for communicating with the Apache server.\n" -"Here, change the settings of this CA and certificate or import a CA and certificate from a file.\n" +"Here, change the settings of this CA and certificate or import a CA and " +"certificate from a file.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -365,8 +373,12 @@ #. #. Proposal function dispatcher for CA Management #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:107 -msgid "Cannot evaluate the name of the local machine. Change the values of Server Name and E-Mail." -msgstr "Nepavyksta įvertinti vietinės mašinos vardo. Pakeiskite serverio vardo ir el. pašto reikšmes." +msgid "" +"Cannot evaluate the name of the local machine. Change the values of Server " +"Name and E-Mail." +msgstr "" +"Nepavyksta įvertinti vietinės mašinos vardo. Pakeiskite serverio vardo ir el. " +"pašto reikšmes." #. new handling of force reset because of (#238754) #. NO FORCE RESET @@ -387,10 +399,16 @@ msgstr "Šalinti senas nuostatas?" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:296 src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:338 -msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set a CA password to continue." -msgstr "Negalima gauti sistemos root slaptažodžio. Norėdami tęsti, nustatykite LĮ slaptažodį." +msgid "" +"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set a CA password to continue." +msgstr "" +"Negalima gauti sistemos root slaptažodžio. Norėdami tęsti, nustatykite LĮ " +"slaptažodį." #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:325 +#| msgid "" +#| "The password is too short for use as the password for the certificates. \n" +#| " Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate creation.\n" msgid "" "The password is too short to use for the certificates. \n" "Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate creation.\n" @@ -449,9 +467,13 @@ msgstr "Alternatyvusis vardas: " #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:406 +#| msgid "" +#| "The root password is too short for use as the password for the certificates. \n" +#| " Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate creation.\n" msgid "" "The root password is too short for use as the password for the certificates.\n" -" Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate creation.\n" +" Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate " +"creation.\n" msgstr "" "Dabartinis root slaptažodis liudijimui yra per trumpas.\n" " Įveskite tinkamą slaptažodį arba uždrauskite liudijimų kūrimą.\n" @@ -465,8 +487,12 @@ msgstr "Importuojama LĮ ir liudijimas iš rinkmenos" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:427 -msgid "<p>Is the default hostname <b>linux</b> really unique? The certificate is only valid if the hostname is correct.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Ar pagrindinis kompiuterio vardas <b>linux</b> tikrai unikalus? Liudijimas galios tik tada, jei pagrindinio kompiuterio vardas yra korektiškas.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Is the default hostname <b>linux</b> really unique? The certificate is " +"only valid if the hostname is correct.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Ar pagrindinis kompiuterio vardas <b>linux</b> tikrai unikalus? Liudijimas " +"galios tik tada, jei pagrindinio kompiuterio vardas yra korektiškas.</p>" #. menu title #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:468 @@ -503,7 +529,8 @@ #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:103 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"In this frame, select the desired installation method for <b>CAs</b> and <b>certificates</b>\n" +"In this frame, select the desired installation method for <b>CAs</b> and <b>" +"certificates</b>\n" "while completing the installation.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -511,7 +538,8 @@ #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:112 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"You also have the possibility of creating the default CA and certificate in the installed system \n" +"You also have the possibility of creating the default CA and certificate in " +"the installed system \n" "if you do not want to create or import it now.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -607,13 +635,15 @@ #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:388 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"YaST generates a <b>default CA and certificate</b> automatically. This CA and certificate\n" +"YaST generates a <b>default CA and certificate</b> automatically. This CA and " +"certificate\n" "is used for communicating with the <b>Apache server</b>.\n" "Here, change these <b>default settings</b>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:484 +#| msgid "Alternative Names: " msgid "&Edit Alternative Names" msgstr "&Keisti alternatyviuosius vardus" @@ -633,41 +663,67 @@ #. help text 1/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:77 -msgid "<p>A Server Certificate is used by services which provide SSL/TLS encrypted network connections.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Serverio liudijimą naudoja paslaugos, suteikiančios SSL/TLS šifruotų tinklo ryšių funkcijas.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>A Server Certificate is used by services which provide SSL/TLS encrypted " +"network connections.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Serverio liudijimą naudoja paslaugos, suteikiančios SSL/TLS šifruotų " +"tinklo ryšių funkcijas.</p>" #. help text 2/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:84 -msgid "<p>The purpose of the <b>Common Server Certificate</b> is, to provide a certificate for several services running on this host. " -msgstr "<p><b>Bendro serverio liudijimo</b> paskirtis – šiame pagrindiniame kompiuteryje pateikti liudijimą kelioms veikiančioms paslaugoms. " +msgid "" +"<p>The purpose of the <b>Common Server Certificate</b> is, to provide a " +"certificate for several services running on this host. " +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Bendro serverio liudijimo</b> paskirtis – šiame pagrindiniame " +"kompiuteryje pateikti liudijimą kelioms veikiančioms paslaugoms. " #. help text 3/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:92 -msgid "Some YaST modules provide the capability to use this certificate during configuration of such a service.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Kai kurie YaST moduliai suteikia galimybę šį liudijimą naudoti paslaugų konfigūravimo metu.</p>" +msgid "" +"Some YaST modules provide the capability to use this certificate during " +"configuration of such a service.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Kai kurie YaST moduliai suteikia galimybę šį liudijimą naudoti paslaugų " +"konfigūravimo metu.</p>" #. help text 4/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:100 -msgid "<p>With the <b>Import/Replace</b> button you can add a new server certificate or replace the current one.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Importuoti/pakeisti</b> mygtuku galite pridėti naują serverio liudijimą arba pakeisti esamą.</p>" +#| msgid "<p>With the <b>Import/Replace</b> button you can add a new server certificate or replace the currect one.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>With the <b>Import/Replace</b> button you can add a new server certificate " +"or replace the current one.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Importuoti/pakeisti</b> mygtuku galite pridėti naują serverio liudijimą " +"arba pakeisti esamą.</p>" #. help text 5/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:108 -msgid "<p>You can remove the Certificates by clicking the <b>Remove</b> button. But make sure, that it is not used anymore by other services.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Liudijimus galite šalinti spustelėdami mygtuką <b>Šalinti</b>. Tačiau įsitikinkite, kad jo nebenaudoja jokia kita paslauga.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>You can remove the Certificates by clicking the <b>Remove</b> button. But " +"make sure, that it is not used anymore by other services.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Liudijimus galite šalinti spustelėdami mygtuką <b>Šalinti</b>. Tačiau " +"įsitikinkite, kad jo nebenaudoja jokia kita paslauga.</p>" #. help text 6/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:116 -msgid "<p>Certificates can be written to a file using <b>Export to File</b> in section <b>Certificate</b> in the <b>CA Management</b> module.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Certificates can be written to a file using <b>Export to File</b> in " +"section <b>Certificate</b> in the <b>CA Management</b> module.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 7/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:124 -msgid "<p>Certificates to import from disk must have been written in <b>PKCS12 format with CA chain</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Certificates to import from disk must have been written in <b>PKCS12 " +"format with CA chain</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 8/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:132 +#| msgid "<p>For more informations, please read the manual.</p>" msgid "<p>For more information, please read the manual.</p>" msgstr "<p>Daugiau informacijos rasite žinyne.</p>" @@ -725,8 +781,12 @@ #. help text 2/2 #: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:70 -msgid "<p>Special information about the current CA is provided by <b>Certificates</b>, <b>CRL</b>, and <b>Advanced</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Specialią informaciją apie esamą liudijimų įstaigą pateikia <b>liudijimai</b>, <b>atšauktų liudijimų sąrašas</b> ir <b>papildoma</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Special information about the current CA is provided by <b>Certificates</b>" +", <b>CRL</b>, and <b>Advanced</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Specialią informaciją apie esamą liudijimų įstaigą pateikia <b>liudijimai<" +"/b>, <b>atšauktų liudijimų sąrašas</b> ir <b>papildoma</b>.</p>" #. getDescriptionCA - description of a CA #. @param CA name @@ -750,6 +810,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:187 src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:224 +#| msgid "Common Name: " msgid "" "\n" "Common Name: " @@ -760,6 +821,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:192 src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:229 +#| msgid "O&rganization:" msgid "" "\n" "Organization: " @@ -770,6 +832,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:197 src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:234 +#| msgid "Location: %1" msgid "" "\n" "Location: " @@ -780,6 +843,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:202 src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:239 +#| msgid "State: " msgid "" "\n" "State: " @@ -790,6 +854,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:207 src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:244 +#| msgid "Country: " msgid "" "\n" "Country: " @@ -861,7 +926,9 @@ #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:51 -msgid "<p>When creating a new subCA or certificate, the system suggests some default values.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>When creating a new subCA or certificate, the system suggests some default " +"values.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/4 @@ -873,12 +940,17 @@ #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:62 #: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:153 -msgid "<p>However, the modified settings will be used for <b>new</B> entries only.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Tačiau pakeistos nuostatos bus naudojamos tik <b>naujiems</B> įrašams.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>However, the modified settings will be used for <b>new</B> entries only.<" +"/p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Tačiau pakeistos nuostatos bus naudojamos tik <b>naujiems</B> įrašams.</p>" #. help text 4/4 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:69 -msgid "<p>You can edit the default settings for <b>subCAs</b>, <b>client certificates</b>, and <b>server certificates</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>You can edit the default settings for <b>subCAs</b>, <b>client " +"certificates</b>, and <b>server certificates</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:79 @@ -899,8 +971,12 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:136 -msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all default settings before they are saved.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Šiame rėmelyje pateikiama visų numatytųjų nuostatų apžvalga prieš jas įrašant.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This frame gives an overview of all default settings before they are " +"saved.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Šiame rėmelyje pateikiama visų numatytųjų nuostatų apžvalga prieš jas " +"įrašant.</p>" #. help text 2/2 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:142 @@ -1013,8 +1089,14 @@ #. help text 1/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:46 -msgid "<p>First, see a list view with all available certificates from this CA. The columns are the DN of the certificates including the e-mail address and the state of the certificate (such as valid or revoked).</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pirmiausia matote šios LĮ visų pasiekiamų liudijimų sąrašą. Stulpeliuose yra liudijimų skiriamieji vardai (DN) įskaitant el. pašto adresus ir liudijimo būsena (galiojantis arba atšauktas).</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>First, see a list view with all available certificates from this CA. The " +"columns are the DN of the certificates including the e-mail address and the " +"state of the certificate (such as valid or revoked).</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pirmiausia matote šios LĮ visų pasiekiamų liudijimų sąrašą. Stulpeliuose " +"yra liudijimų skiriamieji vardai (DN) įskaitant el. pašto adresus ir " +"liudijimo būsena (galiojantis arba atšauktas).</p>" #. help text 2/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:52 @@ -1023,22 +1105,32 @@ #. help text 3/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:57 -msgid "<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete certificate.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete " +"certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 4/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:64 -msgid "<p>Furthermore, you can <b>Revoke</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a certificate.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Taip pat galite liudijimą <b>atšaukti</b>, <b>pašalinti</b> arba <b>eksportuoti</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Furthermore, you can <b>Revoke</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a " +"certificate.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Taip pat galite liudijimą <b>atšaukti</b>, <b>pašalinti</b> arba <b>" +"eksportuoti</b>.</p>" #. help text 5/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:71 msgid "<p>With <b>Add</b>, generate a new server or client certificate.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Nuspaudę <b>Pridėti</b>, galėsite sukurti naują serverį arba kliento liudijimą.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Nuspaudę <b>Pridėti</b>, galėsite sukurti naują serverį arba kliento " +"liudijimą.</p>" #. help text 6/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:78 -msgid "<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected certificate.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected " +"certificate.</p>" msgstr "<p>Čia matote svarbiausias pasirinkto liudijimo reikšmes.</p>" #. popup window header @@ -1048,7 +1140,9 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:145 msgid "You are only revoking the certificate. No new CRL will be created." -msgstr "Jūs tik atšaukiate liudijimą. Naujas atšauktų liudijimų sąrašas (CRL) nebus kuriamas." +msgstr "" +"Jūs tik atšaukiate liudijimą. Naujas atšauktų liudijimų sąrašas (CRL) nebus " +"kuriamas." #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:150 msgid "Reasons" @@ -1077,6 +1171,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:302 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:65 +#| msgid "Common Name: " msgid "" "\n" "Common Name: " @@ -1088,6 +1183,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:307 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:80 +#| msgid "Organization: " msgid "" "\n" "Organization: " @@ -1099,6 +1195,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:312 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:85 +#| msgid "Organization: " msgid "" "\n" "Location: " @@ -1110,6 +1207,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:317 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:90 +#| msgid "State: " msgid "" "\n" "State: " @@ -1121,6 +1219,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:322 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:95 +#| msgid "Country: " msgid "" "\n" "Country: " @@ -1132,6 +1231,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:327 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:100 +#| msgid "Path Length: " msgid "" "\n" "EMAIL: " @@ -1143,6 +1243,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:333 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:107 +#| msgid "CA Name: " msgid "" "\n" "Is CA: " @@ -1154,6 +1255,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:338 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:112 +#| msgid "Key Length: " msgid "" "\n" "Key Size: " @@ -1174,6 +1276,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:348 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:117 +#| msgid "Valid Period: " msgid "" "\n" "Version: " @@ -1183,6 +1286,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:353 +#| msgid "Valid Period: " msgid "" "\n" "Valid from: " @@ -1192,6 +1296,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:358 +#| msgid "Valid Period: " msgid "" "\n" "Valid to: " @@ -1307,12 +1412,15 @@ #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:55 msgid "<p>Here, see the most important values of the CRL.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Čia matote svarbiausias atšauktų liudijimų sąrašo (CRL) reikšmes.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Čia matote svarbiausias atšauktų liudijimų sąrašo (CRL) reikšmes.</p>" #. help text 2/4 #: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:59 msgid "<p>With <b>Generate CRL</b>, a new CRL will be generated.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Nuspaudus <b>Kurti CRL</b>, bus sukurtas naujas atšauktų liudijimų sąrašas.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Nuspaudus <b>Kurti CRL</b>, bus sukurtas naujas atšauktų liudijimų " +"sąrašas.</p>" #. help text 3/4 #: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:64 @@ -1322,7 +1430,9 @@ #. help text 4/4 #: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:69 msgid "<p>You can <b>Export</b> the CRL to a file or LDAP Directory.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Atšauktų liudijimų sąrašą galite <b>Eksportuoti</b> į rinkmeną arba į LDAP katalogą.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Atšauktų liudijimų sąrašą galite <b>Eksportuoti</b> į rinkmeną arba į LDAP " +"katalogą.</p>" #. popup window header #: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:95 @@ -1381,8 +1491,11 @@ #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:142 -msgid "<p>When creating a new CRL, the system suggests some default values.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Naujai kuriamam atšauktų liudijimų sąrašui sistema pasiūlo numatytąsias reikšmes.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>When creating a new CRL, the system suggests some default values.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Naujai kuriamam atšauktų liudijimų sąrašui sistema pasiūlo numatytąsias " +"reikšmes.</p>" #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:148 @@ -1418,7 +1531,11 @@ #. Translators: long help text - security information #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:111 -msgid "Warning!<br>Activating the automatic creation and export of a CRL will write the CA password to a configuration file on disk. The password will be stored there in plain text as it is needed to create a CRL. The file will only be readable for the root user." +msgid "" +"Warning!<br>Activating the automatic creation and export of a CRL will write " +"the CA password to a configuration file on disk. The password will be stored " +"there in plain text as it is needed to create a CRL. The file will only be " +"readable for the root user." msgstr "" #. Editing CRL defaults of a selected CA @@ -1431,15 +1548,29 @@ #. this default can only be set inside this function #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:381 msgid "<p>Export the CRL of this CA once by selecting <b>Export once</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norėdami vieną kartą eksportuoti šiai liudijimų įstaigai priklausantį atšauktų liudijimų sąrašą (CRL), spauskite <b>eksportuoti vieną kartą</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norėdami vieną kartą eksportuoti šiai liudijimų įstaigai priklausantį " +"atšauktų liudijimų sąrašą (CRL), spauskite <b>eksportuoti vieną kartą</b>.</p>" #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:384 -msgid "<p>To set up a repeated recreation of the CRL, select <b>Repeated recreation and export</b>. In this case, set the interval for the recreation in <b>Periodic interval</b>. If you set the interval to 24 hours, you can additionally select the hour for the export. Make sure you read and understand the <b>Security Information</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>To set up a repeated recreation of the CRL, select <b>Repeated recreation " +"and export</b>. In this case, set the interval for the recreation in <b>" +"Periodic interval</b>. If you set the interval to 24 hours, you can " +"additionally select the hour for the export. Make sure you read and " +"understand the <b>Security Information</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:387 -msgid "<p>You can activate an export of the CRL to a local file or to an LDAP server or both. Set up the respective parameters in <b>Export to local file</b> and <b>Export to LDAP</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Atšauktų liudijimų sąrašą galima nurodyti eksportuoti tiek į vietinę rinkmeną, tiek į LDAP serverį, tiek į abu. Ties <b>Eksportuoti į vietinę rinkmeną</b> ir <b>Eksportuoti į LDAP</b> nurodykite atitinkamus parametrus.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>You can activate an export of the CRL to a local file or to an LDAP server " +"or both. Set up the respective parameters in <b>Export to local file</b> and " +"<b>Export to LDAP</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Atšauktų liudijimų sąrašą galima nurodyti eksportuoti tiek į vietinę " +"rinkmeną, tiek į LDAP serverį, tiek į abu. Ties <b>Eksportuoti į vietinę " +"rinkmeną</b> ir <b>Eksportuoti į LDAP</b> nurodykite atitinkamus parametrus.<" +"/p>" #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:401 msgid "Export once" @@ -1535,6 +1666,7 @@ msgstr "Įrašyti kaip" #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:647 +#| msgid "Export to file failed" msgid "Export to file failed." msgstr "Eksportuoti į rinkmeną nepavyko." @@ -1545,6 +1677,7 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:653 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:468 +#| msgid "Saved to file successfully" msgid "Saved to file successfully." msgstr "Rinkmena sėkmingai įrašyta." @@ -1555,6 +1688,7 @@ msgstr "Sėkmingai įrašyta į LDAP." #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:672 +#| msgid "Export to LDAP failed" msgid "Export to LDAP failed." msgstr "Eksportuoti į LDAP nepavyko." @@ -1613,30 +1747,47 @@ #. help text 5/7 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:117 -msgid "<p><b>CA Name</b> is the name of a CA certificate. Use only the characters, \"a-z\", \"A-Z\", \"-\", and \"_\".</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>LĮ vardas</b> yra LĮ liudijimo vardas. Naudokite tik „a-z“, „A-Z“, „-“ ir „_“ rašmenis.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>CA Name</b> is the name of a CA certificate. Use only the characters, " +"\"a-z\", \"A-Z\", \"-\", and \"_\".</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>LĮ vardas</b> yra LĮ liudijimo vardas. Naudokite tik „a-z“, „A-Z“, „-“ " +"ir „_“ rašmenis.</p>" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:123 msgid "<p><b>Common Name</b> is the name of the CA.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>Bendras vardas</b> yra LĮ vardas.</p>" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:129 -msgid "<p><b>Common Name</b> is the name of the user for whom to create the certificate.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Bendras vardas</b> yra naudotojo vardas, kuriam sukuriamas šis liudijimas.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Common Name</b> is the name of the user for whom to create the " +"certificate.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Bendras vardas</b> yra naudotojo vardas, kuriam sukuriamas šis " +"liudijimas.</p>" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:136 -msgid "<p><b>Common Name</b> is the fully qualified domain name of the server.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Common Name</b> is the fully qualified domain name of the server.</p>" msgstr "<p><b>Bendras vardas</b> yra visas serverio srities vardas.</p>" #. help text 6/7 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:145 -msgid "<p><b>E-Mail Addresses</b> are valid e-mail addresses of the user or server administrator.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>El. pašto adresai<b> yra galiojantys serverio administratoriaus elektroninis pašto adresai.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>E-Mail Addresses</b> are valid e-mail addresses of the user or server " +"administrator.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>El. pašto adresai<b> yra galiojantys serverio administratoriaus " +"elektroninis pašto adresai.</p>" #. help text 7/7 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:152 -msgid "<p><b>Organization</b>, <b>Organizational Unit</b>, <b>Locality</b>, and <b>State</b> are often optional.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Laukelių <b>Organizacija</b>, <b>Organizacinis vienetas</b>, <b>Vietovė</b> ir <b>Valstija</b> nebūtina pildyti.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Organization</b>, <b>Organizational Unit</b>, <b>Locality</b>, and <b>" +"State</b> are often optional.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Laukelių <b>Organizacija</b>, <b>Organizacinis vienetas</b>, <b>Vietovė</b>" +" ir <b>Valstija</b> nebūtina pildyti.</p>" #. To translators: pushbutton label #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:173 @@ -1667,18 +1818,31 @@ #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:469 -msgid "<p>The private key of the CA needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" -msgstr "<p>LĮ privačiam raktui reikia <B>slaptažodžio</B>, kurio ilgis bent 5 simboliai. Sekančiame laukelyje pakartokite slaptažodį, kad pasitikrintumėte.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The private key of the CA needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of " +"five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>LĮ privačiam raktui reikia <B>slaptažodžio</B>, kurio ilgis bent 5 " +"simboliai. Sekančiame laukelyje pakartokite slaptažodį, kad " +"pasitikrintumėte.</p>" #. help text 2/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:476 -msgid "<p>Each CA has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Kiekviena liudijimų įstaiga turi savo <b>rakto ilgį</b>. Kai kurioms sertifikatus naudojančioms programoms reikia konkretaus ilgio rakto.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Each CA has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use " +"certificates need special key lengths.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Kiekviena liudijimų įstaiga turi savo <b>rakto ilgį</b>. Kai kurioms " +"sertifikatus naudojančioms programoms reikia konkretaus ilgio rakto.</p>" #. help text 3/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:484 -msgid "<p>The CA is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). Enter the time frame in days.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Liudijimų įstaiga galioja tik tam tikram laukui (<b>Galiojimo periodas</b>). Laiką nurodykite dienomis.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The CA is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). Enter the " +"time frame in days.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Liudijimų įstaiga galioja tik tam tikram laukui (<b>Galiojimo periodas</b>" +"). Laiką nurodykite dienomis.</p>" #. help text 4/4 #. help text 4/4 @@ -1686,33 +1850,62 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:492 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:521 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:543 -msgid "<p><b>Advanced Options</b> are very special options. If you change these options, SUSE cannot guarantee that the generated certificate will work correctly.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Sudėtingesnės parinktys</b> yra labai specifinės. Pakeitus šias parinktis, SUSE negalės užtikrinti sukurto liudijimo tinkamumo naudojimui.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Advanced Options</b> are very special options. If you change these " +"options, SUSE cannot guarantee that the generated certificate will work " +"correctly.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Sudėtingesnės parinktys</b> yra labai specifinės. Pakeitus šias " +"parinktis, SUSE negalės užtikrinti sukurto liudijimo tinkamumo naudojimui.</p>" #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:498 -msgid "<p>The private key of the certificate needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Liudijimo privačiam raktui reikia <B>slaptažodžio</B>, kurio ilgis bent 5 simboliai. Sekančiame laukelyje pakartokite slaptažodį, kad pasitikrintumėte.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The private key of the certificate needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum " +"length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next " +"field.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Liudijimo privačiam raktui reikia <B>slaptažodžio</B>, kurio ilgis bent 5 " +"simboliai. Sekančiame laukelyje pakartokite slaptažodį, kad " +"pasitikrintumėte.</p>" #. help text 2/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:505 -msgid "<p>Each certificate has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Kiekvienas liudijimas turi savo <b>rakto ilgį</b>. Kai kurioms sertifikatus naudojančioms programoms reikia konkretaus ilgio rakto.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Each certificate has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use " +"certificates need special key lengths.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Kiekvienas liudijimas turi savo <b>rakto ilgį</b>. Kai kurioms " +"sertifikatus naudojančioms programoms reikia konkretaus ilgio rakto.</p>" #. help text 3/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:513 -msgid "<p>The certificate is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). Enter the time frame in days.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Liudijimas galioja tik tam tikram laukui (<b>Galiojimo periodas</b>). Laiką nurodykite dienomis.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The certificate is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). " +"Enter the time frame in days.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Liudijimas galioja tik tam tikram laukui (<b>Galiojimo periodas</b>). " +"Laiką nurodykite dienomis.</p>" #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:528 -msgid "<p>The private key of the request needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Užklausos privačiam raktui reikia <B>slaptažodžio</B>, kurio ilgis bent 5 simboliai. Sekančiame laukelyje pakartokite slaptažodį, kad pasitikrintumėte.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The private key of the request needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum " +"length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next " +"field.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Užklausos privačiam raktui reikia <B>slaptažodžio</B>, kurio ilgis bent 5 " +"simboliai. Sekančiame laukelyje pakartokite slaptažodį, kad " +"pasitikrintumėte.</p>" #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:535 -msgid "<p>Each request has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Kiekviena užklausa turi savo <b>rakto ilgį</b>. Kai kurioms sertifikatus naudojančioms programoms reikia konkretaus ilgio rakto.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Each request has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use " +"certificates need special key lengths.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Kiekviena užklausa turi savo <b>rakto ilgį</b>. Kai kurioms sertifikatus " +"naudojančioms programoms reikia konkretaus ilgio rakto.</p>" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:561 msgid "&Use CA Password as Certificate Password" @@ -1746,7 +1939,9 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:700 -msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the CA that will be created.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the CA that will be " +"created.</p>" msgstr "<p>Čia galite peržvelgti visas sukursimos LĮ nuostatas.</p>" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1756,7 +1951,9 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:710 -msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the certificate that will be created.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the certificate that will " +"be created.</p>" msgstr "<p>Čia galite peržvelgti visas sukursimo liudijimo nuostatas.</p>" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1766,7 +1963,9 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:721 -msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be created.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be " +"created.</p>" msgstr "<p>Čia galite peržvelgti visas sukursimos užklausos nuostatas.</p>" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1879,7 +2078,10 @@ #. #. Creating a new CA/Certificate #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:55 -msgid "<P>This frame shows further attributes and OpenSSL X509v3 extensions that can be set. If you are not familiar with these extensions, refer to the file /usr/share/doc/packages/openssl-doc/openssl.txt (package openssl-doc).</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>This frame shows further attributes and OpenSSL X509v3 extensions that can " +"be set. If you are not familiar with these extensions, refer to the file " +"/usr/share/doc/packages/openssl-doc/openssl.txt (package openssl-doc).</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:61 @@ -1945,8 +2147,12 @@ #. help text 1/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:47 -msgid "<p>First, see a list view with all available requests of this CA. The columns are the DN of the request including the e-mail address.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pirmiausia matote šios LĮ visų pasiekiamų užklausų sąrašą. Stulpeliuose yra užklausų skiriamieji vardai (DN) įskaitant el. pašto adresus.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>First, see a list view with all available requests of this CA. The columns " +"are the DN of the request including the e-mail address.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pirmiausia matote šios LĮ visų pasiekiamų užklausų sąrašą. Stulpeliuose " +"yra užklausų skiriamieji vardai (DN) įskaitant el. pašto adresus.</p>" #. help text 2/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:53 @@ -1955,22 +2161,33 @@ #. help text 3/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:58 -msgid "<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete request.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete " +"request.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 4/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:65 -msgid "<p>You can also <b>Sign</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a request.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Užklausą galite <b>Pasirašyti</b>, <b>Šalinti</b> arba <b>Eksportuoti</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>You can also <b>Sign</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a request.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Užklausą galite <b>Pasirašyti</b>, <b>Šalinti</b> arba <b>Eksportuoti</b>" +".</p>" #. help text 5/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:72 -msgid "<p>With <b>Import</b>, read a new request. With <b>Add</b>, generate a new request.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Nuspaudę <b>Importuoti</b>, galėsite nuskaityti naują užklausą. Nuspaudę <b>Pridėti</b>, Sukursite naują užklausą.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>With <b>Import</b>, read a new request. With <b>Add</b>, generate a new " +"request.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Nuspaudę <b>Importuoti</b>, galėsite nuskaityti naują užklausą. Nuspaudę <" +"b>Pridėti</b>, Sukursite naują užklausą.</p>" #. help text 6/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:79 -msgid "<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected request.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected request.<" +"/p>" msgstr "<p>Čia matote svarbiausias pasirinktos užklausos reikšmes.</p>" #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:326 @@ -2027,6 +2244,7 @@ #. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:74 +#| msgid "Generate Time" msgid "" "\n" "generation Time: " @@ -2064,14 +2282,18 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:708 -msgid "<p>The request has special request extensions, which you can accept.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Užklausa turi specialius užklausos plėtinius, kuriuos galite priimti.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The request has special request extensions, which you can accept.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Užklausa turi specialius užklausos plėtinius, kuriuos galite priimti.</p>" #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:715 -msgid "<p>If you reject these extensions, the default values are taken instead.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>If you reject these extensions, the default values are taken instead.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Jei atmesite šiuos plėtinius, bus naudojamos iš anksto parinktos reikšmės.\n" +"<p>Jei atmesite šiuos plėtinius, bus naudojamos iš anksto parinktos " +"reikšmės.\n" "</p>" #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:731 @@ -2084,7 +2306,9 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:777 -msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be signed.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be " +"signed.</p>" msgstr "<p>Čia galite peržvelgti visas pasirašysimos užklausos nuostatas.</p>" #. help text 2/2 @@ -2138,12 +2362,17 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:149 -msgid "<p><b>Create Root CA</b> generates a new root certificate authority.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pasirinkus <b>Sukurti vyriausiąją LĮ</b>, sukuriama nauja vyriausioji liudijimų įstaiga.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Create Root CA</b> generates a new root certificate authority.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pasirinkus <b>Sukurti vyriausiąją LĮ</b>, sukuriama nauja vyriausioji " +"liudijimų įstaiga.</p>" #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:156 -msgid "<p>For more information about CA Management, please read the manual.</p>" +#| msgid "<p>For more informations about CA Management, please read the manual.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>For more information about CA Management, please read the manual.</p>" msgstr "<p>Daugiau informacijos apie LĮ tvarkymą rasite žinyne.</p>" #. To translators: pushbutton label @@ -2198,6 +2427,9 @@ msgstr "&Patikrinti slaptažodį:" #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:220 +#| msgid "" +#| "The new password is too short for use as the password for the certificates.\n" +#| " Enter a valid password for the certificates.\n" msgid "" "The new password is too short to use it for the certificates.\n" "Enter a valid password for the certificates.\n" @@ -2357,15 +2589,23 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1216 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Importing Common Server Certificate (PKCS12 + CA Chain Format)\n" -" from Disk:</big></b> Select one file name and press <b>Next</b> to continue.</p>\n" +" from Disk:</big></b> Select one file name and press <b>Next</b> to " +"continue.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b><big>Importuojamas bendras serverio liudijimas (PKCS12 + LĮ grandinės formatu)\n" -" iš disko:</big></b> pasirinkite vieną rinkmeną ir spauskite <b>Toliau</b>.</p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Importuojamas bendras serverio liudijimas (PKCS12 + LĮ grandinės " +"formatu)\n" +" iš disko:</big></b> pasirinkite vieną rinkmeną ir spauskite <b>Toliau</b>.<" +"/p>\n" #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1222 -msgid "Import a server certificate and corresponding CA and copy them to a place where other YaST modules look for such a common certificate." -msgstr "Importuoti serverio liudijimą bei atitinkamą LĮ ir juos nukopijuoti į vietą, kurioje kiti YaST moduliai ieško tokių bendrų liudijimų." +#| msgid "Import a server certificate and correspondenting CA and copy them to a place where other YaST modules look for such a common certificate." +msgid "" +"Import a server certificate and corresponding CA and copy them to a place " +"where other YaST modules look for such a common certificate." +msgstr "" +"Importuoti serverio liudijimą bei atitinkamą LĮ ir juos nukopijuoti į vietą, " +"kurioje kiti YaST moduliai ieško tokių bendrų liudijimų." #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1230 @@ -2395,6 +2635,10 @@ #. check if hostname is in Subject Alt Name #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1361 +#| msgid "" +#| "The common name of the certificate (%1) is not the name of\n" +#| "the server (%2).\n" +#| "This certificate might be not practical as a common server certificate.\n" msgid "" "The common name of the certificate (%1) is not the name of·\n" "the server (%2).\n" @@ -2407,7 +2651,8 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1369 msgid "" "The hostname of this server (command: hostname --long) have to match \n" -"either the common name of the certificate (CN) or on of the values in subject alternative names." +"either the common name of the certificate (CN) or on of the values in subject " +"alternative names." msgstr "" #. popup window header @@ -2476,10 +2721,12 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1658 msgid "" "Key Password is required. \n" -"It must be the password for the encrypted key or a new one in case of a not encrypted key." +"It must be the password for the encrypted key or a new one in case of a not " +"encrypted key." msgstr "" "Reikalingas rakto slaptažodis.\n" -"Tai arba užšifruoto rakto slaptažodis, arba naujas slaptažodis neužšifruotam raktui." +"Tai arba užšifruoto rakto slaptažodis, arba naujas slaptažodis neužšifruotam " +"raktui." #. Error popup #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1693 @@ -2723,10 +2970,12 @@ msgstr "Netinkama parametro „request“ reikšmė." #: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3625 +#| msgid "Request not found in %s." msgid "Request not found in" msgstr "Užklausos nepavyko rasti " #: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3628 +#| msgid "Creating request failed." msgid "Copy Request failed" msgstr "Nepavyko nukopijuoti užklausos." Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/cio.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/cio.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/cio.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -18,7 +18,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Copyright (c) 2014 SUSE LLC. @@ -35,6 +36,7 @@ #. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, #. you may find current contact information at www.suse.com #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:125 +#| msgid "Available Interfaces" msgid "Available Input/Output Channels" msgstr "Prieinami įvedimo/išvedimo kanalai" @@ -56,6 +58,7 @@ #. filter can be empty if dialog is not yet created #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:160 +#| msgid "Fiber channel" msgid "Filter channels" msgstr "Filtro kanalas" @@ -64,18 +67,22 @@ msgstr "Pažymėti &viską" #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:163 +#| msgid "&Detailed selection..." msgid "&Clear selection" msgstr "&Nesirinkti nieko..." #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:164 +#| msgid "&All Selected Packages" msgid "&Blacklist Selected Channels" msgstr "&Blokuoti pasirinktus kanalus" #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:165 +#| msgid "&Scan the Channels" msgid "&Unban Channels" msgstr "&Nebeblokuoti kanalų" #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:170 +#| msgid "Exit" msgid "&Exit" msgstr "&Išeiti" @@ -91,13 +98,16 @@ #: src/lib/iochannel/unban_dialog.rb:106 msgid "" "List of ranges of channels to unban separated by comma.\n" -"Range can be channel, part of channel which will be filled to zero or range specified with dash.\n" +"Range can be channel, part of channel which will be filled to zero or range " +"specified with dash.\n" "Example value: 0.0.0001, AA00, 0.1.0100-200" msgstr "" "Kanalų, kurių nebenorite, sritis atskirkite kableliu. \n" -"Sritis gali tebūti vienas kanalas, kanalo dalis, kuri užpildoma nuliais, arba brūkšneliu žymimas intervalas.\n" +"Sritis gali tebūti vienas kanalas, kanalo dalis, kuri užpildoma nuliais, arba " +"brūkšneliu žymimas intervalas.\n" "Pavyzdžiui: 0.0.0001, AA00, 0.1.0100-200" #: src/lib/iochannel/unban_dialog.rb:110 msgid "Ranges to Unban." msgstr "Sritis, kurios nebeblokuoti" + Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/country.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/country.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/country.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -18,7 +18,8 @@ "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. translators: command line help text for Securoty module #: keyboard/src/clients/keyboard.rb:59 @@ -53,8 +54,11 @@ #. error message (%1 is given layout); do not translate 'list' #: keyboard/src/clients/keyboard.rb:184 -msgid "Keyboard layout '%1' is invalid. Use a 'list' command to see possible values." -msgstr "Klaviatūros išdėstymas „%1“ yra netinkamas. Norėdami matyti visas galimas reikšmes, naudokite komandą „list“." +msgid "" +"Keyboard layout '%1' is invalid. Use a 'list' command to see possible values." +msgstr "" +"Klaviatūros išdėstymas „%1“ yra netinkamas. Norėdami matyti visas galimas " +"reikšmes, naudokite komandą „list“." #. summary item #: keyboard/src/clients/keyboard_proposal.rb:91 @@ -87,8 +91,12 @@ #. help text for keyboard expert screen cont. #: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:60 -msgid "<p>Settings made here apply only to the console keyboard. Configure the keyboard for the graphical user interface with another tool.</p>\n" -msgstr "<p>Čia parinktos nuostatos taikomos tik konsolės klaviatūrai. Grafinei naudotojo sąsajai skirtą klaviatūrą konfigūruokite kitu įrankiu.</p>\n" +msgid "" +"<p>Settings made here apply only to the console keyboard. Configure the " +"keyboard for the graphical user interface with another tool.</p>\n" +msgstr "" +"<p>Čia parinktos nuostatos taikomos tik konsolės klaviatūrai. Grafinei " +"naudotojo sąsajai skirtą klaviatūrą konfigūruokite kitu įrankiu.</p>\n" #. heading text #: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:78 @@ -169,14 +177,16 @@ "Choose the <b>Keyboard Layout</b> to use for\n" "installation and in the installed system. \n" "Test the layout in <b>Test</b>.\n" -"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select <b>Expert Settings</b>.\n" +"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select <b>Expert " +"Settings</b>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "Pasirinkite <b>klaviatūros išdėstymą</b>, kurį naudosite\n" "diegimo metu ir įdiegtoje sistemoje.\n" "Išmėginkite klaviatūros išdėstymą su <b>Bandymu</b>.\n" -"Sudėtingesnėms parinktims, pvz., kartojimo dažnį, rinkitės <b>Nuostatas ekspertams</b>.\n" +"Sudėtingesnėms parinktims, pvz., kartojimo dažnį, rinkitės <b>Nuostatas " +"ekspertams</b>.\n" "</p>\n" #. general help trailer @@ -195,13 +205,17 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "Choose the <b>Keyboard Layout</b> to use in the system.\n" -"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select <b>Expert Settings</b>.</p>\n" -"<p>Find more options as well as more layouts in the keyboard layout tool of your desktop environment.</p>\n" +"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select <b>Expert " +"Settings</b>.</p>\n" +"<p>Find more options as well as more layouts in the keyboard layout tool of " +"your desktop environment.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "Pasirinkite <b>klaviatūros išdėstymą</b>, kurį naudosite sistemoje.\n" -"Sudėtingesnėms parinktims, pvz., kartojimo dažniui ir uždelsimui, nurodyti, rinkitės <b>Nuostatas ekspertams</b>.</p>\n" -"<p>Daugiau parinkčių bei išdėstymų rasite savo darbalaukio aplinkos nuostatose.</p>\n" +"Sudėtingesnėms parinktims, pvz., kartojimo dažniui ir uždelsimui, nurodyti, " +"rinkitės <b>Nuostatas ekspertams</b>.</p>\n" +"<p>Daugiau parinkčių bei išdėstymų rasite savo darbalaukio aplinkos " +"nuostatose.</p>\n" #. Screen title for keyboard screen #: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:259 @@ -340,8 +354,11 @@ #. error message (%1 is given layout); do not translate 'list' #: language/src/clients/language.rb:301 -msgid "%1 is not a valid language. Use the list command to see possible values." -msgstr "%1 nėra tinkama kalba. Norėdami matyti visas prieinamas reikšmes, naudokite komandą „list“." +msgid "" +"%1 is not a valid language. Use the list command to see possible values." +msgstr "" +"%1 nėra tinkama kalba. Norėdami matyti visas prieinamas reikšmes, naudokite " +"komandą „list“." #. label text #. heading text @@ -387,11 +404,13 @@ #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:231 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Additional packages with support for the selected primary and secondary languages will be installed. Packages no longer needed will be removed.\n" +"Additional packages with support for the selected primary and secondary " +"languages will be installed. Packages no longer needed will be removed.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Bus įdiegti papildomi paketai, skirti pasirinktai pagrindinei ir antrinėms kalboms. Paketų nebereikės pašalinti.\n" +"Bus įdiegti papildomi paketai, skirti pasirinktai pagrindinei ir antrinėms " +"kalboms. Paketų nebereikės pašalinti.\n" "</p>" #. help text for initial (first time) language screen @@ -471,13 +490,19 @@ #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:300 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Check <b>Adapt Keyboard Layout</b> to change the keyboard layout to the primary language.\n" -"Check <b>Adapt Time Zone</b> to change the current time zone according to the primary language. If the keyboard layout or time zone is already adapted to the default language setting, the respective option is disabled.\n" +"Check <b>Adapt Keyboard Layout</b> to change the keyboard layout to the " +"primary language.\n" +"Check <b>Adapt Time Zone</b> to change the current time zone according to the " +"primary language. If the keyboard layout or time zone is already adapted to " +"the default language setting, the respective option is disabled.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Norėdami pakeisti klaviatūros išdėstymą pagal pagrindinę kalbą, pažymėkite <b>pritaikyti klaviatūros išdėstymą</b>.\n" -"Norėdami pagal pagrindinę kalbą pritaikyti dabartinę laiko juostą, pažymėkite <b>pritaikyti laiko juostą</b>. Jei klaviatūros išdėstymas ar laiko juosta jau pritaikyta prie pagrindinės kalbos, atitinkama parinktis yra negalima.\n" +"Norėdami pakeisti klaviatūros išdėstymą pagal pagrindinę kalbą, pažymėkite <b>" +"pritaikyti klaviatūros išdėstymą</b>.\n" +"Norėdami pagal pagrindinę kalbą pritaikyti dabartinę laiko juostą, pažymėkite " +"<b>pritaikyti laiko juostą</b>. Jei klaviatūros išdėstymas ar laiko juosta " +"jau pritaikyta prie pagrindinės kalbos, atitinkama parinktis yra negalima.\n" "</p>\n" #. help text when "multiple languages" are suported 2/2 @@ -490,7 +515,8 @@ msgstr "" "<p>\n" "<b>Antrinės kalbos</b><br>\n" -"Pasirinkimo langelyje pažymėkite papildomas kalbas, kurias norėsite naudoti savo sistemoje.\n" +"Pasirinkimo langelyje pažymėkite papildomas kalbas, kurias norėsite naudoti " +"savo sistemoje.\n" "</p>\n" #. error message - package solver failed @@ -536,22 +562,31 @@ #. help text for langauge expert screen #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:592 msgid "" -"<p><b>ctype Only</b>: root has the same LC_CTYPE as a normal user. Other values\n" +"<p><b>ctype Only</b>: root has the same LC_CTYPE as a normal user. Other " +"values\n" "are unset.<br>\n" "<b>Yes</b>: root has the same locale settings as normal user.<br>\n" "<b>No</b>: root has all locale variables unset.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Tik ctype</b>: root turi tokį pat LC_CTYPE kaip ir paprastas naudotojas. Kitos reikšmės\n" +"<p><b>Tik ctype</b>: root turi tokį pat LC_CTYPE kaip ir paprastas " +"naudotojas. Kitos reikšmės\n" "nenustatytos.<br>\n" -"<b>Taip:</b> Naudotojas „root“ turi tokias pačias lokalės nuostatas, kaip ir paprastas naudotojas .<br>\n" +"<b>Taip:</b> Naudotojas „root“ turi tokias pačias lokalės nuostatas, kaip ir " +"paprastas naudotojas .<br>\n" "<b>Ne:</b> Naudotojo „root“ visi lokalės kintamieji nenustatyti.\n" "</p>\n" #. help text for langauge expert screen #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:601 -msgid "<p>Use <b>Detailed Locale Setting</b> to set a locale for the primary language that is not offered in the list in the main dialog. Translation may not be available for the selected locale.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norėdami nurodyti sąraše nesančią kalbą kaip pagrindinę, rinkitės <b>Sudėtingesnės lokalės nuostatos</b>. Pasirinktai lokalei gali nebūti vertimų.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Detailed Locale Setting</b> to set a locale for the primary " +"language that is not offered in the list in the main dialog. Translation may " +"not be available for the selected locale.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norėdami nurodyti sąraše nesančią kalbą kaip pagrindinę, rinkitės <b>" +"Sudėtingesnės lokalės nuostatos</b>. Pasirinktai lokalei gali nebūti " +"vertimų.</p>" #. heading text #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:634 @@ -619,11 +654,13 @@ #: language/src/modules/Language.rb:1287 msgid "" "Only minimal support for the selected language is included on this media.\n" -"Add the Language add-on CD as an additional repository in order to get the appropriate support\n" +"Add the Language add-on CD as an additional repository in order to get the " +"appropriate support\n" "for this language.\n" msgstr "" "Šioje laikmenoje prieinamas tik minimalus pasirinktos palaikymas.\n" -"Norėdami išplėsti šios kalbos palaikymą, prie saugyklų pridėkite papildomą kalbų CD\n" +"Norėdami išplėsti šios kalbos palaikymą, prie saugyklų pridėkite papildomą " +"kalbų CD\n" "(angl. „Language add-on CD“).\n" #. popup message (user selected CJK language in text mode) @@ -633,7 +670,8 @@ "installation, but the selected language will be used for the new system." msgstr "" "Pasirinkta kalba negali būti naudojama tekstinėje veiksenoje. Diegimo metu\n" -"bus naudojama anglų kalba, tačiau naujojoje sistemoje bus jūsų pasirinktoji kalba." +"bus naudojama anglų kalba, tačiau naujojoje sistemoje bus jūsų pasirinktoji " +"kalba." #. translators: command line help text for timezone module #: timezone/src/clients/timezone.rb:52 @@ -718,22 +756,27 @@ #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:105 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Specify whether your machine is set to local time or UTC in <b>Hardware Clock Set To</b>.\n" +"Specify whether your machine is set to local time or UTC in <b>Hardware Clock " +"Set To</b>.\n" "Most PCs that also have other operating systems installed (such as Microsoft\n" "Windows) use local time.\n" "Machines that have only Linux installed are usually\n" "set to Universal Time Coordinated (UTC).\n" -"If the hardware clock is set to UTC, your system can switch from standard time\n" +"If the hardware clock is set to UTC, your system can switch from standard " +"time\n" "to daylight saving time and back automatically.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Ties <b>Aparatūros laikrodis nustatytas į</b> nurodykite, ar jūsų kompiuteryje nustatytas vietinis ar pasaulinis laikas.\n" -"Dauguma AK, kuriuose taip pat yra įdiegta ir kita operacinė sistema (pvz., Microsoft Windows),\n" +"Ties <b>Aparatūros laikrodis nustatytas į</b> nurodykite, ar jūsų " +"kompiuteryje nustatytas vietinis ar pasaulinis laikas.\n" +"Dauguma AK, kuriuose taip pat yra įdiegta ir kita operacinė sistema (pvz., " +"Microsoft Windows),\n" "naudoja vietinį laiką.\n" "Kompiuteriai, kuriuose įdiegtos tik Linux sistemos, paprastai naudoja \n" "pasaulinį laiką.\n" -"Jei aparatūros laikrodis nustatytas į pasaulinį, jūsų sistema gali persijungti iš standartinio (žiemos) laiko\n" +"Jei aparatūros laikrodis nustatytas į pasaulinį, jūsų sistema gali " +"persijungti iš standartinio (žiemos) laiko\n" "į vasaros laiką, bei automatiškai vėl jį atstatyti.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -748,7 +791,8 @@ "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Atminkite: vidinis sistemos laikrodis Linux branduolyje yra pasaulinis laikas,\n" +"Atminkite: vidinis sistemos laikrodis Linux branduolyje yra pasaulinis " +"laikas,\n" "kurio atžvilgiu nustatomas teisingas naudotojo vietinis laikas.\n" "Jei renkatės vietinį laiką, įvertinkite\n" "to pasekmes, kurios aprašytos žinyne.\n" @@ -758,11 +802,14 @@ #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:131 msgid "" "\n" -"You selected local time, but only Linux seems to be installed on your system.\n" +"You selected local time, but only Linux seems to be installed on your " +"system.\n" "In such case, it is strongly recommended to use UTC, and to click Cancel.\n" "\n" -"If you want to keep local time, you must adjust the CMOS clock twice the year\n" -"because of Day Light Saving switches. If you miss to adjust the clock, backups may fail,\n" +"If you want to keep local time, you must adjust the CMOS clock twice the " +"year\n" +"because of Day Light Saving switches. If you miss to adjust the clock, " +"backups may fail,\n" "your mail system may drop mail messages, etc.\n" "\n" "If you use UTC, Linux will adjust the time automatically.\n" @@ -770,12 +817,14 @@ "Do you want to continue with your selection (local time)?" msgstr "" "\n" -"Pasirinkote vietinį laiką, bet panašu, kad kompiuteryje bus tik Linux sistema.\n" +"Pasirinkote vietinį laiką, bet panašu, kad kompiuteryje bus tik Linux " +"sistema.\n" "Tad primygtinai siūlome naudoti pasaulinį laiką spaudžiant „Atšaukti“.\n" "\n" "Jei renkatės vietinį laiką, tuomet dukart per metus jums teks\n" "rankiniu būdu keisti laiką. Jei pamiršite perstatyti laiką,\n" -"gali sutrikti atsarginių kopijų darymas, pašto sistema gali praleisti laiškus ir pan.\n" +"gali sutrikti atsarginių kopijų darymas, pašto sistema gali praleisti laiškus " +"ir pan.\n" "\n" "Jei naudosite pasaulinį laiką, Linux automatiškai perstatys laiką.\n" "\n" @@ -783,8 +832,12 @@ #. help text for set time dialog #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:187 -msgid "<p>The current system time and date are displayed. If required, change them to the correct values manually or use Network Time Protocol (NTP).</p>" -msgstr "<p>Sistemoje rodomas dabartinis sistemos laikas ir data. Jei reikia, pakeiskite juos rankiniu būdu arba naudokite tinklo laiko protokolą (NTP).</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The current system time and date are displayed. If required, change them " +"to the correct values manually or use Network Time Protocol (NTP).</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Sistemoje rodomas dabartinis sistemos laikas ir data. Jei reikia, " +"pakeiskite juos rankiniu būdu arba naudokite tinklo laiko protokolą (NTP).</p>" #. help text, cont. #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:191 @@ -903,14 +956,17 @@ #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:793 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"To select the time zone to use in your system, first select the <b>Region</b>.\n" +"To select the time zone to use in your system, first select the <b>Region</b>" +".\n" "In <b>Time Zone</b>, then select the appropriate time zone, country, or \n" "region from those available.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Norėdami pasirinkti sistemoje naudotiną laiko juostą, pirmiausia pasirinkite <b>regioną</b>.\n" -"Skydelyje <b>Laiko juosta</b> pasirinkite atitinkamą laiko juostą, šalį arba \n" +"Norėdami pasirinkti sistemoje naudotiną laiko juostą, pirmiausia pasirinkite " +"<b>regioną</b>.\n" +"Skydelyje <b>Laiko juosta</b> pasirinkite atitinkamą laiko juostą, šalį arba " +"\n" "regioną.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -922,7 +978,8 @@ "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Jei dabartinis laikas nėra teisingas ir norite jį pataisyti, spauskite <b>Keisti</b>.\n" +"Jei dabartinis laikas nėra teisingas ir norite jį pataisyti, spauskite <b>" +"Keisti</b>.\n" "</p>" #. Screen title for timezone screen Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/crowbar.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/crowbar.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/crowbar.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -18,7 +18,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Command line help text for the Xcrowbar module @@ -43,6 +44,7 @@ #. combobox label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:106 +#| msgid "&List of Repositories" msgid "&Location of Repositories" msgstr "Saugyklų &vieta" @@ -50,12 +52,16 @@ msgid "" "<p>Here you can edit the location of your <b>Update Repositories</b>.</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"If repositories are stored at SMT server or SUSE Manager server, it's enought to enter server's URL and the paths\n" -" to repositories will be filled automatically.</p>It is also possible to use custom paths. Some examples of how the URL could look like:\n" +"If repositories are stored at SMT server or SUSE Manager server, it's enought " +"to enter server's URL and the paths\n" +" to repositories will be filled automatically.</p>It is also " +"possible to use custom paths. Some examples of how the URL could look like:\n" "</p><p>\n" "<ul>\n" -"<li><i>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/</i> for SMT server\n" -"<li><i>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3.0-pool-x86_64/sles11-s...</i> for SUSE Manager Server.\n" +"<li><i>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/</i> " +"for SMT server\n" +"<li><i>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3.0-pool-x86_64/sle" +"s11-sp3-x86_64/</i> for SUSE Manager Server.\n" "</p><p>\n" "For detailed description, check the Deployment Guide.\n" "</p>" @@ -63,6 +69,7 @@ #. table header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:148 +#| msgid "Administrator DN" msgid "Administrator Name" msgstr "Administratoriaus vardas" @@ -75,18 +82,22 @@ #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:194 +#| msgid "Mode" msgid "&Mode" msgstr "&Veiksena" #. help text for the Network mode tab (do not translate bastion) #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:196 msgid "" -"<p>Here, define a <b>Network Mode</b> with relevant <b>Bonding Policy</b>.</p>\n" -"<p>You can also specify interface names for the bastion network conduits as space-separated list.</p>" +"<p>Here, define a <b>Network Mode</b> with relevant <b>Bonding Policy</b>.</p>" +"\n" +"<p>You can also specify interface names for the bastion network conduits as " +"space-separated list.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:206 +#| msgid "Bonding Policy" msgid "Bonding &Policy" msgstr "Susiejimo &taisykles" @@ -122,11 +133,13 @@ #. checkbox label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:275 +#| msgid "Use VLAN" msgid "Use &VLAN" msgstr "Naudoti &VLAN" #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:285 +#| msgid "VLAN ID" msgid "VLAN &ID" msgstr "VLAN &ID" @@ -137,6 +150,7 @@ #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:317 +#| msgid "Restoring user preferences..." msgid "Router pre&ference" msgstr "Maršruto parinktuvo pa&rinktys..." @@ -158,11 +172,13 @@ #. checkbox label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:382 +#| msgid "Add Bridge" msgid "&Add Bridge" msgstr "&Pridėti tiltą" #. push button label& #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:391 +#| msgid "&Edit Ranges..." msgid "Edit Ran&ges..." msgstr "&Keisti sritis..." @@ -196,6 +212,7 @@ #. frame label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:531 src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:697 #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:715 +#| msgid "Target Directory" msgid "Target Platform" msgstr "Paskirties platforma" @@ -214,11 +231,13 @@ #. text entry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:676 +#| msgid "LDAP Server &URL" msgid "Server &URL" msgstr "Serverio &URL" #. table header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:694 +#| msgid "&Repository Name" msgid "Repository Name" msgstr "Saugyklos pavadinimas" @@ -229,6 +248,7 @@ #. text entry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:707 +#| msgid "Repository URL" msgid "Repository &URL" msgstr "Saugyklos &URL" @@ -239,16 +259,19 @@ #. push button label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:726 +#| msgid "Add Repository" msgid "A&dd Repository" msgstr "Pri&dėti saugyklą" #. combobox item #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:793 +#| msgid "Remote WINS Server" msgid "Remote SMT Server" msgstr "Nuotolinis SMT serveris" #. combobox item #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:795 +#| msgid "NIS Master Server: " msgid "SUSE Manager Server" msgstr "SUSE valdymo serveris" @@ -386,16 +409,19 @@ #. tab header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1499 +#| msgid "User Settings" msgid "&User Settings" msgstr "&Naudotojo nuostatos" #. label (hint for user) #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1511 -msgid "If no user is present, user 'crowbar' with default password will be used." +msgid "" +"If no user is present, user 'crowbar' with default password will be used." msgstr "" #. tab header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1527 +#| msgid "Network Mode" msgid "N&etwork Mode" msgstr "Tinklo &veiksena" @@ -407,11 +433,13 @@ #. tab header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1578 +#| msgid "Networks" msgid "Net&works" msgstr "&Tinklai" #. tab header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1614 +#| msgid "Repositories" msgid "Re&positories" msgstr "&Saugyklos" Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/docker.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/docker.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/docker.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -18,47 +18,67 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Only root can start process #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:74 -msgid "Docker service does not run. Should YaST start docker? Otherwise YaST quits." -msgstr "Docker paslauga nepaleista. Ar YaST turėtų paleisti Docker? Antraip YaST užvers šio modulio langą." +msgid "" +"Docker service does not run. Should YaST start docker? Otherwise YaST quits." +msgstr "" +"Docker paslauga nepaleista. Ar YaST turėtų paleisti Docker? Antraip YaST " +"užvers šio modulio langą." #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:78 -msgid "Docker service does not run. Run this module as root or start docker service manually." -msgstr "Docker paslaug nepaleista. Paleiskite šį modulį root naudotojo teisėmis arba paleiskite paslaugą rankiniu būdu." +msgid "" +"Docker service does not run. Run this module as root or start docker service " +"manually." +msgstr "" +"Docker paslaug nepaleista. Paleiskite šį modulį root naudotojo teisėmis arba " +"paleiskite paslaugą rankiniu būdu." #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:141 +#| msgid "Communication with fingerprint reader failed." msgid "Communication with docker failed with error: %s. Please try again." msgstr "Nepavyko užmegzti ryšio su Docker: %s. Bandykite iš naujo." #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:152 +#| msgid "" +#| "Do you really want\n" +#| "to quit the installation?" msgid "Do you really want to stop the running container?" msgstr "Tikrai norite sustabdyti konteinerio darbus?" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:154 src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:163 +#| msgid "Do you want to retry?" msgid "Do you want to remove the container?" msgstr "Tikrai pašalinti konteinerį?" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:161 +#| msgid "" +#| "Do you really want\n" +#| "to quit the installation?" msgid "Do you really want to kill the running container?" msgstr "Tikrai norite priverstinai nutraukti konteinerio darbus?" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:173 +#| msgid "Image" msgid "&Images" msgstr "&Atvaizdžiai" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:174 +#| msgid "Contains" msgid "&Containers" msgstr "Konteineriai" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:184 +#| msgid "Packages for Image" msgid "Docker Images" msgstr "Docker atvaizdžiai" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:194 +#| msgid "Running Internet Connection Test" msgid "Running Docker Containers" msgstr "Veikiantys Docker konteineriai" @@ -67,22 +87,27 @@ msgstr "Saugykla" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:218 +#| msgid "Tab" msgid "Tag" msgstr "Gairė" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:219 +#| msgid "Image" msgid "Image ID" msgstr "Atvaizdžio ID" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:220 src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:234 +#| msgid "Created: " msgid "Created" msgstr "Sukurta" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:221 +#| msgid "Virtual Users" msgid "Virtual Size" msgstr "Virtualus dydis" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:231 +#| msgid "Contains" msgid "Container ID" msgstr "Konteinerio ID" @@ -99,6 +124,7 @@ msgstr "Būsena" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:236 +#| msgid "Port" msgid "Ports" msgstr "Prievadai" @@ -115,6 +141,7 @@ msgstr "Ša&linti" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:294 +#| msgid "&View Changes" msgid "S&how Changes" msgstr "&Rodyti pakeitimus" @@ -125,21 +152,28 @@ msgstr "Terminalai" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:296 +#| msgid "Contains" msgid "&Stop Container" msgstr "&Stabdyti konteinerį" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:297 +#| msgid "Contains" msgid "&Kill Container" msgstr "&Priverstinai stabdyti konteinerį" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:298 +#| msgid "Comment" msgid "&Commit" msgstr "Nusiųsti" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:304 +#| msgid "Exit" msgid "&Exit" msgstr "&Išeiti" #: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:315 +#| msgid "Do you really want to delete the database?" msgid "Do you really want to delete image \"%s\"?" msgstr "Tikrai pašalinti atvaizdį „s“?" + + Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/drbd.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/drbd.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/drbd.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -20,11 +20,13 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Command line help text for the Xdrbd module #: src/clients/drbd.rb:54 +#| msgid "Configuration of DASD" msgid "Configuration of DRBD" msgstr "DRBD konfigūracija" @@ -76,14 +78,17 @@ msgstr "Išteklių konfigūracija" #: src/include/drbd/common.rb:47 +#| msgid "SCPM Configuration" msgid "LVM Configuration" msgstr "LVM konfigūracija" #: src/include/drbd/common.rb:48 +#| msgid "Resource Configuration" msgid "Resource Basic Configuration" msgstr "Paprasta išteklių konfigūracija" #: src/include/drbd/common.rb:49 +#| msgid "Resource Configuration" msgid "Resource Advanced Configuration" msgstr "Sudėtingesnė išteklių konfigūracija" @@ -124,10 +129,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/drbd/dialogs.rb:69 +#| msgid "Cannot read configuration file." msgid "Failed to read DRBD configuration file:\n" msgstr "Nepavyksta nuskaityti DRBD konfigūracijos rinkmenos: \n" #: src/include/drbd/dialogs.rb:86 +#| msgid "Failed to delete configuration %1." msgid "Failed to write configuration to disk:\n" msgstr "Nepavyko įrašyti konfigūracijos į diską:\n" @@ -141,11 +148,13 @@ #. Drbd configure1 dialog contents #: src/include/drbd/dialogs.rb:102 +#| msgid "First part of configuration of CASA" msgid "First part of configuration of DRBD" msgstr "Pirmoji DRBD konfigūracijos dalis" #. Drbd configure2 dialog contents #: src/include/drbd/dialogs.rb:141 +#| msgid "Second part of configuration of CASA" msgid "Second part of configuration of DRBD" msgstr "Antroji DRBD konfigūracijos dalis" @@ -168,6 +177,9 @@ #. Read dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:36 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p><b><big>Initializing Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +#| "Please wait...<br></p>\n" msgid "" "<p><b><big>Initializing DRBD Configuration</big></b><br>\n" "Please wait...<br></p>\n" @@ -182,10 +194,14 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Ruošimosi nutraukimas:</big></b><br>\n" -"Dabar galite saugiai nutraukti konfigūracijos įrankį spausdami <b>Nutraukti</b>.</p>\n" +"Dabar galite saugiai nutraukti konfigūracijos įrankį spausdami <b>Nutraukti<" +"/b>.</p>\n" #. Write dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:44 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p><b><big>Saving Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +#| "Please wait...<br></p>\n" msgid "" "<p><b><big>Saving DRBD Configuration</big></b><br>\n" "Please wait...<br></p>\n" @@ -211,6 +227,7 @@ msgstr "Pradėti konfigūruoti DRBD." #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:55 +#| msgid "<p><b><big>Global Configuration of DRBD</big></b></p>" msgid "<p><b><big>Startup Configuration of DRBD</big></b></p>" msgstr "<p><b><big>DRBD paleidimo konfigūracija</big></b></p>" @@ -226,24 +243,39 @@ #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:66 src/include/drbd/helps.rb:72 #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:85 +#| msgid "<p><b><big>Global Configuration of DRBD</big></b></p>" msgid "<p><b><big>Resource Configuration of DRBD</big></b></p>" msgstr "<p><b><big>DRBD išteklių konfigūracija</big></b></p>" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:69 msgid "" -"<p>Clicking \"Add\", \"Edit\", \"Delete\" button to add, edit or delete a resource</p>\n" +"<p>Clicking \"Add\", \"Edit\", \"Delete\" button to add, edit or delete a " +"resource</p>\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:75 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Name\" is mandatory and must match the Linux host name (uname -n) of one of the nodes. Should not include \".\" in hostname.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Address:Port\": A resource needs one IP address per device, which is used to wait for incoming connections from the partner device to reach the device. Each DRBD resource needs a TCP port which is used to connect to the node's partner device.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Device\": The name of the block device node of the resource being described. You must use this device with your application (file system) and you must not use the low level block device which is specified with the disk parameter,following its minor number. Otherwise, you may omit the name, or the word minor and its number. If you omit the name a default of /dev/drbd'minor number' will be used.\n" -"\t\tLike: '/dev/drbd{service} minor {minor drbd number [0...255]}' or '/dev/drbd{minor drbd number [0...255]}'</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Disk\": DRBD uses this block device to actually store and retrieve the data. Never access such a device while DRBD is running on top of it.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Meta-disk\": internal. Internal means that the last part of the backing device is used to store the meta-data.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Name\" is mandatory and must match the Linux host name (uname -n) of " +"one of the nodes. Should not include \".\" in hostname.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Address:Port\": A resource needs one IP address per device, which is " +"used to wait for incoming connections from the partner device to reach the " +"device. Each DRBD resource needs a TCP port which is used to connect to the " +"node's partner device.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Device\": The name of the block device node of the resource being " +"described. You must use this device with your application (file system) and " +"you must not use the low level block device which is specified with the disk " +"parameter,following its minor number. Otherwise, you may omit the name, or " +"the word minor and its number. If you omit the name a default of " +"/dev/drbd'minor number' will be used.\n" +"\t\tLike: '/dev/drbd{service} minor {minor drbd number [0...255]}' or " +"'/dev/drbd{minor drbd number [0...255]}'</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Disk\": DRBD uses this block device to actually store and retrieve " +"the data. Never access such a device while DRBD is running on top of it.</p>" +"\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Meta-disk\": internal. Internal means that the last part of the " +"backing device is used to store the meta-data.</p>\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" @@ -251,29 +283,52 @@ msgid "" "\n" "\t\t<p><b>Protocol</b></p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol A: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and local TCP send buffer.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol B: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and remote buffer cache.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol C: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached both local and remote disk.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol A: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local " +"disk and local TCP send buffer.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol B: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local " +"disk and remote buffer cache.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol C: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached both " +"local and remote disk.</p>\n" "\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t \n" "\t\t<p><b>wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>degr-wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout, if this node was a degraded cluster</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>degr-wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout, if this node was " +"a degraded cluster</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>on-io-error</b>: What to do when the lower level device reports io-error to the upper layers</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>on-io-error</b>: What to do when the lower level device reports " +"io-error to the upper layers</p>\n" "\t\t<p><b>sndbuf-size</b>: The size of the TCP socket send buffer</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>max-buffers</b>: Maximum number of requests to be allocated by DRBD</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>max-buffers</b>: Maximum number of requests to be allocated by " +"DRBD</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>timeout</b>: If the partner node fails to send an expected response packet within time 10ths of a second, the partner node is considered dead and therefore the TCP/IP connection is abandoned. This must be lower than connect-int and ping-int. The default value is 60 = 6 seconds, the unit 0.1 seconds.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>connect-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet. In case the peer's reply is not received within this time period, it is considered as dead. The default value is 500ms, the default unit is 100ms</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>ping-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>timeout</b>: If the partner node fails to send an expected response " +"packet within time 10ths of a second, the partner node is considered dead and " +"therefore the TCP/IP connection is abandoned. This must be lower than " +"connect-int and ping-int. The default value is 60 = 6 seconds, the unit 0.1 " +"seconds.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>connect-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a " +"keep-alive packet. In case the peer's reply is not received within this time " +"period, it is considered as dead. The default value is 500ms, the default " +"unit is 100ms</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>ping-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive " +"packet</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>max-epoch-size</b>: The highest number of data blocks between two write barriers</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>ko-count</b>: the secondary node fails to complete a single write request for count times the timeout, it is expelled from the cluster. The default value is 0, which disables this feature.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>rate</b>: To ensure a smooth operation of the application on top of DRBD, it is possible to limit the bandwidth which may be used by background synchronizations. The default is 250 KB/sec, the default unit is KB/sec.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>al-extents</b>: parameter you control how big the hot area (= active set) can get. The default number of extents is 127. (Minimum: 7, Maximum: 3843)</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>max-epoch-size</b>: The highest number of data blocks between two " +"write barriers</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>ko-count</b>: the secondary node fails to complete a single write " +"request for count times the timeout, it is expelled from the cluster. The " +"default value is 0, which disables this feature.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>rate</b>: To ensure a smooth operation of the application on top " +"of DRBD, it is possible to limit the bandwidth which may be used by " +"background synchronizations. The default is 250 KB/sec, the default unit is " +"KB/sec.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>al-extents</b>: parameter you control how big the hot area (= " +"active set) can get. The default number of extents is 127. (Minimum: 7, " +"Maximum: 3843)</p>\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:112 +#| msgid "<p><b><big>s390 reIPL Configuration</big></b></p>" msgid "<p><b><big>LVM Configuration</big></b></p>" msgstr "<p><b><big>LVM konfigūravimas</big></b></p>" @@ -281,13 +336,26 @@ msgid "" "\n" "\t\t<p><b>LVM configuration file /etc/lvm/lvm.conf</b></p>\n" -"\t\t<p>To use LVM with DRBD, it is necessary to change some options in the LVM configuration file and to remove stale cache entries on the nodes.</p>\t\t<p>Refer to 'man lvm.conf' for further information including the file layout.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>To use LVM with DRBD, it is necessary to change some options in the " +"LVM configuration file and to remove stale cache entries on the nodes.</p>" +"\t\t<p>Refer to 'man lvm.conf' for further information including the file " +"layout.</p>\n" "\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t \n" -"\t\t<p><b>Device Filter</b>: This masks the underlying block device from the list of devices LVM scans for Physical Volume signatures. This way, LVM is instructed to read Physical Volume signatures from DRBD devices, rather than from the underlying backing block devices.</p>\t\t<p><b>AutoFilter</b>: According to the configuration of drbd, LVM filter will always be changed automatically. To change it manually, disable the checkbox of AutoFilter.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>The filter consists of an array of regular expressions. These expressions can be delimited by a character of your choice, and prefixed with either an 'a' (for accept) or 'r' (for reject).</p>\t\t<p>For example, setting filter as [\"r|/dev/sda.*|\"]</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>Device Filter</b>: This masks the underlying block device from the " +"list of devices LVM scans for Physical Volume signatures. This way, LVM is " +"instructed to read Physical Volume signatures from DRBD devices, rather than " +"from the underlying backing block devices.</p>\t\t<p><b>AutoFilter</b>: " +"According to the configuration of drbd, LVM filter will always be changed " +"automatically. To change it manually, disable the checkbox of AutoFilter.</p>" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>LVM cache</b>: Enable/turn on writing the LVM cache is default. Disable cache when for network storage, like nfs. </p>\n" +"\t\t<p>The filter consists of an array of regular expressions. These " +"expressions can be delimited by a character of your choice, and prefixed with " +"either an 'a' (for accept) or 'r' (for reject).</p>\t\t<p>For example, " +"setting filter as [\"r|/dev/sda.*|\"]</p>\n" "\n" +"\t\t<p><b>LVM cache</b>: Enable/turn on writing the LVM cache is default. " +"Disable cache when for network storage, like nfs. </p>\n" +"\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" @@ -296,24 +364,33 @@ msgstr "<p><b><big>DRBD visuotinė konfigūracija</big></b></p>" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:133 -msgid "<p>Check <b>\"Disable IP Verification\"</b> to disable one of drbdadm's sanity check</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norėdami uždrausti vieną iš drbdadm paviršinių patikrinimų, pažymėkite <b>„Uždrausti IP tikrinimą“</b></p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Check <b>\"Disable IP Verification\"</b> to disable one of drbdadm's " +"sanity check</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norėdami uždrausti vieną iš drbdadm paviršinių patikrinimų, pažymėkite <b>" +"„Uždrausti IP tikrinimą“</b></p>" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:136 msgid "" -"<p><b>Dialog Refresh:</b> The user dialog counts and displays the seconds it waited so\n" +"<p><b>Dialog Refresh:</b> The user dialog counts and displays the seconds it " +"waited so\n" " far. You might want to disable this if you have the console\n" " of your server connected to a serial terminal server with\n" " limited logging capacity.\n" -" The Dialog will print the count each 'dialog-refresh' seconds,\n" +" The Dialog will print the count each 'dialog-refresh' " +"seconds,\n" " set it to 0 to disable redrawing completely. </p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Dialogo lango naujinimas:</b> Naudotojo dialogo langas apskaičiuoja ir parodo jo laukimo sekundes\n" +"<p><b>Dialogo lango naujinimas:</b> Naudotojo dialogo langas apskaičiuoja ir " +"parodo jo laukimo sekundes\n" " iki šiol. Galite tai uždrausti, jei serverio konsolė\n" " prijungta prie nuoseklaus terminalo serverio su\n" " riboto prisijungimo galimybe.\n" -" Dialogo langas spausdins apskaičiavimą kas „dialogo naujinimo“ sekundę,\n" -" o norėdami visiškai uždrausti atvaizdavimą, nustatykite jį į 0. </p>" +" Dialogo langas spausdins apskaičiavimą kas „dialogo " +"naujinimo“ sekundę,\n" +" o norėdami visiškai uždrausti atvaizdavimą, nustatykite jį į " +"0. </p>" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:144 #, fuzzy @@ -333,11 +410,15 @@ "<p><b>Mažesnis apskaičiavimas:</b>\n" " Naudokite, jei norite vėliau apibrėžti daugiau išteklių,\n" " tačiau be pakartotinio modulio įkėlimo.\n" -" numatyta, kad mes įkeliame modulį tiksliai taip, kaip daugelis įtaisų\n" +" numatyta, kad mes įkeliame modulį tiksliai taip, kaip daugelis " +"įtaisų\n" " pagal jų konfigūraciją, minimą šioje rinkmenoje. </p>" #. Summary dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:152 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p><b><big>Drbd Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +#| "Configure drbd here.<br></p>\n" msgid "" "<p><b><big>DRBD Configuration</big></b><br>\n" "Configure drbd here.<br></p>\n" @@ -372,11 +453,16 @@ "the configuration opens.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Keitimas arba šalinimas:</big></b><br>\n" -"Jei paspausite <b>Keisti</b>, atsivers papildomas dialogo langas, kuriame galėsite keisti\n" +"Jei paspausite <b>Keisti</b>, atsivers papildomas dialogo langas, kuriame " +"galėsite keisti\n" "konfigūraciją.</p>\n" #. Ovreview dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:169 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p><b><big>Drbd Configuration Overview</big></b><br>\n" +#| "Obtain an overview of installed drbds. Additionally\n" +#| "edit their configurations.<br></p>\n" msgid "" "<p><b><big>DRBD Configuration Overview</big></b><br>\n" "Obtain an overview of installed drbds. Additionally\n" @@ -443,6 +529,7 @@ #. Default is always true (auto) #: src/include/drbd/lvm_conf.rb:36 +#| msgid "Configuration of DASD" msgid "LVM Filter Configuration of DRBD" msgstr "" @@ -457,10 +544,12 @@ msgstr "Įrenginio identifikatorius" #: src/include/drbd/lvm_conf.rb:64 +#| msgid "Writing the SCPM database..." msgid "Writing the LVM cache" msgstr "Įrašomas LVM podėlis..." #: src/include/drbd/lvm_conf.rb:73 +#| msgid "Enable Microphone." msgid "Enable LVM Cache" msgstr "Įgalinti LVM podėlį." @@ -485,6 +574,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/drbd/resource_conf.rb:608 +#| msgid "Please fill out all fields." msgid "Please fill out all fields." msgstr "Užpildykite visus laukus." @@ -498,6 +588,7 @@ msgstr "Paleidžiama sistema" #: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:37 +#| msgid "On -- Start DRBD Server Now and when Booting" msgid "On -- Start DRBD Server when Booting" msgstr "Įjungti -- paleisti DRBD serverį operacinės sistemos paleidimo metu" @@ -536,7 +627,8 @@ "copy the configuration file '/etc/drbd.conf' to the rest of nodes manually." msgstr "" "Šios konfigūracijos skleidimui ,\n" -"nukopijuokite konfigūracijos rinkmeną „/etc/drbd.conf“ rankiniu būdu į likusius mazgus." +"nukopijuokite konfigūracijos rinkmeną „/etc/drbd.conf“ rankiniu būdu į " +"likusius mazgus." #. } #: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:141 @@ -549,11 +641,13 @@ #. Report::Error ( Service::Error()); #: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:166 +#| msgid "Starting the LDAP service failed." msgid "Start DRBD service failed" msgstr "Nepavyko paleisti DRBD paslaugos." #. Report::Error ( Service::Error() ); #: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:174 +#| msgid "Stop Drbd service failed" msgid "Stop DRBD service failed" msgstr "Nepavyko sustabdyti DRBD paslaugos" @@ -618,6 +712,7 @@ msgstr "Skaityti išteklius" #: src/modules/Drbd.rb:195 +#| msgid "Read configurations" msgid "Read LVM configurations" msgstr "Perskaityti LVM konfigūraciją" @@ -626,6 +721,7 @@ msgstr "Skaityti tarnybos būseną" #: src/modules/Drbd.rb:197 src/modules/Drbd.rb:204 +#| msgid "Read Firewall Settings." msgid "Read SuSEFirewall Settings" msgstr "Skaityti SUSE užkardos nuostatas." @@ -638,6 +734,7 @@ msgstr "Skaitomi ištekliai..." #: src/modules/Drbd.rb:202 +#| msgid "Reading the configurations..." msgid "Reading LVM configurations..." msgstr "Skaitomos LVM konfigūracijos..." @@ -688,6 +785,7 @@ msgstr "Įrašyti išteklius" #: src/modules/Drbd.rb:619 +#| msgid "Write configuration" msgid "Write LVM configurations" msgstr "Įrašyti LVM konfigūraciją" @@ -696,6 +794,7 @@ msgstr "Nustatyti tarnybos būseną" #: src/modules/Drbd.rb:621 +#| msgid "Write the firewall settings" msgid "Write the SuSEfirewall settings" msgstr "Įrašyti SUSE užkardos nuostatas" @@ -708,6 +807,7 @@ msgstr "Įrašomi ištekliai..." #: src/modules/Drbd.rb:626 +#| msgid "Writing configuration..." msgid "Writing LVM configurations..." msgstr "Įrašoma LVM konfigūracija..." @@ -716,10 +816,12 @@ msgstr "Nustatoma tarnybos būsena..." #: src/modules/Drbd.rb:628 +#| msgid "Writing the firewall settings..." msgid "Writing the SuSEFirewall settings" msgstr "Įrašomos SUSE užkardos nuostatos..." #: src/modules/Drbd.rb:639 +#| msgid "Unable to create directory '%1'." msgid "Failed to make directory /etc/drbd.d" msgstr "Nepavyksta sukurti katalogo /etc/drbd.d." Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/fonts.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/fonts.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/fonts.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -18,18 +18,28 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. in case of changing profiles, please reflect #. edits in test/data/sysconfig.fonts-config.* #. otherwise testsuite will fail #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:58 +#| msgid "Bitmap Editors" msgid "Bitmap Fonts" msgstr "Taškiniai šriftai" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:103 -msgid "Unlike 'outline fonts' (fonts described mathematically via curves; chosen in the rest of profiles), 'bitmap fonts' represents group of fonts, which contain bitmap for each glyph and size. Thus, only several sizes exist for each font. They are very fast to render, because there's no need to compute the bitmap and are considered more readable especially on small sizes (even, some outline fonts contains so called 'embedded bitmaps', bitmap versions of itself, for small sizes). Bitmap fonts are rendered black and white, not smoothed." +msgid "" +"Unlike 'outline fonts' (fonts described mathematically via curves; chosen in " +"the rest of profiles), 'bitmap fonts' represents group of fonts, which " +"contain bitmap for each glyph and size. Thus, only several sizes exist for " +"each font. They are very fast to render, because there's no need to compute " +"the bitmap and are considered more readable especially on small sizes (even, " +"some outline fonts contains so called 'embedded bitmaps', bitmap versions of " +"itself, for small sizes). Bitmap fonts are rendered black and white, not " +"smoothed." msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:106 @@ -37,7 +47,12 @@ msgstr "Nespalvotas vaizdavimas" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:123 -msgid "Fonts rendered without antialiasing (grayscale smoothing), black and white. In contrast with smoothed fonts, they are much more readable without any drawback of smoothing (fuzzy or uneven stems etc.). In connection with good hinted fonts (e. g. Liberation 1 fonts), this setting can give bitmap quality fonts while maintaining scalability." +msgid "" +"Fonts rendered without antialiasing (grayscale smoothing), black and white. " +"In contrast with smoothed fonts, they are much more readable without any " +"drawback of smoothing (fuzzy or uneven stems etc.). In connection with good " +"hinted fonts (e. g. Liberation 1 fonts), this setting can give bitmap quality " +"fonts while maintaining scalability." msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:126 @@ -45,7 +60,9 @@ msgstr "Lygiapločių šriftų nespalvotas vaizdavimas" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:143 -msgid "Monospaced fonts rendered not smoothed, other fonts (sans-serif, sans and unspecified) will use default setting. Default family preference list is used." +msgid "" +"Monospaced fonts rendered not smoothed, other fonts (sans-serif, sans and " +"unspecified) will use default setting. Default family preference list is used." msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:146 @@ -53,15 +70,26 @@ msgstr "Numatyta" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:163 -msgid "Fonts are smoothed with antialiasing. Unlike black and white rendered fonts, this setting can produce 'beautiful' fonts sometimes to the detriment of readability. TrueType fonts, which are known to have good hinting instructions are rendered with bytecode interpreter, otherwise FreeType autohinter is used on the 'hintslight' hinting level. Using font native hinting instructions produces glyphs displayed with thiner stems. Default family preference list is used (nowdays TrueType fonts with good instructions are prefered)." +msgid "" +"Fonts are smoothed with antialiasing. Unlike black and white rendered fonts, " +"this setting can produce 'beautiful' fonts sometimes to the detriment of " +"readability. TrueType fonts, which are known to have good hinting " +"instructions are rendered with bytecode interpreter, otherwise FreeType " +"autohinter is used on the 'hintslight' hinting level. Using font native " +"hinting instructions produces glyphs displayed with thiner stems. Default " +"family preference list is used (nowdays TrueType fonts with good instructions " +"are prefered)." msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:166 +#| msgid "Fonts" msgid "CFF Fonts" msgstr "CFF šriftai" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:206 -msgid "Given Adobe's contribution to FreeType library, CFF fonts can be considered good compromise between readability and smoothness of rendered glyphs." +msgid "" +"Given Adobe's contribution to FreeType library, CFF fonts can be considered " +"good compromise between readability and smoothness of rendered glyphs." msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:209 @@ -69,7 +97,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:226 -msgid "Unlike in default profile, even for good hinted fonts, FreeType's autohinter is used (on the 'hintslight' level). That leads to thicker, but sometimes fuzzier (and therefore less readable), glyphs. Default family preference list is used." +msgid "" +"Unlike in default profile, even for good hinted fonts, FreeType's autohinter " +"is used (on the 'hintslight' level). That leads to thicker, but sometimes " +"fuzzier (and therefore less readable), glyphs. Default family preference list " +"is used." msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:229 src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:818 @@ -77,15 +109,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:254 -msgid "Use subpixel rendering capability of LCD monitor. Requires subpixel rendering enabled FreeType library." +msgid "" +"Use subpixel rendering capability of LCD monitor. Requires subpixel rendering " +"enabled FreeType library." msgstr "" #. for testsuite #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:181 +#| msgid "Not installed" msgid "installed" msgstr "įdiegta" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:181 +#| msgid "Not installed" msgid "not installed" msgstr "neįdiegta" @@ -96,27 +132,33 @@ #. nothing to do here, initialize_familylist_widget will #. toggle off/on btn_add_manual as appropriate #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:324 +#| msgid "<p><b>Validity:</b></p>" msgid "<p><b>Family:</b> %s</b></p>" msgstr "<p><b>Šeima:</b> %s</b></p>" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:325 +#| msgid "<p><b> Description for %1 </b></p>" msgid "<p><b>Specimen for %s</b></p>" msgstr "<p><b>„%s“. Pavyzdys</b></p>" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:328 +#| msgid "No UID is available for this type of user." msgid "<p>No specimen available for this font and script.</p>" msgstr "<p>Šiam šriftui ir scenarijui neradome pavyzdžių.</p>" #. unlikely #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:333 +#| msgid "<p><b> Description for %1 </b></p>" msgid "<b>No script found for %s.</b>" msgstr "<b>Neradome scenarijų, skirtų %s.</b>" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:341 +#| msgid "<p><b>Validity:</b></p>" msgid "<p><b>Family:</b> %s</p>" msgstr "<p><b>Šeima:</b> %s</p>" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:342 +#| msgid "<p><b>Description</b></p>" msgid "<p><b>Scripts</b><ul>" msgstr "<p><b>Scenarijai</b><ul>" @@ -164,6 +206,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:560 +#| msgid "&Search for" msgid "Match for %s" msgstr "%s atitikmenys" @@ -194,10 +237,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:632 +#| msgid "Add Lan&guage" msgid "All Lan&guages" msgstr "&Visos kalbos" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:637 +#| msgid "&Secondary Languages" msgid "Limit to &Selected Languages" msgstr "Apsiriboti pa&sirinktomis kalbomis" @@ -206,10 +251,12 @@ msgstr "&Rinktis" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:666 src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:777 +#| msgid "LDAP Filter" msgid "LCD &Filter" msgstr "LCD &filtras" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:677 +#| msgid "&Keyboard Layout" msgid "&Layout" msgstr "&Išdėstymas" @@ -218,6 +265,7 @@ msgstr "Pseudonimas" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:707 +#| msgid "Family" msgid "Font Family" msgstr "Šriftų šeima" @@ -242,6 +290,7 @@ msgstr "&Pridėti" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:719 +#| msgid "Installed Size" msgid "&Installed families..." msgstr "Į&diegtos šeimos..." @@ -260,14 +309,17 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:799 +#| msgid "&Connection Details" msgid "&Rendering Details" msgstr "&Atvaizdavimo ypatybės" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:803 +#| msgid "Initializing" msgid "Antialiasing" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:810 +#| msgid "Printing" msgid "Hinting" msgstr "Taškinė korekcija" @@ -288,6 +340,7 @@ msgstr "Pataisos lygis" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:879 +#| msgid "Presence" msgid "&Presets" msgstr "&Rinkiniai" @@ -295,53 +348,65 @@ #. config files to have such fontconfig setup as fonts-config #. would never run; point fontconfig to this configuration #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:933 +#| msgid "Reading the Configuration" msgid "Reading Font Configuration" msgstr "Skaitoma šriftų konfigūracija" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:936 +#| msgid "Read configuration file" msgid "Read sysconfig file" msgstr "Skaityti konfigūracijos rinkmeną" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:937 +#| msgid "Reading routes..." msgid "Reading %s..." msgstr "Skaitoma %s..." #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:957 +#| msgid "Host Configuration" msgid "Font Configuration" msgstr "Šriftų konfigūracija" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:958 +#| msgid "&User Code" msgid " (User Mode)" msgstr " (Naudotojo veiksena)" #. misuse back_button a bit #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:963 +#| msgid "Default system settings" msgid "&Use system settings" msgstr "&Naudoti sistemos nuostatos" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:975 +#| msgid "Writing NFS Configuration" msgid "Writing Font Configuration" msgstr "Įrašoma šriftų konfigūracija" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:978 +#| msgid "Writing Sysconfig files" msgid "Write sysconfig file" msgstr "Įrašomos konfigūracinės rinkmenos" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:979 +#| msgid "Run SuSEconfig" msgid "Run fonts-config" msgstr "Paleisti šriftų konfigūravimą" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:980 +#| msgid "Writing users..." msgid "Writing %s..." msgstr "Įrašoma %s..." #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:981 +#| msgid "Running SuSEconfig..." msgid "Running fonts-config..." msgstr "Vydomas šriftų konfigūracija..." #. we are in user mode #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:999 -msgid "This will irrecoverably remove user setting done previously with this module." +msgid "" +"This will irrecoverably remove user setting done previously with this module." msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1026 @@ -351,11 +416,15 @@ msgstr "Konfigūracijos &modulis" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1027 -msgid "<p>Module to control <b>system wide</b> or <b>user</b> font rendering setting.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Module to control <b>system wide</b> or <b>user</b> font rendering " +"setting.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1028 -msgid "<i>Distribution default</i> is font setting shipped on media and it is that one almost same for years (not counting decisions of individual DE). " +msgid "" +"<i>Distribution default</i> is font setting shipped on media and it is that " +"one almost same for years (not counting decisions of individual DE). " msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1030 @@ -363,11 +432,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1031 -msgid "<li>system wide when module is run with <tt>root</tt> credentials to create <i>system setting.</i> " +msgid "" +"<li>system wide when module is run with <tt>root</tt> credentials to create <" +"i>system setting.</i> " msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1033 -msgid "System, where font module never run or <b>Default</b> preset was chosen, uses distribution default.</li>" +msgid "" +"System, where font module never run or <b>Default</b> preset was chosen, uses " +"distribution default.</li>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1035 @@ -375,11 +448,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1036 -msgid "User, which never run this module or chooses to <b>Use system settings</b>, uses system settings. " +msgid "" +"User, which never run this module or chooses to <b>Use system settings</b>, " +"uses system settings. " msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1037 -msgid "User, which chooses <b>Default</b> preset, uses distribution default.</li></ul>" +msgid "" +"User, which chooses <b>Default</b> preset, uses distribution default.</li><" +"/ul>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1038 @@ -387,11 +464,15 @@ msgstr "<p><b>PASTABA:</b> " #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1039 -msgid "In general, it is not recommended to combine font module user mode with other font setting. " +msgid "" +"In general, it is not recommended to combine font module user mode with other " +"font setting. " msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1040 -msgid "Nevertheless, setting in <tt>~/.config/fontconfig/fonts.conf</tt> should always have precendence before arbitrary font module setting.</p>" +msgid "" +"Nevertheless, setting in <tt>~/.config/fontconfig/fonts.conf</tt> should " +"always have precendence before arbitrary font module setting.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1042 @@ -399,7 +480,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1043 -msgid "<p><b>Presets</b> button serves a possibility to choose predefined profiles: <ul>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Presets</b> button serves a possibility to choose predefined profiles: " +"<ul>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1045 @@ -407,7 +490,10 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1050 -msgid "Every single menu item there just fills appropriate setting in all tabs. That setting can be later arbitrarily customized in depth by respective individual fields of corresponding tabs.</p>" +msgid "" +"Every single menu item there just fills appropriate setting in all tabs. That " +"setting can be later arbitrarily customized in depth by respective individual " +"fields of corresponding tabs.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1056 @@ -415,7 +501,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1057 -msgid "<p>In this paragraph, <i>current setting</i> means setting of the system plus changes made in currently running fonts module.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>In this paragraph, <i>current setting</i> means setting of the system plus " +"changes made in currently running fonts module.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1059 @@ -423,19 +511,28 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1060 -msgid "In other words, for every alias (%s) you can see family name, which resolves to given alias according to <i>current setting.</i></p>" +msgid "" +"In other words, for every alias (%s) you can see family name, which resolves " +"to given alias according to <i>current setting.</i></p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1063 -msgid "<p>In adition to that, graphical mode allows to display font specimen of the matched font rendered (again) taking <i>current setting</i> into account. " +msgid "" +"<p>In adition to that, graphical mode allows to display font specimen of the " +"matched font rendered (again) taking <i>current setting</i> into account. " msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1066 -msgid "In the corresponding combo box, script coverage of matched font can be seen and specimen string for given script can be chosen.</p>" +msgid "" +"In the corresponding combo box, script coverage of matched font can be seen " +"and specimen string for given script can be chosen.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1068 -msgid "<p>At the bottom, there are crucial rendering options duplicated from Rendered Details Tab, which can be used to see changes in the rendering on the fly.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>At the bottom, there are crucial rendering options duplicated from " +"Rendered Details Tab, which can be used to see changes in the rendering on " +"the fly.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1074 @@ -443,7 +540,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1075 -msgid "<p>This tab controls <b>how</b> fonts are rendered. It allows you to amend font rendering algorithms to be used and change their options.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This tab controls <b>how</b> fonts are rendered. It allows you to amend " +"font rendering algorithms to be used and change their options.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1078 @@ -453,28 +552,38 @@ msgstr "<h3>Prisijungimo nuostatos</h3>" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1079 -msgid "<p>By default, all outline fonts are smoothed by method called <i>antialiasing.</i>" +msgid "" +"<p>By default, all outline fonts are smoothed by method called <i>" +"antialiasing.</i>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1081 -msgid " Black and white rendering can be forced for all fonts or for monospaced only.</p>" +msgid "" +" Black and white rendering can be forced for all fonts or for monospaced " +"only.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1083 src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1097 #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1118 +#| msgid "<p>Home Page: %1</p>" msgid "<p>See: %s<p>" msgstr "<p>Žr.: %s</p>" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1087 +#| msgid "<h3>Login Settings</h3>" msgid "<h3>Hinting</h3>" msgstr "<h3>Taškinė korekcija</h3>" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1088 -msgid "<p>Hinting instructions helps rasterizer to fit glyphs stems to the grid.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Hinting instructions helps rasterizer to fit glyphs stems to the grid.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1090 -msgid "<p>In the default setting, FreeType's autohinter can be used depending on font type and quality of own instructions. Use of autohinter can be forced by <b>Force Autohinting On</b> option.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>In the default setting, FreeType's autohinter can be used depending on " +"font type and quality of own instructions. Use of autohinter can be forced by " +"<b>Force Autohinting On</b> option.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1094 @@ -482,7 +591,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1095 -msgid " It is possible to set hint style globally by <b>Force Hint Style</b> option.</p>" +msgid "" +" It is possible to set hint style globally by <b>Force Hint Style</b> " +"option.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1101 @@ -492,7 +603,11 @@ msgstr "<h3>Keisti BDB duomenų bazė</b3>" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1102 -msgid "<p>Some outline fonts contain so called bitmap strikes, i. e. bitmap version of given font for certain sizes. In this section it can be turned off entirely, on only for fonts which cover specified languages, or on for every font." +msgid "" +"<p>Some outline fonts contain so called bitmap strikes, i. e. bitmap version " +"of given font for certain sizes. In this section it can be turned off " +"entirely, on only for fonts which cover specified languages, or on for every " +"font." msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1109 @@ -502,19 +617,27 @@ msgstr "<h3>TLS nuostatos</h3>" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1110 -msgid "<p>Subpixel rendering multiples resolution in one direction by using colour primaries (subpixels) of an LCD display.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Subpixel rendering multiples resolution in one direction by using colour " +"primaries (subpixels) of an LCD display.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1112 -msgid "<p>Choose LCD filter, which should be used, and subpixel layout corresponding to display and its rotation.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Choose LCD filter, which should be used, and subpixel layout corresponding " +"to display and its rotation.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1114 -msgid "<p>Note, that due to patent reasons, FreeType has subpixel rendering turned off by default." +msgid "" +"<p>Note, that due to patent reasons, FreeType has subpixel rendering turned " +"off by default." msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1116 -msgid " Without FreeType's subpixel rendering support compiled in, setting in this section has no effect.</p>" +msgid "" +" Without FreeType's subpixel rendering support compiled in, setting in this " +"section has no effect.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1122 @@ -534,11 +657,14 @@ msgstr "<h3>Naudotojai</h3>" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1125 -msgid "<p>Here, Family Preference Lists (FPL) for generic aliases (%s) can be defined." +msgid "" +"<p>Here, Family Preference Lists (FPL) for generic aliases (%s) can be " +"defined." msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1127 -msgid " These are sorted lists of family names, with most prefered family first." +msgid "" +" These are sorted lists of family names, with most prefered family first." msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1129 @@ -550,7 +676,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1131 -msgid "<p>System will look for the first <b>installed</b> family in the list, other query elements taking into account of course. Available font packages for SUSE distributions can be browsed and installed from <b>fontinfo.opensuse.org.</b></p>" +msgid "" +"<p>System will look for the first <b>installed</b> family in the list, other " +"query elements taking into account of course. Available font packages for " +"SUSE distributions can be browsed and installed from <b>" +"fontinfo.opensuse.org.</b></p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1138 @@ -558,7 +688,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1139 -msgid "<p>In some circumstances, FPLs defined in this dialog are not taken into account. Following two options strenghten their role.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>In some circumstances, FPLs defined in this dialog are not taken into " +"account. Following two options strenghten their role.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1142 @@ -568,15 +700,23 @@ msgstr "<h4>Tapatumo nustatymas</h4>" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1143 -msgid "<p>Two fonts are metric compatible, when all corresponding letters are of the same size. That implies, document displayed using these fonts has the same same size too, same line wraps etc.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Two fonts are metric compatible, when all corresponding letters are of the " +"same size. That implies, document displayed using these fonts has the same " +"same size too, same line wraps etc.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1146 -msgid "<p>Via default setting, system substitutes metric compatible fonts preferably, and FPLs defined in this dialog can be circumvented by this rule.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Via default setting, system substitutes metric compatible fonts " +"preferably, and FPLs defined in this dialog can be circumvented by this " +"rule.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1148 -msgid "<p>Where metric compatibility does not matter, this option can be unchecked.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Where metric compatibility does not matter, this option can be unchecked.<" +"/p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1149 @@ -584,7 +724,10 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1150 -msgid "<p>When checked, this option introduces very strong position for here defined preference lists. It pushes families from there before document or GUI requests, if they cover required charset.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>When checked, this option introduces very strong position for here defined " +"preference lists. It pushes families from there before document or GUI " +"requests, if they cover required charset.</p>" msgstr "" #. delete families, that are part of list for some alias @@ -593,14 +736,17 @@ msgstr "&Filtras" #: src/lib/fonts/fpl-add-dialog.rb:61 +#| msgid "Installed Size" msgid "Installed Families" msgstr "Įdiegtos šeimos" #: src/lib/fonts/fpl-add-dialog.rb:62 +#| msgid "Export Format" msgid "Font Format" msgstr "Šrifto formatas" #: src/lib/fonts/fpl-add-dialog.rb:63 +#| msgid "Script Name" msgid "Script Coverages" msgstr "Scenarijaus dengiamumas" @@ -609,6 +755,7 @@ msgstr "&Atšaukti" #: src/lib/fonts/rich-text-dialog.rb:24 src/lib/fonts/select-ebl-dialog.rb:243 +#| msgid "Ok" msgid "&Ok" msgstr "&Gerai" @@ -616,3 +763,4 @@ #: src/lib/fonts/select-ebl-dialog.rb:240 msgid "&Languages" msgstr "&Kalbos" + Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/gtk.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/gtk.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/gtk.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -19,7 +19,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. translator: byte shorthand Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/installation.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/installation.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/installation.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -12,15 +12,16 @@ "Project-Id-Version: installation.lt\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-27 10:52+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2015-10-18 09:16+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2015-11-01 10:03+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Mindaugas Baranauskas \n" -"Language-Team: Lithuanian \n" +"Language-Team: Lithuanian \n" "Language: lt\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. help for the dialog - busy message #: src/include/installation/inst_inc_all.rb:52 @@ -177,12 +178,12 @@ #. Heading for confirmation popup before the installation really starts #: src/include/installation/misc.rb:167 msgid "Confirm Installation" -msgstr "Patvirtinti diegimą" +msgstr "Diegimo patvirtinimas" #. Text for confirmation popup before the installation really starts 1/3 #: src/include/installation/misc.rb:170 msgid "<p>Information required for the base installation is now complete.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Surinkta informacija, reikalinga diegimui.</p>" +msgstr "<p>Informacija, reikalinga diegimui, jau surinkta.</p>" #. Text for confirmation popup before the installation really starts 2/3 #: src/include/installation/misc.rb:182 @@ -214,7 +215,8 @@ #: src/include/installation/misc.rb:204 src/include/installation/misc.rb:222 #: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:136 msgid "<p>Go back and check the settings if you are unsure.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Jei nesate užtikrintas, grįžkite atgal ir patikrinkite nuostatas.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Jei nesate užtikrintas, grįžkite atgal ir patikrinkite nuostatas.</p>" #. Heading for confirmation popup before the update really starts #. Heading for confirmation popup before the update really starts @@ -264,18 +266,24 @@ #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:87 msgid "Blacklist devices enabled (disable</a>)." -msgstr "Įrenginių juodasis sąrašas yra įgalintas (išjungti</a>)." +msgstr "" +"Įrenginių juodasis sąrašas yra įgalintas (išjungti</a>)." #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:93 msgid "Blacklist devices disabled (enable</a>)." -msgstr "Įrenginių juodasis sąrašas yra išjungtas (įgalinti</a>)." +msgstr "" +"Įrenginių juodasis sąrašas yra išjungtas (įgalinti</a>)." #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:102 -msgid "<p>Use <b>Blacklist devices</b> if you want to create blacklist channels to such devices which will reduce kernel memory footprint.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Įrenginių juodąjį sąrašą</b> naudokite tuomet, kai nenorite, kad branduolys bandytų naudoti tuos įrenginius.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Blacklist devices</b> if you want to create blacklist channels to " +"such devices which will reduce kernel memory footprint.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Įrenginių juodąjį sąrašą</b> naudokite tuomet, kai nenorite, kad " +"branduolys bandytų naudoti tuos įrenginius.</p>" #. progress step title #: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:157 @@ -290,17 +298,24 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/lib/installation/clients/clone_proposal.rb:39 msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Clone System Settings</b> if you want to create an AutoYaST profile.\n" -"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user interaction. AutoYaST\n" -"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this option is\n" -"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" +"<p>Use <b>Clone System Settings</b> if you want to create an AutoYaST " +"profile.\n" +"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user " +"interaction. AutoYaST\n" +"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this " +"option is\n" +"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>" +"/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Sistemos nuostatos</b> leidžia sukurti AutoYaST profilį.\n" "AutoYaST yra SUSE Linux diegimo būdas be naudotojo įsikišimo. AutoYaST\n" -"diegimui reikia profilio, kuriame nurodoma, kaip įdiegti sistemą. Pasirinkus šią\n" -"parinktį, esamos sistemos profilis bus įrašytas <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" +"diegimui reikia profilio, kuriame nurodoma, kaip įdiegti sistemą. Pasirinkus " +"šią\n" +"parinktį, esamos sistemos profilis bus įrašytas <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.<" +"/p>" #: src/lib/installation/clients/clone_proposal.rb:60 +#| msgid "Write AutoYaST profile to /root/autoinst.xml" msgid "Write AutoYaST profile to /root/autoinst.xmlat the end of installation?" msgstr "Įdiegus įrašyti AutoYaST profilį į /root/autoinst.xml?" @@ -317,8 +332,12 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: src/lib/installation/clients/clone_proposal.rb:101 -msgid "The AutoYaST profile will be written under /root/autoinst.xml (do not write it</a>)." -msgstr "AutoYaST profilis bus įrašytas į /root/autoinst.xml (neįrašyti</a>)." +msgid "" +"The AutoYaST profile will be written under /root/autoinst.xml (" +"do not write it</a>)." +msgstr "" +"AutoYaST profilis bus įrašytas į /root/autoinst.xml (" +"neįrašyti</a>)." #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text @@ -355,8 +374,12 @@ msgstr "Diegimas iš atvaizdžių" #: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:121 -msgid "Here you can choose to use Novell pre-defined images to speed up RPM installation." -msgstr "Galite pasirinkti naudoti Novell paruoštus atvaizdžius, taip pagreitinsite RPM diegimą." +msgid "" +"Here you can choose to use Novell pre-defined images to speed up RPM " +"installation." +msgstr "" +"Galite pasirinkti naudoti Novell paruoštus atvaizdžius, taip pagreitinsite " +"RPM diegimą." #: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:135 msgid "&Install from Images" @@ -367,8 +390,12 @@ msgstr "&Nediegti iš atvaizdžių" #: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:155 -msgid "Custom images deployment - this needs a URL to be configured as installation source" -msgstr "Pasirinktų atvaizdžių išskleidimas – tam reikia nurodyti URL kaip diegimo šaltinį" +msgid "" +"Custom images deployment - this needs a URL to be configured as installation " +"source" +msgstr "" +"Pasirinktų atvaizdžių išskleidimas – tam reikia nurodyti URL kaip diegimo " +"šaltinį" #. Image name, Image location #: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:164 @@ -376,12 +403,19 @@ msgstr "Čia galite sukurti pasirinktus atvaizdžius.\n" #: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:165 -msgid "You have to configure the software selection first before you can create an image here" -msgstr "Prieš kuriant atvaizdį, reikia sukonfigūruoti programinės įrangos pasirinkimą" +msgid "" +"You have to configure the software selection first before you can create an " +"image here" +msgstr "" +"Prieš kuriant atvaizdį, reikia sukonfigūruoti programinės įrangos pasirinkimą" #: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:176 -msgid "Create an image file (AutoYaST will fetch it from the given location during installation)" -msgstr "Sukurti atvaizdžio rinkmeną (AutoYaST paims ją iš nurodytos vietos diegimo metu)" +msgid "" +"Create an image file (AutoYaST will fetch it from the given location during " +"installation)" +msgstr "" +"Sukurti atvaizdžio rinkmeną (AutoYaST paims ją iš nurodytos vietos diegimo " +"metu)" #: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:183 msgid "Create Image" @@ -406,7 +440,8 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Installation from Images</b> is used to speed the installation up.\n" "Images contain compressed snapshots of an installed system matching your\n" -"selection of patterns. The rest of the packages which are not contained in the\n" +"selection of patterns. The rest of the packages which are not contained in " +"the\n" "images will be installed from packages the standard way.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Diegimas iš atvaizdžių</b> vyksta greičiausiai. \n" @@ -417,14 +452,20 @@ #: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:235 msgid "" "<p><b>Creating own Images</b> is used if you\n" -"want to skip the complete step of RPM installation. Instead AutoYaST will dump an\n" -"image on the harddisk which is a lot faster and can be pre-configured already.\n" -"Everything else than RPM installation is done like during a normal auto-installation.</p>" +"want to skip the complete step of RPM installation. Instead AutoYaST will " +"dump an\n" +"image on the harddisk which is a lot faster and can be pre-configured " +"already.\n" +"Everything else than RPM installation is done like during a normal " +"auto-installation.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Savų atvaizdžių kūrimą</b> naudokite, kai\n" -"norite praleisti visiškai pažingsninį RPM diegimą. AutoYaST standžiajame diske\n" -"įrašys atvaizdį, kuris yra greitesnis ir gali būti iš anksto sukonfigūruotas.\n" -"Visa kita, išskyrus RPM diegimą, atliekama kaip ir įprasto automatinio diegimo metu.</p>" +"norite praleisti visiškai pažingsninį RPM diegimą. AutoYaST standžiajame " +"diske\n" +"įrašys atvaizdį, kuris yra greitesnis ir gali būti iš anksto " +"sukonfigūruotas.\n" +"Visa kita, išskyrus RPM diegimą, atliekama kaip ir įprasto automatinio " +"diegimo metu.</p>" #: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:338 #: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:349 @@ -434,10 +475,12 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/lib/installation/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:76 msgid "" -"<p>Note that when installing from images, the time stamps of all packages originating from the images will\n" +"<p>Note that when installing from images, the time stamps of all packages " +"originating from the images will\n" "not match the installation date but rather the date the image was created.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Atminkite, kad diegiant iš atvaizdžio laiko žymės neatitiks diegimo datos,\n" +"<p>Atminkite, kad diegiant iš atvaizdžio laiko žymės neatitiks diegimo " +"datos,\n" "bet atitiks atvaizdžio sukūrimo datą.</p>" #. TRANSLATORS: help text @@ -583,6 +626,7 @@ #. this type of contents will be shown only for initial installation dialog #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:110 +#| msgid "Keyboard" msgid "K&eyboard Test" msgstr "&Klaviatūros tikrinimas" @@ -606,7 +650,8 @@ "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Pasirinkite <b>kalbą<b> ir <b>klaviatūros išdėstymą</b>, naudosimus diegimo metu \n" +"Pasirinkite <b>kalbą<b> ir <b>klaviatūros išdėstymą</b>, naudosimus diegimo " +"metu \n" "ir įdiegtoje sistemoje.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -616,12 +661,14 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "The license must be accepted before the installation continues.\n" -"Use <b>License Translations...</b> to show the license in all available translations.\n" +"Use <b>License Translations...</b> to show the license in all available " +"translations.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "Diegimas tęsis tik sutikus su licencija.\n" -"Pasirinkite <b>Licencijos vertimai...</b> norėdami matyti licenciją kitomis prieinamomis kalbomis.\n" +"Pasirinkite <b>Licencijos vertimai...</b> norėdami matyti licenciją kitomis " +"prieinamomis kalbomis.\n" "</p>\n" #. help text, continued @@ -724,7 +771,8 @@ #. congratulation text 4/4 #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:172 msgid "<p>Have a lot of fun!<br>Your SUSE Development Team</p>" -msgstr "<p>Linkime daug džiugių akimirkų!<br>Jūsų SuSE programavimo komanda</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Linkime daug džiugių akimirkų!<br>Jūsų SuSE programavimo komanda</p>" #. help 1/4 for dialog "Congratulation Dialog" #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:196 @@ -755,20 +803,27 @@ #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:215 msgid "" "<p>Use <b>Clone</b> if you want to create an AutoYaST profile.\n" -"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user interaction. AutoYaST\n" -"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this option is\n" -"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" +"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user " +"interaction. AutoYaST\n" +"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this " +"option is\n" +"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>" +"/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>Naudokite <b>Klonavimą</b> norėdami sukurti AutoYaST profilį.\n" "AutoYaST yra SUSE Linux diegimo būdas be naudotojo įsikišimo. AutoYaST\n" -"diegimui reikia profilio, kuriame nurodoma, kaip įdiegti sistemą. Pasirinkus šią\n" -"parinktį, esamos sistemos profilis bus įrašytas <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" +"diegimui reikia profilio, kuriame nurodoma, kaip įdiegti sistemą. Pasirinkus " +"šią\n" +"parinktį, esamos sistemos profilis bus įrašytas <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.<" +"/p>" #. #187558 #. Load Add-On products configured in the fist stage #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:310 -msgid "<p>To clone the current system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norint dubliuoti esamą sistemą, turi būti įdiegtas paketas <b>%1</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>To clone the current system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norint dubliuoti esamą sistemą, turi būti įdiegtas paketas <b>%1</b>.</p>" #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:313 msgid "<p>Install it now?</p>" @@ -809,10 +864,12 @@ #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:199 msgid "" "Debugging has been turned on.\n" -"YaST will open a software manager for you to check the current status of packages." +"YaST will open a software manager for you to check the current status of " +"packages." msgstr "" "Derinimas buvo įjungtas.\n" -"YaST atvers programinės įrangos tvarkytuvę, kad galėtumėte patikrinti esamų paketų būseną." +"YaST atvers programinės įrangos tvarkytuvę, kad galėtumėte patikrinti esamų " +"paketų būseną." #. unknown image #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:375 @@ -846,8 +903,13 @@ msgstr "Naudotinas &diskas" #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_disk_for_image.rb:93 -msgid "Select the disk, which the image will be deployed to. All data on the disk will be lost and the disk will be partitioned as defined in the image." -msgstr "Pasirinkite diską, kuriame norite išskleisti sistemos atvaizdį. Visi diske esantys duomenys bus ištrinti, o diskas bus suskaidytas pagal atvaizdyje aprašytas taisykles. " +msgid "" +"Select the disk, which the image will be deployed to. All data on the disk " +"will be lost and the disk will be partitioned as defined in the image." +msgstr "" +"Pasirinkite diską, kuriame norite išskleisti sistemos atvaizdį. Visi diske " +"esantys duomenys bus ištrinti, o diskas bus suskaidytas pagal atvaizdyje " +"aprašytas taisykles. " #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_disk_for_image.rb:100 msgid "Hard Disk for Image Deployment" @@ -912,7 +974,8 @@ #. popup message, list of repositores is appended to the text #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_extrasources.rb:142 msgid "Package updates have been found in these additional repositories:" -msgstr "Paketų atnaujinimų rasta šiose papildomose programinės įrangos saugyklose:" +msgstr "" +"Paketų atnaujinimų rasta šiose papildomose programinės įrangos saugyklose:" #. yes/no popup question #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_extrasources.rb:160 @@ -1037,24 +1100,31 @@ "<b>Add Online Repositories Before Installation</b>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Norėdami naudoti internetines programinės įrangos saugyklas diegimo ar atnaujinimo metu, pasirinkite\n" +"Norėdami naudoti internetines programinės įrangos saugyklas diegimo ar " +"atnaujinimo metu, pasirinkite\n" "<b>Prieš diegimą pridėti nuotolines saugyklas</b>.</p>" #. help text for installation method #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:213 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"To install an add-on product from separate media together with &product;, select\n" +"To install an add-on product from separate media together with &product;, " +"select\n" "<b>Include Add-on Products from Separate Media</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Norėdami įdiegti papildomą produktą iš atskiros laikmenos kartu su &product;, pasirinkite\n" +"Norėdami įdiegti papildomą produktą iš atskiros laikmenos kartu su &product;, " +"pasirinkite\n" "<b>Pridėti papildomus produktus iš atskiros laikmenos</b>.</p>\n" #. help text: additional help for installation #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:216 -msgid "<p>If you need specific hardware drivers for installation, see <i>http://drivers.suse.com</i> site.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Žiūrėkite 'drivers.suse.com' svetainėje, jei diegiant jums reikia specialių aparatinės įrangos tvarkyklių.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>If you need specific hardware drivers for installation, see <i>" +"http://drivers.suse.com</i> site.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Žiūrėkite 'drivers.suse.com' svetainėje, jei diegiant jums reikia " +"specialių aparatinės įrangos tvarkyklių.</p>" #. Error message #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_license.rb:128 @@ -1110,10 +1180,12 @@ #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_network_check.rb:143 msgid "" "<p>A configured network is needed for using remote repositories\n" -"or add-on products. If you do not use remote repositories, skip the configuration.</p>\n" +"or add-on products. If you do not use remote repositories, skip the " +"configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Sukonfigūruotas tinklas reikalingas priėjimui prie nuotolinių saugyklų\n" -"ar papildomų produktų. Jei nenaudojate nuotolinių saugyklų, galite praleisti konfigūravimą.</p>\n" +"ar papildomų produktų. Jei nenaudojate nuotolinių saugyklų, galite praleisti " +"konfigūravimą.</p>\n" #. error popup #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_network_check.rb:185 @@ -1127,25 +1199,33 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text, part 1 #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:57 msgid "" -"<p>At Linux <b>choice</b> is a top priority. <i>openSUSE</i> offers a number \n" +"<p>At Linux <b>choice</b> is a top priority. <i>openSUSE</i> offers a number " +"\n" "of different desktop environments. Below you see a list of the 2 major ones \n" "<b>GNOME</b> and <b>KDE</b>.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Linux sistemai <b>pasirinkimas</b> yra didžiausia vertybė. <i>openSUSE</i> siūlo \n" +"<p>Linux sistemai <b>pasirinkimas</b> yra didžiausia vertybė. <i>openSUSE</i> " +"siūlo \n" "keletą skirtingų darbalaukio aplinkų. Žemiau matote dvi populiariausias \n" "<b>GNOME</b> ir <b>KDE</b>.</p>" #. TRANSLATORS: help text, part 3 #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:63 msgid "" -"<p>You may select alternative desktop environments (or one of minimal installation patterns)\n" -"that could fit your needs better using the <b>Other</b> option . Later in the software \n" -"selection or after installation, you can change your selection or add additional desktop \n" +"<p>You may select alternative desktop environments (or one of minimal " +"installation patterns)\n" +"that could fit your needs better using the <b>Other</b> option . Later in the " +"software \n" +"selection or after installation, you can change your selection or add " +"additional desktop \n" "environments. This screen allows you to set the default.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Galite pasirinkti ir kitokią darbalaukio aplinką (ar vieną iš minimalaus diegimo šablonų),\n" -"kuri geriau atitiktų jūsų poreikius, spausdami <b>Kita</b>. Vėliau rinkdamiesi programinę įrangą\n" -"ar bet kada jau po sistemos diegimo taip pat galėsite pakeisti savo pasirinkimą ar pridėti papildomų\n" +"<p>Galite pasirinkti ir kitokią darbalaukio aplinką (ar vieną iš minimalaus " +"diegimo šablonų),\n" +"kuri geriau atitiktų jūsų poreikius, spausdami <b>Kita</b>. Vėliau " +"rinkdamiesi programinę įrangą\n" +"ar bet kada jau po sistemos diegimo taip pat galėsite pakeisti savo " +"pasirinkimą ar pridėti papildomų\n" "darbalaukio aplinkų. Šiame skydelyje pasirinkite pagrindinę.</p>" #. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption @@ -1170,7 +1250,8 @@ #. hide the RN button and set the release notes for SlideShow (bnc#871158) #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_prepareprogress.rb:56 msgid "Cannot find base product. Release notes will not be shown." -msgstr "Nepavyksta rasti pagrindinio produkto. Pastabos apie šią laidą nerodomos." +msgstr "" +"Nepavyksta rasti pagrindinio produkto. Pastabos apie šią laidą nerodomos." #. 1 GB is a good approximation #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_prepareprogress.rb:104 @@ -1322,10 +1403,12 @@ #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:240 msgid "" "\n" -"Check 'drivers.suse.com' if you need specific hardware drivers for installation." +"Check 'drivers.suse.com' if you need specific hardware drivers for " +"installation." msgstr "" "\n" -"Žiūrėkite 'drivers.suse.com' svetainėje, jei diegiant jums reikia specialių aparatinės įrangos tvarkyklių." +"Žiūrėkite 'drivers.suse.com' svetainėje, jei diegiant jums reikia specialių " +"aparatinės įrangos tvarkyklių." #. pop-up error report #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:254 @@ -1436,10 +1519,13 @@ #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:256 msgid "" "<p>Here you see all software repositories found\n" -"on the system you are upgrading. Enable the ones you want to include in the upgrade process.</p>" +"on the system you are upgrading. Enable the ones you want to include in the " +"upgrade process.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Čia matote visas programinės įrangos saugyklas (diegimo šaltinius), rastas sistemoje,\n" -"kurią ketinate naujovinti. Įgalinkite tas, kurias norite įtraukti į sistemos naujovinimą.</p>" +"<p>Čia matote visas programinės įrangos saugyklas (diegimo šaltinius), rastas " +"sistemoje,\n" +"kurią ketinate naujovinti. Įgalinkite tas, kurias norite įtraukti į sistemos " +"naujovinimą.</p>" #. TRANSLATORS: help text 2/3 #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:260 @@ -1453,7 +1539,9 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text 3/3 #: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:264 msgid "<p>To change the URL, click on the <b>Change...</b> button.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norėdami keisti universalų adresą (URL), spauskite mygtuką <b>Keisti...</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norėdami keisti universalų adresą (URL), spauskite mygtuką <b>Keisti...</b>" +".</p>" #. one_url already has "id" and some items might be deleted #. looking to id_to_name is done via the original key @@ -1870,7 +1958,9 @@ #. May contain newlines, but don't make it very much longer than the original. #: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:713 msgid "Click a headline to make changes or use the \"Change...\" menu below." -msgstr "Norėdami pakeisti antraštę, spauskite ant jos arba paspauskite mygtuką „Pakeisti...“." +msgstr "" +"Norėdami pakeisti antraštę, spauskite ant jos arba paspauskite mygtuką " +"„Pakeisti...“." #: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:717 msgid "Click a headline to make changes." @@ -1916,7 +2006,8 @@ "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Jūsų standusis diskas dar nebuvo pakeistas, taigi vis dar galite saugiai nutraukti.\n" +"Jūsų standusis diskas dar nebuvo pakeistas, taigi vis dar galite saugiai " +"nutraukti.\n" "</p>\n" #. Help text for installation proposal @@ -1924,11 +2015,13 @@ #: src/lib/installation/proposal_store.rb:417 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Select <b>Install</b> to perform a new installation with the values displayed.\n" +"Select <b>Install</b> to perform a new installation with the values " +"displayed.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Norėdami su rodomomis nuostatomis naujai įdiegti sistemą, spauskite <b>Diegti</b> .\n" +"Norėdami su rodomomis nuostatomis naujai įdiegti sistemą, spauskite <b>" +"Diegti</b> .\n" "</p>\n" #. so update @@ -1941,7 +2034,8 @@ "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Norėdami atnaujinti su sistemą su rodomomis nuostatomis, pasirinkite <b>Atnaujinti</b> .\n" +"Norėdami atnaujinti su sistemą su rodomomis nuostatomis, pasirinkite <b>" +"Atnaujinti</b> .\n" "</p>\n" #. Help text for network configuration proposal @@ -2022,6 +2116,7 @@ #. @return [TrueClass,FalseClass] True if snapshot was created; #. otherwise it returns false. #: src/lib/installation/snapshots_finish.rb:40 +#| msgid "Copying root filesystem..." msgid "Creating root filesystem snapshot..." msgstr "Kuriama šakninės rinkmenų sistemos momentinė kopija..." Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/journal.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/journal.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/journal.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -18,11 +18,13 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Header #: src/lib/systemd_journal/entries_dialog.rb:43 +#| msgid "No entries." msgid "Journal entries" msgstr "Žurnalų įrašai" @@ -33,6 +35,7 @@ #. Return the result as an array of Items #: src/lib/systemd_journal/entries_dialog.rb:117 +#| msgid "Change Suffix" msgid "Change filter..." msgstr "Keisti atranką..." @@ -42,26 +45,31 @@ #. Header #: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_dialog.rb:50 +#| msgid "Braille display" msgid "Entries to display" msgstr "Rodytini įrašai" #. Interval #: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_dialog.rb:53 +#| msgid "Periodic interval" msgid "Time interval" msgstr "Laiko tarpsnis" #. Filters #: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_dialog.rb:59 +#| msgid "Filter" msgid "Filters" msgstr "Atranka" #. User readable description of the current filters #: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:65 +#| msgid "Additional options" msgid "With no additional conditions" msgstr "Jokių papildomų sąlygų" #. User readable description of the time interval #: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:82 +#| msgid "File system" msgid "Since system's boot" msgstr "Nuo operacinės sistemos paleidimo" @@ -99,6 +107,7 @@ #. * :multiple boolean indicating if an array is a valid value #. * :values optional list of valid values #: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:128 +#| msgid "&Units" msgid "Units" msgstr "Vienetai" @@ -136,3 +145,4 @@ #: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:166 msgid "Message" msgstr "Pranešimas" + Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/kdump.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/kdump.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/kdump.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -20,7 +20,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Command line help text for the kdump module @@ -45,33 +46,50 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:89 +#| msgid "Dump format for dump image ELF/compressed" msgid "Dump format for dump image none/ELF/compressed/lzo" msgstr "Atminties išklotinės atvaizdžio formatas: joks/ELF/suglaudintas/lzo" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:102 msgid "Dump target includes destination for saving dump images" -msgstr "Atminties išklotinės paskirtis apima atminties išklotinės atvaizdžių laikymo paskirtį" +msgstr "" +"Atminties išklotinės paskirtis apima atminties išklotinės atvaizdžių laikymo " +"paskirtį" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:117 -msgid "The naming scheme is:/boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] Please enter only \"kernel_string\"." -msgstr "Pavadinimo schema: /boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] Įrašykite tik „branduolio_pavadinimą“." +msgid "" +"The naming scheme is:/boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] Please enter only " +"\"kernel_string\"." +msgstr "" +"Pavadinimo schema: /boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] Įrašykite " +"tik „branduolio_pavadinimą“." #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:128 -msgid "The kdump commandline is the command line that needs to be passed off to the kdump kernel." -msgstr "Kdump komandinė eilutė yra komandinė eilutė, kurią reikia perduoti į kdump branduolį." +msgid "" +"The kdump commandline is the command line that needs to be passed off to the " +"kdump kernel." +msgstr "" +"Kdump komandinė eilutė yra komandinė eilutė, kurią reikia perduoti į kdump " +"branduolį." #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:139 -msgid "Set this variable if you only want to _append_ values to the default command line string." -msgstr "Šį kintamąjį nurodykite, jei norite pridėti papildomas reikšmes prie numatytosios komandinės eilutės." +msgid "" +"Set this variable if you only want to _append_ values to the default command " +"line string." +msgstr "" +"Šį kintamąjį nurodykite, jei norite pridėti papildomas reikšmes prie " +"numatytosios komandinės eilutės." #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:150 msgid "Immediately reboot after saving the core in the kdump kernel." -msgstr "Nedelsiant iš naujo paleisti operacinę sistema po to, kai įrašomas atvaizdis į kdump branduolį." +msgstr "" +"Nedelsiant iš naujo paleisti operacinę sistema po to, kai įrašomas atvaizdis " +"į kdump branduolį." #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:158 @@ -81,7 +99,9 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:166 msgid "Specifies how many old dumps are kept. 0 means keep all." -msgstr "Nurodo senų atminties išklotinių kiekį, kurį išlaikyti. 0 reikštų, kad jie nebūtų laikomi." +msgstr "" +"Nurodo senų atminties išklotinių kiekį, kurį išlaikyti. 0 reikštų, kad jie " +"nebūtų laikomi." #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:174 @@ -95,8 +115,12 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:190 -msgid "SMTP password for sending notification messages. Path of file which includes password (plain text file)." -msgstr "SMTP slaptažodis pranešimų siuntimui. Rinkmenos kelias, turintis slaptažodį (grynojo teksto rinkmena)." +msgid "" +"SMTP password for sending notification messages. Path of file which includes " +"password (plain text file)." +msgstr "" +"SMTP slaptažodis pranešimų siuntimui. Rinkmenos kelias, turintis slaptažodį " +"(grynojo teksto rinkmena)." #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:198 @@ -135,13 +159,20 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:248 +#| msgid "Dump format can be ELF or compressed" msgid "Dump format can be none, ELF, compressed or lzo" -msgstr "Atminties išklotinės formatas gali būti joks, ELF, suglaudintas arba lzo" +msgstr "" +"Atminties išklotinės formatas gali būti joks, ELF, suglaudintas arba lzo" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:255 -msgid "Dump target includes type of target from: file (local filesystem), ftp, ssh, sftp, nfs, cifs" -msgstr "Atminties išklotinės paskirtis gali būti šių tipų: rinkmena (vietinė rinkmenų sistema), ftp, ssh, sftp, nfs, cifs" +#| msgid "Dump target includes type of target from: file (local filesystem), ftp, ssh, nfs, cifs" +msgid "" +"Dump target includes type of target from: file (local filesystem), ftp, ssh, " +"sftp, nfs, cifs" +msgstr "" +"Atminties išklotinės paskirtis gali būti šių tipų: rinkmena (vietinė rinkmenų " +"sistema), ftp, ssh, sftp, nfs, cifs" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:262 @@ -180,8 +211,12 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:303 -msgid "The naming scheme is: /boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] kernel means only \"kernel_string\"." -msgstr "Pavadinimo schema: /boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] branduolys reiškia tik „branduolio_pavadinimą“." +msgid "" +"The naming scheme is: /boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] kernel means only " +"\"kernel_string\"." +msgstr "" +"Pavadinimo schema: /boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] branduolys " +"reiškia tik „branduolio_pavadinimą“." #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:310 @@ -190,8 +225,12 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:317 -msgid "Option means runlevel to boot the kdump kernel. Only values such as 1,2,3,5 or s are allowed" -msgstr "Parinktis reiškia paleidimo lygmenį, kuriame įkeliamas kdump branduolys. Galimos tik šios reikšmės: 1, 2, 3, 5, s" +msgid "" +"Option means runlevel to boot the kdump kernel. Only values such as 1,2,3,5 " +"or s are allowed" +msgstr "" +"Parinktis reiškia paleidimo lygmenį, kuriame įkeliamas kdump branduolys. " +"Galimos tik šios reikšmės: 1, 2, 3, 5, s" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:324 @@ -317,17 +356,21 @@ msgstr "Kdump nedelsiant paleidžia sistemą iš naujo: %1" #: src/clients/kdump.rb:652 src/clients/kdump.rb:1262 +#| msgid "enabled" msgid "Enabled" msgstr "Įgalintas" #: src/clients/kdump.rb:653 src/clients/kdump.rb:1263 +#| msgid "disabled" msgid "Disabled" msgstr "Uždraustas" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text #: src/clients/kdump.rb:662 msgid "Numbers of old dumps: All dumps are saved without deleting old dumps" -msgstr "Senų atminties išklotinių skaičius: visos išklotinės saugomos, t. y. senos išklotinės nešalinamos" +msgstr "" +"Senų atminties išklotinių skaičius: visos išklotinės saugomos, t. y. senos " +"išklotinės nešalinamos" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text #: src/clients/kdump.rb:670 @@ -366,7 +409,8 @@ msgid "" "Kernel option \"crashkernel\" includes ranges and/or redundant values.\n" "It will be rewritten." -msgstr "Į branduolio parinktį „crashkernel“ įtrauktos sritys. Jos bus perrašytos." +msgstr "" +"Į branduolio parinktį „crashkernel“ įtrauktos sritys. Jos bus perrašytos." #. Force value to false, so it's actually rewritten #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text @@ -420,8 +464,11 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:813 -msgid "Option can include only \"none\", \"ELF\", \"compressed\" or \"lzo\" value." -msgstr "Parinktis gali turėti tik reikšmę „none“, „ELF“, „compressed“ arba „lzo“ ." +#| msgid "Option can include only \"ELF\" or \"compressed\" value." +msgid "" +"Option can include only \"none\", \"ELF\", \"compressed\" or \"lzo\" value." +msgstr "" +"Parinktis gali turėti tik reikšmę „none“, „ELF“, „compressed“ arba „lzo“ ." #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message #: src/clients/kdump.rb:833 @@ -483,6 +530,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message #: src/clients/kdump.rb:1278 +#| msgid "Wrong options were used." msgid "No option has been defined." msgstr "Parinktys nenurodytos." @@ -550,6 +598,7 @@ msgstr "&Jokios atminties išklotinės" #: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:172 +#| msgid "E&LF Format" msgid "&ELF Format" msgstr "&ELF formatas" @@ -558,6 +607,7 @@ msgstr "S&uglaudintas formatas" #: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:174 +#| msgid "C&ompressed Format" msgid "&LZO Compressed Format" msgstr "&LZO suglaudintas formatas" @@ -641,7 +691,9 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CheckBox Label #: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:338 msgid "&Enable Immediate Reboot After Saving the Core" -msgstr "Įgalinti &nedelsiamą operacinės sistemos paleidimą iš naujo po atvaizdžio įrašymo" +msgstr "" +"Įgalinti &nedelsiamą operacinės sistemos paleidimą iš naujo po atvaizdžio " +"įrašymo" #. TRANSLATORS: CheckBox Label #: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:352 @@ -720,18 +772,22 @@ msgstr "Nuostatos ekspertams" #: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:529 +#| msgid "Kdump Memor&y [MB]" msgid "Kdump &Low Memory [MiB]" msgstr "Kdump atminties &nepakankamumas [MiB]" #: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:531 +#| msgid "Kdump Memor&y [MB]" msgid "Kdump Memor&y [MiB]" msgstr "K&dump atmintis [MiB]" #: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:537 +#| msgid "Total System Memory [MB]:" msgid "Total System Memory [MiB]:" msgstr "Visa sistemos atmintis [MiB]:" #: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:544 +#| msgid "Usable Memory [MB]:" msgid "Usable Memory [MiB]:" msgstr "Galima panaudoti atmintis [MiB]:" @@ -745,12 +801,15 @@ #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:36 msgid "" "<p><b>Enable/Disable Kdump</b><br>\n" -" Enable or disable kdump. The boot option crashkernel parameter is added/removed. \n" +" Enable or disable kdump. The boot option crashkernel parameter is " +"added/removed. \n" " To apply changes, a reboot is necessary.<br></p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Įgalinti arba uždrausti Kdump</b><br>\n" -" Įgalinti arba uždrausti kdump. Operacinės sistemos paleidimo parinktysePridedamas arba pašalinamas „crashkernel“ parametras. \n" -" Kad įsigaliotų pakeitimai, turite iš naujo paleisti operacinę sistemą.<br></p>\n" +" Įgalinti arba uždrausti kdump. Operacinės sistemos paleidimo " +"parinktysePridedamas arba pašalinamas „crashkernel“ parametras. \n" +" Kad įsigaliotų pakeitimai, turite iš naujo paleisti operacinę sistemą.<br>" +"</p>\n" #. Kdump Memor&y [MB] - IntField 1/1 #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:42 @@ -766,7 +825,12 @@ #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:46 msgid "" "<p><b>Firmware-Assisted Dump</b><br>\n" -" Dumps are not generated before the partition is reinitialized but take place when the partition is restarting. When performing a firmware-assisted dump, system memory is frozen and the partition rebooted, which allows a new instance of the operating system to dump data from the previous kernel crash. This feature is suitable only when the system has more than 1.5 GB of memory.</p>" +" Dumps are not generated before the partition is reinitialized but take " +"place when the partition is restarting. When performing a " +"firmware-assisted dump, system memory is frozen and the partition " +"rebooted, which allows a new instance of the operating system to dump " +"data from the previous kernel crash. This feature is suitable only when " +"the system has more than 1.5 GB of memory.</p>" msgstr "" #. Kdump Memor&y [MB] - IntField 1/1 @@ -788,8 +852,10 @@ "<p><b>Dump Format</b><br>\n" " <i>No Dump</i> - Only save the kernel log.<br>\n" " <i>ELF Format</i> - Create dump file in the ELF format.<br>\n" -" <i>Compressed Format</i> - Compress dump data by each page with gzip.<br>\n" -" <i>LZO Compressed Format</i> - Slightly bigger files but much faster.<br>\n" +" <i>Compressed Format</i> - Compress dump data by each page with gzip.<br>" +"\n" +" <i>LZO Compressed Format</i> - Slightly bigger files but much faster.<br>" +"\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -797,21 +863,26 @@ #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:72 msgid "" "<p><b>Saving Target for Kdump Image</b><br>\n" -" The target for saving kdump images. Select type of target for saving dumps.<br></p>" +" The target for saving kdump images. Select type of target for saving " +"dumps.<br></p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Kdump atvaizdžių įrašymas į paskirtį</b><br>\n" -" Kdump atvaizdžių įrašymo paskirtis. Pasirinkite paskirties tipą, kuriuo įrašomos atminties išklotinės.<br></p>" +" Kdump atvaizdžių įrašymo paskirtis. Pasirinkite paskirties tipą, kuriuo " +"įrašomos atminties išklotinės.<br></p>" #. Dump Format - RadioButtons 2/7 #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:76 msgid "" "<p><b>Local Filestem</b> - Save kdump image in the local filesystem.\n" " <i>Directory for Saving Dumps</i> - The path for saving kdump images.\n" -" Selecting directory for saving kdump images via dialog by pressing <i>Browse</i>\n" +" Selecting directory for saving kdump images via dialog by pressing <i>" +"Browse</i>\n" " <br></p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Vietinė rinkmenų sistema</b> - kdump atvaizdžius įrašyti vietinėje rinkmenų sistemoje.\n" -" <i>Atminties išklotinių atvaizdžių saugojimo katalogas</i> - kelias iki katalogo, kuriame turėtų būti laikomi kdump atvaizdžiai.\n" +"<p><b>Vietinė rinkmenų sistema</b> - kdump atvaizdžius įrašyti vietinėje " +"rinkmenų sistemoje.\n" +" <i>Atminties išklotinių atvaizdžių saugojimo katalogas</i> - kelias iki " +"katalogo, kuriame turėtų būti laikomi kdump atvaizdžiai.\n" " Katalogą pasirinksite spausdami <i>Naršyti</i>.\n" " <br></p>" @@ -823,17 +894,26 @@ " <i>Port</i> - The port number for connection.\n" " <i>Directory on Server</i> - The path for saving kdump images.\n" " <i>Enable Anonymous FTP</i> enables anonymous connection to server.\n" -" <i>User Name</i> for ftp connection. <i>Password</i> for ftp connection.<br></p>" +" <i>User Name</i> for ftp connection. <i>Password</i> for ftp connection.<" +"br></p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>FTP</b> - kdump atvaizdžius įrašyti per FTP.\n" " <i>Serverio vardas</i> - ftp serverio vardas.\n" " <i>Prievadas</i> - prisijungimo prievado numeris.\n" " <i>Katalogas serveryje</i> - kelias, kuriuo saugomi kdump atvaizdžiai.\n" -" <i>Įgalinti anoniminį FTP</i> - leidžia prie serverio jungtis anonimiškai.\n" +" <i>Įgalinti anoniminį FTP</i> - leidžia prie serverio jungtis " +"anonimiškai.\n" " <i>naudotojo vardas</i> ir <i>slaptažodis</i> ftp prisijungimui.<br></p>" #. Dump Format - RadioButtons 4/7 #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:92 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p><b>SSH</b> - Save kdump image via SSH.\n" +#| " <i>Server Name</i> - The name of server.\n" +#| " <i>Port</i> - The port number for connection.\n" +#| " <i>Directory on Server</i> - The path for saving kdump images.\n" +#| " <i>User Name</i> for SSH connection. \n" +#| " <i>Password</i> for SSH connection.<br></p>\n" msgid "" "<p><b>SSH</b> - Save kdump image via SSH and 'dd' on target machine.\n" " <i>Server Name</i> - The name of server.\n" @@ -842,7 +922,8 @@ " <i>User Name</i> for SSH connection. \n" " <i>Password</i> for SSH connection.<br></p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b>SSH</b> -</b> - kdump atvaizdžius įrašyti per SSH ir „dd“ paskirties kompiuteryje.\n" +"<p><b>SSH</b> -</b> - kdump atvaizdžius įrašyti per SSH ir „dd“ paskirties " +"kompiuteryje.\n" " <i>Serverio vardas</i> - serverio vardas.\n" " <i>Prievadas</i> - prisijungimo prievado numeris.\n" " <i>Katalogas serveryje</i> - kelias, kuriuo saugomi kdump atvaizdžiai.\n" @@ -850,6 +931,13 @@ #. Dump Format - RadioButtons 5/7 #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:101 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p><b>SSH</b> - Save kdump image via SSH.\n" +#| " <i>Server Name</i> - The name of server.\n" +#| " <i>Port</i> - The port number for connection.\n" +#| " <i>Directory on Server</i> - The path for saving kdump images.\n" +#| " <i>User Name</i> for SSH connection. \n" +#| " <i>Password</i> for SSH connection.<br></p>\n" msgid "" "<p><b>SFTP</b> - Save kdump image via SFTP.\n" " <i>Server Name</i> - The name of server.\n" @@ -880,7 +968,8 @@ msgstr "" "<p><b>NFS</b> - kdump atvaizdžius įrašyti NFS.\n" " <i>Serverio vardas</i> - nfs serverio vardas.\n" -" <i>Katalogas serveryje</i> - kelias, kuriuo saugomi kdump atvaizdžiai.<br></p>" +" <i>Katalogas serveryje</i> - kelias, kuriuo saugomi kdump atvaizdžiai.<br>" +"</p>" #. Dump Format - RadioButtons 7/7 #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:121 @@ -894,9 +983,11 @@ msgstr "" "<p><b>CIFS</b> - kdump atvaizdžius įrašyti per CIFS.\n" " <i>Serverio vardas</i> - serverio vardas.\n" -" <i>Eksportuojamas bendrasis išteklius</i> - „Windows“ bendrojo ištekliaus vardas.\n" +" <i>Eksportuojamas bendrasis išteklius</i> - „Windows“ bendrojo ištekliaus " +"vardas.\n" " <i>Katalogas serveryje</i> - kelias, kuriuo saugomi kdump atvaizdžiai.\n" -" <i>Nustatyti tapatumą</i> įgalina įvesti prisijungimo prie serverio duomenis:\n" +" <i>Nustatyti tapatumą</i> įgalina įvesti prisijungimo prie serverio " +"duomenis:\n" " <i>naudotojo vardą</i> ir <i>slaptažodį</i>.<br></p>" #. Custom Kdump Kernel - TextEntry 1/1 @@ -930,7 +1021,8 @@ "<p><b>Kdump komandinės eilutės papildymas</b>\n" " Nurodant šią parinktį, pridedamos papildomos reikšmės\n" " prie numatytosios komandinės eilutės. \n" -" Tekstas bus papildomas tik tuomet, jei nurodyta <i>Kdump komandinė eilutė.</i><br></p>\n" +" Tekstas bus papildomas tik tuomet, jei nurodyta <i>Kdump komandinė " +"eilutė.</i><br></p>\n" #. Enable Immediate Reboot After Saving the Core - CheckBox 1/1 #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:147 @@ -938,19 +1030,24 @@ "<p><b>Enable Immediate Reboot After Saving the Core</b> - \n" " Enable immediately reboot after saving the core in the kdump.<br></p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Įgalinti &nedelsiamą operacinės sistemos paleidimą iš naujo po atvaizdžio įrašymo</b> - \n" -" Nedelsiant iš naujo paleisti operacinę sistema po to, kai kdump įrašo atvaizdį.<br></p>" +"<p><b>Įgalinti &nedelsiamą operacinės sistemos paleidimą iš naujo po " +"atvaizdžio įrašymo</b> - \n" +" Nedelsiant iš naujo paleisti operacinę sistema po to, kai kdump įrašo " +"atvaizdį.<br></p>" #. Enable Delete Old Dump Images - CheckBox 1/1 #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:151 msgid "" "<p><b>Enable Delete Old Dump Images</b> - \n" " Enable Delete Old Dump Images. If the number of dump files in \n" -" <i>Number of Old Dumps</i> exceeds this number, older dumps are removed.<br></p>" +" <i>Number of Old Dumps</i> exceeds this number, older dumps are removed.<" +"br></p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Įgalinti senų atminties išklotinių atvaizdžių šalinimą</b> - \n" -" Įgalina šalinti senus atminties išklotinių atvaizdžius. Jei atminties išklotinių rinkmenų\n" -" skaičius pasiekia <i>senų atminties išklotinių skaičių</i>, senesnės atminties išklotinės pašalinamos.<br></p>" +" Įgalina šalinti senus atminties išklotinių atvaizdžius. Jei atminties " +"išklotinių rinkmenų\n" +" skaičius pasiekia <i>senų atminties išklotinių skaičių</i>, senesnės " +"atminties išklotinės pašalinamos.<br></p>" #. Enable Copy Ke&rnel into the Dump Directory - CheckBox 1/1 #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:157 @@ -969,30 +1066,42 @@ #. SMTP Server #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:165 -msgid "<p><b>SMTP Server</b> used for sending a notification email after a dump.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>SMTP serveris</b> naudojamas pranešimų siuntimui po atminties išklotinių sukūrimo.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>SMTP Server</b> used for sending a notification email after a dump.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>SMTP serveris</b> naudojamas pranešimų siuntimui po atminties " +"išklotinių sukūrimo.</p>" #. SMTP User Name #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:169 msgid "" "<p><b>User Name</b> for SMTP authetication when <i>SMTP Server</i> is\n" -" set. This is optional. If you do not specifiy a username and password, plain SMTP will be used.</p>\n" +" set. This is optional. If you do not specifiy a username and password, " +"plain SMTP will be used.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Galima nurodyti prisijungimo prie <i>SMTP serverio</i> <b>naudotojo vardą</b>. Tai nebūtina parinktis;\n" -" nenurodžius naudotojo vardo ar slaptažodžio, būtų naudojamas paprastas SMTP.</p>\n" +"<p>Galima nurodyti prisijungimo prie <i>SMTP serverio</i> <b>naudotojo vardą<" +"/b>. Tai nebūtina parinktis;\n" +" nenurodžius naudotojo vardo ar slaptažodžio, būtų naudojamas paprastas " +"SMTP.</p>\n" #. SMTP Password #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:173 msgid "" -"<p><b>Password</b> for SMTP authetication when <i>SMTP Server</i> is set. This\n" -" is optional. If you do not specify a username and password, plain SMTP will be used.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Password</b> for SMTP authetication when <i>SMTP Server</i> is set. " +"This\n" +" is optional. If you do not specify a username and password, plain SMTP will " +"be used.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Galima nurodyti prisijungimo prie <i>SMTP serverio</i> <b>slaptažodį</b>. Tai nebūtina parinktis;\n" -" nenurodžius naudotojo vardo ar slaptažodžio, būtų naudojamas paprastas SMTP.</p>\n" +"<p>Galima nurodyti prisijungimo prie <i>SMTP serverio</i> <b>slaptažodį</b>. " +"Tai nebūtina parinktis;\n" +" nenurodžius naudotojo vardo ar slaptažodžio, būtų naudojamas paprastas " +"SMTP.</p>\n" #. Notification To (email addresses) #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:177 -msgid "<p><b>Notification To</b> Specify the email address to which a notification email will be sent when a dump has been saved.</p>\n" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Notification To</b> Specify the email address to which a notification " +"email will be sent when a dump has been saved.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Kam pranešti</b> – tai el. pašto adresas adresato,\n" "kuriam siunčiamas laiškas įrašius atminties išklotines.</p>\n" @@ -1000,19 +1109,24 @@ #. Notification CC (email addresses) #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:181 msgid "" -"<p><b>Notification CC</b> Specify a list of space-separated email addresses to\n" -" which a notification email will be sent via cc if a dump has been saved.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Notification CC</b> Specify a list of space-separated email addresses " +"to\n" +" which a notification email will be sent via cc if a dump has been saved.</p>" +"\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Pranešimo kopija</b> – tai tarpais atskirti el. pašto adresai adresatų,\n" +"<p><b>Pranešimo kopija</b> – tai tarpais atskirti el. pašto adresai " +"adresatų,\n" "kuriems siunčiama laiško kopija įrašius atminties išklotines.</p>\n" #. Number of Old Dumps (number) #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:185 msgid "" -"<p><b>Number of Old Dumps</b> specifies how many old dumps are kept. If the number of dump files \n" +"<p><b>Number of Old Dumps</b> specifies how many old dumps are kept. If the " +"number of dump files \n" "exceeds this number, older dumps are removed.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Senų atminties išklotinių skaičius</b> nurodo senų atminties išklotinių kiekį, kurį išlaikyti. Jei atvaizdžių kiekis pasiekia šį skaičių, \n" +"<p><b>Senų atminties išklotinių skaičius</b> nurodo senų atminties išklotinių " +"kiekį, kurį išlaikyti. Jei atvaizdžių kiekis pasiekia šį skaičių, \n" "senesnės atminties išklotinės pašalinamos.</p>" #. Read dialog help 1/2 @@ -1031,7 +1145,8 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Paruošimo nutraukimas:</big></b><br>\n" -"Dabar galite saugiai nutraukti konfigūracijos įrankį spausdami <b>Nutraukti</b>.</p>\n" +"Dabar galite saugiai nutraukti konfigūracijos įrankį spausdami <b>Nutraukti<" +"/b>.</p>\n" #. Write dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:197 @@ -1325,6 +1440,7 @@ msgstr "uždraustas" #: src/modules/Kdump.rb:766 +#| msgid "Value of crashkernel option: %1" msgid "Value(s) of crashkernel option: %1" msgstr "crashkernel parametro reikšmė(s): %1" @@ -1343,7 +1459,9 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: warning message in installation proposal, #. do not translate %{requested} and %{available} - they are replaced with actual sizes later #: src/modules/Kdump.rb:879 -msgid "Warning! There might not be enough free space. %{required} required, but only %{available} are available." +msgid "" +"Warning! There might not be enough free space. %{required} required, but only " +"%{available} are available." msgstr "" #. Trying to use fadump on unsupported hardware Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/ldap-client.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/ldap-client.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/ldap-client.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -20,7 +20,8 @@ "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. popup text #: src/ui.rb:88 @@ -43,6 +44,9 @@ #. help text 1/3 #: src/ui.rb:168 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p>Here, configure the template used for\n" +#| "creating new objects (like users or groups).</p>\n" msgid "" "<p>Configure the template used for creating \n" "new objects (like users or groups).</p>\n" @@ -61,6 +65,10 @@ #. help text 3/3 #: src/ui.rb:176 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p>The second table contains a list of <b>default values</b>, used\n" +#| "for new objects. Modify the list by adding new values and editing or\n" +#| "removing current ones.</p>\n" msgid "" "<p>The second table contains a list of <b>default values</b> used\n" "for new objects. Modify the list by adding new values, editing or\n" @@ -129,6 +137,7 @@ #. helptext 1/4 #: src/ui.rb:438 +#| msgid "<p>Here, manage the configuration stored in LDAP directory.</p>" msgid "<p>Manage the configuration stored in the LDAP directory.</p>" msgstr "<p>Tvarkykite konfigūraciją, saugomą LDAP kataloge.</p>" @@ -141,19 +150,23 @@ "using <b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Kiekvienas konfigūracijos komplektas vadinamas „konfigūracijos moduliu“.\n" -"Jei pateiktoje vietoje (pagrindinė konfigūracija) nėra konfigūracijos modulio,\n" -"jį sukurkite spausdami <b>Naujas</b>. Pašalinkite dabartinį modulį, naudodamiesi\n" +"Jei pateiktoje vietoje (pagrindinė konfigūracija) nėra konfigūracijos " +"modulio,\n" +"jį sukurkite spausdami <b>Naujas</b>. Pašalinkite dabartinį modulį, " +"naudodamiesi\n" "mygtuku <b>Pašalinti</b>.</p>\n" #. helptext 3/4 #: src/ui.rb:449 msgid "" "<p>Edit the values of attributes in the table with <b>Edit</b>.\n" -"Some values have special meanings, for example, changing the <b>cn</b> value renames the\n" +"Some values have special meanings, for example, changing the <b>cn</b> value " +"renames the\n" "current module.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Atributų reikšmes lentelėje keiskite su <b>Keisti</b>.\n" -"Kai kurios reikšmės turi specialias reikšmes, pavyzdžiui pakeitę <b>cn</b> reikšmę, pervadinsite\n" +"Kai kurios reikšmės turi specialias reikšmes, pavyzdžiui pakeitę <b>cn</b> " +"reikšmę, pervadinsite\n" "dabartinį modulį.</p>\n" #. helptext 4/4 Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/mail.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/mail.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/mail.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -20,7 +20,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Command line help text for the mail module @@ -109,7 +110,8 @@ #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:79 msgid "" "<p>If choosing <b>No Connection</b>, the mail server will be started.\n" -"However, only local mail transport is possible. The MTA listens to the localhost.</p>\n" +"However, only local mail transport is possible. The MTA listens to the " +"localhost.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Translators: masquerading dialog help, part 1 of 1 @@ -119,7 +121,8 @@ "<p>Specify the rewriting of the sender's address here for each user.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"<p>Čia nurodykite siuntėjo adresus, kuriuos perrašysite, kiekvienam naudotojui.</p>\n" +"<p>Čia nurodykite siuntėjo adresus, kuriuos perrašysite, kiekvienam " +"naudotojui.</p>\n" #. Translators: authentication dialog help 1/4 #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:96 @@ -130,7 +133,8 @@ "simply leave these fields empty.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"<p>Siunčiant paštą, kai kuriems serveriams reikia autentiškumo patvirtinimo. Čia galite\n" +"<p>Siunčiant paštą, kai kuriems serveriams reikia autentiškumo patvirtinimo. " +"Čia galite\n" "įvesti tokio tipo informaciją. Jei nenorite naudoti autentiškumo patikros,\n" "nepildykite šių laukelių.</p>\n" @@ -139,20 +143,24 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>The outgoing mail server is generally intended for dial-up connections.\n" -"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as <b>smtp.provider.com</b>.</p>\n" +"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as <b>" +"smtp.provider.com</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"<p>Siuntimo pašto serveris pagrinde skirtas dial-up ryšiui. Įveskite interneto paslaugos\n" +"<p>Siuntimo pašto serveris pagrinde skirtas dial-up ryšiui. Įveskite " +"interneto paslaugos\n" "teikėjo SMTP serverį, pvz. <b>smtp.provider.com</b>.</p>\n" #. Translators: authentication dialog help 3/4 #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:109 msgid "" "\n" -"<p>In the <b>User Name</b> field, enter the user name assigned by from your provider.</p>\n" +"<p>In the <b>User Name</b> field, enter the user name assigned by from your " +"provider.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"<p><b>Naudotojo vardo</b> laukelyje įveskite naudotojo vardą, gautą iš paslaugų teikėjo.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Naudotojo vardo</b> laukelyje įveskite naudotojo vardą, gautą iš " +"paslaugų teikėjo.</p>\n" #. Translators: authentication dialog help 4/4 #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:113 @@ -193,11 +201,13 @@ "\n" "<p>This table redirects mail delivered locally.\n" "Redirect it to another local user (useful for system accounts,\n" -"especially for <b>root</b>), to a remote address, or to a list of addresses.</p>\n" +"especially for <b>root</b>), to a remote address, or to a list of addresses.<" +"/p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<p>Ši lentelė peradresuoja lokaliai gautą paštą.\n" -"Peradresuokite tai kitam vietiniam naudotojui (naudinga sisteminėms sąskaitoms,\n" +"Peradresuokite tai kitam vietiniam naudotojui (naudinga sisteminėms " +"sąskaitoms,\n" "ypač <b>root</b>), nutolusiam adresatui arba adresatų sąrašui.</p>\n" #. Translators: aliases dialog help, part 2 of 2 @@ -220,7 +230,8 @@ "part of the address.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"<p>Ši lentelė peradresuoja įeinantį paštą. Ne taip, kaip pseudonimų lentelė, \n" +"<p>Ši lentelė peradresuoja įeinantį paštą. Ne taip, kaip pseudonimų lentelė, " +"\n" "ji atsižvelgia ir į adreso\n" "sritį.</p>\n" @@ -238,6 +249,11 @@ #. Translators: continue/cancel dialog #. %1 is a sysconfig variable name #: src/include/mail/ui.rb:120 +#| msgid "" +#| "The setting %1 is turned off. You have\n" +#| "probably modified the configuration files directly.\n" +#| "If you continue, it will be turned on and\n" +#| "SuSEconfig will overwrite manual changes.\n" msgid "" "The setting %1 is turned off. You have\n" "probably modified the configuration files directly.\n" @@ -356,10 +372,12 @@ msgstr "Paleisti &fetchmail" #: src/include/mail/ui.rb:523 +#| msgid "Manual" msgid "manual" msgstr "rankinė" #: src/include/mail/ui.rb:523 +#| msgid "Daemon" msgid "daemon" msgstr "tarnyba" @@ -686,13 +704,18 @@ #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:162 +#| msgid "" +#| "\n" +#| "<p>Enabling virus scanning checks incoming and outgoing mail\n" +#| "with AMaViS.</p>\n" msgid "" "\n" "<p><b>Enabling virus scanning (AMaViS)</b> checks incoming and outgoing mail\n" "with AMaViS.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"<p><b>Įjungus virusų skenavimą (AMaViS)</b>, bus tikrinamas įeinantis ir išeinantis\n" +"<p><b>Įjungus virusų skenavimą (AMaViS)</b>, bus tikrinamas įeinantis ir " +"išeinantis\n" "paštas per AMaViS.</p>\n" #. help text @@ -722,6 +745,10 @@ #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:190 +#| msgid "" +#| "\n" +#| "<p>Enabling virus scanning checks incoming and outgoing mail\n" +#| "with AMaViS.</p>\n" msgid "" "\n" "<p><b>Enabling DKIM signig for outgoing mails.</b></p>\n" @@ -733,7 +760,8 @@ "\n" "<p>Enabling DKIM for outgoing emails requires additional actions. A SSL key\n" "will be generated for the 'mydomain' value defined in Postfix. A new service\n" -"'submission' will be configured in Postfix. After this is set up you can send\n" +"'submission' will be configured in Postfix. After this is set up you can " +"send\n" "email with this service 'submission' from 'mynetworks' with enabled SASL\n" "authentication. Only the emails sent by this new service will be signed with\n" "the domain key.</p>\n" @@ -747,15 +775,19 @@ "Service. The public key will be saved as a DNS TXT record\n" "in <b>/var/db/dkim/[mydomain].public.txt</b> and needs to be deployed to an\n" "according Domain Name Service. If there is a name service\n" -"running on this server, which is the authoritative server for that domain, the\n" +"running on this server, which is the authoritative server for that domain, " +"the\n" "public key will be added as a TXT record to that domain zone\n" "automatically.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:215 -msgid "If you enable DKIM support, the virus scanning (AMaViS) will be enabled too." -msgstr "Jei įgalinsite DKIM palaikymą, kartu bus įgalintas ir virusų skenavimas (AMaViS)" +msgid "" +"If you enable DKIM support, the virus scanning (AMaViS) will be enabled too." +msgstr "" +"Jei įgalinsite DKIM palaikymą, kartu bus įgalintas ir virusų skenavimas " +"(AMaViS)" #. Translators: text entry label #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:224 @@ -799,8 +831,12 @@ #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:306 -msgid "<p>The <b>delivery mode</b> is usually <b>Directly</b>, unless you do not forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Paprastai <b>pristatymo veiksena</b> yra <b>tiesioginė</b>, nebent jūs nenorite root pašto arba norite pasiekti paštą per IMAP.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>delivery mode</b> is usually <b>Directly</b>, unless you do not " +"forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Paprastai <b>pristatymo veiksena</b> yra <b>tiesioginė</b>, nebent jūs " +"nenorite root pašto arba norite pasiekti paštą per IMAP.</p>" #. LogView label. take a string from users? #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:345 @@ -857,6 +893,7 @@ #. combo box choice: #. deliver mail to imap -imapd using LMTP #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:869 +#| msgid "To Cyrus IMAP Server" msgid "To IMAP Server" msgstr "Į IMAP serverį" @@ -883,6 +920,7 @@ #. Translators: popup message part, ends with a newline #: src/modules/Mail.rb:256 +#| msgid "Cyrus-imapd, an IMAP server, will be installed.\n" msgid "Dovecot IMAP server, will be installed.\n" msgstr "Įdiegsimas Dovecot IMAP serveris.\n" @@ -949,6 +987,7 @@ #. Translators: error message #: src/modules/Mail.rb:963 +#| msgid "Error running SuSEconfig." msgid "Error running config.postfix" msgstr "Klaida vykdant config.postfix." @@ -993,6 +1032,7 @@ #. Translators: progress label #: src/modules/Mail.rb:1088 +#| msgid "Routing Configuration" msgid "Running Config Postfix" msgstr "Konfigūruojama su Postfix" @@ -1077,6 +1117,7 @@ #. summary header #: src/modules/Mail.rb:1358 +#| msgid "Use DIAG" msgid "Use DKIM" msgstr "Naudoti DKIM" Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/ncurses-pkg.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/ncurses-pkg.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/ncurses-pkg.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -21,7 +21,8 @@ "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" "X-Poedit-Bookmarks: -1,-1,-1,-1,-1,213,-1,-1,-1,-1\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. headline of package versions popup #: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:990 @@ -57,7 +58,8 @@ msgstr "paketai buvo pakeisti, norint sutvarkyti priklausomybes:" #: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1307 -msgid "You can choose to install anyway, but you risk getting a corrupted system." +msgid "" +"You can choose to install anyway, but you risk getting a corrupted system." msgstr "Galite vis tiek įdiegti, tačiau rizikuojate sugadinti sistemą." #: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1308 @@ -121,20 +123,30 @@ msgstr "Nereikalinga" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:203 -msgid "This is a list of useful packages. They will be additionally installed if recommeded by a newly installed package." +msgid "" +"This is a list of useful packages. They will be additionally installed if " +"recommeded by a newly installed package." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:207 -msgid "It's suggested to install these packages because they fit to already installed packages. The decision to install it is by the user." +msgid "" +"It's suggested to install these packages because they fit to already " +"installed packages. The decision to install it is by the user." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:211 -msgid "The solver has detected that these packages are without a repository, i.e. updates aren't possible." +msgid "" +"The solver has detected that these packages are without a repository, i.e. " +"updates aren't possible." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:215 -msgid "These packages might be unneeded because former dependencies don't apply any longer." -msgstr "Šie paketai gali būti nebereikalingi, nes ankstesnės priklausomybės jiems nebegalioja." +msgid "" +"These packages might be unneeded because former dependencies don't apply any " +"longer." +msgstr "" +"Šie paketai gali būti nebereikalingi, nes ankstesnės priklausomybės jiems " +"nebegalioja." #: src/NCPkgFilterInstSummary.cc:65 msgid "Delete" @@ -167,8 +179,11 @@ #. Translators: %s is a locale code, e.g. en_GB #: src/NCPkgFilterLocale.cc:178 #, c-format -msgid "Translations, dictionaries and other language-related files for <b>%s</b> locale" -msgstr "Vertimai, žodynai ir kalbos kitos rinkmenos, susijusios su <b>%s</b> lokale" +msgid "" +"Translations, dictionaries and other language-related files for <b>%s</b> " +"locale" +msgstr "" +"Vertimai, žodynai ir kalbos kitos rinkmenos, susijusios su <b>%s</b> lokale" #. the label of the selections #: src/NCPkgFilterMain.cc:68 src/NCPkgStrings.cc:326 @@ -374,10 +389,12 @@ msgstr "&Tikrinti sistemą dabar" #: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:98 +#| msgid "Recommended Packages" msgid "Install &Recommended Packages" msgstr "Įdiegti &patartinus paketus" #: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:102 +#| msgid "&Install Recommended Packages for Already Installed Packages" msgid "&Install Recommended Packages for Already Installed Packages Now" msgstr "&Diegti rekomenduojamus paketus jau įdiegtiems paketams dabar" @@ -399,6 +416,7 @@ #. part 1 of a text explaining the list of packages which follow #: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:194 +#| msgid "To fulfill the dependencies of already installed packages following" msgid "Being recommended by already installed packages, the following" msgstr "Pagal tai, ką pataria jau įdiegti paketai," @@ -661,33 +679,92 @@ #. part1 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:121 -msgid "<p><b>Welcome to the package selector</b></p><p>This tool will help you to manage the software on your system. You can install, update or remove single packages, as well as patterns (sets of packages serving certain purpose) or languages. Usually, you do not need to care about package dependencies when installing or removing anything, the solver will do it for you. The package selector consists of three main parts: <b>filters</b>, <b>package table</b> and <b>menu</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Jus sveikina paketų rinkimosi programa</b></p><p>Šis įrankis padės tvarkyti jūsų sistemoje įdiegtą programinę įrangą. Galite įdiegti, atnaujinti ar pašalinti tiek atskirą paketą, tiek šablonus (tam pačiam tikslui skirtų paketų rinkinius) ar kalbas. Paprastai nereikia rūpintis paketų priklausomybėmis, po ko nors įdiegimo ar pašalinimo - priklausomybių sprendiklis tai padarys už jus. Paketų rinkimasis sudarytas iš trijų pagrindinių dalių: <b>filtrų</b>, <b>paketų lentelių</b> ir <b>meniu</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Welcome to the package selector</b></p><p>This tool will help you to " +"manage the software on your system. You can install, update or remove single " +"packages, as well as patterns (sets of packages serving certain purpose) or " +"languages. Usually, you do not need to care about package dependencies when " +"installing or removing anything, the solver will do it for you. The package " +"selector consists of three main parts: <b>filters</b>, <b>package table</b> " +"and <b>menu</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Jus sveikina paketų rinkimosi programa</b></p><p>Šis įrankis padės " +"tvarkyti jūsų sistemoje įdiegtą programinę įrangą. Galite įdiegti, atnaujinti " +"ar pašalinti tiek atskirą paketą, tiek šablonus (tam pačiam tikslui skirtų " +"paketų rinkinius) ar kalbas. Paprastai nereikia rūpintis paketų " +"priklausomybėmis, po ko nors įdiegimo ar pašalinimo - priklausomybių " +"sprendiklis tai padarys už jus. Paketų rinkimasis sudarytas iš trijų " +"pagrindinių dalių: <b>filtrų</b>, <b>paketų lentelių</b> ir <b>meniu</b>.</p>" #. part of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:129 -msgid "<p><b>Filter</b> on left panel is designed for easy orientation in a large amount of packages. Use filters to display only packages from a certain repository or in a selected pattern (for example, Games or C/C++ Development) or to search for particular keywords. More information on filters can be found in <i>How to use filters</i>.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Filtras</b> (kairysis pultas) sukurtas tam, kad būtų galima lengviau orientuotis tarp daugybės paketų. Jie įgalina parodyti, pvz., tik paketus iš konkrečios saugyklos ar pasirinkto šablono (žaidimų, C/C++ programavimo), taip pat ieškoti pagal tam tikrą raktažodį. Daugiau apie filtrus sužinosite skaitydami <i>Paaiškinimą, kaip naudoti filtrus</i>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Filter</b> on left panel is designed for easy orientation in a large " +"amount of packages. Use filters to display only packages from a certain " +"repository or in a selected pattern (for example, Games or C/C++ Development) " +"or to search for particular keywords. More information on filters can be " +"found in <i>How to use filters</i>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Filtras</b> (kairysis pultas) sukurtas tam, kad būtų galima lengviau " +"orientuotis tarp daugybės paketų. Jie įgalina parodyti, pvz., tik paketus iš " +"konkrečios saugyklos ar pasirinkto šablono (žaidimų, C/C++ programavimo), " +"taip pat ieškoti pagal tam tikrą raktažodį. Daugiau apie filtrus sužinosite " +"skaitydami <i>Paaiškinimą, kaip naudoti filtrus</i>.</p>" #. additional help text for post installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:136 -msgid "<p><b>Package table</b> is the main component of the package selector. You will see a list of packages matching the current filter (for example, the selected RPM group or search result). Each line of the package table has several columns:</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Paketų lentelė</b> yra paketų rinkimosi pagrindinė dalis. Čia matysite paketų sąrašą, priklausomai nuo pasirinkto filtro (pavyzdžiui, pasirinktos RPM grupės ar paieškos rezultatą). Paketų lentelėje kiekviena linija turi kelis stulpelius:</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Package table</b> is the main component of the package selector. You " +"will see a list of packages matching the current filter (for example, the " +"selected RPM group or search result). Each line of the package table has " +"several columns:</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Paketų lentelė</b> yra paketų rinkimosi pagrindinė dalis. Čia matysite " +"paketų sąrašą, priklausomai nuo pasirinkto filtro (pavyzdžiui, pasirinktos " +"RPM grupės ar paieškos rezultatą). Paketų lentelėje kiekviena linija turi " +"kelis stulpelius:</p>" #. part2 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:143 -msgid "<ol><li>Package status (for more information see <i>Package Status and Symbols</i>)</li> <li>Package name</li><li>Package summary</li><li>Available version (in some of the configured repositories)</li> <li>Installed version(empty for not yet installed packages)</li> <li>Package size</li></ol>" -msgstr "<ol><li>Paketo būsena (daugiau sužinosite skaitydami <i>Paketų būsenos ir simboliai</i>)</li><li>Paketo pavadinimas</li><li>Paketo santrauka</li><li>Galima versija ( kokiose nors sukonfigūruotose saugyklose )</li><li>Įdiegta versija (tuščia, jei paketas dar neįdiegtas)</li><li>Paketo dydis</li></ol>" +msgid "" +"<ol><li>Package status (for more information see <i>Package Status and " +"Symbols</i>)</li> <li>Package name</li><li>Package summary</li><li>Available " +"version (in some of the configured repositories)</li> <li>Installed " +"version(empty for not yet installed packages)</li> <li>Package size</li></ol>" +msgstr "" +"<ol><li>Paketo būsena (daugiau sužinosite skaitydami <i>Paketų būsenos ir " +"simboliai</i>)</li><li>Paketo pavadinimas</li><li>Paketo santrauka</li><li>" +"Galima versija ( kokiose nors sukonfigūruotose saugyklose )</li><li>Įdiegta " +"versija (tuščia, jei paketas dar neįdiegtas)</li><li>Paketo dydis</li></ol>" #. part3 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:151 -msgid "<p>The <b>Actions</b> menu below the table allows you to change the status of a selected package (or all packages in the list), for example, to delete a package or select an additional package for installation. The status change can also be done directly by pressing the key specified in the menu item (for detailed information about the package status, see <i>Package Status and Symbols</i>).</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Veiksmai:</b> meniu po lentele leidžia pakeisti pažymėto paketo būseną (arba visų sąrašo paketų), pvz. pašalinti paketą, arba pasirinkti įdiegti papildomą paketą. Būseną galima pakeisti tiesiog paspaudus meniu elemente nurodytą klavišą (išsamiau apie paketo būseną žiūrėkite „Paketų būsenos ir simboliai“).</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Actions</b> menu below the table allows you to change the status of " +"a selected package (or all packages in the list), for example, to delete a " +"package or select an additional package for installation. The status change " +"can also be done directly by pressing the key specified in the menu item (for " +"detailed information about the package status, see <i>Package Status and " +"Symbols</i>).</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Veiksmai:</b> meniu po lentele leidžia pakeisti pažymėto paketo būseną " +"(arba visų sąrašo paketų), pvz. pašalinti paketą, arba pasirinkti įdiegti " +"papildomą paketą. Būseną galima pakeisti tiesiog paspaudus meniu elemente " +"nurodytą klavišą (išsamiau apie paketo būseną žiūrėkite „Paketų būsenos ir " +"simboliai“).</p>" #. part4 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:158 -msgid "<p><b>Menu</b> provides functions related to the handling of package dependencies. Display relevant information on packages or perform actions like opening the repository editor. For more information, see <i>Useful Functions in Menu</i>.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Meniu</b> pateikia funkcijas, susijusias su paketų priklausomybių tvarkymu, parodančias informaciją apie paketus, bei keletą kitų naudingų veiksmų, pav., saugyklų tvarkytuvės atvėrimą. Daugiau sužinosite skaitydami <i>Naudingos meniu funkcijos</i>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Menu</b> provides functions related to the handling of package " +"dependencies. Display relevant information on packages or perform actions " +"like opening the repository editor. For more information, see <i>Useful " +"Functions in Menu</i>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Meniu</b> pateikia funkcijas, susijusias su paketų priklausomybių " +"tvarkymu, parodančias informaciją apie paketus, bei keletą kitų naudingų " +"veiksmų, pav., saugyklų tvarkytuvės atvėrimą. Daugiau sužinosite skaitydami <" +"i>Naudingos meniu funkcijos</i>.</p>" #. the headline of the help window #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:165 @@ -696,13 +773,29 @@ #. part 1 of help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:172 -msgid "<p>The package status can be changed using the <i>Actions</i> menu or the keys specified in the menu items. For example, use '+' to install an additional package.</p><p>The \"Taboo\" status means the package should never be installed. On the contrary, the \"Locked\" status means that the installed version of a package should always be kept.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Paketo būsena gali būti pakeista naudojant meniu <i>Veiksmai</i> arba klavišais, nurodytais meniu elementuose. Pavyzdžiui, „+“ naudokite papildomo paketo diegimui. Būsena „uždrausta“ reiškia, jog paketo nereikėtų įdiegti arba įdiegtos versijos nereikėtų keisti. Panaši būsena „užrakinta“ reiškia, kad įdiegta šio paketo versija turi būti išlaikyta.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The package status can be changed using the <i>Actions</i> menu or the " +"keys specified in the menu items. For example, use '+' to install an " +"additional package.</p><p>The \"Taboo\" status means the package should never " +"be installed. On the contrary, the \"Locked\" status means that the installed " +"version of a package should always be kept.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Paketo būsena gali būti pakeista naudojant meniu <i>Veiksmai</i> arba " +"klavišais, nurodytais meniu elementuose. Pavyzdžiui, „+“ naudokite papildomo " +"paketo diegimui. Būsena „uždrausta“ reiškia, jog paketo nereikėtų įdiegti " +"arba įdiegtos versijos nereikėtų keisti. Panaši būsena „užrakinta“ reiškia, " +"kad įdiegta šio paketo versija turi būti išlaikyta.</p>" #. part 2 of help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:179 -msgid "<p>You can also use <b>RET</b> or <b>SPACE</b> to toggle the package status. The <i>Actions</i> menu also allows you to change the status for all packages in the list (select 'All Listed Packages').</p>" -msgstr "<p>Paketo būseną taip galite pakeisti <b>ĮVESTIES</b> ar <b>TARPO</b> klavišais. <i>Veiksmų</i> meniu taip pat pateikia galimybę pakeisti visų sąrašo paketų būseną (rinkitės „Visi išvardyti paketai“).</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>You can also use <b>RET</b> or <b>SPACE</b> to toggle the package status. " +"The <i>Actions</i> menu also allows you to change the status for all packages " +"in the list (select 'All Listed Packages').</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Paketo būseną taip galite pakeisti <b>ĮVESTIES</b> ar <b>TARPO</b> " +"klavišais. <i>Veiksmų</i> meniu taip pat pateikia galimybę pakeisti visų " +"sąrašo paketų būseną (rinkitės „Visi išvardyti paketai“).</p>" #. part 3 of help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:185 @@ -711,13 +804,29 @@ #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:192 -msgid "<p><b> + </b>: package will be installed</p><p><b>a+ </b>: package will be installed automatically</p><p><b> > </b>: package will be updated</p><p><b>a> </b>: package will be automatically updated</p><p><b> i </b>: package is installed</p><p><b> - </b>: package will be deleted</p><p><b>---</b>: never install this package (taboo)</p>" -msgstr "<p><b> + </b>: paketas bus įdiegtas</p><p><b>a+ </b>: paketas bus automatiškai įdiegtas</p><p><b> > </b>: paketas bus atnaujintas</p><p><b>a> </b>: paketas bus automatiškai atnaujintas</p><p><b> i </b>: paketas jau įdiegtas</p><p><b> - </b>: paketas bus pašalintas</p><p><b>---</b> : niekuomet nediegti šio paketo (uždraustas)</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b> + </b>: package will be installed</p><p><b>a+ </b>: package will be " +"installed automatically</p><p><b> > </b>: package will be updated</p><p><b>a> " +"</b>: package will be automatically updated</p><p><b> i </b>: package is " +"installed</p><p><b> - </b>: package will be deleted</p><p><b>---</b>: never " +"install this package (taboo)</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b> + </b>: paketas bus įdiegtas</p><p><b>a+ </b>: paketas bus " +"automatiškai įdiegtas</p><p><b> > </b>: paketas bus atnaujintas</p><p><b>a> <" +"/b>: paketas bus automatiškai atnaujintas</p><p><b> i </b>: paketas jau " +"įdiegtas</p><p><b> - </b>: paketas bus pašalintas</p><p><b>---</b> : " +"niekuomet nediegti šio paketo (uždraustas)</p>" #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:199 -msgid "<p><b>-i-</b>: keep the installed version and never update or delete it ( package locked )</p><p>Status information for pattern and languages:</p><p><b> i </b>: All requirements of this pattern/language are satisfied</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>-i-</b>: išlaikyti įdiegtą versiją ir neleisti jos nei atnaujinti, nei pašalinti ( paketas užrakintas )</p><p>Šablonų ir kalbų būsenos informacija</p><p><b> i </b>: Visos šio šablono/kalbos priklausomybės patenkintos</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>-i-</b>: keep the installed version and never update or delete it ( " +"package locked )</p><p>Status information for pattern and languages:</p><p><b>" +" i </b>: All requirements of this pattern/language are satisfied</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>-i-</b>: išlaikyti įdiegtą versiją ir neleisti jos nei atnaujinti, nei " +"pašalinti ( paketas užrakintas )</p><p>Šablonų ir kalbų būsenos informacija<" +"/p><p><b> i </b>: Visos šio šablono/kalbos priklausomybės patenkintos</p>" #. label for an error popup #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:206 @@ -726,23 +835,67 @@ #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:213 -msgid "<p><b>Filter</b> allow you to filter all available packages according to the selected criteria. Package filters are based on package properties (repository, RPM group), package \"containers\" (patterns, languages), package classification or search results. Select the desired filter from the drop-down menu. Specific filters are described below.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Be visų galimų paketų, <b>Filtras</b> leidžia atrinkti tik tai, kas jus domina. Paketų filtrai paremti paketų savybėmis (saugykla, RPM grupė), paketų „talpyklomis“ (šablonais, kalbomis), paketų klasifikacija ar paieškos rezultatais. Pasirinkite norimą filtrą iš išskleidžiamo meniu. Konkretūs filtrai apibūdinti žemiau.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Filter</b> allow you to filter all available packages according to the " +"selected criteria. Package filters are based on package properties " +"(repository, RPM group), package \"containers\" (patterns, languages), " +"package classification or search results. Select the desired filter from the " +"drop-down menu. Specific filters are described below.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Be visų galimų paketų, <b>Filtras</b> leidžia atrinkti tik tai, kas jus " +"domina. Paketų filtrai paremti paketų savybėmis (saugykla, RPM grupė), paketų " +"„talpyklomis“ (šablonais, kalbomis), paketų klasifikacija ar paieškos " +"rezultatais. Pasirinkite norimą filtrą iš išskleidžiamo meniu. Konkretūs " +"filtrai apibūdinti žemiau.</p>" #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:220 -msgid "<p><b>Patterns</b> describe the features and functions a system should have (for example, X server or Console tools). Each pattern contains a set of packages it requires (must have), recommends (should have) and suggests (may have). If you select a pattern for installation, update, or deletion, the solver will run and change the status of subordinate packages accordingly.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Šablonai</b> apibūdina sistemos turimas savybes ir funkcijas (pvz., X serveris ar konsolės įrankiai). Kiekvienas šablonas sudarytas iš paketų rinkinio, kurie jam yra reikalingi (privalo turėti), patartini (turėtų turėti) ir siūlomi (gali turėti). Jei pažymite šabloną diegimui (atnaujinimui, pašalinimui), bus tikrinamos paketų priklausomybės ir pakeistos atitinkamų paketų būsenos.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Patterns</b> describe the features and functions a system should have " +"(for example, X server or Console tools). Each pattern contains a set of " +"packages it requires (must have), recommends (should have) and suggests (may " +"have). If you select a pattern for installation, update, or deletion, the " +"solver will run and change the status of subordinate packages accordingly.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Šablonai</b> apibūdina sistemos turimas savybes ir funkcijas (pvz., X " +"serveris ar konsolės įrankiai). Kiekvienas šablonas sudarytas iš paketų " +"rinkinio, kurie jam yra reikalingi (privalo turėti), patartini (turėtų " +"turėti) ir siūlomi (gali turėti). Jei pažymite šabloną diegimui " +"(atnaujinimui, pašalinimui), bus tikrinamos paketų priklausomybės ir " +"pakeistos atitinkamų paketų būsenos.</p>" #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:227 -msgid "<p><b>Languages</b> are package containers very much like patterns. They contain packages with translations, dictionaries and other language-specific files for a selected language. <b>RPM Groups</b> are not package containers that can be installed. Instead, membership in a certain RPM group is a property of the package itself. They have a hierarchical (tree) structure. The <b>Repositories</b> filter displays packages available from a specific repository. </p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Kalbos</b> – paketų talpykla, labai panaši į šablonus. Čia sudėti paketai su vertimais, žodynais ir kitomis savitomis kalbų rinkmenomis, skirtomis pasirinktai kalbai. Tuo tarpu <b>RPM grupės</b> nėra paketų talpyklos, kurios gali būti įdiegtos. Vis tik kiekvienas paketas priklauso tam tikrai RPM grupei. Ji turi hierarchinę (medžio) struktūrą. <b>Saugyklos</b> filtras įgalina parodyti tik konkrečios saugyklos paketus. </p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Languages</b> are package containers very much like patterns. They " +"contain packages with translations, dictionaries and other language-specific " +"files for a selected language. <b>RPM Groups</b> are not package containers " +"that can be installed. Instead, membership in a certain RPM group is a " +"property of the package itself. They have a hierarchical (tree) structure. " +"The <b>Repositories</b> filter displays packages available from a specific " +"repository. </p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Kalbos</b> – paketų talpykla, labai panaši į šablonus. Čia sudėti " +"paketai su vertimais, žodynais ir kitomis savitomis kalbų rinkmenomis, " +"skirtomis pasirinktai kalbai. Tuo tarpu <b>RPM grupės</b> nėra paketų " +"talpyklos, kurios gali būti įdiegtos. Vis tik kiekvienas paketas priklauso " +"tam tikrai RPM grupei. Ji turi hierarchinę (medžio) struktūrą. <b>Saugyklos<" +"/b> filtras įgalina parodyti tik konkrečios saugyklos paketus. </p>" #. help text package search #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:234 -msgid "<p>To use the <b>Search</b> filter, enter a keyword (or part of keyword) for the package search. For example, search for all 3D packages using the expression \"3d\". You can also search in package descriptions, RPM provides or requires. Select the appropriate check box and click the 'Search' button.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norėdami naudotis <b>Paieškos</b> filtru, įveskite raktažodį (arba raktažodžio dalį). Pavyzdžiui, norėdami rasti visus 3D paketus, rašome „3d“. Taip pat raktažodžių galima ieškoti paketų aprašuose, pagal RPM tiekėją ar priklausomybes. Tiesiog pažymėkite atitinkamą langelį. Ieškoti pradėsite nuspaudę mygtuką „Ieškoti“.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>To use the <b>Search</b> filter, enter a keyword (or part of keyword) for " +"the package search. For example, search for all 3D packages using the " +"expression \"3d\". You can also search in package descriptions, RPM provides " +"or requires. Select the appropriate check box and click the 'Search' button.<" +"/p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norėdami naudotis <b>Paieškos</b> filtru, įveskite raktažodį (arba " +"raktažodžio dalį). Pavyzdžiui, norėdami rasti visus 3D paketus, rašome „3d“. " +"Taip pat raktažodžių galima ieškoti paketų aprašuose, pagal RPM tiekėją ar " +"priklausomybes. Tiesiog pažymėkite atitinkamą langelį. Ieškoti pradėsite " +"nuspaudę mygtuką „Ieškoti“.</p>" #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:241 @@ -751,11 +904,17 @@ #| "The <b>Installation summary</b> presents an overview of packages whose\n" #| "status has changed during this session (e.g. marked for installation or\n" #| "removal), either by the user or automatically by the solver.</p>" -msgid "<p>The <b>Installation summary</b> presents an overview of packages whose status has changed during this session (e.g. marked for installation or removal), either by the user or automatically by the solver. The filter <b>Package Classification</b> provides information about <i>Recommended</i>, <i>Suggested</i>, <i>Orphaned</i> and <i>Unneeded</i> packages.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Installation summary</b> presents an overview of packages whose " +"status has changed during this session (e.g. marked for installation or " +"removal), either by the user or automatically by the solver. The filter <b>" +"Package Classification</b> provides information about <i>Recommended</i>, <i>" +"Suggested</i>, <i>Orphaned</i> and <i>Unneeded</i> packages.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Diegimo santrauka</b> pateikia apžvalgą paketų, kurių būsena \n" "buvo pakeista šios sesijos metu (pavyzdžiui, jie buvo pažymėti įdiegimui ar \n" -"pašalinimui) tiek pačio naudotojo, tiek automatiškai sprendžiant priklausomybes.</p>" +"pašalinimui) tiek pačio naudotojo, tiek automatiškai sprendžiant " +"priklausomybes.</p>" #. label for an error popup #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:248 @@ -763,10 +922,23 @@ msgstr "Naudingos meniu funkcijos" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:254 -msgid "<p><b>Dependencies:</b><br> This menu offers various actions related to the handling of package dependencies. By default, package dependencies are checked with every status change. You will be informed about package conflicts in a dialog proposing possible conflict resolutions. To resolve the conflict, select one of the offered solutions and press 'OK -- Try Again'.</p>" +#| msgid "" +#| "<p><b>Dependencies:</b> This menu offers various actions related to the\n" +#| "handling of package dependencies. By default, package dependencies are checked with every status change (<i>Automatic Dependency Check</i> is on). You will be informed about package conflicts in a dialog proposing possible conflict resolutions. To resolve the conflict, select one of the offered solutions and press 'OK -- Try Again'.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Dependencies:</b><br> This menu offers various actions related to the " +"handling of package dependencies. By default, package dependencies are " +"checked with every status change. You will be informed about package " +"conflicts in a dialog proposing possible conflict resolutions. To resolve the " +"conflict, select one of the offered solutions and press 'OK -- Try Again'.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Priklausomybės:</b><br> Šis meniu pateikia įvairius veiksmus, susijusius \n" -"su priklausomybių tvarkymu. Paprastai paketų priklausomybės tikrinamos kiekvieną kartą pasikeitus būsenai. Jus informuos apie paketų konfliktus ir tame pat lange pateiks galimus jų sprendimus. Norėdami išspręsti konfliktą, pasirinkite vieną iš siūlomų sprendimų ir spauskite „Gerai -- Bandyti vėl“.</p>" +"<p><b>Priklausomybės:</b><br> Šis meniu pateikia įvairius veiksmus, " +"susijusius \n" +"su priklausomybių tvarkymu. Paprastai paketų priklausomybės tikrinamos " +"kiekvieną kartą pasikeitus būsenai. Jus informuos apie paketų konfliktus ir " +"tame pat lange pateiks galimus jų sprendimus. Norėdami išspręsti konfliktą, " +"pasirinkite vieną iš siūlomų sprendimų ir spauskite „Gerai -- Bandyti vėl“.<" +"/p>" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:260 #, fuzzy @@ -779,38 +951,111 @@ #| "<i>Generate Dependency Solver Testcase</i>. It will dump package dependencies\n" #| "data into the directory <tt>/var/log/YaST2/solverTestcase</tt>. This is\n" #| "usually what you need when asked for a \"solver testcase\" in Bugzilla.</p>" -msgid "<p>To disable dependency checking on every status change, toggle <i>Automatic Dependency Check</i> OFF. You can check dependencies manually by selecting <i>Check Dependencies Now</i>. The <i>Verify system</i> entry will check the dependencies of already installed packages and resolve conflicts non-interactively, marking missing packages for automatic installation if necessary. For debugging purposes, use <i>Generate Dependency Solver Testcase</i>. It will dump package dependencies data into the directory <tt>/var/log/YaST2/solverTestcase</tt>. This is usually what you need when asked for a \"solver testcase\" in Bugzilla.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>To disable dependency checking on every status change, toggle <i>Automatic " +"Dependency Check</i> OFF. You can check dependencies manually by selecting <i>" +"Check Dependencies Now</i>. The <i>Verify system</i> entry will check the " +"dependencies of already installed packages and resolve conflicts " +"non-interactively, marking missing packages for automatic installation if " +"necessary. For debugging purposes, use <i>Generate Dependency Solver " +"Testcase</i>. It will dump package dependencies data into the directory <tt>" +"/var/log/YaST2/solverTestcase</tt>. This is usually what you need when asked " +"for a \"solver testcase\" in Bugzilla.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Norėdami uždrausti priklausomybių tikrinimą po kiekvieno būsenos pakeitimo, išjunkite \n" -"<i>Automatinį priklausomybių tikrinimą</i>. Tokiu atveju priklausomybes galėsite tikrinti \n" -"rankiniu būdu pasirinkdami <i>Tikrinti priklausomybes dabar</i>. Parinktis <i>Patikrinti sistemą</i> \n" -"patikrins paketų priklausomybes ir išspręs konfliktus be naudotojo įsikišimo, pažymint \n" +"<p>Norėdami uždrausti priklausomybių tikrinimą po kiekvieno būsenos " +"pakeitimo, išjunkite \n" +"<i>Automatinį priklausomybių tikrinimą</i>. Tokiu atveju priklausomybes " +"galėsite tikrinti \n" +"rankiniu būdu pasirinkdami <i>Tikrinti priklausomybes dabar</i>. Parinktis <i>" +"Patikrinti sistemą</i> \n" +"patikrins paketų priklausomybes ir išspręs konfliktus be naudotojo įsikišimo, " +"pažymint \n" "trūkstamus paketus automatiniam įdiegimui (jei to reikia). Derinimui galite \n" -"<i>Kurti detalų priklausomybių sprendimo aprašą</i>. Ši parinktis paketų priklausomybių duomenis \n" -"pateiks <tt>/var/log/YaST2/solverTestcase</tt> kataloge. Tai naudinga, kuomet jūsų paprašo \n" +"<i>Kurti detalų priklausomybių sprendimo aprašą</i>. Ši parinktis paketų " +"priklausomybių duomenis \n" +"pateiks <tt>/var/log/YaST2/solverTestcase</tt> kataloge. Tai naudinga, kuomet " +"jūsų paprašo \n" "„solver testcase“ per Bugzilla (ydų pranešimų sistemą).</p>" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:267 #, fuzzy #| msgid "<p>Available options for dependency checking are: <i>System Verification Mode</i> (monitor and repair dependencies of already installed packages and solve immediately), <i>Cleanup when deleting packages</i> (remove dependent unused packages) and <i>Allow vendor change</i> (package vendor may differ from vendor of installed package). Please note: after checking the system with <i>Verify System Now</i> the option <i>System Verification Mode</i> is on (if desired uncheck the option).</p>" -msgid "<p>Available options for dependency checking are:<br><i>Automatic Dependency Check</i> (see above), <i>Install Recommended Packages</i>: if ON, weak dependencies will be honored, <i>System Verification Mode</i>: repair dependencies of installed packages and solve immediately. Please note: after checking the system with <i>Verify System Now</i> the option <i>System Verification Mode</i> is ON (uncheck the option, if desired). These options are saved in the YaST configuration file <tt>/etc/sysconfig/yast2</tt>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Galimos priklausomybių tikrinimo parinktys: <i>Sistemos patikros veiksena</i> (stebi ir taiso jau įdiegtų paketų priklausomybes ir jas iš karto sprendžia), <i>Išvalyti pašalinus paketus</i> (pašalina priklausomybės ryšiais nesusaistomus paketus) ir <i>Leisti keisti gamintoją</i> (naujo paketo gamintojas gali būti kitas nei įdiegtojo paketo gamintojas). Atminkite: įvykdžius <i>Tikrinti sistemą dabar</i>, įgalinama parinktis <i>Sistemos patikros veiksena</i> (jei buvo nepažymėta).</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Available options for dependency checking are:<br><i>Automatic Dependency " +"Check</i> (see above), <i>Install Recommended Packages</i>: if ON, weak " +"dependencies will be honored, <i>System Verification Mode</i>: repair " +"dependencies of installed packages and solve immediately. Please note: after " +"checking the system with <i>Verify System Now</i> the option <i>System " +"Verification Mode</i> is ON (uncheck the option, if desired). These options " +"are saved in the YaST configuration file <tt>/etc/sysconfig/yast2</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Galimos priklausomybių tikrinimo parinktys: <i>Sistemos patikros veiksena<" +"/i> (stebi ir taiso jau įdiegtų paketų priklausomybes ir jas iš karto " +"sprendžia), <i>Išvalyti pašalinus paketus</i> (pašalina priklausomybės " +"ryšiais nesusaistomus paketus) ir <i>Leisti keisti gamintoją</i> (naujo " +"paketo gamintojas gali būti kitas nei įdiegtojo paketo gamintojas). " +"Atminkite: įvykdžius <i>Tikrinti sistemą dabar</i>, įgalinama parinktis <i>" +"Sistemos patikros veiksena</i> (jei buvo nepažymėta).</p>" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:279 -msgid "<p>Advanced options:<br> <i>Cleanup when deleting packages</i>: remove dependent unused packages. <i>Allow vendor change</i>: package vendor may differ from vendor of installed package. These options will not be saved, they can only be set in the configuration file of the package library <tt>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</tt>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Advanced options:<br> <i>Cleanup when deleting packages</i>: remove " +"dependent unused packages. <i>Allow vendor change</i>: package vendor may " +"differ from vendor of installed package. These options will not be saved, " +"they can only be set in the configuration file of the package library <tt>" +"/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:285 -msgid "<p><b>View:</b><br>Choose which information about the selected package will be displayed in the window below the package table. Available options are: package description, technical data (version, size, license etc.) package versions (all available), file list (all files included in the package) and dependencies (provides, requires etc.).</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Rodyti:</b><br> čia galima pasirinkti, kokia pasirinkto paketo informacija bus rodoma lange po paketų lentele. Galimos parinktys: paketo aprašas, techniniai duomenys (versija, dydis, licencija ir t.t.), paketo versijos (visos galimos), rinkmenų sąrašas (visos rinkmenos, patalpintos pakete) ir priklausomybės (pateikia, reikalauja ir t.t.).</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>View:</b><br>Choose which information about the selected package will " +"be displayed in the window below the package table. Available options are: " +"package description, technical data (version, size, license etc.) package " +"versions (all available), file list (all files included in the package) and " +"dependencies (provides, requires etc.).</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Rodyti:</b><br> čia galima pasirinkti, kokia pasirinkto paketo " +"informacija bus rodoma lange po paketų lentele. Galimos parinktys: paketo " +"aprašas, techniniai duomenys (versija, dydis, licencija ir t.t.), paketo " +"versijos (visos galimos), rinkmenų sąrašas (visos rinkmenos, patalpintos " +"pakete) ir priklausomybės (pateikia, reikalauja ir t.t.).</p>" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:291 -msgid "<p><b>Configuration:</b><br>This menu integrates package selector with the rest of package management utils. From here, you can <b>Launch Repository Manager</b> and edit configured repositories or register to update repository and configure periodic download of available updates (<b>Launch Online Update Configuration</b>). Also, you can pick one of the three possible behaviours of package selector at exit - in <b>Action after Package Installation</b> menu.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Konfigūracija:</b><br> šiame meniu pateikiami paketų rinkimosi su likusiais paketų tvarkytuvės įrankiai. Čia galite <b>Paleisti saugyklų tvarkytuvę</b> ir keisti sukonfigūruotas saugyklas arba užregistruoti atnaujinimų saugyklą ir konfigūruoti periodišką galimų atnaujinimų parsiuntimą (<b>Paleisti atnaujinimo internetu konfigūraciją</b>). Taip pat galite pasirinkti vieną iš trijų elgsenų, kaip paketų rinkimosi programa turėtų elgtis ją uždarius - <b>Veiksmas po paketų diegimo</b> meniu.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Configuration:</b><br>This menu integrates package selector with the " +"rest of package management utils. From here, you can <b>Launch Repository " +"Manager</b> and edit configured repositories or register to update repository " +"and configure periodic download of available updates (<b>Launch Online Update " +"Configuration</b>). Also, you can pick one of the three possible behaviours " +"of package selector at exit - in <b>Action after Package Installation</b> " +"menu.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Konfigūracija:</b><br> šiame meniu pateikiami paketų rinkimosi su " +"likusiais paketų tvarkytuvės įrankiai. Čia galite <b>Paleisti saugyklų " +"tvarkytuvę</b> ir keisti sukonfigūruotas saugyklas arba užregistruoti " +"atnaujinimų saugyklą ir konfigūruoti periodišką galimų atnaujinimų " +"parsiuntimą (<b>Paleisti atnaujinimo internetu konfigūraciją</b>). Taip pat " +"galite pasirinkti vieną iš trijų elgsenų, kaip paketų rinkimosi programa " +"turėtų elgtis ją uždarius - <b>Veiksmas po paketų diegimo</b> meniu.</p>" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:296 -msgid "<p><b>Extras:</b><br>Miscellaneous functions reside here. <i>Export Package List to File</i> will dump data on installed packages, patterns and languages into specified XML file. This file can be later read by <i>Import Package List from File</i> option e.g. on different computer. It will bring the set of packages on the target computer into the same state as described in provided XML file. <i>Show Available Disk Space</i> will show a popup table displaying disk usage and free disk space on currently mounted partition.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Papildomai:</b><br> čia slypi įvairios kitos funkcijos. <i>Įrašyti paketų sąrašą į rinkmeną</i> – įdiegtų paketų, šablonų ir kalbų sąrašas bus patalpintas nurodytoje XML rinkmenoje. Ši rinkmena vėliau gali būti nuskaityta naudojantis <i>Įkelti paketų sąrašą iš rinkmenos</i> parinktimi, pvz., kitame kompiuteryje. Tokiu būdu pernešamas paketų rinkinys į reikiamą kompiuterį, išlaikant tą pačią nurodytą būsena, kaip nurodyta pateiktoje XML rinkmenoje. <i>Rodyti laisvą disko vietą</i> – lentelėje bus pavaizduotas disko naudojimas ir laisva vieta šiuo metu prijungtuose skaidiniuose.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Extras:</b><br>Miscellaneous functions reside here. <i>Export Package " +"List to File</i> will dump data on installed packages, patterns and languages " +"into specified XML file. This file can be later read by <i>Import Package " +"List from File</i> option e.g. on different computer. It will bring the set " +"of packages on the target computer into the same state as described in " +"provided XML file. <i>Show Available Disk Space</i> will show a popup table " +"displaying disk usage and free disk space on currently mounted partition.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Papildomai:</b><br> čia slypi įvairios kitos funkcijos. <i>Įrašyti " +"paketų sąrašą į rinkmeną</i> – įdiegtų paketų, šablonų ir kalbų sąrašas bus " +"patalpintas nurodytoje XML rinkmenoje. Ši rinkmena vėliau gali būti " +"nuskaityta naudojantis <i>Įkelti paketų sąrašą iš rinkmenos</i> parinktimi, " +"pvz., kitame kompiuteryje. Tokiu būdu pernešamas paketų rinkinys į reikiamą " +"kompiuterį, išlaikant tą pačią nurodytą būsena, kaip nurodyta pateiktoje XML " +"rinkmenoje. <i>Rodyti laisvą disko vietą</i> – lentelėje bus pavaizduotas " +"disko naudojimas ir laisva vieta šiuo metu prijungtuose skaidiniuose.</p>" #. label of a frame with search settings #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:304 @@ -1007,27 +1252,65 @@ #. help text online udpate #. Do NOT translate 'recommended' and 'security'! because the patch kind is always shown as english text. #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:618 -msgid "<p>General information about patches:</p><p>The patches of kind <b>security</b> are solving security issues and we highly recommend to install it. You should also install <b>recommended</b> patches, they usually contain important bug-fixes. Install <b>feature</b> patches if you are interested in the feature.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>General information about patches:</p><p>The patches of kind <b>security<" +"/b> are solving security issues and we highly recommend to install it. You " +"should also install <b>recommended</b> patches, they usually contain " +"important bug-fixes. Install <b>feature</b> patches if you are interested in " +"the feature.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:625 -msgid "<p>Patches for \"libzypp\" (Package, Patch, Pattern and Product Management) will always get installed first. Other patches must be installed on a second run.</p>" -msgstr "<p>„libzypp“ pataisos (paketams, pataisoms, šablonams ir produktų tvarkyklei) visuomet įdiegiamos pirmiausia. Kitos pataisos gali būti kitu etapu.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Patches for \"libzypp\" (Package, Patch, Pattern and Product Management) " +"will always get installed first. Other patches must be installed on a second " +"run.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>„libzypp“ pataisos (paketams, pataisoms, šablonams ir produktų tvarkyklei) " +"visuomet įdiegiamos pirmiausia. Kitos pataisos gali būti kitu etapu.</p>" #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:632 -msgid "<p>Meaning of the status flags:</p><p><b>a+ </b>: Patches concerning your installation are preselected. They will be downloaded and installed on your system. If you do not want a certain patch, deselect it with '-'.</p><p><b> i </b>: All requirements of this patch are satisfied.</p><p><b> + </b>: You have selected this patch for installation.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Būsenos vėliavėlių reikšmės:</p><p><b>a+</b>: Pataisos, susijusios su jūsų sistema, iš anksto yra pažymėtos. Jos bus parsiųstos ir įdiegtos jūsų sistemoje. Jei nenorite tam tikros pataisos, atžymėkite ją su „-“.</p><p><b> i </b>: Visos šios pataisos priklausomybės yra patenkintos.</p><p><b> + </b>: Jūs pasirinkote įdiegti šią pataisą.</p>" +#| msgid "<p>Meaning of the status flags:</p><p><b>a+ </b>: Patches concerning your installation are preselected. They will be downloaded and installed on your system. If you do not want a certain patch, deselect it with '-'.</p><p><b> i </b>: All requirements of this patch are satisfied.</p><p><b>+ </b>: You have selected this patch for installation.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Meaning of the status flags:</p><p><b>a+ </b>: Patches concerning your " +"installation are preselected. They will be downloaded and installed on your " +"system. If you do not want a certain patch, deselect it with '-'.</p><p><b> i " +"</b>: All requirements of this patch are satisfied.</p><p><b> + </b>: You " +"have selected this patch for installation.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Būsenos vėliavėlių reikšmės:</p><p><b>a+</b>: Pataisos, susijusios su jūsų " +"sistema, iš anksto yra pažymėtos. Jos bus parsiųstos ir įdiegtos jūsų " +"sistemoje. Jei nenorite tam tikros pataisos, atžymėkite ją su „-“.</p><p><b> " +"i </b>: Visos šios pataisos priklausomybės yra patenkintos.</p><p><b> + </b>: " +"Jūs pasirinkote įdiegti šią pataisą.</p>" #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:639 -msgid "<p>More details about the status:<br>If there are several patches for a package (or a set of packages) which aren't yet applied to the system all got preselected and have status <b>a+</b>. If one of these patches is deselected with '-' it might show the status <b>i</b> afterwards. This is because any of the other patches concerning the same package(s) is still selected. The newer version(s) of the package(s) will be installed and with it this patch is satisfied. Deselecting of all patches is required if the patches are not wanted.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>More details about the status:<br>If there are several patches for a " +"package (or a set of packages) which aren't yet applied to the system all got " +"preselected and have status <b>a+</b>. If one of these patches is deselected " +"with '-' it might show the status <b>i</b> afterwards. This is because any of " +"the other patches concerning the same package(s) is still selected. The newer " +"version(s) of the package(s) will be installed and with it this patch is " +"satisfied. Deselecting of all patches is required if the patches are not " +"wanted.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:646 -msgid "<p>The menus:</p><p>The <b>Filter</b> menu allows to filter the patches, e.g. show the 'Installed' ones or list 'Security' patches. It also provides to search for patches.<br>Use the <b>Actions</b> menu to change the status of a patch.<br>The <b>View</b> menu offers the possibility to see which packages are concerned by the patch. Please note: If the filter is 'All Patches' the package list for some patches might be empty. This means no packages are concerned because none of the patch packages is installed on the system.<br>The <b>Dependencies</b> menu contains dependencies checks and the 'Generate Solver Testcase' entry.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The menus:</p><p>The <b>Filter</b> menu allows to filter the patches, e.g. " +"show the 'Installed' ones or list 'Security' patches. It also provides to " +"search for patches.<br>Use the <b>Actions</b> menu to change the status of a " +"patch.<br>The <b>View</b> menu offers the possibility to see which packages " +"are concerned by the patch. Please note: If the filter is 'All Patches' the " +"package list for some patches might be empty. This means no packages are " +"concerned because none of the patch packages is installed on the system.<br>" +"The <b>Dependencies</b> menu contains dependencies checks and the 'Generate " +"Solver Testcase' entry.</p>" msgstr "" #. label for a warning popup @@ -1052,6 +1335,7 @@ #. begin: the label of the Contiunue button #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:684 +#| msgid "&Continue anyway" msgid "C&ontinue" msgstr "&Tęsti" @@ -1073,8 +1357,12 @@ #. text for a Notify popup #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:728 -msgid "<p>All changes in the package, patch or pattern selection will be lost.<br>Really exit?</p>" -msgstr "<p>Visi paketų, pataisų ar šablonų pasirinkimo pakeitimai bus prarasti.<br> Tikrai išeiti?</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>All changes in the package, patch or pattern selection will be lost.<br>" +"Really exit?</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Visi paketų, pataisų ar šablonų pasirinkimo pakeitimai bus prarasti.<br> " +"Tikrai išeiti?</p>" #. the label of language table #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:736 @@ -1122,8 +1410,18 @@ #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:797 -msgid "<b>Update Problem List</b><br><p>The packages in the list cannot be updated automatically.</p><p>Possible reasons:</p><p>They are obsoleted by other packages.</p><p>There is no newer version to which to update on any installation media.</p><p>They are third-party packages</p><p>Manually select what to do with them. The safest course of action is to delete them.</p>" -msgstr "<b>Atnaujinimo problemų sąrašas</b><br><p>Paketai sąraše negali būti automatiškai atnaujinti.</p><p>Galimos priežastys:</p><p>Juos pakeičia kiti naujesni paketai.</p><p>Nėra naujos versijos nei viename diegimo šaltinyje.</p><p>Tai „trečiosios šalies“ paketai.</p><p>Pasirinkite rankiniu būdu, ką su jais daryti. Saugiausia yra juos ištrinti.</p>" +msgid "" +"<b>Update Problem List</b><br><p>The packages in the list cannot be updated " +"automatically.</p><p>Possible reasons:</p><p>They are obsoleted by other " +"packages.</p><p>There is no newer version to which to update on any " +"installation media.</p><p>They are third-party packages</p><p>Manually select " +"what to do with them. The safest course of action is to delete them.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<b>Atnaujinimo problemų sąrašas</b><br><p>Paketai sąraše negali būti " +"automatiškai atnaujinti.</p><p>Galimos priežastys:</p><p>Juos pakeičia kiti " +"naujesni paketai.</p><p>Nėra naujos versijos nei viename diegimo šaltinyje.<" +"/p><p>Tai „trečiosios šalies“ paketai.</p><p>Pasirinkite rankiniu būdu, ką su " +"jais daryti. Saugiausia yra juos ištrinti.</p>" #. column header source RPM installation (keep it short!) #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:804 @@ -1150,20 +1448,42 @@ msgstr "Scenarijus" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:838 +#| msgid "Package Versions" msgid "Incompatible Package Versions" msgstr "Nesuderinamos paketų versijos" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:845 -msgid "<p>You are trying to install multiversion-capable and non-multiversion-capable versions of this package at the same time.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Bandote tuo pat metu įdiegti keliasi paketo versijas. Nors kai kurios paketo versijos palaiko tokį diegimą, tačiau kažkuri pasirinkto paketo versija to nepalaiko.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>You are trying to install multiversion-capable and " +"non-multiversion-capable versions of this package at the same time.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Bandote tuo pat metu įdiegti keliasi paketo versijas. Nors kai kurios " +"paketo versijos palaiko tokį diegimą, tačiau kažkuri pasirinkto paketo " +"versija to nepalaiko.</p>" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:854 -msgid "<p>This version is multiversion-capable.</p><p>Press \"Continue\" to install this version and unselect the non-multiversion-capable version, \"Cancel\" to unselect this version and keep the other one.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Įdiegę šią versiją, galite įdiegti kitas versijas tuo pat metu.</p> <p>Norėdami įdiegti šią versiją, spauskite „Tęsti“ ir atžymėkite tą versiją, kuri nepalaiko kelių versijų diegimo kartu. Jei norite išlaikyti kitą versiją ir nediegti šios versijos, spauskite „Atsisakyti“.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This version is multiversion-capable.</p><p>Press \"Continue\" to install " +"this version and unselect the non-multiversion-capable version, \"Cancel\" to " +"unselect this version and keep the other one.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Įdiegę šią versiją, galite įdiegti kitas versijas tuo pat metu.</p> " +"<p>Norėdami įdiegti šią versiją, spauskite „Tęsti“ ir " +"atžymėkite tą versiją, kuri nepalaiko kelių versijų diegimo kartu. " +"Jei norite išlaikyti kitą versiją ir nediegti šios versijos, spauskite " +"„Atsisakyti“.</p>" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:864 -msgid "<p>This version is not multiversion-capable.</p><p>Press \"Continue\" to install only this version and unselect all other versions, \"Cancel\" to unselect this version and keep the other ones.<p>" -msgstr "<p>Įdiegę šią versiją, negalite įdiegti kitų versijų tuo pat metu.</p><p>Norėdami įdiegti šią versiją, spauskite „Tęsti“ ir atžymėkite visas kitas versijas. Jei norite išlaikyti kitas versijas ir nediegti šios versijos, spauskite „Atsisakyti“.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>This version is not multiversion-capable.</p><p>Press \"Continue\" to " +"install only this version and unselect all other versions, \"Cancel\" to " +"unselect this version and keep the other ones.<p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Įdiegę šią versiją, negalite įdiegti kitų versijų tuo pat metu.</p>" +"<p>Norėdami įdiegti šią versiją, spauskite „Tęsti“ ir " +"atžymėkite visas kitas versijas. " +"Jei norite išlaikyti kitas versijas ir nediegti šios versijos, spauskite " +"„Atsisakyti“.</p>" #~ msgid "----- this patch is broken !!! -----" #~ msgstr "----- šis paketas yra sugadintas !!! -----" Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/network.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/network.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/network.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -11,15 +11,16 @@ "Project-Id-Version: network.lt\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2015-10-22 09:57+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2015-11-01 10:07+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Mindaugas Baranauskas \n" -"Language-Team: Lithuanian \n" +"Language-Team: Lithuanian \n" "Language: lt\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. Commandline help title #: src/clients/dns.rb:63 @@ -119,27 +120,33 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: check-box label #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:181 +#| msgid "Open SSH Port and Enable SSH Service" msgid "Enable SSH Service" msgstr "Įgalinti SSH paslaugą" #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:195 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Firewall and SSH</big></b><br>\n" -"Firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network attacks.\n" -"SSH is a service that allows logging into this computer remotely via dedicated\n" +"Firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network " +"attacks.\n" +"SSH is a service that allows logging into this computer remotely via " +"dedicated\n" "SSH client</p>" msgstr "" #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:201 msgid "" -"<p>Here you can choose whether the firewall will be enabled or disabled after\n" +"<p>Here you can choose whether the firewall will be enabled or disabled " +"after\n" "the installation. It is recommended to keep it enabled.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:204 msgid "" -"<p>With enabled firewall, you can decide whether to open firewall port for SSH\n" -"service and allow remote SSH logins. Independently you can also enable SSH service (i.e. it\n" +"<p>With enabled firewall, you can decide whether to open firewall port for " +"SSH\n" +"service and allow remote SSH logins. Independently you can also enable SSH " +"service (i.e. it\n" "will be started on computer boot).</p>" msgstr "" @@ -154,23 +161,28 @@ #. anything but enabling the firewall closes this dialog #. (VNC and SSH checkboxes do nothing) #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:284 +#| msgid "Firewall will be enabled (disable</a>)" msgid "Firewall will be enabled (disable</a>)" msgstr "Užkarda bus įgalinta (išjungti</a>)" #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:288 +#| msgid "Firewall will be disabled (enable</a>)" msgid "Firewall will be disabled (enable</a>)" msgstr "Užkarda bus uždrausta (įgalinti</a>)" #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:294 +#| msgid "Firewall will be enabled (disable</a>)" msgid "SSH service will be enabled (disable</a>)" msgstr "SSH paslauga bus įgalinta (uždrausti</a>)" #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:298 +#| msgid "Firewall will be disabled (enable</a>)" msgid "SSH service will be disabled (enable</a>)" msgstr "SSH paslauga bus uždrausta (įgalinti</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: check-box label #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:315 +#| msgid "Open &VNC Ports" msgid "Open SSH Port" msgstr "Atverti SSH prievadus" @@ -181,10 +193,12 @@ #. Show VNC port only if installing over VNC #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:347 +#| msgid "VNC ports will be open (close</a>)" msgid "VNC ports will be open (close</a>)" msgstr "VNC bus atvertas (užverti</a>)" #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:349 +#| msgid "VNC ports will be blocked (open</a>)" msgid "VNC ports will be blocked (open</a>)" msgstr "VNC prievadas bus užblokuotas (atverti</a>)" @@ -192,10 +206,12 @@ #. Returns nil if this part should be skipped #. @return [String] proposal html text #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:361 +#| msgid "VNC ports will be open (close</a>)" msgid "SSH port will be open (block</a>)" msgstr "SSH prievadas bus atvertas (blokuoti</a>)" #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:363 +#| msgid "VNC ports will be blocked (open</a>)" msgid "SSH port will be blocked (open</a>)" msgstr "SSH prievadas bus užblokuotas (atverti</a>)" @@ -345,8 +361,10 @@ #. Fallback for situation that mustn't exist #: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:873 -msgid "No URL for the release notes defined. Internet test cannot be performed." -msgstr "Nėra URL susieto su laidos informacija. Bandymo internetu negalima atlikti." +msgid "" +"No URL for the release notes defined. Internet test cannot be performed." +msgstr "" +"Nėra URL susieto su laidos informacija. Bandymo internetu negalima atlikti." #. popup informing user about the failure to retrieve release notes #. most likely due to server-side error @@ -356,7 +374,8 @@ "This does not necessarily imply a faulty network configuration.\n" "\n" "Click 'Continue' to proceed to the next installation step. To skip any steps\n" -"requiring an internet connection or to get back to your network configuration,\n" +"requiring an internet connection or to get back to your network " +"configuration,\n" "click 'Cancel'.\n" msgstr "" @@ -529,7 +548,9 @@ #. Commandline command help #: src/clients/remote.rb:85 msgid "Set 'yes' to allow or 'no' to disallow the remote administration" -msgstr "Nuotoliniam administravimui priskirkite reikšmę „yes“ (leisti) arba „no“ (neleisti)" +msgstr "" +"Nuotoliniam administravimui priskirkite reikšmę „yes“ (leisti) arba „no“ " +"(neleisti)" #. Command line output Headline #: src/clients/remote.rb:126 @@ -572,14 +593,17 @@ msgstr "Rodyti maršrutų lentelės įrašą pasirinktai paskirčiai" #: src/clients/routing.rb:79 +#| msgid "IP forwarding settings" msgid "IPv4 and IPv6 forwarding settings" msgstr "IPv4 ir IPv6 persiuntimo nuostatos" #: src/clients/routing.rb:87 +#| msgid "IP forwarding settings" msgid "IPv4 only forwarding settings" msgstr "Tik IPv4 persiuntimo nuostatos" #: src/clients/routing.rb:95 +#| msgid "IP forwarding settings" msgid "IPv6 only forwarding settings" msgstr "Tik IPv6 persiuntimo nuostatos" @@ -669,33 +693,40 @@ #. translators: %s is "IPv4" or "IPv6" #: src/clients/routing.rb:261 +#| msgid "IP forwarding is enabled" msgid "%s forwarding is enabled" msgstr "%s persiuntimas įgalintas" #. translators: %s is "IPv4" or "IPv6" #: src/clients/routing.rb:264 +#| msgid "IP forwarding is disabled" msgid "%s forwarding is disabled" msgstr "%s persiuntimas uždraustas" #. translators: %s is "IPv4" or "IPv6" #: src/clients/routing.rb:268 +#| msgid "Enabling IP forwarding..." msgid "Enabling %s forwarding..." msgstr "Įgalinamas %s persiuntimas..." #. translators: %s is "IPv4" or "IPv6" #: src/clients/routing.rb:272 +#| msgid "Disabling IP forwarding..." msgid "Disabling %s forwarding..." msgstr "Uždraudžiamas %s persiuntimas..." #: src/clients/routing.rb:278 +#| msgid "IP Forwarding:" msgid "IPv4 Forwarding:" msgstr "IPv4 persiuntimas:" #: src/clients/routing.rb:288 +#| msgid "IP Forwarding:" msgid "IPv6 Forwarding:" msgstr "IPv6 persiuntimas:" #: src/clients/routing.rb:298 +#| msgid "IP Forwarding:" msgid "IPv4 and IPv6 Forwarding:" msgstr "IPv4 ir IPv6 persiuntimas:" @@ -712,8 +743,12 @@ msgstr "Turi būti nurodytas paskirties IP adresas." #: src/clients/routing.rb:348 -msgid "At least one of the following parameters (gateway, netmask, device, options) must be specified" -msgstr "Turi būti nurodytas bent vienas parametras (tinklų sietuvas, tinklo kaukė, įrenginys, parinktys)" +msgid "" +"At least one of the following parameters (gateway, netmask, device, options) " +"must be specified" +msgstr "" +"Turi būti nurodytas bent vienas parametras (tinklų sietuvas, tinklo kaukė, " +"įrenginys, parinktys)" #: src/clients/routing.rb:370 msgid "Updating '%1' destination in routing table ..." @@ -1040,6 +1075,7 @@ #. Table header label #: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:95 +#| msgid "IP Address" msgid "IPv4 Address Label" msgstr "IPv4 adreso etiketė" @@ -1167,6 +1203,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:286 +#| msgid "Use iBFT values" msgid "Use iBFT Values" msgstr "Naudoti iBFT reikšmes" @@ -1188,6 +1225,7 @@ #. TODO : Stat ... Assigned #: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:321 +#| msgid "Statically assigned IP Address" msgid "Statically Assigned IP Address" msgstr "Priskirtas pastovus IP adresas" @@ -1272,6 +1310,11 @@ "\n" "Really leave the hostname blank?\n" msgstr "" +"Pagrindinio kompiuterio vardas nenurodytas. Siūlome \n" +"jį susieti su statiniu IP, antraip nesant tinklo ryšio \n" +"nebus galima išspręsti mašinos vardo.\n" +"\n" +"Tikrai palikti tuščią kompiuterio vardą?\n" #. Popup text #: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1124 @@ -1332,6 +1375,7 @@ #. Combo box label - when to activate device (e.g. on boot, manually, never,..) #: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1388 +#| msgid "Ifplugd priority" msgid "Ifplugd Priority" msgstr "Ifplugd prioritetas" @@ -1340,9 +1384,12 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1394 msgid "" "<p><b><big>IFPLUGD PRIORITY</big></b></p> \n" -"<p> All interfaces configured with <b>On Cable Connection</b> and with IFPLUGD_PRIORITY != 0 will be\n" -" used mutually exclusive. If more then one of these interfaces is <b>On Cable Connection</b>\n" -" then we need a way to decide which interface to take up. Therefore we have to\n" +"<p> All interfaces configured with <b>On Cable Connection</b> and with " +"IFPLUGD_PRIORITY != 0 will be\n" +" used mutually exclusive. If more then one of these interfaces is <b>On Cable " +"Connection</b>\n" +" then we need a way to decide which interface to take up. Therefore we have " +"to\n" " set the priority of each interface. </p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1353,6 +1400,9 @@ #. remove all aliases (bnc#590167) #: src/include/network/lan/bridge.rb:103 +#| msgid "" +#| "At least one selected device is already configured.\n" +#| "Adapt the configuration for bridge (IP address 0.0.0.0/32)?\n" msgid "" "At least one selected device is already configured.\n" "Adapt the configuration for bridge?\n" @@ -1541,7 +1591,9 @@ msgstr "Norėdami nurodyti įrenginį, naudokite „id“ parinktį." #: src/include/network/lan/cmdline.rb:98 -msgid "Value of \"id\" is out of range. Use \"list\" option to check max. value of \"id\"." +msgid "" +"Value of \"id\" is out of range. Use \"list\" option to check max. value of " +"\"id\"." msgstr "" #. Handler for action "add" @@ -1631,7 +1683,8 @@ msgstr "" "Reikia programinės aparatinės įrangos (angl. firmware).\n" "Įdiegkite ją iš papildomų produktų CD.\n" -"Pirmiausia įtraukite papildomų produktų CD į YaST programinės įrangos saugyklas, \n" +"Pirmiausia įtraukite papildomų produktų CD į YaST programinės įrangos " +"saugyklas, \n" "tuomet iš naujo atverkite šį langą.\n" #: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:213 @@ -1643,10 +1696,12 @@ "return to this dialog once you have installed the firmware.\n" msgstr "" "Tam, kad įrenginys tinkamai veiktų, reikia progaminės aparatinės įrangos\n" -"(angl. firmware). Ją greičiausiai galite parsisiųsti iš gamintojo svetainės. \n" +"(angl. firmware). Ją greičiausiai galite parsisiųsti iš gamintojo svetainės. " +"\n" "Jei programinę aparatinę įrangą jau parsisiuntėte ir įdiegėte, tuomet \n" "nuspaudę <b>Tęsti</b> galėsite konfigūruoti įrenginį. \n" -"Priešingu atveju spauskite <b>Atšaukti</b>, o šį langą atverkite tik po to, kai įdiegsiteprograminę aparatinę įrangą.\n" +"Priešingu atveju spauskite <b>Atšaukti</b>, o šį langą atverkite tik po to, " +"kai įdiegsiteprograminę aparatinę įrangą.\n" #. this is one of 2 places to install packages :-( #. - kernel modules (InstallKernel): before loaded @@ -1657,8 +1712,12 @@ msgstr "Diegiama programinė aparatinė įranga" #: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:233 -msgid "For successful firmware installation, the 'install_bcm43xx_firmware' script needs to be executed. Execute it now?" -msgstr "Kad būtų sėkmingai įdiegta programinė aparatinė įranga, reikia įvykdyti komandą „install_bcm43xx_firmware“. Vykdyti dabar?" +msgid "" +"For successful firmware installation, the 'install_bcm43xx_firmware' script " +"needs to be executed. Execute it now?" +msgstr "" +"Kad būtų sėkmingai įdiegta programinė aparatinė įranga, reikia įvykdyti " +"komandą „install_bcm43xx_firmware“. Vykdyti dabar?" #: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:247 msgid "An error occurred during firmware installation." @@ -1738,14 +1797,17 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:99 msgid "" "<p><b>Udev Rules</b> are rules for the kernel device manager that allow\n" -"associating the MAC address or BusID of the network device with its name (for\n" +"associating the MAC address or BusID of the network device with its name " +"(for\n" "example, eth1, wlan0 ) and assures a persistent device name upon reboot.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:105 msgid "" -"<p><b>Show visible port identification</b> allows you to physically identify now configured NIC. \n" -"Set appropriate time, click <b>Blink</b> and LED diodes on you NIC will start blinking for selected time.\n" +"<p><b>Show visible port identification</b> allows you to physically identify " +"now configured NIC. \n" +"Set appropriate time, click <b>Blink</b> and LED diodes on you NIC will start " +"blinking for selected time.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1753,24 +1815,32 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:118 msgid "" "<p><b>Kernel Module</b>. Enter the kernel module (driver) name \n" -"for your network device here. If the device is already configured, see if there is more than one driver available for\n" -"your device in the drop-down list. If necessary, choose a driver from the list, but usually the default value works.</p>\n" +"for your network device here. If the device is already configured, see if " +"there is more than one driver available for\n" +"your device in the drop-down list. If necessary, choose a driver from the " +"list, but usually the default value works.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Manual networ card setup help 3/4 #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:125 msgid "" "<p>Additionally, specify <b>Options</b> for the kernel module. Use this\n" -"format: <i>option</i>=<i>value</i>. Each entry should be space-separated, for example: <i>io=0x300 irq=5</i>. <b>Note:</b> If two cards are \n" -"configured with the same module name, the options will be merged while saving.</p>\n" +"format: <i>option</i>=<i>value</i>. Each entry should be space-separated, for " +"example: <i>io=0x300 irq=5</i>. <b>Note:</b> If two cards are \n" +"configured with the same module name, the options will be merged while " +"saving.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Taip pat galite nurodyti branduolio modulio <b>parametrus</b> formatu \n" -"<i>parametras</i>=<i>reikšmė</i>. Kiekvienas įrašas turėtų būti atskirtas tarpu,\n" -"pvz. <i>io=0x300 irq=5</i>. <b>Pastaba:</b> Jei yra sukonfigūruotos dvi plokštes tuo \n" +"<i>parametras</i>=<i>reikšmė</i>. Kiekvienas įrašas turėtų būti atskirtas " +"tarpu,\n" +"pvz. <i>io=0x300 irq=5</i>. <b>Pastaba:</b> Jei yra sukonfigūruotos dvi " +"plokštes tuo \n" "pačiu modulio pavadinimu, išsaugant parametrai bus apjungti.</p>\n" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:131 -msgid "<p>If you specify options via <b>Ethtool options</b>, ifup will call ethtool with these options.</p>\n" +msgid "" +"<p>If you specify options via <b>Ethtool options</b>, ifup will call ethtool " +"with these options.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Manual dialog help 4/4 @@ -1823,6 +1893,7 @@ msgstr "&Modulio pavadinimas" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:365 +#| msgid "Udev rules" msgid "Udev Rules" msgstr "Udev taisyklės" @@ -1835,6 +1906,7 @@ msgstr "Pakeisti" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:379 +#| msgid "Show visible port identification" msgid "Show Visible Port Identification" msgstr "Rodyti matomą prievadų identifikaciją" @@ -1848,6 +1920,7 @@ msgstr "Mirksėti" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:394 +#| msgid "Ethtool options" msgid "Ethtool Options" msgstr "Ethtool parinktys" @@ -1949,19 +2022,28 @@ #. S/390 dialog help: QETH Options #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:951 -msgid "<p>Enter any additional <b>Options</b> for this interface (separated by spaces).</p>" -msgstr "<p>Šiai sąsajai įveskite papildomas <b>Parinktis</b> (atskirtas tarpais).</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Enter any additional <b>Options</b> for this interface (separated by " +"spaces).</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Šiai sąsajai įveskite papildomas <b>Parinktis</b> (atskirtas tarpais).</p>" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:954 -msgid "<p>Select <b>Enable IPA Takeover</b> if IP address takeover should be enabled for this interface.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Select <b>Enable IPA Takeover</b> if IP address takeover should be enabled " +"for this interface.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:957 -msgid "<p>Select <b>Enable Layer 2 Support</b> if this card has been configured with layer 2 support.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Select <b>Enable Layer 2 Support</b> if this card has been configured with " +"layer 2 support.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:960 -msgid "<p>Enter the <b>Layer 2 MAC Address</b> if this card has been configured with layer 2 support.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Enter the <b>Layer 2 MAC Address</b> if this card has been configured with " +"layer 2 support.</p>" msgstr "" #. TextEntry label @@ -2056,7 +2138,8 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <B>Abort</B> now.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Paruošimo nutraukimas:</big></b><br>\n" -"Dabar galite saugiai nutraukti konfigūracijos įrankį spausdami <B>Nutraukti</B>.</p>\n" +"Dabar galite saugiai nutraukti konfigūracijos įrankį spausdami <B>Nutraukti<" +"/B>.</p>\n" #. Network cards write dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:39 @@ -2117,7 +2200,8 @@ "Press <b>Add</b> to configure a new network card manually.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Tinklo plokštės pridėjimas:</big></b><br>\n" -"Spauskite <b>Pridėti</b>, jei norite rankiniu būdu konfigūruoti naują tinklo plokštę.</p>\n" +"Spauskite <b>Pridėti</b>, jei norite rankiniu būdu konfigūruoti naują tinklo " +"plokštę.</p>\n" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:74 msgid "" @@ -2136,7 +2220,8 @@ "<p>Check <b>Enable IPv6</b> to enable the ipv6 module in the kernel.\n" "It is possible to use IPv6 together with IPv4. This is the default option.\n" "To disable IPv6, uncheck this option. This will blacklist the kernel \n" -"module for ipv6. If the IPv6 protocol is not used on your network, the response \n" +"module for ipv6. If the IPv6 protocol is not used on your network, the " +"response \n" "time can be faster.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2154,8 +2239,10 @@ "to enable you to say \"and everything else should go here.\"</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Šiame dialoge gali būti nustatyta maršrutizacija.\n" -"<b>Įprastas tinklų sietuvas</b> atitinka visas galimas paskirties vietas, bet nėra tinkamiausias.\n" -"Jei egzistuoja bet koks kitas įrašas, kuris atitinka reikalingą adresą, jis bus\n" +"<b>Įprastas tinklų sietuvas</b> atitinka visas galimas paskirties vietas, bet " +"nėra tinkamiausias.\n" +"Jei egzistuoja bet koks kitas įrašas, kuris atitinka reikalingą adresą, jis " +"bus\n" "naudojamas vietoj įprasto maršruto. Įprasto maršruto idėja yra leisti jums\n" "pasakyti „ir visa kita turėtų keliauti čia“.</p>\n" @@ -2163,7 +2250,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>For each route, enter destination network IP address, gateway address,\n" "and netmask. To omit any of these values, use a dash sign \"-\". Select\n" -"the device through which the traffic to the defined network will be routed.\"-\" is an alias for any interface.</p>\n" +"the device through which the traffic to the defined network will be " +"routed.\"-\" is an alias for any interface.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Routing dialog help 2/2 @@ -2183,7 +2271,8 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:115 msgid "" -"<p><b>Important:</b> if the firewall is enabled, allowing forwarding alone is not enough. \n" +"<p><b>Important:</b> if the firewall is enabled, allowing forwarding alone is " +"not enough. \n" "You should enable masquerading and/or set at least one redirect rule in the\n" "firewall configuration. Use the YaST firewall module.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2192,20 +2281,26 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p>If you are using DHCP to get an IP address, check whether you get\n" -"also a hostname via DHCP. The hostname will be set automatically by the DHCP client.\n" -"However, changing the hostname at runtime may confuse the graphical desktop. \n" -"Therefore, disable this option if you connect to different networks that assign \n" +"also a hostname via DHCP. The hostname will be set automatically by the DHCP " +"client.\n" +"However, changing the hostname at runtime may confuse the graphical desktop. " +"\n" +"Therefore, disable this option if you connect to different networks that " +"assign \n" "different hostnames.</p> " msgstr "" "<p>Jei IP adreso gavimui naudojate DHCP ,\n" -"pažymėkite, ar gauti kompiuterio pavadinimą per DHCP, ar per DHCP nustatyti vardų serverius\n" +"pažymėkite, ar gauti kompiuterio pavadinimą per DHCP, ar per DHCP nustatyti " +"vardų serverius\n" "ir ieškomas sritis.</p>" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:129 msgid "" "<p><b>Assign Hostname to Loopback IP</b> associates your hostname with \n" -"the IP address <tt>127.0.0.2</tt> (loopback) in <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>. This is a \n" -"useful option if you want to have the hostname resolvable at all times, even \n" +"the IP address <tt>127.0.0.2</tt> (loopback) in <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>. This is " +"a \n" +"useful option if you want to have the hostname resolvable at all times, even " +"\n" "without an active network. In all other cases, use it carefully, especially \n" "if this computer provides some network services.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2237,21 +2332,27 @@ msgstr "" "<p>Paieškos sritis – tai srities vardas, kur prasideda kompiuterių paieška.\n" "Pirmoji paieškos sritis paprastai būna tokia pati, kaip\n" -"jūsų kompiuterio srities vardas (pvz. suse.de). Taip pat gali būti papildomos\n" -"paieškos sritys (pvz. suse.com). Sritis atskirkite tarpais arba kableliais.</p>\n" +"jūsų kompiuterio srities vardas (pvz. suse.de). Taip pat gali būti " +"papildomos\n" +"paieškos sritys (pvz. suse.com). Sritis atskirkite tarpais arba kableliais.<" +"/p>\n" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:154 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the short name for this computer (e.g. <i>mymachine</i>) and the DNS domain\n" -"(e.g. <i>example.com</i>) that it belongs to. The domain is especially important if this \n" -"computer is a mail server. You can view the hostname of you computer using the <i>hostname</i> \n" +"<p>Enter the short name for this computer (e.g. <i>mymachine</i>) and the DNS " +"domain\n" +"(e.g. <i>example.com</i>) that it belongs to. The domain is especially " +"important if this \n" +"computer is a mail server. You can view the hostname of you computer using " +"the <i>hostname</i> \n" "command.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:161 msgid "" "<p>Select the way how the DNS configuration will be modified (name servers,\n" -"search list, the content of <i>/etc/resolv.conf</i>). Normally, it is handled\n" +"search list, the content of <i>/etc/resolv.conf</i>). Normally, it is " +"handled\n" "by the <i>netconfig</i> script, which merges statically defined data with\n" "dynamically obtained data (e.g. from the DHCP client, NetworkManager,\n" "etc.). This is the default. <b>Use Default Policy</b> is sufficient for most\n" @@ -2275,12 +2376,15 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:181 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Address Setup</big></b></p>\n" -"<p>Select <b>No Address Setup</b> if you do not want to assign an IP address to this device.\n" +"<p>Select <b>No Address Setup</b> if you do not want to assign an IP address " +"to this device.\n" "This is particularly useful for bonding ethernet devices.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:186 -msgid "<p>Check <b>iBFT</b> if you want to keep the network configured in your BIOS.</p>\n" +msgid "" +"<p>Check <b>iBFT</b> if you want to keep the network configured in your " +"BIOS.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Address dialog help 2/8 @@ -2289,7 +2393,8 @@ "<p>Select <b>Dynamic Address</b> if you do not have a static IP address \n" "assigned by the system administrator or your Internet provider.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Pasirinkite <b>Dinaminį adresą</b>, jei neturite sistemos administratoriaus\n" +"<p>Pasirinkite <b>Dinaminį adresą</b>, jei neturite sistemos " +"administratoriaus\n" "arba interneto paslaugos tiekėjo jums suteikto statinio IP adreso.</p>\n" #. Address dialog help 3/8 @@ -2304,27 +2409,34 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:200 msgid "" "<p>To search for an IP address and assign it statically, select \n" -"<b>Zeroconf</b>. To use DHCP and fall back to zeroconf, select <b>DHCP + Zeroconf\n" -"</b>. Otherwise, the network addresses must be assigned <b>Statically</b>.</p>\n" +"<b>Zeroconf</b>. To use DHCP and fall back to zeroconf, select <b>DHCP + " +"Zeroconf\n" +"</b>. Otherwise, the network addresses must be assigned <b>Statically</b>.</p>" +"\n" msgstr "" #. Address dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:207 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the <b>IP Address</b> (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) for your computer, and the \n" +"<p>Enter the <b>IP Address</b> (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) for " +"your computer, and the \n" " <b>Remote IP Address</b> (for example: <tt>192.168.100.254</tt>)\n" "for your peer.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Savo kompiuteriui įveskite <b>IP adresą</b> (pvz. <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>),\n" +"<p>Savo kompiuteriui įveskite <b>IP adresą</b> (pvz. <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>" +"),\n" "ir <b>nuotolinį IP adresą</b> (pvz. <tt>192.168.100.254</tt>).</p>\n" " \n" #. Address dialog help 6/8 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:214 msgid "" -"<p>For <b>Static Address Setup</b> enter the static IP address for your computer (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) and\n" -"the network mask (usually <tt>255.255.255.0</tt> or just length of prefix <tt>/24</tt>).Optionally, you can enter\n" -"a fully qualified hostname for this IP address. The hostname will be written to <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>.</p>\n" +"<p>For <b>Static Address Setup</b> enter the static IP address for your " +"computer (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) and\n" +"the network mask (usually <tt>255.255.255.0</tt> or just length of prefix <tt>" +"/24</tt>).Optionally, you can enter\n" +"a fully qualified hostname for this IP address. The hostname will be written " +"to <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Address dialog help 8/8 @@ -2356,8 +2468,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:238 -msgid "<p><b>Mandatory Interface</b> specifies whether the network service reports failure if the interface fails to start at boot time.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Privaloma sąsaja</b> nurodo, ar tinklo paslauga praneša klaidą, jei sąsaja nepasileidžia įkrovos metu.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Mandatory Interface</b> specifies whether the network service reports " +"failure if the interface fails to start at boot time.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Privaloma sąsaja</b> nurodo, ar tinklo paslauga praneša klaidą, jei " +"sąsaja nepasileidžia įkrovos metu.</p>" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:242 msgid "" @@ -2372,7 +2488,8 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:251 msgid "" "<p>Select the slave devices for the bond device.\n" -"Only devices with the device activation set to <b>Never</b> and with <b>No Address Setup</b> are available.</p>" +"Only devices with the device activation set to <b>Never</b> and with <b>No " +"Address Setup</b> are available.</p>" msgstr "" #. DHCP dialog help 1/7 @@ -2390,34 +2507,55 @@ "network interface and thus the same hardware address.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>DHCP kliento identifikatorius</b>, jei jis paliekamas tuščias, uždaro\n" -"tinklo sąsajos įtaiso adresą. Viename tinkle jis turi būti unikalus kiekvienam\n" +"tinklo sąsajos įtaiso adresą. Viename tinkle jis turi būti unikalus " +"kiekvienam\n" "DHCP klientui. Todėl čia nurodykite unikalų identifikatorių laisva forma,\n" "jei turite kelis (virtualius) kompiuterius, naudojančius tą pačią sąsają\n" "ir tą patį įtaisų adresą.</p>" #. DHCP dialog help 3/7 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:265 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p>The <b>Hostname to Send</b> specifies a string used for the\n" +#| "hostname option field when dhcpcd sends messages to the DHCP server. Some \n" +#| "DHCP servers update name server zones (forward and reverse records) \n" +#| "according to this hostname (dynamic DNS).</p>\n" +#| "Some DHCP servers require the <b>Hostname to Send</b> option field to\n" +#| "contain a specific string in the DHCP messages from clients. Leave <b>AUTO</b>\n" +#| "to send the current hostname (for example, the one defined in <tt>/etc/HOSTNAME</tt>). \n" +#| "If you do not want to send a hostname, leave the field empty.</p>\n" msgid "" "<p>The <b>Hostname to Send</b> specifies a string used for the\n" -"hostname option field when the DHCP client sends messages to the DHCP server. Some \n" +"hostname option field when the DHCP client sends messages to the DHCP server. " +"Some \n" "DHCP servers update name server zones (forward and reverse records) \n" "according to this hostname (dynamic DNS).</p>\n" "Some DHCP servers require the <b>Hostname to Send</b> option field to\n" -"contain a specific string in the DHCP messages from clients. Leave <b>AUTO</b>\n" -"to send the current hostname (for example, the one defined in <tt>/etc/HOSTNAME</tt>). \n" +"contain a specific string in the DHCP messages from clients. Leave <b>AUTO</b>" +"\n" +"to send the current hostname (for example, the one defined in <tt>" +"/etc/HOSTNAME</tt>). \n" "If you do not want to send a hostname, leave the field empty.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Siunčiamas kompiuterio vardas</b> nurodo eilutę, naudojamą kompiuterio pavadinimo\n" -"parametro laukelyje, kai DHCP klientas siunčia DHCP pranešimus. Kai kurie DHCP serveriai\n" +"<p><b>Siunčiamas kompiuterio vardas</b> nurodo eilutę, naudojamą kompiuterio " +"pavadinimo\n" +"parametro laukelyje, kai DHCP klientas siunčia DHCP pranešimus. Kai kurie " +"DHCP serveriai\n" "atnaujins vardų serverio įrašus (persiunčia ir apgręžia)\n" "pagal šį kompiuterio vardą (dinaminis DNS).\n" -"Taip pat kai kuriems DHCP serveriams reikia <b>Siunčiamo kompiuterio vardo</b>\n" -"parametro laukelio, kad DHCP pranešimuose patalpintų klientų informaciją. Jei norite siųsti \n" -"dabartinį kompiuterio vardą (pavyzdžiui, nurodytą <tt>/etc/HOSTNAME</tt>), palikite <i>AUTO</i>.\n" +"Taip pat kai kuriems DHCP serveriams reikia <b>Siunčiamo kompiuterio vardo</b>" +"\n" +"parametro laukelio, kad DHCP pranešimuose patalpintų klientų informaciją. Jei " +"norite siųsti \n" +"dabartinį kompiuterio vardą (pavyzdžiui, nurodytą <tt>/etc/HOSTNAME</tt>), " +"palikite <i>AUTO</i>.\n" "Jei norite nesiųsti kompiuterio pavadinimo, palikite tuščią laukelį.</p>\n" #. Aliases dialog help 1/4 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:276 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p><b><big>Additional Addresses</big></b></p>\n" +#| "<p>Configure additional addresses of an interface (its aliases) in this table.</p>\n" msgid "" "<p><b><big>Additional Addresses</big></b></p>\n" "<p>Configure additional addresses of an interface in this table.</p>\n" @@ -2427,6 +2565,9 @@ #. Aliases dialog help 2/4 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:280 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p>Enter an <b>Alias Name</b>, an <b>IP Address</b>, and\n" +#| "the <b>Netmask</b>.</p>" msgid "" "<p>Enter an <b>IPv4 Address Label</b>, an <b>IP Address</b>, and\n" "the <b>Netmask</b>.</p>" @@ -2437,14 +2578,18 @@ #. Aliases dialog help 3/4 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:284 msgid "" -"<p><b>IPv4 Address Label</b>, formerly known as Alias Name, is optional and legacy. The total\n" +"<p><b>IPv4 Address Label</b>, formerly known as Alias Name, is optional and " +"legacy. The total\n" "length of interface name (inclusive of the colon and label) is\n" -"limited to 15 characters. The obsolete ifconfig utility truncates it after 9 characters.</p>" +"limited to 15 characters. The obsolete ifconfig utility truncates it after 9 " +"characters.</p>" msgstr "" #. Aliases dialog help 3/4, #83766 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:290 -msgid "<p>Do not include the interface name in the label. For example, enter <b>foo</b> instead of <b>eth0:foo</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Do not include the interface name in the label. For example, enter <b>foo<" +"/b> instead of <b>eth0:foo</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. shared between WirelessDialog and WirelessKeyPopup @@ -2486,9 +2631,12 @@ msgstr "" "<p><b>Veiksena</b> priklauso nuo tinklo topologijos. Veiksena gali būti\n" "<b>Ad-hoc</b> (peer-to-peer tinklas be prieigos taško), <b>Valdoma</b>\n" -"(tinklas valdomas prieigos taško, kartais vadinamas <i>Infrastruktūros veiksena</i>), <b>Pagrindinė</b>\n" -"(mazgas vadovauja sinchronizavimui arba veikia kaip prieigos taškas), <b>Kartotuvo</b>\n" -"(mazgas persiunčia paketus eteriu), <b>Antrinė</b> (mazgas veikia kaip atsarginių kopijų\n" +"(tinklas valdomas prieigos taško, kartais vadinamas <i>Infrastruktūros " +"veiksena</i>), <b>Pagrindinė</b>\n" +"(mazgas vadovauja sinchronizavimui arba veikia kaip prieigos taškas), <b>" +"Kartotuvo</b>\n" +"(mazgas persiunčia paketus eteriu), <b>Antrinė</b> (mazgas veikia kaip " +"atsarginių kopijų\n" "valdiklis arba kartotuvas), arba <b>Auto</b>.</p>" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:322 @@ -2496,7 +2644,8 @@ "<p>Set the <b>Network Name (ESSID)</b> used to identify\n" "cells that are part of the same virtual network. All stations in a\n" "wireless LAN need the same ESSID to communicate with each other. If\n" -"you choose the operation mode <b>Managed</b> and no <b>WPA</b> authentication mode,\n" +"you choose the operation mode <b>Managed</b> and no <b>WPA</b> authentication " +"mode,\n" "you can leave this field empty or set it to <tt>any</tt>. In this\n" "case, your WLAN card associates with the access point with the best\n" "signal strength.</p>\n" @@ -2515,7 +2664,8 @@ "NOTE: Shared key authentication makes it easier for a\n" "potential attacker to break into your network. Unless you have\n" "specific needs for shared key authentication, use the <b>Open</b>\n" -"mode. Because WEP has been proven insecure, <b>WPA</b> (Wi-Fi Protected Access)\n" +"mode. Because WEP has been proven insecure, <b>WPA</b> (Wi-Fi Protected " +"Access)\n" "was defined to close its security holes, but not all hardware supports\n" "WPA. If you want to use WPA, select <b>WPA-PSK</b> or <b>WPA-EAP</b> as the\n" "authentication mode. This is only possible in the operation mode\n" @@ -2552,16 +2702,19 @@ msgid "" "<p>These values will be written to the interface configuration file\n" "'ifcfg-*' in '/etc/sysconfig/network'. If you need additional settings,\n" -"add them manually. Refer to the file 'wireless' in the same directory for all\n" +"add them manually. Refer to the file 'wireless' in the same directory for " +"all\n" "available options.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>Šios reikšmės bus įrašytos į plokštės konfigūracinę rinkmeną\n" "„ifcfg-*“ kataloge „/etc/sysconfig/network“. Jei reikia papildomų nuostatų,\n" -"pridėkite jas rankiniu būdu. Visų galimų parametrų ieškokite rinkmenoje „wireless“,\n" +"pridėkite jas rankiniu būdu. Visų galimų parametrų ieškokite rinkmenoje " +"„wireless“,\n" "esančioje tame pačiame kataloge.</p>" #. TextEntry label #: src/include/network/lan/virtual.rb:209 +#| msgid "IP Address" msgid "IPv4 &Address Label" msgstr "IPv4 &adreso etiketė" @@ -2649,7 +2802,8 @@ "<p>For TTLS and PEAP, enter your <b>Identity</b>\n" "and <b>Password</b> as configured on the server.\n" "If you have special requirements to set the username used as\n" -"<b>Anonymous Identity</b>, you may set it here. This is usually not needed.</p>\n" +"<b>Anonymous Identity</b>, you may set it here. This is usually not needed.<" +"/p>\n" msgstr "" #. text entry label @@ -2671,7 +2825,8 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:127 msgid "" "<p>TLS uses a <b>Client Certificate</b> instead of a username and\n" -"password combination for authentication. It uses a public and private key pair\n" +"password combination for authentication. It uses a public and private key " +"pair\n" "to encrypt negotiation communication, therefore you will additionally need\n" "a <b>Client Key</b> file that contains your private key and\n" "the appropriate <b>Client Key Password</b> for that file.</p>\n" @@ -2892,10 +3047,12 @@ msgid "" "<p>To use your wireless LAN card in master or ad-hoc mode,\n" "set the <b>Channel</b> the card should use here. This is not needed\n" -"for managed mode--the card will hop through the channels searching for access\n" +"for managed mode--the card will hop through the channels searching for " +"access\n" "points in that case.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Jei jūs norite naudoti savo belaidę LAN plokštę master arba ad-hoc veiksenoje,\n" +"<p>Jei jūs norite naudoti savo belaidę LAN plokštę master arba ad-hoc " +"veiksenoje,\n" "jūs galite nustatyti <b>Kanalą</b>, kurį turi naudoti plokštė. To nereikia\n" "valdomai veiksenai, tokiu atveju plokštė eis per kanalus, ieškodama prieigos\n" "taško.</p>\n" @@ -2925,7 +3082,8 @@ "This is generally a good idea, especially if you are a laptop user and may\n" "be disconnected from AC power.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Galite <b>Naudoti energijos valdymą</b>, jei norite įjungti energijos taupymo mechanizmą.\n" +"<p>Galite <b>Naudoti energijos valdymą</b>, jei norite įjungti energijos " +"taupymo mechanizmą.\n" "Iš principo tai gera idėja, ypač jei naudojatės nešiojamuoju kompiuteriu\n" "ir galite būti atjungtas iš maitinimo tinklo.</p>\n" @@ -2990,9 +3148,12 @@ "one key.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>Šiame dialoge nustatykite savo WEP klavišus,\n" -"kurie bus naudojami duomenų kodavimui prieš siunčiant. Galite turėti iki keturių raktų,\n" -"nors tik vienas raktas naudojamas duomenų kodavimui. tai yra įprastas raktas.\n" -"Kiti raktai gali būti naudojami duomenų iškodavimui. Paprastai jūs turite tik\n" +"kurie bus naudojami duomenų kodavimui prieš siunčiant. Galite turėti iki " +"keturių raktų,\n" +"nors tik vienas raktas naudojamas duomenų kodavimui. tai yra įprastas " +"raktas.\n" +"Kiti raktai gali būti naudojami duomenų iškodavimui. Paprastai jūs turite " +"tik\n" "vieną raktą.</p>" #. Wireless keys dialog help 2/3 @@ -3006,7 +3167,8 @@ msgstr "" "<p><b>Rakto ilgis</b> nustato WEP raktų ilgumą bitais. Galimos reikšmės\n" "yra 64 ir 128 bitai, kartais taip pat minimi 40 ir 104 bitų.\n" -"Kai kurie senesni įrenginiai gali neturėti galimybės naudoti 128 bitų raktus, taigi\n" +"Kai kurie senesni įrenginiai gali neturėti galimybės naudoti 128 bitų raktus, " +"taigi\n" "jei jūsų belaidžame LAN neužsimezga ryšys, jums gali prireikti nustatyti\n" "64 bitų reikšmę.</p>" @@ -3134,14 +3296,17 @@ "<p>If this feature is enabled, you can\n" "administer this machine remotely from another machine. Use a VNC\n" "client, such as krdc (connect to <tt><hostname>:%1</tt>), or\n" -"a Java-capable Web browser (connect to <tt>http://<hostname>:%2/</tt>).\n" +"a Java-capable Web browser (connect to <tt>http://<hostname>:%2/</tt>" +").\n" "This form of remote administration is less secure than using SSH.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Nuotolinio administravimo nuostatos</big></b></p>\n" "<p>Jei ši savybė įjungta, jūs galėsite administruoti kompiuterį\n" "iš kito nutolusio kompiuterio. Galite naudoti VNC\n" -"klientą, tokį kaip krdc (jungtis prie <tt><kompiuterio_vardas>:%1</tt>), arba\n" -"palaikančią Java saityno naršyklę (jungtis prie <i>http://<kompiuterio_vardas>:%2/</i>).\n" +"klientą, tokį kaip krdc (jungtis prie <tt><kompiuterio_vardas>:%1</tt>" +"), arba\n" +"palaikančią Java saityno naršyklę (jungtis prie <i>" +"http://<kompiuterio_vardas>:%2/</i>).\n" "Ši nuotolinio administravimo forma ne tokia saugi, kaip SSH.</p>\n" #. Dialog frame title @@ -3298,6 +3463,7 @@ #. help #: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:151 +#| msgid "&Modify DNS configuration" msgid "&Modify DNS Configuration" msgstr "&Keisti DNS konfigūraciją" @@ -3373,7 +3539,9 @@ #. @param [Hash] event the event being handled #. @return whether valid #: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:496 -msgid "It's not recommended to use .local as domainname due to Multicast DNS. Use it at your own risk?" +msgid "" +"It's not recommended to use .local as domainname due to Multicast DNS. Use it " +"at your own risk?" msgstr "" #. Popup::Error text @@ -3423,7 +3591,8 @@ "<p>Enter a host <b>IP Address</b>, a <b>Hostname</b>, and optional\n" "<b>Host Aliases</b>, separated by spaces.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Įrašykite pagr. kompiuterio <b>IP adresą</b>, <b> pagr. kompiuterio vardą</b> ir, nebūtinai,\n" +"<p>Įrašykite pagr. kompiuterio <b>IP adresą</b>, <b> pagr. kompiuterio vardą<" +"/b> ir, nebūtinai,\n" "<b>kompiuterio pseudonimus</b>, atskirtus kableliais.</p>\n" #. Frame label @@ -3467,10 +3636,12 @@ #. CheckBox label #: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:110 +#| msgid "Enable &IP Forwarding" msgid "Enable &IPv4 Forwarding" msgstr "Įgalinti &IPv4 persiuntimą" #: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:111 +#| msgid "Enable &IP Forwarding" msgid "Enable I&Pv6 Forwarding" msgstr "Įgalinti &IPv6 persiuntimą" @@ -3650,13 +3821,16 @@ #. help text for Device Activation #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:151 msgid "" -"Using <b>On NFSroot</b> is similar to <tt>auto</tt>. Interfaces with this startmode will never\n" -"be shut down via <tt>rcnetwork stop</tt>. <tt>ifdown <iface></tt> is still available.\n" +"Using <b>On NFSroot</b> is similar to <tt>auto</tt>. Interfaces with this " +"startmode will never\n" +"be shut down via <tt>rcnetwork stop</tt>. <tt>ifdown <iface></tt> is still " +"available.\n" "Use this if you have an NFS or iSCSI root filesystem.\n" msgstr "" #. Combo box label - when to activate device (e.g. on boot, manually, never,..) #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:184 +#| msgid "Activate &device" msgid "Activate &Device" msgstr "Aktyvuoti &įrenginį" @@ -3665,7 +3839,8 @@ #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:190 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Device Activation</big></b></p> \n" -"<p>Choose when to bring up the network interface. <b>At Boot Time</b> activates it during system boot, \n" +"<p>Choose when to bring up the network interface. <b>At Boot Time</b> " +"activates it during system boot, \n" "<b>Never</b> does not start the device.\n" "%1</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3707,21 +3882,25 @@ #. the user can control the network with the NetworkManager program #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:287 +#| msgid "Network Services" msgid "NetworkManager Service" msgstr "NetworkManager paslauga" #. ifup is a program name #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:295 +#| msgid "Traditional Chinese" msgid "Traditional ifup" msgstr "Tradicinis ifup" #. wicked is network configuration backend like netconfig #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:303 +#| msgid "Squid Service" msgid "Wicked Service" msgstr "Wicked paslauga" #. used when no network service is active or to disable network service #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:311 +#| msgid "Network Services" msgid "Network Services Disabled" msgstr "Tinklo paslaugos uždraustos" @@ -3733,6 +3912,10 @@ msgstr "Reikia programėlės" #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:343 +#| msgid "" +#| "NetworkManager is controlled by desktop applet\n" +#| "(knetworkmanager for KDE and nm-applet for GNOME).\n" +#| "Be sure it's running and if not, start it manually." msgid "" "NetworkManager is controlled by desktop applet\n" "(KDE plasma widget and nm-applet for GNOME).\n" @@ -3794,6 +3977,7 @@ #. #. translators: a note that listed device is already configured #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:571 +#| msgid "Unconfigured" msgid "configured" msgstr "sukonfigūruota" @@ -3805,11 +3989,14 @@ msgstr "Patvirtinkite tinklo plokštės perkrovimą" #: src/lib/network/confirm_virt_proposal.rb:24 -msgid "Because of the bridged network, YaST2 needs to restart the network to apply the settings." +msgid "" +"Because of the bridged network, YaST2 needs to restart the network to apply " +"the settings." msgstr "" #. Opens dialog for editing NIC name #: src/lib/network/edit_nic_name.rb:93 +#| msgid "Device Name" msgid "Device Name:" msgstr "Įrenginio pavadinimas:" @@ -3819,6 +4006,7 @@ #. make sure there is enough space (#367239) #: src/lib/network/edit_nic_name.rb:108 +#| msgid "IP address: %1/%2" msgid "MAC address: %s" msgstr "MAC adresas: %s" @@ -4134,7 +4322,9 @@ #. @param [Hash] settings settings to be imported #. @return true on success #: src/modules/Lan.rb:698 -msgid "AutoYaST setting networking/managed: NetworkManager is not available, Wicked will be used." +msgid "" +"AutoYaST setting networking/managed: NetworkManager is not available, Wicked " +"will be used." msgstr "" #. Create a textual summary for the general network settings @@ -4182,6 +4372,7 @@ #. translators: a possible value for: IPoIB device mode #: src/modules/LanItems.rb:193 +#| msgid "Not connected" msgid "connected" msgstr "prisijungta" @@ -4222,10 +4413,12 @@ msgstr "IP adresas priskirtas prie naudojamų" #: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1302 +#| msgid "IP address: %1/%2" msgid "IP address: %s/%s" msgstr "IP adresas: %s/%s" #: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1305 +#| msgid "IP address: %1, subnet mask %2" msgid "IP address: %s, subnet mask %s" msgstr "IP adresas: %s, potinklio kaukė %s" @@ -4237,6 +4430,7 @@ #. display it only if we need it, don't duplicate "ifcfg_name" above #: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1351 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1411 +#| msgid "Device Name: %1" msgid "Device Name: %s" msgstr "Įrenginio pavadinimas: %s" @@ -4261,10 +4455,20 @@ msgstr "Jokios aparatinės įrangos informacijos" #: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1417 -msgid "Unable to configure the network card because the kernel device (eth0, wlan0) is not present. This is mostly caused by missing firmware (for wlan devices). See dmesg output for details." -msgstr "Neįmanoma konfigūruoti tinklo plokštės, nes nėra branduolio įrenginio (eth0, wlan0). Paprastai to priežastis tame, kad trūksta programinės aparatinės įrangos (angl. firmware) (ypač belaidžiams įrenginiams). Daugiau informacijos ieškokite komandinėje eilutėje įvykdę „dmesg“." +msgid "" +"Unable to configure the network card because the kernel device (eth0, wlan0) " +"is not present. This is mostly caused by missing firmware (for wlan devices). " +"See dmesg output for details." +msgstr "" +"Neįmanoma konfigūruoti tinklo plokštės, nes nėra branduolio įrenginio (eth0, " +"wlan0). Paprastai to priežastis tame, kad trūksta programinės aparatinės " +"įrangos (angl. firmware) (ypač belaidžiams įrenginiams). Daugiau informacijos " +"ieškokite komandinėje eilutėje įvykdę „dmesg“." #: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1423 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p>The device is not configured. Press <b>Edit</b>\n" +#| "to configure.</p>\n" msgid "" "The device is not configured. Press <b>Edit</b>\n" "to configure.\n" @@ -4283,6 +4487,7 @@ #. Package containing SuSEfirewall2 services has to be installed before #. reading SuSEFirewall, otherwise exception is thrown by firewall #: src/modules/Remote.rb:243 +#| msgid "SuSEfirewall2 package is not installed, firewall will be disabled." msgid "" "Package %{package} is not installed\n" "firewall settings will be disabled." @@ -4293,7 +4498,7 @@ #. Progress stage 2 #: src/modules/Remote.rb:295 msgid "Configure display manager" -msgstr "Konfigūruoti ekrano tvarkyklę" +msgstr "Konfigūruoti prisijungimų tvarkyklę" #. Progress stage 3 #: src/modules/Remote.rb:300 @@ -4306,7 +4511,7 @@ #: src/modules/Remote.rb:312 msgid "Configuring display manager..." -msgstr "Konfigūruojama ekrano tvarkyklė..." +msgstr "Konfigūruojama prisijungimų tvarkyklė..." #: src/modules/Remote.rb:316 msgid "Restarting the service..." @@ -4315,6 +4520,7 @@ #. Enable xinetd #. Enable XDM #: src/modules/Remote.rb:342 src/modules/Remote.rb:350 +#| msgid "Enabling the LDAP Service failed." msgid "Enabling service %{service} has failed" msgstr "Nepavyko įgalinti %{service} paslaugos" @@ -4365,16 +4571,19 @@ #. Summary text #: src/modules/Routing.rb:434 +#| msgid "Gateway: %1" msgid "Gateway: %s" msgstr "Tinklų sietuvas: %s" #. Summary text #: src/modules/Routing.rb:438 +#| msgid "IP Forwarding:" msgid "IP Forwarding for IPv4: %s" msgstr "IP persiuntimas, skirtas IPv4: %s" #. Summary text #: src/modules/Routing.rb:442 +#| msgid "IP Forwarding:" msgid "IP Forwarding for IPv6: %s" msgstr "IP persiuntimas, skirtas IPv6: %s" Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/online-update-configuration.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/online-update-configuration.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/online-update-configuration.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -19,7 +19,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. support basic command-line output (bnc#439050) @@ -143,7 +144,8 @@ #: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:85 msgid "<p>Press <b>%1</b> to use the default update repository.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Nuspauskite <b>%1</b> ir bus naudojama numatytoji atnaujinimų saugykla.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Nuspauskite <b>%1</b> ir bus naudojama numatytoji atnaujinimų saugykla.</p>" #: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:89 msgid "<p>Find related actions in the <b>%1</b> menu.</p>" @@ -154,16 +156,30 @@ msgstr "<p><b>%1</b>: nustatyti automatinį atnaujinimą internetu.</p>" #: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:97 -msgid "<p>Select an update interval and specify if interactive patches should be ignored and if licenses should be automatically agreed with.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pasirinkite atnaujinimo dažnumą ir nurodykite, ar nepaisyti pataisų, kurių diegimui reikia naudotojo įsikišimo ir ar norite automatiškai sutikti su licencijomis.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Select an update interval and specify if interactive patches should be " +"ignored and if licenses should be automatically agreed with.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pasirinkite atnaujinimo dažnumą ir nurodykite, ar nepaisyti pataisų, kurių " +"diegimui reikia naudotojo įsikišimo ir ar norite automatiškai sutikti su " +"licencijomis.</p>" #: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:102 -msgid "<p>All packages that are recommended by an updated package will be installed when <b>%1</b> is enabled.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Visi atnaujinamo paketo rekomenduojami paketai bus diegiami, jei bus įgalinta parinktis <b>%1</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>All packages that are recommended by an updated package will be installed " +"when <b>%1</b> is enabled.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Visi atnaujinamo paketo rekomenduojami paketai bus diegiami, jei bus " +"įgalinta parinktis <b>%1</b>.</p>" #: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:108 -msgid "<p>Category filter for patches can be configured in the section <b>%1</b>. Only patches of the listed categories will be installed. Others will be skipped.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Kategorijų atranka pataisoms gali būti konfigūruojama <b>%1</b> skydelyje. Bus diegiamos tik pateiktų kategorijų. Kitos bus praleistos.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Category filter for patches can be configured in the section <b>%1</b>. " +"Only patches of the listed categories will be installed. Others will be " +"skipped.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Kategorijų atranka pataisoms gali būti konfigūruojama <b>%1</b> skydelyje. " +"Bus diegiamos tik pateiktų kategorijų. Kitos bus praleistos.</p>" #. cache the base product details #: src/modules/OnlineUpdateConfiguration.rb:73 Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/online-update.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/online-update.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/online-update.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -16,7 +16,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. nothing to do @@ -65,8 +66,13 @@ #. help text for online-update initialization #: src/clients/online_update.rb:130 -msgid "<p>The system is initializing the installation and update repositories. Software repositories can be altered in the <b>Installation Source</b> module.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Sistema ruošia diegimo ir atnaujinimo saugyklas. Programinės įrangos diegimo šaltiniai gali būti įkelti <b>Saugyklų</b> modulyje.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The system is initializing the installation and update repositories. " +"Software repositories can be altered in the <b>Installation Source</b> " +"module.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Sistema ruošia diegimo ir atnaujinimo saugyklas. Programinės įrangos " +"diegimo šaltiniai gali būti įkelti <b>Saugyklų</b> modulyje.</p>" #. progress stage label #: src/clients/online_update.rb:137 @@ -124,6 +130,7 @@ #. error message #: src/clients/online_update.rb:222 +#| msgid "Not configured yet." msgid "No update repository configured yet." msgstr "Atnaujinimo saugykla dar nesukonfigūruota." @@ -157,8 +164,12 @@ #. help text for online update #: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:73 -msgid "<p>If special messages associated with patches are available, they will be shown in an extra dialog when the patch is installed.</p>\n" -msgstr "<p>Jei bus pranešimų, susietų su pataisomis, pataisos diegimo metu jie bus rodomi papildomame skydelyje.</p>\n" +msgid "" +"<p>If special messages associated with patches are available, they will be " +"shown in an extra dialog when the patch is installed.</p>\n" +msgstr "" +"<p>Jei bus pranešimų, susietų su pataisomis, pataisos diegimo metu jie bus " +"rodomi papildomame skydelyje.</p>\n" #. using SetContents (define in online_update.ycp) #: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:81 @@ -233,11 +244,15 @@ "At least one of the updates installed requires restart of the session.\n" "Log out and in again as soon as possible.\n" msgstr "" -"Bent vienas atnaujintas paketas reikalauja, kad būtų sesija būtų paleista iš naujo.\n" +"Bent vienas atnaujintas paketas reikalauja, kad būtų sesija būtų paleista iš " +"naujo.\n" "Atsijunkite ir vėl prisijunkite prie savo sistemos kaip tik galima greičiau.\n" #. popup message #: src/modules/OnlineUpdate.rb:51 +#| msgid "" +#| "Packages for package management were updated.\n" +#| "Finishing and restarting now." msgid "" "Packages for package management were updated.\n" "Finishing and restarting YaST now." @@ -272,15 +287,18 @@ #. continue/cancel popup text #: src/modules/OnlineUpdate.rb:76 msgid "" -"There are patches for package management available that require a restart of YaST.\n" +"There are patches for package management available that require a restart of " +"YaST.\n" "They should be installed first and all other patches after the restart.\n" "\n" "You selected some other patches to be installed now.\n" "\n" "Continue with installing your selection?" msgstr "" -"Kai kurios paketų tvarkytuvės pataisos reikalauja, kad YaST būtų paleista iš naujo.\n" -"Šios pataisos turėtų būti įdiegtos pirmiausia, o kitos pataisos – po perkrovimo.\n" +"Kai kurios paketų tvarkytuvės pataisos reikalauja, kad YaST būtų paleista iš " +"naujo.\n" +"Šios pataisos turėtų būti įdiegtos pirmiausia, o kitos pataisos – po " +"perkrovimo.\n" "\n" "Jūs pasirinkote keletą pastarųjų pataisų dabartiniam įdiegimui.\n" "\n" @@ -512,7 +530,9 @@ #. Solver can't solve it automatically #: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:457 msgid "Online update was unable to unselect some patches that need rebooting." -msgstr "Atnaujinimo internetu programa negali atsisakyti pataisų, po kurių reiktų iš naujo paleisti sistemą." +msgstr "" +"Atnaujinimo internetu programa negali atsisakyti pataisų, po kurių reiktų iš " +"naujo paleisti sistemą." #. Dialog label above a list of products (out of support) #: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:539 Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/opensuse_mirror.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/opensuse_mirror.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/opensuse_mirror.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -18,7 +18,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Copyright (c) 2014 SUSE LLC. @@ -39,6 +40,7 @@ msgstr "Katalogas" #: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:119 +#| msgid "Error" msgid "Mirrored" msgstr "Iš veidrodžio" @@ -51,10 +53,12 @@ msgstr "ne" #: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:139 +#| msgid "Exit" msgid "&Exit" msgstr "&Išeiti" #: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:144 +#| msgid "Error" msgid "&Mirror" msgstr "Naudoti &veidrodį" @@ -63,5 +67,7 @@ msgstr "&Nenaudoti veidrodžio" #: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:146 +#| msgid "Select or Deselect &All" msgid "Select/Deselect &All" msgstr "Pažymėti &viską arba nebežymėti nieko" + Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/packager.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/packager.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/packager.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -19,7 +19,8 @@ "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. module description #: src/clients/checkmedia.rb:37 @@ -390,14 +391,18 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 2/3 (version for installation) #: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1269 -msgid "<p>Select the online repositories you want to use then click <b>Next</b>.</p>\n" +msgid "" +"<p>Select the online repositories you want to use then click <b>Next</b>.\n" msgstr "" "<p>Pasirinkite norimas naudoti nuotolines saugyklas \n" "ir spauskite <b>Toliau</b>.</p>\n" #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 2/3 (version for running system) #: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1273 -msgid "<p>Select the online repositories you want to use then click <b>Finish</b>.</p>\n" +msgid "" +"<p>Select the online repositories you want to use then click <b>Finish</b>.\n" msgstr "" "<p>Pasirinkite norimas naudoti nuotolines saugyklas \n" "ir spauskite <b>Baigti</b>.</p>\n" @@ -405,7 +410,8 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 3/3 #: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1278 msgid "<p>To remove a used repository, simply deselect it.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norėdami pašalinti saugyklą, tiesiog jos nepasirinkite/nepažymėkite.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norėdami pašalinti saugyklą, tiesiog jos nepasirinkite/nepažymėkite.</p>" #. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption #: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1374 @@ -511,8 +517,12 @@ #. Solve dependencies #: src/clients/inst_rpmcopy.rb:368 -msgid "The package resolver run failed. Check your software section in the AutoYaST profile." -msgstr "Derinant paketus įvyko klaida. Patikrinkite programinės įrangos skydelį AutoYaST profilyje." +msgid "" +"The package resolver run failed. Check your software section in the AutoYaST " +"profile." +msgstr "" +"Derinant paketus įvyko klaida. Patikrinkite programinės įrangos skydelį " +"AutoYaST profilyje." #. error message - displayed in a scrollable text area #. %1 - an error message (details) @@ -576,8 +586,12 @@ #. Command line help text for the repository module, %1 is "zypper" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:75 -msgid "Installation Repositories - This module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." -msgstr "Diegimo saugyklos – šis modulis nepalaiko komandinės eilutės sąsajos, vietoj jo naudokite „%1“." +msgid "" +"Installation Repositories - This module does not support the command line " +"interface, use '%1' instead." +msgstr "" +"Diegimo saugyklos – šis modulis nepalaiko komandinės eilutės sąsajos, vietoj " +"jo naudokite „%1“." #. pad to 3 characters #: src/clients/repositories.rb:169 @@ -758,21 +772,33 @@ "Tvarkykite sukonfigūruotas programinės įrangos saugyklas ir paslaugas.</p>\n" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:909 -msgid "<P>A <B>service</B> or <B>Repository Index Service (RIS) </B> is a protocol for package repository management. A service can offer one or more software repositories which can be dynamically changed by the service administrator.</P>" -msgstr "<P><B>Paslauga</B> arba <B>Saugyklų turinio paslauga (RIS) </B> yra paketų saugyklų tvarkymo protokolas. Paslauga gali siūlyti vieną ar daugiau programinės įrangos saugyklų, kurias paslaugos administratorius gali laisvai keisti.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>A <B>service</B> or <B>Repository Index Service (RIS) </B> is a protocol " +"for package repository management. A service can offer one or more software " +"repositories which can be dynamically changed by the service administrator." +msgstr "" +"<P><B>Paslauga</B> arba <B>Saugyklų turinio paslauga (RIS) </B> yra paketų " +"saugyklų tvarkymo protokolas. Paslauga gali siūlyti vieną ar daugiau " +"programinės įrangos saugyklų, kurias paslaugos administratorius gali laisvai " +"keisti.</P>" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:916 msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b>Adding a new Repository or a Service</b><br>\n" -"To add a new repository, use <b>Add</b> and specify the software repository or service.\n" -"YaST will automatically detect whether a service or a repository is available at the entered location.\n" +"To add a new repository, use <b>Add</b> and specify the software repository " +"or service.\n" +"YaST will automatically detect whether a service or a repository is " +"available at the entered location.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "<b>Naujos saugyklos ar paslaugos pridėjimas</b><br>\n" -"Norėdami pridėti naują saugyklą (diegimo šaltinį), spauskite <b>Pridėti</b> ir nurodykite programinės įrangos saugyklą arba paslaugą.\n" -"Yast automatiškai aptiks, ar ši paslauga (arba saugykla) pasiekiama nurodytoje vietoje.\n" +"Norėdami pridėti naują saugyklą (diegimo šaltinį), spauskite <b>Pridėti</b> " +"ir nurodykite programinės įrangos saugyklą arba paslaugą.\n" +"Yast automatiškai aptiks, ar ši paslauga (arba saugykla) pasiekiama " +"nurodytoje vietoje.\n" "</p>\n" #. help, continued @@ -814,43 +840,67 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b>Modifying Status of a Repository or a Service</b><br>\n" -"To change a repository location, use <b>Edit</b>. To remove a repository, use\n" -"<b>Delete</b>. To enable or disable the repository or to change the refresh status at initialization time, select the repository in the table and use the check boxes below.\n" +"To change a repository location, use <b>Edit</b>. To remove a repository, " +"use\n" +"<b>Delete</b>. To enable or disable the repository or to change the refresh " +"status at initialization time, select the repository in the table and use " +"the check boxes below.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "<b>Saugyklos arba paslaugos naudojimo būsenos keitimas</b><br>\n" -"Norėdami pakeisti saugyklos vietą, spauskite <b>Keisti</b>. Norėdami pašalinti saugyklą, spauskite\n" -"<b>Šalinti</b>. Norėdami naudoti ar uždrausti saugyklą, ar keisti atnaujinimo būseną paleidimo metu, pasirinkite saugyklą iš lentelės ir tuomet naudokite pažymėkite atitinkamus langelius.\n" +"Norėdami pakeisti saugyklos vietą, spauskite <b>Keisti</b>. Norėdami " +"pašalinti saugyklą, spauskite\n" +"<b>Šalinti</b>. Norėdami naudoti ar uždrausti saugyklą, ar keisti " +"atnaujinimo būseną paleidimo metu, pasirinkite saugyklą iš lentelės ir " +"tuomet naudokite pažymėkite atitinkamus langelius.\n" "</p>\n" #. help text, continued #: src/clients/repositories.rb:967 msgid "" "<P><B>Priority of a Repository</B><BR>\n" -"Priority of a repository is an integer value between 0 (the highest priority) and 200 (the lowest priority). Default is 99. If a package is available in more repositories, the repository with the highest priority is used.</P>\n" +"Priority of a repository is an integer value between 0 (the highest " +"priority) and 200 (the lowest priority). Default is 99. If a package is " +"available in more repositories, the repository with the highest priority is " +"used.</P>\n" msgstr "" "<P><B>Saugyklos prioritetas</B><BR>\n" -"Saugyklos pirmenybę nurodo sveikasis skaičius iš intervalo nuo 0 (aukščiausias prioritetas) iki 200 (žemiausias prioritetas). Numatytasis yra 99. Jei paketas prieinamas keliose saugyklose, naudojama aukštesnio prioriteto saugykla.</P>\n" +"Saugyklos pirmenybę nurodo sveikasis skaičius iš intervalo nuo 0 " +"(aukščiausias prioritetas) iki 200 (žemiausias prioritetas). Numatytasis yra " +"99. Jei paketas prieinamas keliose saugyklose, naudojama aukštesnio " +"prioriteto saugykla.</P>\n" #. help text, continued #: src/clients/repositories.rb:975 -msgid "<P>Select the appropriate option on top of the window for navigation in repositories and services.</P>" -msgstr "<P>Naršymui tarp saugyklų ir paslaugų pasirinkite atitinkamą parinkti lango viršuje.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>Select the appropriate option on top of the window for navigation in " +"repositories and services.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>Naršymui tarp saugyklų ir paslaugų pasirinkite atitinkamą parinkti lango " +"viršuje.</P>" #. help text, continued #: src/clients/repositories.rb:983 msgid "" "<P><B>Keep Downloaded Packages</B><BR>Check this option to keep downloaded\n" "packages in a local cache so they can be reused later when the packages are\n" -"reinstalled. If not checked, the downloaded packages are deleted after installation.</P>" +"reinstalled. If not checked, the downloaded packages are deleted after " +"installation.</P>" msgstr "" "<P><B>Išlaikyti parsiųstus paketus</B><BR>Pažymėkite šią parinktį, \n" -"norėdami išsaugoti atsisiųstus paketus vietiniame podėlyje, taigi šiuos paketus vėliau bus galima įdiegti pakartotinai. Jei nepažymėsite, atsiųsti paketai po diegimo bus trinami.</P>" +"norėdami išsaugoti atsisiųstus paketus vietiniame podėlyje, taigi šiuos " +"paketus vėliau bus galima įdiegti pakartotinai. Jei nepažymėsite, atsiųsti " +"paketai po diegimo bus trinami.</P>" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:989 -msgid "<P>The default local cache is located in directory <B>/var/cache/zypp/packages</B>. Change the location in <B>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</B> file.</P>" -msgstr "<P>Numatytoji vietinio podėlio vieta yra kataloge <B>/var/cache/zypp/packages</B>. Vietą galima pakeisti <B>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</B> rinkmenoje.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>The default local cache is located in directory <B>/var/cache/zypp/" +"packages</B>. Change the location in <B>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</B> file.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>Numatytoji vietinio podėlio vieta yra kataloge <B>/var/cache/zypp/" +"packages</B>. Vietą galima pakeisti <B>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</B> rinkmenoje." #. popup message part 1 #: src/clients/repositories.rb:1034 @@ -979,8 +1029,10 @@ #. warning text #: src/clients/software_proposal.rb:103 #: src/clients/software_simple_proposal.rb:58 -msgid "Cannot solve dependencies automatically. Manual intervention is required." -msgstr "Negalima automatiškai suderinti priklausomybių. Reikia rankinio įsikišimo." +msgid "" +"Cannot solve dependencies automatically. Manual intervention is required." +msgstr "" +"Negalima automatiškai suderinti priklausomybių. Reikia rankinio įsikišimo." #. this is a heading #: src/clients/software_proposal.rb:145 @@ -994,8 +1046,12 @@ #. Command line help text for the software management module, %1 is "zypper" #: src/clients/sw_single.rb:64 -msgid "Software Installation - This module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." -msgstr "Programinės įrangos diegimas - šis modulis nepalaiko komandinės eilutės sąsajos, vietoj to naudokite „%1“." +msgid "" +"Software Installation - This module does not support the command line " +"interface, use '%1' instead." +msgstr "" +"Programinės įrangos diegimas - šis modulis nepalaiko komandinės eilutės " +"sąsajos, vietoj to naudokite „%1“." #. error message (%1 is a package file name) #: src/clients/sw_single.rb:194 @@ -1135,8 +1191,10 @@ #. wrong MD5 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:126 -msgid "<B>Error</B> -- MD5 sum does not match<BR>This medium should not be used." -msgstr "<B>Klaida</B> -- MD5 santrauka neatitinka<BR>Šios laikmenos nederėtų naudoti." +msgid "" +"<B>Error</B> -- MD5 sum does not match<BR>This medium should not be used." +msgstr "" +"<B>Klaida</B> -- MD5 santrauka neatitinka<BR>Šios laikmenos nederėtų naudoti." #. the correct MD5 is unknown #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:131 @@ -1162,7 +1220,8 @@ #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:304 msgid "" "<P>When you have a problem with\n" -"the installation and you are using a CD or DVD installation medium, you should check\n" +"the installation and you are using a CD or DVD installation medium, you " +"should check\n" "whether the medium is broken.</P>\n" msgstr "" "<P>Jei turite bėdų\n" @@ -1172,12 +1231,14 @@ #. help text - media check 3/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:310 msgid "" -"<P>Select a drive, insert a medium into the drive and press <B>Start Check</B>\n" +"<P>Select a drive, insert a medium into the drive and press <B>Start Check\n" "or use <B>Check ISO File</B> and select an ISO file.\n" "The check can take several minutes depending on speed of the\n" "drive and size of the medium. The check verifies the MD5 checksum.</P> " msgstr "" -"<P>Pasirinkite įrenginį, įdėkite laikmeną į jį ir spauskite <B>Pradėti tikrinimą</B>,\n" +"<P>Pasirinkite įrenginį, įdėkite laikmeną į jį ir spauskite <B>Pradėti " +"tikrinimą</B>,\n" "arba naudokite <B>Tikrinti ISO rinkmeną</B> ir pasirinkite ISO rinkmeną.\n" "Tikrinimas gali trukti keletą minučių, priklausomai nuo įrenginio greičio\n" "ir laikmenos dydžio. Patikrinimo metu tikrinamos MD5 kontrolinės sumos.</P> " @@ -1185,11 +1246,15 @@ #. help text - media check 4/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:317 msgid "" -"<P>If the check of the medium fails, you should not continue the installation.\n" -"It may fail or you may lose your data. Better replace the broken medium.</P>\n" +"<P>If the check of the medium fails, you should not continue the " +"installation.\n" +"It may fail or you may lose your data. Better replace the broken medium.\n" msgstr "" -"<P>Jei tikrinant laikmeną įvyksta klaida, jūs turėtumėte netęsti diegimo. Jis gali \n" -"nutrūkti arba jūs galite prarasti savo duomenis. Turėtumėte pakeisti sugadintą laikmeną kita.</P>\n" +"<P>Jei tikrinant laikmeną įvyksta klaida, jūs turėtumėte netęsti diegimo. " +"Jis gali \n" +"nutrūkti arba jūs galite prarasti savo duomenis. Turėtumėte pakeisti " +"sugadintą laikmeną kita.</P>\n" #. help text - media check 5/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:321 @@ -1197,27 +1262,39 @@ "After the check, insert the next medium and start the procedure again. \n" "The order of the media is irrelevant.\n" msgstr "" -"Po patikrinimo galite įdėti sekančią laikmeną ir pradėti tikrinimą iš naujo.\n" +"Po patikrinimo galite įdėti sekančią laikmeną ir pradėti tikrinimą iš " +"naujo.\n" "Laikmenų eiliškumas nesvarbus.\n" #. help text - media check 6/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:325 -msgid "<P><B>Note:</B> You cannot change the medium while it is used by the system.</P>" -msgstr "<P><B>Pastaba:</B> Jūs negalite keisti laikmenos tol, kol sistema ją naudoja.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P><B>Note:</B> You cannot change the medium while it is used by the system." +"</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P><B>Pastaba:</B> Jūs negalite keisti laikmenos tol, kol sistema ją naudoja." +"</P>" #. help text - media check 7/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:329 -msgid "<P>To check media before the installation, use the media check item in the boot menu.</P>" -msgstr "<P>Norėdami patikrinti laikmeną prieš diegimą, naudokitės laikmenos tikrinimu per paleidimo meniu.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>To check media before the installation, use the media check item in the " +"boot menu.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>Norėdami patikrinti laikmeną prieš diegimą, naudokitės laikmenos " +"tikrinimu per paleidimo meniu.</P>" #. help text - media check 8/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:333 msgid "" -"<P>If you burn the media yourself, use the <B>pad</B> option in your recording\n" -"software. It avoids read errors at the end of the media during the check.</P>\n" +"<P>If you burn the media yourself, use the <B>pad</B> option in your " +"recording\n" +"software. It avoids read errors at the end of the media during the check.\n" msgstr "" "<P>Jei patys įrašysite laikmeną, savo įrašymo programoje naudokite \n" -"<B>užpildymo</B> parinktį. Tai leidžia išvengti skaitymo klaidų laikmenos tikrinimo pabaigoje.</P>\n" +"<B>užpildymo</B> parinktį. Tai leidžia išvengti skaitymo klaidų laikmenos " +"tikrinimo pabaigoje.</P>\n" #. advice check of the media #. for translators: split the message to more lines if needed, use max. 50 characters per line @@ -1227,7 +1304,8 @@ "to avoid installation problems. To skip this step press 'Next'" msgstr "" "Patartina prieš diegiant patikrinti visas laikmenas\n" -"norint išvengti diegimo sutrikimų. Norėdami praleisti į žingsnį, spauskite „Toliau“" +"norint išvengti diegimo sutrikimų. Norėdami praleisti į žingsnį, spauskite " +"„Toliau“" #. combo box #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:352 @@ -1373,7 +1451,8 @@ msgstr "" "<p>\n" "<b>Naujo GPG rakto pridėjimas</b><br>\n" -"Norėdami pridėti naują viešąjį raktą, nurodykite kelią iki rakto rinkmenos.\n" +"Norėdami pridėti naują viešąjį raktą, nurodykite kelią iki rakto " +"rinkmenos.\n" "</p>\n" #. header in file selection popup @@ -1400,7 +1479,8 @@ msgstr "" "<p>\n" "<b>Naujo GPG rakto pridėjimas</b><br>\n" -"Norėdami pridėti naują viešąjį raktą, naudokite <b>Pridėti</b> ir nurodykite kelią iki rakto rinkmenos.\n" +"Norėdami pridėti naują viešąjį raktą, naudokite <b>Pridėti</b> ir nurodykite " +"kelią iki rakto rinkmenos.\n" "</p>" #. help, continued @@ -1414,7 +1494,8 @@ msgstr "" "<p>\n" "<b>GPG rakto būsenos keitimas</b>\n" -"Norėdami keisti patikimumo būseną, naudokite <b>Keisti</b>. Norėdami pašalinti GPG raktą, rinkitės\n" +"Norėdami keisti patikimumo būseną, naudokite <b>Keisti</b>. Norėdami " +"pašalinti GPG raktą, rinkitės\n" "<b>Šalinti</b>.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -1567,7 +1648,8 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: additional dialog information #: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1367 msgid "" -"The installation repository also contains the listed additional repositories.\n" +"The installation repository also contains the listed additional " +"repositories.\n" "Select the ones you want to use.\n" msgstr "" "Diegimo šaltinis (saugykla) dar turi ir papildomų saugyklų sąrašą.\n" @@ -1735,28 +1817,48 @@ #. warning text #: src/modules/Packages.rb:311 -msgid "Your computer is a 64-bit x86-64 system, but you are trying to install a 32-bit distribution." -msgstr "Jūsų kompiuteris yra 64 bitų x86-64 sistema, tačiau jūs bandote įdiegti 32 bitų platinamąjį paketą." +msgid "" +"Your computer is a 64-bit x86-64 system, but you are trying to install a 32-" +"bit distribution." +msgstr "" +"Jūsų kompiuteris yra 64 bitų x86-64 sistema, tačiau jūs bandote įdiegti 32 " +"bitų platinamąjį paketą." #. help text for software proposal #: src/modules/Packages.rb:327 -msgid "<P>The pattern list states which functionality will be available after installing the system.</P>" -msgstr "<P>Struktūros būsenų sąrašas, kuri bus pasiekiama po sistemos įdiegimo.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>The pattern list states which functionality will be available after " +"installing the system.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>Struktūros būsenų sąrašas, kuri bus pasiekiama po sistemos įdiegimo.</P>" #. (see bnc#178357 why these numbers) #. translators: help text for software proposal #: src/modules/Packages.rb:339 -msgid "<P>The proposal reports the total size of files which will be installed to the system. However, the system will contain some other files (temporary and working files) so the used space will be slightly larger than the proposed value. Therefore it is a good idea to have at least 25% (or about 300MB) free space before starting the installation.</P>" -msgstr "<P>Pasiūlymas praneša apie visą rinkmenų dydį, kurios įdiegtos į sistemą. Tačiau, sistema taip pat turės kai kurias kitas rinkmenas (laikinas ir darbines), taigi naudojama bus šiek tiek daugiau vietos negu pasiūlyta reikšmė. Visgi gerai palikti bent 25% (arba apie 300MB) laisvos vietos prieš pradedant diegimą.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>The proposal reports the total size of files which will be installed to " +"the system. However, the system will contain some other files (temporary and " +"working files) so the used space will be slightly larger than the proposed " +"value. Therefore it is a good idea to have at least 25% (or about 300MB) " +"free space before starting the installation.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>Pasiūlymas praneša apie visą rinkmenų dydį, kurios įdiegtos į sistemą. " +"Tačiau, sistema taip pat turės kai kurias kitas rinkmenas (laikinas ir " +"darbines), taigi naudojama bus šiek tiek daugiau vietos negu pasiūlyta " +"reikšmė. Visgi gerai palikti bent 25% (arba apie 300MB) laisvos vietos prieš " +"pradedant diegimą.</P>" #. help text for software proposal #: src/modules/Packages.rb:344 msgid "" "<P>The total 'size to download' is the size of the packages which will be\n" -"downloaded from remote (network) repositories. This value is important if the connection is slow or if there is a data limit for downloading.</P>\n" +"downloaded from remote (network) repositories. This value is important if " +"the connection is slow or if there is a data limit for downloading.</P>\n" msgstr "" -"<P>Visas siuntimo dydis – tai dydis visų paketų, kurie bus parsiųsti iš nuotolinių (tinklo) saugyklų.\n" -" Ši reikšmė yra svarbi, kai ryšys yra lėtas arba yra duomenų siuntimo limitas.</P>\n" +"<P>Visas siuntimo dydis – tai dydis visų paketų, kurie bus parsiųsti iš " +"nuotolinių (tinklo) saugyklų.\n" +" Ši reikšmė yra svarbi, kai ryšys yra lėtas arba yra duomenų siuntimo " +"limitas.</P>\n" #. help text for software proposal - header #: src/modules/Packages.rb:353 @@ -1795,23 +1897,37 @@ #. Warning message when some add-ons are marked to be removed automatically #: src/modules/Packages.rb:504 -msgid "Contact the vendors of these add-ons to provide you with new installation media." -msgstr "Maloniai prašome kreiptis į šių papildomų produktų gamintojus, kurie jums pasiūlytų naują diegimo laikmeną." +msgid "" +"Contact the vendors of these add-ons to provide you with new installation " +"media." +msgstr "" +"Maloniai prašome kreiptis į šių papildomų produktų gamintojus, kurie jums " +"pasiūlytų naują diegimo laikmeną." #. Warning message when some add-ons are marked to be removed automatically #: src/modules/Packages.rb:508 -msgid "Contact the vendor of the add-on to provide you with a new installation media." -msgstr "Maloniai prašome kreiptis į šio papildomo produkto gamintoją, kuris jums pasiūlytų naują diegimo laikmeną." +msgid "" +"Contact the vendor of the add-on to provide you with a new installation " +"media." +msgstr "" +"Maloniai prašome kreiptis į šio papildomo produkto gamintoją, kuris jums " +"pasiūlytų naują diegimo laikmeną." #. error message: %1: e.g. "/usr", %2: "/dev/sda2" #: src/modules/Packages.rb:549 -msgid "Error: Cannot check free space in basic directory %1 (device %2), cannot start installation." -msgstr "Klaida: nepavyksta patikrinti, kiek yra laisvos vietos pagrindiniame aplanke %1 (%2 įrenginyje), negalima pradėti diegti." +msgid "" +"Error: Cannot check free space in basic directory %1 (device %2), cannot " +"start installation." +msgstr "" +"Klaida: nepavyksta patikrinti, kiek yra laisvos vietos pagrindiniame aplanke " +"%1 (%2 įrenginyje), negalima pradėti diegti." #. error message: %1: e.g. "/local", %2: "/dev/sda2" #: src/modules/Packages.rb:569 msgid "Warning: Cannot check free space in directory %1 (device %2)." -msgstr "Klaida: nepavyksta patikrinti, kiek yra laisvos vietos aplanke %1 (%2 įrenginyje)." +msgstr "" +"Klaida: nepavyksta patikrinti, kiek yra laisvos vietos aplanke %1 (%2 " +"įrenginyje)." #. summary warning #: src/modules/Packages.rb:612 @@ -1821,7 +1937,8 @@ #. summary warning #: src/modules/Packages.rb:614 msgid "Not enough disk space. Remove some packages in the single selection." -msgstr "Diske nepakanka vietos. Pašalinkite kai kuriuos paketus vienu pažymėjimu." +msgstr "" +"Diske nepakanka vietos. Pašalinkite kai kuriuos paketus vienu pažymėjimu." #. add a backslash if it's missing #: src/modules/Packages.rb:635 @@ -1841,7 +1958,8 @@ #. product update: %{old_product} is an old product, %{new_product} is the new one #: src/modules/Packages.rb:716 msgid "Product <b>%{old_product}</b> will be updated to <b>%{new_product}</b>" -msgstr "Produktas <b>%{old_product}</b> atnaujinsimas iki <b>%{new_product}</b>" +msgstr "" +"Produktas <b>%{old_product}</b> atnaujinsimas iki <b>%{new_product}</b>" #: src/modules/Packages.rb:723 msgid "Product <b>%s</b> will stay installed" @@ -1863,16 +1981,20 @@ msgid "" "<ul><li><b>Some products are marked for automatic removal.</b></li>\n" "<ul><li>Contact the vendor of the removed add-on to provide you with a new\n" -"installation media</li><li>Or select the appropriate online extension or module\n" -"in the registration step</li><li>Or to continue with product upgrade go to the\n" +"installation media</li><li>Or select the appropriate online extension or " +"module\n" +"in the registration step</li><li>Or to continue with product upgrade go to " +"the\n" "software selection and mark the product (the -release package) for removal.\n" "</li></ul></li></ul>" msgstr "" "<ul><li><b>Kai kurie produktai būtų pašalinti automatiškai.</b></li>\n" "<ul><li>Susisiekite su pašalinto produkto gamintoju ir įsigykite naują\n" -"diegimo laikmeną.</li><li>Arba registruodamiesi pasirinkite atitinkamą nuotolinį\n" +"diegimo laikmeną.</li><li>Arba registruodamiesi pasirinkite atitinkamą " +"nuotolinį\n" "papildinį ar modulį.</li><li>Arba tęskite produkto naujovinimą įeidami į \n" -"programinės įrangos pasirinkimo langą ir pažymėdami produktą (paketą, kurio galūnė „-release“) kaip pašalintiną.\n" +"programinės įrangos pasirinkimo langą ir pažymėdami produktą (paketą, kurio " +"galūnė „-release“) kaip pašalintiną.\n" "</li></ul></li></ul>" #. error in proposal, %1 is URL @@ -1883,7 +2005,8 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: beginning of the rich text with the release notes #: src/modules/Packages.rb:1618 msgid "" -"<p><b>The release notes for the initial release are part of the installation\n" +"<p><b>The release notes for the initial release are part of the " +"installation\n" "media. If an Internet connection is available during configuration, you can\n" "download updated release notes from the SUSE Linux Web server.</b></p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1955,8 +2078,12 @@ msgstr "Nepavyksta perskaityti licencijos rinkmenos %1" #: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:151 -msgid "To show the product license properly, put the license.tar.gz file to the root of the live media when building the image." -msgstr "Norėdami deramai matyti produkto licenciją, kurdami atvaizdį laikmenos šakniniame aplanke patalpinkite license.tar.gz rinkmeną." +msgid "" +"To show the product license properly, put the license.tar.gz file to the " +"root of the live media when building the image." +msgstr "" +"Norėdami deramai matyti produkto licenciją, kurdami atvaizdį laikmenos " +"šakniniame aplanke patalpinkite license.tar.gz rinkmeną." #. combo box #: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:295 @@ -2309,10 +2436,14 @@ #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:495 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Repository Name</b></big><br>\n" -"Use <b>Repository Name</b> to specify the name of the repository. If it is empty, YaST will use the product name (if available) or the URL as the name.</p>\n" +"Use <b>Repository Name</b> to specify the name of the repository. If it is " +"empty, YaST will use the product name (if available) or the URL as the name." +"</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>Saugyklos pavadinimas</b></big><br>\n" -"Naudokite <b>Saugyklos pavadinimas</b> norėdami nurodyti saugyklos pavadinimą. Jei jis tuščias, YaST naudos produkto pavadinimą (jei įmanoma) arba URL.</p>\n" +"Naudokite <b>Saugyklos pavadinimas</b> norėdami nurodyti saugyklos " +"pavadinimą. Jei jis tuščias, YaST naudos produkto pavadinimą (jei įmanoma) " +"arba URL.</p>\n" #. text entry #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:509 @@ -2323,10 +2454,13 @@ #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:517 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Service Name</b></big><br>\n" -"Use <b>Service Name</b> to specify the name of the service. If it is empty, YaST will use part of the service URL as the name.</p>\n" +"Use <b>Service Name</b> to specify the name of the service. If it is empty, " +"YaST will use part of the service URL as the name.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>Paslaugos pavadinimas</b></big><br>\n" -"Rinkitės <b>Paslaugos pavadinimas</b> norėdami nurodyti paslaugos pavadinimą. Jei jis tuščias, YaST naudos paslaugos URL dalį kaip pavadinimą.</p>\n" +"Rinkitės <b>Paslaugos pavadinimas</b> norėdami nurodyti paslaugos " +"pavadinimą. Jei jis tuščias, YaST naudos paslaugos URL dalį kaip pavadinimą." +"</p>\n" #. popup message #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:552 @@ -2367,19 +2501,22 @@ "to specify the NFS server host name and path on the server.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>NFS Serveris</b></big><br>\n" -"Rinkitės <b>Serverio vardas</b> ir <b>Kelias iki katalogo arba ISO atvaizdžio</b>\n" +"Rinkitės <b>Serverio vardas</b> ir <b>Kelias iki katalogo arba ISO " +"atvaizdžio</b>\n" "norėdami nurodyti NFS serverio kompiuterio pavadinimą ir kelią serveryje.</p>" #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:779 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Mount Options</b></big><br>\n" "You can specify extra options used for mounting the NFS volume.\n" -"This is an expert option, keeping the default value is recommened. See <b>man 5 nfs</b>\n" +"This is an expert option, keeping the default value is recommened. See " +"<b>man 5 nfs</b>\n" "for details and the list of supported options." msgstr "" "<p><big><b>Prijungimo parinktys</b></big><br>\n" "Galite papildomai nurodyti prijungiamo NFS tomo parinktis.\n" -"Ši parinktis skirta pažengusiems naudotojams; siūloma palikti numatytąją reikšmę. Įvykdykite <b>man 5 nfs</b> –\n" +"Ši parinktis skirta pažengusiems naudotojams; siūloma palikti numatytąją " +"reikšmę. Įvykdykite <b>man 5 nfs</b> –\n" "rasite daugiau informacijos." #. radio button @@ -2398,7 +2535,8 @@ "Set <b>CD-ROM</b> or <b>DVD-ROM</b> to specify the type of media.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>CD arba DVD laikmena</b></big><br>\n" -"Pasirinkite <b>CD-ROM</b> arba <b>DVD-ROM</b>, kad nurodytumėte laikmenos tipą.</p>" +"Pasirinkite <b>CD-ROM</b> arba <b>DVD-ROM</b>, kad nurodytumėte laikmenos " +"tipą.</p>" #. dialog caption #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:941 @@ -2500,8 +2638,10 @@ "want to use a certain file system, select it from the list.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Įrenginyje naudojama rinkmenų sistema bus automatiškai\n" -"aptikta, jei pasirinkta „auto“ rinkmenų sistema. Jei aptikimas netinkamas arba\n" -"norite naudoti tam tikrą rinkmenų sistemą, tuomet pasirinkite ją iš sąrašo.</p>\n" +"aptikta, jei pasirinkta „auto“ rinkmenų sistema. Jei aptikimas netinkamas " +"arba\n" +"norite naudoti tam tikrą rinkmenų sistemą, tuomet pasirinkite ją iš sąrašo.\n" #. combobox title #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1369 @@ -2615,18 +2755,22 @@ "To enable authentication, uncheck <b>Anonymous</b> and specify the\n" "<b>User Name</b> and the <b>Password</b>.</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"For the SMB/CIFS repository, specify <b>Share</b> name and <b>Path to Directory\n" +"For the SMB/CIFS repository, specify <b>Share</b> name and <b>Path to " +"Directory\n" "or ISO Image</b>. \n" "If the location is a file holding an ISO image\n" "of the media, set <b>ISO Image</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>Serveris ir katalogas</b></big><br>\n" -"Rinkitės <b>Serverio vardas</b> ir <b>Kelias iki katalogo arba ISO atvaizdžio</b>\n" +"Rinkitės <b>Serverio vardas</b> ir <b>Kelias iki katalogo arba ISO " +"atvaizdžio</b>\n" "norėdami nurodyti NFS serverio kompiuterio pavadinimą ir kelią serveryje.\n" -"Norėdami įgalinti tapatybės nustatymą, atžymėkite <b>Anonimas</b> ir nurodykite \n" +"Norėdami įgalinti tapatybės nustatymą, atžymėkite <b>Anonimas</b> ir " +"nurodykite \n" "<b>naudotojo vardą</b> ir <b>slaptažodį</b>.</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"SMB/CIFS saugykloms nurodykite <b>Bendrinamų duomenų</b> pavadinimą ir <b>kelią iki katalogo\n" +"SMB/CIFS saugykloms nurodykite <b>Bendrinamų duomenų</b> pavadinimą ir " +"<b>kelią iki katalogo\n" "arba ISO atvaizdžio</b>. \n" "Jei vieta yra rinkmena, turinti laikmenos ISO atvaizdį,\n" "pasirinkite <b>ISO atvaizdis</b>.</p>\n" @@ -2634,7 +2778,8 @@ #. help text - server dialog, there is a "Port" widget #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1937 msgid "" -"<p>It is possible to set the <b>Port</b> number for a HTTP/HTTPS repository.\n" +"<p>It is possible to set the <b>Port</b> number for a HTTP/HTTPS " +"repository.\n" "Leave it empty to use the default port.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Galima HTTP/HTTPS saugyklai nurodyti <b>Prievado</b> numerį.\n" @@ -2720,13 +2865,16 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Download Files</b><br>\n" "Each repository has description files which describe the content of the\n" -"repository. Check <b>Download repository description files</b> to download the\n" +"repository. Check <b>Download repository description files</b> to download " +"the\n" "files when closing this YaST module. If the option is unchecked, YaST will\n" "automatically download the files when it needs them later. </p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Rinkmenų parsiuntimas</b><br>\n" -"Kiekviena saugykla turi aprašo rinkmenas, kurios apibūdina saugyklos turinį.\n" -"Pažymėkite <b>Atsisiųsti saugyklų aprašo rinkmenas</b> norėdami parsiųsti rinkmenas\n" +"Kiekviena saugykla turi aprašo rinkmenas, kurios apibūdina saugyklos " +"turinį.\n" +"Pažymėkite <b>Atsisiųsti saugyklų aprašo rinkmenas</b> norėdami parsiųsti " +"rinkmenas\n" "užveriant šį YaST modulį. Jei parinktis nepažymėta, YaST\n" "automatiškai atsiųs rinkmenas vėliau kai jų prireiks. </p>\n" @@ -3037,19 +3185,25 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "<p><big><b>Package Search</b></big><br>\n" -#~ "Use the functionality of <i>Webpin package search</i> to search in all known openSUSE build-service and openSUSE community repositories.</p>\n" +#~ "Use the functionality of <i>Webpin package search</i> to search in all " +#~ "known openSUSE build-service and openSUSE community repositories.</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><big><b>Paketų paieška</b></big><br>\n" -#~ "<i>Webpin paketų paieška</i> tarp visų žinomų openSUSE kūrimo paslaugų ir openSUSE bendruomenės saugyklų.</p>\n" +#~ "<i>Webpin paketų paieška</i> tarp visų žinomų openSUSE kūrimo paslaugų ir " +#~ "openSUSE bendruomenės saugyklų.</p>\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><big><b>Security</b></big><br> The software found is often not part of the\n" +#~ "<p><big><b>Security</b></big><br> The software found is often not part of " +#~ "the\n" #~ "distribution itself. You need to decide whether to trust the source of a\n" -#~ "package. We do not take any responsibility for installing such software.</p>\n" +#~ "package. We do not take any responsibility for installing such software.\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p><big><b>Saugumas</b></big><br>\n" -#~ "Rasta programinė įranga dažnai nėra pačio projekto dalis ir pasitikėjimo lygis\n" -#~ "priklauso tik nuo jūsų. Mes neprisiimame atsakomybės už tokių paketų diegimą.</p>\n" +#~ "Rasta programinė įranga dažnai nėra pačio projekto dalis ir pasitikėjimo " +#~ "lygis\n" +#~ "priklauso tik nuo jūsų. Mes neprisiimame atsakomybės už tokių paketų " +#~ "diegimą.</p>\n" #~ msgid "Select packages to install." #~ msgstr "Pasirinkite įdiegtinus paketus." @@ -3061,7 +3215,8 @@ #~ msgstr "<p><b>Paieškos klaida</b></p>" #~ msgid "<p><b>No packages matching entered criteria were found.</b></p>" -#~ msgstr "<p><b>Nerasta jokių paketų, atitinkančių nurodytus kriterijus.</b></p>" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "<p><b>Nerasta jokių paketų, atitinkančių nurodytus kriterijus.</b></p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" @@ -3102,8 +3257,10 @@ #~ msgstr "Paieškos &sritis" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>These are the release notes made for the first initial release. They are\n" -#~ "part of the installation media. During the configuration steps, if a connection\n" +#~ "<p><b>These are the release notes made for the first initial release. " +#~ "They are\n" +#~ "part of the installation media. During the configuration steps, if a " +#~ "connection\n" #~ "to the Internet is available, you can download updated release notes\n" #~ "from the SUSE Linux Web server.</b></p>" #~ msgstr "" Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/printer.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/printer.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/printer.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -19,7 +19,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Command line help text for the printer module @@ -71,17 +72,26 @@ #. If cups is missing, there can be no local running cupsd which is #. mandatory to set up local print queues. #: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:92 -msgid "Cannot configure printing (required package cups-client is not installed)." -msgstr "Spausdinimo konfigūruoti negalima (nėra įdiegtas tam reikalingas cups-client paketas)." +msgid "" +"Cannot configure printing (required package cups-client is not installed)." +msgstr "" +"Spausdinimo konfigūruoti negalima (nėra įdiegtas tam reikalingas cups-client " +"paketas)." #: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:102 -msgid "Cannot configure local printers (required package cups is not installed)." -msgstr "Spausdinimo konfigūruoti negalima (nėra įdiegtas tam reikalingas cups paketas)." +msgid "" +"Cannot configure local printers (required package cups is not installed)." +msgstr "" +"Spausdinimo konfigūruoti negalima (nėra įdiegtas tam reikalingas cups " +"paketas)." #. Skip automated queue setup when it is a client-only config: #: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:117 -msgid "No local printer accessible (using remote CUPS server '%1' for printing)." -msgstr "Nėra prieinamų vietinių spausdintuvų (naudojamas nuotolinis CUPS spausdinimo serveris „%1“)." +msgid "" +"No local printer accessible (using remote CUPS server '%1' for printing)." +msgstr "" +"Nėra prieinamų vietinių spausdintuvų (naudojamas nuotolinis CUPS spausdinimo " +"serveris „%1“)." #. Wait half a minute for a new started cupsd: #. Wait half a minute for a new started cupsd is necessary because @@ -123,7 +133,9 @@ #. so that also in this special case no automated queue setup is done. #: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:196 msgid "Cannot configure local printers (no local cupsd accessible)." -msgstr "Vietinių spausdintuvų konfigūruoti negalima (neprieinamas vietinė CUPS tarnyba)." +msgstr "" +"Vietinių spausdintuvų konfigūruoti negalima (neprieinamas vietinė CUPS " +"tarnyba)." #. with an empty URI (i.e. no need to test this here) #. but Printer::ConnectionItems adds trailing spaces @@ -179,19 +191,25 @@ #. by calling the YaST printer module autoconfig functionality right now. #: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:49 msgid "&Do an automatic configuration of local connected printers now" -msgstr "&Dabar pat automatiškai konfigūruoti prijungtus vietinius spausdintuvus" +msgstr "" +"&Dabar pat automatiškai konfigūruoti prijungtus vietinius spausdintuvus" #. Header for a dialog section where the user can #. specify if USB printers are configured automatically: #: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:61 -msgid "Specify if automatic USB printer configuration should happen when plug in" -msgstr "Nurodykite, ar USB spausdintuvai turėtų būti automatiškai konfigūruojami juos prijungus" +msgid "" +"Specify if automatic USB printer configuration should happen when plug in" +msgstr "" +"Nurodykite, ar USB spausdintuvai turėtų būti automatiškai konfigūruojami juos " +"prijungus" #. CheckBox for automatic configuration of USB printers #. by installing or removing the RPM package udev-configure-printer. #. Do not change or translate "udev-configure-printer", it is a RPM package name. #: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:75 -msgid "&Use the package udev-configure-printer for automatic USB printer configuration" +msgid "" +"&Use the package udev-configure-printer for automatic USB printer " +"configuration" msgstr "Automatinei konfigūracijai naudoti &udev-configure-printer paketą" #. where %1 will be replaced by the server name: @@ -209,8 +227,12 @@ #. PopupYesNoHeadline headline #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: #: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:101 -msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with automatic configuration of printers for the local system." -msgstr "Nuotolinio CUPS serverio nuostatos nedera su vietinės sistemos automatine spausdintuvo konfigūracija." +msgid "" +"A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with automatic configuration of " +"printers for the local system." +msgstr "" +"Nuotolinio CUPS serverio nuostatos nedera su vietinės sistemos automatine " +"spausdintuvo konfigūracija." #. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system #. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). @@ -407,7 +429,8 @@ #. show the same content as in the BasicAddDialog to set the default paper size: #: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:193 src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:271 msgid "Default paper size (if printer and driver supports it)" -msgstr "Numatytasis popieriaus dydis (jei tai palaiko spausdintuvas ir tvarkyklė)" +msgstr "" +"Numatytasis popieriaus dydis (jei tai palaiko spausdintuvas ir tvarkyklė)" #. Header of a TextEntry to enter the queue name: #. Header of a TextEntry to enter the queue name: @@ -496,8 +519,12 @@ #. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a wrong queue name was entered: #: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:379 -msgid "Only letters (a-z and A-Z), numbers (0-9), and the underscore '_' are allowed for the queue name." -msgstr "Eilės pavadinime leidžiamos tik raidės (a-z ir A-Z), skaitmenys (0-9) ir apatinis brūkšnys „_“." +msgid "" +"Only letters (a-z and A-Z), numbers (0-9), and the underscore '_' are allowed " +"for the queue name." +msgstr "" +"Eilės pavadinime leidžiamos tik raidės (a-z ir A-Z), skaitmenys (0-9) ir " +"apatinis brūkšnys „_“." #. when a queue name is changed to be valid: #: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:389 @@ -519,8 +546,12 @@ #. The 'next dialog' is the overview dialog where the printer configurations are shown #. which has a 'Refresh List' button to update the shown printer configurations: #: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:430 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:821 -msgid "If the next dialog does not show the new printer configuration as expected, wait some time and use the 'Refresh List' button." -msgstr "Jei sekančiame dialoge nerodomas naujasis spausdintuvas (kaip tikimasi), truputį palaukite ir nuspauskite mygtuką „Atnaujinti sąrašą“." +msgid "" +"If the next dialog does not show the new printer configuration as expected, " +"wait some time and use the 'Refresh List' button." +msgstr "" +"Jei sekančiame dialoge nerodomas naujasis spausdintuvas (kaip tikimasi), " +"truputį palaukite ir nuspauskite mygtuką „Atnaujinti sąrašą“." #. Only a simple message because before the RunHpsetup function was called #. and this function would have shown more specific messages. @@ -566,8 +597,12 @@ #. Do not change or translate "raw", it is a technical term when no driver is used. #. Do not change or translate "System V style interface script", it is a technical term. #: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:315 -msgid "No driver is used (it is a 'raw' queue or a 'System V style interface script' is used)" -msgstr "Nenaudojama jokia tvarkyklė (naudojama „raw“ eilė arba „Sistemos V stiliaus sąsajos komanda“)" +msgid "" +"No driver is used (it is a 'raw' queue or a 'System V style interface script' " +"is used)" +msgstr "" +"Nenaudojama jokia tvarkyklė (naudojama „raw“ eilė arba „Sistemos V stiliaus " +"sąsajos komanda“)" #: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:323 msgid "Current Driver" @@ -576,7 +611,8 @@ #. Header of a Table column with a list of printer connections. #: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:384 msgid "Adjust Options of the Current Driver or Assign a Different Driver" -msgstr "Pasirinkite dabartinės tvarkyklės parinktis arba priskirkite kitą tvarkyklę" +msgstr "" +"Pasirinkite dabartinės tvarkyklės parinktis arba priskirkite kitą tvarkyklę" #. Label of a TextEntry for a short printer driver description (only one line): #: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:461 @@ -618,8 +654,12 @@ #. The 'next dialog' is the overview dialog where the printer configurations are shown #. which has a 'Refresh List' button to update the shown printer configurations: #: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:823 -msgid "If the next dialog does not show the expected modifications, wait some time and use the 'Refresh List' button." -msgstr "Jei sekančiame dialoge nerodomi laukti pasikeitimai, truputį palaukite ir nuspauskite mygtuką „Atnaujinti sąrašą“." +msgid "" +"If the next dialog does not show the expected modifications, wait some time " +"and use the 'Refresh List' button." +msgstr "" +"Jei sekančiame dialoge nerodomi laukti pasikeitimai, truputį palaukite ir " +"nuspauskite mygtuką „Atnaujinti sąrašą“." #. Exit this dialog in any case: #. Return at least a list with only a fallback string so that the user is informed: @@ -632,7 +672,8 @@ #. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when "Driver Options" was selected: #: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:855 msgid "Possible reasons: Nothing selected or it is a remote configuration." -msgstr "Galimos priežastys: nieko nepasirinkta arba tai yra nuotolinė konfigūracija." +msgstr "" +"Galimos priežastys: nieko nepasirinkta arba tai yra nuotolinė konfigūracija." #. Header for a ComboBox to keep the printer model or select another manufacturer: #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:416 @@ -644,8 +685,10 @@ #. Do not change or translate "raw", it is a technical term #. when no driver is used for a print queue. #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:432 -msgid "Keep the model or select a &manufacturer if no 'raw queue' should be set up" -msgstr "Išlaikyti modelį arba pasirinkti &gamintoją, jei nėra nustatyta „raw eilė“" +msgid "" +"Keep the model or select a &manufacturer if no 'raw queue' should be set up" +msgstr "" +"Išlaikyti modelį arba pasirinkti &gamintoją, jei nėra nustatyta „raw eilė“" #. Header for a ComboBox to select the printer manufacturer: #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:452 @@ -657,7 +700,8 @@ #. when no driver is used for a print queue. #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:467 msgid "Select a printer &manufacturer if no 'raw queue' should be set up." -msgstr "Galite pasirinkti spausdintuvo &gamintoją, jei nėra nustatyta „raw eilė“" +msgstr "" +"Galite pasirinkti spausdintuvo &gamintoją, jei nėra nustatyta „raw eilė“" #. Header of a Table column with a list of printer connections. #. TRANSLATORS: Text entry to fill IP or hostname of remote server @@ -695,7 +739,9 @@ #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:593 #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1774 msgid "Optional 'option=value' parameter (usually empty) [percent-encoded]" -msgstr "Nebūtinas parametras „parinktis=reikšmė“ (paprastai tuščia) [užkoduota procentais]" +msgstr "" +"Nebūtinas parametras „parinktis=reikšmė“ (paprastai tuščia) [užkoduota " +"procentais]" #. TRANSLATORS: Button to test remote printer machine #. TRANSLATORS: Button to test remote printer machine @@ -763,8 +809,11 @@ msgstr "&Stabdymo bitai" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1076 -msgid "To access a bluetooth printer, the RPM package bluez-cups must be installed." -msgstr "Norint pasiekti bluetooth spausdintuvą, turi būti įdiegtas RPM paketas bluez-cups." +msgid "" +"To access a bluetooth printer, the RPM package bluez-cups must be installed." +msgstr "" +"Norint pasiekti bluetooth spausdintuvą, turi būti įdiegtas RPM paketas " +"bluez-cups." #. The user can also decide during the actual installation not to install it #. or the installation may have failed for whatever reason @@ -844,8 +893,11 @@ msgstr "URI (žiūrėkite spausdintuvo žinyną) [užkoduotas procentais]" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1402 -msgid "To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be installed." -msgstr "Norint naudotis bendrinamais SMB spausdintuvais, turi būti įdiegtas RPM paketas samba-client." +msgid "" +"To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be installed." +msgstr "" +"Norint naudotis bendrinamais SMB spausdintuvais, turi būti įdiegtas RPM " +"paketas samba-client." #. The user can also decide during the actual installation not to install it #. or the installation may have failed for whatever reason @@ -910,7 +962,8 @@ #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1792 msgid "To access an IPX print queue, the RPM package ncpfs must be installed." -msgstr "Norint naudotis IPX spausdinimo eile, turi būti įdiegtas RPM paketas ncpfs." +msgstr "" +"Norint naudotis IPX spausdinimo eile, turi būti įdiegtas RPM paketas ncpfs." #. The user can also decide during the actual installation not to install it #. or the installation may have failed for whatever reason @@ -941,7 +994,8 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Text entry for URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1976 msgid "URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) [percent-encoded]" -msgstr "URI (Universalusis ištekliaus identifikatorius) [užkoduotas procentais]" +msgstr "" +"URI (Universalusis ištekliaus identifikatorius) [užkoduotas procentais]" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1985 msgid "To print via 'pipe', the RPM package cups-backends must be installed." @@ -961,16 +1015,20 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Text entry for program name that will be called via pipe: #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2034 msgid "Program (/path/to/command?option=value) [percent-encoded]" -msgstr "Programa (/kelias/iki/komandos?parinktis=reikšmė) [užkoduota procentais]" +msgstr "" +"Programa (/kelias/iki/komandos?parinktis=reikšmė) [užkoduota procentais]" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2044 +#| msgid "To print via 'pipe', the RPM package cups-backends must be installed." msgid "To use 'beh', the RPM package cups-backends must be installed." msgstr "Norėdami naudoti „beh“, įdiekite paketą cups-backends." #. TRANSLATORS: Text entry for device URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2163 msgid "Device URI (for which 'beh' should be applied) [percent-encoded]" -msgstr "Įrenginio URI (kuriam pritaikoma vidinės pusės klaidų doroklė – „beh“) [užkoduotas procentais]" +msgstr "" +"Įrenginio URI (kuriam pritaikoma vidinės pusės klaidų doroklė – „beh“) " +"[užkoduotas procentais]" #. TRANSLATORS: Check box #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2173 @@ -1157,15 +1215,19 @@ #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2497 msgid "Serial device and baud rate could not be empty." -msgstr "Nuoseklusis įrenginys ir informacijos perdavimo sparta turi būti nurodyti." +msgstr "" +"Nuoseklusis įrenginys ir informacijos perdavimo sparta turi būti nurodyti." #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2501 msgid "The 'space' parity checking is only supported with 7 data bits." msgstr "„space“ lyginumo tikrinimas palaikomas tik su 7 duomenų bitais." #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2509 -msgid "The 'mark' parity checking is only supported with 7 data bits and 1 stop bit." -msgstr "„mark“ lyginumo tikrinimas palaikomas tik su 7 duomenų bitais ir 1 stabdymo bitu." +msgid "" +"The 'mark' parity checking is only supported with 7 data bits and 1 stop bit." +msgstr "" +"„mark“ lyginumo tikrinimas palaikomas tik su 7 duomenų bitais ir 1 stabdymo " +"bitu." #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2551 msgid "Bluetooth device ID could not be empty." @@ -1315,13 +1377,16 @@ #. and %2 will be replaced by the host name: #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3071 msgid "The generic test reports failures for share '%1' on host '%2'." -msgstr "Klaida bandant patikrinti prieigą prie bendrojo ištekliaus „%1“ kompiuteryje „%2“." +msgstr "" +"Klaida bandant patikrinti prieigą prie bendrojo ištekliaus „%1“ kompiuteryje " +"„%2“." #. where %1 will be replaced by the SMB share name #. and %2 will be replaced by the host name: #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3091 msgid "Access test failed for share '%1' on host '%2'." -msgstr "Nepavyko patikrinti prieigos prie bendrojo ištekliaus „%1“ kompiuteryje „%2“." +msgstr "" +"Nepavyko patikrinti prieigos prie bendrojo ištekliaus „%1“ kompiuteryje „%2“." #. Message of a Popup::ErrorDetails #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3133 @@ -1331,13 +1396,19 @@ #. Without a link name /usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/smb (which is provided by samba-client) #. the rest makes no sense (in particular the ln commands would create nonsense links in $PWD): #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3273 -msgid "To support Active Directory (R), the RPM package samba-krb-printing must be installed." -msgstr "Norint naudotis „Active Directory (R)“, turi būti įdiegtas samba-krb-printing RPM paketas." +msgid "" +"To support Active Directory (R), the RPM package samba-krb-printing must be " +"installed." +msgstr "" +"Norint naudotis „Active Directory (R)“, turi būti įdiegtas " +"samba-krb-printing RPM paketas." #. Show a user notification before it gets disabled: #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3313 msgid "Active Directory (R) support will be disabled for all SMB print queues." -msgstr "„Active Directory (R)“ palaikymas bus uždraustas visoms SMB spausdinimo eilėms." +msgstr "" +"„Active Directory (R)“ palaikymas bus uždraustas visoms SMB spausdinimo " +"eilėms." #. encoding: utf-8 #. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ @@ -1515,7 +1586,8 @@ #. Simply exit this dialog because it does not make sense to proceed here #. and there is nothing else to be done after this: #: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:685 -msgid "The printer description file is not in compliance with the specification." +msgid "" +"The printer description file is not in compliance with the specification." msgstr "Spausdintuvo aprašo rinkmena nėra suderinama su specifikacija." #. when a PPD file is not in compliance: @@ -1526,8 +1598,10 @@ #. Body of a Popup::ContinueCancelHeadline #. when PPD file is not in compliance: #: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:705 -msgid "A non-compliant printer description file can lead to arbitrary failures." -msgstr "Nesuderinama spausdintuvo aprašo rinkmena gali lemti tam tikras klaidas." +msgid "" +"A non-compliant printer description file can lead to arbitrary failures." +msgstr "" +"Nesuderinama spausdintuvo aprašo rinkmena gali lemti tam tikras klaidas." #: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:722 msgid "Failed to make the printer description file available" @@ -1575,12 +1649,14 @@ "<b><big>Print Queue Overview</big></b><br>\n" "A printer device is not used directly but via a print queue.<br>\n" "When various applications submit print jobs simultaneously,\n" -"these jobs are put in a queue and are sent one after the other to the printer\n" +"these jobs are put in a queue and are sent one after the other to the " +"printer\n" "device.<br>\n" "It is possible to have several different print queues for the same printer\n" "device.\n" "For example a second queue with a monochrome-only driver for a color device\n" -"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL printer.\n" +"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL " +"printer.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" @@ -1591,8 +1667,10 @@ "į spausdintuvo įrenginį.<br>\n" "Galima turėti keletą skirtingų spausdinimo eilių tam pačiam spausdintuvo\n" "įrenginiui.\n" -"Pavyzdžiui, antroji eilė su juodai balta tvarkykle spalvotam spausdintuvui arba\n" -"postskriptinė eilė ir eilė su PCL tvarkykle skirta postskriptiniam PCL spausdintuvui.\n" +"Pavyzdžiui, antroji eilė su juodai balta tvarkykle spalvotam spausdintuvui " +"arba\n" +"postskriptinė eilė ir eilė su PCL tvarkykle skirta postskriptiniam PCL " +"spausdintuvui.\n" "</p>\n" #. Overview dialog help 2/7: @@ -1716,28 +1794,37 @@ "<b><big>Set Up a New Queue for a Printer Device</big></b><br>\n" "A printer device is not used directly but via a print queue.<br>\n" "When various application programs submit print jobs simultaneously,\n" -"the jobs queue up and are sent one after the other to the printer device.<br>\n" -"It is possible to have several different print queues for the same printer device.\n" -"Usually several print queues are needed when several different printer drivers\n" +"the jobs queue up and are sent one after the other to the printer device.<br>" +"\n" +"It is possible to have several different print queues for the same printer " +"device.\n" +"Usually several print queues are needed when several different printer " +"drivers\n" "should be used for the same printer device.\n" "For example a second queue with a monochrome-only driver\n" "to enforce black-only printout on a color device\n" -"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL printer\n" -"because printing via the PCL driver is usually faster (but with less quality).\n" +"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL " +"printer\n" +"because printing via the PCL driver is usually faster (but with less " +"quality).\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Naujos eilės kūrimas spausdintuvui</big></b><br>\n" "Spausdintuvas naudojamas ne tiesiogiai, o per spausdinimo eilę.<br>\n" "Kai įvairios programos tuo pačiu metu paprašo spausdinti, šios\n" -"užduotys patalpinamos į eilę ir siunčiamos viena po kitos į spausdintuvą.<br>\n" +"užduotys patalpinamos į eilę ir siunčiamos viena po kitos į spausdintuvą.<br>" +"\n" "Galima turėti keletą skirtingų spausdinimo eilių tam pačiam spausdintuvui.\n" -"Usually several print queues are needed when several different printer drivers\n" +"Usually several print queues are needed when several different printer " +"drivers\n" "should be used for the same printer device.\n" "Pavyzdžiui, antroji eilė su juodai-balta tvarkykle spalvotam spausdintuvui\n" "nespalvotam spausdinimui spalvotu įrenginiu,\n" -"arba postskriptinė eilė ir eilė su PCL tvarkykle skirta postskriptiniam PCL spausdintuvui,\n" -"kadangi spausdinimas per PCL tvarkykle yra greitesnis (bet ir prastesnės kokybės).\n" +"arba postskriptinė eilė ir eilė su PCL tvarkykle skirta postskriptiniam PCL " +"spausdintuvui,\n" +"kadangi spausdinimas per PCL tvarkykle yra greitesnis (bet ir prastesnės " +"kokybės).\n" "</p>" #. BasicAddDialog help 2/7: @@ -1761,7 +1848,8 @@ #: src/include/printer/helps.rb:152 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"The <b>connection</b> determines which way data is sent to the printer device.<br>\n" +"The <b>connection</b> determines which way data is sent to the printer " +"device.<br>\n" "If a wrong connection is selected, no data can be sent to the device\n" "so that there cannot be any printout.<br>\n" "If a printer device is accessible via more than one connection type,\n" @@ -1769,13 +1857,16 @@ "In particular HP devices are often accessible both via the 'usb:/...'\n" "and the 'hp:/...' connection.\n" "The latter is provided by the HP driver package 'hplip'.\n" -"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything else\n" -"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one device)\n" +"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything " +"else\n" +"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one " +"device)\n" "the 'hp:/...' connection must be used.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"<b>Ryšio tipas</b> nurodo būdą, kuriuo duomenys siunčiami į spausdintuvą. <br>\n" +"<b>Ryšio tipas</b> nurodo būdą, kuriuo duomenys siunčiami į spausdintuvą. <br>" +"\n" "Jei pasirenkamas netinkamas prisijungimo būdas, duomenys nesiunčiami,\n" "taigi nieko nepavyksta išspausdinti.<br>\n" "Jei spausdintuvas palaiko keletą prisijungimo būdų,\n" @@ -1795,7 +1886,8 @@ "The <b>driver</b> determines that the right data is produced for the\n" "specific printer model.<br>\n" "If a wrong driver is assigned, wrong data is sent to the printer\n" -"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all.<br>\n" +"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all.<" +"br>\n" "Initially the input field for the driver search string is preset\n" "with the autodetected model name of the currently selected connection\n" "and those drivers where the driver description matches to the model name\n" @@ -1820,7 +1912,8 @@ "and feel free to play around and modify the settings\n" "to what you know what works best for your printer.<br>\n" "If no driver description matches to the autodetected model name,\n" -"it does not necessarily mean that there is no driver available for the model.\n" +"it does not necessarily mean that there is no driver available for the " +"model.\n" "Often only the model name in the driver descriptions\n" "is different from the autodetected model name.\n" "Therefore you can enter whatever you like as driver search string\n" @@ -1842,7 +1935,8 @@ "<p>\n" "<b>Tvarkyklė</b> teisingai apdoroja duomenis, kad jie tiktų\n" "tam tikram spausdintuvo modeliui.<br>\n" -"Jei priskiriama netinkama tvarkyklė, į spausdintuvą siunčiami netinkami duomenys,\n" +"Jei priskiriama netinkama tvarkyklė, į spausdintuvą siunčiami netinkami " +"duomenys,\n" "kurie lemia blogą atspausdintą vaizdą, chaotišką spausdinimą,\n" "ar gali net nespausdinti.<br>\n" "Pirmiausia tvarkyklės paieškos įvesties laukelyje parenkamas raktažodis\n" @@ -1856,7 +1950,8 @@ "Jei tvarkyklė automatiškai neparenkama, jūs turite rankiniu būdu\n" "susirasti ir pasirinkti tinkamą tvarkyklę.<br>\n" "Iš kitos pusės, jei tvarkyklė buvo automatiškai parinkta, \n" -"tai nebūtinai reiškia, kad ji yra geriausiai jūsų poreikius atitinkanti tvarkyklė.\n" +"tai nebūtinai reiškia, kad ji yra geriausiai jūsų poreikius atitinkanti " +"tvarkyklė.\n" "Tiksliau sakant, automatinis tvarkyklės parinkimas\n" "gali visiškai nepraversti būtent jūsų spausdintuvo modeliui.\n" "To priežastis yra ta, kad automatinės tvarkyklės parinkimas\n" @@ -1880,7 +1975,8 @@ "privalo atitikti tikrąjį jūsų spausdintuve naudojamo popieriaus dydį.\n" "Galite tiksliai pasirinkti A4 ar laiško dydį kaip numatytąjį,\n" "arba nieko nepasirinkti norėdami naudoti tvarkyklėje numatytąjį popieriaus\n" -"dydį, kuris taip pat laikomas atsargoje, jei tvarkyklė nepalaiko nei A4, nei laiško.\n" +"dydį, kuris taip pat laikomas atsargoje, jei tvarkyklė nepalaiko nei A4, nei " +"laiško.\n" "(pavyzdžiui, tvarkyklė mažo formato nuotraukų spausdintuvui).\n" "Jei norite nustatyti tvarkyklės kitą parinktį be A4 ar laiško dydžio,\n" "pirmiausia turite nustatyti eilę ir tada antruoju žingsniu\n" @@ -1951,7 +2047,8 @@ msgstr "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Spausdinimo eilės keitimas</big></b><br>\n" -"Norėdami keisti eilę, pasirinkite tąją, kurią iš tiesų norite pakoreguoti.<br>\n" +"Norėdami keisti eilę, pasirinkite tąją, kurią iš tiesų norite pakoreguoti.<br>" +"\n" "</p>" #. BasicModifyDialog help 2/4: @@ -1966,8 +2063,10 @@ "In particular HP devices are often accessible both via the 'usb:/...'\n" "and the 'hp:/...' connection.\n" "The latter is provided by the HP driver package 'hplip'.\n" -"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything else\n" -"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one device)\n" +"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything " +"else\n" +"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one " +"device)\n" "the 'hp:/...' connection must be used.<br>\n" "When you exchange the currently used connection with another one,\n" "the input field for the driver search string is preset\n" @@ -1997,7 +2096,8 @@ "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"<b>Ryšio tipas</b> nurodo būdą, kuriuo duomenys siunčiami į spausdintuvą. <br>\n" +"<b>Ryšio tipas</b> nurodo būdą, kuriuo duomenys siunčiami į spausdintuvą. <br>" +"\n" "Jei pasirenkamas netinkamas prisijungimo būdas, duomenys nesiunčiami,\n" "taigi nieko nepavyksta išspausdinti.<br>\n" "Jei spausdintuvas palaiko keletą prisijungimo būdų,\n" @@ -2019,7 +2119,8 @@ "Jei tvarkyklė automatiškai neparenkama, jūs turite rankiniu būdu\n" "susirasti ir pasirinkti tinkamą tvarkyklę.<br>\n" "Iš kitos pusės, jei tvarkyklė buvo automatiškai parinkta, \n" -"tai nebūtinai reiškia, kad ji yra geriausiai jūsų poreikius atitinkanti tvarkyklė.\n" +"tai nebūtinai reiškia, kad ji yra geriausiai jūsų poreikius atitinkanti " +"tvarkyklė.\n" "Tiksliau sakant, automatinis tvarkyklės parinkimas\n" "gali visiškai nepraversti būtent jūsų spausdintuvo modeliui.\n" "To priežastis yra ta, kad automatinės tvarkyklės parinkimas\n" @@ -2045,9 +2146,12 @@ "The <b>driver</b> determines that the right data is produced for the\n" "specific printer model.<br>\n" "If a wrong driver is assigned, wrong data is sent to the printer\n" -"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all.<br>\n" -"You can either select another driver and modify its driver option settings later\n" -"or keep the currently used driver and modify its driver option settings now.<br>\n" +"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all.<" +"br>\n" +"You can either select another driver and modify its driver option settings " +"later\n" +"or keep the currently used driver and modify its driver option settings now.<" +"br>\n" "Some driver option settings must match to your particular printer.\n" "For example the default paper size setting of the driver\n" "must match to the paper which is actually loaded in your printer.<br>\n" @@ -2064,7 +2168,8 @@ "and then in a second step you can adjust all driver options\n" "by using this dialog again.<br>\n" "Initially the input field for the driver search string is preset\n" -"with the description of the currently used driver when the connection was not changed.\n" +"with the description of the currently used driver when the connection was not " +"changed.\n" "This results usually only one single driver which matches\n" "so that you would have to enter a less specific driver search string\n" "to get also other drivers or you use the 'Find More' button.\n" @@ -2076,10 +2181,14 @@ "<p>\n" "<b>Tvarkyklė</b> teisingai apdoroja duomenis, kad jie tiktų\n" "tam tikram spausdintuvo modeliui.<br>\n" -"Jei priskiriama netinkama tvarkyklė, į spausdintuvą siunčiami netinkami duomenys,\n" -"kurie lemia blogą atspausdintą vaizdą, chaotišką spausdinimą, ar gali net nespausdinti.<br>\n" -"Taip pat jūs galite vėliau pasirinkti kitą tvarkyklę ir keisti jos parinktis,\n" -"arba galite išlaikyti šiuo metu naudojamą tvarkyklę ir dabar keisti jos parinktis.\n" +"Jei priskiriama netinkama tvarkyklė, į spausdintuvą siunčiami netinkami " +"duomenys,\n" +"kurie lemia blogą atspausdintą vaizdą, chaotišką spausdinimą, ar gali net " +"nespausdinti.<br>\n" +"Taip pat jūs galite vėliau pasirinkti kitą tvarkyklę ir keisti jos " +"parinktis,\n" +"arba galite išlaikyti šiuo metu naudojamą tvarkyklę ir dabar keisti jos " +"parinktis.\n" "Kai kurios tvarkyklių parinktys privalo atitikti jūsiškį spausdintuvą.\n" "Pavyzdžiui, numatytasis tvarkyklės popieriaus dydžio parametras\n" "privalo atitikti tikrąjį jūsų spausdintuve naudojamo popieriaus dydį.\n" @@ -2099,8 +2208,10 @@ "su šiuo metu naudojamos tvarkyklės aprašu, jei ryšio tipas nepakeistas.\n" "Paieška paprastai pateikia tik vienintelę atitinkančią tvarkyklę,\n" "taigi turėtumėte įvesti paprastesnį paieškos raktažodį,\n" -"jei norite matyti ir kitas tvarkykles, arba pasirinkite mygtuką „Ieškoti daugiau“.\n" -"Jei jokia tvarkyklė nerandama, tai dar nereiškia, kad nėra prieinamų tvarkyklių.\n" +"jei norite matyti ir kitas tvarkykles, arba pasirinkite mygtuką „Ieškoti " +"daugiau“.\n" +"Jei jokia tvarkyklė nerandama, tai dar nereiškia, kad nėra prieinamų " +"tvarkyklių.\n" "Todėl jūs gali įvesti bet kokį savo tvarkyklės paieškos raktažodį\n" "ir ieškoti tarp visų prieinamų tvarkyklių aprašų.\n" "</p>" @@ -2110,8 +2221,10 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "In contrast to connection and driver where you must select the right one,\n" -"you are free to enter arbitrary strings for <b>description</b> and <b>location</b>.\n" -"Application programs often show description and location in the print dialog.\n" +"you are free to enter arbitrary strings for <b>description</b> and <b>" +"location</b>.\n" +"Application programs often show description and location in the print " +"dialog.\n" "To make sure that those strings look correct in any language\n" "which a particular user of a particular application program may use,\n" "it is safe when you use only plain ASCII text without\n" @@ -2124,7 +2237,8 @@ "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Kitaip nei ryšio tipui ar tvarkyklei, kuriems privalote parinkti vienintelį parametrą,\n" +"Kitaip nei ryšio tipui ar tvarkyklei, kuriems privalote parinkti vienintelį " +"parametrą,\n" "<b>aprašui</b> ir <b>vietai</b> gali laisvai įvesti keletą eilučių.\n" "Spausdinimo skydeliuose programos dažniausiai rodo aprašą ir vietą.\n" "Norėdami įsitikinti, kad šios eilutės teisingai atrodytų bet kokia kalba,\n" @@ -2176,10 +2290,13 @@ "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Ne numatytosios nuostatos gali visai neveikti arba turėti netikėtų pasekmių.<br>\n" +"Ne numatytosios nuostatos gali visai neveikti arba turėti netikėtų pasekmių.<" +"br>\n" "Pavyzdžiui, didelės raiškos nuostata neveiks lazeriniame spausdintuve,\n" -"jei jo vidinės atminties nepakanka puslapių spausdinimui didele skiriamąja geba.<br>\n" -"Spausdinimas didele skiriamąja geba gali trukti ypač ilgai rašaliniu spausdintuvu.\n" +"jei jo vidinės atminties nepakanka puslapių spausdinimui didele skiriamąja " +"geba.<br>\n" +"Spausdinimas didele skiriamąja geba gali trukti ypač ilgai rašaliniu " +"spausdintuvu.\n" "</p>\n" #. DriverOptionsDialog help 3/3: @@ -2201,7 +2318,8 @@ "Ypač kai spausdintuvas turi tokias ypatybes kaip\n" "dvipusis spausdinimas ar papildomas popieriaus padavimas, turi būti pažymėti\n" "ir sukonfigūruoti atitinkami tvarkyklės parametrai.<br>\n" -"Pavyzdžiui, dvipusio spausdinimo parinktis privalo būti „installed“ (įdiegta) ar „true“ (tiesa),\n" +"Pavyzdžiui, dvipusio spausdinimo parinktis privalo būti „installed“ (įdiegta) " +"ar „true“ (tiesa),\n" "nes priešingu atveju tvarkyklė gali nepaisyti dvigubo spausdinimo nuostatų.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -2299,30 +2417,65 @@ msgstr "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Ryšio tipo parinkimas</big></b><br>\n" -"<b>Ryšio tipas</b> nurodo būdą, kuriuo duomenys siunčiami į spausdintuvą. <br>\n" +"<b>Ryšio tipas</b> nurodo būdą, kuriuo duomenys siunčiami į spausdintuvą. <br>" +"\n" "Jei naudojamas netinkamas prisijungimo būdas, duomenys nesiunčiami,\n" "taigi nieko nepavyksta išspausdinti.\n" "</p>\n" #. ConnectionWizardDialog help 2/7: #: src/include/printer/helps.rb:450 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p>\n" +#| "<b><big>Printer Device URI</big></b><br>\n" +#| "A connection is specified as so called <b>device URI</b>.<br>\n" +#| "Its first word (the so called URI scheme) specifies the kind of data-transfer,\n" +#| "for example 'parallel', 'usb', 'socket', 'lpd', or 'ipp'.<br>\n" +#| "After the scheme there are more or less additional components\n" +#| "which specify the details for this kind of data-transfer.<br>\n" +#| "Space characters are not allowed in an URI.\n" +#| "Therefore a space character in a value of an URI component\n" +#| "is encoded as '%20' (20 is the hexadecimal value of the space character).<br>\n" +#| "The components of an URI are separated by special reserved characters like\n" +#| "colon ':', slash '/', question mark '?', ampersand '&', or equals sign '='.<br>\n" +#| "Finally there could be optional parameters (separated by a question mark '?')\n" +#| "of the form 'option1=value1&option2=value2&option3=value3' so that\n" +#| "a full device URI could be for example:<br>\n" +#| "ipp://server.domain:631/printers/queuename?waitjob=false&waitprinter=false<br>\n" +#| "Some examples:<br>\n" +#| "A USB printer model 'Fun Printer 1000+' made by 'ACME'\n" +#| "with serial number 'A1B2C3' may have a device URI like:<br>\n" +#| "usb://ACME/Fun%20Printer%201000%2B?serial=A1B2C3<br>\n" +#| "A network printer with IP 192.168.100.1 which is accessible\n" +#| "via port 9100 may have a device URI like:<br>\n" +#| "socket://192.168.100.1:9100<br>\n" +#| "A network printer with IP 192.168.100.2 which is accessible\n" +#| "via LPD protocol with a remote LPD queue name 'LPT1'\n" +#| "may have a device URI like:<br>\n" +#| "lpd://192.168.100.2/LPT1\n" +#| "</p>" msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Printer Device URI</big></b><br>\n" "A connection is specified as so called <b>device URI</b>.<br>\n" -"Its first word (the so called URI scheme) specifies the kind of data-transfer,\n" +"Its first word (the so called URI scheme) specifies the kind of " +"data-transfer,\n" "for example 'usb', 'socket', 'lpd', or 'ipp'.<br>\n" "After the scheme there are more or less additional components\n" "which specify the details for this kind of data-transfer.<br>\n" "Space characters are not allowed in an URI.\n" "Therefore a space character in a value of an URI component\n" -"is encoded as '%20' (20 is the hexadecimal value of the space character).<br>\n" +"is encoded as '%20' (20 is the hexadecimal value of the space character).<br>" +"\n" "The components of an URI are separated by special reserved characters like\n" -"colon ':', slash '/', question mark '?', ampersand '&', or equals sign '='.<br>\n" -"Finally there could be optional parameters (separated by a question mark '?')\n" +"colon ':', slash '/', question mark '?', ampersand '&', or equals sign " +"'='.<br>\n" +"Finally there could be optional parameters (separated by a question mark " +"'?')\n" "of the form 'option1=value1&option2=value2&option3=value3' so that\n" "a full device URI could be for example:<br>\n" -"ipp://server.domain:631/printers/queuename?waitjob=false&waitprinter=false<br>\n" +"ipp://server.domain:631/printers/queuename?waitjob=false&waitprinter=false" +"<br>\n" "Some examples:<br>\n" "A USB printer model 'Fun Printer 1000+' made by 'ACME'\n" "with serial number 'A1B2C3' may have a device URI like:<br>\n" @@ -2347,11 +2500,15 @@ "Todėl tarpo simbolis URI komponento reikšmėje\n" "užkoduotas kaip „%20“ (20 yra tarpo simbolio šešioliktainė reikšmė).<br>\n" "Šie URI komponentai atskiriami specialiu rezervuotu simboliu, pvz.,\n" -"dvitaškiu „:“, pasviruoju brūkšniu „/“, klaustuku „?“, ampersandu „&“ arba lygybe „=“.<br>\n" -"Galiausiai, gali būti papildomai naudojami parametrai (atskirti klaustuku „?“)\n" -"formatu „parinktis1=reikšmė1&parinktis2=reikšmė2&parinktis3=reikšmė3“.\n" +"dvitaškiu „:“, pasviruoju brūkšniu „/“, klaustuku „?“, ampersandu „&“ " +"arba lygybe „=“.<br>\n" +"Galiausiai, gali būti papildomai naudojami parametrai (atskirti klaustuku " +"„?“)\n" +"formatu „parinktis1=reikšmė1&parinktis2=reikšmė2&parinktis3=reikšmė3“." +"\n" "Pilno įrenginio URI pavyzdys:<br>\n" -"ipp://serveris.sritis:631/spausdintuv/eilpavad?waitjob=false&waitprinter=false<br>\n" +"ipp://serveris.sritis:631/spausdintuv/eilpavad?waitjob=false&waitprinter=f" +"alse<br>\n" "Kai kurie pavyzdžiai:<br>\n" "„ACME“ USB spausdintuvo modelis „Fun Printer 1000+“\n" "su „A1B2C3“ eilės numeriu gali turėti tokį įrenginio URI:<br>\n" @@ -2457,7 +2614,8 @@ #: src/include/printer/helps.rb:588 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"<b><big>Device URIs to Access a Network Printer or a Printserver Box</big></b><br>\n" +"<b><big>Device URIs to Access a Network Printer or a Printserver Box</big></b>" +"<br>\n" "A printserver box is a small device with a network connection\n" "and a USB or parallel port connection to connect the actual printer.\n" "A network printer has such a device built-in.\n" @@ -2494,14 +2652,16 @@ "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"<b><big>Tinklo spausdintuvų ir spausdinimo serverio dėžutės įrenginių URI</big></b><br>\n" +"<b><big>Tinklo spausdintuvų ir spausdinimo serverio dėžutės įrenginių URI<" +"/big></b><br>\n" "Spausdinimo serverio dėžutė yra mažas įrenginys su tinklo ryšiu\n" "ir USB ar lygiagrečiuoju prievadu ryšiui su naudojamu spausdintuvu.\n" "Tinklo spausdintuvas turi turi tokį įtaisą viduje.\n" "Prieiga galima trimis skirtingais tinklo protokolais.\n" "Savo tinklo spausdintuvo ar spausdinimo serverio dėžutėje žiūrėkite,\n" "kurį iš jų palaiko jūsiškis spausdintuvas:<br>\n" -"<b>TCP prievadas (AppSocket/JetDirect) (programinė/tiesioginė jungtis)</b><br>\n" +"<b>TCP prievadas (AppSocket/JetDirect) (programinė/tiesioginė jungtis)</b><br>" +"\n" "Prieigai būtinas IP adresas ir prievado numeris.\n" "Dažniausiai naudojamas prievado numeris yra 9100.\n" "Tai paprasčiausias, greičiausias ir dažnai tinkamiausias protokolas.\n" @@ -2532,6 +2692,90 @@ #. ConnectionWizardDialog help 6/7: #: src/include/printer/helps.rb:627 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p>\n" +#| "<b><big>Device URIs to Print Via a Print Server Machine</big></b><br>\n" +#| "In contrast to a printserver box a print server machine\n" +#| "means a real computer which offers a print service.<br>\n" +#| "Access happens via various different network protocols.\n" +#| "Ask your network administrator what which print server machine\n" +#| "provides in your particular network:<br>\n" +#| "<b>Windows (R) or Samba (SMB/CIFS)</b><br>\n" +#| "To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be installed.\n" +#| "The package provides the CUPS backend 'smb' which is a link to\n" +#| "the <tt>/usr/bin/smbspool</tt> program which actually sends the data\n" +#| "to a SMB printer share.<br>\n" +#| "A server name and a printer share name and optionally a workgroup name\n" +#| "is needed to access it.\n" +#| "Furthermore a user name and a password may be required to get access.\n" +#| "Have in mind that spaces and special characters in those values\n" +#| "must be percent-encoded (see above).<br>\n" +#| "By default CUPS runs backends (here smbspool) as user 'lp'.\n" +#| "When printing in an Active Directory (R) environment (AD)\n" +#| "the user 'lp' is not allowed to print in this environment\n" +#| "so that the traditional way to print via smbspool as user 'lp'\n" +#| "would not work.<br>\n" +#| "For printing in an AD environment additionally\n" +#| "the RPM package samba-krb-printing must be installed.\n" +#| "In this case the CUPS backend 'smb' link\n" +#| "is changed to <tt>/usr/bin/get_printing_ticket</tt>\n" +#| "which is a wrapper to run smbspool as the original user\n" +#| "who submitted a particular print job.\n" +#| "When the Kerberos protocol is used for authentication\n" +#| "in an AD environment, a user gets a ticket granting ticket (TGT)\n" +#| "via the display manager during login at the Gnome or KDE desktop.\n" +#| "When smbspool is run as the original user who submitted\n" +#| "a particular print job, it can access the TGT of this user\n" +#| "and use it to pass the printing data to the SMB printer share\n" +#| "even in an AD environment with Kerberos authentication.\n" +#| "In this case neither a fixed user name nor a fixed password\n" +#| "has to be specified for authentication.\n" +#| "A precondition is that get_printing_ticket runs on the same host\n" +#| "where the user who submitted a particular print job is logged in.\n" +#| "This means that it must be set up on the workstation\n" +#| "for the particular user who will submit such print jobs\n" +#| "and the user's workstation must send its printing data\n" +#| "directly to the SMB printer share in the AD environment.\n" +#| "In particular it does not work on a separated CUPS server machine\n" +#| "where users who submit print jobs are not logged in.<br>\n" +#| "For the traditional way a matching full device URI is:<br>\n" +#| "smb://username:password@workgroup/server/printer<br>\n" +#| "For example 'John Doe' with password '@home!' may use something like\n" +#| "the following device URI to access a 'Fun Printer 1000+' share:<br>\n" +#| "smb://John%20Doe:%40home%21@MYGROUP/homeserver/Fun%20Printer%201000%2B<br>\n" +#| "For <b>more information</b> have a look at <tt>man smbspool</tt> and<br>\n" +#| "http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Printing_via_SMB_(Samba)_Share_or_Windows_Share<br>\n" +#| "'Windows' and 'Active Directory' are registered trademarks\n" +#| "of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.<br>\n" +#| "<b>Traditional UNIX Server (LPR)</b><br>\n" +#| "A Line Printer Daemon (LPD) runs on a traditional UNIX server\n" +#| "and provides one or more LPD queues.\n" +#| "The IP address and a LPD queue name is needed to access it.\n" +#| "The matching device URI is:<br>\n" +#| "lpd://ip-address/queue<br>\n" +#| "<b>CUPS Server</b><br>\n" +#| "Usually you should not set up a local print queue to access\n" +#| "a remote queue on a CUPS server. Instead do the setup\n" +#| "in the <b>Print Via Network</b> dialog.\n" +#| "Only if you really know that you must set up a local print queue\n" +#| "to access a remote queue on a CUPS server proceed here.<br>\n" +#| "IPP is the native protocol for CUPS which runs on a server.\n" +#| "The official IANA port for IPP is 631.\n" +#| "The matching device URI is:<br>\n" +#| "ipp://ip-address:631/printers/queue<br>\n" +#| "<b>Novell Netware Print Server (IPX)</b><br>\n" +#| "To access print queues on a Novell Netware print server,\n" +#| "the RPM package ncpfs must be installed.\n" +#| "The package provides the CUPS backend 'novell' which runs\n" +#| "the <tt>nprint</tt> program which actually sends the data\n" +#| "to a Novell Netware print queue.\n" +#| "A server name and a printer queue name is needed to access it.\n" +#| "Furthermore a user name and a password may be required to get access.\n" +#| "The matching device URI is:<br>\n" +#| "novell://username:password@server/queue<br>\n" +#| "For <b>more information</b> have a look at <tt>man nprint</tt> and\n" +#| "the other documentation in the RPM package ncpfs.\n" +#| "</p>" msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Device URIs to Print Via a Print Server Machine</big></b><br>\n" @@ -2541,7 +2785,8 @@ "Ask your network administrator what which print server machine\n" "provides in your particular network:<br>\n" "<b>Windows (R) or Samba (SMB/CIFS)</b><br>\n" -"To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be installed.\n" +"To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be " +"installed.\n" "The package provides the CUPS backend 'smb' which is a link to\n" "the <tt>/usr/bin/smbspool</tt> program which actually sends the data\n" "to a SMB printer share.<br>\n" @@ -2584,7 +2829,8 @@ "the following device URI to access a 'Fun Printer 1000+' share:<br>\n" "smb://John%20Doe:%40home%21@MYGROUP/homeserver/Fun%20Printer%201000%2B<br>\n" "For <b>more information</b> have a look at <tt>man smbspool</tt> and<br>\n" -"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Printing_via_SMB_(Samba)_Share_or_Windows_Share<br>\n" +"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Printing_via_SMB_(Samba)_Share_or_Windows_Share<br>" +"\n" "'Windows' and 'Active Directory' are registered trademarks\n" "of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.<br>\n" "<b>Traditional UNIX Server (LPR)</b><br>\n" @@ -2605,14 +2851,16 @@ "ipp://ip-address:631/printers/queue<br>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"<b><big>Įrenginių URI spausdinimui per spausdinimo serverio mašiną</big></b><br>\n" +"<b><big>Įrenginių URI spausdinimui per spausdinimo serverio mašiną</big></b><" +"br>\n" "Kitaip nei spausdinimo serverio dėžutė, spausdinimo serverio mašina –\n" "tai tikras kompiuteris, turintis spausdinimo paslaugą.<br>\n" "Prieiga galima įvairiais skirtingais tinklo protokolais.\n" "Teiraukitės savo tinklo administratoriaus, kokia spausdinimo serverio mašina\n" "pasiekiama jūsų tinkle:<br>\n" "<b>Windows (R) arba SAMBA (SMB/CIFS)</b><br>\n" -"Prieigai prie bendrų SMB spausdintuvų reikalingas įdiegtas RPM paketas „samba-client“.\n" +"Prieigai prie bendrų SMB spausdintuvų reikalingas įdiegtas RPM paketas " +"„samba-client“.\n" "Paketas pateikia CUPS vidinės pusės „smb“, kuris susijęs su\n" "<tt>/usr/bin/smbspool</tt> programa, iš tiesų siunčiančia duomenis\n" "į bendrą SMB spausdintuvą.<br>\n" @@ -2633,7 +2881,8 @@ "kuri nukreipia į smbspool kaip originalus naudotojas,\n" "kuris siunčia tam tikrą spausdinimo užduotį.\n" "Jei AD aplinkoje tapatumo nustatymui naudojamas Kerberos\n" -"protokolas, naudotojas gauna bilietą suteikiantį bilietą (ticket granting ticket, TGT)\n" +"protokolas, naudotojas gauna bilietą suteikiantį bilietą (ticket granting " +"ticket, TGT)\n" "per darbalaukio tvarkytuvę prisijungimo prie GNOME ar KDE darbalaukio metu.\n" "Kai smbspool veikia kaip originalus naudotojas, kuris nusiuntė\n" "tam tikrą užduotį, jis gali pasiekti to naudotojo TGT ir jį naudoti\n" @@ -2641,7 +2890,8 @@ "įvykį AD aplinkoje su Kerberos tapatumo nustatymu.\n" "Tokiu atveju nustatant tapatumą nereikia nurodyti\n" "nei konkretaus naudotojo vardo, nei slaptažodžio.\n" -"Išankstinė sąlyga: get_printing_ticket turi veikti tame pačiame pagrindiniame\n" +"Išankstinė sąlyga: get_printing_ticket turi veikti tame pačiame " +"pagrindiniame\n" "kompiuteryje, kuriame prisijungė nusiuntęs spausdinimo užduotį naudotojas.\n" "Tai reiškia, kad turi būti įrengta darbo vieta\n" "tam tikram naudotojui, kuris siųs tokias spausdinimo užduotis;\n" @@ -2651,11 +2901,16 @@ "kuriame užduotis siunčiantis naudotojas nėra prisijungęs.<br>\n" " Tradicinis įrenginio URI atitikmuo:<br>\n" "smb://naudotojo-vardas:slaptažodis@darbo-grupė/serveris/spausdintuvas<br>\n" -"Pavyzdžiui, „Vardenis Pavardenis“, kurio slaptažodis „@namo!“, tarkim naudoja\n" -"tokį įrenginio URI prieigai prie bendrinamo „Smagaus spausdintuvo 1000+“:<br>\n" -"smb://Vardenis%20Pavardenis:%40namo%21@DARBOGRUPE/namuserveris/Smagaus%20spausdintuvo%201000%2B<br>\n" -"<b>Daugiau sužinosite</b> surinkę komandą <tt>man smbspool</tt> ir apsilankę<br>\n" -"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Printing_via_SMB_(Samba)_Share_or_Windows_Share<br>\n" +"Pavyzdžiui, „Vardenis Pavardenis“, kurio slaptažodis „@namo!“, tarkim " +"naudoja\n" +"tokį įrenginio URI prieigai prie bendrinamo „Smagaus spausdintuvo 1000+“:<br>" +"\n" +"smb://Vardenis%20Pavardenis:%40namo%21@DARBOGRUPE/namuserveris/Smagaus%" +"20spausdintuvo%201000%2B<br>\n" +"<b>Daugiau sužinosite</b> surinkę komandą <tt>man smbspool</tt> ir apsilankę<" +"br>\n" +"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Printing_via_SMB_(Samba)_Share_or_Windows_Share<br>" +"\n" "„Windows“ ir „Active Directory“ yra registruoti „Microsoft Corporation“ \n" "prekės ženklai JAV ir/arba kitose šalyse.<br>\n" "<b>Tradicinis UNIX serveris (LPR)</b><br>\n" @@ -2677,6 +2932,44 @@ #. ConnectionWizardDialog help 7/7: #: src/include/printer/helps.rb:714 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p>\n" +#| "<b><big>Special Device URIs</big></b><br>\n" +#| "<b>Specify an Arbitrary Device URI</b>\n" +#| "if you know the exact right device URI for your particular case\n" +#| "or to modify an existing device URI in a special way.<br>\n" +#| "<b>Send Print Data to Other Program (pipe)</b><br>\n" +#| "To do this, the RPM package cups-backends must be installed.\n" +#| "The package provides the CUPS backend 'pipe' which runs\n" +#| "the program that you specified here.\n" +#| "The matching device URI is:<br>\n" +#| "pipe:/path/to/targetcommand<br>\n" +#| "<b>Daisy-chain Backend Error Handler (beh)</b><br>\n" +#| "To do this, the RPM package foomatic-filters must be installed.\n" +#| "The package provides the CUPS backend 'beh'.<br>\n" +#| "The backend 'beh' is a wrapper for the usual backend,\n" +#| "which is then called by beh.\n" +#| "This way beh can, depending on its configuration,\n" +#| "repeat the call of the backend or simply hide the error status\n" +#| "of the backend from being seen by the CUPS daemon.\n" +#| "The matching device URI is:<br>\n" +#| "beh:/nodisable/attempts/delay/originalDeviceURI<br>\n" +#| "If nodisable is '1' beh always exits successfully\n" +#| "so that the queue gets never disabled but on the other hand\n" +#| "print jobs are lost if there is an error.<br>\n" +#| "Attempts is the number of attempts to recall the backend\n" +#| "in case of an error. '0' means infinite retries.<br>\n" +#| "Delay is the number of seconds between two attempts\n" +#| "to call the backend.<br>\n" +#| "The last parameter is the original URI, which the queue had before.<br>\n" +#| "Example:<br>\n" +#| "beh:/1/3/5/socket://ip-address:port-number<br>\n" +#| "The beh backend tries to access a network printer 3 times with 5 second delay\n" +#| "between the attempts. If access still fails, the queue is not disabled\n" +#| "and the print job is lost.<br>\n" +#| "For <b>more information</b> have a look at <tt>/usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/beh</tt> and<br>\n" +#| "http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/OpenPrinting/Database/BackendErrorHandler\n" +#| "</p>" msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Special Device URIs</big></b><br>\n" @@ -2709,10 +3002,12 @@ "The last parameter is the original URI, which the queue had before.<br>\n" "Example:<br>\n" "beh:/1/3/5/socket://ip-address:port-number<br>\n" -"The beh backend tries to access a network printer 3 times with 5 second delay\n" +"The beh backend tries to access a network printer 3 times with 5 second " +"delay\n" "between the attempts. If access still fails, the queue is not disabled\n" "and the print job is lost.<br>\n" -"For <b>more information</b> have a look at <tt>/usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/beh</tt> and<br>\n" +"For <b>more information</b> have a look at <tt>/usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/beh<" +"/tt> and<br>\n" "http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/OpenPrinting/Database/BackendErrorHandler\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -2747,10 +3042,12 @@ "Paskutinysis parametras yra tikrasis įrenginio URI, kurį gauna eilė.<br>\n" "Pavyzdžiui:<br>\n" "beh:/1/3/5/socket://ip-adresas:prievadas<br>\n" -"Vidinės pusės klaidų doroklė prie tinklo spausdintuvo jungtis 3 kartus su 5 s\n" +"Vidinės pusės klaidų doroklė prie tinklo spausdintuvo jungtis 3 kartus su 5 " +"s\n" "delsa tarp bandymų. Jei prisijungti visvien nepavyksta, eilė neuždraudžiama,\n" "tačiau spausdinimo užduotis prarandama.<br>\n" -"<b>Daugiau sužinosite</b> skaitydami <tt>/usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/beh</tt> ir<br>\n" +"<b>Daugiau sužinosite</b> skaitydami <tt>/usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/beh</tt> " +"ir<br>\n" "http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/OpenPrinting/Database/BackendErrorHandler\n" "</p>" @@ -2794,10 +3091,12 @@ msgstr "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Spausdinimas per tinklą</big></b><br>\n" -"Paprastai spausdinimui tinkle naudojama CUPS (bendroji Unix spausdinimo sistema).<br>\n" +"Paprastai spausdinimui tinkle naudojama CUPS (bendroji Unix spausdinimo " +"sistema).<br>\n" "Numatytuoju atveju CUPS naudoja vadinamąją „Naršymo“ veikseną tam,\n" "kad spausdintuvai būtų pasiekiami tinkle.<br>\n" -"Tokiu atveju nuotoliniai CUPS serveriai turi dalintis savo spausdintuvais tinkle\n" +"Tokiu atveju nuotoliniai CUPS serveriai turi dalintis savo spausdintuvais " +"tinkle\n" "ir atitinkamai jūsų kompiuteryje turi būti paleista CUPS tarnyba (cupsd),\n" "kuri laukia informacijos apie bendrinamus spausdintuvus.<br>\n" "CUPS naršymo informacija gaunama UDP prievadu 631.<br>\n" @@ -2849,7 +3148,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "If you print only via network and if you use only one single CUPS server,\n" -"there is no need to use CUPS Browsing and have a CUPS daemon running on your host.\n" +"there is no need to use CUPS Browsing and have a CUPS daemon running on your " +"host.\n" "Instead it is simpler to specify the CUPS server and access it directly.<br>\n" "A possible drawback is that application programs may be delayed\n" "for some time (until a timeout happens) when they try\n" @@ -2883,7 +3183,8 @@ "Usually CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) should be set up to use\n" "its so called 'Browsing' mode to make printers available via network.<br>\n" "In this case CUPS servers publish their local print queues via network\n" -"and accordingly on CUPS client systems the CUPS daemon process (cupsd) must run\n" +"and accordingly on CUPS client systems the CUPS daemon process (cupsd) must " +"run\n" "which is listening for incoming information about published printers.<br>\n" "CUPS Browsing information is received via UDP port 631.\n" "</p>" @@ -2891,7 +3192,8 @@ "<p>\n" "<b><big>Dalinamosios spausdinimo eilės ir jų viešinimas tinkle</big></b><br>\n" "Paprastai CUPS (bendroji Unix spausdinimo sistema) turėtų naudoti\n" -"vadinamąją „naršymo“ veikseną tam, kad spausdintuvai būtų pasiekiami tinkle.<br>\n" +"vadinamąją „naršymo“ veikseną tam, kad spausdintuvai būtų pasiekiami tinkle.<" +"br>\n" "Kai CUPS serveriai dalinasi savo vietinėmis spausdinimo eilėmis tinkle,\n" "atitinkamai CUPS kliento sistemose turi būti paleista CUPS tarnyba (cupsd),\n" "kuri klausosi gaunamos informacijos apie viešinamus spausdintuvus.<br>\n" @@ -2908,21 +3210,25 @@ "to allow remote access for all hosts in the local network\n" "and to publish printers to all those hosts.<br>\n" "It is not required to publish printers in any case.<br>\n" -"If you have only one single CUPS server, there is no need to use CUPS Browsing.\n" +"If you have only one single CUPS server, there is no need to use CUPS " +"Browsing.\n" "Instead it is simpler to specify the CUPS server on the client systems\n" "(via 'Printing Via Network') so that the clients access the server directly.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Visų pirma CUPS kliento sistemoms turi leidžiama prisijungti prie CUPS serverio.\n" +"Visų pirma CUPS kliento sistemoms turi leidžiama prisijungti prie CUPS " +"serverio.\n" "Tada nurodoma, ar turėtų būti (ar ne) klientams viešinami spausdintuvai.<br>\n" "CUPS naršymą vietiniame tinkle siūloma nustatyti\n" -"leidžiant nuotolinę prieigą visiems vietinio tinklo pagrindiniams kompiuteriams\n" +"leidžiant nuotolinę prieigą visiems vietinio tinklo pagrindiniams " +"kompiuteriams\n" "ir jiems paviešinant spausdintuvus.<br>\n" "Spausdintuvų viešinti nėra būtina bet kuriuo atveju.\n" "Jei turite tik vieną vienintelį CUPS serverį, CUPS Naršymas nėra būtinas.\n" "Vietoj to paprasčiau CUPS serverį nurodyti kliento sistemoje\n" -"(su „Spausdinimas per tinklą“), kad klientas tiesiogiai prisijungtų prie serverio.\n" +"(su „Spausdinimas per tinklą“), kad klientas tiesiogiai prisijungtų prie " +"serverio.\n" "</p>" #. SharingDialog help 3/4: @@ -2996,12 +3302,35 @@ "<b><big>CUPS elgsena</big></b><br>\n" "Elgsena yra taisyklės, kuriomis apibrėžiama kiekvienas CUPS veiksmas.\n" "Veiksmų pavyzdžiai: „spausdinti ką nors“,  „atšaukti spausdinimą“,\n" -"„konfigūruoti spausdintuvą“, „keisti ar pašalinti spausdintuvo konfigūraciją“\n" +"„konfigūruoti spausdintuvą“, „keisti ar pašalinti spausdintuvo " +"konfigūraciją“\n" "„įgalinti arba uždrausti spausdinimą“.\n" "</p>" #. Policies help 2/2: #: src/include/printer/helps.rb:924 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p>\n" +#| "<b><big>CUPS Error Policy</big></b><br>\n" +#| "The error policy defines the default policy that is used when\n" +#| "CUPS fails to send a print job to the printer device.<br>\n" +#| "Depending on the particular way how the printer is connected\n" +#| "(for example 'parallel', 'usb', 'socket', 'lpd', or 'ipp'),\n" +#| "and depending on the actual kind of failure,\n" +#| "the CUPS backend which actually sends the data to the printer\n" +#| "can overwrite the default error policy\n" +#| "and enforce another error policy (see <tt>man backend</tt>).\n" +#| "For example it can stop any further printing attempt\n" +#| "even when the default error policy is to retry the job.\n" +#| "This could happen when any attempt to establish\n" +#| "the communication with the printer is useless\n" +#| "so that it does no make sense to retry the job.\n" +#| "<br>\n" +#| "The following error policies exist:<br>\n" +#| "Stop the printer and keep the job for future printing.<br>\n" +#| "Re-send the job from the beginning after waiting some time (30 seconds by default).<br>\n" +#| "Abort and delete the job and proceed with the next job.\n" +#| "</p>" msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>CUPS Error Policy</big></b><br>\n" @@ -3021,7 +3350,8 @@ "<br>\n" "The following error policies exist:<br>\n" "Stop the printer and keep the job for future printing.<br>\n" -"Re-send the job from the beginning after waiting some time (30 seconds by default).<br>\n" +"Re-send the job from the beginning after waiting some time (30 seconds by " +"default).<br>\n" "Abort and delete the job and proceed with the next job.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -3043,7 +3373,8 @@ "<br>\n" "Galimos šios klaidų elgsenos:<br>\n" "Sustabdyti spausdintuvą ir išlaikyti užduotį spausdinimui ateityje.<br>\n" -"Iš naujo nusiųsti spausdinimo užduotį nuo pat pradžių po tam tikro laukimo (paprastai 30 s).<br>\n" +"Iš naujo nusiųsti spausdinimo užduotį nuo pat pradžių po tam tikro laukimo " +"(paprastai 30 s).<br>\n" "Nutraukti ir pašalinti užduotį ir vykdyti sekančią užduotį.\n" "</p>" @@ -3091,7 +3422,8 @@ "<b><big>USB spausdintuvų automatinis konfigūravimas</big></b><br>\n" "RPM paketas „udev-configure-printer“ suteikia galimybę\n" "automatiškai konfigūruoti USB spausdintuvus, kai jie prijungiami.<br>\n" -"Jei iš pat pradžių šis langelis nepažymimas, vadinasi, paketas nėra įdiegtas,\n" +"Jei iš pat pradžių šis langelis nepažymimas, vadinasi, paketas nėra " +"įdiegtas,\n" "bet vėliau galima jį pažymėti tam, kad jis būtų įdiegtas.<br>\n" "Jei iš pat pradžių langelis pažymimas, vadinasi, paketas jau yra įdiegtas,\n" "bet galite atžymėti langelį tam, kad paketas būtų pašalintas.<br>\n" @@ -3191,7 +3523,8 @@ #. to have him informed what goes on here and what he can do on his own. #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:128 msgid "" -"A locally running CUPS daemon is required, but it seems to be not accessible.\n" +"A locally running CUPS daemon is required, but it seems to be not " +"accessible.\n" "Check with 'lpstat -h localhost -r' whether a local cupsd is accessible.\n" "A non-accessible cupsd leads to an endless sequence of further failures.\n" msgstr "" @@ -3220,7 +3553,8 @@ "Regis CUPS tarnyba neskaito informacijos oficialiu IANA IPP prievadu (631).\n" "Su „netstat -nap | grep cupsd“ patikrinkite, ar „cupsd“ iš tiesų klausosi.\n" "Taip nutinka, kai rinkmenoje /etc/cups/cupsd.conf yra nuostata\n" -"„Listen ...:1234“ ar „Port 1234“ (taip pat patikrinkite ar nėra „BrowsePort 1234“).\n" +"„Listen ...:1234“ ar „Port 1234“ (taip pat patikrinkite ar nėra „BrowsePort " +"1234“).\n" "(Kur 1234 yra prievado numeris, bet ne oficialus 631.)\n" "YaST spausdintuvo modulis nepalaiko neoficialių prievadų.\n" "Neoficialus prievadas gali lemti nesibaigiančią klaidų seką.\n" @@ -3252,7 +3586,8 @@ #. so that it is now no longer a real client-only config and #. therefore the Printerlib::client_* values must be determined anew: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:223 src/include/printer/overview.rb:234 -msgid "A non-accessible server leads to an endless sequence of delays and failures." +msgid "" +"A non-accessible server leads to an endless sequence of delays and failures." msgstr "Nepasiekiamas serveris privers laukti ir lems begalinę klaidų seką." #. where %1 will be replaced by the CUPS server name. @@ -3280,8 +3615,10 @@ #. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a remote queue was selected to be deleted: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:607 -msgid "This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be deleted." -msgstr "Tai nuotolinė konfigūracija. Galima pašalinti tik vietines konfigūracijas." +msgid "" +"This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be deleted." +msgstr "" +"Tai nuotolinė konfigūracija. Galima pašalinti tik vietines konfigūracijas." #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:614 msgid "Confirm Deletion" @@ -3289,8 +3626,12 @@ #. Body of a confirmation popup before a queue will be deleted: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:616 -msgid "The selected configuration would be deleted immediately and cannot be restored." -msgstr "Pasirinkta konfigūracija bus iš karto ištrinta ir jos nebebus galima atstatyti." +msgid "" +"The selected configuration would be deleted immediately and cannot be " +"restored." +msgstr "" +"Pasirinkta konfigūracija bus iš karto ištrinta ir jos nebebus galima " +"atstatyti." #. 'Yes' button label of a confirmation popup before a queue will be deleted: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:620 @@ -3325,7 +3666,8 @@ #. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when the queue rejects print jobs: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:687 msgid "The testpage cannot be printed because print jobs are rejected." -msgstr "Bandomasis puslapis neišspausdintas, nes spausdinimo užduotys atmestos." +msgstr "" +"Bandomasis puslapis neišspausdintas, nes spausdinimo užduotys atmestos." #. Do a refresh of the overview content to be on the safe side. #. Perhaps the actual current queue state is no longer "rejecting". @@ -3337,7 +3679,9 @@ #. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when printing is disabled for the queue: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:699 msgid "The testpage cannot be printed because printout is disabled." -msgstr "Bandomasis puslapis negali būti išspausdintas, nes eilei spausdinimas uždraustas." +msgstr "" +"Bandomasis puslapis negali būti išspausdintas, nes eilei spausdinimas " +"uždraustas." #. Test whether there are already pending jobs in a local queue. #. If yes, the queue is usually currently actively printing because @@ -3345,8 +3689,12 @@ #. When this command fails for whatever reason, it is a safe fallback #. to assume that there are no pending jobs in the queue: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:728 -msgid "There are pending print jobs which might be deleted before the testpage is printed." -msgstr "Laukiama spausdinimo užduočių, kurios gali būti pašalintos prieš bandomojo puslapio spausdinimą." +msgid "" +"There are pending print jobs which might be deleted before the testpage is " +"printed." +msgstr "" +"Laukiama spausdinimo užduočių, kurios gali būti pašalintos prieš bandomojo " +"puslapio spausdinimą." #. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name. #. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name. @@ -3478,8 +3826,10 @@ msgstr "Visą žurnalą rasite /var/log/cups/error_log rinkmenoje." #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1048 -msgid "CUPS log information while processing the testpage for %1 (English only)" -msgstr "CUPS žurnalo informacija spausdinant bandomąjį puslapį %1 (tik anglų kalba)" +msgid "" +"CUPS log information while processing the testpage for %1 (English only)" +msgstr "" +"CUPS žurnalo informacija spausdinant bandomąjį puslapį %1 (tik anglų kalba)" #. but the test_print_cups_error_log was effectively empty, #. show a very generic info to the user to show at least something: @@ -3489,8 +3839,12 @@ #. show a very generic info to the user to show at least something: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1075 -msgid "When printing via a remote system fails, you may ask an admin of the remote system." -msgstr "Jei nepavyksta spausdinti per nuotolinę sistemą, bandykite kreipkis į nuotolinės sistemos administratorių." +msgid "" +"When printing via a remote system fails, you may ask an admin of the remote " +"system." +msgstr "" +"Jei nepavyksta spausdinti per nuotolinę sistemą, bandykite kreipkis į " +"nuotolinės sistemos administratorių." #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1102 @@ -3503,8 +3857,10 @@ #. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a remote queue was selected to be modified: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1161 -msgid "This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be modified." -msgstr "Tai nuotolinė konfigūracija. Galima pakeisti tik vietines konfigūracijas." +msgid "" +"This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be modified." +msgstr "" +"Tai nuotolinė konfigūracija. Galima pakeisti tik vietines konfigūracijas." #. An entry for a ComboBox from which the user can select that the CUPS error policy #. which is used when it fails to send a job to the printer is to @@ -3540,7 +3896,8 @@ #. but sometimes (e.g. in the Connection Wizard) we must use the exact technical term: #: src/include/printer/policies.rb:93 msgid "&Apply this error policy to all local printer configurations" -msgstr "Pri&taikyti šią klaidų elgseną visų vietinių spausdintuvų konfigūracijoms" +msgstr "" +"Pri&taikyti šią klaidų elgseną visų vietinių spausdintuvų konfigūracijoms" #. Header for a ComboBox to specify the CUPS operation policy: #: src/include/printer/policies.rb:101 @@ -3554,13 +3911,18 @@ #. but sometimes (e.g. in the Connection Wizard) we must use the exact technical term: #: src/include/printer/policies.rb:113 msgid "Apply this operation &policy to all local printer configurations" -msgstr "&Pritaikyti šią operacijų elgseną visų vietinių spausdintuvų konfigūracijoms" +msgstr "" +"&Pritaikyti šią operacijų elgseną visų vietinių spausdintuvų konfigūracijoms" #. PopupYesNoHeadline headline #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: #: src/include/printer/policies.rb:139 -msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with setting policies for the local system." -msgstr "Nuotolinio CUPS serverio nuostatos nedera su elgsenos nuostata vietinei sistemai." +msgid "" +"A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with setting policies for the local " +"system." +msgstr "" +"Nuotolinio CUPS serverio nuostatos nedera su elgsenos nuostata vietinei " +"sistemai." #. where %1 will be replaced by the print queue name. #: src/include/printer/policies.rb:331 @@ -3649,7 +4011,8 @@ #. from where remote printer information is accepted: #: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:121 msgid "Additional IP Addresses or &Network/Netmask (separated by space)" -msgstr "Pasirinktinai nurodykite IP adresą ar &tinklą/tinklo kaukę (atskirkite tarpu)" +msgstr "" +"Pasirinktinai nurodykite IP adresą ar &tinklą/tinklo kaukę (atskirkite tarpu)" #. A CheckBox to poll printer information from remote CUPS servers: #: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:134 @@ -3685,7 +4048,8 @@ #. or to set up to use a network printer directly: #: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:189 msgid "Use Another Print Server or Use a Network Printer Directly" -msgstr "Naudoti kitą spausdinimo serverį arba tiesiogiai naudoti tinklo spausdintuvą" +msgstr "" +"Naudoti kitą spausdinimo serverį arba tiesiogiai naudoti tinklo spausdintuvą" #. Use the exact same wording "printer announcements from CUPS servers" #. as in the matching CheckBox to accept printer information from remote CUPS servers: @@ -3732,7 +4096,8 @@ #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: #: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:467 msgid "The checkbox to do all printing via one CUPS server was disabled." -msgstr "Nepažymėtas žymimasis langelis, spausdinimui tik per vieną CUPS serverį." +msgstr "" +"Nepažymėtas žymimasis langelis, spausdinimui tik per vieną CUPS serverį." #. An effectively non-empty current_browse_allow_value requires "Browsing On" in cupsd.conf: #. It was initially a BrowsePoll config but the user has @@ -3750,7 +4115,9 @@ #. where %1 will be replaced by the values for BrowseAllow. #: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:569 msgid "Failed to set BrowseAllow value(s) '%1' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." -msgstr "Nepavyko nustatyti „BrowseAllow“ reikšmės(ių) „%1“ rinkmenoje /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." +msgstr "" +"Nepavyko nustatyti „BrowseAllow“ reikšmės(ių) „%1“ rinkmenoje " +"/etc/cups/cupsd.conf." #. but now the user has deactivated it #. so that the BrowseAllow config should be disabled. @@ -3760,7 +4127,8 @@ #. Instead set only "BrowseAllow none" in cupsd.conf: #: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:597 msgid "Failed to set 'BrowseAllow none' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." -msgstr "Nepavyksta nustatyti „BrowseAllow none“ rinkmenoje /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." +msgstr "" +"Nepavyksta nustatyti „BrowseAllow none“ rinkmenoje /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." #. a BrowsePoll config but with effectively empty server names. #. Such a BrowsePoll config does not make sense: @@ -3771,7 +4139,9 @@ #. where %1 will be replaced by the values for BrowsePoll. #: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:659 msgid "Failed to set BrowsePoll value(s) '%1' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf" -msgstr "Nepavyko nustatyti „BrowsePoll“ reikšmės(ių) „%1“ rinkmenoje /etc/cups/cupsd.conf" +msgstr "" +"Nepavyko nustatyti „BrowsePoll“ reikšmės(ių) „%1“ rinkmenoje " +"/etc/cups/cupsd.conf" #. but now the user has deactivated it #. so that the BrowsePoll config should be disabled: @@ -3797,12 +4167,15 @@ #. they are at least informend why there may be still remote queues: #: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:727 msgid "" -"When switching from 'accept printer announcements' to 'not accept announcements'\n" +"When switching from 'accept printer announcements' to 'not accept " +"announcements'\n" "or after 'request printer information from CUPS servers' was disabled\n" "it takes usually 5 minutes until already received information faded away..." msgstr "" "„Priimti spausdintuvų pranešimus“ pakeičiant į „nepriimti pranešimų“,\n" -"arba uždraudus „užklausti spausdintuvų informaciją iš CUPS serverių“,paprastai praeina 5 minutės kol jau gauta informacija netenka galios..." +"arba uždraudus „užklausti spausdintuvų informaciją iš CUPS " +"serverių“,paprastai praeina 5 minutės kol jau gauta informacija netenka " +"galios..." #. where %1 will be replaced by the server name. #: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:1144 @@ -3822,7 +4195,8 @@ #. A label which explains how the subsequent choices can be used: #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:83 msgid "There are various ways how to specify which remote hosts are allowed:" -msgstr "Nuotolinius pagrindinius kompiuterius galima nurodyti įvairiais būdais:" +msgstr "" +"Nuotolinius pagrindinius kompiuterius galima nurodyti įvairiais būdais:" #. A CheckBox label to allow remote access to local print queues #. for computers within the local network: @@ -3879,14 +4253,19 @@ #. TextEntry to allow remote access to local print queues #. for hosts and/or networks: #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:180 -msgid "Allow access from those IP addresses or &network/netmask (separated by space)" -msgstr "&Leisti prieigą iš šių IP adresų ar tinklų/tinklo kaukių (atskirkite tarpu)" +msgid "" +"Allow access from those IP addresses or &network/netmask (separated by space)" +msgstr "" +"&Leisti prieigą iš šių IP adresų ar tinklų/tinklo kaukių (atskirkite tarpu)" #. TextEntry to publish local print queues #. to IP addresses and/or network broadcast addresses: #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:192 -msgid "Publish to these IP addresses or network &broadcast addresses (separated by space)" -msgstr "Dalintis su šiuo IP adresu ar tinklo &programos adresais (atskirkite tarpu)" +msgid "" +"Publish to these IP addresses or network &broadcast addresses (separated by " +"space)" +msgstr "" +"Dalintis su šiuo IP adresu ar tinklo &programos adresais (atskirkite tarpu)" #. A CheckBox label to publish local print queues by default #. via a partivular network interface which is shown below. @@ -3908,7 +4287,8 @@ #. Do not change or translate "Listen localhost", it is a system settings name. #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:396 msgid "Failed to set only 'Listen localhost' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." -msgstr "Nepavyko nustatyti tik „Listen localhost“ rinkmenoje /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." +msgstr "" +"Nepavyko nustatyti tik „Listen localhost“ rinkmenoje /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." #. Do not change or translate "Allow", it is a system settings name. #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:406 @@ -3931,7 +4311,8 @@ #. Do not change or translate "BrowseAddress", it is a system settings name. #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:560 msgid "Failed to set 'BrowseAddress' entries '%1' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." -msgstr "Nepavyko nustatyti „BrowseAddress“ įrašų „%1“ rinkmenoje /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." +msgstr "" +"Nepavyko nustatyti „BrowseAddress“ įrašų „%1“ rinkmenoje /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." #. Do not change or translate "Listen *:631", it is a system settings name. #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:613 @@ -3941,8 +4322,12 @@ #. PopupYesNoHeadline headline #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:643 -msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with sharing local printer configurations." -msgstr "Nuotolinio CUPS serverio nuostatos nedera su viešinamo spausdintuvo konfigūracija." +msgid "" +"A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with sharing local printer " +"configurations." +msgstr "" +"Nuotolinio CUPS serverio nuostatos nedera su viešinamo spausdintuvo " +"konfigūracija." #. Only "Printing via Network" configuration of printer. #. For use with autoinstallation. @@ -4125,7 +4510,8 @@ #. (e.g. simply because there is no queue). This results no error. #: src/modules/Printer.rb:1098 msgid "Cannot show print queues (failed to detect print queues)." -msgstr "Negalima parodyti spausdinimo eilių (nepavyko aptikti spausdinimo eilių)." +msgstr "" +"Negalima parodyti spausdinimo eilių (nepavyko aptikti spausdinimo eilių)." #. Use local variables to have shorter variable names: #: src/modules/Printer.rb:1119 @@ -4205,7 +4591,9 @@ #. show a meaningful text as fallback entry ('Find More' is a button label). #: src/modules/Printer.rb:1588 msgid "No matching driver found. Change the search string or try 'Find More'." -msgstr "Nerasta tinkamų tvarkyklių. Pakeiskite paieškos raktažodį arba rinkitės „Ieškoti daugiau“." +msgstr "" +"Nerasta tinkamų tvarkyklių. Pakeiskite paieškos raktažodį arba rinkitės " +"„Ieškoti daugiau“." #. Busy message: #. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback: @@ -4242,6 +4630,7 @@ msgstr "įrašyta reikšmė" #: src/modules/Printer.rb:2358 +#| msgid "The server use &TLS" msgid "The server '" msgstr "Serveris " @@ -4258,9 +4647,11 @@ msgstr "" "Nepavyksta paleisti hp-setup, nes nėra grafinio ekrano.\n" "Paprastai taip nutinka arba YaST naudojant tekstinėje veiksenoje,\n" -"arba kai naudotojas, kuris paleido YaST, nenurodė aplinkos kintamojo DISPLAY,\n" +"arba kai naudotojas, kuris paleido YaST, nenurodė aplinkos kintamojo " +"DISPLAY,\n" "arba kai YaST procesams neleidžiama pasiekti grafinio ekrano.\n" -"Tokiu atveju turite paleisti hp-setup rankiniu būdu naudotojo „root“ teisėmis.\n" +"Tokiu atveju turite paleisti hp-setup rankiniu būdu naudotojo „root“ " +"teisėmis.\n" #. Message of a Popup::Error when hp-setup should be run. #. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a program name: @@ -4279,7 +4670,8 @@ #: src/modules/Printer.rb:2389 msgid "" "Launched hp-setup.\n" -"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the printer configuration.\n" +"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the printer " +"configuration.\n" msgstr "" "hp-setup paleistas.\n" "Prieš tęsdami spausdintuvo konfigūraciją, hp-setup turi baigti darbą.\n" @@ -4299,12 +4691,15 @@ #. Is the package available to be installed? #. Package::Available returns nil if no package source is available. #: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:179 -msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository available." +msgid "" +"Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository " +"available." msgstr "Reikalingas paketas %1 neįdiegtas ir nėra prieinamų diegimo saugyklų." #. Message of a Popup::Error where %1 will be replaced by the package name: #: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:194 -msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." +msgid "" +"Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." msgstr "Reikalingas paketas %1 neįdiegtas ir neprieinamas diegimo saugyklose." #. Only a simple message because: @@ -4377,7 +4772,8 @@ #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: #: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:402 msgid "A restart disrupts all currently active print jobs." -msgstr "Paleidžiant iš naujo nutraukiamos visos dabartinės spausdinimo užduotys." +msgstr "" +"Paleidžiant iš naujo nutraukiamos visos dabartinės spausdinimo užduotys." #: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:408 msgid "Failed to restart the CUPS daemon" Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/product-creator.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/product-creator.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/product-creator.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -19,7 +19,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. transltors: command line help text for the Xproduct-creator module @@ -528,17 +529,26 @@ #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:785 msgid "<p>Start creating a new image configuration with <b>Add</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Naują atvaizdžio konfigūraciją pradėsite kurti nuspaudę <b>Pridėti</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Naują atvaizdžio konfigūraciją pradėsite kurti nuspaudę <b>Pridėti</b>.</p>" #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:787 -msgid "<p>Use <b>Edit</b> to change selected image configuration or create the image.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Spauskite <b>Keisti</b> ir derinkite pasirinktą atvaizdžio konfigūraciją arba kurkite atvaizdį.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Edit</b> to change selected image configuration or create the " +"image.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Spauskite <b>Keisti</b> ir derinkite pasirinktą atvaizdžio konfigūraciją " +"arba kurkite atvaizdį.</p>" #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:791 -msgid "<p>Delete the directory with the selected configuration by selecting <b>Delete</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Katalogas su pasirinkta konfigūracija šalinamas nuspaudus <b>Šalinti</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Delete the directory with the selected configuration by selecting <b>" +"Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Katalogas su pasirinkta konfigūracija šalinamas nuspaudus <b>Šalinti</b>.<" +"/p>" #. help text, %1 is directory #: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:796 @@ -835,12 +845,14 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1512 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> to add\n" +"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> " +"to add\n" "more <b>add-on</b> selections and packages.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Pasirinkite vieną iš sekančių <b>pagrindinių</b> parinkčių ir spauskite <i>Detaliai<i>, kad\n" +"Pasirinkite vieną iš sekančių <b>pagrindinių</b> parinkčių ir spauskite <i>" +"Detaliai<i>, kad\n" "pridėtumėte daugiau <b>papildomų</b> pasirinkčių ir paketų.\n" "</p>" @@ -872,7 +884,8 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1830 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Sign</b></big><br>\n" -"To make it possible for users to verify your product, sign it with a GPG key. \n" +"To make it possible for users to verify your product, sign it with a GPG key. " +"\n" "This key is checked when the product is added as a repository.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -880,8 +893,11 @@ #. (if the page exists in that language, you have to check that!) #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1837 msgid "" -"<P>If the product is not signed, Yast automatically adds the option 'Insecure:\n" -"1' to the linuxrc configuration file, otherwise linuxrc would deny loading an unsigned installation system at boot. See http://en.opensuse.org/Linuxrc for more information.</P>" +"<P>If the product is not signed, Yast automatically adds the option " +"'Insecure:\n" +"1' to the linuxrc configuration file, otherwise linuxrc would deny loading an " +"unsigned installation system at boot. See http://en.opensuse.org/Linuxrc for " +"more information.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1846 @@ -947,7 +963,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>For example, \n" "configure the CD for automatic installations and specify the installation\n" -"source location. If you are not sure, leave the file untouched and the original is used.</p>\n" +"source location. If you are not sure, leave the file untouched and the " +"original is used.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Read dialog help 1/2 @@ -1023,8 +1040,10 @@ #. overview dialog help part 5 #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:85 msgid "" -"<p>Press <b>Create Image with KIWI</b> for additional configuration of various\n" -"types of images, such as Live media or Xen images, with the KIWI image system.</p>" +"<p>Press <b>Create Image with KIWI</b> for additional configuration of " +"various\n" +"types of images, such as Live media or Xen images, with the KIWI image " +"system.</p>" msgstr "" #. Configure1 dialog help 1/4 @@ -1070,8 +1089,10 @@ "It is possible to create a product for a different architecture than that of\n" "the machine you are currently working on.\n" "All selected repositories must support the target architecture.<br>\n" -"<b>Note:</b> KIWI does not support different architectures yet, do not change\n" -"the architecture if you intend to create a KIWI image from the current configuration.</p>\n" +"<b>Note:</b> KIWI does not support different architectures yet, do not " +"change\n" +"the architecture if you intend to create a KIWI image from the current " +"configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Configure2 dialog help 1/2 @@ -1109,19 +1130,22 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:147 msgid "" "<p>One of the used repositories must be marked as the base product. The base\n" -"product repository should be bootable to ensure the newly created product is also\n" +"product repository should be bootable to ensure the newly created product is " +"also\n" "bootable.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text - the base selection dialog 3/4 #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:153 -msgid "<p>The other repositories will be used as add-ons for the base repository.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The other repositories will be used as add-ons for the base repository.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text - the base selection dialog 4/4 #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:157 msgid "" -"<p>The product creator solves dependencies of the selected products and proposes\n" +"<p>The product creator solves dependencies of the selected products and " +"proposes\n" "the base product. If the proposed value is wrong, select the right base\n" "repository from the list.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1299,12 +1323,15 @@ #. popup text #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1513 msgid "" -"<p>Packages from section '%1' are not available with selected repositories:</p>\n" +"<p>Packages from section '%1' are not available with selected repositories:<" +"/p>\n" "<p>%2.</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"Either remove the packages from the section, check the detailed package selection or ignore the situation.</p>\n" +"Either remove the packages from the section, check the detailed package " +"selection or ignore the situation.</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"Going to detailed package selection and accepting the view without any further changes results in removal of problematic packages from the section.\n" +"Going to detailed package selection and accepting the view without any " +"further changes results in removal of problematic packages from the section.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1431,7 +1458,9 @@ #. informative label #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2277 -msgid "Editing of following files is disabled for configurations imported from Studio." +msgid "" +"Editing of following files is disabled for configurations imported from " +"Studio." msgstr "Iš „Studio“ importuotose konfigūracijose negalite keisti šių rinkmenų." #. tab header @@ -1448,7 +1477,8 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2367 msgid "" "<p>Select the value for image <b>Compression</b>. This will modify the\n" -"<i>flags</i> value of the image type. Check the kiwi manual for an explanation of available values.</p>" +"<i>flags</i> value of the image type. Check the kiwi manual for an " +"explanation of available values.</p>" msgstr "" #. combo box label @@ -1467,7 +1497,9 @@ #. help text for "&Ignored software" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2424 -msgid "<p>For <b>ignored software</b>, enter each entry (like 'smtp_daemon') on a new line.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>For <b>ignored software</b>, enter each entry (like 'smtp_daemon') on a " +"new line.</p>" msgstr "" #. label @@ -1477,7 +1509,9 @@ #. help text for "&Ignored software" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2436 -msgid "<p>Each entry of <b>Packages to Delete</b> is one package name to be uninstalled from the target image.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Each entry of <b>Packages to Delete</b> is one package name to be " +"uninstalled from the target image.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1498,7 +1532,8 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2461 msgid "" "<p>Set the image <b>Size</b> in the specified <b>Unit</b>.\n" -"If <b>Additive</b> is checked, the meaning of <b>Size</b> is different: it is the minimal free space available on the image.</p>" +"If <b>Additive</b> is checked, the meaning of <b>Size</b> is different: it is " +"the minimal free space available on the image.</p>" msgstr "" #. combo box label (MB/GB values) @@ -1518,7 +1553,9 @@ #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2489 -msgid "<p>To create an encrypted file system, check <b>Encrypt Image with LUKS</b> and enter the password.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>To create an encrypted file system, check <b>Encrypt Image with LUKS</b> " +"and enter the password.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1529,7 +1566,8 @@ #. general help for directory structure tab #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2513 msgid "<p>Edit the configuration scripts used to build your image.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Redaguokite konfigūracijos scenarijus, naudojamus atvaizdžio kūrimui.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Redaguokite konfigūracijos scenarijus, naudojamus atvaizdžio kūrimui.</p>" #. general help for directory structure tab #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2520 @@ -1543,7 +1581,10 @@ #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2531 -msgid "<p>Define the path to the <b>Directory with System Configuration</b> (the <tt>root</tt> directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of the image tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Define the path to the <b>Directory with System Configuration</b> (the <tt>" +"root</tt> directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of the " +"image tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" #. label (above table) @@ -1558,7 +1599,10 @@ #. help for table with users #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2561 -msgid "<p>Configure the <b>Directory with System Configuration</b> (the <tt>root</tt> directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of the image tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Configure the <b>Directory with System Configuration</b> (the <tt>root</tt>" +" directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of the image tree " +"using <tt>cp -a</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" #. label (above table) @@ -1573,7 +1617,10 @@ #. help for table with users #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2598 -msgid "<p>Configure the <b>Directory with Scripts</b> (the <tt>config</tt> directory). It contains scripts that are run after the installation of all the image packages.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Configure the <b>Directory with Scripts</b> (the <tt>config</tt> " +"directory). It contains scripts that are run after the installation of all " +"the image packages.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1594,7 +1641,10 @@ msgstr "At&vaizdo konfigūravimo scenarijus" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2646 -msgid "<p>Edit your <b>Image Configuration Script</b>, called <tt>config.sh</tt>. This script is run at the end of the installation but before the package scripts have run.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Edit your <b>Image Configuration Script</b>, called <tt>config.sh</tt>. " +"This script is run at the end of the installation but before the package " +"scripts have run.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1603,7 +1653,10 @@ msgstr "&Kelias iki katalogo su scenarijais" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2667 -msgid "<p>The optional <b>Directory with Scripts</b> (<tt>config</tt> directory) contains scripts that are run after the installation of all the image packages.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The optional <b>Directory with Scripts</b> (<tt>config</tt> directory) " +"contains scripts that are run after the installation of all the image " +"packages.</p>" msgstr "" #. push button label @@ -1617,7 +1670,9 @@ msgstr "Iš&valyti scenarijų" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2688 -msgid "<p>Edit your <b>Cleanup Script</b> (<tt>images.sh</tt>). This script is run at the beginning of the image creation process.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Edit your <b>Cleanup Script</b> (<tt>images.sh</tt>). This script is run " +"at the beginning of the image creation process.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1632,7 +1687,9 @@ #. help text for Author, Contact and Specification widgets #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2711 -msgid "<p>Set the values for <b>Author</b> of the image, <b>Contact Information</b>, and the image <b>Specification</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Set the values for <b>Author</b> of the image, <b>Contact Information</b>, " +"and the image <b>Specification</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1657,8 +1714,12 @@ #. help text for locale #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2762 -msgid "<p>The value of <b>Locale</b> (e.g. <tt>en_US</tt>) defines the contents of the RC_LANG variable in <t>/etc/sysconfig/language</tt>.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Lokalės</b> reikšmė (pvz., <tt>lt_LT</tt>) nurodo RC_LANG kintamojo turinį rinkmenoje <t>/etc/sysconfig/language</tt>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The value of <b>Locale</b> (e.g. <tt>en_US</tt>) defines the contents of " +"the RC_LANG variable in <t>/etc/sysconfig/language</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Lokalės</b> reikšmė (pvz., <tt>lt_LT</tt>) nurodo RC_LANG kintamojo " +"turinį rinkmenoje <t>/etc/sysconfig/language</tt>.</p>" #. textentry label #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2770 @@ -1667,7 +1728,9 @@ #. help text for keytable #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2778 -msgid "<p><b>Keyboard Layout</b> specifies the name of the console keymap to use. The value corresponds to a map file in <tt>/usr/share/kbd/keymaps</tt>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Keyboard Layout</b> specifies the name of the console keymap to use. " +"The value corresponds to a map file in <tt>/usr/share/kbd/keymaps</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1677,7 +1740,9 @@ #. help text for timezone #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2795 -msgid "<p>It is possible to set a specific <b>Time zone</b>. Available time zones are located in the <tt>/usr/share/zoneinfo</tt> directory.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>It is possible to set a specific <b>Time zone</b>. Available time zones " +"are located in the <tt>/usr/share/zoneinfo</tt> directory.</p>" msgstr "" #. general help for users tab @@ -1718,10 +1783,12 @@ #. help for table with users #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2828 msgid "" -"<p>For each user, specify the <b>Name</b>, <b>Password</b>, <b>Home Directory</b> and group\n" +"<p>For each user, specify the <b>Name</b>, <b>Password</b>, <b>Home " +"Directory</b> and group\n" "to which the users belongs.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Nurodykite kiekvieno naudotojo <b>vardą</b>, <b>slaptažodį</b>, <b>namų aplanką</b> ir\n" +"<p>Nurodykite kiekvieno naudotojo <b>vardą</b>, <b>slaptažodį</b>, <b>namų " +"aplanką</b> ir\n" "grupę, kuriai jis turėtų priklausyti.</p>\n" #. dialog caption @@ -1751,12 +1818,19 @@ #. help text for kiwi UI preparation #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2973 -msgid "<p>Enter the name of your image configuration. Base new configuration on template from the list or on the directory with the existing configuration.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Įveskite savo atvaizdžio konfigūracijos pavadinimą. Naują konfigūraciją galite kurti pagal šabloną iš sąrašo arba pagal katalogą su esama konfigūracija.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Enter the name of your image configuration. Base new configuration on " +"template from the list or on the directory with the existing configuration.<" +"/p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Įveskite savo atvaizdžio konfigūracijos pavadinimą. Naują konfigūraciją " +"galite kurti pagal šabloną iš sąrašo arba pagal katalogą su esama " +"konfigūracija.</p>" #. help text for kiwi UI preparation #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2980 -msgid "<p>Place custom configuration templates under <tt>%1</tt> directory.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Place custom configuration templates under <tt>%1</tt> directory.</p>" msgstr "<p>Savus konfigūracijos šablonus padėkite kataloge <tt>%1</tt>.</p>" #. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. @@ -1771,7 +1845,10 @@ #. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2994 -msgid "<p>Modify the list of <b>Package Repositories</b> that will be used for creating the image. Use <b>Add From System</b> to add one of the current system repositories.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Modify the list of <b>Package Repositories</b> that will be used for " +"creating the image. Use <b>Add From System</b> to add one of the current " +"system repositories.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. @@ -1791,7 +1868,8 @@ #. error popup #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3123 -msgid "Selected directory does not contain valid description of system configuration." +msgid "" +"Selected directory does not contain valid description of system configuration." msgstr "Pasirinktame kataloge nėra tinkamo sistemos konfigūracijos aprašo." #. busy popup @@ -2102,6 +2180,8 @@ #. add an empty map if the source doesn't exist #: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:3359 +#| msgid "%1 package not available." +#| msgid_plural "%1 packages not available." msgid "%1 package not available." msgstr "Neprieinami paketai: %1." Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/proxy.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/proxy.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/proxy.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -18,7 +18,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Informative label @@ -99,8 +100,10 @@ #: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:405 msgid "" "<p>Configure your Internet proxy (caching) settings here.</p>\n" -"<p><b>Note:</b> It is generally recommended to relogin for the settings to take effect, \n" -"however in some cases the application may pick up new settings immediately. Please check \n" +"<p><b>Note:</b> It is generally recommended to relogin for the settings to " +"take effect, \n" +"however in some cases the application may pick up new settings immediately. " +"Please check \n" "what your application (web browser, ftp client,...) supports. </p>" msgstr "" @@ -110,16 +113,19 @@ "<p><b>HTTP Proxy URL</b> is the name of the proxy server for your access\n" "to the World Wide Web (WWW).</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b>HTTP įgaliotojo serverio URL</b> yra įgaliotojo serverio vardas, per kurį pasiekiate\n" +"<p><b>HTTP įgaliotojo serverio URL</b> yra įgaliotojo serverio vardas, per " +"kurį pasiekiate\n" "pasaulinį žiniatinklį (WWW).</p>\n" #. Proxy dialog help 3/8 #: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:416 msgid "" -"<p><b>HTTPS Proxy URL</b> is the name of the proxy server for your secured access\n" +"<p><b>HTTPS Proxy URL</b> is the name of the proxy server for your secured " +"access\n" "to the World Wide Web (WWW).</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b>HTTPS įgaliotojo serverio URL</b> yra įgaliotojo serverio vardas, per kurį pasiekiate\n" +"<p><b>HTTPS įgaliotojo serverio URL</b> yra įgaliotojo serverio vardas, per " +"kurį pasiekiate\n" "pasaulinį žiniatinklį (WWW).</p>\n" #. Proxy dialog help 3.5/8 @@ -133,7 +139,8 @@ "<p><b>FTP Proxy URL</b> is the name of the proxy server for your access\n" "to the file transfer services (FTP).</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>FTP įgaliotojo serverio URL</b> yra įgaliotojo serverio vardas, per kurį pasiekiate\n" +"<p><b>FTP įgaliotojo serverio URL</b> yra įgaliotojo serverio vardas, per " +"kurį pasiekiate\n" "rinkmenų siuntimo paslaugas (FTP).</p>" #. Proxy dialog help 5/8 @@ -143,8 +150,10 @@ "enough to fill in the HTTP proxy URL. It will be used for all protocols\n" "(HTTP, HTTPS and FTP).\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Jei pasirenkate parinktį <b>Visiems protokolams naudoti tą patį įgaliotąjį serverį</b>,\n" -"pakanka įrašyti tik HTTP įgaliotojo serverio URL. Jis bus naudojamas visiems protokolams\n" +"<p>Jei pasirenkate parinktį <b>Visiems protokolams naudoti tą patį įgaliotąjį " +"serverį</b>,\n" +"pakanka įrašyti tik HTTP įgaliotojo serverio URL. Jis bus naudojamas visiems " +"protokolams\n" "(HTTP, HTTPS ir FTP).\n" #. Proxy dialog help 6/8 @@ -154,7 +163,8 @@ "for which the requests should be made directly without caching,\n" "for example, <i>%1</i>.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Sritys be įgaliotojo serverio</b> yra kableliais atskirtų sričių sąrašas,\n" +"<p><b>Sritys be įgaliotojo serverio</b> yra kableliais atskirtų sričių " +"sąrašas,\n" "kurioms užklausos turi būti atliekamos nenaudojant podėlio,\n" "pavyzdžiui, <i>%1</i>.</p>\n" @@ -163,11 +173,14 @@ msgid "" "<p>If you are using a proxy server with authorization, enter\n" "the <b>Proxy User Name</b> and <b>Proxy Password</b>. A valid username\n" -"consists of printable ASCII characters only (except for quotation marks).</p>\n" +"consists of printable ASCII characters only (except for quotation marks).</p>" +"\n" msgstr "" "<p>Jei naudojate įgaliotąjį serverį su autorizavimu, įveskite\n" -"<b>Įgaliotojo serverio naudotojo vardą</b> ir <b>Įgaliotojo serverio slaptažodį</b>.\n" -"Priimtinas naudotojo vardas sudarytas tik iš spausdinamų ASCII simbolių (išskyrus kabutes)</p>\n" +"<b>Įgaliotojo serverio naudotojo vardą</b> ir <b>Įgaliotojo serverio " +"slaptažodį</b>.\n" +"Priimtinas naudotojo vardas sudarytas tik iš spausdinamų ASCII simbolių " +"(išskyrus kabutes)</p>\n" #. Proxy dialog help 8/8 #: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:450 @@ -176,7 +189,8 @@ "the current configuration for HTTP, HTTPS, and FTP proxy.</p> \n" msgstr "" "<p>Norėdami išbandyti dabartinę HTTP, HTTPS ir FTP įgaliotojo serverio\n" -"konfigūraciją, spauskite <b>Išbandyti įgaliotojo serverio nuostatas</b>.</p> \n" +"konfigūraciją, spauskite <b>Išbandyti įgaliotojo serverio nuostatas</b>.</p> " +"\n" #. CheckBox entry label #: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:467 @@ -237,7 +251,8 @@ "Proxy is enabled, but no proxy URL has been specified.\n" "Really use these settings?" msgstr "" -"Įgaliotasis serveris įgalintas, bet įgaliotojo serverio URL nebuvo nurodytas.\n" +"Įgaliotasis serveris įgalintas, bet įgaliotojo serverio URL nebuvo " +"nurodytas.\n" "Tikrai naudoti šias nuostatas?" #: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:628 @@ -275,7 +290,8 @@ #. Popup::Error text #: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:676 msgid "The HTTPS proxy URL must contain a scheme specification (http)." -msgstr "HTTPS įgaliotojo serverio URL turi turėti schemos specifikaciją (http)." +msgstr "" +"HTTPS įgaliotojo serverio URL turi turėti schemos specifikaciją (http)." #. Popup::Error text #: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:687 @@ -379,7 +395,8 @@ #. command-line option help #: src/lib/proxy/client.rb:109 msgid "The username to be used for proxy authentication" -msgstr "Naudotojo vardas, kuris bus naudojamas įgaliotojo serverio autentifikavimui" +msgstr "" +"Naudotojo vardas, kuris bus naudojamas įgaliotojo serverio autentifikavimui" #. command-line option help #: src/lib/proxy/client.rb:116 @@ -399,7 +416,9 @@ #: src/modules/Proxy.rb:39 msgid "It is recommended to relogin to make new proxy settings effective." -msgstr "Tam, kad naujos įgaliotojo serverio nuostatos įsigaliotų, patariame prisijungti iš naujo." +msgstr "" +"Tam, kad naujos įgaliotojo serverio nuostatos įsigaliotų, patariame " +"prisijungti iš naujo." #. Write proxy settings and apply changes #. @return true if success Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/qt-pkg.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/qt-pkg.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/qt-pkg.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -19,7 +19,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" "X-Poedit-Bookmarks: -1,-1,-1,-1,-1,-1,-1,40,-1,-1\n" @@ -170,6 +171,7 @@ msgstr "&Automatinė patikra" #: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:809 +#| msgid "Recommended Packages" msgid "Install &Recommended Packages" msgstr "Įdiegti &patartinus paketus" @@ -232,6 +234,7 @@ msgstr "Įdiegti visus atitinkamus -debug&souce paketus" #: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:885 +#| msgid "Install All Matching -&devel Packages" msgid "Install All Matching &Recommended Packages" msgstr "Įdiegti visus atitinkamus &patartinus paketus" @@ -313,12 +316,20 @@ msgstr "&Atšaukti" #: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1463 -msgid "<p><small>Cancel switching</a> system packages to versions in repository %2</small></p>" -msgstr "<p><small>Atsisakyti paketų pakeitimo</a> „%2“ saugyklos versijomis</small></p>" +msgid "" +"<p><small>Cancel switching</a> system " +"packages to versions in repository %2</small></p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><small>Atsisakyti paketų pakeitimo</a> " +"„%2“ saugyklos versijomis</small></p>" #: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1482 -msgid "<p>Switch system packages</a> to the versions in this repository (%2)</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pakeisti sistemos paketus</a> versijomis iš šios saugyklos (%2)</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Switch system packages</a> to the " +"versions in this repository (%2)</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pakeisti sistemos paketus</a> versijomis " +"iš šios saugyklos (%2)</p>" #: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1571 src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1726 msgid "Added Subpackages:" @@ -348,8 +359,16 @@ msgstr "Klaida: diske nėra vietos!" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:186 -msgid "<p>You can choose to install anyway if you know what you are doing, but you risk getting a corrupted system that requires manual repairs. If you are not absolutely sure how to handle such a case, press <b>Cancel</b> now and deselect some packages.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Jei žinote, ką darote, galite diegti bet kuriuo atveju, tačiau rizikuojate sugadinti sistemą, kurią reikės atstatinėti rankomis. Jei nesate užtikrintas, kaip elgtis tokiu atveju, spauskite <b>Atšaukti</b> ir atžymėkite kai kuriuos paketus.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>You can choose to install anyway if you know what you are doing, but you " +"risk getting a corrupted system that requires manual repairs. If you are not " +"absolutely sure how to handle such a case, press <b>Cancel</b> now and " +"deselect some packages.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Jei žinote, ką darote, galite diegti bet kuriuo atveju, tačiau rizikuojate " +"sugadinti sistemą, kurią reikės atstatinėti rankomis. Jei nesate užtikrintas, " +"kaip elgtis tokiu atveju, spauskite <b>Atšaukti</b> ir atžymėkite kai kuriuos " +"paketus.</p>" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:194 msgid "C&ontinue Anyway" @@ -373,8 +392,12 @@ msgstr "Automatiniai pakeitimai" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:301 -msgid "In addition to your manual selections, the following packages have been changed to resolve dependencies:" -msgstr "Be rankiniu būdu pasirinktų pakeitimų, tvarkant paketų priklausomybes dar bus automatiškai pakeisti šie paketai:" +msgid "" +"In addition to your manual selections, the following packages have been " +"changed to resolve dependencies:" +msgstr "" +"Be rankiniu būdu pasirinktų pakeitimų, tvarkant paketų priklausomybes dar bus " +"automatiškai pakeisti šie paketai:" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:305 src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:326 #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:397 src/YQPkgVersionsView.cc:412 @@ -387,8 +410,12 @@ msgstr "Nepalaikomas paketas" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:322 -msgid "Please realize that the following selected software is either unsupported or requires an additional customer contract for support." -msgstr "Supraskite, kad sekanti pasirinkta programinė įranga yra nepalaikoma arba reikalauja papildomos naudotojo sutarties palaikymui." +msgid "" +"Please realize that the following selected software is either unsupported or " +"requires an additional customer contract for support." +msgstr "" +"Supraskite, kad sekanti pasirinkta programinė įranga yra nepalaikoma arba " +"reikalauja papildomos naudotojo sutarties palaikymui." #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:421 msgid "Not implemented yet. Sorry." @@ -401,101 +428,205 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:65 -msgid "<b>Note:</b> This is a just a short overview. Refer to the manual for details." +msgid "" +"<b>Note:</b> This is a just a short overview. Refer to the manual for " +"details." msgstr "<b>Pastaba:</b> Tai tik trumpa apžvalga. Išsamiau skaitykite apraše." #. Help specific to online update mode #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:72 msgid "In this dialog, select patches to download and install." -msgstr "Šiame skydelyje pasirinkite pataisas, kurios bus atsiųstos ir įdiegtos." +msgstr "" +"Šiame skydelyje pasirinkite pataisas, kurios bus atsiųstos ir įdiegtos." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:73 -msgid "The list on the left side contains available patches along with the respective patch kind (security, recommended, or optional) and the (estimated) download size." -msgstr "Kairėje esančiame sąraše yra esamos pataisos su atitinkamu pataisos tipu (saugumas, patartina arba pasirinktina) ir (apytikslis) siuntimo dydis." +msgid "" +"The list on the left side contains available patches along with the " +"respective patch kind (security, recommended, or optional) and the " +"(estimated) download size." +msgstr "" +"Kairėje esančiame sąraše yra esamos pataisos su atitinkamu pataisos tipu " +"(saugumas, patartina arba pasirinktina) ir (apytikslis) siuntimo dydis." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:76 -msgid "This list normally contains only those patches that are not installed on your system yet. You can change that with the <b>Include Installed Patches</b> check box below the list." -msgstr "Šiame sąraše paprastai yra tik tie paketai, kurie dar neįdiegti jūsų sistemoje. Tai galite pakeisti su varnele <b>Įtraukti įdiegtas pataisas</b>, esančia po sąrašu." +msgid "" +"This list normally contains only those patches that are not installed on your " +"system yet. You can change that with the <b>Include Installed Patches</b> " +"check box below the list." +msgstr "" +"Šiame sąraše paprastai yra tik tie paketai, kurie dar neįdiegti jūsų " +"sistemoje. Tai galite pakeisti su varnele <b>Įtraukti įdiegtas pataisas</b>, " +"esančia po sąrašu." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:78 -msgid "The <b>Patch Description</b> field contains a longer explanation of the currently selected patch. Click a patch in the list to view its description here." -msgstr "<b>Pataisos aprašo</b> laukelyje yra išsamesnis pasirinktos pataisos aprašas. Paspauskite ant sąraše esančios pataisos ir jos aprašą pamatysite čia." +msgid "" +"The <b>Patch Description</b> field contains a longer explanation of the " +"currently selected patch. Click a patch in the list to view its description " +"here." +msgstr "" +"<b>Pataisos aprašo</b> laukelyje yra išsamesnis pasirinktos pataisos aprašas. " +"Paspauskite ant sąraše esančios pataisos ir jos aprašą pamatysite čia." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:80 -msgid "The package list on the right side shows the contents of the currently selected patch, i.e., the packages it contains. You cannot install or delete individual packages from a patch, only the patch as a whole. This is intentional to avoid system inconsistencies." -msgstr "Dešinėje pusėje esantis paketų sąrašas rodo pažymėtos pataisos turinį, t.y. joje esančius paketus. Jūs negalite įdiegti arba pašalinti iš pataisos pavienius paketus, tik visą visą pataisą. Tai daroma, norint išlaikyti sistemos vienalytiškumą." +msgid "" +"The package list on the right side shows the contents of the currently " +"selected patch, i.e., the packages it contains. You cannot install or delete " +"individual packages from a patch, only the patch as a whole. This is " +"intentional to avoid system inconsistencies." +msgstr "" +"Dešinėje pusėje esantis paketų sąrašas rodo pažymėtos pataisos turinį, t.y. " +"joje esančius paketus. Jūs negalite įdiegti arba pašalinti iš pataisos " +"pavienius paketus, tik visą visą pataisą. Tai daroma, norint išlaikyti " +"sistemos vienalytiškumą." #. Translators: Please keep the reference to "filter views" to distinguish between "filter views" that #. affect the amount of visible packages in the package list and "details views" ( below the package list ) #. that show details about the ( one ) currently selected package in the package list. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:88 -msgid "In addition to <b>Patches</b>, you can also select one of the other filter views from <b>Filter</b> at the upper left:" -msgstr "Papildomai prie <b>Pataisų</b>, galite pasirinkti vieną iš kitų rodymo filtrų iš laukelio <b>Filtras</b>, esančio viršuje kairėje pusėje:" +msgid "" +"In addition to <b>Patches</b>, you can also select one of the other filter " +"views from <b>Filter</b> at the upper left:" +msgstr "" +"Papildomai prie <b>Pataisų</b>, galite pasirinkti vieną iš kitų rodymo filtrų " +"iš laukelio <b>Filtras</b>, esančio viršuje kairėje pusėje:" #. Help specific to normal (non-online-update) mode #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:96 -msgid "In this dialog, select which packages to install, update, or delete. You can select individual packages or entire package \"selections\"." -msgstr "Šiame skydelyje pasirinkite, kuriuos paketus įdiegsite, atnaujinsite arba pašalinsite. Galite pasirinkti pavienius paketus arba visą paketų pluoštą." +msgid "" +"In this dialog, select which packages to install, update, or delete. You can " +"select individual packages or entire package \"selections\"." +msgstr "" +"Šiame skydelyje pasirinkite, kuriuos paketus įdiegsite, atnaujinsite arba " +"pašalinsite. Galite pasirinkti pavienius paketus arba visą paketų pluoštą." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:98 -msgid "Click the status icon for a package or selection to change the status or right-click it to open a context menu." -msgstr "Norėdami pakeisti paketo arba parinkties būseną, paspauskite ant būsenos piktogramos arba dešiniu mygtuku atverkite kontekstinį meniu." +msgid "" +"Click the status icon for a package or selection to change the status or " +"right-click it to open a context menu." +msgstr "" +"Norėdami pakeisti paketo arba parinkties būseną, paspauskite ant būsenos " +"piktogramos arba dešiniu mygtuku atverkite kontekstinį meniu." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:100 -msgid "Use the <b>Check Dependencies</b> button to resolve package dependencies. Some packages require other packages to be installed. Some packages can only be installed if certain other packages are not installed, too. This check will automatically mark required packages for installation and it will warn you if there are dependency conflicts." -msgstr "Spauskite mygtuką <b>Tikrinti priklausomybes</b>, jei norite sutvarkyti paketo priklausomybes. Kai kuriems paketams reikia kitų paketų. Kai kurie paketai gali būti įdiegti tik tuomet, jei neįdiegti kiti paketai. Ši patikra automatiškai pažymės reikalingus diegimui paketus ir įspės jus, jei atsiras priklausomybių konfliktai." +msgid "" +"Use the <b>Check Dependencies</b> button to resolve package dependencies. " +"Some packages require other packages to be installed. Some packages can only " +"be installed if certain other packages are not installed, too. This check " +"will automatically mark required packages for installation and it will warn " +"you if there are dependency conflicts." +msgstr "" +"Spauskite mygtuką <b>Tikrinti priklausomybes</b>, jei norite sutvarkyti " +"paketo priklausomybes. Kai kuriems paketams reikia kitų paketų. Kai kurie " +"paketai gali būti įdiegti tik tuomet, jei neįdiegti kiti paketai. Ši patikra " +"automatiškai pažymės reikalingus diegimui paketus ir įspės jus, jei atsiras " +"priklausomybių konfliktai." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:105 -msgid "When you leave this dialog with <b>Accept</b>, this check will automatically be performed." -msgstr "Kai išeisite iš šio skydelio spausdami <b>Patvirtinti</b>, ši patikra bus atlikta automatiškai." +msgid "" +"When you leave this dialog with <b>Accept</b>, this check will automatically " +"be performed." +msgstr "" +"Kai išeisite iš šio skydelio spausdami <b>Patvirtinti</b>, ši patikra bus " +"atlikta automatiškai." #. Translators: Please keep the reference to "filter views" to distinguish between "filter views" that #. affect the amount of visible packages in the package list and "details views" (below the package list) #. that show details about the (one) currently selected package in the package list. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:111 -msgid "Select one of the available filter views with the <b>Filter</b> combo-box at the upper left:" -msgstr "Rinkitės vieną iš esamų rodymo filtrų laukelyje <b>Filtras</b>, esančiame viršuje kairėje:" +msgid "" +"Select one of the available filter views with the <b>Filter</b> combo-box at " +"the upper left:" +msgstr "" +"Rinkitės vieną iš esamų rodymo filtrų laukelyje <b>Filtras</b>, esančiame " +"viršuje kairėje:" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:115 -msgid "<b>Selections</b> shows some predefined sets of packages that logically belong together." -msgstr "<b>Šablonai</b> rodo kai kuriuos iš anksto parinktus paketų, kurie yra logiškai yra susiję, komplektus." +msgid "" +"<b>Selections</b> shows some predefined sets of packages that logically " +"belong together." +msgstr "" +"<b>Šablonai</b> rodo kai kuriuos iš anksto parinktus paketų, kurie yra " +"logiškai yra susiję, komplektus." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:116 -msgid "Use the check box next to the selection to select it as a whole. You can also select or deselect individual packages in the package list at the right." -msgstr "Panaudokite pažymimąjį langelį, esantį šalia parinkties, norėdami pažymėti visą šabloną. Paketų sąraše dešinėje galite pažymėti arba atžymėti pavienius paketus." +msgid "" +"Use the check box next to the selection to select it as a whole. You can also " +"select or deselect individual packages in the package list at the right." +msgstr "" +"Panaudokite pažymimąjį langelį, esantį šalia parinkties, norėdami pažymėti " +"visą šabloną. Paketų sąraše dešinėje galite pažymėti arba atžymėti pavienius " +"paketus." #. Help common to all modes: Description of the various filter views #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:124 -msgid "<b>Package Groups</b> shows packages by category. You can expand and collapse tree items to refine or generalize categories. Click any category to display the packages in that category in the package list on the right side." -msgstr "<b>Paketų grupės</b> rodo paketus pagal kategorijas. Gilinantis arba apibendrinant kategorijas, galite išskleisti arba sutraukti medžio elementus. Paspauskite ant bet kokios kategorijos, norėdami pamatyti tos kategorijos paketus paketų sąraše dešinėje." +msgid "" +"<b>Package Groups</b> shows packages by category. You can expand and collapse " +"tree items to refine or generalize categories. Click any category to display " +"the packages in that category in the package list on the right side." +msgstr "" +"<b>Paketų grupės</b> rodo paketus pagal kategorijas. Gilinantis arba " +"apibendrinant kategorijas, galite išskleisti arba sutraukti medžio elementus. " +"Paspauskite ant bet kokios kategorijos, norėdami pamatyti tos kategorijos " +"paketus paketų sąraše dešinėje." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:127 -msgid " <b>Hint:</b> There is a \"zzz All\" entry at the very end of the list that will show all packages. This may take a few seconds on slow machines." -msgstr " <b>Patarimas:</b> Yra elementas „zzz Visi“ sąrašo pabaigoje, kur rodomi visi paketai. Lėtuose kompiuteriuose tai gali užtrukti kelias sekundes." +msgid "" +" <b>Hint:</b> There is a \"zzz All\" entry at the very end of the list that " +"will show all packages. This may take a few seconds on slow machines." +msgstr "" +" <b>Patarimas:</b> Yra elementas „zzz Visi“ sąrašo pabaigoje, kur rodomi visi " +"paketai. Lėtuose kompiuteriuose tai gali užtrukti kelias sekundes." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:130 -msgid "<b>Search</b> allows you to search for packages that meet various criteria. This is usually the easiest way to find a package if you know its name." -msgstr "<b>Paieška</b> leidžia ieškoti paketų pagal įvairius kriterijus. Dažniausiai tai paprasčiausias būdas surasti paketą, kai žinomas jo pavadinimas." +msgid "" +"<b>Search</b> allows you to search for packages that meet various criteria. " +"This is usually the easiest way to find a package if you know its name." +msgstr "" +"<b>Paieška</b> leidžia ieškoti paketų pagal įvairius kriterijus. Dažniausiai " +"tai paprasčiausias būdas surasti paketą, kai žinomas jo pavadinimas." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:132 -msgid "<b>Hint:</b> You can also use this to find out what package contains a certain library. Search in the <b>Provides</b> RPM field." -msgstr "<b>Pastaba:</b> Taip pat galite tai naudoti, norėdami sužinoti, kokiame pakete yra tam tikra biblioteka. Ieškokite <b>Pateikia</b> RPM laukelyje." +msgid "" +"<b>Hint:</b> You can also use this to find out what package contains a " +"certain library. Search in the <b>Provides</b> RPM field." +msgstr "" +"<b>Pastaba:</b> Taip pat galite tai naudoti, norėdami sužinoti, kokiame " +"pakete yra tam tikra biblioteka. Ieškokite <b>Pateikia</b> RPM laukelyje." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:135 -msgid "<b>Installation Summary</b> by default shows the changes to your system -- what packages will be installed, deleted, or updated." -msgstr "<b>Diegimo santrauka</b> paprastai rodo jūsų sistemos pakeitimus -- kokie paketai bus įdiegti, pašalinti arba atnaujinti." +msgid "" +"<b>Installation Summary</b> by default shows the changes to your system -- " +"what packages will be installed, deleted, or updated." +msgstr "" +"<b>Diegimo santrauka</b> paprastai rodo jūsų sistemos pakeitimus -- kokie " +"paketai bus įdiegti, pašalinti arba atnaujinti." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:137 -msgid "It is generally a good idea to use <b>Check Dependencies</b> then switch to <b>Installation Summary</b> before clicking <b>Accept</b>. This way you can see all changes that will be made to your system." -msgstr "Prieš spaudžiant <b>Patvirtinti</b>, verta pasinaudoti mygtuku <b>Tikrinti priklausomybes</b>, tuomet pereiti į <b>Diegimo santrauką</b>. Tokiu būdu matysite visus būsimus jūsų sistemos pakeitimus." +msgid "" +"It is generally a good idea to use <b>Check Dependencies</b> then switch to <" +"b>Installation Summary</b> before clicking <b>Accept</b>. This way you can " +"see all changes that will be made to your system." +msgstr "" +"Prieš spaudžiant <b>Patvirtinti</b>, verta pasinaudoti mygtuku <b>Tikrinti " +"priklausomybes</b>, tuomet pereiti į <b>Diegimo santrauką</b>. Tokiu būdu " +"matysite visus būsimus jūsų sistemos pakeitimus." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:140 -msgid "You can also explicitly select what packages with what status to see here; use the check boxes at the left side." -msgstr "Išskirtinai galite pažymėti, kokį paketą su kokia būsena čia norite matyti; naudokite varneles kairėje." +msgid "" +"You can also explicitly select what packages with what status to see here; " +"use the check boxes at the left side." +msgstr "" +"Išskirtinai galite pažymėti, kokį paketą su kokia būsena čia norite matyti; " +"naudokite varneles kairėje." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:142 -msgid "<b>Hint:</b> You can also reverse the effect of this filter. You can see what packages remain the same on your system. Simply check <b>Keep</b> and uncheck everything else." -msgstr "<b>Pastaba:</b> Galite invertuoti šio filtro efektą. Galite matyti, kokie paketai nebus pakeisti. Pažymėkite <b>Išlaikyti</b> ir atžymėkite visa kita." +msgid "" +"<b>Hint:</b> You can also reverse the effect of this filter. You can see what " +"packages remain the same on your system. Simply check <b>Keep</b> and uncheck " +"everything else." +msgstr "" +"<b>Pastaba:</b> Galite invertuoti šio filtro efektą. Galite matyti, kokie " +"paketai nebus pakeisti. Pažymėkite <b>Išlaikyti</b> ir atžymėkite visa kita." #. Make sure all images used here are specified in #. helpimages_DATA in include/Makefile.am ! @@ -545,8 +676,12 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:186 -msgid "This package is already installed. Update it or reinstall it (if the versions are the same)." -msgstr "Šis paketas jau įdiegtas. Atnaujinkite arba iš naujo įdiekite jį (jei versija ta pati)." +msgid "" +"This package is already installed. Update it or reinstall it (if the versions " +"are the same)." +msgstr "" +"Šis paketas jau įdiegtas. Atnaujinkite arba iš naujo įdiekite jį (jei versija " +"ta pati)." #. Translators: Package status short (!) description #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:191 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:277 @@ -568,12 +703,21 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:199 -msgid "This package is not installed and should not be installed under any circumstances, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get." -msgstr "Šis paketas neįdiegtas ir jokiais būdais neturėtų būti diegiamas dėl nesutvarkytų priklausomybių, kurios gali atsirasti kitiems paketams." +msgid "" +"This package is not installed and should not be installed under any " +"circumstances, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other " +"packages might have or get." +msgstr "" +"Šis paketas neįdiegtas ir jokiais būdais neturėtų būti diegiamas dėl " +"nesutvarkytų priklausomybių, kurios gali atsirasti kitiems paketams." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:203 src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:316 -msgid "Packages set to \"taboo\" are treated as if they did not exist on any installation media." -msgstr "Į paketą, nustatytą kaip „uždraustas“, žiūrima, tarsi jo nebūtų jokiame diegimo šaltinyje." +msgid "" +"Packages set to \"taboo\" are treated as if they did not exist on any " +"installation media." +msgstr "" +"Į paketą, nustatytą kaip „uždraustas“, žiūrima, tarsi jo nebūtų jokiame " +"diegimo šaltinyje." #. Translators: Package status short (!) description #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:207 src/YQPkgStatusFilterView.cc:101 @@ -582,12 +726,20 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:209 -msgid "This package is installed and should not be modified, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get." -msgstr "Šis paketas įdiegtas ir neturėtų būti modifikuojamas dėl nesutvarkytų priklausomybių, kurios gali atsirasti kitiems paketams." +msgid "" +"This package is installed and should not be modified, especially not because " +"of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get." +msgstr "" +"Šis paketas įdiegtas ir neturėtų būti modifikuojamas dėl nesutvarkytų " +"priklausomybių, kurios gali atsirasti kitiems paketams." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:213 -msgid "Use this status for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by newer versions that may come with the distribution." -msgstr "Šią būseną naudokite trečiosios šalies paketams, kurie neturėtų būti perrašyti naujesne versija, ateinančia kartu su platinamuoju paketu." +msgid "" +"Use this status for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by " +"newer versions that may come with the distribution." +msgstr "" +"Šią būseną naudokite trečiosios šalies paketams, kurie neturėtų būti " +"perrašyti naujesne versija, ateinančia kartu su platinamuoju paketu." #. Translators: Package status short (!) description #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:218 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:275 @@ -597,12 +749,19 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:220 -msgid "This package will be installed automatically because some other package needs it." -msgstr "Šis paketas bus įdiegtas automatiškai, kadangi jo reikia kai kuriems kitiems paketams." +msgid "" +"This package will be installed automatically because some other package needs " +"it." +msgstr "" +"Šis paketas bus įdiegtas automatiškai, kadangi jo reikia kai kuriems kitiems " +"paketams." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:222 -msgid "<b>Hint:</b> You may have to use \"taboo\" to get rid of such a package." -msgstr "<b>Pastaba:</b> Jums gali prireikti panaudoti „uždraustas“, jei norite atsikratyti tokio paketo." +msgid "" +"<b>Hint:</b> You may have to use \"taboo\" to get rid of such a package." +msgstr "" +"<b>Pastaba:</b> Jums gali prireikti panaudoti „uždraustas“, jei norite " +"atsikratyti tokio paketo." #. Translators: Package status short (!) description #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:226 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:276 @@ -612,8 +771,12 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:228 -msgid "This package is already installed, but some other package needs a newer version, so it will automatically be updated." -msgstr "Šis paketas jau įdiegtas, bet kai kuriems kitiems paketams reikia naujesnės versijos, todėl jis bus automatiškai atnaujintas." +msgid "" +"This package is already installed, but some other package needs a newer " +"version, so it will automatically be updated." +msgstr "" +"Šis paketas jau įdiegtas, bet kai kuriems kitiems paketams reikia naujesnės " +"versijos, todėl jis bus automatiškai atnaujintas." #. Translators: Package status short (!) description #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:233 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:274 @@ -623,12 +786,18 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:235 -msgid "This package is already installed, but package dependencies require that it is deleted." -msgstr "Šis paketas jau įdiegtas, tačiau dėl paketų priklausomybių jis pažymėtas pašalinimui." +msgid "" +"This package is already installed, but package dependencies require that it " +"is deleted." +msgstr "" +"Šis paketas jau įdiegtas, tačiau dėl paketų priklausomybių jis pažymėtas " +"pašalinimui." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:236 msgid "This can happen, for example, if some other package obsoletes this one." -msgstr "Tai gali atsitikti, jei, pavyzdžiui, kai kurie kiti paketai šį pakeičia naujesniu." +msgstr "" +"Tai gali atsitikti, jei, pavyzdžiui, kai kurie kiti paketai šį pakeičia " +"naujesniu." #. Translators: Headline for help about "magic keys" in the package manager #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:265 @@ -648,8 +817,12 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:278 -msgid "Get this package. Install it if it is not installed yet. Update it to the latest version if it is installed and there is a newer version." -msgstr "Imkite šį paketą. Įdiekite jį, jei jis dar neįdiegtas. Atnaujinkite jį iki naujausios versijos, jei jis yra įdiegtas ir egzistuoja naujesnė versija." +msgid "" +"Get this package. Install it if it is not installed yet. Update it to the " +"latest version if it is installed and there is a newer version." +msgstr "" +"Imkite šį paketą. Įdiekite jį, jei jis dar neįdiegtas. Atnaujinkite jį iki " +"naujausios versijos, jei jis yra įdiegtas ir egzistuoja naujesnė versija." #. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:285 @@ -658,13 +831,21 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:287 -msgid "Get rid of this package. Mark it as \"do not install\" if it is not installed yet. Delete it if it is installed." -msgstr "Atsikratykite šio paketo. Jei jis dar neįdiegtas, pažymėkite jo „neįdiegti“. Jei jis įdiegtas, pašalinkite jį." +msgid "" +"Get rid of this package. Mark it as \"do not install\" if it is not installed " +"yet. Delete it if it is installed." +msgstr "" +"Atsikratykite šio paketo. Jei jis dar neįdiegtas, pažymėkite jo „neįdiegti“. " +"Jei jis įdiegtas, pašalinkite jį." #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:295 -msgid "Update this package if it is installed and there is a newer version. Ignore packages that are not installed." -msgstr "Jei šis paketas įdiegtas ir egzistuoja nauja versija, atnaujinkite jį. Ignoruokite neįdiegtus paketus." +msgid "" +"Update this package if it is installed and there is a newer version. Ignore " +"packages that are not installed." +msgstr "" +"Jei šis paketas įdiegtas ir egzistuoja nauja versija, atnaujinkite jį. " +"Ignoruokite neįdiegtus paketus." #. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:302 @@ -673,13 +854,23 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:304 -msgid "Undo the effect of \">\" above: Set package to \"keep\" if it is currently set to \"update\". Ignore all other packages." -msgstr "Atšaukti aukščiau esančio „>“ efektą: Jei dabar paketas nustatytas „atnaujinti“, nustatykite jam „išlaikyti“. Ignoruokite visus kitus paketus." +msgid "" +"Undo the effect of \">\" above: Set package to \"keep\" if it is currently " +"set to \"update\". Ignore all other packages." +msgstr "" +"Atšaukti aukščiau esančio „>“ efektą: Jei dabar paketas nustatytas " +"„atnaujinti“, nustatykite jam „išlaikyti“. Ignoruokite visus kitus paketus." #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:312 -msgid "Set this package to \"taboo\" if it is not installed: make sure this package does not get installed, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get. " -msgstr "Nustatykite šiam paketui „uždraustas“, jei jis neįdiegtas: įsitikinkite, kad šis paketas nediegiamas, kadangi jis gali sukelti neišsprendžiamų priklausomybių kitiems paketams. " +msgid "" +"Set this package to \"taboo\" if it is not installed: make sure this package " +"does not get installed, especially not because of unresolved dependencies " +"that other packages might have or get. " +msgstr "" +"Nustatykite šiam paketui „uždraustas“, jei jis neįdiegtas: įsitikinkite, kad " +"šis paketas nediegiamas, kadangi jis gali sukelti neišsprendžiamų " +"priklausomybių kitiems paketams. " #. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:322 @@ -688,12 +879,22 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:324 -msgid "Set this package to \"protected\" if it is installed: make sure this package will not be modified, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get. " -msgstr "Nustatykite šiam paketui „apsaugoti“, jei jis įdiegtas: įsitikinkite, jog jis nebus modifikuojamas, kadangi tuomet gali sukelti neišsprendžiamų priklausomybių kitiems paketams." +msgid "" +"Set this package to \"protected\" if it is installed: make sure this package " +"will not be modified, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that " +"other packages might have or get. " +msgstr "" +"Nustatykite šiam paketui „apsaugoti“, jei jis įdiegtas: įsitikinkite, jog jis " +"nebus modifikuojamas, kadangi tuomet gali sukelti neišsprendžiamų " +"priklausomybių kitiems paketams." #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:328 -msgid "Use this for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by newer versions that may come with the distribution." -msgstr "Tai naudokite trečiosios šalies paketams, kurie neturi būti perrašyti naujesne versija, kuri gali ateiti kartu su platinamuoju paketu." +msgid "" +"Use this for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by newer " +"versions that may come with the distribution." +msgstr "" +"Tai naudokite trečiosios šalies paketams, kurie neturi būti perrašyti " +"naujesne versija, kuri gali ateiti kartu su platinamuoju paketu." #: src/YQPatternSelector.cc:180 src/YQPatternSelector.cc:248 #: src/YQSimplePatchSelector.cc:182 src/YQSimplePatchSelector.cc:208 @@ -753,8 +954,13 @@ msgstr "Sukurti priklausomybių sprendimo detalų aprašą" #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:391 -msgid "<p>Use this to generate extensive logs to help tracking down bugs in the dependency resolver. The logs will be stored in directory <br><tt>%1</tt></p>" -msgstr "<p>Naudokite išplėstos išklotinės sukūrimui, padedančios aptikti priklausomybių sprendimo klaidas. Ši išklotinė bus patalpinta kataloge <br><tt>%1</tt></p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Use this to generate extensive logs to help tracking down bugs in the " +"dependency resolver. The logs will be stored in directory <br><tt>%1</tt></p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Naudokite išplėstos išklotinės sukūrimui, padedančios aptikti " +"priklausomybių sprendimo klaidas. Ši išklotinė bus patalpinta kataloge <br><" +"tt>%1</tt></p>" #. parent #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:395 @@ -762,8 +968,12 @@ msgstr "Priklausomybių detalus aprašas" #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:410 -msgid "<p>Dependency resolver test case written to <br><tt>%1</tt></p><p>Prepare <tt>y2logs.tgz tar</tt> archive to attach to Bugzilla?</p>" -msgstr "<p>Priklausomybių sprendimo detalus aprašas įrašytas į <br><tt>%1</tt></p><p>Paruošti <tt>y2logs.tgz tar</tt> archyvą siuntimui į Bugzilla?</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Dependency resolver test case written to <br><tt>%1</tt></p><p>Prepare <tt>" +"y2logs.tgz tar</tt> archive to attach to Bugzilla?</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Priklausomybių sprendimo detalus aprašas įrašytas į <br><tt>%1</tt></p><p>" +"Paruošti <tt>y2logs.tgz tar</tt> archyvą siuntimui į Bugzilla?</p>" #. parent #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:413 @@ -772,8 +982,13 @@ #. caption #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:426 -msgid "<p><b>Error</b> creating dependency resolver test case</p><p>Please check disk space and permissions for <tt>%1</tt></p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Klaida</b> kuriant priklausomybių sprendimo detalų aprašą</p><p>Patikrinkite, ar yra diske laisvos vietos ir atitinkami leidimai į <tt>%1</tt></p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Error</b> creating dependency resolver test case</p><p>Please check " +"disk space and permissions for <tt>%1</tt></p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Klaida</b> kuriant priklausomybių sprendimo detalų aprašą</p><p>" +"Patikrinkite, ar yra diske laisvos vietos ir atitinkami leidimai į <tt>%1</tt>" +"</p>" #. startsWith #. filter @@ -1486,6 +1701,25 @@ msgstr "Autoriai:" #: src/YQPkgUpdateProblemFilterView.cc:60 +#| msgid "" +#| "<br>\n" +#| "<h2>Update Problem</h2>\n" +#| "<p>\n" +#| "<font color='blue'>\n" +#| "The packages in this list cannot be updated automatically.\n" +#| "</font>\n" +#| "</p>\n" +#| "<p>Possible reasons:</p>\n" +#| "<ul>\n" +#| "<li>They are obsoleted by other packages\n" +#| "<li>There is no newer version to update to on any installation media\n" +#| "<li>They are third-party packages\n" +#| "</ul>\n" +#| "</p>\n" +#| "<p>\n" +#| "Please choose manually what to do with them.\n" +#| "The safest course of action is to delete them.\n" +#| "</p>" msgid "" "<br>\n" "<h2>Update Problem</h2>\n" @@ -1548,7 +1782,8 @@ "\n" "Norėdami įdiegti šią versiją, spauskite „Tęsti“ ir\n" "atžymėkite tą versiją, kuri nepalaiko kelių versijų diegimo kartu.\n" -"Jei norite išlaikyti kitą versiją ir nediegti šios versijos, spauskite „Atsisakyti“." +"Jei norite išlaikyti kitą versiją ir nediegti šios versijos, spauskite " +"„Atsisakyti“." #: src/YQPkgVersionsView.cc:399 msgid "" @@ -1562,10 +1797,12 @@ "\n" "Norėdami įdiegti šią versiją, spauskite „Tęsti“ ir\n" "atžymėkite visas kitas versijas.\n" -"Jei norite išlaikyti kitas versijas ir nediegti šios versijos, spauskite „Atsisakyti“." +"Jei norite išlaikyti kitas versijas ir nediegti šios versijos, spauskite " +"„Atsisakyti“." #. Dialog heading #: src/YQPkgVersionsView.cc:407 +#| msgid "Package &Versions" msgid "Incompatible Package Versions" msgstr "Nesuderinamos paketų versijos" Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/qt.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/qt.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/qt.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -19,7 +19,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" "X-Poedit-Bookmarks: -1,-1,-1,-1,-1,-1,-1,40,-1,-1\n" @@ -74,7 +75,8 @@ "You clicked the right mouse button where a left-click was expected.\n" "Switch left and right mouse buttons?" msgstr "" -"Jūs spragtelėjote dešiniuoju pelės klavišu ten, kur buvo tikimasi kairiojo spragtelėjimo.\n" +"Jūs spragtelėjote dešiniuoju pelės klavišu ten, kur buvo tikimasi kairiojo " +"spragtelėjimo.\n" "Sukeisti vietomis kairį ir dešinį pelės mygtukus?" #. Popup dialog caption @@ -137,17 +139,21 @@ #. "Release Notes" button #. QT handles duplicate shortcuts, it can be kept (bnc#880983) #: src/YQWizard.cc:874 src/YQWizard.cc:1355 +#| msgid "Release Notes" msgid "&Release Notes" msgstr "&Laidos informacija" #. "Steps" button #. QT handles duplicate shortcuts, it can be kept (bnc#880983) #: src/YQWizard.cc:1345 +#| msgid "Steps" msgid "&Steps" msgstr "Ži&ngsniai" #. "Tree" button #. QT handles duplicate shortcuts, it can be kept (bnc#880983) #: src/YQWizard.cc:1350 +#| msgid "Tree" msgid "&Tree" msgstr "&Medis" + Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/rdp.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/rdp.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/rdp.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -18,7 +18,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Commandline help title @@ -39,7 +40,9 @@ #. Commandline command help #: src/clients/rdp.rb:64 msgid "Set 'yes' to allow or 'no' to disallow the remote administration" -msgstr "Nuotoliniam administravimui priskirkite reikšmę „yes“ (leisti) arba „no“ (neleisti)" +msgstr "" +"Nuotoliniam administravimui priskirkite reikšmę „yes“ (leisti) arba „no“ " +"(neleisti)" #. Command line output Headline #: src/clients/rdp.rb:107 @@ -91,7 +94,8 @@ "<p><b><big>Nuotolinio administravimo nuostatos</big></b></p>\n" "<p>Jei ši savybė įjungta, jūs galėsite administruoti kompiuterį\n" "iš kito nutolusio kompiuterio. Galite naudoti RDP\n" -"klientą, tokį kaip rdesktop (jungtis prie <tt><kompiuterio_vardas>:%1</tt>).\n" +"klientą, tokį kaip rdesktop (jungtis prie <tt><kompiuterio_vardas>:%1<" +"/tt>).\n" "Ši nuotolinio administravimo forma ne tokia saugi, kaip SSH.</p>\n" #. Dialog frame title @@ -154,3 +158,4 @@ #: src/modules/RDP.rb:156 msgid "Remote administration is disabled." msgstr "Nuotolinis administravimas išjungtas." + Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/rear.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/rear.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/rear.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -18,7 +18,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Command line help text for the Xrear module @@ -36,6 +37,7 @@ msgstr "Keisti IrDA konfigūraciją" #: src/clients/rear.rb:73 +#| msgid "Output:" msgid "Output" msgstr "Išvestis" @@ -51,10 +53,13 @@ msgstr "%1 tvarkyklė nepalaiko šio skaitytuvo." #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:90 -msgid "Do NOT expect the created backup to be useful for system recovery if you ignore this warning." +msgid "" +"Do NOT expect the created backup to be useful for system recovery if you " +"ignore this warning." msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:104 +#| msgid "This scanner is not supported." msgid "This system is not supported." msgstr "Ši sistema nepalaikoma." @@ -69,6 +74,7 @@ #. store original value of directories for the case that the users clicks cancel #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:143 +#| msgid "Additional Products to Select" msgid "Additional Directories to Backup" msgstr "Papildomi katalogai, įtrauktini į atsarginę kopiją" @@ -77,6 +83,7 @@ msgstr "&Gerai" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:171 +#| msgid "Cache Directory" msgid "Choose Directory" msgstr "Pasirinkite katalogą" @@ -88,10 +95,12 @@ #. store original value of modules for the case that the users clicks cancel #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:221 +#| msgid "&No Additional YaST Modules" msgid "Additional Kernel Modules" msgstr "Papildomi branduolio moduliai" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:228 +#| msgid "Available Modules" msgid "Available Modules in current System:" msgstr "Prieinami dabartinės sistemos moduliai:" @@ -136,39 +145,63 @@ #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:419 #, fuzzy #| msgid "<p>Here, configure an infrared interface (<b>IrDA</b>) for your computer.</p>" -msgid "<p>Configure Rear Relax and Recover (<b>ReaR</b>) backup for your computer.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Čia konfigūruokite savo kompiuterio infraraudonųjų spindulių sąsają (<b>IrDA</b>).</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Configure Rear Relax and Recover (<b>ReaR</b>) backup for your computer.<" +"/p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Čia konfigūruokite savo kompiuterio infraraudonųjų spindulių sąsają (<b>" +"IrDA</b>).</p>" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:422 -msgid "<p>Decide how to start your <b>Recovery System</b>. Choose USB if you want to boot from an USB stick, or ISO for CD-ROM respectively.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Decide how to start your <b>Recovery System</b>. Choose USB if you want to " +"boot from an USB stick, or ISO for CD-ROM respectively.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:425 -msgid "<p>Choose where the <b>Backup</b> should be stored. Select NFS if you have to use a server that offers Network File System. Please specify the location as follows: <tt>nfs://hostname/directory</tt>. You can also choose USB to store your backup on an USB stick or USB disk.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Choose where the <b>Backup</b> should be stored. Select NFS if you have to " +"use a server that offers Network File System. Please specify the location as " +"follows: <tt>nfs://hostname/directory</tt>. You can also choose USB to store " +"your backup on an USB stick or USB disk.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:428 -msgid "<p>If no USB devices are shown, attach an USB stick or an USB disk and click <b>Rescan USB Devices</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>If no USB devices are shown, attach an USB stick or an USB disk and click " +"<b>Rescan USB Devices</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:431 -msgid "<p>Select <b>Keep old backup</b> if you don't want the previous backup copy to be overwritten.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Select <b>Keep old backup</b> if you don't want the previous backup copy " +"to be overwritten.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:434 -msgid "<p>The <b>Advanced</b> menu offers to add <b>additional directories to the backup</b> and <b>additional kernel modules to the rescue system</b>. That's only useful if your backup doesn't contain all the needed directories or the rescue system doesn't boot due to missing kernel modules.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Advanced</b> menu offers to add <b>additional directories to the " +"backup</b> and <b>additional kernel modules to the rescue system</b>. That's " +"only useful if your backup doesn't contain all the needed directories or the " +"rescue system doesn't boot due to missing kernel modules.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:437 -msgid "<p>The <b>Save and run rear now</b> button runs rear and shows rear's output. <strong>Make sure to test if the created backup works as expected on your system!</strong></p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Save and run rear now</b> button runs rear and shows rear's output. " +"<strong>Make sure to test if the created backup works as expected on your " +"system!</strong></p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:440 -msgid "<p><b>OK</b> saves the configuration and quits while <b>Cancel</b> closes the configuration dialog without saving.<p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>OK</b> saves the configuration and quits while <b>Cancel</b> closes the " +"configuration dialog without saving.<p>" msgstr "" #. prepare advanced menu #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:459 +#| msgid "Additional Domains" msgid "Additional Directories in Backup" msgstr "Papildomi katalogai, įtraukti į atsarginę kopiją" @@ -178,10 +211,12 @@ #. prepare main dialog #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:472 +#| msgid "Remote File System" msgid "Recovery System" msgstr "Sistemos atkūrimas" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:480 +#| msgid "&Media" msgid "&Boot Media" msgstr "Paleidimo &laikmena" @@ -190,6 +225,7 @@ msgstr "Atsarginės kopijos" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:498 +#| msgid "&Backup" msgid "&Backup Media" msgstr "At&sarginės kopijos laikmena" @@ -201,10 +237,12 @@ msgstr "&Vieta" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:517 +#| msgid "&Before Backup" msgid "&Keep old backup" msgstr "&Išlaikyti senas atsargines kopijas" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:521 +#| msgid "Rescan Devices" msgid "Rescan USB Devices" msgstr "Iš naujo aptikti USB įrenginius" @@ -231,7 +269,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:590 -msgid "Your rear configuration file contains options this YaST2 module cannot configure.\n" +msgid "" +"Your rear configuration file contains options this YaST2 module cannot " +"configure.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:595 @@ -254,6 +294,7 @@ msgstr "Skaitoma konfigūracija" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:698 +#| msgid "Analyzing the system..." msgid "Analyzing system" msgstr "Analizuojama sistema" @@ -264,6 +305,7 @@ msgstr "Skaitomi pagrindiniai nustatyčai" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:699 +#| msgid "Analyzing the system..." msgid "Analyzing system..." msgstr "Analizuojama sistema..." @@ -312,3 +354,4 @@ #: src/modules/RearSystemCheck.rb:151 msgid "Partition %1 uses an unsupported filesystem (%2)." msgstr "" + Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/registration.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/registration.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/registration.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -20,7 +20,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. popup heading (in bold) @@ -41,6 +42,7 @@ #. %s is the default SCC URL #: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:114 +#| msgid "Novell Customer Center Configuration" msgid "SUSE Customer Center (%s)" msgstr "SUSE klientų centras (%s)" @@ -88,10 +90,12 @@ #. download and install the specified SSL certificate to the system #. @param url [String] URL of the certificate #: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:247 +#| msgid "Download CA Certificate" msgid "Downloading SSL Certificate" msgstr "Parsiunčiamas SSL liudijimas" #: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:251 +#| msgid "Importing the SSL certificate" msgid "Importing SSL Certificate" msgstr "Importuojamas SSL liudijimas" @@ -111,39 +115,48 @@ msgstr "Produkto registracija" #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:9 +#| msgid "Run during autoinstallation" msgid "Run registration during autoinstallation" msgstr "Registraciją pradėti automatinio diegimo metu" #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:10 +#| msgid "Do not run during autoinstallation" msgid "Skip registration during autoinstallation" msgstr "Automatinio diegimo metu registraciją praleisti" #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:15 +#| msgid "Registration Status" msgid "Registration Settings" msgstr "Registracijos nuostatos" #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:17 +#| msgid "Email Address" msgid "E-mail Address: %s" msgstr "El. pašto adresas: %s" #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:19 +#| msgid "Registration code is missing." msgid "Registration Code is Configured" msgstr "Registracijos kodas sukonfigūruotas." #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:23 +#| msgid "Installed (Available)" msgid "Install Available Updates" msgstr "Įdiegti prieinamus atnaujinimus" #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:27 +#| msgid "Registration server:" msgid "Registration Server" msgstr "Registracijos serveris" #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:30 #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:32 +#| msgid "LDAP Server URI:" msgid "Server URL: %s" msgstr "Serverio URL: %s" #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:32 +#| msgid "Discovery" msgid "Use SLP discovery" msgstr "Aptikimas per SLP" @@ -213,10 +226,12 @@ msgstr "Išdavė" #: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:22 +#| msgid "Valid" msgid "Validity" msgstr "Galiojimas" #: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:26 +#| msgid "Issued To" msgid "Issued On: " msgstr "Išduota: " @@ -227,6 +242,7 @@ msgstr "Liudijimas dar galioja.\n" #: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:32 +#| msgid "Expires: " msgid "Expires On: " msgstr "Nustoja galioti: " @@ -237,6 +253,7 @@ msgstr "Liudijimas dar galioja.\n" #: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:43 +#| msgid "Serial mouse" msgid "Serial Number: " msgstr "Eilės numeris: " @@ -582,7 +599,9 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:50 msgid "" "<p>Enter registration codes for the requested extensions or modules.</p>\n" -"<p>Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you cannot provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective extension or module.</p>" +"<p>Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you cannot " +"provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective " +"extension or module.</p>" msgstr "" #. part of the UI - labels in the dialog @@ -634,12 +653,16 @@ #. help text (2/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_base_dialog.rb:257 -msgid "<p>Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific registration code.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific " +"registration code.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (3/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_base_dialog.rb:260 -msgid "<p>If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the SUSE Customer Center and remove them manually there.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the SUSE " +"Customer Center and remove them manually there.</p>" msgstr "" #. dialog title @@ -653,8 +676,11 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_registration_dialog.rb:34 #, fuzzy #| msgid "<p>Here you can see all of the add-on products which are installed on your system.</p>" -msgid "<p>Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Čia galite matyti visus papildomus produktus, kurie įdiegti jūsų sistemoje.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Čia galite matyti visus papildomus produktus, kurie įdiegti jūsų " +"sistemoje.</p>" #. @return [String] the main dialog label #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_registration_dialog.rb:52 @@ -672,8 +698,12 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_reregistration_dialog.rb:40 #, fuzzy #| msgid "<p>Here you can see all of the add-on products which are installed on your system.</p>" -msgid "<p>Here you can select extensions and modules which will be registered again.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Čia galite matyti visus papildomus produktus, kurie įdiegti jūsų sistemoje.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Here you can select extensions and modules which will be registered " +"again.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Čia galite matyti visus papildomus produktus, kurie įdiegti jūsų " +"sistemoje.</p>" #. @return [String] the main dialog label #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_reregistration_dialog.rb:54 @@ -684,7 +714,9 @@ #. help text #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:38 -msgid "<p>Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered together with the base product.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered together " +"with the base product.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:41 @@ -708,6 +740,7 @@ msgstr "Architektūra" #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:60 +#| msgid "Rule Type" msgid "Release Type" msgstr "Laidos tipas" @@ -724,6 +757,7 @@ #. remove the selected addon after user confirms the removal #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:137 +#| msgid "Really delete '%1'?" msgid "Really delete '%s'?" msgstr "Tikrai pašalinti „%s“?" @@ -744,6 +778,7 @@ msgstr "&Architektūra" #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:188 +#| msgid "&Release" msgid "&Release Type" msgstr "&Laidos tipas" @@ -756,14 +791,17 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:57 msgid "" -"<p>Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center database,\n" +"<p>Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center " +"database,\n" "enabling you to get online updates and technical support.\n" -"To register while installing automatically, select <b>Run Product Registration</b>.</p>" +"To register while installing automatically, select <b>Run Product " +"Registration</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:63 msgid "" -"<p>If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL of the server\n" +"<p>If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL " +"of the server\n" "and the location of the SMT certificate in <b>SMT Server Settings</b>. Refer\n" "to your SMT manual for further assistance.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -778,6 +816,7 @@ #. @return [Yast::Term] UI term #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:106 #: src/lib/registration/ui/base_system_registration_dialog.rb:131 +#| msgid "Email Address" msgid "&E-mail Address" msgstr "&El. pašto adresas" @@ -831,6 +870,7 @@ #. the UI defition for the main dialog #. @return [Yast::Term] UI term #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:189 +#| msgid "Register Extensions and Modules" msgid "Register Extensions or Modules..." msgstr "Registruoti plėtinius ir modulius..." @@ -864,7 +904,9 @@ #. help text #: src/lib/registration/ui/base_system_registration_dialog.rb:142 -msgid "Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get updates and extensions." +msgid "" +"Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get " +"updates and extensions." msgstr "" #. Popup question: confirm skipping the registration @@ -898,7 +940,9 @@ msgid "" "If you skip product registration now, remember to register after\n" "installation has completed." -msgstr "Jei dabar praleisite registraciją, nepamirškite užsiregistruoti įdiegę sistemą." +msgstr "" +"Jei dabar praleisite registraciją, nepamirškite užsiregistruoti įdiegę " +"sistemą." #. UI term for the network configuration button (or empty if not needed) #. @return [Yast::Term] UI term @@ -908,6 +952,7 @@ #. SSL error message #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:23 +#| msgid "Certificate has been imported." msgid "Certificate has expired" msgstr "Liudijimas nebegalioja." @@ -930,31 +975,43 @@ #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (1/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:122 -msgid "<p>Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the " +"authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (2/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:126 -msgid "<p>You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the issuer of the unknown certificate.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known " +"certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the " +"issuer of the unknown certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (3/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:131 -msgid "<p>Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed certificate.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed " +"certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (4/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:135 -msgid "<p><b>Important:</b> You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Important:</b> You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to " +"be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (5/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:140 -msgid "<p><b>Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big security risk.</b></p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big security " +"risk.</b></p>" msgstr "" #. error message, the entered URL is not valid #: src/lib/registration/ui/local_server_dialog.rb:67 +#| msgid "Invalid value." msgid "Invalid URL." msgstr "Netinkamas URL." @@ -969,6 +1026,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: error message, %s are details #: src/lib/registration/ui/media_addon_workflow.rb:95 #: src/lib/registration/ui/wizard_client.rb:57 +#| msgid "Internal error" msgid "Internal error: %s" msgstr "Vidinė klaida: %s" @@ -986,7 +1044,10 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_selection_dialog.rb:50 -msgid "<p>In this dialog you can manually select which repositories willbe used for online migration. The packages will be upgraded to thehighest version found in the selected repositories.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>In this dialog you can manually select which repositories willbe used for " +"online migration. The packages will be upgraded to thehighest version found " +"in the selected repositories.</p>" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Multiselection widget label @@ -998,16 +1059,19 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Push button label, starts the repository management module #: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_selection_dialog.rb:89 +#| msgid "Saving Repositories..." msgid "Manage Repositories..." msgstr "Tvarkyti saugyklas..." #. TRANSLATORS: summary text, %s is a repository URL #: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_selection_dialog.rb:114 +#| msgid "URL: %1" msgid "URL: %s" msgstr "URL: %s" #. TRANSLATORS: summary text, %s is a repository priority (1-99) #: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_selection_dialog.rb:116 +#| msgid "Priority" msgid "Priority: %s" msgstr "Prioritetas: %s" @@ -1051,7 +1115,9 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text (1/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:65 -msgid "<p>Here you can select the migration target products. The registrationserver may offer several possible migration to new products.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Here you can select the migration target products. The registrationserver " +"may offer several possible migration to new products.</p>" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: help text (2/3) @@ -1063,8 +1129,12 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:70 #, fuzzy #| msgid "<p>Use <b>Edit</b> to change selected image configuration or create the image.</p>" -msgid "<p>Use the <b>%s</b> check box to manually select the migration repositories later.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Spauskite <b>Keisti</b> ir derinkite pasirinktą atvaizdžio konfigūraciją arba kurkite atvaizdį.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Use the <b>%s</b> check box to manually select the migration repositories " +"later.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Spauskite <b>Keisti</b> ir derinkite pasirinktą atvaizdžio konfigūraciją " +"arba kurkite atvaizdį.</p>" #: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:71 #, fuzzy @@ -1105,7 +1175,9 @@ #. %{url} is the URL of the registration server (SMT) #. %{product} is a full product name, e.g. "SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12" #: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:214 -msgid "ERROR: Product <b>%{product}</b> is not available at the registration server (%{url}). Make the product available to allow using this migration." +msgid "" +"ERROR: Product <b>%{product}</b> is not available at the registration server " +"(%{url}). Make the product available to allow using this migration." msgstr "" #. this is rather a theoretical case, but anyway.... @@ -1154,11 +1226,15 @@ msgstr "Sistema jau užregistruota." #: src/lib/registration/ui/registered_system_dialog.rb:41 -msgid "<p>You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or modules to enhance the functionality of the system.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or " +"modules to enhance the functionality of the system.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/registration/ui/registered_system_dialog.rb:43 -msgid "<p>If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE Customer Center and remove the system manually there.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE " +"Customer Center and remove the system manually there.</p>" msgstr "" #. button label Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/rpm-groups.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/rpm-groups.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/rpm-groups.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -6,21 +6,22 @@ # Jonas Gocentas , 2001. # Linas Spraunius , 2000. # Andrius Štikonas , 2006. -# Mindaugas Baranauskas , 2009, 2010. +# Mindaugas Baranauskas , 2009, 2010, 2015. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: rpm-groups\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2008-02-04 11:08+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-08-05 22:01+0300\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2015-10-28 09:13+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Mindaugas Baranauskas \n" -"Language-Team: Lithuanian <>\n" +"Language-Team: Lithuanian \n" "Language: lt\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" -"X-Generator: Lokalize 1.0\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" msgid "3D" msgstr "3D" @@ -146,7 +147,7 @@ msgstr "Žodynas" msgid "Displaymanagers" -msgstr "Vaizdo tvarkyklės" +msgstr "Prisijungimų tvarkyklės" msgid "DNS" msgstr "DNS" @@ -642,3 +643,4 @@ msgid "YaST" msgstr "YaST" + Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/samba-client.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/samba-client.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/samba-client.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -19,7 +19,8 @@ "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. translators: command line help text for Samba client module #: src/clients/samba-client.rb:62 @@ -165,8 +166,12 @@ #. help text, do not translate 'winbind uid', 'winbind gid' #: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:174 -msgid "<p>Specify the <b>Range</b> for Samba user and group IDs (<tt>winbind uid</tt> and <tt>winbind gid</tt> values).</p>" -msgstr "<p>Nurodykite Samba naudotojų ir grupių identifikatorių <b>Sritį</b> (<tt>winbind uid</tt> ir <tt>winbind gid</tt> reikšmes).</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Specify the <b>Range</b> for Samba user and group IDs (<tt>winbind uid</tt>" +" and <tt>winbind gid</tt> values).</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Nurodykite Samba naudotojų ir grupių identifikatorių <b>Sritį</b> (<tt>" +"winbind uid</tt> ir <tt>winbind gid</tt> reikšmes).</p>" #. frame label #: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:235 @@ -200,10 +205,12 @@ #. require_groups #: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:256 +#| msgid "Allowed Services" msgid "Allowed Group(s)" msgstr "Leidžiamos grupės" #: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:261 +#| msgid "Group Name" msgid "Group Name(s) or SID(s)" msgstr "Grupių pavadinimai arba SID" @@ -396,7 +403,8 @@ #. continue/cancel popup #: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:808 msgid "" -"Configuring this system as a client for Active Directory resets the following\n" +"Configuring this system as a client for Active Directory resets the " +"following\n" "settings in smb.conf to the default values:\n" "%1" msgstr "" @@ -467,7 +475,8 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Paleidimo nutraukimas:</big></b><br>\n" -"Galite saugiai nutraukti konfigūracijos įrankį, spausdami <b>Nutraukti</b>.</p>\n" +"Galite saugiai nutraukti konfigūracijos įrankį, spausdami <b>Nutraukti</b>.<" +"/p>\n" #. Write dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:44 @@ -499,25 +508,30 @@ #. translators: Samba workgroup dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:59 msgid "" -"<p>A Linux client can be a member of a workgroup, NT domain, or Active Directory domain.\n" +"<p>A Linux client can be a member of a workgroup, NT domain, or Active " +"Directory domain.\n" "Specify the name of the membership.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Linux klientas gali gali būti darbo grupės, NT srities arba „Active Directory“ srities nariu.\n" +"<p>Linux klientas gali gali būti darbo grupės, NT srities arba „Active " +"Directory“ srities nariu.\n" "Čia galite nurodyti narystės vardą.</p>\n" #. Samba role dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:63 msgid "" "<p><b>Use SMB Information for Linux Authentication</b> allows \n" -"verification of passwords with the NT server or the Kerberos server if joining an AD domain.</p>\n" +"verification of passwords with the NT server or the Kerberos server if " +"joining an AD domain.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Naudoti SMB informaciją Linux tapatybės nustatymui</b> leis \n" -"slaptažodžių patikrinimą NT arba Kerberos serveryje, jei prisijungiama prie AD (Aktyvaus Katalogo) srities.</p>\n" +"slaptažodžių patikrinimą NT arba Kerberos serveryje, jei prisijungiama prie " +"AD (Aktyvaus Katalogo) srities.</p>\n" #. Samba role dialog help 2.5/3 #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:67 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Change primary DNS suffix</b> to add your AD server into the list of name servers.\n" +"<p>Check <b>Change primary DNS suffix</b> to add your AD server into the list " +"of name servers.\n" "This option is only available for static network setups.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -525,10 +539,12 @@ #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:71 msgid "" "<p>When you press <b>OK</b>, the system verifies the membership and,\n" -"if it is a NT or Active Directory domain, allows this host to join the domain.</p>\n" +"if it is a NT or Active Directory domain, allows this host to join the " +"domain.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Paspaudus <b>Gerai</b>, sistema patikrins narystę ir,\n" -"jei tai NT ar „aktyvaus katalogo“ sritis, leis šiam kompiuteriui prie jungtis prie srities.</p>\n" +"jei tai NT ar „aktyvaus katalogo“ sritis, leis šiam kompiuteriui prie jungtis " +"prie srities.</p>\n" #. translators: Samba membership dialog help 1/2 (installation) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:79 @@ -546,17 +562,35 @@ #. Samba membership dialog help (common part 1/4) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:85 -msgid "<p>Check <b>Create Home Directory on Login</b> to have local home directories created on the first login.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Jei norite, kad pirmo prisijungimo metu būtų sukuriamas vietinis namų katalogas, pažymėkite <b>Sukurti namų katalogą prisijungimo metu</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Check <b>Create Home Directory on Login</b> to have local home directories " +"created on the first login.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Jei norite, kad pirmo prisijungimo metu būtų sukuriamas vietinis namų " +"katalogas, pažymėkite <b>Sukurti namų katalogą prisijungimo metu</b>.</p>" #. Samba membership dialog help (common part 2/4) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:89 -msgid "<p><b>Offline Authentication</b> enables the user to log in even if there is no connection to the domain controller. For this option to work, you must log in to your domain at least once. The user's credentials are then stored encrypted on your computer and are reused for a domain login when no connection to the domain controller can be established. This is especially useful for mobile users." -msgstr "<p><b>Tapatybės nustatymas neprisijungus prie tinklo</b> leidžia naudotojams prisijungti, net jei nebus ryšio su srities valdikliu. Norint, kad ši parinktis veiktų, turite bent kartą prisijungti prie savo srities. Tokiu atveju naudotojo prisijungimo duomenys bus užšifruoti ir saugomi Jūsų kompiuteryje bei bus naudojami prisijungimui prie srities, kai nebus ryšio su srities valdikliu. Tai ypač naudinga judriems naudotojams." +msgid "" +"<p><b>Offline Authentication</b> enables the user to log in even if there is " +"no connection to the domain controller. For this option to work, you must log " +"in to your domain at least once. The user's credentials are then stored " +"encrypted on your computer and are reused for a domain login when no " +"connection to the domain controller can be established. This is especially " +"useful for mobile users." +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Tapatybės nustatymas neprisijungus prie tinklo</b> leidžia naudotojams " +"prisijungti, net jei nebus ryšio su srities valdikliu. Norint, kad ši " +"parinktis veiktų, turite bent kartą prisijungti prie savo srities. Tokiu " +"atveju naudotojo prisijungimo duomenys bus užšifruoti ir saugomi Jūsų " +"kompiuteryje bei bus naudojami prisijungimui prie srities, kai nebus ryšio su " +"srities valdikliu. Tai ypač naudinga judriems naudotojams." #. Samba membership dialog help (common part) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:93 -msgid "<p>Click <b>Expert Settings</b> to enable advanced features such as WINS options or mounting server home directories from Active Directory domains.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Click <b>Expert Settings</b> to enable advanced features such as WINS " +"options or mounting server home directories from Active Directory domains.</p>" msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config @@ -567,14 +601,26 @@ #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:101 msgid "" -"<p>Set the <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b> that should be used for joining\n" -"the selected domain during autoinstallation. Note that the password will be saved to the profile in cleartext (unencrypted) form.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Nurodykite <b>Naudotojo vardą</b> ir <b>slaptažodį</b>, kurie bus naudojami jungiantis prie pasirinktos srities automatinio diegimo metu. Atminkite, kad slaptažodis bus įrašytas į profilį kaip paprastas tekstas (nešifruotas).</p>" +"<p>Set the <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b> that should be used for " +"joining\n" +"the selected domain during autoinstallation. Note that the password will be " +"saved to the profile in cleartext (unencrypted) form.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Nurodykite <b>Naudotojo vardą</b> ir <b>slaptažodį</b>, kurie bus " +"naudojami jungiantis prie pasirinktos srities automatinio diegimo metu. " +"Atminkite, kad slaptažodis bus įrašytas į profilį kaip paprastas tekstas " +"(nešifruotas).</p>" #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:105 -msgid "<p>Specify the <b>Active Directory Server</b> to use for joining an Active Directory domain. This is also used as the value for KDC in the Kerberos configuration.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Nurodykite <b>„Aktyvaus katalogo“ Serverį</b>, kuris naudojamas jungiantis prie Aktyvaus Katalogo srities. Ši reikšmė taip pat naudojama KDC serveriui Kerberos konfigūracijai.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Specify the <b>Active Directory Server</b> to use for joining an Active " +"Directory domain. This is also used as the value for KDC in the Kerberos " +"configuration.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Nurodykite <b>„Aktyvaus katalogo“ Serverį</b>, kuris naudojamas jungiantis " +"prie Aktyvaus Katalogo srities. Ši reikšmė taip pat naudojama KDC serveriui " +"Kerberos konfigūracijai.</p>" #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for possible NTP configuration #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:109 @@ -585,7 +631,8 @@ "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Norėdami sinchronizuoti savo laiką su NTP serveriu, sukonfigūruokite savo kompiuterį\n" +"Norėdami sinchronizuoti savo laiką su NTP serveriu, sukonfigūruokite savo " +"kompiuterį\n" "kaip NTP klientą. Konfigūraciją pasieksite mygtuku <b>NTP konfigūracija</b>.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -638,7 +685,9 @@ #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:249 msgid "To join the domain anonymously, leave the text entries empty.\n" -msgstr "Norėdami prie srities jungtis anonimiškai, teksto laukelius palikite tuščius.\n" +msgstr "" +"Norėdami prie srities jungtis anonimiškai, teksto laukelius palikite " +"tuščius.\n" #. popup question, the domain status cannot be found out, ask user what to do #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:304 @@ -682,7 +731,9 @@ #. popup question #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:361 msgid "User shares already exist. Keep or delete these shares?" -msgstr "Naudotojo bendrieji ištekliai jau yra. Išlaikyti a pašalinti šiuos bendrinamus duomenis?" +msgstr "" +"Naudotojo bendrieji ištekliai jau yra. Išlaikyti a pašalinti šiuos " +"bendrinamus duomenis?" #. button label #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:363 @@ -697,7 +748,9 @@ #. yes/no popup #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:381 msgid "Other Windows sharing services are available. Stop them as well?" -msgstr "Taip pat prieinamos ir kitos Windows bendrinimo paslaugos. Ar jas irgi sustabdyti?" +msgstr "" +"Taip pat prieinamos ir kitos Windows bendrinimo paslaugos. Ar jas irgi " +"sustabdyti?" #. check box label #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:392 @@ -706,8 +759,13 @@ #. help text for "Use WINS for Hostname Resolution" check box label #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:401 -msgid "<p>If you want to use Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) for name resolution, check <b>Use WINS for Hostname Resolution</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Jei norite vardų konvertavimui naudoti Microsoft Windows interneto vardo paslaugą (Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service), pažymėkite <b>Kompiuterių vardų konvertavimui naudoti WINS</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>If you want to use Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) for name " +"resolution, check <b>Use WINS for Hostname Resolution</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Jei norite vardų konvertavimui naudoti Microsoft Windows interneto vardo " +"paslaugą (Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service), pažymėkite <b>Kompiuterių " +"vardų konvertavimui naudoti WINS</b>.</p>" #. check box label #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:411 @@ -716,8 +774,12 @@ #. help text ("Retrieve WINS server via DHCP" is a checkbox label) #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:418 -msgid "<p>Check <b>Retrieve WINS server via DHCP</b> to use a WINS server provided by DHCP.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norėdami naudoti per DHCP gautą WINS serverį, pažymėkite <b>Gauti WINS serverį per DHCP</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Check <b>Retrieve WINS server via DHCP</b> to use a WINS server provided " +"by DHCP.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norėdami naudoti per DHCP gautą WINS serverį, pažymėkite <b>Gauti WINS " +"serverį per DHCP</b>.</p>" #. frame label #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:438 @@ -751,40 +813,76 @@ #. membership dialog help (common part 3/4), %1 is separator (e.g. '\') #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:511 -msgid "<p><b>Allow Users to Share Their Directories</b> enables members of the group in <b>Permitted Group</b> to share directories they own with other users. For example, <tt>users</tt> for a local scope or <tt>DOMAIN%1Users</tt> for a domain scope. The user also must make sure that the file system permissions allow access.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pažymėjus <b>Leisti naudotojams bendrinti savo katalogus</b>, naudotojai, priklausantys <b>leidžiamai grupei</b>, galės bendrinti savo katalogus. Pavyzdžiui, <tt>users</tt> grupė yra vietiniams, o <tt>DOMAIN%1Users</tt> yra srities naudotojams. Beje, naudotojas turi įsitikinti, kad rinkmenų sistema leidžia priėjimą.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Allow Users to Share Their Directories</b> enables members of the group " +"in <b>Permitted Group</b> to share directories they own with other users. For " +"example, <tt>users</tt> for a local scope or <tt>DOMAIN%1Users</tt> for a " +"domain scope. The user also must make sure that the file system permissions " +"allow access.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pažymėjus <b>Leisti naudotojams bendrinti savo katalogus</b>, naudotojai, " +"priklausantys <b>leidžiamai grupei</b>, galės bendrinti savo katalogus. " +"Pavyzdžiui, <tt>users</tt> grupė yra vietiniams, o <tt>DOMAIN%1Users</tt> yra " +"srities naudotojams. Beje, naudotojas turi įsitikinti, kad rinkmenų sistema " +"leidžia priėjimą.</p>" #. membership dialog help (common part 3/4) #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:517 -msgid "<p>With <b>Maximum Number of Shares</b>, limit the total amount of shares that may be created.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Nurodę <b>didžiausią bendrųjų išteklių skaičių</b>, apribosite visų galimų sukurti bendrųjų išteklių skaičių.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>With <b>Maximum Number of Shares</b>, limit the total amount of shares " +"that may be created.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Nurodę <b>didžiausią bendrųjų išteklių skaičių</b>, apribosite visų galimų " +"sukurti bendrųjų išteklių skaičių.</p>" #. membership dialog help common part #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:522 -msgid "<p>To permit access to user shares without authentication, enable <b>Allow Guest Access</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norėdami leisti prieiti prie naudotojų bendrų išteklių nenustačius jų tapatybės, pažymėkite <b>Leisti svečio prieigą</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>To permit access to user shares without authentication, enable <b>Allow " +"Guest Access</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norėdami leisti prieiti prie naudotojų bendrų išteklių nenustačius jų " +"tapatybės, pažymėkite <b>Leisti svečio prieigą</b>.</p>" #. help text for PAM Mount table #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:531 msgid "" "<p>In the table <b>Mount Server Directories</b>, you can specify server\n" -"directories (such as home directory) which should be locally mounted when the\n" +"directories (such as home directory) which should be locally mounted when " +"the\n" "user is logged in. If mounting should be user-specific, specify <b>User\n" -"Name</b> for the selected rule. Otherwise, the directory is mounted for each user. For more information, see pam_mount.conf manual page.</p>" +"Name</b> for the selected rule. Otherwise, the directory is mounted for each " +"user. For more information, see pam_mount.conf manual page.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Lentelėje <b>Prijungtini serverio katalogai</b> galite nurodyti serverio katalogus\n" -" (pvz., namų katalogą), kuris turėtų būti prijungtas prie vietinės sistemos naudotojo prisijungimo metu. \n" -"Jei prijungiama konkrečiam naudotojui, jį galite nurodyti pasirinktai taisyklei ties <b>Naudotojo vardas</b>. \n" -"Jei ne, katalogas bus prijungtas kiekvienam naudotojui. Daugiau informacijos rasite pam_mount.conf vadove.</p>" +"<p>Lentelėje <b>Prijungtini serverio katalogai</b> galite nurodyti serverio " +"katalogus\n" +" (pvz., namų katalogą), kuris turėtų būti prijungtas prie vietinės sistemos " +"naudotojo prisijungimo metu. \n" +"Jei prijungiama konkrečiam naudotojui, jį galite nurodyti pasirinktai " +"taisyklei ties <b>Naudotojo vardas</b>. \n" +"Jei ne, katalogas bus prijungtas kiekvienam naudotojui. Daugiau informacijos " +"rasite pam_mount.conf vadove.</p>" #. help text for PAM Mount table: example #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:538 -msgid "<p>For example, you may use <tt>/home/%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> value for <b>Remote Path</b>, <tt>~/</tt> value for <b>Local Mount Point</b> to mount the home directory, together with a value <tt>user=%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> as a part of <b>Options</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pavyzdžiui, galite naudoti <tt>/home/%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> reikšmę <b>Nuotoliniam keliui</b>, <tt>~/</tt> reikšmę <b>Vietinio prijungimo vietai</b>, norėdami prijungti namų katalogą kartu su reikšme <tt>user=%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> kaip <b>Parinkčių</b> dalį.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>For example, you may use <tt>/home/%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> value for <b>Remote " +"Path</b>, <tt>~/</tt> value for <b>Local Mount Point</b> to mount the home " +"directory, together with a value <tt>user=%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> as a part of <b>" +"Options</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pavyzdžiui, galite naudoti <tt>/home/%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> reikšmę <b>" +"Nuotoliniam keliui</b>, <tt>~/</tt> reikšmę <b>Vietinio prijungimo vietai</b>" +", norėdami prijungti namų katalogą kartu su reikšme <tt>user=%(DOMAIN_USER)<" +"/tt> kaip <b>Parinkčių</b> dalį.</p>" #. help text for kerberos method option #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:546 -msgid "<p>The value of <b>Kerberos Method</b> defines how kerberos tickets are verified. When <b>Single Sing-on for SSH</b> is used, the default Kerberos Method set by YaST is <tt>secrets and keytab</tt>. See smb.conf manual page for details.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The value of <b>Kerberos Method</b> defines how kerberos tickets are " +"verified. When <b>Single Sing-on for SSH</b> is used, the default Kerberos " +"Method set by YaST is <tt>secrets and keytab</tt>. See smb.conf manual page " +"for details.</p>" msgstr "" #. translators: initialization dialog caption @@ -799,36 +897,43 @@ #. dialog caption #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:650 +#| msgid "Saving Samba Client Configuration" msgid "Saving Kerberos Client Configuration" msgstr "Įrašoma Kerberos kliento konfigūracija" #. progress stage label #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:655 +#| msgid "Write the settings" msgid "Write PAM settings" msgstr "Įrašyti PAM nuostatas" #. progress stage label #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:657 +#| msgid "Write Kerberos configuration" msgid "Write Kerberos client settings" msgstr "Įrašyti Kerberos kliento konfigūraciją" #. progress stage label #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:659 +#| msgid "Write the settings" msgid "Write OpenSSH settings" msgstr "Įrašyti OpenSSH nuostatas" #. progress step label #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:663 +#| msgid "Writing the settings..." msgid "Writing PAM settings..." msgstr "Įrašomos PAM nuostatos..." #. progress step label #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:665 +#| msgid "Writing Kerberos configuration..." msgid "Writing Kerberos client settings..." msgstr "Įrašoma Kerberos kliento konfigūracija..." #. progress step label #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:667 +#| msgid "Writing the settings..." msgid "Writing OpenSSH settings..." msgstr "Įrašomos OpenSSH nuostatos..." @@ -892,6 +997,7 @@ #. summary text, %1 is value #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:998 +#| msgid "<p><b>Workgroup or Domain</b>: %1</p>" msgid "<b>Default Domain</b>: %1<br>" msgstr "<b>Numatytoji sritis</b>: %1<br>" @@ -902,6 +1008,7 @@ #. summary text (yes/no follows) #: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:1010 +#| msgid "Offline Authentication Enabled" msgid "<b>Kerberos Authentication Enabled</b>: %1" msgstr "<b>Įgalintas Kerberos tapatybės nustatymas</b>: %1" @@ -1078,3 +1185,4 @@ #: src/modules/SambaNetJoin.pm:322 msgid "Unable to proceed with join: Inconsistent cluster state" msgstr "" + Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/samba-server.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/samba-server.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/samba-server.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -21,12 +21,15 @@ "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. translators: command line help text for samba-server module #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:66 msgid "Samba server configuration module (see Samba documentation for details)" -msgstr "Samba serverio konfigūravimo modulis (daugiau informacijos Samba dokumentacijoje)" +msgstr "" +"Samba serverio konfigūravimo modulis (daugiau informacijos Samba " +"dokumentacijoje)" #. translators: command line help text for share action #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:79 @@ -111,27 +114,37 @@ #. translators: command line help text for share read_list option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:201 msgid "A comma-separated list of users allowed to read from the share" -msgstr "Kableliais padalintas sąrašas naudotojų, kuriems galima skaityti bendrąjį išteklių" +msgstr "" +"Kableliais padalintas sąrašas naudotojų, kuriems galima skaityti bendrąjį " +"išteklių" #. translators: command line help text for share write_list option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:208 msgid "A comma-separated list of users allowed to write to the share" -msgstr "Kableliais skirtas naudotojų sąrašas, kuriems galima rašyti į bendrąjį išteklių" +msgstr "" +"Kableliais skirtas naudotojų sąrašas, kuriems galima rašyti į bendrąjį " +"išteklių" #. translators: command line help text for share browseable option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:215 msgid "Flag if the share should be visible when browsing the LAN" -msgstr "Pažymėkite, jei bendrasis išteklius turi būti matomas naršant vietiniame tinkle" +msgstr "" +"Pažymėkite, jei bendrasis išteklius turi būti matomas naršant vietiniame " +"tinkle" #. translators: command line help text for share guest_ok option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:222 msgid "Flag if the share should allow guest access" -msgstr "Pažymėkite, jei norite prie bendrojo ištekliaus prileisti naudotojus svečio teisėmis" +msgstr "" +"Pažymėkite, jei norite prie bendrojo ištekliaus prileisti naudotojus svečio " +"teisėmis" #. translators: command line help text for share valid_users option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:229 msgid "A comma-separated list of users allowed to access the share" -msgstr "Kableliais padalintas sąrašas naudotojų, kuriems galima prieiti prie bendrojo ištekliaus" +msgstr "" +"Kableliais padalintas sąrašas naudotojų, kuriems galima prieiti prie bendrojo " +"ištekliaus" #. translators: command line help text for PDC role option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:236 @@ -151,7 +164,9 @@ #. translators: command line help text for standalone server role option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:254 msgid "Server should provide shares, but should not allow domain logins" -msgstr "Serveris turi pateikti bendrus išteklius, bet neturi leisti naudotojams savo vardu prisijungti prie prities" +msgstr "" +"Serveris turi pateikti bendrus išteklius, bet neturi leisti naudotojams savo " +"vardu prisijungti prie prities" #. translators: command line help text for smbpasswd option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:260 @@ -185,13 +200,18 @@ #. translators: command line help text for ldap_suffix option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:298 -msgid "The LDAP suffix DN for manipulating the user information on the LDAP server" -msgstr "LDAP sufiksas DN skirtas darbui su naudotojo informacija LDAP serveryje" +msgid "" +"The LDAP suffix DN for manipulating the user information on the LDAP server" +msgstr "" +"LDAP sufiksas DN skirtas darbui su naudotojo informacija LDAP serveryje" #. translators: command line help text for ldap_admin_dn option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:305 -msgid "The LDAP DN for modifying contents of the LDAP server (for example, changing passwords)" -msgstr "LDAP DN skirtas LDAP serverio turinio keitimui (pvz., keisti slaptažodžius)" +msgid "" +"The LDAP DN for modifying contents of the LDAP server (for example, changing " +"passwords)" +msgstr "" +"LDAP DN skirtas LDAP serverio turinio keitimui (pvz., keisti slaptažodžius)" #. translators: error message for share command line action #. must provide the share name @@ -255,12 +275,15 @@ msgid "" "Because users are currently connected to this Samba server,\n" "the server configuration has been reloaded instead of restarted.\n" -"To confirm that all settings are applied despite possibly disconnecting the users,\n" +"To confirm that all settings are applied despite possibly disconnecting the " +"users,\n" "run '/etc/init.d/smb restart' and '/etc/init.d/nmb restart'" msgstr "" "Prie Samba serverio yra prisijungusių naudotojų,\n" -"tad serverio konfigūracija buvo tik iš naujo įkelta, bet ne iš naujo paleista.\n" -"Norėdami pritaikyti visus nuostatų pakeitimus nepaisant to, kad bus atjungti naudotojai,\n" +"tad serverio konfigūracija buvo tik iš naujo įkelta, bet ne iš naujo " +"paleista.\n" +"Norėdami pritaikyti visus nuostatų pakeitimus nepaisant to, kad bus atjungti " +"naudotojai,\n" "įvykdykite „/etc/init.d/smb restart“ ir „/etc/init.d/nmb restart“" #. table entry description for smbpasswd-based SAM @@ -655,6 +678,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1113 #: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1124 +#| msgid "Allow &Guest Access" msgid "Guest Access" msgstr "Svečio prieiga" @@ -841,7 +865,8 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Paruošimo nutraukimas</big></b><br>\n" -"Galite saugiai nutraukti konfigūracijos įrankį spausdami <b>Nutraukti</b>.</p>\n" +"Galite saugiai nutraukti konfigūracijos įrankį spausdami <b>Nutraukti</b>.</p>" +"\n" #. Write dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:45 @@ -869,11 +894,14 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:56 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Workgroup or Domain Selection</big></b><br>\n" -"Select existing name of workgroup or domain or type your own new name and click <b>Next</b>.\n" +"Select existing name of workgroup or domain or type your own new name and " +"click <b>Next</b>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Darbo grupės arba srities pasirinkimas</big></b><br>\n" -"Čia pateiktos visos jūsų tinkle aptiktos darbo grupės arba sritys. Pasirinkite vieną iš jų arba įrašykite savo naują vardą ir spauskite <b>Toliau</b>.\n" +"Čia pateiktos visos jūsų tinkle aptiktos darbo grupės arba sritys. " +"Pasirinkite vieną iš jų arba įrašykite savo naują vardą ir spauskite <b>" +"Toliau</b>.\n" "</p>\n" #. Samba select Samba Server type - Installation step 2 @@ -887,27 +915,35 @@ #| "<p>The options available in the configuration dialogs depend on the settings in this selection.</p>" msgid "" "<p><b><big>Samba Server Type</big></b></p>\n" -"<p>A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows NT style domain.</p>\n" +"<p>A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows NT style " +"domain.</p>\n" "<p>The backup controller uses another domain controller for validation.\n" -"The primary controller uses its own information about users and their passwords.</p>\n" -"<p>The options available in the configuration dialogs depend on the settings in this selection. Windows NT style domain controller functionality will be phased out in future releases.</p>" +"The primary controller uses its own information about users and their " +"passwords.</p>\n" +"<p>The options available in the configuration dialogs depend on the settings " +"in this selection. Windows NT style domain controller functionality will be " +"phased out in future releases.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Samba serverio tipas</big></b></p>\n" -"<p>Srities valdiklis leidžia Windows klientams prisijungti prie Windows srities.</p> \n" +"<p>Srities valdiklis leidžia Windows klientams prisijungti prie Windows " +"srities.</p> \n" "<p>Atsarginis srities valdiklis tikrindamas naudoja kitą srities valdiklį.\n" -"Pirminis valdiklis naudoja savą informaciją apie naudotojus ir jų slaptažodžius.</p>\n" +"Pirminis valdiklis naudoja savą informaciją apie naudotojus ir jų " +"slaptažodžius.</p>\n" "<p>Nuo šio pasirinkimo priklauso kitos konfigūracijos langų parinktys.</p>" #. Samba select Samba Server type - Installation step 2 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:73 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Samba Server Type</big></b></p>\n" -"<p>A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain.</p>\n" +"<p>A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain.<" +"/p>\n" "<p>The options available in the configuration dialogs \n" "depend on the settings in this selection.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Samba serverio tipas</big></b></p>\n" -"<p>Srities valdiklis leidžia Windows klientams prisijungti prie Windows srities.</p> \n" +"<p>Srities valdiklis leidžia Windows klientams prisijungti prie Windows " +"srities.</p> \n" "<p>Nuo šio pasirinkimo priklauso kitos\n" "konfigūracijos langų parinktys.</p>" @@ -921,7 +957,8 @@ "<p>This is a list of already configured shares, whether they \n" "are enabled or disabled, and some basic information about them.<br></p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Tai jau sukonfigūruotų bendrųjų išteklių sąrašas, nesvarbu ar jie įgalinti ar uždrausti,\n" +"<p>Tai jau sukonfigūruotų bendrųjų išteklių sąrašas, nesvarbu ar jie įgalinti " +"ar uždrausti,\n" "bei tam tikra pagrindinė informacija apie juos.<br></p>" #. Share list dialog help 2/4 @@ -956,7 +993,8 @@ "already existing share, and <b>Delete</b> to \n" "remove the information about a share.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Pridėti</b> rinkitės norėdami pridėti naują bendrąjį išteklių, <b>Keisti</b> –\n" +"<p><b>Pridėti</b> rinkitės norėdami pridėti naują bendrąjį išteklių, <b>" +"Keisti</b> –\n" "jau sukurtų koregavimui, o <b>šalinti</b> – informacijos\n" "apie tą bendrąjį išteklių pašalinimui.</p>\n" @@ -975,14 +1013,18 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:115 msgid "" "<p>The base settings set up the domain and the\n" -"server role. <b>Backup Domain Controller</b> and <b>Primary Domain Controller</b> allow Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain. The backup controller \n" +"server role. <b>Backup Domain Controller</b> and <b>Primary Domain " +"Controller</b> allow Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain. The " +"backup controller \n" "uses another domain controller for validation. The primary controller\n" "uses its own information about users and their passwords.\n" "If the server should not participate as a domain controller, choose the\n" "<b>Not a DC</b> value.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Pagrindinės nuostatos nurodo sritį ir serverio vaidmenį.\n" -"<b>Atsarginis srities valdiklis</b> ir <b>pirminis srities valdiklis</b> leidžia Windows klientams prisijungti prie Windows srities. Atsarginis valdiklis\n" +"<b>Atsarginis srities valdiklis</b> ir <b>pirminis srities valdiklis</b> " +"leidžia Windows klientams prisijungti prie Windows srities. Atsarginis " +"valdiklis\n" "patikrindamas naudoja kitą srities valdiklį. Pirminis valdiklis\n" "naudoja savą informaciją apie naudotojus ir jų slaptažodžius.\n" "Jei serveris neturėtų veikti kaip srities valdiklis, rinkitės\n" @@ -1031,10 +1073,12 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:144 msgid "" "<p><b>Advanced Settings</b> provides access to \n" -"detailed configuration, user authentication sources, and expert global settings.</p>\n" +"detailed configuration, user authentication sources, and expert global " +"settings.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Sudėtingesnės nuostatos</b> leidžia prieiti prie \n" -"išsamesnės konfigūracijos, naudotojų tapatybės nustatymo šaltinių ir globalių nuostatų ekspertams.</p>\n" +"išsamesnės konfigūracijos, naudotojų tapatybės nustatymo šaltinių ir globalių " +"nuostatų ekspertams.</p>\n" #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:147 msgid "" @@ -1089,8 +1133,10 @@ "<p>Use <b>Add</b> to add a new configuration option, <b>Edit</b> to modify\n" "an existing option, and <b>Delete</b> to delete an option.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Norėdami pridėti naujų konfigūracijos nuostatų, spauskite <b>Pridėti</b>, norėdami\n" -"taisyti jau esamas parinktis – <b>Keisti</b>, o norėdami pašalinti – <b>Šalinti</b>.</p>\n" +"<p>Norėdami pridėti naujų konfigūracijos nuostatų, spauskite <b>Pridėti</b>, " +"norėdami\n" +"taisyti jau esamas parinktis – <b>Keisti</b>, o norėdami pašalinti – <b>" +"Šalinti</b>.</p>\n" #. Global settings editing dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:174 @@ -1107,8 +1153,10 @@ "<p>Use <b>Add</b> to add a new configuration option, <b>Edit</b> to modify\n" "already existing option, and <b>Delete</b> to delete an option.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Norėdami pridėti naujų konfigūracijos nuostatų, spauskite <b>Pridėti</b>, norėdami\n" -"taisyti esamas parinktis – <b>Keisti</b>, o norėdami pašalinti – <b>Šalinti</b>.</p>\n" +"<p>Norėdami pridėti naujų konfigūracijos nuostatų, spauskite <b>Pridėti</b>, " +"norėdami\n" +"taisyti esamas parinktis – <b>Keisti</b>, o norėdami pašalinti – <b>Šalinti<" +"/b>.</p>\n" #. Advanced SAMBA configuration dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:182 @@ -1124,21 +1172,27 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:188 msgid "" "<p><b>Search Base DN</b> (distinguished name) is\n" -"the base at which to start searching the information. <b>Administration DN</b> is used when\n" +"the base at which to start searching the information. <b>Administration DN</b>" +" is used when\n" "creating new users and groups. If the administration DN requires\n" "a password for write access, set the password using\n" "<b>Set LDAP Administration Password</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<b>Paieškos bazės DN</b> (unikalusis vardas) yra\n" -"bazė, nuo kurios pradedama informacijos paieška. <b>Administratoriaus DN</b> reikalingas\n" +"bazė, nuo kurios pradedama informacijos paieška. <b>Administratoriaus DN</b> " +"reikalingas\n" "kuriant naujus naudotojus ir grupes. Jei įrašymui administratoriaus DN\n" "reikalauja slaptažodžio, nurodykite jį naudodamiesi\n" "<b>Nustatyti LDAP administratoriaus slaptažodį</b>.</p>\n" #. Advanced SAMBA configuration dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:196 -msgid "<p><b>Note:</b> Settings are saved before the LDAP administration password is set.</p>\n" -msgstr "<p><b>Pastaba:</b>Pirma įrašomos nuostatos, o po to nustatomas LDAP administratoriaus slaptažodis.</p>\n" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Note:</b> Settings are saved before the LDAP administration password is " +"set.</p>\n" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Pastaba:</b>Pirma įrašomos nuostatos, o po to nustatomas LDAP " +"administratoriaus slaptažodis.</p>\n" #. passdb backend configuration dialog help 1 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:200 @@ -1148,7 +1202,8 @@ "information. Samba does not support multiple backends at once anymore,\n" "only one is allowed.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b><big>Naudotojų tapatybės nustatymo informacijos galinės sąsajos</big></b><br>\n" +"<p><b><big>Naudotojų tapatybės nustatymo informacijos galinės sąsajos</big><" +"/b><br>\n" "Čia pasirinkite, ar Samba serveris turėtų ieškoti tapatybės nustatymo\n" "informacijos. Samba nebegali naudoti kelių galinių sąsajų vienu metu,\n" "leidžiama naudoti tik kurią nors vieną.</p>\n" @@ -1156,11 +1211,14 @@ #. passdb backend configuration dialog help 2 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:207 msgid "" -"<p>If you want to change the user authentication source, remove the current one first\n" +"<p>If you want to change the user authentication source, remove the current " +"one first\n" "by pressing <b>Delete</b> and add a new one with <b>Add</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Norėdami pakeisti naudotojo tapatybės nustatymo šaltinį, pirma pašalinkite esamą\n" -"spausdami mygtuką <b>Šalinti</b> ir po to pridėdami naują su <b>Pridėti</b>.</p>\n" +"<p>Norėdami pakeisti naudotojo tapatybės nustatymo šaltinį, pirma pašalinkite " +"esamą\n" +"spausdami mygtuką <b>Šalinti</b> ir po to pridėdami naują su <b>Pridėti</b>.<" +"/p>\n" #. passdb backend configuration dialog help 3 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:211 @@ -1230,7 +1288,8 @@ "purpose of the share.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Bendrojo ištekliaus vardas</b> naudojamas prieigai\n" -"prie bendrojo ištekliaus iš klientų pusės. <b>Bendrojo ištekliaus aprašas</b> apibūdina\n" +"prie bendrojo ištekliaus iš klientų pusės. <b>Bendrojo ištekliaus aprašas</b> " +"apibūdina\n" "to bendrojo ištekliaus naudojimo paskirtį.</p>" #. add new share dialog help 3/3 @@ -1266,11 +1325,21 @@ #. add new share dialog help #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:276 -msgid "<p>With <b>Expose Snapshots</b> selected, Samba exposes snapshots created by Snapper for access and manipulation by CIFS/SMB clients. This option is only available if Samba offers Snapper support, and the Share Path corresponds to a Btrfs backed Snapper configuration subvolume.<br> Relevant permissions must also be granted, see Samba's <b>vfs_snapper(8)</b> man page for further details.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>With <b>Expose Snapshots</b> selected, Samba exposes snapshots created by " +"Snapper for access and manipulation by CIFS/SMB clients. This option is only " +"available if Samba offers Snapper support, and the Share Path corresponds to " +"a Btrfs backed Snapper configuration subvolume.<br> Relevant permissions must " +"also be granted, see Samba's <b>vfs_snapper(8)</b> man page for further " +"details.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:283 -msgid "<p><b>Utilize Btrfs Features</b> instructs Samba to take advantage of features specific to the Btrfs filesystem. This option is only available if Samba offers Btrfs support, and the Share Path is a Btrfs subvolume. See Samba's <b>vfs_btrfs(8)</b> man page for further details.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Utilize Btrfs Features</b> instructs Samba to take advantage of " +"features specific to the Btrfs filesystem. This option is only available if " +"Samba offers Btrfs support, and the Share Path is a Btrfs subvolume. See " +"Samba's <b>vfs_btrfs(8)</b> man page for further details.</p>" msgstr "" #. help for LDAP Settings dialog @@ -1280,37 +1349,53 @@ "Here, determine the LDAP server to use for authentication.\n" "</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"Setting <b>LDAP Password Back-End</b> allows storing user information in the LDAP tree specified by the URL. With <b>LDAP Idmap Back-End</b>, store SID/uid/gid mapping tables in LDAP.\n" +"Setting <b>LDAP Password Back-End</b> allows storing user information in the " +"LDAP tree specified by the URL. With <b>LDAP Idmap Back-End</b>, store " +"SID/uid/gid mapping tables in LDAP.\n" "</p><p>\n" -"In the Authentication section, set the credentials for the LDAP server, including full Administrator DN.\n" +"In the Authentication section, set the credentials for the LDAP server, " +"including full Administrator DN.\n" "</p>\n" -"<b>Search Base DN</b> is the LDAP suffix appended to Samba-specific LDAP objects.\n" +"<b>Search Base DN</b> is the LDAP suffix appended to Samba-specific LDAP " +"objects.\n" "</p><p>\n" -"To test the connection to your LDAP server, click <b>Test Connection</b>. To set expert LDAP settings or use default values, click <b>Advanced Settings</b>.<p>" +"To test the connection to your LDAP server, click <b>Test Connection</b>. To " +"set expert LDAP settings or use default values, click <b>Advanced Settings</b>" +".<p>" msgstr "" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsSuffixesWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:303 -msgid "<p><b>User Suffix</b> specifies where users are added to the LDAP tree. The value is pre-pended to the value of <b>Search Base DN</b>. Similarly, <b>Group Suffix</b> specifies the place for groups, <b>Machine Suffix</b> for machines and <b>Idmap Suffix</b> for idmap mappings.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>User Suffix</b> specifies where users are added to the LDAP tree. The " +"value is pre-pended to the value of <b>Search Base DN</b>. Similarly, <b>" +"Group Suffix</b> specifies the place for groups, <b>Machine Suffix</b> for " +"machines and <b>Idmap Suffix</b> for idmap mappings.</p>" msgstr "" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsTimeoutsWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:307 msgid "" -"<p><b>Replication Sleep</b> is the amount of milliseconds Samba will wait after writing to the LDAP server, so LDAP replicas can catch up.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Replication Sleep</b> is the amount of milliseconds Samba will wait " +"after writing to the LDAP server, so LDAP replicas can catch up.</p>\n" "<p><b>Time-Out</b> specifies the timeout for LDAP operations (in seconds).</p>" msgstr "" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsSecurityWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:311 -msgid "<p>Define whether to use SSL for LDAP connection with <b>Use SSL or TLS</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Define whether to use SSL for LDAP connection with <b>Use SSL or TLS</b>.<" +"/p>" msgstr "" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsMiscWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:315 msgid "" -"<p><b>Delete DN</b> specifies if the delete operation deletes the complete LDAP entry or only the Samba-specific attributes.</p>\n" -"<p>With <b>Synchronize Passwords</b>, define possible synchronization of the LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes. See the <tt>smb.conf</tt> manual page for details.</p>" +"<p><b>Delete DN</b> specifies if the delete operation deletes the complete " +"LDAP entry or only the Samba-specific attributes.</p>\n" +"<p>With <b>Synchronize Passwords</b>, define possible synchronization of the " +"LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes. See the <tt>smb.conf</tt> manual " +"page for details.</p>" msgstr "" #. translators: warning text @@ -1369,7 +1454,8 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:350 msgid "" "<p><b>Advanced Settings</b> provides access to \n" -"detailed configuration, such as LDAP settings, user authentication sources, and\n" +"detailed configuration, such as LDAP settings, user authentication sources, " +"and\n" "expert global settings.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Sudėtingesnės nuostatos</b> leidžia prieiti prie \n" Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/security.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/security.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/security.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -5,21 +5,22 @@ # Tomas $atkauskas , 2003. # Jonas Gocentas , 2003. # Andrius Štikonas , 2006, 2007. -# Mindaugas Baranauskas , 2009, 2010, 2011, 2013. +# Mindaugas Baranauskas , 2009, 2010, 2011, 2013, 2015. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: security.lt\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-02-05 09:15+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2015-10-28 09:25+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Mindaugas Baranauskas \n" -"Language-Team: Lithuanian \n" +"Language-Team: Lithuanian \n" "Language: lt\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. translators: command line help text for Security module #: src/clients/security.rb:59 @@ -242,7 +243,9 @@ #, fuzzy #| msgid "<P>These basic system services are not enabled in runlevel %1:<BR><B>%2</B></P>" msgid "<P>These basic system services are not enabled:<BR><B>%s</B></P>" -msgstr "<P>Paleisties lygmenyje %1 nėra įgalintos šios pagrindinės sistemos paslaugos:<BR><B>%2</B></P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>Paleisties lygmenyje %1 nėra įgalintos šios pagrindinės sistemos " +"paslaugos:<BR><B>%2</B></P>" #: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:370 msgid "<P>All basic services are enabled.</P>" @@ -252,11 +255,14 @@ #, fuzzy #| msgid "<P>These extra services are enabled in runlevel %1:<BR><B>%2</B></P>" msgid "<P>These extra services are enabled:<BR><B>%s</B></P>" -msgstr "<P>Paleisties lygmenyje %1 įgalintos šios papildomos paslaugos:<BR><B>%2</B></P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>Paleisties lygmenyje %1 įgalintos šios papildomos paslaugos:<BR><B>%2</B><" +"/P>" #: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:379 msgid "<P>Check the list of services and disable all unused services.</P>" -msgstr "<P>Peržiūrėkite paslaugų sąrašą ir uždrauskite nenaudojamas paslaugas.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>Peržiūrėkite paslaugų sąrašą ir uždrauskite nenaudojamas paslaugas.</P>" #: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:381 msgid "<P>Only basic system services are enabled.</P>" @@ -390,7 +396,8 @@ "<p>In this dialog, change various boot settings related to security.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Įkrovos saugumas</big></b></p>\n" -"<p>Šiame dialoge keiskite įvairius įkrovos nustatymus susijusius su saugumu.</p>" +"<p>Šiame dialoge keiskite įvairius įkrovos nustatymus susijusius su saugumu.<" +"/p>" #. Boot dialog help 2/4 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:59 @@ -421,16 +428,20 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:72 msgid "" "<p><b>Hibernate System</b>:\n" -"Set the conditions for allowing users to hibernate the system. By default, user on active console has such right.\n" -"Other options are allowing the action to any user or requiring authentication in all cases.</p>\n" +"Set the conditions for allowing users to hibernate the system. By default, " +"user on active console has such right.\n" +"Other options are allowing the action to any user or requiring authentication " +"in all cases.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Main dialog help 1/8 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:78 msgid "" "<P><BIG><B>Configuring Local Security</B></BIG></P>\n" -"<p>Using predefined defaults, change the local security settings, which include\n" -" booting, login, password, user creation, and file permissions. The default\n" +"<p>Using predefined defaults, change the local security settings, which " +"include\n" +" booting, login, password, user creation, and file permissions. The " +"default\n" " settings can be modified as needed.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -467,7 +478,8 @@ #. Main dialog help 8/8 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:98 msgid "<p><b>Custom Settings</b>: Create your own configuration.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Savitas nuostatas</b> naudokite savos konfigūracijos kūrimui.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Savitas nuostatas</b> naudokite savos konfigūracijos kūrimui.</p>" #. Login dialog help 1/4 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:100 @@ -484,12 +496,16 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:106 msgid "" "<p><b>Delay after Incorrect Login Attempt:</b>\n" -"It is advisable to wait some time after an incorrect login attempt to prevent\n" -"password guessing. Make the time small enough that users do not need to wait to\n" -"retry if a password is mistyped. A sensible value is three seconds (<tt>3</tt>).</p>" +"It is advisable to wait some time after an incorrect login attempt to " +"prevent\n" +"password guessing. Make the time small enough that users do not need to wait " +"to\n" +"retry if a password is mistyped. A sensible value is three seconds (<tt>3</tt>" +").</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Uždelsimas po nepavykusio bandymo prisiregistruoti</b><br>\n" -"Po nepavykusio bandymo prisiregistruoti patartina kurį laiką palaukti, norint apsisaugoti nuo slaptažodžio spėliojimų. Pasirinkite nedidelį laiko tarpą,\n" +"Po nepavykusio bandymo prisiregistruoti patartina kurį laiką palaukti, norint " +"apsisaugoti nuo slaptažodžio spėliojimų. Pasirinkite nedidelį laiko tarpą,\n" "kad neteisingai įvedus slaptažodį, naudotojams nereikėtų ilgai\n" "laukti pakartojimo. Pakankamai gera reikšmė yra <tt>3</tt> sekundės.</p>" @@ -498,10 +514,12 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Record Successful Login Attempts:</b> Logging successful login\n" "attempts is useful. It can warn you of unauthorized access to the\n" -"system (for example, a user logging in from a different location than usual).\n" +"system (for example, a user logging in from a different location than " +"usual).\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Įrašyti sėkmingą registraciją</b> Naudinga registruoti sėkmingas registracijas. Tai gali padėti įspėti jus\n" +"<p><b>Įrašyti sėkmingą registraciją</b> Naudinga registruoti sėkmingas " +"registracijas. Tai gali padėti įspėti jus\n" "apie pašalinių priėjimą prie jūsų sistemos (pavyzdžiui,\n" "naudotojas jungiasi iš kitos vietos, nei įprastai).\n" "</p>\n" @@ -515,7 +533,7 @@ msgstr "" "<p><b>Leisti nuotolinę grafinę registraciją</b> Tai leidžia prieigą prie šio\n" "kompiuterio grafinio registracijos ekrano per tinklą. Nuotolinė prieiga prie\n" -"kompiuterio per darbalaukio tvarkytuvę gali nebūti labai saugi.</p>" +"kompiuterio per prisijungimų tvarkyklę gali nebūti labai saugi.</p>" #. Password dialog help 1/8 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:126 @@ -530,11 +548,14 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:130 msgid "" "<p><b>Check New Passwords</b>: It is wise to choose a password that\n" -"cannot be found in a dictionary and is not a name or other simple, common word.\n" +"cannot be found in a dictionary and is not a name or other simple, common " +"word.\n" "By checking the box, enforce password checking in regard to these rules.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Naujų slaptažodžių tikrinimas</b>: Yra protinga pasirinkti slaptažodį, kurio nėra žodyne, kuris nėra vardas\n" -"ar kitas paprastas, bendrinis žodis. Pažymėję langelį, jūs priverčiate tikrinti slaptažodžius\n" +"<p><b>Naujų slaptažodžių tikrinimas</b>: Yra protinga pasirinkti slaptažodį, " +"kurio nėra žodyne, kuris nėra vardas\n" +"ar kitas paprastas, bendrinis žodis. Pažymėję langelį, jūs priverčiate " +"tikrinti slaptažodžius\n" "atsižvelgiant į aukščiau paminėtas taisykles.</p>" #. Password dialog help @@ -543,7 +564,8 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Minimum Acceptable Password Length:</b>\n" "The minimum acceptable size for the new password reduced by the number\n" -"of different character classes (other, upper, lower and digit) used in the new\n" +"of different character classes (other, upper, lower and digit) used in the " +"new\n" "password. See man pam_cracklib for a more detailed explanation.\n" "This option can only be modified when <b>Check New Passwords</b> is set.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -556,7 +578,8 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:144 msgid "" "<p><b>Passwords to Remember</b>:\n" -"Enter the number of user passwords to store and prevent the user from reusing.\n" +"Enter the number of user passwords to store and prevent the user from " +"reusing.\n" "Enter 0 if passwords should not be stored.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -569,7 +592,8 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:152 msgid "" "<p><b>DES</b>, the Linux default method, works in all network environments,\n" -"but it restricts you to passwords no longer than eight characters. If you need\n" +"but it restricts you to passwords no longer than eight characters. If you " +"need\n" "compatibility with other systems, use this method.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>DES</b>, standartinis Linux metodas, veikia visuose tinkluose,\n" @@ -582,12 +606,15 @@ "<p><b>MD5</b> allows longer passwords and is supported by all current Linux \n" "distributions, but not by other systems or old software.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>MD5</b> leidžia ilgesnius slaptažodžius ir jį supranta visi dabartiniai Linux \n" +"<p><b>MD5</b> leidžia ilgesnius slaptažodžius ir jį supranta visi dabartiniai " +"Linux \n" "platinamieji paketai, bet ne kitos sistemos ar sena programinė įranga.</p>" #. Password dialog help 5d/8 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:162 -msgid "<p><b>SHA-512</b> is the current standard hash method, using other algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purpose.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>SHA-512</b> is the current standard hash method, using other algorithms " +"is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purpose.</p>" msgstr "" #. Password dialog help 7/8 @@ -604,12 +631,16 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:170 msgid "" "<p><b>Days before Password Expires Warning</b>: This entry sets the\n" -"number of days users are warned before their passwords expire. The longer the\n" +"number of days users are warned before their passwords expire. The longer " +"the\n" "time, the less likely it is that someone can guess passwords.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Dienos iki įspėjimo apie slaptažodžio galiojimo pabaigą</b>: Šis įrašas nustato\n" -"dienų skaičių iki slaptažodžio galiojimo pabaigos, kuomet naudotojas yra įspėjamas.\n" -"Kuo ilgesnis laikas, tuo mažesnė tikimybė, kad kas nors galės spėlioti slaptažodžius.</p>" +"<p><b>Dienos iki įspėjimo apie slaptažodžio galiojimo pabaigą</b>: Šis įrašas " +"nustato\n" +"dienų skaičių iki slaptažodžio galiojimo pabaigos, kuomet naudotojas yra " +"įspėjamas.\n" +"Kuo ilgesnis laikas, tuo mažesnė tikimybė, kad kas nors galės spėlioti " +"slaptažodžius.</p>" #. Adduser dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:176 @@ -618,7 +649,8 @@ "<p>In this dialog, change various settings used to create users.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>Naudotojų saugumas</b></big></P>\n" -"<p>Šiame dialoge keiskite įvairius nustatymus, naudojamus kuriant naudotojus.</p>" +"<p>Šiame dialoge keiskite įvairius nustatymus, naudojamus kuriant " +"naudotojus.</p>" #. Adduser dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:180 @@ -642,7 +674,8 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:188 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Other Security Settings</b></big></P>\n" -"<p>In this dialog, change miscellaneous settings related to local security.</p>" +"<p>In this dialog, change miscellaneous settings related to local security.<" +"/p>" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>Kitos saugumo nuostatos</b></big></P>\n" "<p>Šiame lange keiskite kitas su vietiniu saugumu susijusias nuostatas.</p>" @@ -652,21 +685,25 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>File Permissions</b>: Settings for the permissions\n" -"of certain system files are set according to the data in /etc/permissions.secure\n" +"of certain system files are set according to the data in " +"/etc/permissions.secure\n" "or /etc/permissions.easy. Which file is used depends on this selection.\n" "Launching SuSEconfig sets these permissions according to /etc/permissions.*.\n" -"This fixes files with incorrect permissions, whether this occurred accidentally\n" +"This fixes files with incorrect permissions, whether this occurred " +"accidentally\n" "or by intruders.</p><p>\n" "With <b>Easy</b>, most of the system files that are only readable by root\n" "in Secure are modified so other users can also read these files.\n" -"Using <b>Secure</b>, certain system files, such as /var/log/messages, can only\n" +"Using <b>Secure</b>, certain system files, such as /var/log/messages, can " +"only\n" "be viewed by the user root. Some programs can only be launched by root or by\n" "daemons, not by ordinary users.\n" "The most secure setting is <b>Paranoid</B>. With it, you must\n" "decide which users are able to run X applications and setuid programs.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Rinkmenų teisių nuostatos</b><br> Pagrindinių sistemos rinkmenų teisių\n" -"nuostatos yra nustatytos pagal duomenis rinkmenose /etc/permissions.secure arba\n" +"nuostatos yra nustatytos pagal duomenis rinkmenose /etc/permissions.secure " +"arba\n" "/etc/permissions.easy. Nuo šio pasirinkimo priklauso, kuri rinkmena\n" "bus naudojama. Paleidus SuSEconfig, šios teisės nustatomos\n" "atitinkamai /etc/permissions.*. Tai sutvarko rinkmenas su neteisingomis\n" @@ -676,13 +713,16 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:208 msgid "" "<p><b>User Launching updatedb</b>: The program updatedb runs \n" -"once a day. It scans your entire file system and creates a database (locatedb)\n" +"once a day. It scans your entire file system and creates a database " +"(locatedb)\n" "that stores the location of every file. The database can be searched by the\n" -"program \"locate\". Here, set the user that runs this command: <b>nobody</b>\n" +"program \"locate\". Here, set the user that runs this command: <b>nobody</b>" +"\n" " (few files) or <b>root</b> (all files).</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Naudotojas, paleidžiantis updatedb</b>: Programa updatedb\n" -" pasileidžia reguliariai kartą į dieną. Ji skenuoja visą jūsų rinkmenų sistemą ir sukuria\n" +" pasileidžia reguliariai kartą į dieną. Ji skenuoja visą jūsų rinkmenų " +"sistemą ir sukuria\n" "duomenų bazę (locatedb), kur saugoma kiekvienos rinkmenos buvimo vieta.\n" "Duomenų bazėje galima ieškoti su programa „locate“. Čia nustatomas\n" "naudotojas, paleidžiantis šią komandą:<b>niekas</b>\n" @@ -707,7 +747,8 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Current Directory in the Path of Regular Users</b><br> A DOS\n" -"system first searches for executable files (programs) in the current directory\n" +"system first searches for executable files (programs) in the current " +"directory\n" "then in the current path variable. In contrast, a UNIX-like system searches\n" "for them exclusively via the search path (variable PATH).</p>" msgstr "" @@ -723,9 +764,11 @@ msgid "" "<p>Some systems set up a work-around by adding the dot (\".\") to the\n" "search path, enabling files in the current path to be found and executed.\n" -"This is highly dangerous because you may accidentally launch unknown programs in\n" +"This is highly dangerous because you may accidentally launch unknown programs " +"in\n" "the current directory instead of the usual systemwide files. As a result,\n" -"executing <i>Trojan Horses</i>, which exploit this weakness and invade your system,\n" +"executing <i>Trojan Horses</i>, which exploit this weakness and invade your " +"system,\n" "is rather easy if you set this option.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>Kai kurios sistemos 'darbą netoliese' nustato pridedant tašką („ .“)\n" @@ -759,35 +802,48 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "<p><b>Enable Magic SysRq Keys</b><br> If you check this option, you\n" -"will have some control over the system even if it crashes (for example, during kernel\n" +"will have some control over the system even if it crashes (for example, " +"during kernel\n" "debugging). For details, see /usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Leisti Magic SysRq klavišus</b><br>. Jei tai pasirinksite,\n" -"sistemos pakibimo atveju galėsite kažkiek valdyti programas (pvz., branduolio\n" +"sistemos pakibimo atveju galėsite kažkiek valdyti programas (pvz., " +"branduolio\n" "debug'inimui). Smulkiau žr. <i>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</i></p>" #. help text: security overview dialog 1/ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:253 #, fuzzy #| msgid "<P><B>Security Overview</B><BR>This is overview of the most important security settings.</P>" -msgid "<P><B>Security Overview</B><BR>This overview shows the most important security settings.</P>" -msgstr "<P><B>Saugumo apžvalga</B><BR>Pateikiama svarbiausių saugumo nuostatų apžvalga.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P><B>Security Overview</B><BR>This overview shows the most important " +"security settings.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P><B>Saugumo apžvalga</B><BR>Pateikiama svarbiausių saugumo nuostatų " +"apžvalga.</P>" #. help text: security overview dialog 1/ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:257 #, fuzzy #| msgid "<P>To change the current value click the link associated to the option.</P>" -msgid "<P>To change the current value, click the link associated to the option.</P>" -msgstr "<P>Norėdami pakeisti esamą reikšmę, spragtelėkite su parinktimi susijusią nuorodą.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>To change the current value, click the link associated to the option.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>Norėdami pakeisti esamą reikšmę, spragtelėkite su parinktimi susijusią " +"nuorodą.</P>" #. help text: security overview dialog 1/ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:261 -msgid "<P> A check mark in the <B>Security Status</B> column means that the current value of the option is secure.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P> A check mark in the <B>Security Status</B> column means that the current " +"value of the option is secure.</P>" msgstr "" #. an error message (rich text) #: src/include/security/helps.rb:265 -msgid "<P><B>The current value could not be read. The service is probably not installed or the option is missing on the system.</B></P>" +msgid "" +"<P><B>The current value could not be read. The service is probably not " +"installed or the option is missing on the system.</B></P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:271 @@ -795,9 +851,12 @@ "<P>A display manager provides a graphical login screen and can be accessed\n" "across the network by an X server running on another system if so\n" "configured.</P><P>The windows that are being displayed would then transmit\n" -"their data across the network. If that network is not fully trusted, then the\n" -"network traffic can be eavesdropped by an attacker, gaining access not only to\n" -"the graphical content of the display, but also to usernames and passwords that\n" +"their data across the network. If that network is not fully trusted, then " +"the\n" +"network traffic can be eavesdropped by an attacker, gaining access not only " +"to\n" +"the graphical content of the display, but also to usernames and passwords " +"that\n" "are being used.</P><P>If you do not need <EM>XDMCP</EM> for remote graphical\n" "logins, then disable this option.</P>" msgstr "" @@ -805,43 +864,73 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:281 msgid "" "<P>Upon startup, the system time is being set from the hardware clock of the\n" -"computer. As a consequence, setting the hardware clock before shutting down is\n" -"necessary.</P><P>Consistent system time is essential for the system to create\n" +"computer. As a consequence, setting the hardware clock before shutting down " +"is\n" +"necessary.</P><P>Consistent system time is essential for the system to " +"create\n" "correct log messages.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:287 -msgid "<P>Malfunctions in a system are usually detected by anomalies in its behaviour. Syslog messages about events that reoccur on a regular basis are important to find causes of problems. And the absence of a single record can tell more than the absence of all log records.</P><P>Therefore, syslog messages of system events are only useful if they are present.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>Malfunctions in a system are usually detected by anomalies in its " +"behaviour. Syslog messages about events that reoccur on a regular basis are " +"important to find causes of problems. And the absence of a single record can " +"tell more than the absence of all log records.</P><P>Therefore, syslog " +"messages of system events are only useful if they are present.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:290 -msgid "<P>Chroot execution environments restrict a process to only access files that it needs by placing them in a separate subdirectory and running the process with a changed root (chroot) set to that directory.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>Chroot execution environments restrict a process to only access files that " +"it needs by placing them in a separate subdirectory and running the process " +"with a changed root (chroot) set to that directory.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:293 -msgid "<P>The DHCP client daemon should run as the user <EM>dhcpd</EM> to minimize a possible threat if the service is found vulnerable to a weakness in its program code.</P><P>Note that dhcpd must never run as <EM>root</EM> or with the <EM>CAP_SYS_CHROOT</EM> capability for the chroot execution confinement to be effective.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>The DHCP client daemon should run as the user <EM>dhcpd</EM> to minimize a " +"possible threat if the service is found vulnerable to a weakness in its " +"program code.</P><P>Note that dhcpd must never run as <EM>root</EM> or with " +"the <EM>CAP_SYS_CHROOT</EM> capability for the chroot execution confinement " +"to be effective.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:296 -msgid "<P>Administrators should never log on as <EM>root</EM> into an X Window session to minimize the usage of the root privileges.</P><P>This option does not help against careless administrators, but shall prevent attackers to be able to log on as <EM>root</EM> via the display manager if they guess or otherwise acquire the password.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>Administrators should never log on as <EM>root</EM> into an X Window " +"session to minimize the usage of the root privileges.</P><P>This option does " +"not help against careless administrators, but shall prevent attackers to be " +"able to log on as <EM>root</EM> via the display manager if they guess or " +"otherwise acquire the password.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:299 msgid "" -"<P>X Window clients, e.g. programs that open a window on your display, connect\n" -"to the X server that runs on the physical machine. Programs can also run on a\n" +"<P>X Window clients, e.g. programs that open a window on your display, " +"connect\n" +"to the X server that runs on the physical machine. Programs can also run on " +"a\n" "different system and display their content on the X server through network\n" -"connections.</P><P>When enabled, the X server listens on a port 6000 plus the\n" -"display number. Since network traffic is transferred unencrypted and therefore\n" +"connections.</P><P>When enabled, the X server listens on a port 6000 plus " +"the\n" +"display number. Since network traffic is transferred unencrypted and " +"therefore\n" "subject to network sniffing, and since the port held open by the X server\n" -"offers attack options, the secure setting is to disable it.</P><P>To display X\n" -"Window clients across a network, we recommend the use of secure shell (<EM>ssh</EM>), which allows the X Window clients to connect to the X server through the encrypted ssh connection.</P>" +"offers attack options, the secure setting is to disable it.</P><P>To display " +"X\n" +"Window clients across a network, we recommend the use of secure shell (<EM>" +"ssh</EM>), which allows the X Window clients to connect to the X server " +"through the encrypted ssh connection.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:309 msgid "" -"<P>The email delivery subsystem is always started. However, it does not expose\n" -"itself outside the system by default, since it does not listen on the SMTP network port 25.</P><P>If you do not deliver emails to your system through the SMTP protocol, then disable this option.</P>" +"<P>The email delivery subsystem is always started. However, it does not " +"expose\n" +"itself outside the system by default, since it does not listen on the SMTP " +"network port 25.</P><P>If you do not deliver emails to your system through " +"the SMTP protocol, then disable this option.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:312 @@ -869,11 +958,24 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:332 -msgid "<P>A system can be overwhelmed with numerous connection attempts so that the system runs out of memory, leading to a Denial of Service (DoS) vulnerability.</P><P>The use of syncookies is a method that can help in such situations. But in configurations with a very large number of legitimate connection attempts from one source, the <EM>Enabled</EM> setting can cause problems with denied TCP connections under high load.</P><P>Still, for most environments, syncookies are the first line of defense against SYN flood DoS attacks, so the secure setting is <EM>Enabled</EM>.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>A system can be overwhelmed with numerous connection attempts so that the " +"system runs out of memory, leading to a Denial of Service (DoS) " +"vulnerability.</P><P>The use of syncookies is a method that can help in such " +"situations. But in configurations with a very large number of legitimate " +"connection attempts from one source, the <EM>Enabled</EM> setting can cause " +"problems with denied TCP connections under high load.</P><P>Still, for most " +"environments, syncookies are the first line of defense against SYN flood DoS " +"attacks, so the secure setting is <EM>Enabled</EM>.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:335 src/include/security/helps.rb:339 -msgid "<P>IP forwarding means to pass on network packets that have been received, but that are not destined for one of the system's configured network interfaces, e.g. network interface addresses.</P><P>If a system forwards network traffic on ISO/OSI layer 3, it is called a router. If you do not need that routing functionality, then disable this option.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>IP forwarding means to pass on network packets that have been received, " +"but that are not destined for one of the system's configured network " +"interfaces, e.g. network interface addresses.</P><P>If a system forwards " +"network traffic on ISO/OSI layer 3, it is called a router. If you do not need " +"that routing functionality, then disable this option.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:338 @@ -886,25 +988,40 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:343 #, fuzzy -msgid "<P>Magic SysRq Keys enable some control over the system even if it crashes (e.g. during kernel debugging) or if the system does not respond.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>Magic SysRq Keys enable some control over the system even if it crashes " +"(e.g. during kernel debugging) or if the system does not respond.</P>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Leisti „Magic SysRq“ klavišus</b><br>. Jei tai pasirinksite,\n" -"sistemos pakibimo atveju galėsite kažkiek valdyti programas (pvz., branduolio\n" +"sistemos pakibimo atveju galėsite kažkiek valdyti programas (pvz., " +"branduolio\n" "debug'inimui). Smulkiau žr. <i>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</i></p>" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:346 -msgid "<P>There are predefined file permissions in /etc/permissions.* files. The most restrictive file permissions are defined 'secure' or 'paranoid' file.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>There are predefined file permissions in /etc/permissions.* files. The " +"most restrictive file permissions are defined 'secure' or 'paranoid' file.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:349 #, fuzzy #| msgid "<P>Basic system services must be enabled to provide system consistency and to run the security related services.</P>" -msgid "<P>Basic system services must be enabled to provide system consistency and to run the security-related services.</P>" -msgstr "<P>Tam, kad sistema būtų darni ir veiktų su saugumu susijusios paslaugos, turi būti įgalintos pagrindinės sistemos paslaugos.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>Basic system services must be enabled to provide system consistency and to " +"run the security-related services.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>Tam, kad sistema būtų darni ir veiktų su saugumu susijusios paslaugos, " +"turi būti įgalintos pagrindinės sistemos paslaugos.</P>" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:352 -msgid "<P>Every running service is a potential target of a security attack. Therefore it is recommended to turn off all services which are not used by the system.</P>" -msgstr "<P>Kiekviena veikianti paslauga yra potencialus saugumo atakos taikinys. Todėl patariama išjungti visas paslaugas, kurios sistemoje nėra naudojamos.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>Every running service is a potential target of a security attack. " +"Therefore it is recommended to turn off all services which are not used by " +"the system.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>Kiekviena veikianti paslauga yra potencialus saugumo atakos taikinys. " +"Todėl patariama išjungti visas paslaugas, kurios sistemoje nėra naudojamos.<" +"/P>" #. level name #: src/include/security/levels.rb:54 Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/services-manager.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/services-manager.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/services-manager.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -16,10 +16,12 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && (n%" +"100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #: src/clients/default_target_finish.rb:30 +#| msgid "Reading the default system settings..." msgid "Saving default systemd target..." msgstr "Įrašomas numatytasis systemd tikslas..." @@ -29,43 +31,65 @@ #. TODO implement behaviour if force_reset parameter provided #: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:51 +#| msgid "Default system settings" msgid "&Default systemd target" msgstr "&Numatytasis systemd tikslas" #: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:52 +#| msgid "Default system settings" msgid "Default systemd target" msgstr "Numatytasis systemd tikslas" #. create the proposal dialog and get the sequence symbol from block #: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:116 +#| msgid "Default system settings" msgid "Set Default Systemd Target" msgstr "Priskirti numatytąjį systemd tikslą" #: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:134 +#| msgid "Reading the default system settings..." msgid "Selecting the Default Systemd Target" msgstr "Parenkamas numatytasis systemd tikslas" #: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:136 -msgid "Systemd is a system and service manager for Linux. It consists of units whose job is to activate services and other units." -msgstr "Systemd yrai Linux sistemų ir paslaugų tvarkytuvė. Ją sudaro vienetai, kurie aktyvuoja paslaugas ir kitus vienetus." +msgid "" +"Systemd is a system and service manager for Linux. It consists of units whose " +"job is to activate services and other units." +msgstr "" +"Systemd yrai Linux sistemų ir paslaugų tvarkytuvė. Ją sudaro vienetai, kurie " +"aktyvuoja paslaugas ir kitus vienetus." #: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:139 -msgid "Default target unit is activated on boot by default. Usually it is a symlink located in path/etc/systemd/system/default.target . See more on systemd man page." -msgstr "Numatytojo tikslo vienetas aktyvuojamas paleidžiant operacinę sistemą. Paprastai tikslas keičiamas sukuriant simbolinę nuoroda į /etc/systemd/system/default.target. Daugiau informacijos įvykdžius „man systemd“." +msgid "" +"Default target unit is activated on boot by default. Usually it is a symlink " +"located in path/etc/systemd/system/default.target . See more on systemd man " +"page." +msgstr "" +"Numatytojo tikslo vienetas aktyvuojamas paleidžiant operacinę sistemą. " +"Paprastai tikslas keičiamas sukuriant simbolinę nuoroda į " +"/etc/systemd/system/default.target. Daugiau informacijos įvykdžius „man " +"systemd“." #: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:143 -msgid "Multi-User target is for setting up a non-graphical multi-user system with network suitable for server (similar to runlevel 3)." +msgid "" +"Multi-User target is for setting up a non-graphical multi-user system with " +"network suitable for server (similar to runlevel 3)." msgstr "" #: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:146 -msgid "Graphical target for setting up a graphical login screen with network which is typical for workstations (similar to runlevel 5)." +msgid "" +"Graphical target for setting up a graphical login screen with network which " +"is typical for workstations (similar to runlevel 5)." msgstr "" #: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:149 -msgid "When you are not sure what would be the best option for you then go with graphical target." +msgid "" +"When you are not sure what would be the best option for you then go with " +"graphical target." msgstr "" #: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:160 +#| msgid "Available Shares" msgid "Available Targets" msgstr "Galimi tikslai" @@ -73,10 +97,12 @@ #. autodetection recommends a different one now, warn the user about this #. and keep the default target unchanged. #: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:220 +#| msgid "The software proposal is reset to the default values." msgid "The installer is recommending you the default target '%s' " msgstr "Diegimo programa pataria rinktis tikslą „%s“ " #: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:232 +#| msgid "No package has been selected for installation." msgid "X11 packages have been selected for installation" msgstr "Pasirinkote įdiegti X11 paketus" @@ -102,11 +128,13 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:255 +#| msgid "No package has been selected for installation." msgid "X11 packages have not been selected for installation" msgstr "Nepasirinkote įdiegti X11 paketų" #: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:258 -msgid "This recommendation is based on the analysis of other installation settings" +msgid "" +"This recommendation is based on the analysis of other installation settings" msgstr "" #. translators: command line help text for services-manager module @@ -124,12 +152,14 @@ msgstr "Įrašoma konfigūracija..." #: src/clients/services-manager.rb:94 src/clients/services.rb:94 +#| msgid "Writing the system configuration" msgid "Writing the configuration failed:\n" msgstr "Nepavyko įrašyti konfigūracijos:\n" #. Additional space for UI features #. Additional space for UI features #: src/clients/services-manager.rb:131 src/clients/services.rb:131 +#| msgid "Default system settings" msgid "Default System &Target" msgstr "Numatytasis sistemos &tikslas" @@ -157,10 +187,12 @@ msgstr "Aprašas" #: src/clients/services-manager.rb:150 src/clients/services.rb:150 +#| msgid "&Start" msgid "&Start/Stop" msgstr "Palei&sti/stabdyti" #: src/clients/services-manager.rb:152 src/clients/services.rb:152 +#| msgid "Enab&le or Disable" msgid "&Enable/Disable" msgstr "Į&galinti arba uždrausti" @@ -176,6 +208,7 @@ #. Redraws the services dialog #. Redraws the services dialog #: src/clients/services-manager.rb:168 src/clients/services.rb:168 +#| msgid "Reading the service status..." msgid "Reading services status..." msgstr "Skaitoma paslaugų būsena..." @@ -187,6 +220,7 @@ #: src/clients/services-manager.rb:173 src/clients/services-manager.rb:198 #: src/clients/services.rb:173 src/clients/services.rb:198 +#| msgid "Active" msgid "Inactive" msgstr "Neaktyvi" @@ -203,6 +237,7 @@ #. Opens up a popup with details about the currently selected service #. Opens up a popup with details about the currently selected service #: src/clients/services-manager.rb:226 src/clients/services.rb:226 +#| msgid "Service %service will be %toggled %link" msgid "Service %{service} Full Info" msgstr "Informacija apie „%service“ paslaugą" @@ -227,15 +262,19 @@ #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:121 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Services</b></big><br>\n" -"This installation proposal allows you to start and enable a service from the \n" +"This installation proposal allows you to start and enable a service from the " +"\n" " list of services.</p>\n" -"<p>It may also open ports in the firewall for a service if firewall is enabled\n" +"<p>It may also open ports in the firewall for a service if firewall is " +"enabled\n" "and a particular service requires opening them.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:145 -msgid "Service %service will be %toggled and port in firewall will be %switched %link" -msgstr "%service paslauga bus %toggled, o užkardos prievadas bus %switched %link" +msgid "" +"Service %service will be %toggled and port in firewall will be %switched %link" +msgstr "" +"%service paslauga bus %toggled, o užkardos prievadas bus %switched %link" #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:160 msgid "Service %service will be %toggled %link" @@ -275,44 +314,55 @@ #. Do not start or stop services that are already in the desired state. #. They might be coming from AutoYast import and thus marked as :modified. #: src/modules/services_manager_service.rb:407 +#| msgid "%1: Could not change state of the device" msgid "Could not %{change} %{service} which is currently %{status}. " msgstr "Nepavyko %{change}: %{service}. Būsena dabar: %{status}. " #: src/modules/services_manager_service.rb:426 +#| msgid "%1: Could not change state of the device" msgid "Could not %{change} %{service}. " msgstr "Nepavyko %{change}: %{service}. " #. Default systemd target (previously: runlevel 5) option #1 #: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:20 +#| msgid "Graphical &Menu File" msgid "Graphical mode" msgstr "Grafinė veiksena" #. Default systemd target (previously: runlevel 3) option #2 #: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:22 +#| msgid "Text Mode" msgid "Text mode" msgstr "Tekstinė veiksena" #. Systemd targets, bnc#892366 #: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:25 +#| msgid "Select Mode" msgid "Emergency Mode" msgstr "Minimaliausia veiksena" #: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:26 +#| msgid "Available Interfaces" msgid "Graphical Interface" msgstr "Grafinė sąsaja" #: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:27 +#| msgid "Edit Default Settings" msgid "Initrd Default Target" msgstr "Numatytasis Initrd tikslas" #: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:28 +#| msgid "&Switch Mode" msgid "Switch Root" msgstr "Keisti šakninį katalogą" #: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:29 +#| msgid "&Other System" msgid "Multi-User System" msgstr "Daugelio naudotojų sistema" #: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:30 +#| msgid "Required DMA Mode" msgid "Rescue Mode" msgstr "Avarinė veiksena" + Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/snapper.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/snapper.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/snapper.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -11,15 +11,16 @@ "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2015-10-20 14:39+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2015-10-30 17:22+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Mindaugas Baranauskas \n" -"Language-Team: Lithuanian \n" +"Language-Team: Lithuanian \n" "Language: lt\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" -"X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" #. encoding: utf-8 #. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ @@ -60,22 +61,26 @@ #. text entry label #. text entry label #: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:130 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:290 +#| msgid "User name" msgid "User data" msgstr "Naudotojo duomenys" #. combo box label #. text entry label #: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:138 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:295 +#| msgid "C&leanup Script" msgid "Cleanup algorithm" msgstr "Išvalymo algoritmas" #. popup label, %{num} is number #: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:153 +#| msgid "Modify %1" msgid "Modify Snapshot %{num}" msgstr "Keisti momentinę kopiją %{num}" #. popup label, %{pre} and %{post} are numbers #: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:159 +#| msgid "Modify %1" msgid "Modify Snapshot %{pre} and %{post}" msgstr "Keisti momentines kopijas %{pre} ir %{post}" @@ -86,16 +91,19 @@ #. label #: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:165 +#| msgid "Host %1" msgid "Post (%{post})" msgstr "po (%{post})" #. popup label #: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:242 +#| msgid "Create New " msgid "Create New Snapshot" msgstr "Sukurti naują momentinę kopiją" #. radio button label #: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:255 +#| msgid "Snapshots" msgid "Single snapshot" msgstr "Paskira momentinė kopija" @@ -112,11 +120,13 @@ #. yes/no popup question #: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:350 +#| msgid "Really delete '%1'?" msgid "Really delete snapshot %{num}?" msgstr "Tikrai pašalinti momentinę kopiją %{num}?" #. yes/no popup question #: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:357 +#| msgid "Really delete '%1'?" msgid "Really delete snapshots %{pre} and %{post}?" msgstr "Tikrai pašalinti momentines kopijas %{pre} ir %{post}?" @@ -163,6 +173,7 @@ msgstr "Pabaigos data" #: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:497 +#| msgid "Us&er Data" msgid "User Data" msgstr "Naudotojo duomenys" @@ -173,6 +184,7 @@ #. button label #: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:506 +#| msgid "modify" msgid "Modify" msgstr "Keisti" @@ -222,11 +234,13 @@ #. label #: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:718 +#| msgid "%1 does not exist in snapshot %2\n" msgid "File does not exist in either snapshot." msgstr "Rinkmenos nėra nė vienoje momentinėje kopijoje." #. label #: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:724 +#| msgid "File Contents: %1" msgid "File content was modified." msgstr "Pakeistas rinkmenos turinys." @@ -342,6 +356,7 @@ #. popup message #: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1187 +#| msgid "No file was selected for restoring" msgid "No file was selected for restoring." msgstr "Atstatymui nebuvo pasirinkta nei viena rinkmena" @@ -364,11 +379,15 @@ "<p>\n" "%2\n" "</p>\n" -"<p>Rinkmenos iš pradinės momentinės kopijos nukopijuosimos į dabartinę sistemą.</p>\n" +"<p>Rinkmenos iš pradinės momentinės kopijos nukopijuosimos į dabartinę " +"sistemą.</p>\n" "<p>Rinkmenos, kurių nėra momentinėje kopijoje, pašalinsimos.</p>Tęsti?" #. Read dialog help #: src/include/snapper/helps.rb:35 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p><b><big>Reading the list of snapshots</big></b><br>\n" +#| "Please wait...<br></p>\n" msgid "" "<p><b><big>Reading the list of snapshots</big></b><br>\n" "</p>\n" @@ -378,85 +397,138 @@ #. Summary dialog help: #: src/include/snapper/helps.rb:39 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p><b><big>Snapshots Configuration</big></b><p>\n" +#| "<p>The table shows a list of root filesystem snapshots. There are three types of snapshots, <b>single</b>, <b>pre</b> and <b>post</b>. Single snapshots are used for storing file system state in certain time, while Pre and Post are used to define the changes done by special operation proceeded between taking those two snapshots. Pre and Post snapshots are coupled together in the table.</p>\n" +#| "<p>Select a snapshot or snapshot couple and click <b>Show Changes</b> to see the file system changes new in specified snapshot.</p>\n" msgid "" "<p><b><big>Snapshots Configuration</big></b><p>\n" -"<p>The table shows a list of root filesystem snapshots. There are three types\n" -"of snapshots, <b>single</b>, <b>pre</b> and <b>post</b>. Single snapshots are\n" -"used for storing the file system state in a certain time, while Pre and Post are used to define the changes done by special operation performed between taking those two snapshots. Pre and Post snapshots are paired together in the table.</p>\n" -"<p>Select a snapshot or snapshot pair and click <b>Show Changes</b> to see the\n" +"<p>The table shows a list of root filesystem snapshots. There are three " +"types\n" +"of snapshots, <b>single</b>, <b>pre</b> and <b>post</b>. Single snapshots " +"are\n" +"used for storing the file system state in a certain time, while Pre and Post " +"are used to define the changes done by special operation performed between " +"taking those two snapshots. Pre and Post snapshots are paired together in the " +"table.</p>\n" +"<p>Select a snapshot or snapshot pair and click <b>Show Changes</b> to see " +"the\n" "new file system changes in the specified snapshot.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Momentinių kopijų konfigūravimas</big></b><p>\n" -"<p>Lentelėje pateiktas šakninės rinkmenų išdėstymo sistemos momentinių kopijų sąrašas. Yra trys momentinių kopijų tipai: \n" +"<p>Lentelėje pateiktas šakninės rinkmenų išdėstymo sistemos momentinių kopijų " +"sąrašas. Yra trys momentinių kopijų tipai: \n" "<b>pavienė</b>, <b>prieš</b> ir <b>po</b>. \n" -"Pavienės momentinės kopijos naudojamos tam tikru laiku buvusios rinkmenų išdėstymo sistemos būsenos saugojimui; „prieš“ ir „po“ naudojamos parodymui pakeitimų, kurie atliktų nuo vienos momentinės kopijos užfiksavimo iki kitos. „Prieš“ ir „po“ momentinės kopijos lentelėje pateiktos poromis.</p>\n" -"<p>Norėdami peržiūrėti rinkmenų išdėstymo sistemos skirtumus tarp naujos ir tam tikros momentinės kopijos, \n" -"pasirinkite momentinę kopiją arba momentinių kopijų porą ir spauskite <b>Rodyti pakeitimus</b>.</p>\n" +"Pavienės momentinės kopijos naudojamos tam tikru laiku buvusios rinkmenų " +"išdėstymo sistemos būsenos saugojimui; „prieš“ ir „po“ naudojamos parodymui " +"pakeitimų, kurie atliktų nuo vienos momentinės kopijos užfiksavimo iki kitos. " +"„Prieš“ ir „po“ momentinės kopijos lentelėje pateiktos poromis.</p>\n" +"<p>Norėdami peržiūrėti rinkmenų išdėstymo sistemos skirtumus tarp naujos ir " +"tam tikros momentinės kopijos, \n" +"pasirinkite momentinę kopiją arba momentinių kopijų porą ir spauskite <b>" +"Rodyti pakeitimus</b>.</p>\n" #. Show snapshot dialog help #: src/include/snapper/helps.rb:48 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p><b><big>Snapshot Overview</big></b><p>\n" +#| "<p>\n" +#| "The tree shows all the files that were modified between creating first ('pre') and second ('post') snapshot. On the right side, you can see the description generated when the first snapshot was created and the time of creation for both snapshots.\n" +#| "</p>\n" +#| "<p>\n" +#| "When file is selected in the tree, you can see the changes done to it. By default, changes between selected coupled snapshots are shown, but it is possible to compare the file with different versions.\n" +#| "</p>" msgid "" "<p><b><big>Snapshot Overview</big></b><p>\n" "<p>\n" -"The tree shows all the files that were modified between creating the first ('pre') and second ('post') snapshot. On the right side, you see the description generated when the first snapshot was created and the time of creation for both snapshots.\n" +"The tree shows all the files that were modified between creating the first " +"('pre') and second ('post') snapshot. On the right side, you see the " +"description generated when the first snapshot was created and the time of " +"creation for both snapshots.\n" "</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"When a file is selected in the tree, you see the changes done to it. By default, changes between selected paired snapshots are shown, but it is possible to compare the file with different versions.\n" +"When a file is selected in the tree, you see the changes done to it. By " +"default, changes between selected paired snapshots are shown, but it is " +"possible to compare the file with different versions.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Momentinės kopijos apžvalga</big></b><p>\n" "<p>\n" -"Medyje rodomos visos rinkmenos, kurios buvo pakeistos nuo pirmosios („prieš“) ir antrosios („po“) momentinės kopijos sukūrimo. Dešinėje pusėje matote aprašą, kuris sugeneruotas kuriant pirmąją momentinę kopiją, ir abiejų momentinių kopijų sukūrimo laikas.\n" +"Medyje rodomos visos rinkmenos, kurios buvo pakeistos nuo pirmosios " +"(„prieš“) ir antrosios („po“) momentinės kopijos sukūrimo. Dešinėje pusėje " +"matote aprašą, kuris sugeneruotas kuriant pirmąją momentinę kopiją, ir abiejų " +"momentinių kopijų sukūrimo laikas.\n" "</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"Medyje pažymėjus rinkmeną, galite peržiūrėti su jos pakeitimus. Numatytuoju atveju rodomi skirtumai tarp pasirinktų susietų momentinių kopijų, tačiau galima lyginti ir skirtinagas rinkmenos versijos.\n" +"Medyje pažymėjus rinkmeną, galite peržiūrėti su jos pakeitimus. Numatytuoju " +"atveju rodomi skirtumai tarp pasirinktų susietų momentinių kopijų, tačiau " +"galima lyginti ir skirtinagas rinkmenos versijos.\n" "</p>\n" #. Show snapshot dialog help, alternative for single snapshots #: src/include/snapper/helps.rb:58 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p><b><big>Snapshot Overview</big></b><p>\n" +#| "<p>\n" +#| "The tree shows all the files that are different between selected snapshot and current system. On the right side, you can see the snapshot description and time of its creation.\n" +#| "</p>\n" +#| "<p>\n" +#| "When file is selected in the tree, you can see the its difference between snapshot version and current system.\n" +#| "</p>" msgid "" "<p><b><big>Snapshot Overview</big></b><p>\n" "<p>\n" -"The tree shows all the files that differ in a selected snapshot and the current system. On the right side, you see the snapshot description and time of its creation.\n" +"The tree shows all the files that differ in a selected snapshot and the " +"current system. On the right side, you see the snapshot description and time " +"of its creation.\n" "</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"When a file is selected in the tree, you can see the its difference between snapshot version and current system.\n" +"When a file is selected in the tree, you can see the its difference between " +"snapshot version and current system.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Momentinės kopijos apžvalga</big></b><p>\n" "<p>\n" -"Medyje pateiktos visos rinkmenos, kurios skiriasi pasirinktoje momentinėje kopijoje ir dabartinėje sistemoje. Dešinėje pusėje matote momentinės kopijos aprašą ir jos sukūrimo laiką.\n" +"Medyje pateiktos visos rinkmenos, kurios skiriasi pasirinktoje momentinėje " +"kopijoje ir dabartinėje sistemoje. Dešinėje pusėje matote momentinės kopijos " +"aprašą ir jos sukūrimo laiką.\n" "</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"Medyje pažymėjus rinkmeną, galite peržiūrėti skirtumą tarp momentinės kopijos versijos ir dabartinės sistemos.\n" +"Medyje pažymėjus rinkmeną, galite peržiūrėti skirtumą tarp momentinės kopijos " +"versijos ir dabartinės sistemos.\n" "</p>\n" #. Return Tree of files modified between given snapshots #. Map is recursively describing the filesystem structure; helps to build Tree widget contents #: src/modules/Snapper.rb:108 +#| msgid "Failed to delete configuration %1." msgid "Failed to get config:\n" msgstr "Nepavyko gauti konfigūracijos:\n" #. Return the path to given snapshot #: src/modules/Snapper.rb:129 +#| msgid "Failed to delete configuration %1." msgid "Failed to get snapshot mount point:\n" msgstr "Nepavyko gauti momentinės kopijos prijungimo vietos:\n" #. Create new snapshot #. Return true on success #: src/modules/Snapper.rb:276 +#| msgid "Failed to create the new map." msgid "Failed to create new snapshot:\n" msgstr "Nepavyko sukurti naujos momentinės kopijos:\n" #. Modify existing snapshot #. Return true on success #: src/modules/Snapper.rb:291 +#| msgid "Failed to modify %1." msgid "Failed to modify snapshot:\n" msgstr "Nepavyko pakeisti momentinės kopijos:\n" #. Delete existing snapshot #. Return true on success #: src/modules/Snapper.rb:306 +#| msgid "Failed to delete configuration %1." msgid "Failed to delete snapshot:\n" msgstr "Nepavyko pašalinti momentinės kopijos:\n" @@ -467,21 +539,25 @@ #. Progress stage 1/2 #: src/modules/Snapper.rb:324 +#| msgid "Read configurations" msgid "Read list of configurations" msgstr "Perskaityti konfigūracijas" #. Progress stage 2/2 #: src/modules/Snapper.rb:326 +#| msgid "Read the list of snapshots" msgid "Read list of snapshots" msgstr "Perskaityti momentinių kopijų sąrašą" #. Progress step 1/2 #: src/modules/Snapper.rb:330 +#| msgid "Reading the configurations..." msgid "Reading list of configurations" msgstr "Skaitomos konfigūracijos" #. Progress step 2/2 #: src/modules/Snapper.rb:332 +#| msgid "Reading list of snapshots..." msgid "Reading list of snapshots" msgstr "Skaitomas momentinių kopijų sąrašas" @@ -491,6 +567,7 @@ msgstr "Baigta" #: src/modules/Snapper.rb:344 +#| msgid "Boot loader configuration failed." msgid "Querying snapper configurations failed:" msgstr "Snapper konfigūracijų užklausimo klaida:" @@ -502,7 +579,8 @@ msgstr "" "Snapper konfigūracijų nėra. Pirmiausia sukurkite vieną ar kelias \n" "snapper konfigūracijas naudodamiesi, o po to atverkite YaST snapper \n" -"modulį. Konfigūracijų kūrimui galite naudoti „snapper“ prorgamėlę komandinėje eilutėje." +"modulį. Konfigūracijų kūrimui galite naudoti „snapper“ programėlę komandinėje " +"eilutėje." #: src/modules/Snapper.rb:359 msgid "Querying snapper snapshots failed:" Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/sshd.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/sshd.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/sshd.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -20,13 +20,15 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. SSHD read dialog caption #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:155 #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:175 #: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:78 +#| msgid "Initializing the SSHD Configuration" msgid "Initializing SSHD Configuration" msgstr "Ruošiama SSHD konfigūracija" @@ -34,6 +36,7 @@ #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:161 #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:181 #: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:84 +#| msgid "Read the current SSHD configuration" msgid "Read current SSHD configuration" msgstr "Skaityti dabartinę SSHD konfigūraciją" @@ -41,6 +44,7 @@ #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:163 #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:183 #: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:86 +#| msgid "Read the current SSHD state" msgid "Read current SSHD state" msgstr "Skaityti dabartinę SSHD būseną" @@ -48,6 +52,7 @@ #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:166 #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:186 #: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:89 +#| msgid "Reading the current SSHD configuration..." msgid "Reading current SSHD configuration..." msgstr "Skaitoma dabartinė SSHD konfigūracija..." @@ -55,6 +60,7 @@ #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:168 #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:188 #: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:91 +#| msgid "Reading the current SSHD state" msgid "Reading current SSHD state..." msgstr "Skaitoma dabartinė SSHD būsena..." @@ -62,6 +68,7 @@ #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:186 #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:206 #: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:109 +#| msgid "Cannot read the current SSHD state." msgid "Cannot read current SSHD state." msgstr "Nepavyksta nuskaityti dabartinės SSHD būsenos." @@ -69,6 +76,7 @@ #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:204 #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:224 #: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:127 +#| msgid "Saving the SSHD Configuration" msgid "Saving SSHD Configuration" msgstr "Išsaugoma SSHD konfigūracija" @@ -83,6 +91,7 @@ #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:212 #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:232 #: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:135 +#| msgid "Adjust SSHD service" msgid "Adjust the SSHD service" msgstr "Derinti SSHD paslaugą" @@ -97,6 +106,7 @@ #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:217 #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:237 #: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:140 +#| msgid "Adjusting SSHD service..." msgid "Adjusting the SSHD service..." msgstr "Derinama SSHD paslauga..." @@ -104,6 +114,7 @@ #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:228 #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:248 #: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:151 +#| msgid "Cannot write the SSHD settings." msgid "Cannot write SSHD settings." msgstr "Nepavyksta įrašyti SSHD nuostatų." @@ -182,6 +193,7 @@ #. a dialog caption #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:106 #: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:100 +#| msgid "General Login Settings" msgid "SSHD Server Login Settings" msgstr "SSHD serverio prisijungimo nuostatos" @@ -193,6 +205,7 @@ #. A check box #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:113 #: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:107 +#| msgid "Print &Message of the Day after Login" msgid "Print &Message of the Day After Login" msgstr "Rodyti &dienos pranešimą po prisijungimo" @@ -216,28 +229,33 @@ #. A check box #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:125 #: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:119 +#| msgid "Ma&ximum Authentication Tries" msgid "Pa&sswordAuthentication" msgstr "Psisijungimas &slaptažodžiu" #. A check box #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:127 #: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:121 +#| msgid "Authentication Settings" msgid "RSA Authenti&cation" msgstr "Tapatybės nustatymas naudojant RSA" #. A check box #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:129 #: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:123 +#| msgid "Public &Key Authentication (Protocol V. 2 Only)" msgid "Public &Key Authentication" msgstr "Tapatybės nustatymas &viešuoju raktu" #. Sshd read dialog caption #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-start-Sshd.ycp:28 +#| msgid "Initializing the SSHD Configuration" msgid "Initializing sshd Configuration" msgstr "Ruošiama SSHD konfigūracija" #. Sshd write dialog caption #: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-start-Sshd.ycp:53 +#| msgid "Saving the SSHD Configuration" msgid "Saving sshd Configuration" msgstr "Išsaugoma SSHD konfigūracija" Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/storage.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/storage.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/storage.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -11,15 +11,16 @@ "Project-Id-Version: storage\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2015-09-28 18:17+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2015-10-20 12:45+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2015-11-01 10:01+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Mindaugas Baranauskas \n" -"Language-Team: Lithuanian \n" +"Language-Team: Lithuanian \n" "Language: lt\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. popup text #: src/clients/disk.rb:50 @@ -33,7 +34,8 @@ "\n" "To continue despite this warning, click Yes.\n" msgstr "" -"Šią programą naudokite tik tuomet, jei esate patyręs standžiųjų diskų skaidyme.\n" +"Šią programą naudokite tik tuomet, jei esate patyręs standžiųjų diskų " +"skaidyme.\n" "\n" "Neskaidykite diskų, kurie gali būti naudojami (jau prijungti, \n" "mainų ir kt.), nebent jūs tiksliai žinote, ką darote.\n" @@ -659,7 +661,8 @@ #. normally the target is located on hard disks. Here no hard disks #. can be found. YaST2 cannot install. Update CD might have newer drivers. #: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:172 -msgid "No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." +msgid "" +"No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." msgstr "Nerasta diskų. Jei galite, diegimui naudokite atnaujinimo CD." #. There are several hard disks found. Linux is completely installed on @@ -938,7 +941,8 @@ msgstr "" "<p>\n" "Pasirinktą diską gali naudoti Windows sistema. Čia nėra pakankamai\n" -"vietos &product; sistemai. Galite arba <b>visiškai ištrinti Windows</b>, arba\n" +"vietos &product; sistemai. Galite arba <b>visiškai ištrinti Windows</b>, " +"arba\n" "<b>sumažinti</b> juos, kad gautumėte pakankamai laisvos vietos.\n" "</p>" @@ -953,9 +957,11 @@ "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Jei ištrinsite Windows, visi šiame skaidinyje esantys duomenys bus <b>negrįžtamai\n" +"Jei ištrinsite Windows, visi šiame skaidinyje esantys duomenys bus <b>" +"negrįžtamai\n" "prarasti</b>. Prieš suspaudžiant Windows, mes <b>primygtinai rekomenduojame\n" -"sukurti atsargines duomenų kopijas</b>, kadangi duomenys turi būti pertvarkyti.\n" +"sukurti atsargines duomenų kopijas</b>, kadangi duomenys turi būti " +"pertvarkyti.\n" "Kartais tai gali nepavykti.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -1100,6 +1106,14 @@ #. If the user chooses 'no' here, the system will not be able to #. boot from the hard drive! #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:377 +#| msgid "" +#| "Warning: There is no partition mounted as /boot.\n" +#| "To boot from your hard disk, a small /boot partition\n" +#| "(approx. %1) is required. Consider creating one.\n" +#| "Partitions assigned to /boot will automatically be changed to\n" +#| "type 0x41 PReP/CHRP.\n" +#| "\n" +#| "Really use the setup without /boot partition?\n" msgid "" "Warning: There is no partition mounted as /boot.\n" "To boot from your hard disk, a small /boot partition\n" @@ -1222,7 +1236,8 @@ "You have not assigned a swap partition. In most cases, we highly recommend \n" "to create and assign a swap partition.\n" "Swap partitions on your system are listed in the main window with the\n" -"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point \"swap\".\n" +"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point " +"\"swap\".\n" "You can assign more than one swap partition, if desired.\n" "\n" "Really use the setup without swap partition?\n" @@ -1230,7 +1245,8 @@ "\n" "Jūs nepriskyrėte sukeitimų (swap) skaidinio. Paprastai\n" "primygtinai rekomenduojama sukurti ir priskirti sukeitimų (swap) skaidinį.\n" -"Sukeitimų skaidiniai išvardinti pagrindiniame lange ir pažymėti kaip „Linux Swap“. \n" +"Sukeitimų skaidiniai išvardinti pagrindiniame lange ir pažymėti kaip „Linux " +"Swap“. \n" "Priskirto sukeitimų skaidinio prijungimo vieta yra „swap“.\n" "Jei norite, galite priskirti kelis sukeitimo skaidinius.\n" "\n" @@ -1280,7 +1296,8 @@ "\n" "Really keep the partition unformatted?\n" msgstr "" -"Jei nusprendžiate suženklinti skaidinį, visi jame esantys duomenys bus prarasti.\n" +"Jei nusprendžiate suženklinti skaidinį, visi jame esantys duomenys bus " +"prarasti.\n" "\n" "Tikrai skaidinį palikti nesuženklintą?\n" @@ -1345,14 +1362,18 @@ #. popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:784 msgid "" -"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently mounted:\n" +"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently " +"mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the extended partition.\n" +"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the " +"extended partition.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" -"Pažymėtas išplėstasis skaidinys turi skaidinių, kurie šiuo metu yra prijungti:\n" +"Pažymėtas išplėstasis skaidinys turi skaidinių, kurie šiuo metu yra " +"prijungti:\n" "%1\n" -"*Primygtinai* rekomenduojama prieš trinant išplėstinį skaidinį atjungti šiuos skaidinius.\n" +"*Primygtinai* rekomenduojama prieš trinant išplėstinį skaidinį atjungti šiuos " +"skaidinius.\n" "Spauskite „Atšaukti“, nebent tiksliai žinote, ką darote.\n" #. popup text, Do not translate LVM. @@ -1523,21 +1544,26 @@ msgstr "" "<p><b>Prijungti /etc/fstab rinkmenoje pagal:</b>\n" "Paprastai rinkmenų sistema, kurią prijungiame, identifikuojama /etc/fstab\n" -"rinkmenoje pagal įrenginio pavadinimą. Tai gali būti pakeista: prijungiamos sistemos\n" -"galima ieškoti pagal UUID arba tomo žymę. Ne visos rinkmenų sistemos gali būti \n" -"prijungtos pagal UUID arba tomo žymę. Jei parinktis uždrausta, tai neįmanoma.\n" +"rinkmenoje pagal įrenginio pavadinimą. Tai gali būti pakeista: prijungiamos " +"sistemos\n" +"galima ieškoti pagal UUID arba tomo žymę. Ne visos rinkmenų sistemos gali " +"būti \n" +"prijungtos pagal UUID arba tomo žymę. Jei parinktis uždrausta, tai " +"neįmanoma.\n" "\n" #. help text, richtext format #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:479 msgid "" "<p><b>Volume Label:</b>\n" -"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" +"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " +"makes sense only \n" "when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Tomo žymė:</b>\n" -"Pavadinimas, įvestas šiame laukelyje, naudojamas kaip tomo žymė. Tai turi prasmės\n" +"Pavadinimas, įvestas šiame laukelyje, naudojamas kaip tomo žymė. Tai turi " +"prasmės\n" "tik tuomet, kai aktyvuojate prijungimą pagal tomo žymę.\n" "Tomo žymė negali turėti „/“ simbolio ar tarpų.\n" @@ -1560,6 +1586,7 @@ #. label text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:515 +#| msgid "UUID" msgid "&UUID" msgstr "&UUID" @@ -1660,7 +1687,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Pasirinktas skaidinys (%1) yra prijungtas prie %2.\n" -"Jei pakeičiate parametrus (tokius kaip prijungimo vieta arba rinkmenų sistemos tipas),\n" +"Jei pakeičiate parametrus (tokius kaip prijungimo vieta arba rinkmenų " +"sistemos tipas),\n" "Linux sistema gali būti sugadinta.\n" "\n" "Jei įmanoma, atjunkite skaidinį. Jei nesate tikras,\n" @@ -1750,7 +1778,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Įmanoma suspausti reiser rinkmenų sistemą, tačiau ši funkcija nėra\n" -"labai kruopščiai išbandyta. Rekomenduojama pasidaryti savo sistemos atsargines kopijas.\n" +"labai kruopščiai išbandyta. Rekomenduojama pasidaryti savo sistemos " +"atsargines kopijas.\n" "\n" "Ar suspausti rinkmenų sistemą?" @@ -1759,12 +1788,14 @@ msgid "" "The selected device contains partitions that are currently mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the partition table.\n" +"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the " +"partition table.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" "Pažymėtas įrenginys turi skaidinių, kurie šiuo metu yra prijungti:\n" "%1\n" -"*Primygtinai* rekomenduojama prieš trinant skaidinių lentelę atjungti šiuos skaidinius.\n" +"*Primygtinai* rekomenduojama prieš trinant skaidinių lentelę atjungti šiuos " +"skaidinius.\n" "Spauskite „Atšaukti“, nebent tiksliai žinote, ką darote.\n" #. popup text, Do not translate LVM. @@ -1812,8 +1843,15 @@ #. help text, richtext format #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1543 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p>\n" +#| "Create and remove subvolumes \n" +#| "from a Btrfs filesystem.</p>\n" msgid "<p>Create and remove subvolumes from a Btrfs filesystem.</p>\n" -msgstr "<p>Čia galite kurti ir šalinti Btrfs rinkmenų išdėstymo sistemos potomius.</p>\n" +msgstr "" +"<p>" +"Čia galite kurti ir šalinti Btrfs rinkmenų išdėstymo sistemos " +"potomius.</p>\n" #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1548 msgid "<p>Enable automatic snapshots for a Btrfs filesystem with snapper.</p>" @@ -1915,16 +1953,20 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:708 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/tmp.\n" +"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or " +"/var/tmp.\n" "If you leave the encryption password empty, the system will create\n" "a random password at system startup for you. This means, you will lose all\n" "data on these filesystems at system shutdown.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Ši prijungimo vieta priklauso laikinai rinkmenų sistemai, pvz., /tmp ar /var/tmp.\n" -"Galite palikti tuščią šifravimo slaptažodį. Tokiu atveju, krovimosi metu sistema jums\n" -"sukurs atsitiktinį slaptažodį. Tai reiškia, kad tokiose rinkmenų sistemose visi\n" +"Ši prijungimo vieta priklauso laikinai rinkmenų sistemai, pvz., /tmp ar " +"/var/tmp.\n" +"Galite palikti tuščią šifravimo slaptažodį. Tokiu atveju, krovimosi metu " +"sistema jums\n" +"sukurs atsitiktinį slaptažodį. Tai reiškia, kad tokiose rinkmenų sistemose " +"visi\n" "duomenys pradings išjungiant kompiuterį.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -1934,14 +1976,16 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:723 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file system.\n" +"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file " +"system.\n" "Choose your password carefully. A combination of letters and numbers\n" "is recommended. To ensure the password was entered correctly,\n" "enter it twice.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Jei pamiršite slaptažodį, prarasite priėjimą prie jūsų rinkmenų sistemos duomenų!\n" +"Jei pamiršite slaptažodį, prarasite priėjimą prie jūsų rinkmenų sistemos " +"duomenų!\n" "Atidžiai pasirinkite savo slaptažodį. Rekomenduojama raidžių ir skaičių\n" "kombinacija. Norėdami užtikrinti, jog slaptažodis įvestas gerai, įveskite\n" "jį dukart.\n" @@ -1953,7 +1997,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:737 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have at\n" +"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have " +"at\n" "least %1 characters and, as a rule, not contain any special characters\n" "(e.g., letters with accents or umlauts).\n" "</p>\n" @@ -2007,13 +2052,15 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:159 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore is\n" +"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore " +"is\n" "not needed for the update, you may select <b>Skip</b>. In this case, the\n" "file system is not accessed during update.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Jei užšifruota rinkmenų sistema neturi jokios sisteminės rinkmenos ir todėl nereikia\n" +"Jei užšifruota rinkmenų sistema neturi jokios sisteminės rinkmenos ir todėl " +"nereikia\n" "atnaujinti, spauskite <b>Praleisti</b>. Tuo atveju rinkmenų sistema\n" "atnaujinimo metu nepaliečiama.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -2134,13 +2181,17 @@ "FAT filesystem used for system mount point (/, /usr, /opt, /var, /home).\n" "This is not possible." msgstr "" -"FAT rinkmenų sistema panaudota sisteminei prijungimo vietai (/, /usr, /opt, /var, /home).\n" +"FAT rinkmenų sistema panaudota sisteminei prijungimo vietai (/, /usr, /opt, " +"/var, /home).\n" "Tai neleistina." #. error popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:248 -msgid "Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." -msgstr "Prijungimo vietoje neleistinas simbolis. Prijungimo vietoje nenaudokite „`'!\"%#“." +msgid "" +"Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." +msgstr "" +"Prijungimo vietoje neleistinas simbolis. Prijungimo vietoje nenaudokite " +"„`'!\"%#“." #. error popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:257 @@ -2160,7 +2211,6 @@ #. error popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:272 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "" #| "It is not allowed to assign a mount point\n" #| "to a device with nonexistent or unknown file system." @@ -2168,8 +2218,8 @@ "It is not allowed to assign the mount point swap\n" "to a device without a swap file system." msgstr "" -"Neleistina prijungimo vietos priskirti įrenginiui,\n" -"kurio rinkmenų sistemos nėra arba ji nežinoma." +"Neleistina „swap“ prijungimo vietos priskirti įrenginiui,\n" +"kurio rinkmenų sistema nėra „swap“." #. warning message, %1 is replaced by fs name (e.g. Ext3) #. %2 is prelaced by a size (e.g. 10 MB) @@ -2277,6 +2327,7 @@ #. menu entry text #: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:104 +#| msgid "Configure &zFCP..." msgid "Configure &FCoE..." msgstr "Konfigūruoti &FCoE..." @@ -2359,6 +2410,9 @@ #. popup text #: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:260 +#| msgid "" +#| "Calling zFCP configuration cancels all current changes.\n" +#| "Really call zFCP configuration?" msgid "" "Calling FCoE configuration cancels all current changes.\n" "Really call FCoE configuration?" @@ -2374,7 +2428,8 @@ "Calling multipath configuration cancels all current changes.\n" "Really call multipath configuration?\n" msgstr "" -"Kreipiantis į „Multipath“ konfigūravimą bus prarasti visi dabartiniai pakeitimai.\n" +"Kreipiantis į „Multipath“ konfigūravimą bus prarasti visi dabartiniai " +"pakeitimai.\n" "Tikrai kreiptis į „Multipath“ konfigūravimą?\n" #. popup text @@ -2670,20 +2725,21 @@ #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:39 +#| msgid "<p>Choose the size for the new partition.</p>" msgid "<p>Choose the role of the device.</p>" msgstr "<p>Pasirinkite įrenginio vaidmenį.</p>" #. radio button text #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:55 +#| msgid "O&perating Mode" msgid "Operating System" msgstr "Operacinė sistema" #. radio button text #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:60 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Delta RPM Application Progress" msgid "Data and ISV Applications" -msgstr "Pakeitimų RPM pritaikymo eiga" +msgstr "Duomenys ir ISV programos" #. radio button text #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:65 @@ -2697,6 +2753,7 @@ #. heading for a frame in a dialog #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:78 +#| msgid "Role: %s" msgid "Role" msgstr "Vaidmuo" @@ -3047,6 +3104,7 @@ #. button text #: src/include/partitioning/ep-graph.rb:74 +#| msgid "Export Device Graph..." msgid "Save Device Graph..." msgstr "Įrašyti įrenginių grafiką..." @@ -3072,6 +3130,7 @@ #. button text #: src/include/partitioning/ep-graph.rb:163 +#| msgid "Export Mount Graph..." msgid "Save Mount Graph..." msgstr "Įrašyti prijungimo grafiką..." @@ -3698,10 +3757,12 @@ msgstr "<p>Kaupiklių nuostatos.</p>" #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:498 +#| msgid "<p>Storage settings:</p>" msgid "<p>Packages to install:</p>" msgstr "<p>Įdiegtini paketai.</p>" #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:500 +#| msgid "<p>No changes to storage settings.</p>" msgid "<p>No packages need to be installed.</p>" msgstr "<p>Paketų diegti nereikia.</p>" @@ -3733,11 +3794,13 @@ #, fuzzy msgid "" "\n" -"<p><b>Path Name of Loop File:</b><br>This must be an absolute path to the file\n" +"<p><b>Path Name of Loop File:</b><br>This must be an absolute path to the " +"file\n" "containing the data for the encrypted loop device to set up.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"<p><b>Rinkmenos kelio pavadinimas:</b><br>Tai turi būti absoliutus kelias iki rinkmenos,\n" +"<p><b>Rinkmenos kelio pavadinimas:</b><br>Tai turi būti absoliutus kelias iki " +"rinkmenos,\n" "turinčios duomenis, reikalingus koduoto loop įrenginio konfigūravimui.</p>\n" #. helptext @@ -3750,7 +3813,8 @@ "exists, all data in it is lost.</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"<p><b>Sukurti koduotą rinkmeną:</b><br>Jei tai pažymėta, bus sukurta rinkmena, \n" +"<p><b>Sukurti koduotą rinkmeną:</b><br>Jei tai pažymėta, bus sukurta " +"rinkmena, \n" "kurios dydis nurodytas sekančiame laukelyje. <b>PASTABA:</b> Jei \n" "rinkmena jau egzistuoja, visi duomenys bus prarasti.</p>\n" @@ -4035,7 +4099,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:491 msgid "" "<p>Enter the size as well as the number and size\n" -"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be higher\n" +"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be " +"higher\n" "than the number of physical volumes of the volume group.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -4081,7 +4146,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:778 msgid "" "<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Normal Volume</b>.\n" -"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before the feature of <b>Thin Provisioning</b> existed.\n" +"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before " +"the feature of <b>Thin Provisioning</b> existed.\n" "If in doubt this is most probably the right choice</p>" msgstr "" @@ -4089,14 +4155,16 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:787 msgid "" "<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Thin Pool</b>.\n" -"This means <b>Thin Volumes</b> allocate their needed space on demand from such a pool.</p>" +"This means <b>Thin Volumes</b> allocate their needed space on demand from " +"such a pool.</p>" msgstr "" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:794 msgid "" "<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Thin Volume</b>.\n" -"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a <b>Thin Pool</b>.</p>" +"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a <b>Thin Pool</b>" +".</p>" msgstr "" #. heading for frame @@ -4151,13 +4219,15 @@ msgid "" "There are not enough suitable unused devices to create a volume group.\n" "\n" -"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one unused\n" +"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one " +"unused\n" "RAID device is required. Change your partition table accordingly." msgstr "" "Tomų grupės kūrimui nėra tinkamo nenaudojamo įrenginio.\n" "\n" "Norint naudoti LVM, reikia bent vieno nenaudojamo 0x8e (ar 0x83) skaidinio\n" -"arba vieno nenaudojamo RAID įrenginio. Atitinkamai pakeiskite skaidinių lentelę." +"arba vieno nenaudojamo RAID įrenginio. Atitinkamai pakeiskite skaidinių " +"lentelę." #. error popup #. error popup @@ -4388,8 +4458,12 @@ #. fallback dialog content #: src/include/partitioning/ep-nfs.rb:55 -msgid "NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package installation." -msgstr "NFS konfigūruoti negalima. Patikrinkite, ar tinkamai įdiegtas yast2-nfs-client paketas." +msgid "" +"NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package " +"installation." +msgstr "" +"NFS konfigūruoti negalima. Patikrinkite, ar tinkamai įdiegtas " +"yast2-nfs-client paketas." #. heading #: src/include/partitioning/ep-nfs.rb:127 @@ -4423,21 +4497,26 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:87 msgid "" "<p><b>RAID 0:</b> This level increases your disk performance.\n" -"There is <b>NO</b> redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, data recovery will not be possible.</p>\n" +"There is <b>NO</b> redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, " +"data recovery will not be possible.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>RAID 0:</b> Šis lygis padidina jūsų disko greitį.\n" -"Šioje veiksenoje <b>NĖRA</b> perteklumo. Sugedus vienam diskui, duomenų atkurti nebeįmanoma.</p>\n" +"Šioje veiksenoje <b>NĖRA</b> perteklumo. Sugedus vienam diskui, duomenų " +"atkurti nebeįmanoma.</p>\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:95 msgid "" "<p><b>RAID 1:</b> <br>This mode has the best redundancy. It can be\n" -"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data on all\n" -"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The partitions\n" +"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data on " +"all\n" +"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The " +"partitions\n" "used for this type of RAID should have approximately the same size.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>RAID 1:</b> <br>Ši veiksena turi geriausią dubliavimą. Ji gali būti\n" -"naudojama su dviem ar daugiau diskais. Ši veiksena laiko tikslią duomenų kopiją visuose diskuose.\n" +"naudojama su dviem ar daugiau diskais. Ši veiksena laiko tikslią duomenų " +"kopiją visuose diskuose.\n" "Tol, kol veikia bent vienas diskas, duomenys neprarandami. Skaidiniai,\n" "naudojami su tokio tipo RAID, turi turėti maždaug vienodą dydį.</p>\n" @@ -4445,12 +4524,15 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:106 msgid "" "<p><b>RAID 5:</b> <br>This mode combines management of a larger number\n" -"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three disks or more.\n" -"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail simultaneously, all data is lost</p>\n" +"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three " +"disks or more.\n" +"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail " +"simultaneously, all data is lost</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>RAID 5:</b> <br>Ši veiksena tvarko daugiausiai diskų ir kažkiek\n" "dubliuoja duomenis. Ši veiksena gali būti naudojama trims ir daugiau diskų.\n" -"Jei vienas diskas sugenda, visi duomenys išlieka. Jei vienu metu sugenda du diskai, visi duomenys prarandami</p>\n" +"Jei vienas diskas sugenda, visi duomenys išlieka. Jei vienu metu sugenda du " +"diskai, visi duomenys prarandami</p>\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:116 @@ -4464,8 +4546,10 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:126 msgid "" "<p>Add partitions to your RAID. According to\n" -"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), the size\n" -"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).</p>\n" +"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), " +"the size\n" +"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).</p>" +"\n" msgstr "" "<p>Įdėti skaidinius į RAID. Atitinkamai pagal\n" "RAID tipą, naudingoji disko vieta yra šių skaidinių suma (RAID 0), mažiausio\n" @@ -4532,12 +4616,16 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:338 msgid "" "<p><b>Chunk Size:</b><br>It is the smallest \"atomic\" mass\n" -"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID 5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" -"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect the array very much.</p>\n" +"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID " +"5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" +"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect " +"the array very much.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Gabalo dydis:</b><br>Tai mažiausia duomenų „atominė“ masė,\n" -"kuri gali būti įrašyta į įrenginius. Geriausias RAID 5 gabalo dydis yra 128KB,\n" -"RAID 0 gerai yra 32 KB. RAID 1 gabalo dydis nelabai turi reikšmės masyvui.</p>\n" +"kuri gali būti įrašyta į įrenginius. Geriausias RAID 5 gabalo dydis yra " +"128KB,\n" +"RAID 0 gerai yra 32 KB. RAID 1 gabalo dydis nelabai turi reikšmės masyvui.</p>" +"\n" #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:346 msgid "Parity Algorithm:" @@ -4547,10 +4635,12 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:353 msgid "" "The parity algorithm to use with RAID5/6.\n" -"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks with rotating platters.\n" +"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks " +"with rotating platters.\n" msgstr "" "Lyginumo algoritmas naudojamas su RAID5/6.\n" -"Kairinė simetrija suteikia maksimalų tipinių diskų su besisukančiomis plokštelėmis greitį.\n" +"Kairinė simetrija suteikia maksimalų tipinių diskų su besisukančiomis " +"plokštelėmis greitį.\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:361 @@ -4777,11 +4867,13 @@ #. combo box entry #: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:74 +#| msgid "Optional" msgid "Optimal" msgstr "Optimalus" #. combo box entry #: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:76 +#| msgid "End Cylinder" msgid "Cylinder" msgstr "Cilindras" @@ -4824,9 +4916,11 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Default Mount by</b> gives the mount by\n" "method for newly created file systems. <i>Device Name</i> uses the kernel\n" -"device name, which is not persistent. <i>Device ID</i> and <i>Device Path</i>\n" +"device name, which is not persistent. <i>Device ID</i> and <i>Device Path</i>" +"\n" "use names generated by udev from hardware information. These should be\n" -"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally <i>UUID</i> and\n" +"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally <i>UUID</i> " +"and\n" "<i>Volume Label</i> use the file systems UUID and label.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -4843,13 +4937,17 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:217 msgid "" "<p><b>Alignment of Newly Created Partitions</b>\n" -"determines how created partitions are aligned. <b>cylinder</b> is the traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. <b>optimal</b> aligns the \n" +"determines how created partitions are aligned. <b>cylinder</b> is the " +"traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. <b>optimal</b> " +"aligns the \n" "partitions for best performance according to hints provided by the Linux \n" "kernel or tries to be compatible with Windows Vista and Win 7.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Naujai kuriamų skaidinių lygiavimas</b>\n" -"nurodo, kaip turi būti lygiuojami sukuriami skaidiniai. „<b>cylinder</b>“ yra tradicinis lygiavimas pagal disko cilindrų rėžius. „<b>optimal</b>“ –\n" -"skaidiniai lygiuojami pagal didžiausią efektyvumą, kurį nustato Linux branduolys \n" +"nurodo, kaip turi būti lygiuojami sukuriami skaidiniai. „<b>cylinder</b>“ yra " +" tradicinis lygiavimas pagal disko cilindrų rėžius. „<b>optimal</b>“ –\n" +"skaidiniai lygiuojami pagal didžiausią efektyvumą, kurį nustato Linux " +"branduolys \n" "arba bandoma suderinti su Windows Vista ir Win 7.</p>\n" #. helptext @@ -5111,7 +5209,8 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:316 msgid "" "<p>This dialog is for defining classes for the raid devices\n" -"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many cases\n" +"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many " +"cases\n" "fewer classes are needed (e.g. only A and B). </p>" msgstr "" @@ -5119,9 +5218,12 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:325 msgid "" "<p>You can put a device into a class by right-clicking on the\n" -"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing the \n" -"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class in\n" -"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put currently \n" +"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing the " +"\n" +"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class " +"in\n" +"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put " +"currently \n" "selected devices into this class.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -5159,12 +5261,16 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:379 msgid "" "By pressing button \"<b>%1</b>\" you can select a file that contains\n" -"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All devices that match \n" -"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular expression is \n" +"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All " +"devices that match \n" +"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular " +"expression is \n" "matched against the kernel name (e.g. /dev/sda1), \n" -"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1) and the\n" +"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1" +") and the\n" "the udev id (e.g. /dev/disk/by-id/ata-ST3500418AS_9VMN8X8L-part1). \n" -"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more then one\n" +"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more " +"then one\n" "regular expression.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -5201,7 +5307,8 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:297 msgid "" "<p><b>Tmpfs Size:</b>\n" -"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or Gigabyte or\n" +"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or " +"Gigabyte or\n" "as a number followed by a percent sign meaning percentage of memory.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -5237,7 +5344,8 @@ #| "No writing to the file system is possible. Default is false.</p>\n" msgid "" "<p><b>Mount Read-Only:</b>\n" -"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During installation\n" +"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During " +"installation\n" "the file system is always mounted read-write.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Prijungti vien tik skaitymui:</b>\n" @@ -5259,6 +5367,7 @@ #. button text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:511 +#| msgid "Mountable by &User" msgid "Mountable by User" msgstr "Prijungiamas naudotojo" @@ -5269,7 +5378,8 @@ "The file system may be mounted by an ordinary user. Default is false.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Prijungiamas naudotojo:</b>\n" -"Rinkmenų sistema gali būti prijungiama paprasto naudotojo. Paprastai nesirenkama.</p>\n" +"Rinkmenų sistema gali būti prijungiama paprasto naudotojo. Paprastai " +"nesirenkama.</p>\n" #. button text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:528 @@ -5282,13 +5392,18 @@ "<p><b>Do Not Mount at System Start-up:</b>\n" "The file system is not automatically mounted when the system starts.\n" "An entry in /etc/fstab is created and the file system is mounted\n" -"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point></tt>\n" -"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is mounted). Default is false.</p>\n" +"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point><" +"/tt>\n" +"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is " +"mounted). Default is false.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Neprijungti paleidžiant sistemą:</b>\n" -"Operacinės sistemos paleidimo metu, rinkmenų sistema automatiškai nebus prijungta.\n" -"Rinkmenoje /etc/fstab sukuriamas įrašas, o rinkmenų sistema prijungiama su tam\n" -"tikrais parametrais po to, kai užduodama komanda <tt>mount <jungtis></tt>\n" +"Operacinės sistemos paleidimo metu, rinkmenų sistema automatiškai nebus " +"prijungta.\n" +"Rinkmenoje /etc/fstab sukuriamas įrašas, o rinkmenų sistema prijungiama su " +"tam\n" +"tikrais parametrais po to, kai užduodama komanda <tt>mount <jungtis><" +"/tt>\n" "įvesta (<jungtis> yra katalogas, kur prijungiama rinkmenų sistema).\n" "Paprastai ši parinktis nenaudojama.</p>\n" @@ -5321,16 +5436,21 @@ "<tt>journal</tt> -- All data is committed to the journal prior to being\n" "written into the main file system. Highest performance impact.<br>\n" "<tt>ordered</tt> -- All data is forced directly out to the main file system\n" -"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance impact.<br>\n" -"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact.</p>\n" +"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance " +"impact.<br>\n" +"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact.<" +"/p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Duomenų žurnalavimo veiksena:</b>\n" "Nurodo žurnalavimo veikseną rinkmenos duomenims.\n" "<tt>journal</tt> -- visi duomenys fiksuojami žurnale prieš įrašant į\n" "pagrindinę rinkmenų sistemą. Didžiausia įtaka greičiui.\n" -"<tt>ordered</tt> -- visi duomenys nukreipiami tiesiogiai į pagrindinę rinkmenų sistemą, \n" -"prieš tai, kai jų meta-duomenys užfiksuojami žurnale. Vidutinė įtaka greičiui.\n" -"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Duomenų tvarka neišlaikoma. Nedaro įtakos greičiui.</p>\n" +"<tt>ordered</tt> -- visi duomenys nukreipiami tiesiogiai į pagrindinę " +"rinkmenų sistemą, \n" +"prieš tai, kai jų meta-duomenys užfiksuojami žurnale. Vidutinė įtaka " +"greičiui.\n" +"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Duomenų tvarka neišlaikoma. Nedaro įtakos greičiui.</p>" +"\n" #. button text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:606 @@ -5366,18 +5486,24 @@ msgstr "Pasirenkama parametro &reikšmė" #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:647 -msgid "Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try again." -msgstr "Prijungimo vietoje neleistinas simbolis. Prijungimo vietoje nenaudokite tarpų ir tabuliacijų. Bandykite iš naujo." +msgid "" +"Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try " +"again." +msgstr "" +"Prijungimo vietoje neleistinas simbolis. Prijungimo vietoje nenaudokite tarpų " +"ir tabuliacijų. Bandykite iš naujo." #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:651 msgid "" "<p><b>Arbitrary Option Value:</b>\n" -"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of /etc/fstab.\n" +"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of " +"/etc/fstab.\n" "Multiple options are separated by commas.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Pasirenkama parametro reikšmė:</b>\n" -"Šiame laukelyje įveskite bet kokį tinkamą prijungimo parametrą, kuris yra leidžiamas\n" +"Šiame laukelyje įveskite bet kokį tinkamą prijungimo parametrą, kuris yra " +"leidžiamas\n" "ketvirtajame /etc/fstab laukelyje. Keli parametrai skiriami kableliais.</p>\n" #. label text @@ -5392,7 +5518,8 @@ "Set the charset used for display of file names in Windows partitions.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Rinkmenų pavadinimų rašmenų rinkinys (charset):</b>\n" -"Nustatykite rašmenų rinkinį, naudojamą Windows skaidinių rinkmenų pavadinimuose.</p>\n" +"Nustatykite rašmenų rinkinį, naudojamą Windows skaidinių rinkmenų " +"pavadinimuose.</p>\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:700 @@ -5403,10 +5530,12 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:706 msgid "" "<p><b>Codepage for Short FAT Names:</b>\n" -"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file systems.</p>\n" +"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file " +"systems.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Koduotės puslapis trumpiems FAT pavadinimams:</b>\n" -"Šis koduotės puslapis naudojamas FAT rinkmenų sistemos pavadinimams konvertuoti į trumpąjį formatą.</p>\n" +"Šis koduotės puslapis naudojamas FAT rinkmenų sistemos pavadinimams " +"konvertuoti į trumpąjį formatą.</p>\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:720 @@ -5417,10 +5546,12 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:726 msgid "" "<p><b>Number of FATs:</b>\n" -"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default is 2.</p>" +"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default " +"is 2.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>FAT'ų skaičius:</b>\n" -"Nurodo rinkmenų lokalizacijos lentelių skaičių rinkmenų sistemoje. Įprastai būna 2.</p>" +"Nurodo rinkmenų lokalizacijos lentelių skaičių rinkmenų sistemoje. Įprastai " +"būna 2.</p>" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:735 @@ -5431,10 +5562,14 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:746 msgid "" "<p><b>FAT Size:</b>\n" -"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable for the file system size.</p>\n" +"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If " +"auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable for " +"the file system size.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>FAT dydis:</b>\n" -"Nurodo naudojamos rinkmenų lokalizacijos lentelės tipą (12, 16 arba 32 bitų). Jei nustatyta auto, YaST automatiškai parinks reikšmę. labiausiai tinkančią pagal rinkmenų sistemos dydį.</p>\n" +"Nurodo naudojamos rinkmenų lokalizacijos lentelės tipą (12, 16 arba 32 " +"bitų). Jei nustatyta auto, YaST automatiškai parinks reikšmę. labiausiai " +"tinkančią pagal rinkmenų sistemos dydį.</p>\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:755 @@ -5444,7 +5579,8 @@ #. popup text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:763 msgid "The minimum size for \"Root Dir Entries\" is 112. Try again." -msgstr "Mažiausias „šakninio katalogo elementų“ dydis yra 112. Bandykite dar kartą." +msgstr "" +"Mažiausias „šakninio katalogo elementų“ dydis yra 112. Bandykite dar kartą." #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:767 @@ -5464,10 +5600,12 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:787 msgid "" "<p><b>Hash Function:</b>\n" -"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names in directories.</p>\n" +"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names in " +"directories.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Hash funkcija:</b>\n" -"Tai nurodo hash funkcijos pavadinimą, kuri naudojama rinkmenų pavadinimų rūšiavimui kataloguose.</p>\n" +"Tai nurodo hash funkcijos pavadinimą, kuri naudojama rinkmenų pavadinimų " +"rūšiavimui kataloguose.</p>\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:796 @@ -5478,10 +5616,16 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:803 msgid "" "<p><b>FS Revision:</b>\n" -"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to 2.4.</p>\n" +"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for " +"backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more " +"recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to " +"2.4.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>RS peržiūra:</b>\n" -"Ši savybė nurodo naudojamą reiserfs peržiūros formatą. „3.5“ yra atgaliniam suderinamumui su 2.2.x versijos branduoliais. „3.6“ yra naujesnis, bet gali būti naudojamas tik su branduoliais, kurių versijos didesnės arba lygios 2.4.</p>\n" +"Ši savybė nurodo naudojamą reiserfs peržiūros formatą. „3.5“ yra atgaliniam " +"suderinamumui su 2.2.x versijos branduoliais. „3.6“ yra naujesnis, bet gali " +"būti naudojamas tik su branduoliais, kurių versijos didesnės arba lygios " +"2.4.</p>\n" #. label text #. label text @@ -5493,10 +5637,14 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:823 msgid "" "<p><b>Block Size:</b>\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size of 4096 is used.</p>\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, " +"2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size " +"of 4096 is used.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Bloko dydis:</b>\n" -"Nurodo bloko dydį baitais. Tinkamos bloko reikšmės yra 512, 1024, 2048 ir 4096 baitai blokui. Jei pasirinkta auto, tada naudojamas standartinis bloko dydis 4096.</p>\n" +"Nurodo bloko dydį baitais. Tinkamos bloko reikšmės yra 512, 1024, 2048 ir " +"4096 baitai blokui. Jei pasirinkta auto, tada naudojamas standartinis bloko " +"dydis 4096.</p>\n" #. label text #. label text @@ -5523,10 +5671,12 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:875 msgid "" "<p><b>Percentage of Inode Space:</b>\n" -"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.</p>\n" +"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of " +"space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Inodo užimama vieta procentais:</b>\n" -"Parametras „Inodo užimama vieta procentais“ apibrėžia maksimalų plotą (procentais) rinkmenų sistemoje, kuris gali būti lokalizuotas inodams.</p>\n" +"Parametras „Inodo užimama vieta procentais“ apibrėžia maksimalų plotą " +"(procentais) rinkmenų sistemoje, kuris gali būti lokalizuotas inodams.</p>\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:884 @@ -5543,13 +5693,15 @@ #| "is normally more efficient than unaligned access.</p>\n" msgid "" "<p><b>Inode Aligned:</b>\n" -"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is or\n" +"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is " +"or\n" "is not aligned. By default inodes are aligned, which\n" "is usually more efficient than unaligned access.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Inodai išrikiuoti:</b>\n" "Parametras „Inodai išrikiuoti“ naudojamas nurodyti, jog inodai yra arba nėra\n" -"išrikiuoti. Įprasta, jog inodai yra išrikiuoti. Priėjimas prie išrikiuotų inodų paprastai\n" +"išrikiuoti. Įprasta, jog inodai yra išrikiuoti. Priėjimas prie išrikiuotų " +"inodų paprastai\n" "yra efektyvesnis nei prie neišrikiuotų.</p>\n" #. label text @@ -5571,10 +5723,12 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:934 msgid "" "<p><b>Log Size</b>\n" -"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the aggregate size.</p>\n" +"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the aggregate " +"size.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Registracijos rinkmenos dydis</b>\n" -"Nustato registracijos rinkmenos dydį (megabaitais). Jei auto, tuomet numatyta 40% viso dydžio.</p>\n" +"Nustato registracijos rinkmenos dydį (megabaitais). Jei auto, tuomet numatyta " +"40% viso dydžio.</p>\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:942 @@ -5612,10 +5766,14 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:987 msgid "" "<p><b>Block Size:</b>\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.</p>\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, " +"and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined " +"by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Bloko dydis:</b>\n" -"Nurodo bloko dydį baitais. Tinkamos bloko reikšmės yra 1024, 2048 ir 4096 baitai blokui. Jei pasirinkta auto, tuomet bloko dydis nustatomas pagal rinkmenų sistemos dydį ir manomą rinkmenų sistemos panaudojimą.</p>\n" +"Nurodo bloko dydį baitais. Tinkamos bloko reikšmės yra 1024, 2048 ir 4096 " +"baitai blokui. Jei pasirinkta auto, tuomet bloko dydis nustatomas pagal " +"rinkmenų sistemos dydį ir manomą rinkmenų sistemos panaudojimą.</p>\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:996 @@ -5639,7 +5797,8 @@ "<bytes-per-inode> baitų plotas diske. Kuo didesnis koeficientas \n" "baitai/inodui, tuo bus sukurta mažiau inodų.\n" "Paprastai, ši reikšmė neturėtų būti mažesnė, nei rinkmenų sistemos bloko \n" -"dydis, kadangi kitaip bus sukurta per daug inodų. Sukūrus rinkmenų sistemą, \n" +"dydis, kadangi kitaip bus sukurta per daug inodų. Sukūrus rinkmenų sistemą, " +"\n" "neįmanoma joje sukurti daugiau\n" "inodų, taigi įveskite reikalingą reikšmę.šiam parametrui.</p>\n" @@ -5662,8 +5821,14 @@ #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1033 #, fuzzy -msgid "<p><b>Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root:</b> Specify the percentage of blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally 1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved default is 0.1.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Root rezervuotų blokų procentas:</b> Nurodykite procentą blokų, rezervuotų naudotojui root. Įprasta reikšmė yra 5%.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root:</b> Specify the percentage of " +"blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally " +"1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved " +"default is 0.1.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Root rezervuotų blokų procentas:</b> Nurodykite procentą blokų, " +"rezervuotų naudotojui root. Įprasta reikšmė yra 5%.</p>" #. checkbox text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1042 @@ -5700,18 +5865,18 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1103 msgid "" "<p><b>No Journal:</b>\n" -"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you really\n" +"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you " +"really\n" "know what you are doing.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. this version makes some problems with interpreter, above lookup/add is OK #: src/modules/Partitions.rb:930 msgid "Operation not permitted on disk %1.\n" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Diske %1 veiksmo atlikti negalima.\n" #. popup text %1 is replaced by disk name e.g. /dev/hda #: src/modules/Partitions.rb:940 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "" #| "\n" #| "The partitioning on your disk %1 is either not readable by\n" @@ -5733,9 +5898,9 @@ "resize, or remove partitions from that disk here.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Skaidymo įrankiui parted, kuris naudojamas,\n" -"skaidinių lentelės keitimui, nepavyksta perskaityti\n" -"disko %1 skaidymo arba šis įrankis jo nepalaiko.\n" +"Skaidymo įrankiui, kuris naudojamas skaidinių lentelės\n" +"keitimui, nepavyksta perskaityti disko %1\n" +"skaidymo lentelės arba šis įrankis jo nepalaiko.\n" "\n" "Galite naudoti disko %1 skaidinius tokius, kokie jie yra dabar;\n" "arba galite juos suženklinti ir jiems priskirti prijungimo vietas,\n" @@ -5744,7 +5909,6 @@ #. popup text %1 is replaced by disk name e.g. /dev/dasda #: src/modules/Partitions.rb:958 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "" #| "\n" #| "The partitioning on your disk %1 is either not readable by\n" @@ -5766,14 +5930,13 @@ "or remove the partition from that disk here.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Skaidymo įrankiui parted, kuris naudojamas,\n" -"skaidinių lentelės keitimui, nepavyksta perskaityti\n" -"disko %1 skaidymo arba šis įrankis jo nepalaiko.\n" +"Diske %1 nėra skaidinių lentelės, \n" +"tačiau suderinamumo dėlei branduolys sukūrė\n" +"visą diską užimantį skaidinį.\n" "\n" -"Galite naudoti disko %1 skaidinius tokius, kokie jie yra dabar;\n" -"arba galite juos suženklinti ir jiems priskirti prijungimo vietas,\n" -"tačiau čia negalite įtraukti skaidinių, redaguoti,\n" -"keisti jų dydžio ar juos šalinti.\n" +"Galite naudoti disko %1 skaidinį tokį, koks jis yra dabar;\n" +"arba galite jį suženklinti ir jam priskirti prijungimo vietą,\n" +"tačiau čia negalite keisti jo dydžio ar šalinti.\n" #. popup text #: src/modules/Partitions.rb:977 @@ -5786,9 +5949,11 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "\n" -"Galite sutvarkyti disko skaidinių lentelę iki normalios būklės Skaidymo eksperte\n" +"Galite sutvarkyti disko skaidinių lentelę iki normalios būklės Skaidymo " +"eksperte\n" "pasirinkdami „Ekspertas“->„Kurti naują skaidinių lentelę“, \n" -"tačiau tuomet bus sunaikinti visi jūsų duomenys esantys visuose disko skaidiniuose.\n" +"tačiau tuomet bus sunaikinti visi jūsų duomenys esantys visuose disko " +"skaidiniuose.\n" #. popup text #: src/modules/Partitions.rb:989 @@ -5954,7 +6119,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: error popup #: src/modules/Storage.rb:4893 msgid "Installing required packages failed." -msgstr "Nepavyko įdiegti reikalingų paketų." +msgstr "" #: src/modules/Storage.rb:4894 src/modules/StorageClients.rb:159 msgid "Continue despite the error?" @@ -5962,8 +6127,14 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: error popup #: src/modules/Storage.rb:5252 -msgid "Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." -msgstr "Skaidinio negalima sukurti, nes vis dar naudojami kiti disko skaidiniai." +#| msgid "" +#| "\n" +#| "Partition %1 cannot be removed since other partitions on the\n" +#| "disk %2 are used.\n" +msgid "" +"Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." +msgstr "" +"Skaidinio negalima sukurti, nes vis dar naudojami kiti disko skaidiniai." #: src/modules/Storage.rb:5278 msgid "" @@ -6309,8 +6480,10 @@ "file system UUID, (ID) by device ID, and (Path) by device path.\n" msgstr "" "<b>Prijungti pagal</b> nurodo, kaip rinkmenų sistema prijungiama:\n" -"(Branduolys) pagal branduolio pavadinimą (Žymė) pagal rinkmenų sistemos žymę,\n" -"(UUID) pagal rinkmenų sistemos UUID, (ID) pagal įrenginio ID, o (Kelias) pagal įrenginio kelią.\n" +"(Branduolys) pagal branduolio pavadinimą (Žymė) pagal rinkmenų sistemos " +"žymę,\n" +"(UUID) pagal rinkmenų sistemos UUID, (ID) pagal įrenginio ID, o (Kelias) " +"pagal įrenginio kelią.\n" #. helptext for table column and overview entry #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:356 @@ -6338,7 +6511,8 @@ #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:374 msgid "" "An asterisk (*) after the mount point\n" -"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because it\n" +"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because " +"it\n" "has the <tt>noauto</tt> option set in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>)." msgstr "" "Žvaigždutė (*) už prijungimo vietos\n" @@ -6703,8 +6877,12 @@ #. enable snapshots for root volume if desired #. penalty for not having separate /home #: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:4560 src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:5683 -msgid "Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system under Windows." -msgstr "Kadangi rinkmenų sistema netvarkinga, keisti dydžio neįmanoma. Rinkmenų sistemą tikrinkite iš Windows." +msgid "" +"Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system " +"under Windows." +msgstr "" +"Kadangi rinkmenų sistema netvarkinga, keisti dydžio neįmanoma. Rinkmenų " +"sistemą tikrinkite iš Windows." #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text #: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6179 @@ -6737,7 +6915,6 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6302 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "" #| "<p>\n" #| "To create an LVM-based proposal, choose the corresponding button.</p>\n" @@ -6745,8 +6922,8 @@ "<p>To create an LVM-based proposal, choose the corresponding button. The\n" "LVM-based proposal can be encrypted.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>\n" -"Norėdami sukurti pasiūlymą LVM pagrindu, spauskite atitinkamą mygtuką.</p>\n" +"<p>Norėdami sukurti pasiūlymą LVM pagrindu, spauskite atitinkamą mygtuką.\n" +"LVM pagrindu sukurtą konfigūraciją galima užšifruoti.</p>\n" #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6309 Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/support.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/support.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/support.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -16,7 +16,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && (n%" +"100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Command line help text for the Xsupport module @@ -334,8 +335,10 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p><b><big>Opening SUSE Support Center</big></b><br>\n" -"To start a Web browser that opens the SUSE Support Center Portal, use <b>Open SUSE Support Center</b>.\n" -"You can then open a Service Request with Global Technical Support. Make sure you write down\n" +"To start a Web browser that opens the SUSE Support Center Portal, use <b>Open " +"SUSE Support Center</b>.\n" +"You can then open a Service Request with Global Technical Support. Make sure " +"you write down\n" "the Service Request number to include in the supportconfig data upload.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -375,31 +378,38 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Options</big></b><br>\n" "Collect additional information. Usually these options are not\n" -"necessary, but can be included if circumstances require more information.</p>\n" +"necessary, but can be included if circumstances require more information.</p>" +"\n" msgstr "" #. Expert dialog help 1/1 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:108 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Default Options</b></big><br>\n" -"Select or deselect each of the data sets you would like to include in the supportconfig tarball.</p>" +"Select or deselect each of the data sets you would like to include in the " +"supportconfig tarball.</p>" msgstr "" #. Contact dialog help 1/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:112 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Contact Information</b></big><br>\n" -"Fill in each of the contact information fields that you would like to include\n" -"in the supportconfig tarball. The fields are saved in the basic-environment.txt file.</p>" +"Fill in each of the contact information fields that you would like to " +"include\n" +"in the supportconfig tarball. The fields are saved in the " +"basic-environment.txt file.</p>" msgstr "" #. Contact dialog help 2/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Upload Information</big></b><br>\n" -"The upload target is the supportconfig tarball's destination URI. Supported upload services include\n" -"ftp, http, https, scp. If you need to include the supportconfig tarball filename in your upload target,\n" -"use the <i>tarball</i> keyword. This will get replaced with the actual tarball filename.\n" +"The upload target is the supportconfig tarball's destination URI. Supported " +"upload services include\n" +"ftp, http, https, scp. If you need to include the supportconfig tarball " +"filename in your upload target,\n" +"use the <i>tarball</i> keyword. This will get replaced with the actual " +"tarball filename.\n" "See <i>man supportconfig(1)</i> for further details.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -407,7 +417,8 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:126 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Upload Target Examples</big></b><br>\n" -"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=<i>tarball</i><br>\n" +"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=<i>tarball</i>" +"<br>\n" "ftp://ftp.novell.com/incoming<br>\n" "scp://central.server.foo.com/supportconfig/archives</p>" msgstr "" @@ -415,8 +426,10 @@ #. Contact dialog help 4/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:133 msgid "" -"<p><b>Note:</b> If you are uploading a supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support,\n" -"make sure you include the 11-digit service request number from your open service request.\n" +"<p><b>Note:</b> If you are uploading a supportconfig tarball to Global " +"Technical Support,\n" +"make sure you include the 11-digit service request number from your open " +"service request.\n" msgstr "" #. Collecting data dialkog help 1/1 @@ -430,14 +443,16 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:141 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Collected Data Review</big></b><br>\n" -"Review the data collected by supportconfig. If you do not want to share some of the collected data,\n" +"Review the data collected by supportconfig. If you do not want to share some " +"of the collected data,\n" "use <b>Remove from Data</b> and the selected file will be removed.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Configure1 dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:148 msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></b><br>\n" +"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></b>" +"<br>\n" "If you want to store a copy of the supportconfig tarball, select the target\n" "directory and make sure that this option is checked.\n" "<br></p>\n" @@ -448,7 +463,8 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:155 src/include/support/helps.rb:180 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Upload URL</big></b><br>\n" -"This option has the location to which the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded\n" +"This option has the location to which the supportconfig tarball will be " +"uploaded\n" "as default value.\n" "Change this value only in special cases.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -465,7 +481,8 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:173 msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></b><br>\n" +"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></b>" +"<br>\n" "If you have already created the supportconfig tarball, write the full path\n" "into the <i>Package with log files</i> field.\n" "<br></p>\n" @@ -549,11 +566,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:57 -msgid "System environment information, including sysctl and root's environment. env.txt" +msgid "" +"System environment information, including sysctl and root's environment. " +"env.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:60 -msgid "Recursively gets *.conf files, along with various other configuration files in /etc. etc.txt" +msgid "" +"Recursively gets *.conf files, along with various other configuration files " +"in /etc. etc.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:63 @@ -573,7 +594,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:75 -msgid "Novell Linux User Management-related information, including a root DSE, UNIX Config and workstation object searches. novell-lum.txt" +msgid "" +"Novell Linux User Management-related information, including a root DSE, UNIX " +"Config and workstation object searches. novell-lum.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:78 @@ -629,7 +652,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:117 -msgid "Pluggable Authentication Module-related information, including user account information. pam.txt" +msgid "" +"Pluggable Authentication Module-related information, including user account " +"information. pam.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:120 @@ -649,7 +674,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:132 -msgid "System Activity Reporting-related information, including copies of the SAR data files. sar.txt" +msgid "" +"System Activity Reporting-related information, including copies of the SAR " +"data files. sar.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:135 @@ -662,8 +689,10 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:141 msgid "" -"Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology-related information for hard disks. WARNING: Some hard disk controllers and drives do not\n" -"behave nicely. Probing SMART data has been known to change file systems to read only mode or even hang the server. Make sure probing SMART data\n" +"Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology-related information for " +"hard disks. WARNING: Some hard disk controllers and drives do not\n" +"behave nicely. Probing SMART data has been known to change file systems to " +"read only mode or even hang the server. Make sure probing SMART data\n" "works in your environment before enabling this option. fs-smartmon.txt\n" msgstr "" @@ -696,15 +725,21 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:167 -msgid "Tells supportconfig to search the file system for all eDirectory instances files. If set, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST is automatically set as well. -e" +msgid "" +"Tells supportconfig to search the file system for all eDirectory instances " +"files. If set, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST is automatically set as well. -e" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:170 -msgid "A full file list using find from the root of the filesytem. -L, fs-files.txt" +msgid "" +"A full file list using find from the root of the filesytem. -L, fs-files.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:173 -msgid "Includes the entire log file, including comments, instead of just VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT lines of it. Additional rotated logs are included if available. -l" +msgid "" +"Includes the entire log file, including comments, instead of just " +"VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT lines of it. Additional rotated logs are included if " +"available. -l" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:176 @@ -712,15 +747,21 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:179 -msgid "Normally all of the /var/log/YaST2/* logs are included. This option minimizes the amount of each file retrieved." +msgid "" +"Normally all of the /var/log/YaST2/* logs are included. This option minimizes " +"the amount of each file retrieved." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:182 -msgid "Runs an rpm -V on every installed RPM package. This takes some time to complete. -v, rpm-verify.txt" +msgid "" +"Runs an rpm -V on every installed RPM package. This takes some time to " +"complete. -v, rpm-verify.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:185 -msgid "Normally only the base SLP service types are listed. This option allows you to query each of the discovered service types individually. -s, slp.txt" +msgid "" +"Normally only the base SLP service types are listed. This option allows you " +"to query each of the discovered service types individually. -s, slp.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:188 @@ -740,33 +781,47 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:200 -msgid "The number of lines to include when getting a log file. Zero means get the entire file." +msgid "" +"The number of lines to include when getting a log file. Zero means get the " +"entire file." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:203 -msgid "The supportconfig tarball location. The first valid location in the list is always used." +msgid "" +"The supportconfig tarball location. The first valid location in the list is " +"always used." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:206 -msgid "The maximum number of /var/log/messages lines to get. Zero means get the entire file." +msgid "" +"The maximum number of /var/log/messages lines to get. Zero means get the " +"entire file." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:209 -msgid "The maximum number of heartbeat policy engine log files to include in the supportconfig tarball." +msgid "" +"The maximum number of heartbeat policy engine log files to include in the " +"supportconfig tarball." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:212 -msgid "The maximum number of SAR data files to include in the supportconfig tarball." +msgid "" +"The maximum number of SAR data files to include in the supportconfig tarball." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:215 msgid "" -"When set to 1, supportconfig runs in quiet mode. This option is useful if you\n" -"plan on running supportconfig regularly in a cron job for example. Set with -Q." +"When set to 1, supportconfig runs in quiet mode. This option is useful if " +"you\n" +"plan on running supportconfig regularly in a cron job for example. Set with " +"-Q." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:218 -msgid "Used to specify where the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded, when using the -u srnum startup option. You can specify any FTP server that supports anonymous uploads. The default is SUSE's public ftp server." +msgid "" +"Used to specify where the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded, when using " +"the -u srnum startup option. You can specify any FTP server that supports " +"anonymous uploads. The default is SUSE's public ftp server." msgstr "" #. Initialization dialog caption @@ -832,3 +887,4 @@ #: src/modules/Support.rb:438 msgid "Configuration summary..." msgstr "Konfigūracijos santrauka..." + Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/sysconfig.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/sysconfig.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/sysconfig.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -19,7 +19,8 @@ "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. help text header - sysconfig editor #: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:34 @@ -36,14 +37,16 @@ #. Adjust translation with other two parts to give a clear final text. #: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:58 msgid "Set value of the variable. Requires options 'variable' and 'value'" -msgstr "Nurodykite kintamojo reikšmę. Reikia parametrų „kintamasis“ ir „reikšmė“" +msgstr "" +"Nurodykite kintamojo reikšmę. Reikia parametrų „kintamasis“ ir „reikšmė“" #. help text for command 'set' 2/3 #. Split string because of technical issues with line breaks. #. Adjust translation with other two parts to give a clear final text. #: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:64 msgid "or 'variable=value', for example, variable=DISPLAYMANAGER value=gdm" -msgstr "arba „kintamasis=reikšmė“, pavyzdžiui, variable=DISPLAYMANAGER value=gdm" +msgstr "" +"arba „kintamasis=reikšmė“, pavyzdžiui, variable=DISPLAYMANAGER value=gdm" #. help text for command 'set' 3/3 #. Split string because of technical issues with line breaks. @@ -138,7 +141,8 @@ "(e.g., %1$%2).\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Naudokite pilną kintamojo pavadinimą forma $\n" +"Naudokite pilną kintamojo pavadinimą forma $<" +"RINKMENOS_PAVADINIMAS>\n" "(pvz., %1$%2).\n" #. error popup message @@ -312,17 +316,26 @@ #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:819 msgid "" "<p>After you save your changes, this editor changes the variables in the\n" -"corresponding sysconfig file. Then it starts activation commands, which changes the underlying configuration files, stops and starts daemons,\n" -"and runs low-level configuration tools so your configuration in sysconfig takes effect.</p>\n" +"corresponding sysconfig file. Then it starts activation commands, which " +"changes the underlying configuration files, stops and starts daemons,\n" +"and runs low-level configuration tools so your configuration in sysconfig " +"takes effect.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Išsaugojus pakeitimus, šis redaktorius pakeičia kintamuosius atitinkamoje\n" -"sysconfig rinkmenoje. Po to jis paleidžia aktyvuojančias komandas, kuris pakeičia svarbias konfigūracijos rinkmenas, sustabdo ir paleidžia tarnybas, \n" -"paleidžia žemojo lygio konfigūravimo įrankius, kad įsigaliotų jūsų sysconfig konfigūracija.</p>\n" +"sysconfig rinkmenoje. Po to jis paleidžia aktyvuojančias komandas, kuris " +"pakeičia svarbias konfigūracijos rinkmenas, sustabdo ir paleidžia tarnybas, \n" +"paleidžia žemojo lygio konfigūravimo įrankius, kad įsigaliotų jūsų sysconfig " +"konfigūracija.</p>\n" #. helptext for popup - part 2/2 #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:825 -msgid "<p><b>Important:</b> You still can edit each individual configuration file manually. The name of file is displayed in the variable description.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Svarbu:</b> Jūs vis dar galite redaguoti kiekvieną atskirą konfigūracijos rinkmeną rankiniu būdu. Rinkmenos pavadinimas rodomas kintamojo apraše.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Important:</b> You still can edit each individual configuration file " +"manually. The name of file is displayed in the variable description.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Svarbu:</b> Jūs vis dar galite redaguoti kiekvieną atskirą " +"konfigūracijos rinkmeną rankiniu būdu. Rinkmenos pavadinimas rodomas " +"kintamojo apraše.</p>" #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:830 msgid "/etc/sysconfig Editor" @@ -335,13 +348,23 @@ #. help rich text displayed after module start (1/2) #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:866 -msgid "<P><B>System Configuration Editor</B></P><P>With the system configuration editor, you can change some system settings. You can also use YaST to configure your hardware and system settings.</P>" -msgstr "<P><B>Sistemos konfigūravimo redaktorius</B></P><P>Su sistemos konfigūracijos redaktoriumi galite keisti kai kurias sistemos nuostatas. Įtaisų ir sistemos nuostatų konfigūravimui taip pat galite naudoti YaST.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P><B>System Configuration Editor</B></P><P>With the system configuration " +"editor, you can change some system settings. You can also use YaST to " +"configure your hardware and system settings.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P><B>Sistemos konfigūravimo redaktorius</B></P><P>Su sistemos konfigūracijos " +"redaktoriumi galite keisti kai kurias sistemos nuostatas. Įtaisų ir sistemos " +"nuostatų konfigūravimui taip pat galite naudoti YaST.</P>" #. help rich text displayed after module start (2/2) #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:870 -msgid "<P><B>Note:</B> Descriptions are not translated because they are read directly from configuration files.</P>" -msgstr "<P><B>Pastaba:</B> Aprašai neverčiami, kadangi jie skaitomi tiesiogiai iš konfigūracijos rinkmenų.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P><B>Note:</B> Descriptions are not translated because they are read " +"directly from configuration files.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P><B>Pastaba:</B> Aprašai neverčiami, kadangi jie skaitomi tiesiogiai iš " +"konfigūracijos rinkmenų.</P>" #. push button label - displayed only in autoinstallation config mode #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:877 @@ -370,8 +393,13 @@ #. help text in popup dialog #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:951 -msgid "The search results are displayed here. If you see the item you want, select it then click \"Go to\". Otherwise, click \"Cancel\" to close this dialog." -msgstr "Čia matote paieškos rezultatus. Jei matote tai, ko ieškojote, pažymėkite tai ir spauskite „Eiti prie“. Kitu atveju, norėdami užverti dialogą, spauskite „Atšaukti“." +msgid "" +"The search results are displayed here. If you see the item you want, select " +"it then click \"Go to\". Otherwise, click \"Cancel\" to close this dialog." +msgstr "" +"Čia matote paieškos rezultatus. Jei matote tai, ko ieškojote, pažymėkite tai " +"ir spauskite „Eiti prie“. Kitu atveju, norėdami užverti dialogą, spauskite " +"„Atšaukti“." #. push button label #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:956 @@ -553,26 +581,32 @@ #. @param action [Symbol] :reload or :restart #. @return [Symbol] result returned by #exec_action #: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1156 +#| msgid "Reloading service %1..." msgid "Reloading service %s..." msgstr "Iš naujo įkeliama paslauga %s..." #: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1157 +#| msgid "Reload of the service %1 failed" msgid "Reload of the service %s failed" msgstr "Nepavyko įkelti iš naujo paslaugos %s" #: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1158 +#| msgid "Service %1 will be reloaded" msgid "Service %s will be reloaded" msgstr "Paslauga %s įkelsima iš naujo" #: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1160 +#| msgid "Restarting service %1..." msgid "Restarting service %s..." msgstr "Iš naujo paleidžiama paslauga %s..." #: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1161 +#| msgid "Restart of the service %1 failed" msgid "Restart of the service %s failed" msgstr "Nepavyko paleisti iš naujo paslaugos %s" #: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1162 +#| msgid "Service %1 will be restarted" msgid "Service %s will be restarted" msgstr "Paslauga %s paleisima iš naujo" @@ -582,6 +616,7 @@ #. @param service name #. @return [Boolean] active? #: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1187 +#| msgid "Cannot delete the service. It is not installed." msgid "Cannot determine service state, systemd service does not exist:" msgstr "Negalima nustatyti paslaugos būsenos, ko gero nėra systemd paslaugos:" Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/tftp-server.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/tftp-server.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/tftp-server.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -19,7 +19,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. description map for command line @@ -87,8 +88,12 @@ #. dialog help text #: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:83 -msgid "<p>Use this to enable a server for TFTP (trivial file transfer protocol). The server will be started using xinetd.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Naudokite tai, kad įgalintumėte TFTP (trivialus rinkmenų siuntimo protokolas) serverį. Jis bus paleistas naudojant xinetd.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Use this to enable a server for TFTP (trivial file transfer protocol). The " +"server will be started using xinetd.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Naudokite tai, kad įgalintumėte TFTP (trivialus rinkmenų siuntimo " +"protokolas) serverį. Jis bus paleistas naudojant xinetd.</p>" #. enlighten newbies, #102946 #. dialog help text @@ -102,12 +107,15 @@ "<p><b>Boot Image Directory</b>:\n" "Specify the directory where served files are located. The usual value is\n" "<tt>/tftpboot</tt>. The directory will be created if it does not exist. \n" -"The server uses this as its root directory (using the <tt>-s</tt> option).</p>\n" +"The server uses this as its root directory (using the <tt>-s</tt> option).</p>" +"\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Įkrovos atvaizdžio katalogas</b>:\n" "Nurodykite katalogą, kuriame yra aptarnaujamos\n" -"rinkmenos. Paprastai tai būna <tt>/tftpboot</tt>. Katalogas bus sukurtas, jei\n" -"iki šiol jo nebuvo. Serveris jį naudos kaip savo root katalogą (naudodamas parametrą <tt>-s</tt>).</p>\n" +"rinkmenos. Paprastai tai būna <tt>/tftpboot</tt>. Katalogas bus sukurtas, " +"jei\n" +"iki šiol jo nebuvo. Serveris jį naudos kaip savo root katalogą (naudodamas " +"parametrą <tt>-s</tt>).</p>\n" #. Radio button label, disable TFTP server #: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:115 @@ -189,3 +197,4 @@ #: src/modules/TftpServer.rb:308 msgid "Boot Image Directory:" msgstr "Įkrovos atvaizdžio katalogas:" + Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/timezone_db.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/timezone_db.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/timezone_db.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -17,7 +17,8 @@ "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. name of time zone region #: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:23 Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/tune.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/tune.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/tune.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -5,26 +5,31 @@ # Tomas $atkauskas , 2003. # Jonas Gocentas , 2003. # Andrius Štikonas , 2006. -# Mindaugas Baranauskas , 2009, 2010, 2013. +# Mindaugas Baranauskas , 2009, 2010, 2013, 2015. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: tune\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-02-05 09:25+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2015-11-01 09:48+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Mindaugas Baranauskas \n" -"Language-Team: Lithuanian \n" +"Language-Team: Lithuanian \n" "Language: lt\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. Command line help text for the hardware detection module, %1 is "hwinfo" #: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:49 -msgid "Hardware Detection - this module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." -msgstr "Įrenginių aptikimas – šis modulis nepalaiko komandinės eilutės sąsajos, vietoj to naudokite „%1“." +msgid "" +"Hardware Detection - this module does not support the command line interface, " +"use '%1' instead." +msgstr "" +"Įrenginių aptikimas – šis modulis nepalaiko komandinės eilutės sąsajos, " +"vietoj to naudokite „%1“." #. translators: popup heading #: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:73 @@ -57,18 +62,22 @@ "details of your computer. Click any node for more information.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<P><B>Informacijos apie įrenginius</B> modulis rodo išsamią informaciją\n" -"apie jūsų kompiuterį. Norėdami sužinoti daugiau, spauskite bet kokį punktą.</p>\n" +"apie jūsų kompiuterį. Norėdami sužinoti daugiau, spauskite bet kokį punktą.<" +"/p>\n" #: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:338 -msgid "<P>You can save hardware information to a file. Click <B>Save to File</B> and enter the filename.</P>" -msgstr "<P>Galite įrenginių informaciją įrašyti į rinkmeną. Spauskite <B>Įrašyti į rinkmeną</B> ir įveskite rinkmenos pavadinimą.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>You can save hardware information to a file. Click <B>Save to File</B> and " +"enter the filename.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>Galite įrenginių informaciją įrašyti į rinkmeną. Spauskite <B>Įrašyti į " +"rinkmeną</B> ir įveskite rinkmenos pavadinimą.</P>" #. installation proposal header #: src/clients/hwinfo_proposal.rb:31 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Hardware Detection" msgid "System and Hardware Settings" -msgstr "Įrenginių aptikimas" +msgstr "Sistemos ir aparatinės įrangos nuostatos" #. this is a heading #. tree node string @@ -88,8 +97,12 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:95 -msgid "<P><B>Details</B></P><P>The details of the selected hardware component are displayed here.</P>" -msgstr "<P><B>Išsamiau</B></P><P>Čia rodoma išsami informacija apie pasirinktą įrenginį.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P><B>Details</B></P><P>The details of the selected hardware component are " +"displayed here.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P><B>Išsamiau</B></P><P>Čia rodoma išsami informacija apie pasirinktą " +"įrenginį.</P>" #. heading text, %1 is component name (e.g. "USB UHCI Root Hub") #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:101 @@ -140,17 +153,24 @@ #. help text - part 1/3 #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:180 -msgid "<P><B>Detected Hardware</B><BR>This table contains all hardware components detected in your system.</P>" -msgstr "<P><B>Aptikta įranga</B><BR>Šioje lentelėje yra visi įrenginių komponentai, aptiktiti jūsų sistemoje.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P><B>Detected Hardware</B><BR>This table contains all hardware components " +"detected in your system.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P><B>Aptikta įranga</B><BR>Šioje lentelėje yra visi įrenginių komponentai, " +"aptiktiti jūsų sistemoje.</P>" #. help text - part 2/3 #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:184 -msgid "<P><B>Details</B><BR>Select a component and press <B>Details</B> to see a more detailed description of the component.</P>" -msgstr "<P><B>Išsamiau</B><BR>Pasirinkite komponentą ir spauskite <B>Detalės</B>, jei norite išsamesnio komponento aprašo.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P><B>Details</B><BR>Select a component and press <B>Details</B> to see a " +"more detailed description of the component.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P><B>Išsamiau</B><BR>Pasirinkite komponentą ir spauskite <B>Detalės</B>, jei " +"norite išsamesnio komponento aprašo.</P>" #. help text - part 3/3 #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:188 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "" #| "<P><B>Save to File</B><BR>You can save\n" #| " hardware information (<I>hwinfo</I> output) to a file or floppy disk. Select the target type in <B>Save to File</B>.</P>" @@ -158,8 +178,9 @@ "<P><B>Save to File</B><BR>You can save\n" " hardware information (<I>hwinfo</I> output) to a file.</P>" msgstr "" -"<P><B>Įrašyti į rinkmeną</B><BR>Jūs galite išsaugoti\n" -" įrenginių informaciją (<I>hwinfo</I> išvestį) rinkmenoje arba diskelyje. Išsaugojimo vietos tipą pasirinkite <B>Įrašyti į rinkmeną</B> meniu.</P>" +"<P><B>Įrašyti į rinkmeną</B><BR> \n" +" Jūs galite įrenginių informaciją (<I>hwinfo</I> išvestį) įrašyti į " +"rinkmeną.</P>" #. heading text #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:197 @@ -289,28 +310,50 @@ #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:411 -msgid "<P>It is possible to add a PCI ID to a device driver to extend its internal database of known supported devices.</P>" -msgstr "<P>Įmanoma įtraukti PCI ID į įrenginio tvarkyklę, išplečiant jos vidinę palaikomų įrenginių duomenų bazę.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>It is possible to add a PCI ID to a device driver to extend its internal " +"database of known supported devices.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>Įmanoma įtraukti PCI ID į įrenginio tvarkyklę, išplečiant jos vidinę " +"palaikomų įrenginių duomenų bazę.</P>" #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:415 -msgid "<P>PCI ID numbers are entered and displayed as hexadecimal numbers. <b>SysFS Dir.</b> is the directory name in the /sys/bus/pci/drivers directory. If it is empty, the driver name is used as the directory name.</P>" -msgstr "<P>PCI ID numeriai įvesti ir rodomi šešioliktainiame formate. <b>SysFS apl.</b> yra katalogo, esančio /sys/bus/pci/drivers kataloge, pavadinimas. Jei jis tuščias, kaip katalogo pavadinimas naudojamas tvarkyklės pavadinimas.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>PCI ID numbers are entered and displayed as hexadecimal numbers. <b>SysFS " +"Dir.</b> is the directory name in the /sys/bus/pci/drivers directory. If it " +"is empty, the driver name is used as the directory name.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>PCI ID numeriai įvesti ir rodomi šešioliktainiame formate. <b>SysFS apl.<" +"/b> yra katalogo, esančio /sys/bus/pci/drivers kataloge, pavadinimas. Jei jis " +"tuščias, kaip katalogo pavadinimas naudojamas tvarkyklės pavadinimas.</P>" #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:419 -msgid "<P>If the driver is compiled into the kernel, leave the driver name empty and enter the SysFS directory name instead.</P>" -msgstr "<P>Jei tvarkyklė įkompiliuota branduolyje, jos pavadinimą palikite tuščią, o vietoj to įveskite SysFS katalogo pavadinimą.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>If the driver is compiled into the kernel, leave the driver name empty and " +"enter the SysFS directory name instead.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>Jei tvarkyklė įkompiliuota branduolyje, jos pavadinimą palikite tuščią, o " +"vietoj to įveskite SysFS katalogo pavadinimą.</P>" #. PCI ID help text, %1 stands for a button name (OK or Finish -- depends on the situation) #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:424 -msgid "<P>Use the buttons below the table to change the list of PCI IDs. Press <b>%1</b> to activate the settings.</P>" -msgstr "<P>PCI ID sąrašo pakeitimui naudokite mygtukus po lentele. Norėdami aktyvuoti nustatymus, spauskite <b>%1</b>.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P>Use the buttons below the table to change the list of PCI IDs. Press <b>%" +"1</b> to activate the settings.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P>PCI ID sąrašo pakeitimui naudokite mygtukus po lentele. Norėdami aktyvuoti " +"nustatymus, spauskite <b>%1</b>.</P>" #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:431 -msgid "<P><B>Warning:</B> This is an expert configuration. Only continue if you know what you are doing.</P>" -msgstr "<P><B>Įspėjimas:</B> Tai konfigūracija ekspertams. Tęskite tik tuomet, jei žinote, ką darote.</P>" +msgid "" +"<P><B>Warning:</B> This is an expert configuration. Only continue if you know " +"what you are doing.</P>" +msgstr "" +"<P><B>Įspėjimas:</B> Tai konfigūracija ekspertams. Tęskite tik tuomet, jei " +"žinote, ką darote.</P>" #. tree node string #: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:26 @@ -1062,15 +1105,19 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Global I/O Scheduler</big></b><br>\n" "Select the algorithm which orders and sends commands to disk\n" -"devices. This is a global option, it will be used for all disk devices in the\n" -"system. If the option is not configured, the default scheduler (usually 'cfq')\n" -"will be used. See the documentation in the /usr/src/linux/Documentation/block\n" +"devices. This is a global option, it will be used for all disk devices in " +"the\n" +"system. If the option is not configured, the default scheduler (usually " +"'cfq')\n" +"will be used. See the documentation in the " +"/usr/src/linux/Documentation/block\n" "directory (package kernel-source) for more information.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Globalus įvedimo/išvedimo tvarkaraštis</big></b><br>\n" "Galima pasirinkti algoritmą, kuris tvarko ir siunčia komandas į diskų\n" "įrenginius. Tai globali parinktis, sistemoje ji bus naudojama visiems diskų\n" -"įrenginiams. Jei parinktis nesukonfigūruota, naudojama (paprastai „cfq“) numatytoji\n" +"įrenginiams. Jei parinktis nesukonfigūruota, naudojama (paprastai „cfq“) " +"numatytoji\n" "tvarkaraščio parinktis. Daugiau informacijos rasite dokumentacijos kataloge\n" "/usr/src/linux/Documentation/block (pakete „kernel-source“).</p>\n" @@ -1083,15 +1130,19 @@ #: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_dialogs.rb:134 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Enable SysRq Keys</big></b><br>\n" -"If you enable SysRq keys, you will have some control over the system even if it\n" -"crashes (such as during kernel debugging). If it is enabled, the key combination\n" +"If you enable SysRq keys, you will have some control over the system even if " +"it\n" +"crashes (such as during kernel debugging). If it is enabled, the key " +"combination\n" "Alt-SysRq- will start the respective command (e.g. reboot the\n" "computer, dump kernel information). For further information, see\n" "<tt>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</tt> (package kernel-source).</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Įgalinti „SysRq“ klavišus</b><br>.\n" -"Jei įgalinsite SysRq klavišus, net sistemos pakibimo atveju galėsite kažkiek valdyti \n" -"programas (pvz., branduolio derinimo metu). Kai įgalinta, klavišų kombinacija\n" +"Jei įgalinsite SysRq klavišus, net sistemos pakibimo atveju galėsite kažkiek " +"valdyti \n" +"programas (pvz., branduolio derinimo metu). Kai įgalinta, klavišų " +"kombinacija\n" "Alt+SysRq+ paleis atitinkamą komandą (pvz., perkraus \n" "kompiuterį, parodys branduolio atminties išklotinę) Smulkiau žr. \n" "<tt>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</tt> (pakete „kernel-source“)</p>\n" @@ -1173,7 +1224,7 @@ #. the second %s is processor model name #: src/modules/InitHWinfo.rb:67 msgid "%sx %s" -msgstr "" +msgstr "%sx %s" #. list separator (placed between items) #: src/modules/InitHWinfo.rb:74 Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/update.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/update.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/update.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -19,7 +19,8 @@ "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. Proposal for backup during update #: src/clients/backup_proposal.rb:65 @@ -235,19 +236,23 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Only Installed Packages:</b> This selection\n" "only updates the packages already installed on your system. <i>Note:</i>\n" -"New software in the predefined software selection, such as new YaST modules, is\n" +"New software in the predefined software selection, such as new YaST modules, " +"is\n" "not available after the update. You might miss new features.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Tik įdiegtus paketus:</b> Šis pasirinkimas\n" "atnaujins tik jau įdiegtus paketus. <i>Pastaba:</i>\n" -"Naujos programos iš anksto nustatytame programų sąraše, pvz., nauji YaST moduliai,\n" -"nebus įdiegtos per atnaujinimą. Galite pasigesti kai kurių naujų savybių.</p>\n" +"Naujos programos iš anksto nustatytame programų sąraše, pvz., nauji YaST " +"moduliai,\n" +"nebus įdiegtos per atnaujinimą. Galite pasigesti kai kurių naujų savybių.</p>" +"\n" #. help text for dialog "update options" 4/4 #: src/clients/inst_update.rb:175 msgid "" "<p>After the update, some software might not\n" -"function anymore. Activate <b>Delete Unmaintained Packages</b> to delete those\n" +"function anymore. Activate <b>Delete Unmaintained Packages</b> to delete " +"those\n" "packages during the update.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Po atnaujinimo kai kurios programos gali nebeveikti.\n" @@ -313,8 +318,12 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: warning text, keep the HTML tags (<a href...>) untouched #: src/clients/packages_proposal.rb:154 -msgid "Cannot solve all conflicts. Manual intervention is required.</a>" -msgstr "Nepavyksta išspręsti visų konfliktų. Reikia spręsti jums.</a>" +#| msgid "Cannot solve all conflicts. Manual intervention is required." +msgid "" +"Cannot solve all conflicts. Manual intervention is required.<" +"/a>" +msgstr "" +"Nepavyksta išspręsti visų konfliktų. Reikia spręsti jums.</a>" #. this is a heading #: src/clients/packages_proposal.rb:198 @@ -373,25 +382,33 @@ #. error message in proposal #: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:129 -msgid "The installed product (%{update_from}) is not compatible with the product on the installation media (%{update_to})." -msgstr "Įdiegtas produktas (%{update_from}) nesuderinamas su produktu diegimo laikmenoje (%{update_to})." +#| msgid "The installed product is not compatible with the product on the installation media." +msgid "" +"The installed product (%{update_from}) is not compatible with the product on " +"the installation media (%{update_to})." +msgstr "" +"Įdiegtas produktas (%{update_from}) nesuderinamas su produktu diegimo " +"laikmenoje (%{update_to})." #. TRANSLATORS: proposal error, %1 is the version of installed system #. %2 is the version being installed #: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:146 msgid "" -"Updating system to another version (%1 -> %2) is not supported on the running system.<br>\n" +"Updating system to another version (%1 -> %2) is not supported on the running " +"system.<br>\n" "Boot from the installation media and use a normal upgrade\n" "or disable software repositories of products with different versions.\n" msgstr "" -"Sistemos naujovinamas į kitą versiją (%1 -> %2) nepalaikomas paleistoje sistemoje.<br>\n" +"Sistemos naujovinamas į kitą versiją (%1 -> %2) nepalaikomas paleistoje " +"sistemoje.<br>\n" "Paleiskite kompiuterį iš diegimo laikmenos ir naudokite įprastą naujovinimą\n" "arba uždrauskite skirtingų versijų programinės įrangos saugyklas.\n" #. TRANSLATORS: proposal warning, both %1 and %2 are replaced with product names #: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:167 msgid "Warning: Updating from '%1' to '%2', products do not exactly match." -msgstr "Įspėjimas: atnaujinant nuo „%1“ iki „%2“ produktai ne visiškai atitinka." +msgstr "" +"Įspėjimas: atnaujinant nuo „%1“ iki „%2“ produktai ne visiškai atitinka." #. Proposal for backup during update #: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:194 @@ -413,7 +430,8 @@ msgstr "" "<p><b><big>Atnaujinimo parinktys</big></b>\n" "Pasirinkite sistemos atnaujinimo būdą .\n" -"Pasirinkite, ar atnaujinti tik įdiegtus paketus, ar taip pat įdiegti ir naujus paketus \n" +"Pasirinkite, ar atnaujinti tik įdiegtus paketus, ar taip pat įdiegti ir " +"naujus paketus \n" "(tai numatytoji parinktis), ir ar pašalinti nepalaikomus paketus.</p>\n" #. this is a menu entry @@ -560,7 +578,8 @@ #. pop-up question #: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:394 msgid "" -"A possibly incomplete installation has been detected on the selected partition.\n" +"A possibly incomplete installation has been detected on the selected " +"partition.\n" "Are sure you want to use it anyway?" msgstr "" "Pasirinktame skaidinyje aptiktas galimai neužbaigtas diegimas.\n" @@ -680,7 +699,8 @@ #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1173 msgid "" "Your /boot partition is too small (%1 MB).\n" -"We recommend a size of no less than %2 MB or else the new Kernel may not fit.\n" +"We recommend a size of no less than %2 MB or else the new Kernel may not " +"fit.\n" "It is safer to either enlarge the partition\n" "or not use a /boot partition at all.\n" "\n" @@ -711,7 +731,8 @@ "\n" "Jei esate tikras, kad skaidinys nėra reikalingas \n" "atnaujinimui (tai ne sistemos skaidinys), spauskite „Tęsti“.\n" -"Norėdami patikrinti arba ištaisyti prijungimo nuostatas, spauskite „Nurodyti prijungimo parinktis“.\n" +"Norėdami patikrinti arba ištaisyti prijungimo nuostatas, spauskite „Nurodyti " +"prijungimo parinktis“.\n" "Norėdami nutraukti atnaujinimą, spauskite „Atšaukti“.\n" #. push button @@ -774,10 +795,12 @@ #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1470 msgid "" "Your system uses a separate /var partition which is required for the upgrade\n" -"process to detect the disk-naming changes. Select the /var partition manually\n" +"process to detect the disk-naming changes. Select the /var partition " +"manually\n" "to continue the upgrade process." msgstr "" -"Jūsų sistema naudoja atskirą /var skaidinį, kuris reikalingas naujovinimo eigai\n" +"Jūsų sistema naudoja atskirą /var skaidinį, kuris reikalingas naujovinimo " +"eigai\n" "disko pakeitimų aptikimui. Pasirinkite /var skaidinį rankiniu būdu,\n" "jei norite tęsti naujovinimą." @@ -812,12 +835,15 @@ #. Calling a script because otherwise this module would depend on yast2-country #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1705 msgid "" -"Some partitions in the system on %1 are mounted by kernel-device name. This is\n" +"Some partitions in the system on %1 are mounted by kernel-device name. This " +"is\n" "not reliable for the update since kernel-device names are unfortunately not\n" -"persistent. It is strongly recommended to start the old system and change the\n" +"persistent. It is strongly recommended to start the old system and change " +"the\n" "mount-by method to any other method for all partitions." msgstr "" -"Kai kurie %1 sistemos skaidiniai yra prijungti pagal branduolio įrenginio pavadinimą.\n" +"Kai kurie %1 sistemos skaidiniai yra prijungti pagal branduolio įrenginio " +"pavadinimą.\n" "Tai nėra patikima, nes gali pasikeisti branduolio įrenginio pavadinimas.\n" "Primygtinai siūlome paleisti seną sistemą ir pakeisti visų skaidinių \n" "prijungimo būdą kitu." @@ -830,7 +856,8 @@ #. message part 1 #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1748 msgid "The root partition in /etc/fstab has an invalid root device.\n" -msgstr "Rinkmenoje /etc/fstab nurodytas šakninis skaidinys turi neteisingą įrenginį.\n" +msgstr "" +"Rinkmenoje /etc/fstab nurodytas šakninis skaidinys turi neteisingą įrenginį.\n" #. message part 2 #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1753 @@ -860,10 +887,12 @@ #. @param [String] system base-directory, default is "/" #. @return [String] product name #: src/modules/SUSERelease.rb:65 +#| msgid "Specified profile not found." msgid "Release file %{file} not found" msgstr "Nerandame laidos rinkmenos %{file}" #: src/modules/SUSERelease.rb:74 +#| msgid "Cannot read license file %1" msgid "Cannot read release file %{file}" msgstr "Nepavyksta perskaityti laidos rinkmenos %{file}" @@ -885,6 +914,7 @@ "%{patterns}" #: src/modules/Update.rb:796 +#| msgid "Failed to select %1 packages for installation." msgid "" "Cannot select these packages required for installation:\n" "%{packages}" Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/users.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/users.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/users.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -10,15 +10,16 @@ "Project-Id-Version: users.lt\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2015-10-20 12:53+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2015-10-28 09:25+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Mindaugas Baranauskas \n" -"Language-Team: Lithuanian \n" +"Language-Team: Lithuanian \n" "Language: lt\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" #. translators: command line help text for Users module #: src/clients/groups.rb:100 @@ -99,8 +100,12 @@ #. translators: command line help text for 'user' option #: src/clients/groups.rb:218 -msgid "List of group members, usually usernames, separated by commas. The list of LDAP user DNs must be separated by colons." -msgstr "Sąrašas grupės narių (paprastai naudotojų vardų), atskirtų kableliais. LDAP naudotojų DN sąrašas turi būti atskirtas dvitaškiais." +msgid "" +"List of group members, usually usernames, separated by commas. The list of " +"LDAP user DNs must be separated by colons." +msgstr "" +"Sąrašas grupės narių (paprastai naudotojų vardų), atskirtų kableliais. LDAP " +"naudotojų DN sąrašas turi būti atskirtas dvitaškiais." #. translators: command line help text for new_groupname option #: src/clients/groups.rb:225 @@ -151,13 +156,25 @@ #. helptext 2/3 #. help text for dialog "User Authentication Method" 2/2 #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:125 src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:164 -msgid "<p>Select <b>Local</b> to authenticate users only by using the local files <i>/etc/passwd</i> and <i>/etc/shadow</i>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Rinkitės <b>Vietinis</b>, jei norite atpažinti naudotojus naudojant tik vietines rinkmenas <i>/etc/passwd</i> ir <i>/etc/shadow</i>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Select <b>Local</b> to authenticate users only by using the local files <i>" +"/etc/passwd</i> and <i>/etc/shadow</i>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Rinkitės <b>Vietinis</b>, jei norite atpažinti naudotojus naudojant tik " +"vietines rinkmenas <i>/etc/passwd</i> ir <i>/etc/shadow</i>.</p>" #. optional helptext 2.5/3 (local users continued) #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:133 -msgid "If you have a previous installation or alternative system, it is possible to create users based on this source. To do so, select <b>Read User Data from a Previous Installation</b>. This option uses an existing or creates a new home directory for each user in the location specified for this installation." -msgstr "Jei kompiuteryje yra anksčiau įdiegta ar tiesiog kita sistema, ja remiantis galima kurti naudotojus. Tai padarysite nuspaudę <b>Nuskaityti naudotojo duomenis iš ankstesnio diegimo</b>. Ši parinktis naudoja esamą namų katalogą arba gali sukurti naują kiekvienam naudotojui diegimo metu nurodytoje vietoje." +msgid "" +"If you have a previous installation or alternative system, it is possible to " +"create users based on this source. To do so, select <b>Read User Data from a " +"Previous Installation</b>. This option uses an existing or creates a new home " +"directory for each user in the location specified for this installation." +msgstr "" +"Jei kompiuteryje yra anksčiau įdiegta ar tiesiog kita sistema, ja remiantis " +"galima kurti naudotojus. Tai padarysite nuspaudę <b>Nuskaityti naudotojo " +"duomenis iš ankstesnio diegimo</b>. Ši parinktis naudoja esamą namų katalogą " +"arba gali sukurti naują kiekvienam naudotojui diegimo metu nurodytoje vietoje." #. radiobutton to select ldap user auth. #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:141 @@ -196,7 +213,8 @@ #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:185 msgid "" "<p>If you are using a NIS or LDAP server to store user data or if you want\n" -"to authenticate users against an NT server, choose the appropriate value. Then\n" +"to authenticate users against an NT server, choose the appropriate value. " +"Then\n" "press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of your client.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>Jei naudojate NIS arba LDAP serverį naudotojų duomenų saugojimui, arba\n" @@ -207,9 +225,11 @@ #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:195 msgid "" "<p>If you are using a NIS or LDAP server to store user data, choose the\n" -"appropriate value. Then press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of your client.</p>" +"appropriate value. Then press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of " +"your client.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Jei naudojate NIS arba LDAP serverį naudotojų duomenų saugojimui, pasirinkite atitinkamą reikšmę.\n" +"<p>Jei naudojate NIS arba LDAP serverį naudotojų duomenų saugojimui, " +"pasirinkite atitinkamą reikšmę.\n" "Tuomet tęskite savo kliento konfigūravimą spausdami <b>Toliau</b></p>" #. helptext 3/3 -- samba &ldap available @@ -227,15 +247,21 @@ #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:215 msgid "" "<p>If you are using an LDAP server to store user data, choose the\n" -"appropriate value. Then press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of your client.</p>" +"appropriate value. Then press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of " +"your client.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Jei naudojate LDAP serverį naudotojų duomenų saugojimui, pasirinkite atitinkamą reikšmę.\n" +"<p>Jei naudojate LDAP serverį naudotojų duomenų saugojimui, pasirinkite " +"atitinkamą reikšmę.\n" "Tuomet tęskite savo kliento konfigūravimą spausdami <b>Toliau</b></p>" #. helptext: additional kerberos support #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:225 -msgid "<p>Check <b>Set Up Kerberos Authentication</b> to configure Kerberos after configuring the user data source.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Check <b>Set Up Kerberos Authentication</b> to configure Kerberos after configuring the user data source.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Check <b>Set Up Kerberos Authentication</b> to configure Kerberos after " +"configuring the user data source.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Check <b>Set Up Kerberos Authentication</b> to configure Kerberos after " +"configuring the user data source.</p>" #. check box label #. check box label @@ -332,14 +358,17 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "Because the root user is equipped with extensive permissions, the password\n" -"for \"root\" should be chosen carefully. A combination of letters and numbers\n" +"for \"root\" should be chosen carefully. A combination of letters and " +"numbers\n" "is recommended. To ensure that the password was entered correctly,\n" "reenter it in a second field.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Kadangi root naudotojo teisės išplėstos, „root“ slaptažodis turi būti pasirinktas\n" -"labai atidžiai. Rekomenduojama raidžių ir skaičių kombinacija. Norint užtikrinti,\n" +"Kadangi root naudotojo teisės išplėstos, „root“ slaptažodis turi būti " +"pasirinktas\n" +"labai atidžiai. Rekomenduojama raidžių ir skaičių kombinacija. Norint " +"užtikrinti,\n" "kad slaptažodis įvestas teisingai, pakartokite procesą kitame laukelyje.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -350,13 +379,16 @@ "<p>\n" "All the rules for user passwords apply to the \"root\" password:\n" "Distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have at\n" -"least 5 characters and, as a rule, not contain any accented letters or umlauts.\n" +"least 5 characters and, as a rule, not contain any accented letters or " +"umlauts.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Visos taisyklės, galiojančios naudotojo slaptažodžiui, galioja ir „root“ slaptažodžiui:\n" +"Visos taisyklės, galiojančios naudotojo slaptažodžiui, galioja ir „root“ " +"slaptažodžiui:\n" "svarbios yra didžiosios ir mažosios raidės. Slaptažodis turi būti bent iš\n" -"5 simbolių ir, kaip taisyklė, neturėti specialiųjų simbolių (pvz. kirčiuotų raidžių arba umliautų).\n" +"5 simbolių ir, kaip taisyklė, neturėti specialiųjų simbolių (pvz. kirčiuotų " +"raidžių arba umliautų).\n" "</p>\n" #. help text, continued 5/5 @@ -383,8 +415,12 @@ #. help text for 'test keyboard layout' entry' #: src/clients/inst_root.rb:187 -msgid "<p>To check whether your current keyboard layout is correct, try entering text into the <b>Test Keyboard Layout</b> field.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Norėdami patikrinti, kokią klaviatūra naudojatės, pabandykite ką nors rašyti ties laukeliu <b>Išbandyti klaviatūros išdėstymą</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>To check whether your current keyboard layout is correct, try entering " +"text into the <b>Test Keyboard Layout</b> field.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Norėdami patikrinti, kokią klaviatūra naudojatės, pabandykite ką nors " +"rašyti ties laukeliu <b>Išbandyti klaviatūros išdėstymą</b>.</p>" #. report misspellings of the password #. report misspellings of the password @@ -525,6 +561,7 @@ #. help text for dialog "User Authentication Method" 1/2 #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:162 +#| msgid "<p><b>Login Settings</b></p>" msgid "<p><b>Authentication</b><br></p>" msgstr "<p><b>Prisijungimo nuostatos</b></p>" @@ -538,7 +575,9 @@ #. Help text for password expert dialog #. Help text for password expert dialog 4/5 #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:170 src/include/users/widgets.rb:491 -msgid "<p><b>SHA-512</b> is the current standard hash method. Using other algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purposes.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>SHA-512</b> is the current standard hash method. Using other algorithms " +"is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purposes.</p>" msgstr "" #. text entry @@ -627,7 +666,8 @@ #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:457 src/include/users/helps.rb:73 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"With the current password encryption (%1), the password length should be between\n" +"With the current password encryption (%1), the password length should be " +"between\n" " %2 and %3 characters.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -638,6 +678,9 @@ #. additional help text about password #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:467 +#| msgid "" +#| "<p>If you intend to use this password for creating certificates,\n" +#| "it has to be at least %1 characters long.</p>" msgid "" "<p>If you intend to use this password for creating certificates,\n" "it has to be at least %s characters long.</p>" @@ -663,23 +706,33 @@ #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:476 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"For the <b>Username</b> use only letters (no accented characters), digits, and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" -"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are doing.\n" +"For the <b>Username</b> use only letters (no accented characters), digits, " +"and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" +"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are " +"doing.\n" "Usernames have stricter restrictions than passwords. You can redefine the\n" "restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"<b>Prisijungimo vardui</b> vartokite tik raides (be diakritinių ženklų), skaičius, ir <tt>._-</tt>\n" +"<b>Prisijungimo vardui</b> vartokite tik raides (be diakritinių ženklų), " +"skaičius, ir <tt>._-</tt>\n" "Nevartokite didžiųjų raidžių, nebent tikrai žinote, ką darote.\n" -"Šie naudotojų vardai turi didesnius apribojimus nei slaptažodžiai. Apribojimus galite\n" -"keisti reikalavimus rinkmenoje /etc/login.defs. Daugiau informacijos jos „man“ puslapiuose.\n" +"Šie naudotojų vardai turi didesnius apribojimus nei slaptažodžiai. " +"Apribojimus galite\n" +"keisti reikalavimus rinkmenoje /etc/login.defs. Daugiau informacijos jos " +"„man“ puslapiuose.\n" "</p>\n" #. help text for main add user dialog #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:482 -msgid "<p>Check <b>Use this password for system administrator</b> if the same password as entered for the first user should be used for root.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Jei pirmajam naudotojui įvestą slaptažodį norite priskirti ir „root“ naudotojui, padėkite varnelę ties <b>kartu tai ir sistemos administratoriaus slaptažodis</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Check <b>Use this password for system administrator</b> if the same " +"password as entered for the first user should be used for root.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Jei pirmajam naudotojui įvestą slaptažodį norite priskirti ir „root“ " +"naudotojui, padėkite varnelę ties <b>kartu tai ir sistemos administratoriaus " +"slaptažodis</b>.</p>" #. help text for main add user dialog #. these are used only during installation time @@ -687,20 +740,27 @@ #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:485 src/include/users/helps.rb:259 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"The username and password created here are needed to log in and work with your Linux system. With <b>Automatic Login</b> enabled, the login procedure is skipped. This user is logged in automatically.</p>\n" +"The username and password created here are needed to log in and work with " +"your Linux system. With <b>Automatic Login</b> enabled, the login procedure " +"is skipped. This user is logged in automatically.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Čia sukuriami naudotojo vardas ir slaptažodis naudojami prisijungimui prie Linux sistemos. Jei įgalintas <b>automatinis prisijungimas</b>, nebus prašoma įvesti naudotojo vardo ir slaptažodžio. Šis naudotojas prisijungs automatiškai.</p>\n" +"Čia sukuriami naudotojo vardas ir slaptažodis naudojami prisijungimui prie " +"Linux sistemos. Jei įgalintas <b>automatinis prisijungimas</b>, nebus prašoma " +"įvesti naudotojo vardo ir slaptažodžio. Šis naudotojas prisijungs " +"automatiškai.</p>\n" #. help text for main add user dialog #. help text 5/7 (only during installation) #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:489 src/include/users/helps.rb:264 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Have mail for root forwarded to this user by checking <b>Receive System Mail</b>.</p>\n" +"Have mail for root forwarded to this user by checking <b>Receive System Mail<" +"/b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Šiam naudotojui bus persiųstas „root“ paštas, jei pažymėsite „Gauti sisteminį paštą“.</p>\n" +"Šiam naudotojui bus persiųstas „root“ paštas, jei pažymėsite „Gauti sisteminį " +"paštą“.</p>\n" #. Dialog for expert user settings: authentication method as well #. as password encryption (see fate 302980) @@ -716,11 +776,13 @@ #. summary label #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:628 +#| msgid "The password encryption method is %1." msgid "The password encryption method is %s." msgstr "Pasirinktas %s slaptažodžio šifravimo būdas." #. summary label, %s is a single user name or multiple usernames (comma separated) #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:635 +#| msgid "User %1 will be imported." msgid "User %s will be imported." msgid_plural "Users %s will be imported." msgstr[0] "Importuosimas %s naudotojas." @@ -740,6 +802,9 @@ #. yes/no popup question, %s is a number #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:709 +#| msgid "" +#| "If you intend to create certificates,\n" +#| "the password should have at least %1 characters." msgid "" "If you intend to create certificates,\n" "the password should have at least %s characters." @@ -877,10 +942,12 @@ #: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_all.rb:105 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Here, see the table of all allowed attributes for the current LDAP entry that were not set in previous dialogs.</p>" +"Here, see the table of all allowed attributes for the current LDAP entry that " +"were not set in previous dialogs.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Čia pažiūrėkite leidžiamų šiam LDAP naudotojui atributų, kurie nebuvo nustatyti ankstesniuose dialoguose, lentelę.</p>" +"Čia pažiūrėkite leidžiamų šiam LDAP naudotojui atributų, kurie nebuvo " +"nustatyti ankstesniuose dialoguose, lentelę.</p>" #. helptext 1/3 (don't translate objectclass"), #. %1 is list of values @@ -903,11 +970,14 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "Edit each attribute using <b>Edit</b>. Some attributes \n" -"could be required, as defined in the user template in the <b>LDAP Client Module</b>.</p>\n" +"could be required, as defined in the user template in the <b>LDAP Client " +"Module</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Paredaguokite kiekvieną atributą naudodami <b>Taisyti</b>. Kai kurie atributai \n" -"gali būti reikalingi, jei nustatyti naudotojo šablone <b>LDAP kliento modulyje</b>.</p>\n" +"Paredaguokite kiekvieną atributą naudodami <b>Taisyti</b>. Kai kurie " +"atributai \n" +"gali būti reikalingi, jei nustatyti naudotojo šablone <b>LDAP kliento " +"modulyje</b>.</p>\n" #. table header 1/2 #: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_all.rb:235 @@ -926,7 +996,10 @@ #. helptext #: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_passwordpolicy.rb:91 -msgid "<p>Assign a password policy object to this user in <b>DN of Password Policy object</b>. Activate <b>Reset Password</b> to reset the password of modified user.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Assign a password policy object to this user in <b>DN of Password Policy " +"object</b>. Activate <b>Reset Password</b> to reset the password of modified " +"user.</p>" msgstr "" #. check box label @@ -981,7 +1054,9 @@ #: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_shadowaccount.rb:171 #: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:865 msgid "Days after Password Expires with Usable &Login" -msgstr "Dienų skaičius, kai pasibaigus slaptažodžio galiojimui dar &leidžiama prisijungti" +msgstr "" +"Dienų skaičius, kai pasibaigus slaptažodžio galiojimui dar &leidžiama " +"prisijungti" #. intfield label #. intfield label @@ -1029,17 +1104,27 @@ #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:101 msgid "" "<p>Define a size limit by specifying the number of 1 KB blocks the\n" -"user may have on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode limit specifying the number of inodes the user may have on the file system.</p>\n" +"user may have on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode " +"limit specifying the number of inodes the user may have on the file system.<" +"/p>\n" msgstr "" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:105 -msgid "<p>You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. The soft limits define a warning level at which users are informed they are nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write requests are denied.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. " +"The soft limits define a warning level at which users are informed they are " +"nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write " +"requests are denied.</p>" msgstr "" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:109 -msgid "<p>As soon as the user has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the user is allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace interval starts immediately.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>As soon as the user has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the " +"grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the user is " +"allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace " +"interval starts immediately.</p>" msgstr "" #. helptext for quota @@ -1051,17 +1136,27 @@ #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:119 msgid "" "<p>Define a size limit by specifying the number of 1 kB blocks the\n" -"group may use on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode limit specifying the number of inodes the group may use on the file system.</p>\n" +"group may use on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode " +"limit specifying the number of inodes the group may use on the file system.<" +"/p>\n" msgstr "" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:123 -msgid "<p>You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. The soft limits define a warning level at which groups are informed they are nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write requests are denied.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. " +"The soft limits define a warning level at which groups are informed they are " +"nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write " +"requests are denied.</p>" msgstr "" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:127 -msgid "<p>As soon as the group has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the group is allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace interval starts immediately.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>As soon as the group has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the " +"grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the group is " +"allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace " +"interval starts immediately.</p>" msgstr "" #. combo box label @@ -1379,13 +1474,15 @@ "'%1' and '%2'\n" "were found. Use them for current user?\n" "\n" -"This means that data from this image will be used instead of current home directory." +"This means that data from this image will be used instead of current home " +"directory." msgstr "" "Rastas užšifruotas aplanko atvaizdis ir rakto rinkmena:\n" "„%1“ ir „%2“.\n" "Naudoti juos dabartiniam naudotojui?\n" "\n" -"Tai reiškia, kad vietoj namų aplanko bus naudojami šiame atvaizdyje esantys duomenys." +"Tai reiškia, kad vietoj namų aplanko bus naudojami šiame atvaizdyje esantys " +"duomenys." #. popup label, %1 is path to directory #: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:369 @@ -1414,7 +1511,8 @@ #. label text #: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:422 msgid "For remote users, only additional group memberships can be changed." -msgstr "Nuotoliniams naudotojams gali būti pakeista tik narystė papildomose grupėse." +msgstr "" +"Nuotoliniams naudotojams gali būti pakeista tik narystė papildomose grupėse." #. checkbox label #: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:456 @@ -1702,7 +1800,8 @@ "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Čia nurodykite reikšmes, priskirsiamas naujai kuriamiems vietiniams ar sisteminiams naudotojams.\n" +"Čia nurodykite reikšmes, priskirsiamas naujai kuriamiems vietiniams ar " +"sisteminiams naudotojams.\n" "</p>\n" #. Help text 1/6 @@ -1735,32 +1834,39 @@ #: src/include/users/helps.rb:123 msgid "" "<p><b>Default Login Shell</b><br>\n" -"The name of the new user's login shell. Select one from the list or enter your own path to the shell.</P>\n" +"The name of the new user's login shell. Select one from the list or enter " +"your own path to the shell.</P>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Numatytasis prisijungimo apvalkalas:</b><br>\n" -"Tai naujo naudotojo prisijungimo apvalkalo pavadinimas. Pasirinkite iš sąrašo arba įveskite kelią iki apvalkalo.</p>\n" +"Tai naujo naudotojo prisijungimo apvalkalo pavadinimas. Pasirinkite iš sąrašo " +"arba įveskite kelią iki apvalkalo.</p>\n" #. Help text 3/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:127 msgid "" "<p><b>Default Home</b><br>\n" -"The initial path prefix for a new user's home directory. The username is added\n" +"The initial path prefix for a new user's home directory. The username is " +"added\n" "to the end of this value to create the default name of the home directory.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Numatytieji namai</b><br>\n" -"Naujo naudotojo namų katalogo pradinio kelio prefiksas. Naudotojo vardas bus pridėtas\n" -"prie šios reikšmės pabaigos ir bus sukurtas įprastas naudotojo namų katalogo pavadinimas.\n" +"Naujo naudotojo namų katalogo pradinio kelio prefiksas. Naudotojo vardas bus " +"pridėtas\n" +"prie šios reikšmės pabaigos ir bus sukurtas įprastas naudotojo namų katalogo " +"pavadinimas.\n" "</p>\n" #. Help text 4/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:134 msgid "" "<p><b>Skeleton Directory</b><br>\n" -"The contents of this directory are copied to a user's home directory when a new user is added. </p>\n" +"The contents of this directory are copied to a user's home directory when a " +"new user is added. </p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Ruošinio katalogas</b><br>\n" -"Sukūrus naują naudotoją, ruošinio katalogo turinys bus nukopijuotas į to naudotojo namų katalogą. </p>\n" +"Sukūrus naują naudotoją, ruošinio katalogo turinys bus nukopijuotas į to " +"naudotojo namų katalogą. </p>\n" #. Help text 4.5/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:138 @@ -1776,7 +1882,8 @@ #: src/include/users/helps.rb:143 msgid "" "<p><b>Expiration Date</b><br>\n" -"The date on which the user account is disabled. The date must be in the format\n" +"The date on which the user account is disabled. The date must be in the " +"format\n" "YYYY-MM-DD. Leave it empty if this account never expires.</P>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Galiojimo pabaiga</b><br>\n" @@ -1792,8 +1899,10 @@ "</P>\n" msgstr "" "<P><B>Dienos pasibaigus slaptažodžio galiojimui</B><BR>\n" -"Naudotojai gali prisijungti ir pasibaigus slaptažodžių galiojimui. Nustatykite, kiek dienų \n" -"po galiojimo pabaigos leidžiama prisijungti. Nustatykite -1 neribotai prieigai.\n" +"Naudotojai gali prisijungti ir pasibaigus slaptažodžių galiojimui. " +"Nustatykite, kiek dienų \n" +"po galiojimo pabaigos leidžiama prisijungti. Nustatykite -1 neribotai " +"prieigai.\n" "</P>\n" #. For translators: read dialog help, part 1 of 2 @@ -1866,7 +1975,8 @@ "Create the <b>Username</b> from components of the full name by\n" "clicking <b>Suggestion</b>. It may be modified, but use only\n" "letters (no accented characters), digits, and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" -"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are doing.\n" +"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are " +"doing.\n" "Usernames have stricter restrictions than passwords. You can redefine the\n" "restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -1876,8 +1986,10 @@ "mygtuką <b>Pasiūlymas</b>. Jį galėsite pakeisti, tačiau naudokite tik raides\n" "(be diakritinių ženklų), skaičius, ir <tt>._-</tt>\n" "Nevartokite didžiųjų raidžių, nebent tikrai žinote ką darote.\n" -"Šie prisijungimo vardai turi griežtesnius apribojimus nei slaptažodžiai. Apribojimus\n" -"galite keisti rinkmenoje /etc/login.defs. Daugiau informacijos rasite jos „man“ puslapiuose.\n" +"Šie prisijungimo vardai turi griežtesnius apribojimus nei slaptažodžiai. " +"Apribojimus\n" +"galite keisti rinkmenoje /etc/login.defs. Daugiau informacijos rasite jos " +"„man“ puslapiuose.\n" "</p>\n" #. alternative help text 2/7 @@ -1886,23 +1998,31 @@ "<p>\n" "For the <b>Username</b>, use only\n" "letters (no accented characters), digits, and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" -"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are doing.\n" +"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are " +"doing.\n" "Usernames have stricter restrictions than passwords. You can redefine the\n" -"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" +"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for " +"information.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "<b>Prisijungimo vardui</b> vartokite tik raides\n" "(be diakritinių ženklų), skaičius, ir <tt>._-</tt>\n" "Nevartokite didžiųjų raidžių, nebent tikrai žinote, ką darote.\n" -"Šie naudotojų vardai turi didesnius apribojimus nei slaptažodžiai. Apribojimus galite\n" -"keisti reikalavimus rinkmenoje /etc/login.defs. Daugiau informacijos jos „man“ puslapiuose.\n" +"Šie naudotojų vardai turi didesnius apribojimus nei slaptažodžiai. " +"Apribojimus galite\n" +"keisti reikalavimus rinkmenoje /etc/login.defs. Daugiau informacijos jos " +"„man“ puslapiuose.\n" "</p>\n" #. help text 6/7 (only during installation) #: src/include/users/helps.rb:269 -msgid "<p>Press <b>User Management</b> to add more users or groups to your system.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Spauskite <b>Naudotojų valdymas</b> norėdami pridėti grupes ar naudotojus į savo sistemą.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Press <b>User Management</b> to add more users or groups to your system.<" +"/p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Spauskite <b>Naudotojų valdymas</b> norėdami pridėti grupes ar naudotojus " +"į savo sistemą.</p>" #. alternative help text 4/7 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:278 @@ -1921,10 +2041,12 @@ #: src/include/users/helps.rb:286 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"To edit various password settings of this user, such as expiration date, click <b>Password Settings</b>.</p>\n" +"To edit various password settings of this user, such as expiration date, " +"click <b>Password Settings</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Norėdami pakeisti įvairias naudotojo slaptažodžio parinktis (pvz., pasibaigimo datą), rinkitės <b>Slaptažodžio nuostatas</b>.</p>\n" +"Norėdami pakeisti įvairias naudotojo slaptažodžio parinktis (pvz., " +"pasibaigimo datą), rinkitės <b>Slaptažodžio nuostatas</b>.</p>\n" #. help text 7/7 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:296 @@ -1989,7 +2111,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b>Password:</b>\n" -"To require users who are not members of the group to identify themselves when\n" +"To require users who are not members of the group to identify themselves " +"when\n" "switching to this group (see the man page of <tt>newgrp</tt>), assign a\n" "password to this group. For security reasons, this password is not shown\n" "here. This entry is not required.\n" @@ -2079,7 +2202,8 @@ msgstr "" "<p>\n" "Jei keičiate egzistuojančio naudotojo UID, turi būti pakeistos to naudotojo\n" -"rinkmenų teisės. Tai bus automatiškai atlikta rinkmenoms, esančioms naudotojo\n" +"rinkmenų teisės. Tai bus automatiškai atlikta rinkmenoms, esančioms " +"naudotojo\n" "namų kataloge, tačiau ne rinkmenoms, esančioms \n" "kitose vietose.</p>\n" @@ -2102,8 +2226,12 @@ #. help text for user's home directory mode #: src/include/users/helps.rb:430 -msgid "<p>Optionally, set the <b>Home Directory Permission Mode</b> for this user's home directory different from the default.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pasirinktinai galite nurodyti, kaip šio naudotojo <b>namų katalogo leidimų veiksena</b> skirsis nuo numatytosios.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Optionally, set the <b>Home Directory Permission Mode</b> for this user's " +"home directory different from the default.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pasirinktinai galite nurodyti, kaip šio naudotojo <b>namų katalogo leidimų " +"veiksena</b> skirsis nuo numatytosios.</p>" #. alternate helptext 4.5/8; %1 is directory (e.g. '/etc/skel') #: src/include/users/helps.rb:440 @@ -2118,8 +2246,15 @@ #. help text for Move to new location checkbox #: src/include/users/helps.rb:452 -msgid "<p>If changing the location of a user's home directory, move the contents of the current directory with <b>Move to New Location</b>, activated by default. Otherwise a new home directory is created without any of the existing data.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Keičiant naudotojo namų katalogo vietą, numatyta parinktis yra <b>Perkelti į naują vietą</b>. Antraip naujas namų katalogas būtų sukurtas visiškai tuščias.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>If changing the location of a user's home directory, move the contents of " +"the current directory with <b>Move to New Location</b>, activated by default. " +"Otherwise a new home directory is created without any of the existing data.<" +"/p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Keičiant naudotojo namų katalogo vietą, numatyta parinktis yra <b>Perkelti " +"į naują vietą</b>. Antraip naujas namų katalogas būtų sukurtas visiškai " +"tuščias.</p>" #. help text for directory encryption #: src/include/users/helps.rb:464 @@ -2128,18 +2263,31 @@ "Directory</b> and set the directory size. Encrypting a user's home directory\n" "does not provide strong security from other users. If this machine is shared\n" "among multiple users, it may be possible for a user to compromise system\n" -"security by obtaining another user's key and gaining access to the encrypted data. If strong security is required, the system should not be physically shared.</p>" +"security by obtaining another user's key and gaining access to the encrypted " +"data. If strong security is required, the system should not be physically " +"shared.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Norėdami užšifruoti namų katalogą, įgalinkite <b>Naudoti šifruotą namų katalogą</b> \n" -"ir nurodykite katalogo dydį. Namų katalogo užšifravimas nesuteiks geros apsaugos \n" -"nuo kitų naudotojų. Jei šiuo kompiuteriu naudojasi daugybė naudotojų, įmanoma, \n" -"kad naudotojas sukompromituos sistemos saugumą, gaus kito naudotojo raktą ir \n" -"prieis prie užšifruotų duomenų. Jei norite geros apsaugos, nesidalinkite kompiuteriu fiziškai.</p>" +"<p>Norėdami užšifruoti namų katalogą, įgalinkite <b>Naudoti šifruotą namų " +"katalogą</b> \n" +"ir nurodykite katalogo dydį. Namų katalogo užšifravimas nesuteiks geros " +"apsaugos \n" +"nuo kitų naudotojų. Jei šiuo kompiuteriu naudojasi daugybė naudotojų, " +"įmanoma, \n" +"kad naudotojas sukompromituos sistemos saugumą, gaus kito naudotojo raktą ir " +"\n" +"prieis prie užšifruotų duomenų. Jei norite geros apsaugos, nesidalinkite " +"kompiuteriu fiziškai.</p>" #. help text for directory encryption #: src/include/users/helps.rb:476 -msgid "<p>Home directories cannot be encrypted if a fingerprint reader device is used. To encrypt the user's home directory, disable fingerprint configuration first.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Namų katalogo negalima užšifruoti, jei naudojamas pirštų antspaudų skaitytuvas. Prieš užšifruodami naudotojo namų katalogą, uždrauskite pirštų antspaudų skaitytuvo naudojimą.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Home directories cannot be encrypted if a fingerprint reader device is " +"used. To encrypt the user's home directory, disable fingerprint configuration " +"first.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Namų katalogo negalima užšifruoti, jei naudojamas pirštų antspaudų " +"skaitytuvas. Prieš užšifruodami naudotojo namų katalogą, uždrauskite pirštų " +"antspaudų skaitytuvo naudojimą.</p>" #. alternate helptext 5/8 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:487 @@ -2162,9 +2310,11 @@ "shown when you use the <i>finger</i> command on this user.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Papildoma informacija</b>\n" -"Čia gali būti konfigūruojami kai kurie papildomi naudotojo duomenys. Šie laukeliai\n" +"Čia gali būti konfigūruojami kai kurie papildomi naudotojo duomenys. Šie " +"laukeliai\n" "gali turėti iki trijų dalių, atskirtų kableliais. Paprastai įrašomas\n" -"<i>darbovietė</i>,<i>darbo telefonas</i>,<i>namų telefonas</i>. Ši informacija\n" +"<i>darbovietė</i>,<i>darbo telefonas</i>,<i>namų telefonas</i>. Ši " +"informacija\n" "bus parodyta panaudojus <i>finger</i> komandą.</p>\n" #. help text 6/8 @@ -2232,8 +2382,12 @@ #. helptext for plugin dialog 3/3 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:552 -msgid "<p>Start the detailed configuration of a particular plug-in by selecting <b>Launch</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Nuspaudę <b>paleisti</b> pradėsite atitinkamo papildinio detalų konfigūravimą.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Start the detailed configuration of a particular plug-in by selecting <b>" +"Launch</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Nuspaudę <b>paleisti</b> pradėsite atitinkamo papildinio detalų " +"konfigūravimą.</p>" #. help texts 1/1 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:562 @@ -2255,7 +2409,8 @@ msgstr "" "<p>Pažymėjus <b>priverstinį slaptažodžio keitimas</b>, \n" "sekančio prisijungimo metu naudotojas privalės pasikeisti savo slaptažodį. \n" -"Jei slaptažodis <i>niekada</i> <b>nebuvo keistas</b>naudotojas turės pakeisti slaptažodį.</p>" +"Jei slaptažodis <i>niekada</i> <b>nebuvo keistas</b>naudotojas turės pakeisti " +"slaptažodį.</p>" #. Help text 2/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:579 @@ -2282,27 +2437,34 @@ "allow login. Use -1 for unlimited access.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" -"<P><B>Dienų skaičius, kai pasibaigus slaptažodžio galiojimui dar leidžiama prisijungti</B><BR>\n" -"Naudotojai gali prisijungti net pasibaigus slaptažodžių galiojimui. Nurodykite, kiek dienų \n" -"po galiojimo pabaigos leidžiama prisijungti. Neribotai prieigai įrašykite -1.\n" +"<P><B>Dienų skaičius, kai pasibaigus slaptažodžio galiojimui dar leidžiama " +"prisijungti</B><BR>\n" +"Naudotojai gali prisijungti net pasibaigus slaptažodžių galiojimui. " +"Nurodykite, kiek dienų \n" +"po galiojimo pabaigos leidžiama prisijungti. Neribotai prieigai įrašykite " +"-1.\n" "</P>\n" #. Help text 4/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:595 msgid "" -"<P><B>Maximum Number of Days for the Same Password</B><BR>Set how many days a user \n" +"<P><B>Maximum Number of Days for the Same Password</B><BR>Set how many days a " +"user \n" "can use the same password before it expires.</P>\n" msgstr "" -"<P><B>Didžiausia trukmė tam pačiam slaptažodžiui, dienomis</B><BR> Nurodykite, kiek\n" +"<P><B>Didžiausia trukmė tam pačiam slaptažodžiui, dienomis</B><BR> " +"Nurodykite, kiek\n" "daugiausia laiko naudotojas gali naudoti tą patį slaptažodį.</P>\n" #. Help text 5/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:599 msgid "" -"<P><B>Minimum Number of Days for the Same Password</B><BR>Set the minimum age of \n" +"<P><B>Minimum Number of Days for the Same Password</B><BR>Set the minimum age " +"of \n" "a password before a user is allowed to change it.</P>\n" msgstr "" -"<P><B>Mažiausia trukmė tam pačiam slaptažodžiui, dienomis</B><BR>Nurodykite kiek laiko\n" +"<P><B>Mažiausia trukmė tam pačiam slaptažodžiui, dienomis</B><BR>Nurodykite " +"kiek laiko\n" "mažiausiai turi praeiti, kad naudotojas galėtų pakeisti slaptažodį.</P>\n" #. Help text 6/6 : Don't reorder letters YYYY-MM-DD, date must be set in this format @@ -2312,7 +2474,8 @@ "The date must be in the format YYYY-MM-DD. \n" "Leave it empty if this account never expires.</P>\n" msgstr "" -"<P><B>Galiojimo pabaiga</B><BR>Nustatykite datą, kuomet baigiasi paskyros galiojimas.\n" +"<P><B>Galiojimo pabaiga</B><BR>Nustatykite datą, kuomet baigiasi paskyros " +"galiojimas.\n" "Datos formatas turi būti YYYY-MM-DD. \n" "Neužpildykite laukelio, jei ši paskyra galios visada.</P>\n" @@ -2336,58 +2499,105 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b>Changing the Values</b><br>\n" -"You can configure these settings by running appropriate modules. Select the module with <b>Configure</b>.\n" +"You can configure these settings by running appropriate modules. Select the " +"module with <b>Configure</b>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "<b>Reikšmių keitimas</b><br>\n" -"Šias nuostatas galite keisti paleidę atitinkamus modulius. Modulį rinkitės mygtuku <b>Konfigūruoti</b>.\n" +"Šias nuostatas galite keisti paleidę atitinkamus modulius. Modulį rinkitės " +"mygtuku <b>Konfigūruoti</b>.\n" "</p>\n" #. help text for Password Policy Dialog #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:62 -msgid "<p>Select the <b>Password Change Policies</b>, <b>Password Aging Policies</b>, and <b>Lockout Policies</b> tabs to choose LDAP password policy groups of attributes to configure.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Kortelėse <b>Slaptažodžių keitimo taisyklės</b>, <b>Slaptažodžių amžiaus taisyklės</b> ir <b>Blokavimo taisyklės</b> galite konfigūruoti atributus, priklausančius skirtingoms LDAP slaptažodžių taisyklių grupėms.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Select the <b>Password Change Policies</b>, <b>Password Aging Policies</b>" +", and <b>Lockout Policies</b> tabs to choose LDAP password policy groups of " +"attributes to configure.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Kortelėse <b>Slaptažodžių keitimo taisyklės</b>, <b>Slaptažodžių amžiaus " +"taisyklės</b> ir <b>Blokavimo taisyklės</b> galite konfigūruoti atributus, " +"priklausančius skirtingoms LDAP slaptažodžių taisyklių grupėms.</p>" #. help text for pwdInHistory attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:70 -msgid "<p>Specify the <b>Maximum Number of Passwords Stored in History</b> to set how many previously used passwords should be saved. Saved passwords may not be used.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Didžiausias istorijoje saugomų slaptažodžių kiekis</b> nurodo, kiek anksčiau naudotų slaptažodžių derėtų įsiminti. Įsimintų slaptažodžių nebeleidžiama naudoti.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Specify the <b>Maximum Number of Passwords Stored in History</b> to set " +"how many previously used passwords should be saved. Saved passwords may not " +"be used.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Didžiausias istorijoje saugomų slaptažodžių kiekis</b> nurodo, kiek " +"anksčiau naudotų slaptažodžių derėtų įsiminti. Įsimintų slaptažodžių " +"nebeleidžiama naudoti.</p>" #. help text for pwdMustChange attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:74 -msgid "<p>Check <b>User Must Change Password after Reset</b> to force users to change their passwords after the the password is reset or changed by an administrator.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Jei naudotojai turėtų pasikeisti savo slaptažodžius po to, kai jų slaptažodžius iš naujo nustato ar pakeičia administratorius,pažymėkite <b>Naudotojai privalo pasikeisti slaptažodį</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Check <b>User Must Change Password after Reset</b> to force users to " +"change their passwords after the the password is reset or changed by an " +"administrator.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Jei naudotojai turėtų pasikeisti savo slaptažodžius po to, kai jų " +"slaptažodžius iš naujo nustato ar pakeičia administratorius,pažymėkite <b>" +"Naudotojai privalo pasikeisti slaptažodį</b>.</p>" #. help text for pwdAllowUserChange attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:78 -msgid "<p>Check <b>User Can Change Password</b> to allow users to change their passwords.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Jei naudotojams turėtų būti leidžiama pasikeisti savo slaptažodžius, pažymėkite <b>Naudotojai gali pasikeisti slaptažodį</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Check <b>User Can Change Password</b> to allow users to change their " +"passwords.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Jei naudotojams turėtų būti leidžiama pasikeisti savo slaptažodžius, " +"pažymėkite <b>Naudotojai gali pasikeisti slaptažodį</b>.</p>" #. help text for pwdSafeModify attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:82 -msgid "<p>If the existing password must be provided along with the new password, check <b>Old Password Required for Password Change</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Jei su nauju slaptažodžiu reikia pateikti ir senąjį, pažymėkite <b>Slaptažodžio pakeitimui reikia seno slaptažodžio</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>If the existing password must be provided along with the new password, " +"check <b>Old Password Required for Password Change</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Jei su nauju slaptažodžiu reikia pateikti ir senąjį, pažymėkite <b>" +"Slaptažodžio pakeitimui reikia seno slaptažodžio</b>.</p>" #. help text for pwdCheckQuality attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:86 -msgid "<p>Select whether the password quality should be verified while passwords are modified or added. Select <b>No Checking</b> if passwords should not be checked at all. With <b>Accept Uncheckable Passwords</b>, passwords are accepted even if the check cannot be performed, for example, if the user has provided an encrypted password. With <b>Only Accept Checked Passwords</b> passwords are refused if the quality test fails or the password cannot be checked.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Select whether the password quality should be verified while passwords are " +"modified or added. Select <b>No Checking</b> if passwords should not be " +"checked at all. With <b>Accept Uncheckable Passwords</b>, passwords are " +"accepted even if the check cannot be performed, for example, if the user has " +"provided an encrypted password. With <b>Only Accept Checked Passwords</b> " +"passwords are refused if the quality test fails or the password cannot be " +"checked.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for pwdMinLength attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:90 -msgid "Set the minimum number of characters that must be used in a password in <b>Minimum Password Length</b>.</p>" -msgstr "Nurodykite mažiausią simbolių skaičių, kuris gali sudaryti slaptažodį, ties <b>Mažiausiasis slaptažodžio ilgis</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"Set the minimum number of characters that must be used in a password in <b>" +"Minimum Password Length</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"Nurodykite mažiausią simbolių skaičių, kuris gali sudaryti slaptažodį, ties <" +"b>Mažiausiasis slaptažodžio ilgis</b>.</p>" #. help text for pwdMinAge attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:94 -msgid "<p><b>Minimum Password Age</b> sets how much time must pass between modifications to the password.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Mažiausias slaptažodžio amžius</b> nurodo mažiausią laiką, kuris kuri praeiti, kad būtų galima vėl keisti slaptažodį.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Minimum Password Age</b> sets how much time must pass between " +"modifications to the password.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Mažiausias slaptažodžio amžius</b> nurodo mažiausią laiką, kuris kuri " +"praeiti, kad būtų galima vėl keisti slaptažodį.</p>" #. help text for pwdMaxAge attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:98 -msgid "<p><b>Maximum Password Age</b> sets how long after modification a password expires.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Didžiausias slaptažodžio amžius</b> po kurio laiko nustoja galioja slaptažodis.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Maximum Password Age</b> sets how long after modification a password " +"expires.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Didžiausias slaptažodžio amžius</b> po kurio laiko nustoja galioja " +"slaptažodis.</p>" #. help text for pwdExpireWarning attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:102 @@ -2399,7 +2609,10 @@ #| "how long before expiration the warning should be issued. Set -1 to disable\n" #| "the warning. \n" #| "</p>\n" -msgid "<p>In <b>Time before Password Expiration to Issue Warning</b> set how long before a password is due to expire that an expiration warning messages should be given to an authenticating user.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>In <b>Time before Password Expiration to Issue Warning</b> set how long " +"before a password is due to expire that an expiration warning messages should " +"be given to an authenticating user.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "<b>Dienos iki įspėjimo apie slaptažodžio keitimą</B><BR>\n" @@ -2410,29 +2623,49 @@ #. help text for pwdGraceAuthNLimit attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:106 -msgid "<p>Set the number of times an expired password can be used to authenticate in <b>Allowed Uses of an Expired Password</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Nurodykite, kiek kartų leidžiama panaudoti nebegaliojantį slaptažodį ties <b>Nebegaliojantį slaptažodį naudoti keletą kartų</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Set the number of times an expired password can be used to authenticate in " +"<b>Allowed Uses of an Expired Password</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Nurodykite, kiek kartų leidžiama panaudoti nebegaliojantį slaptažodį ties " +"<b>Nebegaliojantį slaptažodį naudoti keletą kartų</b>.</p>" #. help text for pwdLockout attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:110 -msgid "<p>Check <b>Enable Password Locking</b> to forbid use of a password after a specified number of consecutive failed bind attempts.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pažymėkite <b>Įgalinti slaptažodžio blokavimą</b>, jei norite neleisti panaudoti slaptažodžio po tam tikro nesėkmingų iš eilės bandymų skaičiaus.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Check <b>Enable Password Locking</b> to forbid use of a password after a " +"specified number of consecutive failed bind attempts.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pažymėkite <b>Įgalinti slaptažodžio blokavimą</b>, jei norite neleisti " +"panaudoti slaptažodžio po tam tikro nesėkmingų iš eilės bandymų skaičiaus.</p>" #. help text for pwdMaxFailure attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:114 #, fuzzy #| msgid "<p>Set the number of times an expired password can be used to authenticate in <b>Allowed Uses of an Expired Password</b>.</p>" -msgid "<p>Set the number of consecutive failed bind attempts after which the password may not be used to authenticate in <b>Bind Failures to Lock the Password</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Nurodykite, kiek kartų leidžiama panaudoti nebegaliojantį slaptažodį ties <b>Nebegaliojantį slaptažodį naudoti keletą kartų</b>.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Set the number of consecutive failed bind attempts after which the " +"password may not be used to authenticate in <b>Bind Failures to Lock the " +"Password</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Nurodykite, kiek kartų leidžiama panaudoti nebegaliojantį slaptažodį ties " +"<b>Nebegaliojantį slaptažodį naudoti keletą kartų</b>.</p>" #. help text for pwdLockoutDuration attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:118 -msgid "<p>Set how long the password cannot be used in <b>Password Lock Duration</b>.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Ties <b>Slaptažodžio blokavimo trukme</b> nurodykite laiką, per kurį slaptažodžio naudoti negalima.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Set how long the password cannot be used in <b>Password Lock Duration</b>" +".</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Ties <b>Slaptažodžio blokavimo trukme</b> nurodykite laiką, per kurį " +"slaptažodžio naudoti negalima.</p>" #. help text for pwdFailureCountInterval attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:122 -msgid "<p><b>Bind Failures Cache Duration</b> sets how long before password failures are purged from the failure counter even though no successful authentication has occurred.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Bind Failures Cache Duration</b> sets how long before password failures " +"are purged from the failure counter even though no successful authentication " +"has occurred.</p>" msgstr "" #. tab label @@ -2560,7 +2793,8 @@ "user home directories.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Jei naudotojų LDAP namų katalogai turėtų būti laikomi\n" -"šiame kompiuteryje. Šios reikšmės pakeitimas nesukelia jokio tiesioginio veiksmo.\n" +"šiame kompiuteryje. Šios reikšmės pakeitimas nesukelia jokio tiesioginio " +"veiksmo.\n" "Tai yra tik informacija YaST naudotojų moduliui, kuris gali tvarkyti\n" "naudotojų namų katalogus.</p>\n" @@ -2569,11 +2803,13 @@ #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:675 msgid "" "<p>Press <b>Configure</b> to configure settings stored on the\n" -"LDAP server. You will be asked for the password if you are not connected yet or\n" +"LDAP server. You will be asked for the password if you are not connected yet " +"or\n" "have changed your configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Spauskite <b>Konfigūruoti</b>, norėdami konfigūruoti nuostatas,\n" -"saugomas LDAP serveryje. Jei nebuvote prisijungęs arba pakeitėte savo konfigūraciją,\n" +"saugomas LDAP serveryje. Jei nebuvote prisijungęs arba pakeitėte savo " +"konfigūraciją,\n" "reikės įvesti slaptažodį.</p>\n" #. password policy help text caption @@ -2584,7 +2820,8 @@ #. password policy help #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:683 msgid "" -"<p>Configure the selected password policy with <b>Edit</b>. Use <b>Add</b> to add a new password policy. The configuration is only possible,\n" +"<p>Configure the selected password policy with <b>Edit</b>. Use <b>Add</b> to " +"add a new password policy. The configuration is only possible,\n" " if the password policies are already enabled on the LDAP server.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -2845,7 +3082,8 @@ #. intfield #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:420 msgid "Days &after Password Expiration Login Is Usable" -msgstr "&Dienų skaičius, kai pasibaigus slaptažodžio galiojimui dar galima prisijungti" +msgstr "" +"&Dienų skaičius, kai pasibaigus slaptažodžio galiojimui dar galima prisijungti" #. menu button label #. menu button label @@ -2869,7 +3107,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "Choose a password encryption method for local and system users.\n" -"<b>DES</b>, the Linux default method, works in all network environments, but it\n" +"<b>DES</b>, the Linux default method, works in all network environments, but " +"it\n" "restricts passwords to eight characters or less.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2888,7 +3127,8 @@ "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"<b>MD5</b> leidžia ilgesnius slaptažodžius, kas yra saugiau, tačiau kai kurie\n" +"<b>MD5</b> leidžia ilgesnius slaptažodžius, kas yra saugiau, tačiau kai " +"kurie\n" "tinklo protokolai jų nepalaiko ir jūs galite turėti problemų su NIS.\n" "</p>" @@ -2946,17 +3186,23 @@ #. helptext 2/4 #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:730 -msgid "<p>Here, extend the search filters for users and groups beyond the default search filters.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Čia praplėskite paieškos filtrus naudotojams ir grupėms be įprastų paieškos filtrų.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>Here, extend the search filters for users and groups beyond the default " +"search filters.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Čia praplėskite paieškos filtrus naudotojams ir grupėms be įprastų " +"paieškos filtrų.</p>" #. helptext 3/4 #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:734 msgid "" "<p>With <b>Default</b>, load the default filter from the user and group\n" -"configuration modules saved on the LDAP server (values of 'suseSearchFilter' attributes).\n" +"configuration modules saved on the LDAP server (values of 'suseSearchFilter' " +"attributes).\n" "If you are not connected yet, you are prompted for the password.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p>Su <b>Įprasta</b>, įkelkite įprastą filtrą iš naudotojų ir grupių konfigūravimo\n" +"<p>Su <b>Įprasta</b>, įkelkite įprastą filtrą iš naudotojų ir grupių " +"konfigūravimo\n" "modulių, išsaugotų LDAP serveryje („suseSearchFilter“ atributų reikšmės)\n" "Jei jūs dar neprisijungęs, reikės įvesti slaptažodį.</p>\n" @@ -3055,37 +3301,44 @@ #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:969 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"The features described below are only available if you are using KDM or GDM as the login manager.\n" +"The features described below are only available if you are using KDM or GDM " +"as the login manager.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Žemiau aprašytos savybės yra galimos tik naudojant KDM arba GDM prisijungimo tvarkyklę.\n" +"Žemiau aprašytos savybės yra galimos tik naudojant KDM arba GDM prisijungimo " +"tvarkyklę.\n" "</p>\n" #. helptext 2/3 #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:975 msgid "" "<p><b>Auto Login</b><br>\n" -"By setting <b>Auto Login</b>, skip the login procedure. The user chosen from the list is logged in automatically.</p>\n" +"By setting <b>Auto Login</b>, skip the login procedure. The user chosen from " +"the list is logged in automatically.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Automatinis prisijungimas</b><br>\n" -"Naudojant <b>automatinį prisijungimą</b>, nebus prašoma įvesti naudotojo vardo ir slaptažodžio įjungus kompiuterį. Taigi naudotojas, pasirinktas iš sąrašo, prisijungs automatiškai.</p>\n" +"Naudojant <b>automatinį prisijungimą</b>, nebus prašoma įvesti naudotojo " +"vardo ir slaptažodžio įjungus kompiuterį. Taigi naudotojas, pasirinktas iš " +"sąrašo, prisijungs automatiškai.</p>\n" #. helptext 3/3 #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:979 msgid "" "<p><b>Passwordless Logins</b><br>\n" "If this option is checked, all users are allowed to log in without entering\n" -"passwords. Otherwise, you are asked for the password even if you set a user to log in automatically.</p>\n" +"passwords. Otherwise, you are asked for the password even if you set a user " +"to log in automatically.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>Prisijungimas be slaptažodžių</b><br>\n" "Kai pasirinktai ši savybė, visiems naudotojams leidžiama prisijungti\n" -"nenaudojant slaptažodžio. Kitu atveju bus prašoma slaptažodžio, net jei nustatysite automatinį naudotojo prisijungimą.</p>\n" +"nenaudojant slaptažodžio. Kitu atveju bus prašoma slaptažodžio, net jei " +"nustatysite automatinį naudotojo prisijungimą.</p>\n" #. dialog label #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1004 msgid "Display Manager Login Settings" -msgstr "Ekrano tvarkyklės prisijungimo nuostatos" +msgstr "Prisijungimų tvarkyklės prisijungimo nuostatos" #. checkbox label #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1014 @@ -3105,7 +3358,8 @@ #. error popup #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1126 msgid "Cannot delete the user %1. It must be done on the NIS server." -msgstr "Nepavyksta pašalinti naudotojo %1. Tai turi būti atlikta NIS serveryje." +msgstr "" +"Nepavyksta pašalinti naudotojo %1. Tai turi būti atlikta NIS serveryje." #. Continue/Cancel popup #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1135 @@ -3252,20 +3506,25 @@ "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Linux yra <b> daugelio naudotojų sistema</b>. Tuo pačiu metu prie sistemos gali būti\n" -"prisijungę keli skirtingi naudotojai. Norint išvengti maišaties, kiekvienas naudotojas privalo\n" -"turėti unikalų tapatumą. Be to, kiekvienas naudotojas turi priklausyti bent vienai grupei.\n" +"Linux yra <b> daugelio naudotojų sistema</b>. Tuo pačiu metu prie sistemos " +"gali būti\n" +"prisijungę keli skirtingi naudotojai. Norint išvengti maišaties, kiekvienas " +"naudotojas privalo\n" +"turėti unikalų tapatumą. Be to, kiekvienas naudotojas turi priklausyti bent " +"vienai grupei.\n" "</p>\n" #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1535 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Users and groups are arranged in various sets. Change the set currently shown in the table with <b>Set Filter</b>.\n" +"Users and groups are arranged in various sets. Change the set currently shown " +"in the table with <b>Set Filter</b>.\n" "Customize your view with <b>Customize Filter</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Naudotojai ir grupės surūšiuoti į įvairius komplektus. Mygtuku <b>nustatyti filtrą</b> galite pakeisti šiuo metu lentelėje rodomą komplektą.\n" +"Naudotojai ir grupės surūšiuoti į įvairius komplektus. Mygtuku <b>nustatyti " +"filtrą</b> galite pakeisti šiuo metu lentelėje rodomą komplektą.\n" "Paspaudę <b>derinti filtrus</b>, galėsite tvarkyti rodymo filtrus.</p>\n" #. help text 2/3 @@ -3279,7 +3538,8 @@ msgstr "" "<p>\n" "Nuspaudę <b>nuostatas ekspertams</b>, galėsite keisti\n" -"slaptažodžio šifravimo tipą, naudotojų atpažinimo būdą, numatytąsias reikšmes\n" +"slaptažodžio šifravimo tipą, naudotojų atpažinimo būdą, numatytąsias " +"reikšmes\n" "naujiems naudotojams. Mygtuku <b>dabar įrašyti pakeitimus</b> išsaugosite\n" "visus pakeitimus neišeidami iš konfigūravimo modulio.</p>\n" @@ -3353,12 +3613,14 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>\n" -"Use this dialog to get information about existing groups and add or modify groups.\n" +"Use this dialog to get information about existing groups and add or modify " +"groups.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<p>\n" -"Šiame skydelyje galite matyti informaciją apie esamas grupes, jas keisti arba pridėti naujas grupes.\n" +"Šiame skydelyje galite matyti informaciją apie esamas grupes, jas keisti arba " +"pridėti naujas grupes.\n" "</p>\n" #. help text 2/4 @@ -3618,7 +3880,7 @@ #. User name for user: "gdm" #: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:96 msgid "GNOME Display Manager Daemon" -msgstr "Gnome ekrano tvarkyklės tarnyba" +msgstr "Gnome prisijungimų tvarkyklės tarnyba" #. User name for user: "postfix" #: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:100 @@ -3949,12 +4211,14 @@ #. label #: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:452 msgid "Multiple templates are defined as default. Select the one to read." -msgstr "Kaip numatytieji yra nurodyti kaip numatytieji. Pasirinkite vieną įkelsimą." +msgstr "" +"Kaip numatytieji yra nurodyti kaip numatytieji. Pasirinkite vieną įkelsimą." #. error message 2/2 (= next sentence) #: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:491 msgid "Correct them manually before running the YaST users module again." -msgstr "Prieš vėl paleisdami YaST naudotojų modulį, pataisykite juos rankiniu būdu." +msgstr "" +"Prieš vėl paleisdami YaST naudotojų modulį, pataisykite juos rankiniu būdu." #. error message 1/2: %1 is file name, %2 is username, %3 is next sentence (2/2) #. error message 1/2: %1 is file name, %2 is username, %3 is next sentence (2/2) @@ -3998,7 +4262,8 @@ msgstr "" "Rinkmenoje %1 yra keista eilutė.\n" "Galbūt neteisingas stulpelių skaičius, arba trūksta kokio įrašo eilutėje.\n" -"Prieš vėl paleisdami YaST naudotojų modulį, pataisykite rinkmeną rankiniu būdu." +"Prieš vėl paleisdami YaST naudotojų modulį, pataisykite rinkmeną rankiniu " +"būdu." #. default error message #: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:555 @@ -4397,7 +4662,8 @@ "If you select a nonexistent shell, the user may be unable to log in.\n" "Use this shell?" msgstr "" -"Jei pasirinksite neegzistuojantį apvalkalą, naudotojui gali nepavykti prisijungti.\n" +"Jei pasirinksite neegzistuojantį apvalkalą, naudotojui gali nepavykti " +"prisijungti.\n" "Naudoti šį apvalkalą?" #. error popup @@ -4566,6 +4832,7 @@ #. plugin name #: src/modules/UsersPluginKerberos.pm:122 +#| msgid "Quota Configuration" msgid "Kerberos Configuration" msgstr "Kerberos konfigūracija" @@ -4710,7 +4977,7 @@ "%2" #. the ']' is or-ed... -#. error popup +#. error popup #: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:505 msgid "" "The password may only contain the following characters:\n" @@ -4725,14 +4992,16 @@ #: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:540 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"For the password, use only characters that can be found on an English keyboard\n" +"For the password, use only characters that can be found on an English " +"keyboard\n" "layout. In cases of system error, it may be necessary to log in without a\n" "localized keyboard layout.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "Slaptažodžiui geriau naudokite tik angliškoje klaviatūroje randamas raides.\n" -"Tai pravers įvykus sistemos klaidai, kai gali tekti prisijungti nesinaudojant\n" +"Tai pravers įvykus sistemos klaidai, kai gali tekti prisijungti " +"nesinaudojant\n" "lokalizuotu klaviatūros išdėstymu.\n" "</p>" @@ -4770,7 +5039,8 @@ #. popup question #: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:674 msgid "You have used a palindrome for the password." -msgstr "Slaptažodyje yra tekstas, kurį vienodai galima perskaityti bet kuria kryptimi." +msgstr "" +"Slaptažodyje yra tekstas, kurį vienodai galima perskaityti bet kuria kryptimi." #. popup question #: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:682 Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/vm.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/vm.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/vm.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -20,7 +20,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Main @@ -36,8 +37,12 @@ #. check for kernel-bigsmp #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:158 -msgid "x86_64 is the only supported architecture for hosting virtual machines. Your architecture is " -msgstr "Palaikoma tik x86_64 architektūros virtualių mašinų priegloba. O jūsų architektūra yra " +msgid "" +"x86_64 is the only supported architecture for hosting virtual machines. Your " +"architecture is " +msgstr "" +"Palaikoma tik x86_64 architektūros virtualių mašinų priegloba. O jūsų " +"architektūra yra " #. we are already in UML, nested virtual machine is not supported #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:177 @@ -66,23 +71,41 @@ #. xen domain0 installation help text - 1/4 #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:214 -msgid "<p><big><b>VM Server Configuration</b></big></p><p>Configuration of the VM Server (domain 0) has two parts.</p>" -msgstr "<p><big><b>VM serverio konfigūracija</b></big></p><p>VM serverio konfigūracija (sritis 0) turi dvi dalis.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>VM Server Configuration</b></big></p><p>Configuration of the VM " +"Server (domain 0) has two parts.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><big><b>VM serverio konfigūracija</b></big></p><p>VM serverio " +"konfigūracija (sritis 0) turi dvi dalis.</p>" #. xen domain0 installation help text - 2/4 #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:218 -msgid "<p>The required packages are installed into the system first. Then the boot loader is switched to GRUB (if not already used) and the Xen section is added to the boot loader menu if it is missing.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Pirmiausia į sistemą įdiegiami reikalingi paketai. Po to paleidyklė pakeičiama į GRUB (jei iki šiol nenaudota) ir prie paleidyklės meniu pridedamas Xen skyrius, jei jo nėra.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>The required packages are installed into the system first. Then the boot " +"loader is switched to GRUB (if not already used) and the Xen section is added " +"to the boot loader menu if it is missing.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Pirmiausia į sistemą įdiegiami reikalingi paketai. Po to paleidyklė " +"pakeičiama į GRUB (jei iki šiol nenaudota) ir prie paleidyklės meniu " +"pridedamas Xen skyrius, jei jo nėra.</p>" #. xen domain0 installation help text - 3/4 #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:222 -msgid "<p>GRUB is needed because it supports the multiboot standard required to boot Xen and the Linux kernel.</p>" -msgstr "<p>GRUB reikalingas todėl, kad jis palaiko keleriopo sistemos paleidimo standartą, reikalingą Xen ir Linux branduolio įkėlimui.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>GRUB is needed because it supports the multiboot standard required to boot " +"Xen and the Linux kernel.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>GRUB reikalingas todėl, kad jis palaiko keleriopo sistemos paleidimo " +"standartą, reikalingą Xen ir Linux branduolio įkėlimui.</p>" #. xen domain0 installation help text - 4/4 #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:226 -msgid "<p>When the configuration has finished successfully, you can boot the VM Server from the boot loader menu.</p>" -msgstr "<p>Kuomet konfigūracija sėkmingai užbaigta, tuomet įmanoma paleisti VM serverį per kompiuterio paleidyklės menu.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>When the configuration has finished successfully, you can boot the VM " +"Server from the boot loader menu.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Kuomet konfigūracija sėkmingai užbaigta, tuomet įmanoma paleisti VM " +"serverį per kompiuterio paleidyklės menu.</p>" #. error popup #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:231 @@ -110,6 +133,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:253 +#| msgid "MySQL server" msgid "KVM server" msgstr "KVM serveris" @@ -130,6 +154,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:291 +#| msgid "Hypervisor and tools are installed." msgid "Virtualization client tools" msgstr "Virtualizacijos kliento įrankiai." @@ -138,10 +163,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:309 +#| msgid "Broken server" msgid "Xen server" msgstr "Xen serveris" #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:310 +#| msgid "Xen Section" msgid "Xen tools" msgstr "Xen įrankiai" @@ -202,8 +229,12 @@ msgstr "Tinklo tiltas." #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:506 -msgid "<p>For normal network configurations hosting virtual machines, a network bridge is recommended.</p><p>Configure a default network bridge?</p>" -msgstr "<p>Normaliai tinklo konfigūracijai yra rekomenduojama virtualiosios mašinos priegloba, tinklo tiltas.</p><p>Ar konfigūruoti numatytąjį tinklo tiltą?</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>For normal network configurations hosting virtual machines, a network " +"bridge is recommended.</p><p>Configure a default network bridge?</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p>Normaliai tinklo konfigūracijai yra rekomenduojama virtualiosios mašinos " +"priegloba, tinklo tiltas.</p><p>Ar konfigūruoti numatytąjį tinklo tiltą?</p>" #. Firewall stage - modify the firewall setting, add the xen bridge to FW_FORWARD_ALWAYS_INOUT_DEV #. Progress::NextStage(); @@ -221,16 +252,25 @@ #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:570 #, fuzzy #| msgid "For installing Xen guests, reboot the machine and select the Xen section in the boot loader menu.\n" -msgid "KVM components are installed. Reboot the machine and select the native kernel in the boot loader menu to install KVM guests." -msgstr "Xen svečių diegimui, perkraukite kompiuterį ir iš paleidyklės meniu pasirinkite Xen skyrių.\n" +msgid "" +"KVM components are installed. Reboot the machine and select the native kernel " +"in the boot loader menu to install KVM guests." +msgstr "" +"Xen svečių diegimui, perkraukite kompiuterį ir iš paleidyklės meniu " +"pasirinkite Xen skyrių.\n" #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:573 #, fuzzy #| msgid "For installing Xen guests, reboot the machine and select the Xen section in the boot loader menu.\n" -msgid "For installing Xen guests, reboot the machine and select the Xen section in the boot loader menu." -msgstr "Xen svečių diegimui, perkraukite kompiuterį ir iš paleidyklės meniu pasirinkite Xen skyrių.\n" +msgid "" +"For installing Xen guests, reboot the machine and select the Xen section in " +"the boot loader menu." +msgstr "" +"Xen svečių diegimui, perkraukite kompiuterį ir iš paleidyklės meniu " +"pasirinkite Xen skyrių.\n" #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:576 +#| msgid "Hypervisor and tools are installed." msgid "Xen Hypervisor and tools are installed." msgstr "„Xen Hypervisor“ ir įrankiai įdiegti." Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/vpn.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/vpn.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/vpn.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -18,7 +18,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Manage VPN client secrets. @@ -27,6 +28,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:57 src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:62 +#| msgid "Gateway" msgid "Gateway IP" msgstr "Tinklų sietuvo IP" @@ -37,10 +39,12 @@ msgstr "WEP - bendras raktas" #: src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:59 src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:63 +#| msgid "&Set" msgid "Set" msgstr "Nustatyti" #: src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:60 src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:188 +#| msgid "Show &Next" msgid "Show key" msgstr "Parodyti raktą" @@ -51,6 +55,7 @@ msgstr "Liudijimo rakto rinkmenos nėra." #: src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:62 +#| msgid "Certificates" msgid "Certificate" msgstr "Liudijimas" @@ -135,6 +140,7 @@ msgstr "Pasirinkti..." #: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:197 +#| msgid "Path to certificate file required." msgid "Path to certificate key file" msgstr "Kelias iki liudijimo rakto." @@ -159,6 +165,7 @@ msgstr "Pašalinti" #: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:207 src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:216 +#| msgid "No Password" msgid "Show Password" msgstr "Parodyti slaptažodį" @@ -168,10 +175,12 @@ #. Return a user-friendly brief description of the connection. #: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:199 +#| msgid "Gateway" msgid "Gateway - PSK" msgstr "Tinklų sietuvas - PSK" #: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:201 +#| msgid "&Path of Certificate" msgid "Gateway - Certificate" msgstr "Tinklų sietuvas - liudijimas" @@ -184,10 +193,12 @@ msgstr "Tinklų sietuvas - Windows klientai" #: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:207 +#| msgid "Client &Key" msgid "Client - PSK" msgstr "Klientas - PSK" #: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:209 +#| msgid "&Client Certificate" msgid "Client - Certificate" msgstr "Klientas - liudijimas" @@ -242,6 +253,7 @@ msgstr "Globali konfigūracija" #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:68 +#| msgid "Enable the NTP daemon" msgid "Enable VPN daemon" msgstr "Įgalinti VPN tarnybą" @@ -250,6 +262,7 @@ msgstr "Sumažinti TCP MSS" #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:73 +#| msgid "All Patches" msgid "All VPNs" msgstr "Visi VPN" @@ -258,10 +271,12 @@ msgstr "Naujas VPN" #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:77 +#| msgid "&Delete DN" msgid "Delete VPN" msgstr "Šalinti VPN" #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:79 +#| msgid "Connection Settings" msgid "View Connection Status" msgstr "Parodyti prisijungimo būseną" @@ -269,21 +284,27 @@ #. Display a help text to let user know why reducing MSS is sometimes necessary. #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:103 msgid "" -"If VPN clients have trouble accessing certain Internet sites, it is possible that the affected hosts prevent automatic MTU (maximum transmission unit) discovery due to incorrect firewall configuration.\n" -"Reducing TCP-MSS will correct the situation; however, the available bandwidth will be reduced by about 10%." +"If VPN clients have trouble accessing certain Internet sites, it is possible " +"that the affected hosts prevent automatic MTU (maximum transmission unit) " +"discovery due to incorrect firewall configuration.\n" +"Reducing TCP-MSS will correct the situation; however, the available bandwidth " +"will be reduced by about 10%." msgstr "" #. Delete the chosen VPN connection. #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:124 +#| msgid "Select a connection" msgid "Delete connection" msgstr "Šalinti ryšį" #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:125 +#| msgid "Are you sure you want to delete: " msgid "Are you sure to delete connection " msgstr "Tikrai norite ištrinti ryšį " #. Check for incomplete configuration #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:144 +#| msgid "Please provide password for the following device:" msgid "Please complete configuration for the following connections:\n" msgstr "Pabaikite konfigūruoti šiuos ryšius:\n" @@ -334,7 +355,8 @@ #. Render configuration controls for the chosen connection. #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:376 msgid "Click 'New VPN' to create a gateway or client." -msgstr "Norėdami sukurti naują tinklų sietuvą arba klientą, spauskite „Naujas VPN“." +msgstr "" +"Norėdami sukurti naują tinklų sietuvą arba klientą, spauskite „Naujas VPN“." #. Make widgets for connection configuration #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:386 @@ -342,6 +364,7 @@ msgstr "Visi IPv4 tinklai (0.0.0.0/0)" #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:387 +#| msgid "All networks" msgid "All IPv6 networks (::/0)" msgstr "Visi IPv6 tinklai (::/0)" @@ -350,6 +373,7 @@ msgstr "Apriboti CIDR, atskirti kableliais:" #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:395 +#| msgid "Connection Management" msgid "Connection name: " msgstr "Ryšio pavadinimas: " @@ -358,14 +382,17 @@ msgstr "Tipas" #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:398 +#| msgid "Name Server" msgid "Gateway (Server)" msgstr "Tinklų sietuvas (serveris)" #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:399 +#| msgid "Clients" msgid "Client" msgstr "Klientas" #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:406 +#| msgid "Choose Scenario" msgid "The scenario is" msgstr "Scenarijus: " @@ -374,6 +401,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:409 +#| msgid "Choose the directory with certificates" msgid "Secure communication with a certificate" msgstr "Saugus prisijungimas naudojant liudijimą" @@ -388,6 +416,7 @@ msgstr "Leisti prisijungti Windows 7, Windows 8 naudotojams" #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:413 src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:427 +#| msgid "Edit Current Port" msgid "Edit Credentials" msgstr "Keisti prisijungimo duomenis" @@ -410,10 +439,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:424 +#| msgid "Create certificates." msgid "By a certificate" msgstr "Naudojant liudijimą" #: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:426 +#| msgid "Default &Gateway IP" msgid "VPN gateway IP" msgstr "VPN tinklų sietuvo IP" @@ -457,10 +488,12 @@ #. Ask for a new certificate/key combination for a VPN client #: src/lib/vpn/set_client_cert_dialog.rb:49 +#| msgid "Path to certificate file required." msgid "Path to certificate file:" msgstr "Kelias iki liudijimo:" #: src/lib/vpn/set_client_cert_dialog.rb:52 +#| msgid "Path to certificate file required." msgid "Path to certificate key file:" msgstr "Kelias iki liudijimo rakto:" @@ -479,6 +512,7 @@ #. Return password string. #: src/lib/vpn/set_client_psk_dialog.rb:59 +#| msgid "Please enter a password" msgid "Please enter a password." msgstr "Įveskite slaptažodį." @@ -488,11 +522,13 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/vpn/view_log_dialog.rb:51 +#| msgid "Restart NTP Daemon" msgid "Restart VPN Daemon" msgstr "Iš naujo paleisti VPN tarnybą" #. Restart IPSec daemon service. #: src/lib/vpn/view_log_dialog.rb:76 +#| msgid "Confirm Network Restart" msgid "Confirm daemon restart" msgstr "Patvirtinkite tarnybos paleidimą iš naujo" @@ -503,6 +539,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/vpn/view_log_dialog.rb:81 +#| msgid "Failed to restart the CUPS daemon" msgid "Failed to restart IPSec daemon" msgstr "Nepavyko iš naujo paleisti IPSec tarnybos." @@ -515,11 +552,13 @@ #. Install packages #: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:172 +#| msgid "Failed to install required packages." msgid "Failed to install IPSec packages." msgstr "Nepavyko įdiegti IPSec paketų." #. Enable/disable daemon #: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:180 +#| msgid "Failed to start the CUPS daemon" msgid "Failed to start IPSec daemon." msgstr "Nepavyko paleisti IPSec tarnybos.." @@ -538,22 +577,26 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:229 src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:234 +#| msgid "Failed to create the new map." msgid "Failed to restart SuSE firewall." msgstr " Nepavyko iš naujo paleisti SuSE užkardos." #: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:240 msgid "" "Both VPN gateway and clients require special SuSE firewall configuration.\n" -"SuSE firewall is not enabled, therefore you must manually run the configuration script on every reboot. The script will be run now.\n" +"SuSE firewall is not enabled, therefore you must manually run the " +"configuration script on every reboot. The script will be run now.\n" "The script is located at %s" msgstr "" #. AutoYaST: Return a rich text summary of the current configuration. #: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:279 +#| msgid "Global Settings" msgid "VPN Global Settings" msgstr "VPN bendrosios nuostatos" #: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:280 +#| msgid "Enable the NTP daemon" msgid "Enable VPN (IPSec) daemon: %s" msgstr "Įgalinti VPN (IPSec) tarnybą: %s" @@ -562,6 +605,7 @@ msgstr "Sumažinti TCP MSS iki 1024: %s" #: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:282 +#| msgid "Serial Line Connection" msgid "Gateway and Connections" msgstr "Tinklų sietuvas ir prisijungimai" @@ -576,3 +620,5 @@ #| msgid "Read current connection setup" msgid "A client connecting to " msgstr "Skaityti esamą ryšio konfigūraciją" + + Modified: branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/yast2-apparmor.lt.po =================================================================== --- branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/yast2-apparmor.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:55 UTC (rev 94238) +++ branches/plus-SLE12-SP1/yast/lt/po/yast2-apparmor.lt.po 2015-11-03 12:56:58 UTC (rev 94239) @@ -19,7 +19,8 @@ "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 1 : n%" +"10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 2 : 3);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 2.0\n" #. Globalz @@ -63,8 +64,12 @@ #. Read the profiles from the SCR agent #: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:90 -msgid "Make a selection from the listed profiles and press Next to delete the profile." -msgstr "Pasirinkite iš profilių sąrašo ir, norėdami pašalinti profilį, spauskite Toliau." +msgid "" +"Make a selection from the listed profiles and press Next to delete the " +"profile." +msgstr "" +"Pasirinkite iš profilių sąrašo ir, norėdami pašalinti profilį, spauskite " +"Toliau." #: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:93 msgid "Delete Profile - Choose profile to delete" @@ -72,8 +77,11 @@ #. Read the profiles from the SCR agent #: src/clients/AA_EditProfile.rb:88 +#| msgid "Select a listed profile and press Next to edit it." msgid "Select a listed profile and press Edit to edit it." -msgstr "Pasirinkite iš profilių sąrašo ir, norėdami keisti profilį, spauskite „Keisti“." +msgstr "" +"Pasirinkite iš profilių sąrašo ir, norėdami keisti profilį, spauskite " +"„Keisti“." #: src/clients/AA_EditProfile.rb:89 msgid "Edit Profile - Choose profile to edit" @@ -145,8 +153,12 @@ #. #. *************************************************************************** #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:52 -msgid "This operation generated the following error. Check your installation and AppArmor profile settings." -msgstr "Šis veiksmas lėmė šitą klaidą. Patikrinkite įdiegtą sistemą ir AppArmor profilių nuostatas." +msgid "" +"This operation generated the following error. Check your installation and " +"AppArmor profile settings." +msgstr "" +"Šis veiksmas lėmė šitą klaidą. Patikrinkite įdiegtą sistemą ir AppArmor " +"profilių nuostatas." #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:91 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:103 #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:115 @@ -232,7 +244,8 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:270 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:310 #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:350 msgid "An email address is required for each selected notification method." -msgstr "Kiekvienam pasirinktam informavimo būdui reikia elektroninio pašto adreso." +msgstr "" +"Kiekvienam pasirinktam informavimo būdui reikia elektroninio pašto adreso." #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:394 msgid "Configuration failed for the following operations: " @@ -258,7 +271,8 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:441 msgid "" -"<p><b>AppArmor Status</b><br>This reports whether the AppArmor policy enforcement \n" +"<p><b>AppArmor Status</b><br>This reports whether the AppArmor policy " +"enforcement \n" "module is loaded and functioning.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -342,16 +356,24 @@ msgstr "Klaidos, rastos AppArmot profiliuose" #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:57 -msgid "<p>These problems must be corrected before AppArmor can be started or the profile management tools can be used.</p> " -msgstr "<p>Prieš paleidžiant AppArmor ar profilių tvarkymo įrankį, būtina išspręsti šias problemas.</p> " +msgid "" +"<p>These problems must be corrected before AppArmor can be started or the " +"profile management tools can be used.</p> " +msgstr "" +"<p>Prieš paleidžiant AppArmor ar profilių tvarkymo įrankį, būtina išspręsti " +"šias problemas.</p> " #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:64 msgid "<p>Find a description of the AppArmor profile syntax by running " msgstr "<p>AppArmor profilių sintaksės aprašą pamatysite įvykdę " #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:70 -msgid "<p>Comprehensive documentation about AppArmor is available in the Administration guide located in the directory: " -msgstr "<p>Platesnę AppArmor dokumentaciją rasite Administravimo vadove. Jį rasite kataloge: " +msgid "" +"<p>Comprehensive documentation about AppArmor is available in the " +"Administration guide located in the directory: " +msgstr "" +"<p>Platesnę AppArmor dokumentaciją rasite Administravimo vadove. Jį rasite " +"kataloge: " #. encoding: utf-8 #. *************************************************************************** @@ -779,31 +801,41 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:43 msgid "" "<ul><li>Override all DAC access, including ACL execute access if \n" -"[_POSIX_ACL] is defined. Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE.</li></ul>" +"[_POSIX_ACL] is defined. Excluding DAC access covered by " +"CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE.</li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:49 msgid "" "<ul><li>Overrides all DAC restrictions regarding read and search \n" -"on files and directories, including ACL restrictions if [_POSIX_ACL] is defined. \n" +"on files and directories, including ACL restrictions if [_POSIX_ACL] is " +"defined. \n" "Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE. </li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:57 msgid "" -"<ul><li>Overrides all restrictions on allowed operations on files, where file\n" +"<ul><li>Overrides all restrictions on allowed operations on files, where " +"file\n" "owner ID must be equal to the user ID, except where CAP_FSETID is\n" "applicable. It does not override MAC and DAC restrictions. </li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:65 -msgid "<ul><li>Overrides the following restrictions: user ID must match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits on that file; the effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) must match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not implemented). </li></ul>" +msgid "" +"<ul><li>Overrides the following restrictions: user ID must match the file " +"owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits on that file; the " +"effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) must match the " +"file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; the S_ISUID and " +"S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not " +"implemented). </li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:71 msgid "" "<ul><li>Overrides the restriction that the real or effective user ID \n" -"of a process sending a signal must match the real or effective user ID of the process \n" +"of a process sending a signal must match the real or effective user ID of the " +"process \n" "receiving the signal.</li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -826,7 +858,9 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:97 -msgid "<ul><li>Allows modification of S_IMMUTABLE and S_APPEND file attributes</li></ul>" +msgid "" +"<ul><li>Allows modification of S_IMMUTABLE and S_APPEND file attributes</li><" +"/ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:103 @@ -849,7 +883,8 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:121 msgid "" -"<li> Allows setting arbitrary process / process group ownership on sockets</li> \n" +"<li> Allows setting arbitrary process / process group ownership on sockets<" +"/li> \n" "<li> Allows binding to any address for transparent proxying</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting TOS (type of service)</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting promiscuous mode</li> \n" @@ -882,7 +917,8 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:153 msgid "" -"<ul><li> Insert and remove kernel modules - modify kernel without limit</li> \n" +"<ul><li> Insert and remove kernel modules - modify kernel without limit</li> " +"\n" "<li> Modify cap_bset </li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -933,7 +969,8 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:199 msgid "" "<li> Allows removing semaphores</li> \n" -"<li> Used instead of CAP_CHOWN to \"chown\" IPC message queues, semaphores and shared memory</li> \n" +"<li> Used instead of CAP_CHOWN to \"chown\" IPC message queues, semaphores " +"and shared memory</li> \n" "<li> Allows locking/unlocking of shared memory segment</li> \n" "<li> Allows turning swap on/off</li> \n" "<li> Allows forged pids on socket credentials passing</li>" @@ -944,7 +981,8 @@ "<li> Allows setting read ahead and flushing buffers on block devices</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting geometry in floppy driver</li> \n" "<li> Allows turning DMA on/off in xd driver</li> \n" -"<li> Allows administration of md devices (mostly the above, but some extra ioctls)</li>" +"<li> Allows administration of md devices (mostly the above, but some extra " +"ioctls)</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:212 @@ -957,7 +995,8 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:218 msgid "" -"<li> Allows reading non-standardized portions of pci configuration space</li> \n" +"<li> Allows reading non-standardized portions of pci configuration space</li> " +"\n" "<li> Allows DDI debug ioctl on sbpcd driver</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting up serial ports</li> \n" "<li> Allows sending raw qic-117 commands</li>" @@ -976,8 +1015,10 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:236 msgid "" -"<ul><li> Allows raising priority and setting priority on other (different UID) processes</li> \n" -"<li> Allows use of FIFO and round-robin (realtime) scheduling on own processes and setting \n" +"<ul><li> Allows raising priority and setting priority on other (different " +"UID) processes</li> \n" +"<li> Allows use of FIFO and round-robin (realtime) scheduling on own " +"processes and setting \n" "the scheduling algorithm used by another process.</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting cpu affinity on other processes </li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -987,12 +1028,14 @@ "<ul><li> Override resource limits. Set resource limits.</li> \n" "<li> Override quota limits.</li> \n" "<li> Override reserved space on ext2 filesystem</li> \n" -"<li> Modify data journaling mode on ext3 filesystem (uses journaling resources)</li>" +"<li> Modify data journaling mode on ext3 filesystem (uses journaling " +"resources)</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:251 msgid "" -"<li> NOTE: ext2 honors fsuid when checking for resource overrides, so you can override using fsuid too</li> \n" +"<li> NOTE: ext2 honors fsuid when checking for resource overrides, so you can " +"override using fsuid too</li> \n" "<li> Override size restrictions on IPC message queues</li> \n" "<li> Allows more than 64hz interrupts from the real-time clock</li> \n" "<li> Override max number of consoles on console allocation</li> \n" @@ -1058,7 +1101,8 @@ "that application's behavior is not restricted.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Skundimo veiksena</b> profilis yra apmokymo būsenoje, registruojamas \n" -"programos aktyvumas. Visi AppArmor profilių taisyklių pažeidimai įrašomi į žurnalą \n" +"programos aktyvumas. Visi AppArmor profilių taisyklių pažeidimai įrašomi į " +"žurnalą \n" "(į <i>/var/log/audit/audit.log</i> rinkmeną), tačiau jie leidžiami, tad \n" "programos veikimas nėra ribojamas.</p>" @@ -1070,7 +1114,8 @@ "permitted to do so by the profile).</p>" msgstr "" "<p>Programą, kurios profiliui priskirta <b>griežta veiksena</b>, saugo \n" -"AppArmor. Profilio taisyklių griežtai laikomasi, pažeidimai rašomi į žurnalą,\n" +"AppArmor. Profilio taisyklių griežtai laikomasi, pažeidimai rašomi į " +"žurnalą,\n" "tačiau jie neleidžiami (pvz., programa negalės pasiekti rinkmenų, jei\n" "to neleidžia profilio taisyklės).</p>" @@ -1175,7 +1220,8 @@ "individual occurrences, including the date of the last occurrence. \n" "<br>For example:<br> <tt>AppArmor: PERMITTING access to capability\n" "'setgid' (httpd2-prefork(6347) profile /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork \n" -"active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 2004.</tt>\n" +"active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 " +"2004.</tt>\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1240,7 +1286,8 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:99 msgid "" "<li>Select <b>Include unknown security events</b> if \n" -"you would like to include events that are not rated with a severity number.</li>" +"you would like to include events that are not rated with a severity number.<" +"/li>" msgstr "" #. ---------------------------- @@ -1250,7 +1297,8 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:106 msgid "" -"This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access control module. \n" +"This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access control module. " +"\n" "You can generate highly optimized and robust security profiles \n" "by using the suggestions made by AppArmor." msgstr "" @@ -1278,7 +1326,9 @@ msgstr "<b>Prieigos veiksenos </b>" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:126 -msgid "File permission access modes consists of combinations of the following six modes:" +msgid "" +"File permission access modes consists of combinations of the following six " +"modes:" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:129 @@ -1416,27 +1466,39 @@ "bash(1), zsh(1)." #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:196 -msgid "<li><b>*</b> can substitute for any number of characters, except '/'<li>" -msgstr "<li><b>*</b> gali pakeisti bet kiek rašmenų, išskyrus pasvirąjį brūkšnį „/“<li>" +msgid "" +"<li><b>*</b> can substitute for any number of characters, except '/'<li>" +msgstr "" +"<li><b>*</b> gali pakeisti bet kiek rašmenų, išskyrus pasvirąjį brūkšnį " +"„/“<li>" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:199 -msgid "<li><b>**</b> can substitute for any number of characters, including '/'</li>" -msgstr "<li><b>**</b> gali pakeisti bet kiek rašmenų, įskaitant pasvirąjį brūkšnį „/“<li>" +msgid "" +"<li><b>**</b> can substitute for any number of characters, including '/'</li>" +msgstr "" +"<li><b>**</b> gali pakeisti bet kiek rašmenų, įskaitant pasvirąjį brūkšnį " +"„/“<li>" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:202 msgid "<li><b>?</b> can substitute for any single character except '/'</li>" -msgstr "<li><b>?</b> gali pakeisti vieną rašmenį, išskyrus pasvirąjį brūkšnį „/“</li>" +msgstr "" +"<li><b>?</b> gali pakeisti vieną rašmenį, išskyrus pasvirąjį brūkšnį „/“<" +"/li>" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:205 -msgid "<li><b>[abc]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" +msgid "" +"<li><b>[abc]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" msgstr "<li><b>[abc]</b> pakeis vieną rašmenį: a, b arba c</li>" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:208 -msgid "<li><b>[a-c]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" +msgid "" +"<li><b>[a-c]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" msgstr "<li><b>[a-c]</b> pakeis vieną rašmenį: a, b arba c</li>" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:211 -msgid "<li><b>{ab,cd}</b> will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule to match cd</li>" +msgid "" +"<li><b>{ab,cd}</b> will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule to match cd<" +"/li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:214 @@ -1601,13 +1663,19 @@ "arba užverkite vediklį spausdami „Nutraukti“." #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:889 -msgid "The profile already contains the provided hat name. Enter a different name or press Abort to cancel this wizard." -msgstr "Profilis jau turi kepurę tokiu vardu. Norėdami bandyti vėl, įveskite kitokį vardą, arba užverkite vediklį spausdami „Nutraukti“." +msgid "" +"The profile already contains the provided hat name. Enter a different name or " +"press Abort to cancel this wizard." +msgstr "" +"Profilis jau turi kepurę tokiu vardu. Norėdami bandyti vėl, įveskite kitokį " +"vardą, arba užverkite vediklį spausdami „Nutraukti“." #. FIXME: format these texts better #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:928 -msgid "<p>View and modify the contents of an individual profile. For existing entries double click the permissions to access a modification dialog.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p>View and modify the contents of an individual profile. For existing " +"entries double click the permissions to access a modification dialog.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text @@ -1622,7 +1690,9 @@ #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:942 -msgid "<p><b>Add Entry:</b><br>Select the type of resource to add from the drop down list.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Add Entry:</b><br>Select the type of resource to add from the drop down " +"list.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text - part x1 @@ -1644,14 +1714,16 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:959 msgid "" "<li><b>Include</b><br>Add an include entry to this profile. This option \n" -"includes the profile entry contents of another file in this profile at load time.</li>" +"includes the profile entry contents of another file in this profile at load " +"time.</li>" msgstr "" #. help text - part x5 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:963 msgid "" "<li><b>Network Entry</b><br>Add a network rule entry to this profile. \n" -"This option will allow you to specify network access privileges for the profile. \n" +"This option will allow you to specify network access privileges for the " +"profile. \n" "You may specify a network address family and socket type.</li>" msgstr "" @@ -1659,10 +1731,12 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:969 msgid "" "<li><b>Hat</b><br>Add a sub-profile for this profile, called a Hat. This\n" -"option is analogous to manually creating a new profile, which can be selected\n" +"option is analogous to manually creating a new profile, which can be " +"selected\n" "during execution only in the context of being asked for by a <b>changehat\n" "aware</b> application. \n" -"For more information on changehat, see <b>man changehat</b> on your system or the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide.</li>" +"For more information on changehat, see <b>man changehat</b> on your system or " +"the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide.</li>" msgstr "" #. help text - part x7 @@ -1672,15 +1746,19 @@ #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:982 -msgid "<p><b>Delete Entry:</b><br>Removes the selected entry from this profile.</p>" -msgstr "<p><b>Pašalinti įrašą:</b><br>Iš šio profilio pašalina pasirinktą įrašą.</p>" +msgid "" +"<p><b>Delete Entry:</b><br>Removes the selected entry from this profile.</p>" +msgstr "" +"<p><b>Pašalinti įrašą:</b><br>Iš šio profilio pašalina pasirinktą įrašą.</p>" #. help text - part y1 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:987 msgid "" "<p><b>*Clean Exec</b><br>The Clean Exec option for the discrete profile \n" -"and unconstrained execute permissions provide added security by stripping the environment \n" -"that is inherited by the child program of specific variables. These variables are:" +"and unconstrained execute permissions provide added security by stripping the " +"environment \n" +"that is inherited by the child program of specific variables. These variables " +"are:" msgstr "" #. help text - part y2 @@ -1744,7 +1822,9 @@ #. Widget activated in the table #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1145 -msgid "Include entries can not be edited. Select add or delete to manage Include entries." +msgid "" +"Include entries can not be edited. Select add or delete to manage Include " +"entries." msgstr "" #. Make sure that the entry doesn't already exist @@ -1757,7 +1837,9 @@ msgstr "Pasirinkite rinkmeną, kurią norite įtraukti" #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1335 -msgid "Invalid #include file. Include files must be located in one of these directories: \n" +msgid "" +"Invalid #include file. Include files must be located in one of these " +"directories: \n" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1379